JP2019193869A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: First game state setup means can set, as game states after termination of a privilege game executed by privilege game execution means, at least, a first game state, and a second game state that is more prone to execute a specific game state than the first game state. When a prescribed transfer condition is established in a state where the first game state is set by the first game state setup means, second game state setup means, without being triggered by the termination of the privilege game, sets the game state from the first game state to the second game state. When the second game state is set by the first game state setup means, advantageous state setup means set a first advantageous state and, when the second game state is set by the second game state setup means, sets a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening becomes a specific lottery result. is there. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of bonuses given to players as winning states. Thereby, when it became a hit state, the interest of a player was aimed at by making it expect the kind to which more privilege is provided.

JP 2003-320110 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a privilege to be given according to the type of winning is determined, there is a case where the player's motivation may be reduced when the winning type has few benefits. there were. That is, there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 provides a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. Special game execution means for executing an advantageous special game, and a specific game for executing a specific game different from the special game when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means and the first gaming state setting means, the end of the bonus game is terminated. The second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means that can be set by changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without using the machine, and the first gaming state setting means. An advantageous state setting means for setting a first advantageous state when the second advantageous state is set, and setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means; , Are provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display executing means for stopping and displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means after the dynamic display for a predetermined period, Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; The advantageous state setting means has the first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, and the first The second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set by using a second dynamic display period group different from the one dynamic display period group is set.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine has first entry means capable of entering a game ball, and second entry means different from the first entry means. The determination means executes a first determination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and performs a second determination based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. The dynamic display executing means is configured to execute a first dynamic display for indicating first identification information corresponding to a result of the first determination, and a first corresponding to a result of the second determination. The second dynamic display for indicating the two identification information can be displayed simultaneously, and the specific game executing means, when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result, A game is executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the second advantageous state indicates the second dynamic state for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. As a display, a dynamic display period shorter than the first advantageous state is set.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first gaming state setting means also sets a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The second advantageous state can be determined by determining that the third gaming state is set as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended, out of the specific determination result of the determination result of the first determination. A dynamic display period longer than the first advantageous state is set as the first dynamic display for indicating the result.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player when the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discrimination result. Bonus game execution means to be executed, specific game execution means to execute a specific game different from the bonus game when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result, and At least a first game state and a second game state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first game state can be set as the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the first game state is set by the first game state setting means and the first game state setting means, the game is not triggered by the end of the bonus game. A second gaming state setting means that can be set by changing the state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the first gaming state is set when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state and setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means. is there.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the dynamic display executing means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means after the dynamic display for a predetermined period of time, and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as periods, and the advantageous state setting means includes the dynamic display period group The first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the storage means, and a second dynamic display period group different from the first dynamic display period group And setting the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, it has a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the discrimination means has a game ball in the first ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, and the second determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. A first dynamic display for indicating the first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination and a second dynamic display for indicating the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination are simultaneously performed respectively. The specific game executing means executes the specific game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the second advantageous state, a dynamic display period shorter than the first advantageous state is set as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. It is what is done.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the third or fourth aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second advantageous state is determined by the determination of the first determination. The first advantageous display as the first dynamic display for indicating that the result is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended among the specific determination results. A dynamic display period longer than the state is set.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of the flow-path solenoid in 1 big hit, and the operation | movement of an opening-and-closing plate. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment and the jackpot determination value in a special symbol, (b) is 1st in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, (c) schematically shows the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change). It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening selection table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the avoidance period in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting effect in 2nd Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting | reporting effect in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the latency return effect in 2nd Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-short type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the first ball entering process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) And (b) is an enlarged view of the LXXVII part in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the time-measurement change of the time-measurement change of a flow-path solenoid, and the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method from one gaming state to another gaming state about three types of gaming states set to the pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are fluctuating in the variable display effect, and (b) is a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in case the reach production which suggests to a player that there is high possibility that it will be produced. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the state from which the result of the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol was removed in a normal state or a probability variation state, (b) showed an example of a customer waiting demonstration screen. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation demonstration screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the symbol fluctuation | variation in a latent state, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case within 30 seconds after a fluctuation | variation display is complete | finished, c) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the case of 30 seconds after the end of the variable display. (A) is the figure which showed this latent state completion screen, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the result screen displayed after a latent state is complete | finished. It is the figure which showed an example of the resurrection effect which is a kind of the effect performed during a latent state. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normality typically, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for latent probability typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the usual figure fluctuation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the screen display selection table typically. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the standby command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is an additional effect C as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen in the case of performing. It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect D is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the demonstration display B screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. ) Is a diagram showing an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the special display A screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the special display B screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and jackpot type in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal use in 4th Embodiment (for less than 2 times after the end of latent probability), (b) is the table for normal use in 4th Embodiment ( It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content for 3-8 times after the end of a latent probability. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency in 4th Embodiment. It is. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in another example of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the fourth embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, (b) is during a winning game in the latent state (during a small hit game) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen of (). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content displayed when the superposition production D (refer the point D of FIG. 182) was performed during the special figure fluctuation | variation of a latent state, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the final production in a latent state. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning effect in a latent state. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition production | presentation table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning presentation table in 5th Embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning prize command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 5th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pending | holding notice effect is performed. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pressing-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display mode when a push-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the non-display aspect in a latent state. (A) is the figure which showed the display content when the remaining frequency of an actual latent state becomes 0 in a non-display mode, and (b) is a non-display mode. It is the figure which showed the display mode (pinch departure appearance appearance) when it is set and the number of remaining times of a latent state becomes a big hit in the state within 5 times. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the addition production | presentation selection table in 6th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the participation degree normal table in 6th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for low participation degree in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the table for jackpots in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down period table in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal use in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for special use in 6th Embodiment. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the reservation notice determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process during the superimposing effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process during the hold notice performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the additional effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the residual change frequency command processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the non-display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the fluctuation pattern selection in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent (second half) in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection 3 table in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd normal table (for after 3 times after the end of a latent state) in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press process in reach performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit mid press process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the completion | finish of a press performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the residual change frequency command processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press command process in reach performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the scroll change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the scroll non-change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot mid press command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control device in the example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character storage area in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the character storage area in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the storage area for symbol arrangement | sequences in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main controller in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 7th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 7th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent probability referred in the period in which the 1st latent probability state in 7th Embodiment is set, (b) is 7th. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent probability referred during the period in which the 2nd latent probability state in the embodiment is set. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112 a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special symbol jackpot types, “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the two types of “bonus A, B” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed in the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of jackpots C and D are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed by a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the lottery executed when the ball has entered the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery executed when the player enters the ball is referred to as the second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is changed. Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are four types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are reached, a special gaming state with 8 rounds (8 round jackpot) is entered. On the other hand, when “Big jackpot C” and “Big jackpot D”, both are in a special gaming state (15 round jackpot) with 15 rounds. Further, after each jackpot is over, as a value added after the jackpot, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the jackpot. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes a probability change switch 65e3 described later), the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) after the jackpot ends. When a special symbol high probability state is given, the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol hit probability increase state after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation ends 50 times. . On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased is the change of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Continue until 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high-probability state) means a gaming state in which a normal symbol hit probability is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at the time of one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol is in a “high probability state of special symbol” until the variation of the special symbol ends 50 times after the jackpot ends. The probability change period of the special symbol is not limited to 50 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, if a big hit is made and the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the state shifts from the “normal state of the normal symbol” to the “short state of the normal symbol”. In this case, the set “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation display is completed 100 times. If the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the 100 special symbol lottery after the special symbol jackpot, the game returns to the “normal state of normal symbols”.

  If a new jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased by 50 or 100 special times after the end of the new jackpot. This is continued until the symbol display is finished.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery that is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbols corresponding to the jackpots A to D) (1st design) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A second entrance 640 into which a sphere can enter is disposed on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, You can enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is basically necessary to flow down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed).

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed in the upper right of the second entrance 640 in front view, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65. The game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 flow down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of the big hit. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, in the 1st round of jackpot, the period when a ball | bowl can enter into the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), and a ball | bowl are a special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is made different depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type.

  More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the door 65f1 in the first round of jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after starting the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. Thereby, the period in which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, it is possible to play a game with a big hit paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2, so that the game with a big hit becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first entrance 631 side. It is comprised so that. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while keeping the right hit state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and the game method to the left strike immediately after the big hit game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Yes. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the switching member 65 h is in the range of 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after the jackpot start and in the range of 3.5 to 5.5 seconds. Actuates, and the flow path leading to the probability change switch 65e3 is allowed to pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 for one ball prize). Award balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of jackpot is variable depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state and the period during which the special discharge channel 65e2 can flow down is varied. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the time change of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the opening A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the big hit. That is, before the big hit starts, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This OFF state continues for 0.5 seconds after the jackpot starts (becomes the opening period). And when 0.5 second passes from the start of jackpot, a flow path solenoid will be set to an ON state only for 0.2 second. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

  When the 0.2 second ON period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again. This period of off state continues until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the setting of the off state). When the period for turning off is elapsed, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state again for 2 seconds (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass), and thereafter, the flow state solenoid 65k is kept off until the big hit ends. Be drunk.

  Also, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when opening A is set, when a big hit is started, one round of big hit is started after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, the open / close plate 65f1 is set in an open state until 10 seconds have passed in the special winning opening 65a or one second has elapsed since the start of one round. Is done. Since it is difficult to enter 10 balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, the open / close plate 65f1 is basically opened for 1 second in the first round of the big hit. When one round is completed, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and an interval period is set. Thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of jackpots, the open / close plate 65f1 is set in an open state until ten balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a or until 30 seconds have passed since the round started.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when opening A is set, the start timing of one round of jackpot coincides with the start time of the ON period of 0.2 seconds for the flow path solenoid 65k. However, since a time lag occurs until the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is reached in 0.2 seconds when the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state. It is difficult to advance the gas to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the sphere cannot reach the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that after the jackpot, a low probability state of a special symbol is basically set. Even when opening A is started, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a simultaneously with the start of one round and the ball has flowed down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h Thus, the sphere can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 before the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the player will shift to the probability change state of the special symbol.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when opening B is set, when the big hit starts, after a 3.5 second opening period, one round of big hit is started and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. The This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated in the same manner as the jackpot in which the opening A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of jackpot coincides with the start time of the ON period of 2 seconds for the flow path solenoid 65k. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Therefore, if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot. It is possible to shift to a certain change state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and the ease of shifting to the probability change state varies depending on the set opening type. Note that the opening type is selected based on the jackpot type or the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, opening A is set when jackpot B or jackpot D is set in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol), and jackpot A or jackpot C is set. In such a case, the opening B is set. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, while when the big hit A or the big hit C becomes, it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the jackpot type, it becomes easier or more difficult to shift to a special symbol probability changing state, so that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the game is shifted to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the big win, so that the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 12A). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number falls outside the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12A). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first per random number table for the high probability ( FIG. 12 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “10/400”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery is a big win and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. Become. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit C”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot D”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined based on the special symbol type and the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 13A, the variation pattern table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a release (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) is set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Further, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are within the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 149”, and various types of outreach are within the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table matches, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12C, when the normal symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value that hits the normal symbol, and the hit is “0”. This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is “0”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). And the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only once for "0.2 seconds x 1" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “O” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is released “one second × three times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only “three times per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 32), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data described above, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table 202e is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, only “0” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 jackpot determination values “1 to 10” in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol are defined. Judgment value is defined. A special symbol when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A). Is determined to be a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This jackpot A is a jackpot of 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the opening B is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round).

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” is a big hit with 8 rounds, like the “big hit A”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this “big hit B”, if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), an opening A is set (that is, the ball turns the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning time is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, when the big hit B is in the normal state, it is difficult to shift to the probable change state after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the case where the big hit A is in the normal state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), for the second special symbol, the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit C”. ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the opening B is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected in the case of winning the first special symbol lottery, and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, jackpot C is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, “big hit D” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”. This “big hit D” is a big hit with 15 rounds, as in “big hit C”. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big hit D” is set to opening A if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) (that is, the ball turns the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning time is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). If the “big hit D” is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large as in the case of the “big hit C” and the ball can easily pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. It is advantageous for the person. On the other hand, when winning in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that in the normal state, it is disadvantageous to the player as compared to “big hit A” and “big hit C”.

  Note that the opening A is set when “big hit D” in the normal state is an irregular game in which the ball is launched (right-handed) aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state. This is to suppress the method. If it is configured so that the opening B is set even in the normal state when the “special bonus D” is obtained in the second special symbol lottery (that is, if the big special is drawn in the second special symbol lottery, If it is configured so that it can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 regardless of the state), the big hit B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to shift to the probability change state is set). There may be a player who thinks that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set in the case of a big win than the lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the big special symbol wins in the normal state, the lottery is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the same manner as in the case of the above, the opening A is set at a rate of 50%, which is difficult to shift to the probability change state. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the irregular gaming method that attempts to improve the entry rate in the probability variation state by executing the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

  In this embodiment, the opening B is set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. However, the opening A is also set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. You may comprise. Thereby, even in a normal state, it is possible to further increase the deterrence against an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed strike is always made in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 12C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “0” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Note that details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot when the jackpot is won. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, an opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, as an opening type determined when the jackpot A, the normal state (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, and The opening B is defined in association with the normal symbol time-short state) and the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation state and normal symbol time-short state). That is, when the jackpot is A, the opening B that is easy to shift from the opening selection table to the probability change state is read and set regardless of the game state at the time of winning, which is advantageous to the player.

  As the opening type determined when the big hit B is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, and the opening B is associated with the short-time state and the probability variation state in association with each other. Therefore, opening B is set to facilitate the transition to the probability variation state when the jackpot B is reached in the short-time state or the probability variation state. However, if the jackpot B is reached in the normal state, the transition to the probability variation state is performed. An opening A that is difficult to perform is set. Therefore, a big hit B in the normal state is disadvantageous for the player.

  As the opening type determined when the jackpot C is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state in the same manner as the jackpot A. Also, as the type of opening determined when the jackpot D is reached, as with the jackpot B, the opening A for the normal state and the opening B for the short-time state and the probability variation state are defined in association with each other. Has been.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is used to switch the opening type based on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is reached. More specifically, opening A is set when jackpot B or jackpot D is set in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol), and jackpot A or jackpot C is set. In such a case, the opening B is set. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, while when the big hit A or the big hit C becomes, it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the jackpot type, it becomes easier or more difficult to shift to a special symbol probability changing state, so that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the game is shifted to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the big win, so that the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203o, a probability variation valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving / medium counter 203r, a big hit flag 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding). 4th area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 25, FIG. 27). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 29). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, as described above, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Thus, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and that the normal symbol is in the short time state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 50 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the value is subtracted by one (see S220 in FIG. 25). The probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

  The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  In addition, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 28). Specifically, in the normal symbol variation process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r are referred to. If any counter value is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability is used. If the normal symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the table 202c and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second per random number table 202c for low probability. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (see S514 and S519 in FIG. 28).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1311 in FIG. 36). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S1303 in FIG. 36). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present embodiment, when 0.5 second has elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.2 seconds, and when 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). The operation counter 203k is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, and is set to 2 seconds when 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203n described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a time required for the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when one preset round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203n has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1407 in FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, after the first round of jackpot with the opening A set, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the passage solenoid 65k is kept on for 2 seconds. Injustice that causes the sphere to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 can be suppressed.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the channel solenoid 65k is ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. After that, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, or from the lower side of the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a line or the like and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1411 in FIG. 37).

  The short / medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the short time state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is not set after the big hit game, the state shifts to the time reduction state where the number of time reductions is 100 times.

  The jackpot flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203s is a jackpot due to the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the jackpot flag 203s is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 25).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability change state flag 223e, a short-time state flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, The power-off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Yes. Each area stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and holds the variable effect held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b as a special symbol type. It is designed to manage every time.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol reservation ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The probability change state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is a probability change state of a special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing state based on the probability changing state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, changing the back surface type or the like) according to the determined gaming state is performed.

  The short time state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a short time state of a normal symbol. At this time, the short state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state based on the short-time state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, change of the rear face type or the like) is performed according to the determined gaming state.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when various effects (back surface type or the like) are selected. The effect counter 223g is formed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in a range of “0 to 199”, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which an effect mode to be determined is defined for each value of the effect counter 223g. By using the effect counter 223g, various effects can be selected and executed at random.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. is doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to output data after designating an address in reading the data of the first page. There is.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 18B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 18C. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  In addition, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 19B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 20 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back face. First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the back image on the back E is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E shows the third image in a state in which the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a rear image shown in FIG. 20C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually turns white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20A is restored, and the back images of FIGS. 20A to 20C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20A, and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 20A and 20B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIGS. 20A to 20B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 20A to 20B) is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage change is determined by lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are used for normal use while the images in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, but for the resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is determined in advance for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type that is information for specifying the back image type is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time after the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change starts until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 is displayed in the third symbol. It is possible to specify the third symbol to be easily displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to each of the three symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is imposed on the startup and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable presentation images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the pachinko machine 10 can be created is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on user operations, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 55) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Once selected, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 45 (b)). ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 23, a back image used for an image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol display display). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 45 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 in FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 50 (a)). ) (See S3002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S2705 in FIG. 47A, S2705 in FIG. 48A, and S2805 in FIG. 48B). , See S2905 of FIG. With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2505 in FIG. 47A, S2705 in FIG. 48A, S2805 in FIG. 48B, FIG. 49 S2905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the first symbol display is performed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S203). . Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (of the first special symbol reserved ball number) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S206).

  In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S207), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S212 or S209, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the special symbol jackpot start is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S218, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and an opening command is set. (S1003). As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the process of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is 1 or more (S221). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process ends. Although not shown in the figure, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the process of S220 becomes 0, or when the value of the hour / middle counter 203r subtracted by the process of S222 becomes 0, Then, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed is set.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and includes the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S302). In the processing of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol has a low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A). As described above, ten random numbers “1 to 10” are set as the jackpots for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number for which these hits. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 12A) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value “0” stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the jackpot type is. . As described above, if the first special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (8 rounds big hit) If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big win, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the big win C (15 round big hit), If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (Variation time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first and second entrances 64 and 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or the ball has won the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It stores in the first area among the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), ends this process, and returns to the timer interrupt process. . In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display or the second entrance port performed in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the short time state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-short state, and the value of either counter is determined. If also 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during a special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is opened. This is because it is possible to suppress, as much as possible, the ball that is going to win the second specific winning slot 650 a to enter the second winning slot 640.

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, and the low Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “1-239”, it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 12C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S514). If the normal symbol is in a short time state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S515). ). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S519), and the normal symbol is in the short-time state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the short-time and middle counter 203r is 1). (S519: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short-time state (that is, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the short-time medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is off and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display being executed. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

  After the process of S814 is completed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S810 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 27) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the ball has won the specified number. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on. If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is finished, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83 is performed (S907). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S520 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 28) or the processing of S521, the second symbol display device 83 is set. The variable display is started at. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” are alternately turned on as the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 30 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S901. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: Yes), the opening category corresponding to the current jackpot type and the current gaming state is selected from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14). Determine (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when opening A is set as the opening type, it is difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, and thus it is difficult to set the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the ball easily flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the probability variation state is easily set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1007). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1007: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1008: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1008, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached when a special gaming state (all rounds of jackpots) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), an ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1010 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is performed. Execute (S1014). Details of the winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1014), an abnormal process is performed to determine whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been discharged normally (S1015). finish. Details of this abnormality process (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1012 that it is the jackpot end timing (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1013). Exit. The details of the jackpot end process (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1009). This jackpot operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening according to the number of rounds (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a). ) And the operation of the sorting rotator 661.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1102), and this process is terminated. To do. By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), it is possible to accurately set an opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1013). This jackpot end process (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end as described above.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1013), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 50. By doing so, the probability variation state of 50 times is set after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is ended from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / countercounting counter 203r updated in the process of S1202 or S1203. Setting is performed (S1204). Next, the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1205), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control in accordance with winning in the specific winning port (large opening) 65a.

  In this winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If the round is not valid in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the present is the round effective period (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203j and updated (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S1305), and if the round time has passed. (S1305: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. If it is determined in the process of S1304 that the value of the winning counter is 9 or less (S1304), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308). If the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), 1 is calculated from the value of the operation counter 203k. After subtraction (S1309), the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1308 that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1308: No), it is then determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 2 seconds) (S1318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to S1310, where the probability variation switch 65e3 is monitored and the probability variation setting flag 203h is updated. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of ball detachment. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being imparted by passing the ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to OFF (S1319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310). If the sphere has not passed the probability change switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and S1313 processing is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability change valid flag 203o is set to on (S1315), The process ends.

  Next, the abnormality process (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this abnormality process (S1015). This abnormal process (S1015) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether it has been performed.

  In the abnormal process (S1015), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1401). If it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the sphere has not passed the sphere outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the discharge number (the sum of the value of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203q) It is determined whether or not (value) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality that the sphere is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 54e3 during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the processing of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1411), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 37), the balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65, or the like. It is possible to detect and report the occurrence of a malfunction that occurs at an early stage.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S1616 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 39). ) Is determined during execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), it executes the power-off process in S1616. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1616, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1616, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the processing of S1505, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 in the processing of S1505 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 is performed in the state where the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is a case in which the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1616 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  After the processing of S1510, the probability variation state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are updated according to the notification contents of the state command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (S1511). . Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped since the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the process of S1508 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1509 is that if the process from S1504 to S1508 is reached via the process in S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, and thereby the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later are set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1605, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process proceeds to S1611. In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1613 that the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power supply interruption flag 223y and the power supply interruption processing flag are set to ON (S1615). The disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination processing (S1611) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). If it is determined in the process of S1701 that a variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1704 that a stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the first special symbol lottery) or the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). Also, in the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1708 ends, this process ends.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Thus, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e can be matched. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Even if the value deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected or the special symbol is drawn, and the first special symbol holding ball counter of the main controller 110 is corrected. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When the processing of S1708 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1707 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability change status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability variation state is notified based on the information corresponding to the gaming state (whether or not the probability variation state) is included in the state command, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the time reduction state is notified. If the normal state is notified, the probability changing state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are set to off. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1709 that a status command has not been received (S1709: No), then whether or not a jackpot related command (either an opening command, a round number command, or an ending command) has been received. Is determined (S1711). If it is determined that the jackpot related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot related command is determined, the jackpot related process for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1711 that a jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). If an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 ends, the main jackpot related processing (see FIG. 41) ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1803). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S1803: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1805, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the round number command has not been received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1806). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1807), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1806 that an ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this process ends. By executing the jackpot related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1612). This variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In this process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 in the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In step S1908, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the stop of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a low read speed especially when random access is performed, so the MPU 231 may directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 54A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 should display one frame to be displayed next. The content of the image is specified specifically. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 23, the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, back-and-forth losing reach, and back-and-forth losing) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2505), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the process of S2501. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the set variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, S2502 The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the above process, and the necessary sprite image data in the set fluctuation display data table is Character ROM 23 in advance From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display stop type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47B, details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front and rear outreach, reach other than front and rear outreach, complete out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The stop type table is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the display If there is a command opening command (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If there is a round number command for use (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48B, details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2413), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is determined. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits constituting the back image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3002). ), This rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the back face after the change is determined from each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is back B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2304), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3002 From this, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is performed to determine whether or not to change the rear surface type when the variable display is executed. Since the fluctuation display is set to a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, 2 is displayed in the command buffer area. The above rear image change command should not be stored, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. . In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2418), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2402 to S2418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. This is processing corresponding to each command by extracting only the type command. Processing that executes the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 47B), and discards other commands without executing processing corresponding to the commands. I do.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3202), S3203 to S3204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In the task processing (S2304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  In the process of S3205, a pointer update process is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3206 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S3209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the confirmed display data table is not displayed yet, and the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3210), and then the Null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the changing effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S3215 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on in the processing of S3209 (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demo is displayed as display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S3217), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  If the demonstration display flag 233y is on in the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the presentation time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 18B and 18C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S3602). In the process of S3602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3602 that the transfer process has not ended (S3602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, if the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the processing in S3705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the processing proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the rear image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the leading address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state. ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

  In the process of S3709, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S3709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  When the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the on state is a bit corresponding to the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the normal video RAM 236 is used. There is no image data to be transferred. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the bit in the on state is a bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “on”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3713 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed previously, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the front side from the sprite that should be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if the value is "0" and setting it to "0" if it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and it is easy to shift to a probability change state according to the set opening type (one big hit) Are different from each other). More specifically, an opening A in which the probability variation state is difficult to be imparted (the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is low), and a probability variation state is more easily imparted than the opening A (entrance into the special discharge flow path 65e2). The opening B having a high sphere ratio is configured to be settable. The opening type is selected based on the jackpot type or the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is reached. More specifically, the opening A is set when the jackpot B or jackpot D is reached in the normal state, and the opening B is set when the jackpot A or jackpot C is reached. Yes. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, the rate of entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the big hit becomes low (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), while the big hit A or the big hit In C, the ball entering rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is increased during the big hit (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that a big hit A or a big hit C with a high entrance rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 will be obtained.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to cause a game to be played in each gaming state in anticipation of a big win before the probability variation state or the short-time state ends. Accordingly, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension that it is necessary to win a jackpot in a limited number of special symbol lottery times (the number of times of probability change or the number of time reductions). In addition, as expected, when the big win is made within the limited number of lotteries, the opening B is surely set, so there is a sense of security that the transition to the probable change state is almost confirmed when the big win is reached. You can hold them.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state in the first round of the big hit, and the ball is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the road 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be arbitrarily determined. As a method of changing the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 using the opening A and B in rounds other than the first round, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round up to the round where the entrance is possible It is sufficient to keep the opening time of. That is, as in the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition for each round is defined as “until 2 seconds from the start of the round as a specified time, or until 10 balls have entered the specified number”. Just keep it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) where it is practically difficult to enter a specified number (10) of balls, each round is surely continued until the specified time elapses. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be defined in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine in a later round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, the player can have a longer sense of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probable change state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state, but the opening A is also set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. May be. Thereby, even in a normal state, it is possible to further increase the deterrence against an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed strike is always made in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening A that starts the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible to pass the sphere with respect to the probability change switch 65e3, and the period in which the sphere can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3. However, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the first round period may have an opening type that overlaps a part of the two seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state.

  In the present embodiment, two types of entrances, that is, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided. However, the entrance may be the first entrance 64 alone. That is, only the lottery of the first special symbol may be executed. Even with this configuration, since the opening B is set for both jackpots A and B in the probability variation state, it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance ball in the first round of the jackpot winning in the probability variation state. it can. By comprising in this way, since the 2nd entrance 640 can be deleted, a number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the opening type according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio that a high probability state of a special symbol is given for each gaming state (special for jackpot The entrance rate into the discharge flow path 65e2 is varied. More specifically, in the normal state, the probability variation state is given at 50% both when the first special symbol lottery is won and when the second special symbol lottery is won ( The opening B at which the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is increased is determined at a rate of 50%), and in a state other than the normal state, even if a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, Even in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation state is given 100% (the opening B that increases the entrance rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined 100%). As a result, even if the player accidentally enters the ball into the first entrance 64 in a state other than the normal state, and the player wins a big hit, the ratio of the probability variation state is given. It could be kept the same as the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the determined opening type, the type of the short-time state is also different. Yes. If the ball is passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 with the winning jackpot won in the normal state, a high probability state of a special symbol is given to the next jackpot in addition to the jackpot (that is, the jackpot is relatively It achieves a novel gameplay that lasts 3 times in a short time.

  More specifically, the game is configured to go back and forth between four game states (normal state, short time state, latent state, and probability variation state) with a big hit or the like as a trigger. Among these, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) and the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) are Since the high probability state is set, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again in a short interval, which is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) and short-time state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), the jackpot probability is low. So it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Of the two advantageous game states (latent probability state and probability variation state), the latent probability state is more advantageous for the player. That is, although details will be described later, when a big hit is made in the latent probability state, after the big hit, the latent state is basically set again or the probability change state is set. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. In addition, the rate at which the latent state is set again (latent state is looped) is higher than the rate at which the state changes to the probability changing state. On the other hand, when a big hit is made in the probability variation state, there is a case in which the state shifts to the short time state in addition to the latent probability state and the probability variation state. In addition, the rate of transition to the shorter time state is higher than in the other two gaming states. Therefore, the game state that is set after the big hit in the latent state is basically advantageous to the player, but if the big hit is in the probabilistic state, a time-short state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The ratio is high. Therefore, the latent state becomes a more advantageous state. Thus, in this 2nd Embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides the multiple (2 types) game state from which an advantageous degree differs, and diversifies a state transition and aims at the interest improvement of a player.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that, with respect to the game board 13, the special symbol lottery result is a part of the miss (small hit). A small-award winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter in the event that the ball has entered, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the main control The part process performed by MPU201 of the apparatus 110 is the point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, a small winning prize device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the first entrance 64 in front view. In a substantially central portion of the small hitting prize winning device 650, a horizontally long rectangular hitting prize winning port 650a through which a ball can enter the inside of the small hitting prize winning device 650 is provided. When the ball enters the small hitting prize winning device 650, ten prize balls are paid out. Also, the small winning prize winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the special symbol lottery result is “small hit” which is one mode of losing. This small hit is selected when the game is out of play in the latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol) provided as one of the gaming states in the second embodiment. It becomes easy to be done. In addition, since the small hit is an aspect of losing, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

  Although details will be described later, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, opening B is always set regardless of the jackpot type (probability switch 65e3 is easily connected to a sphere. This is the most advantageous state. However, since the normal symbol is in a low probability state, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the latent state, it is necessary to play a game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to make the first special symbol lottery. That is, it is necessary to play a game by the same game method as the normal state which is the most disadvantageous for the player. Under this circumstance, if the same control as the normal state is made until the big hit, the ball will be reduced until the big hit even though it has shifted to an advantageous latent state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, it is easy to make a small hit. That is, since the small hitting winning opening 650a is easily opened, it becomes easy for a ball that has left-handed and has not entered the first winning opening 64 to enter the small winning winning opening 650a. Therefore, the game in the latent state can be executed without reducing the possessed ball by the prize ball given by the entry. Note that the small winning prize winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been entered) every time a special symbol is drawn.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a firing direction notification effect will be described as an example of a display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. This firing direction notification effect is an effect for notifying the direction in which the player should launch a ball.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entrance to be aimed to make a special symbol lottery) differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state set to the low probability state of the normal symbol and the latent state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is lower than that in the short-time state, and the release period in the case of hitting is shortened, The fluctuation time of normal symbols becomes longer. Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is almost impossible to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. For this reason, in the normal state or the latent state, it is better to make a left-hand strike to enter the ball into the first entry slot 64 and execute the first special symbol lottery than to make a right-hand strike. It is advantageous for the player (the game can be played efficiently by reducing the consumption of balls).

  On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the release period in the case of being hit becomes longer, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, the player can draw the second special symbol without reducing the number of possessed balls by playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Can be executed. Therefore, in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the right strike than to the left strike.

  In the second embodiment, the launch direction of the ball, which is advantageous for the player, can be notified by the launch direction notification effect. By executing this firing direction notification effect, the player can easily understand the firing direction for efficiently playing the game, and can notify the player of the current gaming state. . That is, when the left strike is suggested, the gaming state is a normal state or a latent probability state, and when the right strike is suggested, the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current gaming state according to whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot and the content of the firing direction notification effect. In this embodiment, the firing direction notification effect is not immediately executed after the end of the jackpot, but until a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) execution of the firing direction notification effect. By configuring in this way, the player cannot specify the current gaming state at least until the specific condition is satisfied, so the expectation that an advantageous state is set is continuously maintained. You can hold them.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol display during the period from the end of the jackpot until the start of the firing direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no balls are in the left and right through gates 67). It is the figure which showed an example (avoidance effect) of the display mode displayed on the apparatus. This avoidance effect and the above-described launch direction notification effect are basically executed after the jackpot ends when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a display mode in a period (avoidance period) from when the jackpot is started until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. A balloon 714 is displayed on the right side. This balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the text “Aim at the through gate !!” is displayed inside. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball aiming at one of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13. The condition that “the ball passes through the through gate 67 for the first time” is set to the normal symbol, and until the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the right handing in the high probability state (short-time state) of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the left-handed in the electric symbol associated with the second entrance 640 by winning the normal symbol lottery. This is because 640a is opened and it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides, the normal symbols can be randomly drawn regardless of whether they are right-handed or left-handed. Until the ball hits the normal symbol, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. Therefore, in a period in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further improved by avoiding (delaying) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. Can last long.

  Next, with reference to FIG.58 (b), the display aspect of the launch direction alerting | reporting effect performed when a latent state is provided after a big hit is demonstrated. As described above, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the big hit, it is first detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the latent state, after the big hit, when the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, it is displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character “Lastly entered! Further, the display mode is set as if the pupil of the boy character 710 is burning. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state. Further, if the game can be performed efficiently by executing the left strike, the player can be easily recognized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), the display aspect of the firing direction alerting effect executed when the probability variation state is given after the jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the probability variation state, after a big hit, when a sphere first passes through the left or right through gate 67, it is displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character “Take right”. Further, the shape of the balloon 714 is a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. Thereby, it can be made a player recognize that it shifted to the probability change state which is disadvantageous rather than a latent probability state. Further, if the game can be performed efficiently by performing the right strike, the player can easily recognize it.

  As described above, in the normal symbol high probability state (time-short state), the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. For this reason, even if the launch direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed by passing through the through gate 67 by left-handed, and the normal symbol is hit, the variation of the normal symbol for 3 seconds By making a right strike, the ball can reach the second entrance 640 in accordance with the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released. Therefore, the expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time without damaging the player.

  In the second embodiment, the variation of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot continues to be executed after the jackpot ends, or the normal symbol held during the jackpot is suspended. In order to prevent (suppress) the reserved ball from being digested after the jackpot, the normal symbol variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is composed. With such a configuration, even if the through gate 67 passes through the jackpot, the fluctuation is immediately finished, so that it is difficult to store the normal design of the reserved ball. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the number of normal balls of reserved balls is zero, and the possibility of a variable stop state can be increased.

  If the normal symbol variation at the end of the jackpot is being executed or held, the player loses if the avoidance period is set even though the second entrance 640 is opened. End up. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that the holding ball of the normal symbol is present at the end of the jackpot is reduced. Thereby, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the launch direction notification effect is not executed until the first entry to the through gate 67 is detected after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, the firing direction notification effect can be executed more effectively.

  In addition to shortening the fluctuation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it may be configured to execute an ending effect in a mode that suggests to the player to stop the launch of the ball during the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation where the variation of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot is being executed or the variation of the normal symbol is being held, so the firing direction notification effect is executed more effectively can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the latent return effect that is one aspect of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This latent probability return effect is an effect that is executed when a transition is made from the probability changing state to the latent state without going through the jackpot. Here, the case of shifting from the probability variation state to the latent probability state without passing through the jackpot is a case where the number of time reductions set in the probability variation state is completed. Specifically, when a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Thus, the high probability state of the normal symbol is completed after 50 times. For this reason, after the probability variation state is set, if the big win is not reached until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability of the normal symbol) Probability state). The latent return operation is an effect that is executed at the time of transition from the probability changing state to the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latency return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to “latency probability”. The character changes to "Return! Left-handed !!" Further, the display mode is set as if the pupil of the boy character 710 is burning. This display mode allows the player to easily understand that the player has returned to the most advantageous latent state.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect based on having passed through the first through the through gate 67 provided in the left side of the game board 13 after jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect suggested to aim at the left through gate 67 during the avoidance period. With this configuration, when the game state after the big hit is a latent state, it is possible to cause the player to make a left strike that makes it easy to enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be performed efficiently. Even if the game state after the jackpot is in a probable state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left through gate 67 is a win, Even if a hit is made, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently until the electric accessory 640a is released is set, which causes a loss to the player. You can play without playing. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the ending effect of the aspect which suggests returning to the left-handed in the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being launched into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can make it more difficult to lose.

  Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only by passing the ball to the left through gate 67, not only the special winning opening 65a but the small winning winning opening 650a is opened in the final round of the big win. Good. By configuring in this manner, in the final round of jackpot, the player must make a left strike to enter the ball (winning) into the small winning prize opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 Can do. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the player more difficult to lose. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides not the through gate 67 but the exclusive entrance (the entrance for production) used as the trigger of execution of a launch direction alerting | reporting effect in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. FIG. Even when configured in this manner, the same effect as that of executing the firing notification effect with the passage to the left through gate 67 as an opportunity can be achieved.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hit random number table 202f and a time-shortening type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. It has been. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as in the first embodiment, a determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in this embodiment, eight types of jackpot types, "big hit E" to "big hit L", are provided. Among these, “big hit E to H” is a big hit type that can be determined by the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a big hit with eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types is configured such that the combination of the gaming state, the determined opening type, and the time-short state type set after the jackpot is different. The “big hits I to L” are jackpot types that can be determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types is also configured with different combinations of gaming state, opening type to be determined, and time-short state type set after the jackpot. This diversifies the pattern of game state traffic.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 24” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit E”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, “big hit E” The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the gaming state and the number of time savings given will be described later.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit F” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit F”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit F”. The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 89”, “big hit G” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit G”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit G” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Furthermore, “big hit H” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit H”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit H” The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot I is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hit I", so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "big hit I" The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit J” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit J”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit J” The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 89”, “big hit K” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit K”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit K” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit L” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit L”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit L” The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like. In this embodiment, the combination of the opening type determined using these eight types of jackpot types and the type of the short-time state set after the jackpot Are configured differently. This diversifies the pattern of game state traffic.

  Next, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot when the jackpot is won. .

  As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the short time state, and the opening B is set for the latent state and the probability variation state. It is defined in association. Therefore, if the big hit E is made in the normal state or the short time state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is in the latent state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, and the opening B is defined in association with the probability change state. Has been. Therefore, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot F is in the probable state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit G is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, and the opening A is associated with the probability change state. Has been. Therefore, if the jackpot G in the probability variation state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit G is in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, it is easy for a player to be given a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit H, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the short time state, and the opening B is defined in association with the latent state and the probability variation state. ing. Therefore, if a big hit H is obtained in a normal state or a short time state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot H is in the latent state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 61, the “corresponding jackpots I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol respectively define the same correspondence relationship as “big jackpots E to H”. Here, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, by changing the type of opening set according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio that the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is changed to the gaming state It can be varied accordingly.

  Next, the details of the small hit random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not a small hit is made when the special symbol is lost by lottery. A counter value (random number) that is a small hit for each gaming state. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, “0, 11 to 399” is associated as a counter value (random value) that is a small hit in the latent state. Of the 400 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, there are 390 counter values that are small hits, so if a special symbol lottery is executed in a latent state, the probability of being a small hit is 39 / 40 (390/400). For this reason, in the latent state, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the ball can easily enter the small winning prize opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state where it is necessary to make a left-handed game, a game can be performed without reducing the number of possessed balls by a winning ball that is given by entering the small winning winning opening 650a. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, it is possible to entertain the game without worrying about the holding ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the player's latent state. On the other hand, in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, there is no counter value (random number value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a special symbol lottery is performed, there is no small hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the time-saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. The short time type selection table 202g is a diagram showing the specified contents of the short time type selection table 202g at this time. The short time type selection table 202g is used for selecting the jackpot type and the number of short times according to the gaming state at the time of the big win.

  As shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are defined in association with the time reduction state, the latent accuracy state, and the probability variation state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot E is reached. As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the short time state, the opening A is set so that it is difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol. It becomes. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time-short state, the time-short state is looped. In addition, when the jackpot E is in the latent state and the probability variation state, an opening B that is likely to be given a special symbol high probability state is set, so the state after the big jackpot is a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol High probability state. That is, when the big hit E is obtained in the latent state, the state shifts to a probability change state that is less advantageous than the latent state. On the other hand, if the jackpot E is reached in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped. Further, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state (that is, 0 time reductions are set). As described above, when the big hit E is in the normal state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the big hit is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, when the big hit E is in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are defined in association with the probability variation state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot F is reached. As described above, when the jackpot F is in the probable state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, when the big hit F is in the probability variation state, the advantageous probability variation state shifts to an unfavorable time-short state. Therefore, if the jackpot F is in the probability variation state, it is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state, the time reduction state, and the latent state. As described above, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short-time state, and the latent state, the opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol, And it becomes a low probability state of a normal symbol. That is, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, the state shifts to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot G is reached, 100 times are specified in association with the time reduction state and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot G is in the short-time state and the probability variation state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol High probability state. That is, when the big hit G is achieved in the short-time state, the short-time state is looped, and when the big hit G is obtained in an advantageous probability change state, the state shifts to an unfavorable time-short state. In addition, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot is G in the normal state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, the normal state is looped. On the other hand, when the big hit G is in the latent state, the opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol and a low probability state of the normal symbol. Become. That is, when the big hit G is in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63, the number of time reductions given when the jackpot H is reached is defined in association with 20 times for the time reduction state. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the short time state, the opening A is set so that the special symbol high probability state is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol high probability state. It becomes. Therefore, when the big hit H in the time-short state, the time-short state is looped. On the other hand, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state, the latent state, and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot is H in the normal state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, the normal state is looped. In addition, when the jackpot H is in the latent state and the probability variation state, an opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol Low probability state. In other words, the most advantageous latent state is set when the big hit H is obtained in the latent state and the probability variation state.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 63, regarding “big hits I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as “big hits E to H” is defined respectively. Here, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings given after the jackpot is configured to differ according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Thereby, the advantageous jackpot type is varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, since the player can expect different jackpot types depending on the game state, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment of the subject has a winning state storage area 203t and an initial entry flag 203s in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. In addition, a probability variation flag 203u is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment.

  The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u indicating whether or not the probability variation state is in effect at the start of the jackpot, and the time-shortage counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time reductions are reset. For this reason, the state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (when newly setting the number of time reductions) cannot be specified from the respective values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / mid-time counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is won, the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / counter counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t and then reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). . At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of times saved is selected from the time-saving type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With this configuration, it is possible to accurately set the number of time reductions from the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a special symbol has a high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit after the big hit ends. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the number of times of probability change is limited to 50 times. However, in the second embodiment, the number of times of probability change is indefinite. Therefore, instead of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, the probability variation counter 203u is provided, and when the probability variation flag 203u is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and when it is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. It was. The probability variation flag 203u is set to ON if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the big hit (see S1211 in FIG. 69). It is also set off at the beginning of the jackpot.

  The initial entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not it is an avoidance period (a state where the first entry to the through gate 67 is not completed) set after the end of the jackpot. When the entrance to the through gate 67 is detected in a state where the initial entrance flag 203s is on, an initial entrance command is set from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 (FIG. 68). (See S612). The voice lamp control device 113 executes the launch suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) when this first ball entry command is received and the special symbol has a high probability state. . The initial entry flag 203s is set to ON at the end of the big hit (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF after setting the initial entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, any one of the normal state, the short time state, the latent state, and the probability change state is set when the jackpot is ended or when the number of time reductions is ended. The The normal state and the short-time state are disadvantageous for the player because the probability of a big hit is low. Among these, in the short-time state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and a right-handed game can be played efficiently, so the short-time state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are advantageous to the player because there is a high probability of being a big hit, and there is a high possibility that a big hit will be made continuously in a short period of time. Among these, in the latent state, the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, which is more advantageous to the player than the probability changing state in which the opening A is set in a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state becomes the most advantageous gaming state.

  First, the transition method of the game state in the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state that is set when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and is basically a gaming state that stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, there is a possibility that another gaming state is set with a jackpot as an opportunity. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and no short time period is given (see FIG. 63), the latent state is set after the big hit by passing the probability changing switch 65e3 during the big hit. On the other hand, when the other jackpot type (big hit E to H) that can be determined by lottery of special symbols is reached, the opening A that makes it difficult to flow the ball down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined (FIG. 61). (Refer to FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the jackpot. Even when the big hit F is obtained, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 because the ball is not launched in the first round or the like. On the other hand, even when the big hit E to H is reached, if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent state after the big hit.

  Next, a game state transition method in the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, there is a possibility that another gaming state may be set in response to the jackpot as in the normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and 50 short time periods are given. Therefore (see FIG. 63), the probability variation state is set after the jackpot by passing the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, it falls (rank down) to a state where the degree of advantage is small. On the other hand, when another jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H) is entered, opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but a short time period is not given (see FIG. 63). By passing through 65e3, the latent state is set again after the big hit. That is, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is looped. As described above, the latent state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit is made and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to, for example, not hitting the ball in the first round of the jackpot E, the time shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot. Similarly, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of jackpot F, G, H, it falls to the normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, a game state transition method in the probability variation state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probable change state, not only the game state is shifted to another gaming state as a trigger, but also the game state is shifted to another gaming state at a trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of times is reduced). . Specifically, in the case of a big hit J, K determined at a rate of 65% when a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, it is difficult to make the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and 50 or 100 time-saving periods are given according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 63), so the system basically shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when a big hit L is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but a short time period is not given (see FIG. 63), by passing the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the latent state is set after the big hit. That is, it is possible to return to the most advantageous latent state from the probability variation state with a low degree of advantage. In addition, in the probability variation state, if the set 50 short time periods can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is lost 50 times in succession), the latent probability state is the same as in the case of the big hit L. Can be restored. If it is possible to return to the latent state, the opening B is always set at the next jackpot, which means that the jackpot number is substantially increased by at least one. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, even if a fall from the latent probability state to the probability variation state is expected, the game is expected to return to the latent probability state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable state of the player.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and 50 short time periods are given. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is basically looped.

  Thus, in the probability variation state, it is advantageous in that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the short-time state, but when the jackpot hits, it shifts to the short-time state with a high probability (65%) and a low jackpot probability. End up. For this reason, in the probability variation state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the short-term period will end and return to the latent probability state rather than a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will be continuously lost in a lottery of special symbols. Also, when the jackpot J, K in the probability variation state, it is possible to shift to the short time state instead of transitioning to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that after the loop of the latent probability state and the probability variation state ends However, it can be made to think that the game will continue at least until the short time period ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the game state transition method in the short time state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the upper right part of FIG. 65, in the short-time state, in the same way as the probability change state, not only does it shift to another gaming state as a trigger, but also a trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of short-terms ends), etc. Transition to the gaming state.

  Specifically, when the jackpot determined in the second special symbol lottery becomes a jackpot J determined at a rate of 50%, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61). Not given (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is achieved in the short-time state, the state is basically shifted to the most advantageous latent state. In the time reduction state, when the time reduction period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is I, K, or L by lottery of the second special symbol during the short time state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61) and 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times depending on the jackpot type The short time period is set (see FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L won in the time reduction state, the time reduction state basically loops.

  In this way, when a big hit is made in the short-time state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the short-time state is looped, the short-time period set as the short-time state ends. Until then, at least the player can be reminded to continue the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Moreover, when it shifts to a latent state after a big hit, the player can have a great satisfaction.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, by changing the rate at which opening B is set according to the gaming state, the rate at which the high probability state of the special symbol is given according to the gaming state is changed. Yes. As a result, it is possible to provide a latent state where a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the jackpot ends. As a result, when the big hit F in the normal state shifts to the latent state, the big hit F, the big hit E in the latent state that shifts after the big hit F, and the probability change that moves after the big hit E A total of three jackpots with jackpot J or K in the state is guaranteed. Therefore, once in the latent state, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction due to the fact that at least three jackpot prize balls are guaranteed.

  In the latent state, the same state is looped with a high probability (75%) in the case of a big hit, so if the transition from the normal state to the latent state can be made, the big hit and the high probability of big hit It becomes easy to repeat the state. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a larger amount of prize balls to be obtained, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, even if the player has fallen into the probability variation state due to the big hit E in the latent probability state, if the disconnection can be continued 50 times in the certain probability variation state, the latent probability state can be restored. Therefore, since it can be expected that the discontinuity continues in the probability variation state, novel playability can be provided.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are the same. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern and the like.

  Of the variation start process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, in each process of S201 to S218 and S221 to S223, S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S221 to S223 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the process of S216 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. A small hit determination process for starting a win is executed (S231), and the process proceeds to S217. Details of the small hit determination process (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S217, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S217: Yes), the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / short counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process proceeds to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and set an appropriate short time period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the small hit determination process (S231) described above will be described. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current special symbol is a small hit (S241). In the process of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small winning prize winning opening 650a, the small hitting prize winning device 650 is set so that the ball can enter. After the process of S242, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small winning winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent state. Accordingly, since the ball holding can be improved in the most advantageous latent state, the player's motivation for the game in the latent state can be improved.

  Next, the through gate passage process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. This through-gate passing process 2 (S112) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29). 67 is a process for detecting the passage of a sphere to 67 and executing the corresponding control.

  Of the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, the processes of S601 to S605 are the same as the processes of S601 to S605 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the initial entrance flag 203v is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S611). That is, it is determined whether the avoidance period is set after the end of the jackpot, and if the initial entry flag 203v is on (if it is an avoidance period), an initial entry command is set (S612), and the initial entry The flag 203v is set to OFF (S613), and the process proceeds to S602. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the initial ball entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S602.

  The first entry command set by the processing of S612 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first entry command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the execution of the firing direction notification effect on the condition that the special symbol is in a short time state. After the jackpot is over, the game state set after the jackpot is a latent state or a probability change state by avoiding the execution of the firing direction notification effect until the ball passes through the through gate 67 for the first time. This can make it difficult for players to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that an advantageous latent state is set longer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) will be described. This jackpot end process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting the game state after the big hit according to the situation.

  Of the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, the processes in S1201 and S1205 are the same as the processes in S1201 and S1205 in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S1212 (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is OFF (S1201: No), the process of S1211 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1212.

  In the processing of S1212, the number of time reductions corresponding to the gaming state specified by the data stored in the winning time state storage area 203t is read from the time reduction type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time reduction medium counter 203r. (S1212). Next, a state command is set based on the probability change flag 203u updated in each process of S1211, and S1212, and each value of the hour / minute counter 203r.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the probability change state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1205 ends, the first ball entry flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and this process ends. Thereby, an avoidance period can be set after the end of jackpot.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 (S1621) executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination process 2 (S1621) is a process for determining a command received from the main controller 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the command determination processing 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in steps S1701 to S1709 and S1711 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1713 is executed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1709 that a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709: Yes), the contents of the status command are changed. A status command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process ends. Details of the status command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Furthermore, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1711 that a jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), the first incoming command is then issued. It is discriminated whether or not it has been received (S1722), and if the first pitching command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first pitching process for setting the effect according to the current gaming state is executed (S1723), This process ends. Details of the first ball entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the state command process (S1721) described above will be described with reference to FIG. When this state command process is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902). If it is determined in the process of S3902 that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), it is then determined whether the time reduction state flag 223f is on (S3903). If it is determined that the short time state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state notified by the current state command is a latent state (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the notified gaming state is the latent probability state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probability change state has returned to the latent probability state, so the latent probability return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (see (b)), the player is informed that the player has returned to the latent state (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the player has shifted from an advantageous probability change state to a more advantageous latent probability state, which can please the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is off in the process of S3902 (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223f is off in the process of S3903 (S3903: No), If it is determined in the process of S3904 that a gaming state other than the latent state has been notified (S3904: No), it is not a case of returning from the probability change state to the latent state, so the process of S3905 is skipped and the process is performed. The process shifts to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are updated in accordance with the state command notified from the main controller 110, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-described initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described. When the first ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time-short state flag 223f are read (S4001). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), this timing is terminated because it is not the timing for executing the firing direction notification effect. To return to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), it is then determined whether the short time state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the short time state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the current gaming state is a probable change state and the avoidance period has ended. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right strike (see FIG. 59 (a)), a display right strike effect command is set (S4004), and this process ends. The display right-handed effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts a firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 59A) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the right-handed effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223f is OFF (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is the latent state and the avoidance period has ended, so the firing direction Among the notification effects, in order to execute the effect of notifying the left strike (see FIG. 58B), a display left-handed effect command is set (S4005), and this process is terminated. The left-handed display command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display left-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 58B) in a mode in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the left-handed effect.

  As described above, by executing the first ball entry process (S1723), it is possible to notify an appropriate launch direction in which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of game states including two types of game states (probability change state and latent probability state) that are advantageous to the player. In the most advantageous latent state, it is configured to be able to shift to another gaming state only with a jackpot, and the transition destination is basically in a probable state. With this configuration, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, a high probability state of a special symbol will be set after a big hit at least twice consecutively, including the latent state, so a short period of time With multiple hits, you can make multiple hits. Therefore, since a large amount of prize balls can be acquired in a short period of time, the player's interest in games can be improved. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probability variation state is set again when the latent probability state is set again when the latent probability state is a big hit, or when the probability variation state is a big hit. It is set as the structure which provides. In other words, the number of consecutive jackpots in the latent state is varied depending on the player's luck. By configuring in this way, it is difficult to predict how many times the high probability state and jackpot of the special symbol will be repeated, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, even when the state shifts from the latent state to the low-advantage state, the latent portion is lost when a part of the big hit (big hit I) and a short time period have elapsed. It is configured to be able to return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it becomes an advantageous state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set again after a big hit at least twice in succession, so that the player can be pleased. Furthermore, in this second embodiment, in order to make it difficult to know which gaming state has been entered when the game is shifted to the latent probability state or the probability variation state after the big hit, the gaming state (ball launch direction) is changed. It is set as the structure which delays execution of the effect to alert | report (fire direction alerting effect) rather than the time of the end of jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is over, until the first pass through the through gate 67, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided, and when it is first detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, It is set as the structure which performs the launch direction alerting | reporting effect of the aspect according to a state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more unclear whether it is in the latent state or in the probable state. Can be performed.

  Further, when the opening A is set (that is, disadvantageous) in the probability variation state (ie, the jackpot J, K), a short time period is given after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state (latent probability state, probability variation state) of the special symbol is completed, it is configured not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the game is continued at least until the short time period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the short time state, it is basically configured not to fall to the normal state. That is, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the time-short state is basically looped or shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the short-time state is looped, it is possible to make the player think that the game is continued at least until the short-time period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the state shifts to the latent state, the player can have a great satisfaction.

  In the second embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by a special symbol lottery in the latent state is increased, and the hit often occurs. Thereby, the ball holding in the latent state is improved and the player's motivation in the latent state is suppressed from being reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, a jackpot type with a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, if the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the latent state is a big win, the second special symbol that is likely to be executed in the probable state while the 15th round is likely to be determined. In the lottery, it is possible to make it easy to determine the 8-round jackpot. With this configuration, in the latent state, it is easy to decrease the number of balls held by left-handed hitting, but the probability of a big hit is high, and if a big hit is achieved, more prize balls can be acquired. It can be advantageous for the player even if the badness is taken into account. Furthermore, by configuring the 15th round to be easily selected in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to allow the player to select a gaming method for making a left strike in the probability variation state. In other words, in a probabilistic state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long, a right-handed hit makes it possible to aim for a big hit of 8 rounds without reducing the holding ball. By left-handed, the ball holding will be worse, but it will be easy to get 15 rounds if hit (high profit if hit with a small number of lotteries, but may lose if continued to lose) ) The game can be selected by the player. Thereby, the game according to each player's taste can be provided.

  In the second embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot continues until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which restricts the frequency | count of probability change to 100 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension even in an advantageous latent state or probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. In the second embodiment, the normal symbol time-shortening period is set to 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where a time-short period continues until it becomes the next jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol may continue together until the next jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the first control command is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the first input to the through gate 67 is detected. . The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the first entry command is configured to execute the firing direction notification effect according to the gaming state when the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state. I can't. For example, when the main control device 110 discriminates to the gaming state and executes the firing direction notification effect (after passing the big hit, the passage of the through gate 67 is detected first, and the gaming state is a latent state or a probability change) The first entry command may be output only in the case of a state). Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Moreover, the output frequency of the first entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a ball passes through the through gate 67, and whether or not the sound lamp control device 113 is the first pass. The current gaming state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the firing direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not it is the first time on the main control device 110 side, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first entry flag 203v and the processing of the main control device 110 is performed. The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent state or the probability variation state is set after the big hit, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67. The execution condition is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect when it hits a normal symbol, and a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | presentation effect when a ball | bowl passes the through gate 67 predetermined times (for example, 3 times). It is good. Also, by combining these, a firing direction notification effect is executed when either a normal symbol is hit or a ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It is good also as a structure. In addition, for example, after a big hit, a firing direction notification effect corresponding to the gaming state may be executed after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Further, for example, instead of providing an avoidance period, as a mode of launch direction notification effect, after a big hit, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the direction to fire. Also good. Here, the aspect in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, for example, is an aspect in which characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed as fine characters, and the characters are enlarged over time. Even in the case of these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the state is a latent state or a probability change state, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's sense of expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time. .

  In the second embodiment, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided (delayed) as an effect during the avoidance period. The production mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, notification may be given so that the left gate is aimed at the through gate 67 regardless of the gaming state. By configuring in this way, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is prevented (suppressed) that the first special symbol lottery is not easily executed by making a right-hand hit during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, even if left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol is hit. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left strike during the avoidance period, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently regardless of whether the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state.

  In the second embodiment, a latent state and a probability change state are provided as advantageous gaming states, and the latent state is set to the most advantageous state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, the time variation period is provided at a rate of 75% (that is, the probability variation state easily loops). To be configured). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot is J, K, L (allocation 75%) in the probability variation state, an opening B is set and a short time period is given, resulting in a jackpot I (allocation 25%) In this case, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given (shift to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent state, the opening A may be set with a majority of jackpot types (for example, at a rate of 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpot F, G (allocation 65%), an opening A is set and a short time period is given (that is, it falls to the short time state), and the jackpot E (allocation 25) %) Is configured such that opening B is set and a short time period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped), and in big hit H (sort 10%), opening B is set and a short time period is set. You may comprise so that it may be provided (that is, it returns to a probability change state). With this configuration, the probability variation state can be set to the most advantageous gaming state, contrary to the second embodiment. Moreover, in this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect which alert | reports left-handed in the avoidance period after transfering to a latent probability state or a probability change state. By configuring in this way, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is prevented (suppressed) that the first special symbol lottery is not easily executed by making a right-hand hit during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, even if left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol is hit. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left strike during the avoidance period, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently regardless of whether the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state. Furthermore, when a right-handed strike is notified when a ball enters the through gate 67, it means that the state has shifted to the most favorable probability change state (or looped). Then, by making it think that it has shifted to the latent state (or looped), it is possible to amplify the joy of the player shifting to the state of probability change (or looping).

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 for the first time, it is determined which game state of the latent probability state or the probability variation state has been shifted by the firing direction notification effect. Although it is set as the structure which alert | reports with respect to a player, the alerting | reporting timing of a gaming state is not restricted to this. For example, when passing through the probability change switch 65e3, a gaming state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted and notified from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t. Thereby, a game state can be notified to a player at an early stage. Further, for example, a configuration in which a gaming state after a big hit is notified during execution of a predetermined big hit (for example, the eighth round) or a big hit ending effect may be adopted.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the firing direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect based on having passed through the first through the through gate 67 provided in the left side of the game board 13 after jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect suggested to aim at the left through gate 67 during the avoidance period. With this configuration, when the game state after the big hit is a latent state, it is possible to cause the player to make a left strike that makes it easy to enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be performed efficiently. Even if the game state after the jackpot is in a probable state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left through gate 67 is a win, Even if a hit is made, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently until the electric accessory 640a is released is set, which causes a loss to the player. You can play without playing. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the ending effect of the aspect which suggests returning to the left-handed in the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being launched into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can make it more difficult to lose. Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only by passing the ball to the left through gate 67, not only the special winning opening 65a but the small winning winning opening 650a is opened in the final round of the big win. Good. By configuring in this manner, in the final round of jackpot, the player must make a left strike to enter the ball (winning) into the small winning prize opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 Can do. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the player more difficult to lose. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides not the through gate 67 but the exclusive entrance (the entrance for production) used as the trigger of execution of a launch direction alerting | reporting effect in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. FIG. Even when configured in this manner, the same effect as that of executing the firing notification effect with the passage to the left through gate 67 as an opportunity can be achieved.

  In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but is not limited to this. For example, the short time state may be more advantageous than the latent state. More specifically, for example, it is configured such that the difference between the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is reduced (for example, 1/50 at the low probability, high probability) Time is 1/49). If the first special symbol is a lottery, the percentage of winning jackpot types with a small number of winning balls can be increased (for example, the number of rounds is “big hit α”, “big hit” β ”can be determined), and in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, so that the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that can win a large number of winning balls is increased (for example, the number of rounds is 15 rounds of “big hit γ” and “big hit δ” can be determined). Then, in the normal state in which a left-handed game is played and “big hit α” is reached, opening A is set, and 100 short time periods are set. That is, it is configured so that it is easy to shift to a time-saving state in which a jackpot type that can acquire a lot of prize balls is easily determined (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed). On the other hand, when “big hit β” is obtained in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so that it is easy to shift to a latent state where a big hit type with few award balls is easily determined (the first special symbol lottery is easily executed). Further, in the short-time state in which a game is played by right-handed, an opening A is set when “big hit γ” is reached, and a short-time period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time-short state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time reduction state becomes “big hit δ”, the opening B is set, and 100 time reduction periods are given. That is, it is configured such that a relatively advantageous probability change state in which a game is played with a right hand is easily set. As a result, when a big hit is made in the short-time state, the short-time state or the probability variation state in which a right-handed game is basically performed is set, which is most advantageous for the player. Further, when “big hit δ” is obtained in the probability variation state, an opening B is set, and 100 short time periods are given. That is, a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played with a right hand is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when “big hit δ” is obtained in the probability variation state, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so that an unfavorable latent state in which a left-handed game is played is easily set. As a result, the probability variation state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, but since it may shift to an unfavorable latent state after the big hit, it is less advantageous than the short-time state. Can do. Further, when the game is left-handed and the game is “big hit α” in the latent state, the opening A is set and 100 short time periods are given. That is, it is configured to be able to shift to the most advantageous time-short state. On the other hand, when “big hit β” is obtained in the latent state, the opening A is set, and the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured such that an unfavorable normal state in which a left-handed game is played is easily set. As described above, the short-time state can be most advantageous by changing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the combination of the game state, the opening type, and the correspondence between time and short-term. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a player can be pleased by shifting to a time-short state rather than shifting to a probability change state or a latent probability state that is generally advantageous. . In addition, in the normal state or the latent state unfavorable to the player, when the opening B is set to the big hit, it is configured not to be given a short time period. An anomalous gaming method that aims to shift to a short-time state without intentionally launching a ball with the eyes can be fundamentally disabled. More specifically, assuming that the opening B is set to be a jackpot and a short time period is given, only a short time period is set after the jackpot by deliberately not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. The most advantageous time reduction state is set. In other words, if an irregular gaming method is performed when a big hit is made in an unfavorable state, there is a problem that the time-saving state is surely set. On the other hand, when opening B is set, it is configured not to give a short time period, so that even if an irregular gaming method is performed in the first round, only the normal state is set, The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method.

  Further, in the case where the short time state is the most advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state may not be provided. In other words, the game state transition method in the normal state or the latent state may be left as it is, and when the big hit is made in the short time state, the time state may basically be looped or may be shifted to the latent state. More specifically, the opening A is set when the “big hit γ” is obtained in the time-saving state, and 100 time-saving periods are set. That is, the most advantageous time-short state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when “short hit δ” is reached in the short time state, the opening B is set, and the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to an unfavorable latent state. With this configuration, even if the player does not deliberately launch a ball in the first round when the player hits a “big hit δ” in the short-time state, the player does not shift to an advantageous state (the short-time period Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method that does not intentionally launch a ball in the first round. In other words, irregular gaming methods can be suppressed in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent state, and the short time state. Also, since the short-time state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the short-time state rather than shifting to the latent state that is generally advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel gameability that can be done.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent probability state or the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, it is good also as a structure which provides the case where a firing direction alerting effect is performed immediately after the end of jackpot, and the case where a firing direction alerting effect is performed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set may be higher when the latent state is set than when the probability variation state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for a more advantageous latent state when the avoidance period is set.

<Variation of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it was set as the structure which goes back and forth in four game states, a normal state, a time-short state, a latent probability state, and a probability change state.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, three game states of the normal state, the short time state, and the probability change state are used. In the probability variation state, a loop is performed when a big hit is made, or an advantageous time-short state is set compared to the normal state. In addition, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the time-short state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is looped, or the most advantageous change state is restored in this modification. By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state and the short time state, even if a big hit is made, there is basically no transition to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the game can be performed with peace of mind.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a game state transition method in a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, when the jackpot F is won in the first special symbol lottery (and the jackpot J is won in the second special symbol lottery), the probability change state is substituted for the latent state. Except for the transition to, the gaming state transition method is the same as in the second embodiment. In other words, when the jackpot F in the normal state (and the jackpot J), the time-shortening type selection table 202g basically gives a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the opening B is set even though the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set, the time-saving type selection table so that 100 time-saving periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  Even in the short-time state, if the jackpot J is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (and if the jackpot F is lottery in the lottery of the first special symbol), it shifts to the probability changing state instead of the latent probability state. The game state transition method is the same as that of the second embodiment. That is, when the jackpot J (and the jackpot F becomes a big hit F) in the short-time state, the short-time type selection table 202g basically gives a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. Note that if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 even though the opening B is set even though the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set, the time-saving type selection table so that 100 time-saving periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  In the probability variation state, the most advantageous probability variation state is obtained when the jackpot J, K, L is obtained in the second special symbol lottery (and the jackpot F, G, H is achieved in the first special symbol lottery). It has been changed to loop. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set in any case when the jackpot J, K, L is reached in the probability variation state (and the jackpot F, G, H is reached). . Further, if the jackpot is J, K, or L (and jackpot F, G, or H) and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set. , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H), and if the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, the time-shortening type selection table 202g is changed so that 100 time-shortening periods are set. Has been.

  In addition, in the probability variation state, when the jackpot I is won in the second special symbol lottery (and when the jackpot E is lottery in the first special symbol lottery), the state shifts to the short-time state. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set when the jackpot I is reached (and the jackpot E is reached) in the probability variation state. When the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is passed and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is set, and the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. When the sphere does not pass, the time reduction type selection table 202g is changed so that 50 time reduction periods are set.

  In this way, the game state transition method shown in FIG. 73 can be used, and the probability variation state can be set to the most advantageous state among the three states of the normal state, the time reduction state, and the probability variation state. And when it is a big hit in the probability variation state, it can be configured to basically loop the probability variation state or shift to the time reduction state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most adverse normal state when an unfavorable jackpot (big hit I) is obtained in the probability variation state, so that the player's motivation for the game is reduced when the probability variation state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately (so-called instant mess). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the state is returned to the probability variation state or the time-short state loops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress falling to the most disadvantageous normal state when an unfavorable jackpot (bonus I, K, L) is achieved in a short time state, so when the probability variation state ends Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced and that the player immediately quits the game (so-called instant mess). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As described above, the modification of the second embodiment is configured to shift to the time-saving state when the jackpot type is disadvantageous in the probability variation state or the time-saving state. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the entrance opening provided on the board surface, and when a ball enters the specific area, Some of them are given a privilege game that is advantageous to the user. As for the award game, only the award game is given (the added value after the award game is not given), and the added value after the award game is advantageous to the player in the gaming state over the normal gaming state. There is a game provided with a second privilege game set in such an advantageous game state. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the entrance with a specific area inside, so once the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made, the privilege game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. This makes it very advantageous for the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous gaming state, the player falls down to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. Therefore, when the normal gaming state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when an advantageous probability change state ends, the fall to the most disadvantageous normal state is prevented, and a time reduction state that is relatively advantageous over the normal state is set. Since it becomes the structure which becomes easy, even if an advantageous probability change state is complete | finished, it can be made to think that a game will be continued until a time-short state is complete | finished. Therefore, since it can prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation with respect to a game falls, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment and the modification of the second embodiment, the advantageous jackpot type is changed according to the gaming state. However, the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type may be fixed. . More specifically, for example, jackpot F and jackpot J may be advantageous jackpot types, and other jackpot types may be disadvantageous jackpot types. In the normal state or in the short time state, it becomes a configuration that shifts to a latent probability state (probability variation state in the modified example) by becoming a jackpot F, J, and a configuration that loops the same state by becoming another jackpot type Also good. Further, in the latent state, a configuration in which the latent state is looped by hitting the jackpot F, J may be configured, and a configuration in which the state is shifted to the probability changing state by being in another jackpot type may be employed. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be configured to loop by hitting the jackpots F and J, and may be configured to shift to the short time state by becoming another jackpot type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an advantageous jackpot type and an unfavorable jackpot type are easily understood.

  In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the game state (latent probability state or probability variation state) that is advantageous in the case of a big hit in the short time state, or the short time state is looped However, the gaming state that is set in the case of a big win in the short time state is not limited to this. For example, an opening B may be set whenever a big hit is made in a short time state. In other words, it may be configured to be able to always return to an advantageous gaming state by winning a jackpot before the short-term period elapses. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more strongly expect a big hit before the time-short period elapses, so that the interest of the player in the time-short state can be further improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the variable prize winning device 65 is provided with the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, and passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the big hit. In this case, a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol is given, but this is not a limitation. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not a special symbol high probability state is given after the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, instead of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set by referring to this data table when the jackpot ends. It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, the same effects as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the same operation is set for the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type or gaming state. However, the opening period can be varied according to the jackpot type or gaming state. Instead of or in addition, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be varied according to the jackpot type or gaming state. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the above embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of design freedom can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the high probability state of the special symbol continues without limitation as long as it continues to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. However, a limit may be provided for the number of consecutive times. Specifically, for example, the number of times that the high probability state of a special symbol is set continuously is counted, and when the number of consecutive times reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times), the probability is changed with the next jackpot. The passage of the switch 65e3 is invalid (203h is not turned on even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, or the probability variation counter 203g or the probability variation flag 203u is not updated even if the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on). . In addition, a special gaming state is provided in which the flow path solenoid 65k does not change even when the jackpot is reached (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is not opened during the jackpot), and the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol is a specific number of times. When it becomes (for example, 5 times), it is good also as a structure which transfers to the game state which the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate | move. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the high probability state of the special symbol from being excessively continued, thereby preventing (suppressing) giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game state (normal state, short-time state, latent state, probability variation state) is configured to go back and forth with a jackpot or the like. Among the four game states, the latent state is In order to be most advantageous to the player, when winning a jackpot in the latent state, the gaming state set after the jackpot is over, compared to winning the jackpot when other gaming states are set As described above, a game state advantageous to the player is easily set.

  In order to realize the technical idea that the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the configuration described in each of the above-described embodiments, that is, the transition rate of the gaming state set after the big hit is different. For example, the player may be configured such that a privilege (for example, a prize ball or the like) given to the player in the game when the latent state is set is maximized.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 149, as a third embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called) Furthermore, in order to make the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is more effective than the first special symbol lottery. The lottery is easier to win a small hit. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the latent state is set as the gaming state is configured to be shorter than when the other gaming state is set. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, among a plurality of gaming states (normal state, latent state, probability variation state) that can be transferred with a jackpot or the like as a trigger, the latent state may be most advantageous for the player. it can.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 74, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, general prize The mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 670, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is formed. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by the router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 75) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 74) to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 74) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 74). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the third embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a winning is made in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the third embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the big hit probability is a normal state, and the big hit probability remains as it is, and only the second symbol hit probability is increased, and the second entrance. 1640 means a game state in which a ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 1640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 1640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the time of probability change and time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 1640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 1640a is released at the time and once the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is released. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the time of probability change or during a short period of time, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 or the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is released per time is not shown. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, The third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) for displaying the variation of the third symbol, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 projects into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 75). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 75) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so as to alternately turn on and off for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the third embodiment, the symbol “◯”). Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 1640a of the second entrance 1640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 1640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 1640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 1640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 670 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the third embodiment, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and You may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 1640 is disposed to the right of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 1640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made on the device 110 (see FIG. 75), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance where three balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball wins (enters), and the second entrance 1640 receives a winning (entry) ball. Then, one ball is one of the winning holes to be paid out as a prize ball. In the third embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 is different from the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 1640. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 1640 (for example, both 5 You may comprise.

  Further, the second entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a. The electric combination 1640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes to the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state) and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during normal change and during the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is shorter than that during normal variation. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. In addition, during the time when the probability is changing or the time is short, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where a ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball is won at the second entrance 1640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is greater when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 than when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 1640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 1640, and is in the state where a ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 1640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the left 64 (so-called “left-handed”), and a large winning lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is easily opened, and the second entrance 1640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 1640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”) and passes through the second through gate 67. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 1640a and aim to win the 15R probability variation by winning the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment allows the player to play the ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being prone to change, being short in time, or in the normal state). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper side of the second entrance 1640, and on the right side thereof, an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the variable winning device 65 when it is closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or five balls are won).

  The opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side with the opening / closing plate 65f1 preventing the entrance to the entrance portion (specific winning port 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). Normally, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the position above the second entrance 1640, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  In the present embodiment, the game board 13 has only one out port (out port 66). However, a plurality of out ports may be provided. For example, the right side area of the game board 13 ( For example, the second out port 66a may be provided on the right side of the second entrance 1640). With this configuration, it is necessary to provide a configuration (flow path) for causing the ball that has flowed down the game board 13 to flow toward one place (out port 66) in order to guide the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown). Therefore, the game area of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 2020 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 2020 is executed. A certain RAM 2030 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 2030 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 2030 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 2030 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off (including the time of power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the values of the registers are stored in the RAM 2030. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 2030. Writing to the RAM 2030 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 2030 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing rightward as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 2220 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 2230 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, a motor, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 149. In the third embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol), and a latent state ( Three game states are provided: a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the variation time of the variation display executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is made shorter than other game states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds). The normal symbol normal state (low probability state) and the normal symbol short-time state (high probability state) are configured so that the normal symbol hit probability is approximately equivalent (231/240 → 232/240). The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of winning the normal symbol is common (1 second × 2 times). Thereby, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second entrance 1640 rather than hitting the ball toward the first entrance 64 (so-called left-handed). (So-called “right-handed”) makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball will enter the second entrance 1640. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  In the third embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the special winning opening 65a is a predetermined period (1.648 seconds × 1 time, 0.06 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times) in a part of the losing. ) Opened. For this reason, even if it is not a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous over the lottery of the first special symbol because it gives a lot of opportunities to win the prize ball by entering the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the off-lottery result in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as “small hit”.

  In addition to the big win in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65a is opened even when a small win is achieved, thereby increasing the number of prize balls in a latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short Can continue to. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of a latent state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and the probability variation state, since the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, the frequency at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened due to a big hit or a small hit is a latent probability state. Compared to the drastically reduced. Therefore, in the normal state or the probability variation state, even if a right hand is made, more balls are used for the game than the prize balls. Therefore, it is more advantageous to perform left handing in the normal state or the probability variation state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state. However, in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  In the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the other variation display from being confirmed and displayed with the hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit starting in duplicate.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, the details of the variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76, the second through gate 67 is disposed on the right side of the center frame 86, and the variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. A ball may reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player makes a right strike. In FIG. 76, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided in front of the variable winning device 65 in front of the front view is deleted and illustrated. (CLXXIX part in FIG. 76).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b). 77 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detecting opening 65a1 configured with a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing plate 65f1 and in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). And variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening / closing plate 65f1, and a sphere can flow down the right side of the opening / closing plate 65f1. In the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to open toward the right of the front view by opening the opening of the specific winning opening 65a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 as viewed from the front, toward the second winning port 1640 side. It is configured to be induced. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, a game ball is entered into the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is possible to achieve the winning ball by making the ball enter the ball simply by making a right-hand hit. Accordingly, the player can play the game more easily in the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later. The structure to be described will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 77 (a), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 77 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left in the front view (the flow path side where the sphere flows down). It is a figure which shows the state which has block | closed the opening surface.

  When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the sorting channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and the switching member 65h prevents the special discharging channel 65e2 from flowing down. It is guided to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out spheres discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as out spheres from the normal discharge flow path 65e1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 77 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by operating the flow path solenoid 65k and immersing the switching member 65h rightward in front view. .

  As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the V pass switch 65e3 which is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is used as an out ball. It is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the sum of the out balls detected by the V passing switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit is a probable change state of the special symbol (the game state after the big hit is passed through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit game ( Probability change state or latent probability state). In other words, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a special symbol certain variation state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability state or the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. In this embodiment, the switching member 65h is operated for 4 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow that continues to the V-pass switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

  In this way, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the specific winning port 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection port 65a1, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball winning). 15 prize balls can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball detected by the detection port 65a1, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the V passing switch 65e3, so that whether or not to give a special symbol probability changing state. A lottery can also be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a special symbol probability changing state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one big hit and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot is made variable according to the jackpot type, thereby making it easy to flow the sphere down the special discharge flow path 65e2. In the third embodiment, two types of patterns are provided as the opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing plate 65f1 (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern that makes it easy to enter).

  FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the OFF state before one round of jackpot is started. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 77 (a)). This off state continues until one round starts. When the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 77 (a)). When the four-second on-state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again (the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1). To be kept.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the big hit C is reached, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. This open state continues only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until the elapsed time from the start of one round reaches 2.9 seconds. The opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again when 2.9 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round. This open state continues only for 0.1 seconds, and thereafter, the first round ends, and the open / close plate 65f1 is kept closed until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. In addition, one round in this embodiment is complete | finished when three balls pass after ten balls enter into the specific winning opening 65a or one round is started. Since it is very difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, when the jackpot C is reached, basically The big hit is completed without allowing the sphere to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state is not given after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3. Can be shifted to a special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot is over. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the probability variation state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the jackpot is A, B, or D to G, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started. In other words, an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round is set. Therefore, the V passing switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 3 seconds longer than the jackpot C. Accordingly, when the jackpot is A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  The ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k is longer than the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 by 1 second because the ball reaches the special winning flow path 65e2 after entering the specific winning opening 65a. This is because it takes 1 second at maximum. In other words, even if a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of jackpot flows in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to give a probability change state of a special symbol after the jackpot regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of shifting to the probable change state varies depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that an opening / closing pattern that is easy to shift to a probability change state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, a game state transition method in the case of staying in a normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game because the special symbol lottery frequency is likely to increase. This is because it becomes easier to enter the first entrance 64 when left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the small hits are not lottery. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to another gaming state only when a big hit is made. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 79, when the big hit A is determined at a rate of 32% in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the big hit is over, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) shown in the center of. In addition, in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), when the jackpot is determined in the ratio of 58% in the case of winning the lottery in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, Transition to the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). To do).

  As described above, in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the gaming efficiency is increased when the player makes a right strike, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so that the gaming efficiency when making a right strike is extremely reduced, and the gaming state becomes disadvantageous compared to the latent state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be performed in the expectation that the big hits B and D will be the opportunity to shift to an advantageous latent state.

  In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed, but the player intentionally hits the right and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. In addition, as a result of a part of the left-handed ball entering the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, it is common to all jackpot types (jackpots E to G), and after the jackpot is over, it shifts to the probability change gaming state ST2 (probability change state). When a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hit B, D), while the second in the normal state When the special symbol is won by lottery, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the disadvantage in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the normal state can be increased, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Further, as described above, even when the jackpot is A, B, D to G, when the ball cannot be passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot. The gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (loops the normal state). On the other hand, even when the most unfavorable jackpot C is reached, if the ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the probability variation state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game. It becomes. In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, which is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state), if it becomes a big hit, or if it falls out continuously over the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) after becoming the probability variation state, it will enter another gaming state Transition.

  Specifically, as shown in the center part of FIG. 79, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of the first special symbol lottery, the left side of FIG. Transition to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the jackpot B or D is determined in a ratio of 58% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability changing game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. Transition to (latent state). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the probability variation state is set again after the jackpot is ended (the probability variation state is looped). . In addition, when the number of special symbols lottery continues for a specified number of times (120 times) in the probability changing state, the game moves to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times have passed.

  In the probability variation state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery of symbols. In this case, the jackpot game state ST2 (probability change state) is looped after the jackpot is completed in common for all jackpot types (jackpots E to G). In the case of a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state at a rate of 58% (bonus B, D) as in the normal state, When a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the probability variation state, the irregular game can be suppressed.

  Next, a game state transition method in the case where the user stays in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be efficiently drawn by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike. In the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state), when the player is continuously out of the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times (120 times) after entering the latent probability state, a transition is made to another gaming state. To do.

  Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 79, when the latent state is set and the number of special symbols has been drawn continuously for a specified number of times (120 times), it will be normal after the specified number of times have passed. Transition to the gaming state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when a game is played with a right-hand hit (the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed) and the second special symbol lottery is executed and the big hit is made, the jackpot is basically (specified during the big hit) If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the big hit. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before it is disengaged 120 times in succession, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. The gaming state is extremely advantageous for the player. Although details will be described later, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. Since the probability of losing continuously 120 times in the 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), the ratio of winning a jackpot within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Accordingly, once the latent state is reached, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%.

  In the latent state, it is normal to play a right-handed game, so basically, a ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is not executed. When the player makes a mistake in the launch direction, or when the player moves to the latent state with the first special symbol holding ball remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed even in the latent state. A lottery may be performed. In this case, if it is a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, in the latent state, when the big win C (allocation 10%) is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is entered after the big win. On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit A, B, D, the latent state is set again after the big hit.

  Unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the latent state is set even after the jackpot A is over, because the first special symbol holding ball accumulated before the transition to the latent state is performed. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to an unfavorable probability change state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and the jackpot is made. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, the first special symbol that was put on hold will be a big win, and if it shifts to the probable state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without receiving the benefits of the latent state. Since it falls, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous latent state, the ratio of looping the latent state after the big win is higher than the normal state or the probability variation state. It is set as follows. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is immediately won after the shift to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation to a game falls.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 80 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is attached to the rear symbol imitating an elephant, and a numeral “2” is assigned to the rear symbol imitating the lion.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the symbol columns L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed on the left, middle, and right three rows for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 84). ). It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player can clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In the third embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols in a simple form composed of only numbers “1” to “9” are displayed. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers. Note that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the special symbol variation display that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is referred to as the main variation). A variation display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular gaming method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed by a special action of the reserved symbol or the appearance of another character.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 can be suspended. Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81 (a), (b), the 3rd symbol fluctuation display effect (fluctuation pattern effect) in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are changing in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is changing, each symbol row is scroll-displayed (variable display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol lottery has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be performed in anticipation of becoming a jackpot stop symbol after the end of the variable display effect (a main symbol having the same number is aligned with any of the effective lines V1 to V5).

  FIG. 81 (b) shows an example of the display contents when a reach effect is generated that suggests to the player that the jackpot stop symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed in the variation display effect of the third symbol. FIG.

  Here, the reach is a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variably displayed, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. Is a state in which the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed, and it is suggested that the main symbols with the same numbers are chances to be aligned on the effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (b), two main symbols with the number “1” attached on the effective line V4 are stopped and displayed, and the number “2” is attached on the effective line V5. This shows a state in which two main symbols that are displayed are stopped. In this case, since the main symbol having the number “1” or “2” attached to the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is stopped. Can be expected to be.

  When the upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and reach is generated, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the characters “reach!” Are displayed above the changing middle symbol row L2. . By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player more reliably recognize the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation production in which the reach has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the special reach effect which is a kind of reach effect performed with the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. This special reach effect is executed once the effect (temporary stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol sequences L1 to L3 were stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment. Reach of a special mode in which a different symbol sequence is newly displayed and reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol sequence and a part (two) of the symbol sequences L1 to L3 that are stopped and displayed. Production. This special reach production is selected as part of the reach production, and is set to have a higher expectation level than the normal reach production (it will be difficult to select if the special symbol lottery result is out). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with a stop symbol out of reach without being reached. In this case, a stop symbol of a combination that reaches the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped when another symbol row exists further above the upper symbol row L1. The In the example of FIG. 82 (a), the main symbol with the number “1” is displayed on the middle stage of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. In other words, if a symbol row exists further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol “1” attached to the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number “1” is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are aligned on a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in the special reach production, there are a plurality of modes other than the mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers attached to the right are arranged on the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle stage of the middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, a mode in which main symbols having the same numbers on the left side, the middle row, and the right side are arranged in the vertical direction, the middle row of the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol, A mode is also provided in which the main symbols having the same numbers attached to the right side of the row L2 are arranged in an upward direction.

  In the special reach production, after the third symbols of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, the third symbols displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 82 (b). Of the symbols, the main symbol changes to look up. By changing the aspect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the current variation display effect has not ended.

  After each main symbol has been changed to look up, the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted in the direction of looking up each main symbol (upward) as shown in FIG. 83 (a). Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 that is changing is displayed at the end of the shift (a new symbol row L4 is framed in). Accordingly, the lower symbol row L4 is out of frame from the screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and “1” displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. The reach state is configured by the main symbol to which numbers are attached and the main symbol to which the number “1” is displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol to which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the numeral “1”) is changed to a mode in which the aura is put together, and the character “Leach!” Is displayed above the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number “1” on the right side is stopped and displayed when the variation of the new symbol row L4 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number on the new effective line V6 is displayed. Since all three are (it will be a jackpot stop symbol), it can be clearly suggested to the player that it is a chance to win a jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach occurs after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment. ing. As a result, even when the stop display is made in a combination of detachment, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed in anticipation of developing into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols that can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviation, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the new symbol row | line | column L4 is displayed between each symbol row | line | column. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4 form a reach. Also good. Further, in the third embodiment, when a new symbol row L4 is displayed, the lower symbol row L3 is deleted, without changing the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Since it is configured to change the type of symbol row to be displayed, the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach production and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach production can be unified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not in the normal state or the probability variation state. When there is no hold of the first special symbol (when the number of held balls is 0), the combination of the third symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop is 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first entrance 64. Continue to appear across. Then, when 30 seconds elapse, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 84 (b), a movie with the sun setting against a mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demonstration screen. In this movie, the display content changes with time, and for example, according to the elapsed time, the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain as shown in FIG. 84 (c). By switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not it is an empty board. In addition, when switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified manner (only with numerals) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display (sub variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the state where the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration screen is also displayed when the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and 30 seconds elapses when only the secondary variation is executed. It is configured to be. As described above, in the normal state and the probability variation state, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds), the game efficiency is improved when the left strike is made rather than the right strike. . For this reason, when the player accidentally hits the right in the normal state or the probable change state, and the player quits the game immediately after the change display (secondary change) of the second special symbol is started. Will continue to perform sub-variations for approximately 600 seconds. Under this situation, if the specification is made so that the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed during the execution of the sub-variation, the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the third symbol display device 81 is in spite of the fact that no one is playing for about 600 seconds at the maximum. There is a risk that the displayed content may be as if the game is being played. Therefore, there is a case where another player hesitates to start a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation is finished, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the main change, the display is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen regardless of whether the sub change is being executed. The customer-waiting demonstration screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main change is started) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Yes. By configuring in this way, even if the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and starts to display the fluctuation for 600 seconds, the player immediately quits the game for about 30 seconds. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and Although the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed with substantially the same size, for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub variation You may make it display. Further, in the display screen shown in FIG. 84 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the center. May be configured such that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side that is sub-variable is stopped and displayed on the center of the display screen. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation only by confirming a specific part of the display screen.

  Next, a display mode in the latent state will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the third embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is performed in a manner different from normal fluctuation display.

  As shown in FIG. 85A, in the latent state, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol (sub variation in the latent state) is displayed at the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. As described above, in the latent state, since it is a regular gaming method to aim at the second entrance 1640 by right-handed, the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (main variation) Is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (sub variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the transition from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the sub-variation is the second special symbol. Even if the symbol is changed from the symbol to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at least a part of the data for executing the display (variation display or demonstration display) regarding the sub-variation can be shared and used.

  In addition, the characters “right strike” are displayed below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. By displaying this character, the player can easily recognize that the right-handed game is a regular game method.

  Further, the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm displays a guideline for the remaining number of latent states (a guideline for the number of lotteries until the normal state is entered). In the example of FIG. 85 (a), it is displayed that “remaining 40 times” is displayed, and if the special symbol lottery is lost 40 times in a row, the player may move to the normal state. To suggest. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of times the latent state is continued when the game state (normal state or probability change state) first shifts to the latent state. The value is subtracted and displayed one by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this embodiment, even if a special symbol lottery is won, the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before the big hit is displayed even after the end of the jackpot ( In other words, when the jackpot is reached, the number of times displayed is shifted from the actual remaining number). If the player continues to make a right stroke according to the displayed instruction (the character “right stroke”), the ball can be passed to the V passage switch 65e3 when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. Since it is possible, after the end of the jackpot, 120 new latent states are set. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the latent state, the number of times the latent state is actually continued is larger than the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although details will be described later, the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is the remaining number of times on the display when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero. Is added (added) (see FIG. 87). Thereby, even if the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, a game can be played in anticipation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on display becomes zero.

  As mentioned above, the second special symbol lottery makes it easy to win a small hit, so even if the open / close plate 65f1 is movable (variable) to the open state, whether it was moved by winning the big win or not It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, the present embodiment is configured such that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if it is a big hit or a big hit, by leaving the display mode in which the character 811 sprints during the big hit or the small hit, it became a big hit from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or not. Therefore, in the latent state, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number, so the remaining number on the display is zero. In this case, it can be difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be displayed. Accordingly, when the remaining number of times displayed is 0, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the remaining number will be added and displayed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

  Note that, as described above, the variable winning device 65 and the second entrance 1640 are both placed at positions where the ball can easily enter by making a right-hand hit, so that the big hit and the small hit are displayed. Even if the mode is changed to a display mode similar to that during the change of the 3rd symbol or the stop display of the 3rd symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from winning and missing the winning ball of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero without causing any loss to the player, it can be more strongly expected that the number of times will be added and displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds from the end of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this case, the same display mode (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is displayed, except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the third embodiment, there is no function to hold the display of the variation of the second special symbol, and in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds). Therefore, the frequency of the variable stop state becomes extremely high. Under such circumstances, if the display mode is changed (switched) depending on whether the symbol is changing or the change is stopped, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. Moreover, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 may increase.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment, the display mode of the main display area Dm is shared between the symbol variation display and the stop display. Thereby, since it can suppress that a display mode switches frequently, it can prevent (suppress) that a player will be confused. Moreover, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the latent state in the variation stop state, the display mode (latent probability demonstration display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stops is switched. By switching the display mode, it can be easily recognized that the fluctuation stop state continues for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stop state in the latent state, by displaying a screen (latency demonstration display) different from the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 84 (b)), It can be easily recognized that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in the latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, the trouble that other players start playing with the pachinko machine 10 is prevented (suppressed). can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and it is difficult to think that the game will quit during the latent state, so the player who was playing the game is only temporarily away from the seat. This is because it can be recognized by other players.

  Furthermore, in the latent state in the third embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, if the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) is displayed, then the second input If a ball enters the ball opening 1640 and the screen switching process takes a long time, the variation time may end before displaying the effect associated with the ball. Therefore, even though the ball has entered the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the player may have distrust with respect to the fact that the performance is not executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) in the latent state, a latent demonstration demo display (FIG. 85 (c)) where the same character 811 as that during the change is continuously displayed. Therefore, when the entrance to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), a latent state completion screen displayed when the latent state is completed will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state completion screen is displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state is zero.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is switched to a state where the character 811 falls down on the ground. A display area 812 in which characters “!” Are displayed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. In addition, on the right side of the character 811, a character “return to left-handed” is displayed. By this display, the player can be surely returned to the left hand. This latent probability state end screen detects the entrance to the first entrance slot 64 and the variation display is started, or the first special symbol is in the variation stop state after the latent probability state ends. The display continues until 30 seconds elapse. When either of these two conditions is satisfied, a prize ball acquired during the latent state and a result screen indicating the total number of times the latent state has continued are displayed. Details of the result screen will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), after the latent state is completed, when the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected and the first special symbol variation display is started, the variation is detected. A result screen showing the result of the latent state using time is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the characters “456GAME” are displayed as the number of times that the latent state has been continued (the number of lotteries for special symbols executed during the latent state). Below the characters indicating “”, characters “10030 points acquired!” Indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, the player can play the game in the normal state without questioning the completed latent state. Further, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, it is possible for the player to play a game aiming at a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the result of the latent state (result) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed first after the completion of the latent state, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, a special symbol is drawn twice after the latent state is completed. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the latent state is finished, no entry into the first entrance 64 is detected (if the first special symbol variation display has not started). Instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen, a result display is performed. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the first special symbol variation display executed after the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. As a result, the player who has left the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like immediately after the completion of the latent state can be surely confirmed the result of the latent state.

  In the third embodiment, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Further, in the case where the result of the latent state is displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, a measurement unit that measures a period after the completion of the latent state is provided, and the measurement unit provides a predetermined period (for example, 12 The result may be displayed until the second) elapses. In this case, when the variation of the first special symbol is started before the predetermined period elapses, the result is continuously displayed until the variation ends, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the elapse of the predetermined period. In such a case, the normal display that is not the result display may be executed in the change.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol which displays the result of a latent state is winning, it is good to change the display mode of a result. For example, “10030 points or more acquired!” May be displayed as a suggestion display that suggests that the player has won the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. In this way, by displaying the result determination result of the special symbol using the result content of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the determination of the special symbol without a sense of incongruity. . In addition, if you win the jackpot during the period when the result display of the latent status is executed, and you move to the latent status again, it is configured to be updated by taking over the result contents in the previous latent status Good. This makes it possible for the player to play the game eagerly during the period in which the result display in the latent state is executed.

  In addition, the display similar to the display screen of the result of the latent state displayed after the completion of the latent state, using the period of one special symbol variation or a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect during the latent state. An effect (pseudo end effect) in which the screen is displayed may be used. As a result, an unexpected performance can be provided to the player, and the latent state continues to the player even when the latent state is actually ended and the result display of the latent state is executed. You will be able to expect that.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a revival effect that is a type of effect executed during the latent state will be described. This revival effect is an effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes zero. More specifically, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining lottery number on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number is added to the remaining number on the display. It is an effect to be displayed.

  When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 86 (a)) is displayed. The effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 87, the character 811 that has fallen to the ground once stands up, and the characters “Resurrection” are displayed around the character 811. By executing the effect of this aspect, it is possible to recognize that the latent state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, as the character 811 rises, the actual remaining number of latent states is displayed on the remaining number display area D1. FIG. 87 illustrates the case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to the content “remaining 10 times” because the actual number of remaining latent states has remained 10 times.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery during the latent state, the remaining number (actual remaining number) of the latent state is updated to 120. It is configured to take over the display content of the big hit without resetting the remaining number of times (remaining number of times on display) displayed in the number display area D1. Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number and the remaining number on the display, and the remaining number on the display becomes 0, the difference is added to the actual remaining number to notify the resurrection. It is set as the structure which performs production. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that a rebirth effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the latent state.

  In the present embodiment, the difference between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number of times displayed on the display is added and displayed in the revival effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The revival effect that is executed first may be configured to display a value that is slightly smaller than the difference, and when the revival effect is executed once, the revival effect may be executed multiple times. As a result, when the revival effect is first executed in one latent state, it is determined that the revival effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times added in the revival effect is completed. The game can be played with peace of mind until the performance is performed. In addition, it is possible to make the game look forward to how many times the revival performance is performed. Moreover, when this revival effect is performed, it is good to comprise so that the result display displayed when a latent state is complete | finished is performed, and a revival effect is performed after that. As a result, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 75) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 2030 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 88) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) are selected. The first per-type counter C2 used for the change, the change-type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 2030. Although details will be described later, the RAM 2030 has counter values for winning for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a and the second winning slot 1640 for storing the respective counter values for winning for the first winning slot 64. A second special symbol execution area 2030b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. For this reason, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, When a special ball is stored in one special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a and a game ball wins the second ball entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, the ball wins the first entrance slot 64 during the period when the first special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, If the number of reserved balls in the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. Is done. Further, when the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and five prize balls (in this example) ) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player. In addition, when a ball wins the second entrance 1640 during a period when the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the variation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Each of the counter values and the like is not acquired, and only the winning balls (in this embodiment, five winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three), It may be more than four (for example, eight). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the entrance to the second entrance 1640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not put on hold. It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b of the RAM 2030. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 2020a (see FIG. 90 (a)) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit specified in the first random number table 2020a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the random number value that is the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 2020b (see FIG. 90B) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 2020a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 2020a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90A, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is obtained. Is determined to be one of “7, 8”, and if it is “7, 8”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the range of “0 to 5”. If it is in the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Next, the small hit random number table 2020b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 2020b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits are set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value that is a small hit is not defined. In other words, the first special symbol lottery does not win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the gaming state, and the range of “212 to 432” is determined. If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7, 8” is the first per-number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 2020a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0-5” is the first per-random number table as described above. 2020a. Thus, since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6 while the total number of random number values is 480, the probability that the special symbol jackpot will be “1/80”.

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values for the first per-random number counter C1 that will be a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, and the random values “212 to 432” are stored in the small-lot random number table 2020b. ing. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 among the total number of random numbers being 480, the probability of hitting special symbols is “2211/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). It becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIGS. 92 to 94) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  The variation pattern selection table 2020f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 92 to 94). In this variation pattern selection table 2020f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 2030.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 2020c (see FIG. 90C) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is the same as the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 2020c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 2020c will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (c).

  FIG. 90C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 2020c. In the second random number table 2020c, there are 231 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is “0 to 230”. . Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “231/240”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “232/240”. As described above, in this embodiment, since the random number value that is a normal symbol is different only in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal. Yes. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 when the normal symbol is hit are the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second entrance 1640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state becomes extremely long (600 seconds) relative to the variation time in the latent probability state. This makes it difficult for the second special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state or the probability change state than in the latent state, so that in the normal state or the probability change state, the player aims at the first entrance 64 and plays the game. Can be performed.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 230” in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that it is a hit and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. After that, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 1640 is opened for “one second × twice”. On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 1640 is opened “for one second × twice”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the normal pattern variation pattern table 2020g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the general symbol variation type counter CS2 (See FIG. 95) is defined in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal variation pattern table 2020g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  As described above, the RAM 2030 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 displays the jackpot lottery and display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 2020 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 2020 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 2020, in addition to the first hit random number table 2020a, the small hit random number table 2020b, and the second hit random number table 2020c, the big hit type selection table 2020d, the small hit type selection table 2020e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 2020f and an ordinary map variation pattern table 2020g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 2020d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 2020d, the first hit The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), for the first special symbol, a range of “0 to 31” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 32 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 32% (32/100).

  In addition, when it becomes “big hit A”, whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is given, whether the game state at the time of winning “big hit A” and whether or not it passed V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the jackpot is “big hit A” in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, A short time of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V pass switch e3 is not passed during the big hit, or when the big hit is made in the latent state and the V pass switch 65e3 is passed during the big hit), the number of time reductions is not set. (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when “big hit A” is obtained in the normal state or the probable change state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times and the time reduction number of 120 times are set. The gaming state after the big hit becomes a promiscuous state. On the other hand, when the game is in the state of “big hit A” in the latent probability state, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change count of 120 times (and the number of time reductions of 0) is set, and the gaming state after the big hit Becomes a latent state. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, the normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. The

  “Big Bonus A” is one of the types of jackpots with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be earned. Is set (the advantageous latent state is not given), which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, since the latent probability state is basically looped even after the big hit is completed when the big probability is “big hit A”, the latent probability state is a kind of jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “32 to 80”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the “big hit B” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of “big hit B”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 48 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 48% (48/100).

  “Big Bonus B” is one of the types of jackpots with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained, but if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot (right strike) If the game state is performed), the game state is advantageous in terms of the game state because the player shifts to the latent state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “81 to 90”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” has seven rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 78B) that is difficult to pass through the V pass switch 65e3 is set in the first big hit. The In addition, after the “big hit C” is over, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the “big hit C” is finished, basically the normal state (both as the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions is 0) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot C” has the least number of rounds, and basically the most unfavorable normal state is set after the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so it is the most unfavorable jackpot type for the player. is there. Although the possibility is low, the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3 if the ball can be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a within a short period of time when the specific prize opening 65a is opened. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This “big hit D” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78C) Is set. In addition, after the “big hit D” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of the “big hit D”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot D” has the most rounds and the most advantageous latent state is basically set after the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type by lottery of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 79” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. This “big hit E” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”. In other words, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 in the normal state or the probability changing state, 120 times are set and the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability changing state. . Also, if the player wins the “big hit E” in the latent state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so the gaming state after the big hit is the latent state. (Loops the latent state) Further, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the gaming state after the big hit becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

  This “big hit E” is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the smallest among the six types of big hit types. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if the “big hit E” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as a gaming state after the big hit Is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the ball is passed through the V passing switch 65e3 in the normal state or the probability variation state and the ball passes through the V variation switch 65e3, the configuration is changed to the probability variation state. This is to suppress a serious game method. That is, even if the “big hit E” is set in the normal state or the probability change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the expected state is expected to shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular gaming method that causes the second special symbol lottery to be executed (right-handed) even in the probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal state or the probable change state, the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to G), and when the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probable change state as the gaming state after the big hit Is configured to be set. As a result, the merit of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the probability variation state can be eliminated, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 95”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. This “big hit F” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78C) Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A” and “big hit E”. That is, if the “big hit F” is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Although this “big hit F” has a large number of rounds, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other big hit types. More specifically, in 2 to 15 rounds of “big hit F”, an open / close pattern (special open / close pattern) in which the open / close plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds is set. Since it is difficult to win a ball into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball in the 2-15 rounds of “Big Win F”. As described above, when the “big hit F” is reached, the special opening / closing pattern is set when the open / close plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state, or is a small hit or “big hit F”. This is to make it ambiguous. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the small hits are a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) for the opening and closing plate 65f1 and a short hit A that is opened only once, and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C that repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, by setting a special opening / closing pattern when the “big hit F” is reached, the operation of the open / close plate 65f1 can be made similar to the case of the small hit B or the small hit C after the small hit A. it can. As a result, it becomes difficult to identify whether the latent state has been reset 120 times or the small number of consecutive winnings has been won and the number of times has been subtracted. Can be. Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual remaining number (whether or not the latent state ends when the remaining number on the display reaches zero). Since it can be difficult to discriminate from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0 times, the revival effect (see FIG. 87) is performed and the game is played with the expectation that the remaining number of times on the display will be added and displayed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the player's latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit G” is associated and defined. This “big hit G” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”, “big hit E”, and “big hit F”. That is, if the “big hit G” is won in the normal state or the probable change state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit G”, so “big hit G” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  This “big hit G” is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the largest among the six types of big hit types. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if it becomes “big hit G” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as a gaming state after the big hit Will also be advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when left-handing is performed in the normal state or the probability variation state, and a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the latent state is advantageous at a ratio of 58% (big hit B, D). Is configured to migrate to. Then, when the player makes a right-hand hit in the latent state and wins a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hit E to G). Therefore, once the latent probability state (special symbol probable change state and normal symbol normal state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 1640 by right-handed. It is easy to be executed, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. For this reason, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), details of the small hit type selection table 2020e will be described. This small hitting type selection table 2020e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the small hitting type when the first special symbol lottery is won. In the small hit type selection table 2020e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 93”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are “small hitting A”. Is determined to be 94% (94/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “94 to 98”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. The “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the open / close plate 65f1 is set to be opened for 0.06 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are five random number values that are “small hit B”. Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

  Further, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. The “small hit C” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there is one random number value that becomes “small hitting C”. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Thus, in this embodiment, the small hit game in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs the opening / closing operation one or more times is executed in response to the special symbol lottery. As a result, when the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation in the latent state, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is a win-winning or a small-winning win. Can do. Therefore, even when the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state has never been a big hit, the rebirth effect is performed when the remaining number of latent states on the display approaches zero. Can be expected. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the ratio of winning a small hit is about 46%. For this reason, in the special symbol lottery of 120 times set as the latent state, winning is made around 55 times per hit. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 2020f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 2020f defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the variation pattern selection table 2020f includes a normal table A2020f1 and a normal table B2020f2 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and a variation pattern for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state. A probability variation table 2020f3 and a latent probability table 2020f4 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included at least. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. In each table shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table A2020f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and a special symbol lottery other than twice is executed immediately after the end of the latent probability changing state. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table A2020f1. As shown in FIG. 93, the normal table A2020f1 includes a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. Value).

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range “51 to 100”, Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range “101 to 150”, and Super reach A is associated with the range “151 to 198”. C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not selected and the normal table A2020f1 is referenced, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. To do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, when the number of reserved balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 70” (10 seconds). Fluctuation patterns are associated with each other, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “151 to 170”, and the outage super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) in the range of “0 to 70” as the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”, and the deviation of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “171 to 185”, and the out of the range of “185 to 198” is associated with the outlier super reach B (30 seconds). It has been. The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A2020f1 (see Y307 of Y210) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see Y303 of FIG. 102). It is executed later. Therefore, the normal table A2020f is not referred to when the number of the holding balls is four.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make it difficult for the change display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is large, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to store the balls on hold. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to, the variation time is set to 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hand is made in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much worse than when the left hand is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, the details of the normal table B2020f2 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table B2020f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of lottery times for the special symbol is within two after the latent state is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 94A, when the normal table B2020f2 is referred to, the same variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation after counter ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the out-of-ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. For this reason, when the first or second special symbol lottery after the completion of the latent state is the first special symbol lottery, a 12-second variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. In addition, it is set as the structure which performs the result display (refer FIG.86 (b)) of the latent state mentioned above during these 12 seconds. By adopting a configuration in which a fixed variation time is selected, a sufficient time for performing the result display can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), for the second special symbol lottery, similarly to the normal table A2020f1, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. Since the contents are the same as those in the normal table A2020f1 described above with reference to FIG. 93, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, not only the first special symbol lottery but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery after the end of the latent, the 12-second variation time is set. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second entrance 1640 between the end of the latent state and the return to the left strike, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed first. . As in this embodiment, even if the second special symbol lottery is set for the second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent confirmation, the variation display of the second special symbol is started first. Since the first special symbol lottery is executed thereafter, a 12-second variation time can be set, so that each time regardless of whether the first special symbol lottery is executed first or not. The result display can be performed for the same time after the end of the latent state. Further, in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed twice in succession without the lottery of the first special symbol being executed. However, as described above, the result display is performed when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the completion of the latent state (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds). It is configured. Therefore, also in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the result of the latent state (result) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed first after the completion of the latent state, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, a special symbol is drawn twice after the latent state is completed. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display contents of the result display to be executed are the first It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display that suggests a win may be executed in addition to the display content of the result display. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in which the variation is executed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol in which the result display is executed based on the variation of the first special symbol is also win, In addition to the display contents of the result display executed based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, a display suggesting a hit may be executed. With this configuration, the game result in the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the first special symbol is executed twice continuously after the latent state is finished, the result display is executed only for the first variation, In the second variation, variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game result in the latent state is excessively displayed and the variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

  In addition, the probability variation table 2020f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A2020f1 and will be described briefly. However, if the first special symbol is a lottery, it is the same as the normal table A2020f1. Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected at the selection ratio. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not selected by lottery, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as compared with the normal state. This is because the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the probability variation state, and if a variation pattern with a long variation time occurs frequently despite the deviation, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the third embodiment is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected when the first special symbol lottery is lost during the probability variation state. When selected, the player is more strongly expected to win a big hit.

  Next, details of the latent probability table 2020f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). This latent probability table 2020f4 is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the middle variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the full range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take for the first special symbol jackpot. Has been. Further, the outlier of the first special symbol is defined in association with the outlier super short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the second special symbol jackpot has a very short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Are defined in association with each other, and the small hits of the second special symbol are associated with the small hits super short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The deviation from the second special symbol is defined in such a way that the extra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the full range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. . That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

  In the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed, so the variation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, it is possible to play a game efficiently (rapidly) by making a right turn. In addition, even when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the latent state, the variation time is selected to be 0.5 seconds. When entering the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the latent state, and to play the game.

  In addition, when a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set when the big bonus of the first special symbol is set in the latent state. This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when the big hit C is in the latent state, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 78 (b)) in which a ball is difficult to pass through the V pass switch 65e3 is set with respect to the open / close plate 65f1. The game state after the end becomes the normal state. When such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting a relatively long variation time when the first special symbol wins a lottery, the second special is performed by making a right-hand hit during the big special variation of the first special symbol. It is configured so that symbol lottery can be executed multiple times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since it wins a small hit about once every 2 times (about 46%), before the end of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation of the with high probability. As described above, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous variation method is employed in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. In addition, if the change display of one special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a big win or small stop symbol during simultaneous change, the change display of the other special symbol will be drawn by the remaining change time and lottery at the start of the change. Regardless of the result, it is forcibly stopped with an outlier stop symbol. Therefore, even if the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress, the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded by confirming and displaying the small bonus stop symbol by the small bonus variation of the second special symbol first. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot of the first special symbol that may end the latent state with high probability, so that the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. I can do it.

  In the present embodiment, 0.5 second is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but a small probability (for example, “1/199”). ) May be configured such that a long variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is selected. Further, when the long variation time is selected, a result display indicating the above-described game result in the latent state (actually, the game result in the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear that the latent state has ended during the latent state, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player, and the effect can be enhanced. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the common map variation pattern table 2020g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 2020g is a table that is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 95, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g includes a range of values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 and a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the common diagram variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern is associated. Similarly, when the gaming state is a probable variation state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the value of the variation variation counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 190”. A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with a range of CS2 values of “191 to 198”. When the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the time from when the normal symbol lottery is executed to when the electric accessory 1640a is released is predicted by varying the variation time of the normal symbol. Can be difficult. Therefore, when one ball is launched to the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67 and the ball passes through any of the through gates, the electric accessory 1640a is used when the normal symbol is hit. It is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of launching a ball by predicting the release timing, and to make a right strike continuously during the latent state.

  In the third embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may be varied.

  In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, one of two types of 1 second or 3 seconds is set as the variable time, but there are two types of variable time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and more variable time may be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the less likely it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to more reliably and continuously make a right strike in the latent state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to this, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of times of drawing a special symbol, or a configuration in which the variation time of the normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and thereafter (51 Times to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, while the lottery of the even number of special symbols has been executed after the game state has shifted to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (odd number of times) You may comprise so that 3 second may be set as a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. It is possible to make a right turn continuously. In this case, the special symbol lottery time is set to be longer in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed (in comparison with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed) It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of lotteries stored on hold is smaller.

  In addition, when the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it may be configured such that a longer variation time becomes easier to select as the number of retained balls of the normal symbol increases. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols is difficult to store and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily store the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols are per unit time. The number of normal symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 2030 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 2030 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, a second special symbol execution area 2030b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 2030e, V winning flag 2030f, hourly counter 2030g, winning counter 2030h, special figure 1 standby flag 2030i, special figure 2 standby flag 2030j, probability variation counter 2030k, big hit flag 2030m, winning state storage area 2030n, small hit Flag 2030o, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p, prefetch hold storage area 2030r, special figure 1 fluctuation timer 2030s, special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t, big hit medium flag 2030u, small hit medium flag 2030v, and other memory area 2030z It has even without.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, the small hits-type counter C5, and the variation-type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, the second special symbol execution area 2030b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a lottery of special symbols. In the second special symbol execution area 2030b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c includes one execution area (ordinary symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes either the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is four Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. A shift process is performed in which winning data is packed into a reserved area having a smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reservation ball number counter 2030d is a special symbol variable display (first symbol display device 37, which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see Y1504 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see Y303 in FIG. 102).

  The value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (Y304 in FIG. 102, FIG. 114). Y1505). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is changed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 2030d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol held ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 2030e is a normal ball (second symbol) variable display holding ball that is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times (number of waiting times). The value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. Each time the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see Y1704 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see Y1605 in FIG. 115).

  When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c (see Y1705 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c. Not stored (see Y1703: No in FIG. 116).

  The V winning flag 2030f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probability changing state. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the V passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77 (b)) during the big hit game. Here, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON (see Y2410 in FIG. 123). On the other hand, the V winning flag 2030f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122). The V winning flag 2030f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off at the time of return (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the V passing switch 65e3 has passed, It may be configured that the flag 2030f is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, for example, a determination is made as to whether or not the V-pass switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off by providing a pass counter that measures the number of balls that have passed the V-pass switch 65e3. It can be determined by whether there is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such that only the V winning flag 2030f is turned on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is cut off, thereby reducing the damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The time reduction counter 2030g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time reduction state. At this time, the short counter 2030g is set to 120 when either of the big hits A and E to G is won in the normal state or the probability change state and the V winning flag 2030f is on at the end of the big win game. Also, the hour / hour counter 2030g is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see Y607 in FIG. 105). When a normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the time-short counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability. (See Y1610 in FIG. 115). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate is determined with reference to the table for the low probability (see Y1611 in FIG. 115).

  The winning counter 2030h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening 65a in each jackpot round. When the value of the winning counter 2030h becomes the upper limit value 5, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied and the round is ended (see Y2406 in FIG. 123). Even if the value of the winning counter 2030h is less than 5 in each jackpot round, the round ends when the round period set for each round is reached. The winning counter 2030h is incremented by 1 every time a winning ball is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is fluctuating or the first special symbol is suspended. It means that it is in the state immediately before starting the variable display based on the sphere. The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see Y311 in FIG. 102). On the other hand, when the change start of the first special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see Y309 in FIG. 102).

  The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 2030j is on, it indicates that the second special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is being changed. The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not changing and no start winning is detected for the second entrance 1640 (see Y809 in FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the change start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see Y807 in FIG. 107).

  The probability variation counter 2030k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special It indicates that the symbol is in a low probability state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set to 0. When the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 is set at the end of the jackpot (see Y2304 in FIG. 122). In addition, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is set (see FIG. 105), the value is subtracted by 1 (FIG. 105). Y602). Further, the probability variation counter 2030k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see Y708 in FIG. 106 and Y1309 in FIG. 112). This probability variation counter 2030k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108). (See Y402 in FIG. 103 and Y902 in FIG. 108).

  The jackpot flag 2030m is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the flag is set to ON (see Y406 in FIG. 103 and Y906 in FIG. 108). The jackpot flag 2030m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y708 in FIG. 106, Y1309 in FIG. 112). The jackpot flag 2030m is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “10B”, it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been won and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “01B”, it indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol has been won, and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “00B”, it indicates that the jackpot variation has not been executed.

  When the jackpot flag 2030m is on and the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on is finished, the other special symbol is removed and the process of forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (Y705 in FIG. 106, FIG. 112). Y1306). Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that one of the big hits is executed while the other is a big hit or a small hit.

  The winning state storage area 2030n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if both the time counter 2030g and the probability variation counter 2030k are 0), the winning state storage area 2030n indicates the normal state. “00H” is stored as information. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the values of the hourly counter 2030g and the probability change counter 2030k are both 1 or more), the winning state storage area 2030n contains information indicating the probability change state. “01H” is stored. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 2030n has a latent state. “02H” is stored as information indicating the certain state.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 2030n is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a short-time game after the jackpot ends (see Y2301 in FIG. 122). As described above, if the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is different depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or not. It is In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is stored in this winning state storage area 2030n, and is referred to at the end of the jackpot so that it corresponds to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. An appropriate gaming state can be set.

  The small hit flag 2030o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see Y1002 in FIG. 109). The small hit flag 2030o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see Y1405 in FIG. 113). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is finished in a state where the small hit flag 2030o is on, a process of detaching the other special symbol and forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see Y1403 in FIG. 113). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol and a big win is started during the small win while the small special hit of the second special symbol is being executed. it can.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag that indicates a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol to when the jackpot is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON, even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 1640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (Refer to Y801: Yes in FIG. 107). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped (see Y703 in FIG. 106), and the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (Y811 in FIG. 107).

  The prefetch hold storage area 2030r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing when the original special symbol lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, immediately after the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols separately from the lottery. Various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the counter value. The prediction of various types of information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as “prefetching”. In the prefetch hold storage area 2030r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning with respect to the first entrance 64, a prefetch result based on the counter value (special symbol lottery determination result, jackpot) Jackpot type and variation pattern) are stored. The prefetch hold storage area 2030r can store the same number of prefetch results as the number of balls held (that is, a maximum of four).

  Special figure 1 variation timer (Special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s and Special figure 2 fluctuation timer (Special figure 2 fluctuation time timer) 2030t measure the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special figure 1 variation timer (Special Figure 1 variation time timer) 2030s and the special figure 2 variation timer (Special Figure 2 variation time timer) 2030t. (See Y701 in FIG. 106 and Y1301 in FIG. 112).

  The big hit flag 2030u is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If the jackpot flag 2030u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. The jackpot flag 2030u is set to ON when the jackpot start is set (see Y709 in FIG. 106 and Y1310 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, it is set off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122).

  The small hitting flag 2030v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 2030v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. This small hitting medium flag 2030v is set to ON when the small hitting start is set (see Y1406 in FIG. 113). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see Y2512 in FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 2030z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 2020 and the flags and counters provided in the RAM 2030, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the innovative state transition shown in FIG. 79 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 97A, the ROM 2220 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 2220a and a screen display selection table 2220b.

  The variation pattern selection table 2220a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery. Note that the above-described special reach production mode (see FIGS. 82 and 83) is also defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 2220a. Selected in some cases.

  The screen display selection table 2220b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even when one special symbol is in a variable stop state, a situation in which the other special symbol is changing frequently occurs. Further, depending on the gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol to be noticed by the player is switched. This screen display selection table 2220b is referred to in order to set a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state in a state where the main variation is stopped while appropriately displaying the variation display of the main symbol in each gaming state. Details of the screen display selection table 2220b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 2220b. As shown in FIG. 98, this screen display selection table 2220b corresponds to the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed in 81 is defined. The special figure 1 standby flag 2230 s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230 t indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. It is a flag to show. Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed when the flag is on. If the flag is off, the flag is being displayed based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or a predetermined time ( 30 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 98, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probability change state, the display content (screen display type) is displayed for the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s being off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t being on. ) Is specified as a normal display. In this normal display, the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, a demonstration display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When this demonstration display is determined, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 84B and 84C) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is switched to the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Thus, even if the player puts the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the display of fluctuation for 600 seconds is started, and then quits the game immediately, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed. Can display a demo screen waiting for customers. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, the demonstration display is also associated with the combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. Therefore, also in this case, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 84B and 84C) is set. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a latent state, a special display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. This special display means the above-described latent demonstration display (see FIG. 85 (c)), and a special mode demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as that during the change is continuously displayed. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, a display mode (effect mode) can be changed smoothly. Note that the special display is also set for the combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are turned on. In other words, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main variation has entered the fluctuation stop state, the special display Is set.

  In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special symbol entered the variation stop state, the variation display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

  Next, the RAM 2230 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 includes a command storage area 2230a, a winning information storage area 2230b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 2230f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g, effect counter 2230h, state setting area 2230i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, special figure 1 standby counter 2230k, and sub special figure 2 Stand-by flag 2230m, special figure 2 stand-by counter 2230n, remaining probability variation count area 2230o, production probability variation count area 2230p, short remaining time count area 2230q, special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, and special figure 2 standby flag 2230t And at least a memory area 2230z.

  The command storage area 2230a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 2230a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 2230b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected in the main controller 110, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired according to the start winning, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 (whether it is a big hit, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a fluctuation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 2230b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is a variation effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol being performed up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d stored in the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is displayed as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c. Each type of management is managed.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c (see Y4310 in FIG. 130). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball counter 2230c to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see Y4304 and Y4307 in FIG. 130) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4702 and Y4706 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e are turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230, and in the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g are received when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 are received. (See Y4401 in FIG. 131) and off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4710 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The effect counter 2230h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 2230h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 128) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Is done.

  The state setting area 2230i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main controller 110 is received, the status setting area 2230i is updated to information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (Y4011, FIG. 127). 132, Y4506). More specifically, in the state setting area 2230i, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and in order from the upper bit, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a probable variation state or not, and whether the normal symbol is in a short-time state. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 2230i is “11B”, it means that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and that the normal symbol is in the short time state (that is, the probability change state). This means that the symbol is in the state of probability change and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent state). On the other hand, “00H” means the normal state.

  By updating the state setting area 2230i according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is changing. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i and the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j of the main controller 110.

  Special figure 1 stand-by counter 2230k and special figure 2 stand-by counter 2230n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. Among the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and special figure 2 standby counter 2230n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol that is the main variation in the current gaming state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, A demonstration effect corresponding to the state is set (see Y4211 in FIG. 129).

  The remaining probability variation count area 2230o and the remaining short-time count area 2230q are storage areas for storing the probability variation state of the special symbol and the remaining number of times of the normal symbol time-short state, respectively. The remaining variable number of times area 2230o and the remaining short number of times area 2230q are notified by the remaining variable number of times command and the remaining short number of times command that are output each time the value of the probability variable counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g are updated in the main controller 110, respectively. (See Y4652 and Y4662 in FIG. 134). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining shorter number of times area 2230q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g of the main control device 110. The remaining number of times of probability change and the number of times reduced by 113 can be made to coincide with the actual number of times of change of accuracy and the number of times shortened which are updated by main controller 110.

  The effect probability variation number area 2230p is a storage area for storing a guideline of the remaining number of times of the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent probability state. In this effect probability change count area 2230p, 120 is set when a transition is made from another gaming state to a latent probability state (see Y4505 in FIG. 132). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (see Y4657 in FIG. 134).

  The special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively. It shows that the fluctuation stop state of the corresponding special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is fluctuating or within 3 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. These special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are turned on when the count values of special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and special figure 2 standby counter 2230n respectively become values corresponding to 30 seconds. It is set (see Y4204 and Y4208 in FIG. 129).

  The standby set flag 2230u is a demonstration effect with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been suspended. This is a flag indicating whether or not screen display such as (see FIGS. 84B, 84C, and 85C) is set. This standby setting completed flag 2230u is set to ON when the screen display is newly set with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b in the customer waiting effect processing (see FIG. 129) (see Y4212 in FIG. 129). ). Further, when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is newly set to ON (see Y4204, Y4208 in FIG. 129), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. Is newly set to OFF, the standby setting completed flag 2230u is set to OFF.

  The power-off flag 2230y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 2230y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see Y4115 in FIG. 128). Thereafter, since the RAM 2230 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 2230 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 127), when the power-off flag 2230y is on (see Y4008: Yes in FIG. 127), it is constant after the power-off flag 2230y is set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 2230 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 2230. In some cases, information on the work area in the RAM 2230 is cleared (see Y4009 in FIG. 127). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 2230z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 2340a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 2340a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 2340a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 2340a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified in reading the data of the first page. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed after the end of the boot process (see Y6001 in FIG. 136) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see Y6003 and Y6004 in FIG. 136).

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. In other words, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, but for the resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is determined in advance for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see Y6005 in FIG. 136). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see Y7605 in FIG. 147 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Y6301 in FIG. 138 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 138) so that an image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 138 (b) Y6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Y7501 in FIG. 147 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 147 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Once selected, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 138 (b) ) (See Y6303)), pointer update processing (see Y7205 in FIG. 144) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 138 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Y7207 in FIG. 144). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see Y7713 in FIG. 148). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “off” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see Y7714 in FIG. 148). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Y7802 in FIG. 149).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see Y6306 in FIG. 138 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see Y7001 in FIG. 143 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see Y7709 in FIG. 148), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see Y7710 in FIG. 148). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 143 (a ) Y7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (see Y7221 in FIG. 144). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b). , See Y6905 of FIG. 142). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is turned on when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (Y7214 in FIG. 144). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b), FIG. 142, Y6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (Y101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (Y103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and those counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 479, 99, 232, 99) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 2030.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (Y104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (Y105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol variation process for executing a process associated with the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( Y106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (Y106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (Y108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (Y109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special symbol variation process (Y104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (Y104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the respective counter values acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640, and a predetermined Control for enabling the variable display to be simultaneously performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in the variation display mode determined by the control of the control, or to stop display in the display mode indicating the determination result Is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being played (whether or not the jackpot flag 2030u is on) (Y201), and the jackpot is being hit (the jackpot flag) If it is determined that 2030u is on) (Y201: Yes), it is not necessary to set a special symbol lottery, stop of variable display, or the like. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (the jackpot flag 2030u is off) (Y201: No), whether or not the jackpot game is being played (whether or not the jackpot flag 2030v is on). Is determined (Y202). In the process of Y202, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (the small hit medium flag 2030v is on) (Y202: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that no small hit is being made (the small hit / medium flag 2030v is OFF) (Y202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being changed (Y203). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation display is in progress (Y203: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205) is performed when the variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed. Then, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (Y205), and the process proceeds to Y206. In the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is also compulsorily used with the stop symbol corresponding to the outage. Processing to stop display is executed. Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (Y205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y203 that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. On the condition that it is, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed (Y204), and the process proceeds to Y206. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of Y206 that is executed after the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) or the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display. (Y206) If the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (Y206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (Y208), and this process is terminated. This second special symbol variation stop process (Y208) is similar to the first special symbol variation suspension process (Y205) when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol which shows the lottery result. Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process (Y208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y206: No), the second special symbol is detected on the condition that a new start winning is detected at the second entrance 1640. A second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery is executed (Y207), and this processing is terminated. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (Y207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (Y204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (Y204).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (FIG. 102, Y204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is acquired (Y301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether (N1) is a value greater than 0 (Y302). In the process of Y302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is greater than 0 (Y302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is set. 1 is subtracted (Y303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d after the subtraction is set (Y304). .

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 2230. 2230c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  When the process of Y304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is then shifted to the previous data (Y305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of Y305 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (Y306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306) will be described in detail later. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 104, Y307). As will be described in detail later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is performed by determining whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is completed, a gaming state update process is then executed (Y308). This game state update process (FIG. 105, Y308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability change counter 2030k, hourly counter 2030g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, This is a process for updating the state. When the process of Y308 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF and a special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y309), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is 0 (Y302: No), whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on. If it is determined (Y310) and it is determined to be on (Y310: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y310, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y311), and a special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After setting (Y312), this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 102, Y204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a is acquired (Y401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (Y402). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (special symbol probability variation state). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (Y402: Yes), the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 2020a for high probability And the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer is determined to match, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (Y403). On the other hand, in the process of Y402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y402: No), the first per-random number table 2020a for the low probability is stored in It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that is a big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (Y404).

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in Y403 or Y404 is a big hit (Y405). If the lottery result is a big hit (Y405: Yes), the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (Y406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (Y407). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y408), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area Store in 2030n (Y409), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y405, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (Y405: No), the out symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y410), and thereafter This process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 102, Y204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the process of Y406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above.

  In the process of Y501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (Y501: Yes), it is acquired in the process of Y401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined from the big hit type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91A) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 2030m for the first special symbol is OFF) (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is performed. Skip to Y503 processing.

  In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 92 to 94) corresponding to the gaming state is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The gaming state is determined on the basis of the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the time reduction counter 2030g. In the process of Y505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( Y506).

  When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y508), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the gaming state update process (Y308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this game state update processing (Y308).

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 105) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is greater than 0 (Y601). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y601: No), the processing of Y602 to Y605 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Y606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (Y602), and the remaining probability variation command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set ( Y603).

  The remaining probability variation command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice is changed. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining probability variation command, it extracts the value of the probability variation counter 2030k from the remaining probability variation command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining variation count area 2230o of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation number area 2230o in accordance with the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 and execute a corresponding effect.

  When the process of Y603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k after subtraction is 0 (Y604). When the value after subtraction is not 0 (Y604: No), The process is skipped and the process proceeds to Y606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (Y605), and the process proceeds to Y606.

  In the process of Y606, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606). If the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0 (Y606: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y606 that the hour / hour counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is decremented by one (Y607), and a remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour / hour counter is set. After (Y608), this process is terminated.

  The short remaining time command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining short number of times command, it extracts the value of the time short counter 2030g from the remaining short number of times command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining short number of times area 2230q of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining short time number area 2230q in accordance with the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (Y205).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 106, Y205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the first special symbol variation display (Y701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( Y701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (Y702). When it is determined that the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 2030p is turned on is set (Y704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (Y705).

  When the processing of Y705 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (Y706), and the jackpot flag 2030m, the probability variation counter 2030k, and the hour / short counter 2030g are reset (Y707). Next, the jackpot flag 2030u is set to ON (Y708), and the process proceeds to Y709.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the big hit flag 2030m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (Y702: No), the process of Y703 to Y708 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y709.

  In the process of Y709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (Y709). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (Y710), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( Y711), this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (Y205), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. Processing (Y703 to Y710) for stopping the variable display is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (Y702: Yes), processing (Y703, Y704) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

  In the third embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is configured to be forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of Y706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103). For example, based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of Y706 You may make it do.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (Y207), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (Y207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 107, Y207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the outage when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is finished. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is on, it means that a big hit will be started, and therefore the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, in the process of Y801, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is on, this process is terminated as it is without executing the processes of Y802 to Y810 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y801, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y801: No), the second entrance 1640 is It is determined whether or not a winning is detected (Y802). If a winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected (Y802: Yes), then, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 Are acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is executed. (Y804). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of Y804 ends, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of Y803. Execute (Y805). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of Y805 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) is executed (Y806), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to OFF, and a special figure 2 standby command indicating OFF is issued. After setting (Y807), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y801 that no winning for the second entrance 1640 has been detected (Y801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is on (Y808). ), If it is on (Y808: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y808, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to on (Y809), and the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. A special figure 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of this fact is set (Y810), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second special symbol big hit determination process (Y804) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 107, Y207) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103). The difference from the reference will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is acquired (Y901). And the process of Y902-Y904 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is performed. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b. Control is executed.

  When the process of Y903 or Y904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big win (Y905). If it is determined that the lottery is a big hit (Y905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processing from Y906 to Y909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes of Y906 to Y909, the same processes as the processes of Y406 to Y409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y905, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win (Y905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit of the second special symbol or a loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation variation processing is executed (Y910), and this processing is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (Y909).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (Y909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of Y903 or Y904 in FIG. 108 is a small hit of the second special symbol (Y1001), and the lottery result is a small hit. If so (Y1001: Yes), the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to small hit (Y1003). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (Y1004), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y1001 that the lottery result is out (Y1001: No), the outlier of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y1005), and then This process ends.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 107, Y805), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (Y1102). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the process of Y906 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108) described above.

  In the process of Y1102, when it is determined that the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (Y1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the Y901 process in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108) described above, the big hit from the big hit type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). The type is determined (Y1105).

  When the processing of Y1105 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y1105), and then a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (Y1106). Then, the process proceeds to Y1108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1102 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (Y1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y1108. Transition.

  In the process of Y1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (Y1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y1109), and then ends this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 111, Y1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (Y1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is ON (Y1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (Y1202). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 2020e (see FIG. 90B), the small hit type is selected (Y1203).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (Y1204), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (Y1205). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (Y1206), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1201 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (ie, it is out of place) (Y1201: No), a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 93 and FIG. 94) is read (Y1207), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (Y1208). After that, based on the selected deviation variation pattern, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y1209), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (Y208).

  In the second special symbol variation stop process (Y208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301). In the process of Y1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: Yes), the big hit flag 2030m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). Is determined (Y1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON for the second special symbol (Y1303: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1305), The process proceeds to Y1306.

  Next, the processing after Y1306 is different from the processing after Y705 of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (FIG. 106, Y205) described above in the following points. A special figure 1 confirmation command is a special figure in the process of Y1306 and Y1312 corresponding to the process of Y705 and Y711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and the process of Y1311 corresponding to the process of Y710. 2 is different in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y1301, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( Y1302), the present process is terminated. In the process of Y1303, if the big hit flag 2030m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (Y1303: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (Y1304), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the special figure 2 outage stop process (Y1304), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112, Y208), will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off stop processing (Y1304).

  In the special figure 2 off stop processing (FIG. 113, Y1304), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (Y1403).

  When the processing of Y1403 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (Y1404). Thereafter, the small hit flag 2030o is set to OFF (Y1405), and the small hit medium flag 2030v is set to ON (Y1406).

  When the processing of Y1406 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (Y1407). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (Y1408), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1401 that the small hit flag 2030o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (Y1401: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (Y1409). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (Y1410), and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (Y105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (Y105). In the starting winning process (FIG. 114, Y105), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port (first entering port) 64. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values up to a maximum of four) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. In addition, a process for predicting the determination result or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 114, Y105) will be described.

  In the starting winning process (FIG. 114, Y105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) in the first starting port 64 which is the first starting port (Y1101). Here, a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 64 (start winning has been received) (Y1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is acquired (Y1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first start port 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d (Y1504). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (Y1505). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a of the RAM 2030 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls (Y1506).

  Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (Y1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (Y1508), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the determination result is based on the information stored and stored. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the normal symbol variation process (Y106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (Y106). The normal symbol variation process (Y106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 115, Y106), first, it is determined whether the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (Y1601). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays a hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 1640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (Y1601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Y1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol changing time being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (Y1618). ). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of Y1617 described later before the variation display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of Y1011 (Y1618: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1618 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (Y1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (Y1619). In the process of Y1619, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of Y1613, the symbol “○” is stopped on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of Y1615, the symbol “x” is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol, It is set to stop display (lighted display). When the stop display is set by the process of Y1619, the variable display in the second symbol display device is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second display in the display mode set by the processes of Y1613 and Y1615. The symbol display device is stopped (lighted).

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (Y1620). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (Y1620: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 1640a is set (Y1621). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current regular symbol lottery result is out of place (Y1620: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1602 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Y1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is greater than 0 (Y1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is 0. (Y1604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is not 0 (Y1604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (Y1605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c is shifted (Y1606). In the process of Y1606, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c is acquired (Y1607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in a short time state (Y1608). More specifically, when the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the hour / hour state is in effect. In the process of Y1608, if it is determined that the time-short state is not being reached (Y1608: No), the success / failure determination is made based on the hit determination value of the random symbol table for normal symbols for low probability (see FIG. 90C). A result is acquired (Y1611). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1608 that the game is a short-time game (Y1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (Y1609). In the process of Y1609, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (Y1609: Yes), the process of Y1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (Y1609: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 90C) Based on the above, the determination result is obtained (Y1610).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (Y1612), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (ie, it is out of place) (Y1612: No), the display mode of “x” which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (Y1615), and the process proceeds to Y1616. On the other hand, in the process of Y1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (Y1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of win is “◯” Is set (Y1613).

  Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (Y1614). Then, in the process of Y1616 executed after the process of Y1614 or Y1615 is executed, the common figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g (see FIG. 95) is read (Y1616), and the common figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is read from the read common figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g. The variation time corresponding to this value is set (Y1617), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (Y107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (Y107). This through gate passing process (Y107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passing of the game ball is determined. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 116, Y107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Y1702). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 2030e is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Y1703).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 2030e is not less than 4 (Y1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 2030e is less than 4 (Y1703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 2030e is incremented by 1 (Y1704).

  When the processing of Y1704 is finished, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in Y103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) is used as the empty reserved area (holding first 1) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c of the RAM 2030. The area is stored in the first area (Y1705), and the process is terminated. In the process of Y1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the second entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state.

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal map, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal map but also the electric accessory 1640a when the normal map is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second entrance 1640 (entrance associated with the electric accessory 1640 a) is on the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aimed at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball enters the second entrance 1640.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 2030 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Y1801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 118), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Y1901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (Y1902). Then, access to the RAM 2030 is permitted (Y1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Y1904). If it is turned on (Y1904: Yes), the process proceeds to Y1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information about occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905). (Y1905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to Y1910.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Y1906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Y1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to Y1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 2030. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 2030 is correctly stored.

  In the process of Y1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Y1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (Y1911, Y1912) of RAM 2030.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 2030 initialization process (Y1911, Y1912) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (Y1911, Y1912) of the RAM 2030 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (Y1911, Y1912), the used area of the RAM 2030 is cleared to 0 (Y1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 2030 is set (Y1912). After the initialization processing of the RAM 2030, the process proceeds to Y1913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (Y1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (Y1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 2030 is held (Y1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (Y1909), and the process proceeds to Y1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (Y1913). Thereafter, each value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g is read (Y1914), and a status command is set based on the read counter value (Y1915). When the process of Y1915 ends, an interrupt is permitted (Y1916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process (Y2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process (Y2000). In this main process (Y2000), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 119, Y2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (Y2001).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Y2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Y2003) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (Y2004). The jackpot control process (Y2004) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 120, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (Y2004) is executed, the small hit control process (Y2005) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (Y2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (Y2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. Then, the display control process of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (Y2007).

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Y2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 receives the value. The second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is reached, the electric accessory 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (Y2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (Y2010: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2001, and the processes after Y2001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (Y2010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Y2011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y2011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of Y2002 (Y2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of Y2001 to Y2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of Y2009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 117 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after Y2013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Y2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (Y2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (Y2015), access to the RAM 2030 is prohibited (Y2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area to be backed up in the RAM 2030.

  The process of Y2009 is the timing at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at Y2001 to Y2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of Y2011 and Y2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It is possible to start from the processing of Y2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Y2001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (FIG. 118, Y1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of Y2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (Y2004). This jackpot control process (Y2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (Y2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (Y2101: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y2101 that the jackpot scenario is set (Y2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (Y2102), and it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening of the jackpot scenario (Y2103). ). More specifically, in the process of Y2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of Y2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of Y2103, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (Y2103: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (Y2104), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is not reached (Y2103: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105).

  In the process of Y2105, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (Y2106), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2105 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied ( Y2107). Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (Y2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of Y2108 (the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a) The solenoid is turned off so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from Y2105 to Y2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2107, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (Y2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (Y2109: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (Y2110), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y2109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Y2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of Y2111, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (Y2111: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (Y2112), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process (Y2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (Y21111: No), the first winning process is executed (Y2113), and this process ends. Details of the first winning process (Y2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 121, Y2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of starting jackpot rounds is set is read (Y2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 77) is set based on the data read in Y2201 (Y2202), and then the specific winning opening 65a (the open / close plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached thereto) is set. The release operation is set by the data read in the process of Y2201 (Y2203), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the jackpot end process (Y2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (Y2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112).

  In the jackpot end process (FIG. 122, Y2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 2030n (Y2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2302). If it is determined in the process of Y2302 that the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2302: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V passing switch 65e3 during the current big hit, and therefore the value of the probability variation counter 2030k. Is set to 120 (Y2303).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the game state at the time of winning is not a latent state (Y2304). In the process of Y2304, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (Y2304: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpots B to D (Y2305). If the jackpot is not B to D (Y2305: No), 120 is set to the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g (Y2306), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y2302 that the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) (Y2303: No), or in the process of Y2304, the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state. If it is determined (Y2304: Yes), or in the process of Y2305, if it is a big hit BD (Y2305: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2307. Thereby, when the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state and when the game ball does not pass the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot B to D, the probability variation state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot A, 120 chance variation states and 100 time-short states are set after the jackpot.

  In the process of Y2307, the big hit medium flag 2030u and the V winning flag 2030f are both set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 2030n is cleared (Y2307). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (Y2308), and this process ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on, and if it is on, the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state is set to the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set. A corresponding value (120) is set. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the V-pass switch 65e3 and to set a high-probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3). Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game In addition, it is possible to play a game with interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the value is changed to the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly counter 2030g. Is not set, that is, the normal gaming state ST1 is set after the jackpot game, but not limited thereto, for example, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (FIG. 122, Y2303: No), a predetermined value (for example, 50) may be set in the hour / hour counter 2030g. Thus, even when the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a predetermined privilege (less than when the game ball passes through the V pass switch 65e3) is given to the player. It becomes possible.

  Further, when it is determined in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the type of the jackpot won this time is determined, and the jackpot won this time Only when it is determined that the type is a jackpot type (see FIG. 91 (a)) in which the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set so that a game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3, a predetermined value is set in the hour / hour counter 2030g. (For example, 50) may be set. By configuring in this way, a plurality of different benefits (games set after the end of the jackpot) corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game contents during the jackpot game (whether or not the game ball passes to the V pass switch 65e3) (The degree of advantage of the state) can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the first winning process (Y2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (Y2113). This first winning process (Y2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) and, as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port (large opening) 65a. is there.

  In the first winning process (FIG. 123, Y2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (Y2401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. It is. In the process of Y2401, if it is not the round effective period (Y2401: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2402), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2401 that the current period is the round effective period (Y2401: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403), If no winning at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2403, if a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h and updated (Y2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (Y2405), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( Y2405: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set. (Y2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408). If the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) (Y2408: No), it is determined whether the V pass switch 65e3 is on (Y2409). In the process of Y2409, when the V-pass switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (Y2409: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of Y2409, when the V pass switch 65e3 is on (Y2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on. Then, a V winning command is set and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the small hit control process (Y2005) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 119) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (Y2005).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 124, Y2005), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (Y2501). Specifically, the process of Y1404 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 113) is executed to determine whether or not the small hit scenario is set. In the process of Y2501, if the small hit scenario is not set (Y2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of Y2501 (Y2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (Y2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503). More specifically, in the process of Y2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of Y2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the process of Y2503, if it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503: Yes), a small hit opening command is set (Y2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (Y2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505).

  In the process of Y2505, when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (Y2506), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting action setting process (Y2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when the total number of balls (for example, five) is won while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of Y2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of Y2508 (first The solenoid is set to OFF so that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (Y2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509).

  In the process of Y2509, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (Y2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (Y2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  In the process of Y2511, when it is determined that it is the small hitting end timing (Y2511: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 2030v is set to OFF (Y2512), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (Y2511: No), the second winning process is executed (Y2513), and this process is terminated. Details of the second winning process (Y2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the small hitting operation setting process (Y2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 124, Y2005) is demonstrated. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting action setting process (Y2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 125, Y2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small rounds to be started is set is read (Y2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached thereto) is set by the data read in the process of Y2601 (Y2602), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, the details of the second winning process (Y2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (Y2513). This second winning process (Y2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 124), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (FIG. 126, Y2513), first, it is determined whether the current round period is valid (Y2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of Y2701, if it is not the round valid period (Y2701: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2702), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2701 that the current period is the round effective period (Y2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Y2703), and then the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (Y2703: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Y2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h and updated (Y2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (Y2705), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( Y2705: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (Y2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Y4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of Y4116 (see FIG. 128) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (Y4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 128, Y4113), it executes the power-off processing of Y4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of Y4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (Y4002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 2230 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 2230 by the process of Y4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 2230. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 2230 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 2230 is confirmed (Y4003: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2004, and initialization of the RAM 2230 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 2230 is not confirmed (Y4003: No), the process proceeds to Y4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230 (the memory of the RAM 2230 is lost due to power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Y4004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the execution of the power-off process of Y4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230, the data in the RAM 2230 is determined to be normal (Y4003: No), and the process proceeds to Y4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (Y4002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Y4116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 2230 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to Y4004 and initialization of the RAM 2230 is started.

  In the process of Y4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 2230 is checked (Y4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 2230 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 2230 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 2230 and the RAM destruction check data is set (Y4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 2230. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 2230 is notified (Y4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 2230 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 2230, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of Y4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Y4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Y4116 is executed (see Y4115 in FIG. 128). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Y4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process of Y4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Y4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared (Y4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 2230 is set (Y4010). The state setting area is updated based on the command (Y4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (Y4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 2230 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of Y4008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the process of Y4004 to Y4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: No), Y4009 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 2230 is skipped, the process proceeds to Y4010, and the initial value of the RAM 2230 is set (Y4010).

  Note that the Y4009 clear process is skipped because when the process from Y4004 to the process of Y4006 is reached via the process of Y4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 have already been cleared by the process of Y4004. When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 2230 is stored without being cleared, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous Y4101 process was executed (Y4101). If the time has not elapsed (Y4101: No), the process proceeds to Y4111 without performing Y4102 to Y4110. In the process of Y4101, it is Y4102 to Y4110 that is related to display (production) that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Y4111 and the fluctuation display setting process of Y4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Y4101 (Y4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Y4103 to Y4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( Y4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Y4108 described later are set (Y4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Y4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to the process of Y4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of Y4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (Y4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Y4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (Y4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (Y4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of Y4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Y4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to Y4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of Y4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of Y4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (Y4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to a process of Y4112. Details of this command determination processing (Y4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Y4112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of Y4112 ends, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (Y4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Y4113 (Y4113: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off processing flag are turned on (Y4115), and the power off processing is executed (Y4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (Y4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of Y4113 (Y4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 2230 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 2230 (Y4114), and the RAM 2230 is destroyed. If not (Y4114: No), the process returns to Y4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 2230 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the customer waiting effect process (Y4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process (Y4105). This customer waiting effect processing (Y4105) includes a sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j which is set to ON when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main controller 110 is received. FIG. 2 The processing for setting the standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 2230m. Details of the customer waiting effect process (Y4105) will be described below.

  In the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 129, Y4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201). When it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201: Yes), the value of the special special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is updated (Y4202). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value of the special figure 1 stand-by counter 2230k is an upper limit (Y4203). Here, in this embodiment, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k. That is, the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k reaches the upper limit). Has been.

  When the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is less than the upper limit value (Y4203: No), the process proceeds to Y4205.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is the upper limit value (Y4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF (Y4204), and the process proceeds to Y4205. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to OFF in the process of Y4204, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that a later-described special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON, When the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  In the process of Y4201, if it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4201: No), the process of Y4202 to Y4204 is performed. Skip to Y4205.

  In the process of Y4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4205: Yes), the value of the special special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is updated (Y4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (30000) (Y4207). When the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is less than the upper limit value (Y4207: No), the process proceeds to Y4209.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4207, when the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (Y4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON, the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF (Y4208), and the process proceeds to Y4209. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to OFF in the process of Y4208, for example, when the display standby display command is set based on the setting of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, the special figure 2 When the standby flag 2230t is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  Also, in the process of Y4205, if it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4205: No), Y4206 and Y4207 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4209.

  In the process of Y4209, it is determined whether or not the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209). If it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209: Yes), the process of Y4211 to Y4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped, and this process ends. That is, the state in which the standby setting flag 2230u is set to ON is a state in which the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of each special figure has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, the processing load for setting the standby display type can be reduced by configuring so as not to execute the process for setting the standby display type when it is determined that the state is such a state.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 133, in the present embodiment, a new special figure fluctuation occurs when the standby flag (the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to ON. Even when a command indicating that it has been started (a special chart standby command indicating OFF) is received, processing for setting the standby setting flag 2230u to OFF is executed. Therefore, since the standby display type can always be reset every time the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changed, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) can be executed more appropriately.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (Y4210).

  In the process of Y4210, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4210: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 2230i is read (Y4211). . The standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) based on the read gaming state and the setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t (Y4212).

  Next, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set based on the determined standby display type (Y4213). Thereafter, the standby setting flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4214), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a command determination process (Y4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (Y4111). This command determination processing (Y4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (Y4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (Y4111), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 2230a provided in the RAM 2230, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (Y4302), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4301 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received. It is determined (Y4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of Y4303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (Y4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4304) and received. The fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (Y4305), and this process is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (Y4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4306). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4307), and the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (Y4308), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Y4306: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4309). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (Y4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved symbols of the special symbol variation display) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c provided in the RAM 2230 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value ( Y4310), the process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) reserved ball counter 2230c is set in the process of Y4310. Only the updating process is executed.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). Therefore, every time there is a starting win, the processing of Y4310 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 2030d.

  In the process of Y4309, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (Y4309: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4311). If it is determined in the process of Y4311 that a prize information command has been received (Y4311: Yes), the information on the received prize information command (whether special symbol lottery wins, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponding prize information The storage area 2230b is set (Y4312), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4311 that no winning information command has been received (Y4311: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Y4313). If it is determined that a status command is received (Y4313: Yes), status command processing (Y4314) is executed. Details of this state command process (Y4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 132, but based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of pachinko machine 10 is described. A process of setting (status) in the status setting area 2230i is executed.

  In the process of Y4313, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (Y4313: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command has been received from the main control device 110 (Y4315). . In the process of Y4315, if it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received (Y4315: Yes), the customer standby command process (Y4316) is executed. The details of the customer waiting command process (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. Based on the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main controller 110, the special figure 1 is shown in FIG. Processing for setting the standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is executed.

  In the process of Y4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (Y4315: No), the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining short time number command is received from the main controller 110. It is discriminated whether or not (Y4317). In the process of Y4315, when it is determined that either the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining short time number command has been received (Y4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (Y4318) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 134, but based on the remaining probability variable number command or remaining short time number command output from the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 A process for setting the contents of the effect display for display on the screen is executed.

  In the process of Y4317, when it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number command nor the remaining short time number command is received (Y4317: No), the process according to the other command is executed (Y4319), and this process is terminated. To do. In the process of Y4319, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 2230, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (Y4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (Y4302). This stop type command reception process (Y4302) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (Y4302) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 131, Y4302), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is set to ON, When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to ON. (Y4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (Y4402). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in Y4402 is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the state command process (Y4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (Y4314). This state command process (Y4314) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (Y4314) will be described below.

  In the state command processing (FIG. 132, Y4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 2230i provided in the RAM 2230 (Y4501). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command is received. Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (Y4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (Y4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a shift to the latent state (Y4503). In the process of Y4503, if the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (Y4503: Yes), a latent state notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (Y4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y4505), and the process proceeds to Y4506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 4502 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (Y4502: Yes), or the received command causes the transition to the latent state in the process of Y4503. If the status command is not shown (Y4503: No), the process proceeds to Y4506.

  In the process of Y4506, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4506), and this process ends.

  As described above, the state command process (Y4314) in the present embodiment is based on the gaming state set in the state setting area 2230i and the gaming state indicated by the state command output from the main controller 110. The remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state, and the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state. A process of controlling “120” as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 85A). On the other hand, when the big win is won during the latent state and the latent state is set again after the big hit game is finished, it is determined in the process of Y4502 that the latent state is set in the state setting area 2230i (Y4502). : Yes), in order to skip the processes of Y4504 and Y4505, the number of effect probabilities displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). There is nothing. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state, and the actual number of times of accuracy change is reset (set to 120 times), the display of the number of stage changes will be the same as the value displayed before winning the jackpot. Will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability changes (remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number of effect probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 85 (a)) (actual residual probability variation number). It is possible to make the player difficult to understand the timing when the latent state ends.

  In the state command processing (Y4314 in FIG. 132) described above, the number of times (120 times) that is the same as the actual number of times of change (120 times) of the third symbol display device 81 is increased when entering the latent state. Although it is configured so as to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual number of probability changes may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Next, the standby command process (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this standby command process (Y4316). This status command process (Y4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110. Based on (the special figure 1 standby command and the special figure 2 standby command), a process for setting the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t to ON or OFF is executed. The setting states of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are referred to in the above-described customer standby effect processing (see Y4105 in FIG. 129).

  When the standby command process (Y4316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 standby command has been received (Y4601). If it is determined in the process of Y4601 that the special figure 1 standby command has been received (Y4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4602), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (Y4601: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is turned off has been received. (Y4603). In the process of Y4603, when it is determined that a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is turned off has been received (Y4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (Y4604). ), The special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is reset (Y4605). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON (Y4606).

  In the process of Y4606, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON (Y4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to OFF. (Y4607), this process is terminated.

  That is, in the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on (the state where the special figure 1 has not changed and 30 seconds have passed), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to off. When a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 1 has been executed is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set off and the standby set flag 2230u is set off. In the customer standby effect process (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is off has not been received (Y4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (Y4608). In the process of Y4608, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is received (Y4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4609), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4608 that the special figure 2 standby command has not been received (Y4608: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has been received. (Y4610). In the process of Y4610, when it is determined that a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is turned off has been received (Y4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (Y4611). ), The special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is reset (Y4612). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4613).

  In the process of Y4613, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4613: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to OFF. (Y4614), this process is terminated.

  That is, in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (a state where 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 changing), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to OFF. When a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 has been executed is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to OFF and the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF. In the customer standby effect process (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4610, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has not been received (Y4610: No), this process ends.

  Next, the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (Y4318). This remaining number update process (Y4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and the remaining probability variable number command is sent from the main controller 110. Or based on receiving a short time remaining command. Processing for updating the contents set in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o, the effect probability variation number area 2230p, and the remaining short number of times area 2230q is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (Y4318), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4651). If it is determined in the process of Y4651 that the remaining probability variation command has been received (Y4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation area 2230o (Y4652). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653).

  That is, in the process of Y4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent probability state or the probability variation state, and if it is determined that it is the latent probability state, an effect display dedicated to the latent state will be described later. The process for executing is executed. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is determined to be in the probability variation state, the same effect display is executed in the probability variation state and the normal state, and thus this process is terminated without executing the dedicated effect display. To do.

  In the processing of Y4653, when it is determined that data indicating the latent state is stored (set) in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653: Yes), the remaining probability variation number notified (received) from the main control device 110 Is zero times (Y4654). In the process of Y4654, when it is determined that the remaining probability change number notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 0 (Y4654: Yes), an end effect of the latent state to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (Y4657). Then, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 2230i, and the processing proceeds to Y4661.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4654, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (Y4654: No), the effect probability variation count area The display count stored in 2230p is decremented by 1 (Y4657). And it is discriminate | determined whether the production | generation probability change frequency after subtraction is 0 times (Y4658). In the process of Y4658, when it is determined that the number of effect probability changes after subtraction is zero (Y4658: Yes), the number of remaining probability change frequency areas 2230o is set in the effect probability change frequency area 2230p (Y4659). Thereafter, a restoration effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set (Y4660), and the process proceeds to Y4661.

  That is, when the actual probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) stored (set) in the residual probability variation count area is 1 or more and the production probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) becomes zero. In order to notify the player that the latent state continues, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect displayed on D1 (revival effect) is executed.

  By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the timing at which the latent state ends, and to increase the remaining number of remaining effects after making the player think that the latent state has ended. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which this revival effect is executed is assumed to be when the effect probability change count (effect residual change count) is 0, but other configurations may be used. On the condition that (the number of remaining production changes) is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 5), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the revival effect, and the revival effect is executed based on the lottery result. May be. Thereby, the game can be performed while predicting at which timing (special figure fluctuation) the revival effect will occur with respect to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the revival effect may not be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, but may be executed, for example, using the ending period of the small hit game. In this case, on the condition that the production probability variation number (production residual variation number) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent state is not confirmed is displayed), It is desirable to perform a revival effect. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the restoration effect can be executed as the special figure variation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Further, it may be configured such that the long variation time during which the revival effect can be executed is set as the special figure variation time only in the final stage (for example, the actual remaining probability variation number is 10 or less) in the latent state. As a result, a display state in which the revival effect can be executed (a state in which a display state indicating that the probability probability variation number (the effect residual variation number) is 0 (or that the latent probability state has not been determined) is displayed is displayed. )) Is less likely to be executed, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the rebirth effect can be executed in the early stage of the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the variable display setting process (Y4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Y4112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is off (Y4701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to Y4705. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is on (Y4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is set to off (Y4702).

  Next, in the process of Y4703, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command in the process of Y4303 in the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 2230. Obtained from 2230z, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is generated (Y4703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of Y4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 and displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, so that the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. The display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 2230b is shifted (Y4704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not on (that is, off) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, process Y4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is on (Y4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to off (Y4706). In the process of Y4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230, and the second (2) A special pattern display variation pattern command is set (Y4707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of Y4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 and displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the second special symbol display variation pattern command to receive the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 2230b is shifted (Y4708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to ON (Y4709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (Y4709: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on (Y2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g to off (Y4710).

  In the process of Y4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (Y4711), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 149. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (Y6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (Y6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Y6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Y6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Y6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Y6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Y6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Y6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see Y6001 in FIG. 136). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) (Y6105), the boot program execution is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (Y6001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 137, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Y6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Y6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of Y6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Also, the boot program transferred by the processing of Y6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Y6101. And Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the process of Y6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 without performing the processes of Y6101 and Y6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Y6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Y6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of Y6003, then the power-on variation image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b when the power is turned on in the resident video RAM 235 (Y6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of Y6004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (Y6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 147 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see Y7502 in FIG. 147 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of Y6005, interrupt permission is set (Y6006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Y6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (a). FIG. 138 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Y6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (b). FIG. 138 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (Y6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (Y6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Y6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (Y6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143.

  In the display setting process (Y6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Y6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (Y6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Y6303) or the simple display setting process (Y6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Y6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (Y6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Y6305) are used. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (Y6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Y6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of Y6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Y6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Y6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (Y6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 139, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Y6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (Y6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Y6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Y6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Y6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Y6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (Y6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (Y6405), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (Y6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (Y6405). This variation pattern command processing (Y6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (Y6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of Y6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Y6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (Y6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Y6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of Y6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Y6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. If it is determined in the process of Y6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (Y6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Y6406). If there is a display stop type command (Y6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Y6407), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (Y6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (Y6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (Y6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed in 81 is finally set (Y6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Y6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. Set to ON (Y6603) and return to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Y6602 is described. In the task processing (Y6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Y6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Y6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of Y6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of Y6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y6406 that there is no display stop type command (Y6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (Y6408). If there is an opening command for use (Y6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (Y6409), and the process returns to the process of Y6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (Y6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a). FIG. 141A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (Y6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display opening command in the process of Y6408 (Y6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (Y6410). If there is a round number command for use (Y6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (Y6411), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the round number command process (Y6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (Y6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of Y6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (Y6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (Y6412). If there is an ending command for use (Y6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (Y6413), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the ending command process (Y6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (Y6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( Y6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of Y6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (Y6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (Y6414). If there is a change command (Y6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (Y6415), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (Y6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (Y7503) of the change of the back image due to reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (Y7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (Y7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of Y7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of Y7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by Y7002, The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the back image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of Y7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. In the process of Y6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (Y6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (Y6416), and there is an error command. If (Y6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (Y6417), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 143 (b), details of the error command processing (Y6417) will be described. FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and other error determination flags are set to OFF (Y7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Y7101 process, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the Y7102 process is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in Y7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Y6416 (Y6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (Y6418), and the process returns to Y6401.

  In the process of Y6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes). ), The processing of Y6402 to Y6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of Y6401 to Y6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of Y6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the simple command determination process (Y6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 140 (b)), and for other commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in Y6501 processing. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Y6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the contents are cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (Y6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 144, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Y7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of Y7202 to Y7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to Y7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (Y7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (Y7202), and then Y7203 to Y7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of Y7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Y7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (Y7301).

  In the task processing (Y6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of Y7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Y7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (Y7204) or in the process of Y7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7203: No), the process proceeds to Y7205.

  In Y7205, pointer update processing is executed (Y7205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Y7401). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Y7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (Y7402). As a result, if it is End information (Y7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Y7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (Y7403: Yes), display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Y7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Y7405), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (Y7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( Y7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Y7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Y7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7206). In the task process (Y6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of Y7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (Y7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Y7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Y7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Y7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag is on. (Y7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (Y7209: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Y7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Y7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Y7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the changing effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (Y6304), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by Y7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (Y7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Y7216). If the demo display flag is off (Y7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7217), and the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Y7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of Y7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (Y7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (Y6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147 and FIG. 148, details of the transfer setting process (Y6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 147 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (Y7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of Y7501, that is, if it is off (Y7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Y7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Y7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (b). FIG. 147 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (Y7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (Y7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (Y7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (Y7602). In the process of Y7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Y7602 (Y7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Y7602: Yes), the process proceeds to Y7603. Also, as a result of the process of Y7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Y7601: No), the process proceeds to Y7603.

  In the process of Y7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Y7603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Y7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information related to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of Y7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (Y7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Y7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) (see Y7501: No in FIG. 147 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (Y7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Y7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Y7205) of the display setting process (Y6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (Y7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Y7702). If it is transfer data information (Y7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. First address (storage source start address) and last address (storage source last address) and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (Y7703), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7704), and the process proceeds to Y7705.

  In the process of Y7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Y7702: No), the processes of Y7703 and Y7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y7705. In the process of Y7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (Y7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If yes (Y7705: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (Y7706).

  In the process of Y7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of Y7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Y7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Y7706: Yes), the process proceeds to Y7707. Also, as a result of the process of Y7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Y7705: No), the process proceeds to Y7707.

  In the process of Y7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Y7707). If the transfer start flag is on (Y7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Y7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Y7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to the process of Y7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Y7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (Y7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (Y7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (Y7709: Yes), this means that the back image has been changed. Among the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (Y7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (Y7712), and the process proceeds to Y7713.

  In the process of Y7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Y7713). The determination in the process of Y7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “on”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Y7713 (Y7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Y7713 (Y7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (Y7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of Y7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Y7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed previously, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above drawing process (Y6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set in the transfer setting process (Y6305), a drawing list (FIG. 23) is generated (Y7801). That is, in the process of Y7801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the front side from the sprite that should be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Y6305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Y7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of Y7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (Y7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if the value is "0" and setting it to "0" if it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the three gaming states of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state are configured to come and go with a jackpot or the like as a trigger. Then, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games The lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, it will be a small win with a high probability, and the probability of a big win will also be increased, so that the ball is awarded to the specific winning opening 65a and the winning ball It is possible to increase the number of opportunities for acquiring the game game compared to other game states. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of shifting to the latent state.

  Moreover, in this 3rd Embodiment, it is set as the structure which switches the classification of the special symbol in which a lottery is easy to be performed according to a game state (it switches a main variation and a sub variation). Specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation in the latent certain state. In each gaming state, if the elapsed time after the main variation has stopped is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), even if the secondary variation is being executed, a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state is displayed. (Customer waiting demonstration screen, latent demonstration display) is displayed. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a certain time has elapsed since entering a variable stop state, it is determined that the player is not playing a game and a demonstration display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being performed based on the presence or absence of a demonstration display. The game can be started on the machine. Thereby, the operating rate improvement of a gaming machine can be aimed at.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine having specifications in which a plurality of symbols fluctuate simultaneously, even if some symbols are in a variable stop state, as long as other symbols fluctuate. , Could not run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player searching for a vacant stand to determine whether or not it is a vacant stand from the display content.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the normal state or the probability variation state, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demonstration screen according to only the main variation state (regardless of the sub variation state). . As a result, even if the player puts the ball into the second entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after starting the display of fluctuation for 600 seconds, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a demo display (special display) of a special mode in which the same character 811 is continuously displayed when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation is stopped in the latent state. The configuration is set. That is, the display contents of the same system are used during normal display and during demonstration display. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, since the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

  Further, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment. . Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, a special reach effect is developed in which a new symbol string enters the frame and develops into a reach effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols that can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviation, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, it is configured so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 1640 in the probability variation state, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 rather than the second entrance 1640 in the normal state or the latent state. May be configured to facilitate the entry of the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state or the latent probability state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. Alternatively, a variation pattern in which the variation time is extremely short (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 2020f3 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment may be interchanged. Also, if the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to F) in the probability variation state, if the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, set the number of time reductions 120 times, in the normal state and the latent state, It is good also as a structure which sets the number of time reductions 0 times. As a result, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation state, the gaming state after the big hit is easily set to the probability variation state again (it becomes easy to loop the probability variation state), so that the superiority of the probability variation state is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state instead of the latent state or the probability variation state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A2020f1 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment are exchanged, and the normal state is likely to be looped in the big hit in the normal state (the V pass switch 65e3 is It is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type (which is difficult to pass), and in the latent state or probability change state, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the opening / closing pattern through which the ball easily passes. Also good.

  In the third embodiment, among the opening / closing patterns set for the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball passing through the V-pass switch 65e3 is regarded as a pattern that is difficult to pass, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round. The open / close pattern to be set is provided, but the open period may be shortened to reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. Although it is configured to face the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only a main symbol that is reached when a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in) (in the example of FIG. 83 (a), the main symbol with the number “1”) is the new symbol row L4. You may comprise so that it may look up at. Further, for example, the main symbol other than the main symbol to which the reach is applied may be configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the number of main symbols in a form in which a new symbol row L4 is looked up. That is, the higher the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach production. In this case, when all the main symbols look up to the new symbol row L4, the jackpot may be determined (for example, selected only in the case of a win super reach). By configuring in this way, when a symbol that has been changed is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment, attention can be paid to the aspect of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in games can be improved. .

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are directed to the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach effect may be made based on the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4. In other words, the higher the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which suggests the expectation degree by which the reservation ball | bowl corresponding to a reservation symbol becomes a big hit instead of suggesting the big hit expectation degree in a special reach production with the number of reservation symbols. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 2230b, the change pattern of each reserved ball is prefetched, and the change pattern (outgoing super reach or winning super reach) held in the reserved ball is developed. If it is determined that a sphere is included, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that develops into the super reach effect performs an effect of directing in the direction of the new symbol row L4 when temporarily stopped in the special reach effect. It is good also as a structure. Thereby, at the time of a temporary stop in special super reach production, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the reserved symbols, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the third embodiment, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is configured to scroll in parallel with the symbol rows L1 to L3. However, the new symbol row L4 is However, it is not always necessary to scroll and display the symbol rows L1 to L3. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right or left side of each symbol row L1 to L3, and scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each symbol row L1 to L3). Thereby, the freedom degree of the effect when the special reach effect is selected can be further increased. Further, the number of new symbol sequences is not limited to one, and when a special reach effect is executed, a plurality of symbol sequences may be newly displayed. By adopting a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, it is possible to increase combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can be developed into special reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that may develop into a special reach when stopping at a stop symbol corresponding to a departure, so that the player can further develop into a special reach effect. Can be expected with high frequency. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, a result display (see FIG. 86 (b)) showing the result of the latent state is basically performed from the end of the latent state until the first special symbol fluctuation display is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result display of the latent state may be performed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the third embodiment, after the latent state is completed, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over the two special symbol lotteries, but this is not limited to 12 seconds. The display may be arbitrarily set (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) as long as the display can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

  In the third embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In addition, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won for the big hit or the small hit, the other special symbol is the big hit or the small hit until the stoppage of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. For example, it may be configured such that a forced lottery that is not won is executed and the lottery result is surely missed. Thereby, the situation where both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol win a big hit or a small win can be suppressed. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining short time number are not subtracted based on the number of times that the forced lottery is executed. Thereby, a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 181. In the third embodiment described above, the first entrance 64 where the ball is easy to enter by left-handed and the second entrance 1640 where the ball is easy to enter by right-handed are provided. In the normal state and the probability change state to be executed, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 is mainly executed (special figure 1). In the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the entrance of the ball into the second entrance 1640 is mainly performed. The game to be executed (see Fig. 2 substantially variable game) is configured to be executed. Then, in the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is used for a predetermined period (for example, the lottery in FIG. 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640, for example, , About 1.65 seconds) The small hit that is in an open state is set (the lottery probability is about ½), and it is configured to be able to expect a lottery with a small hit.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that both the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG. By setting the time to be shorter than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1, the lottery of FIG. 2 is more easily executed than that of FIG. 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and short time state of normal symbol) is shorter than the number of times the high probability state of special symbol is set (for example, 120 times). (For example, 100 times), and when the number of special drawing lotteries (number of times of fluctuation of the special figure) exceeds 100 in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is changed to the latent state. .

  In addition, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the variation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the latent certain state. The degree of occurrence of the small hit in the latent state is varied depending on the situation. Specifically, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state immediately after starting the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the fluctuation due to the first special symbol will continue until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next time. Is executed, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the latent state is reduced, and as a result, the occurrence degree of the small hit can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is in the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or if it shifts to the latent state near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol is immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the change of the symbol is started, the occurrence degree of the small hit can be increased as a result. In addition, as will be described in detail later, in a region where the ball is launched by right-handed (right-handed region), a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b Is provided so that the ball cannot enter only one entrance (for example, the second entrance 1640b) (so as to be difficult).

  By configuring in this way, as in the above-described third embodiment, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is the most advantageous game state for the player and improve the player's motivation for the game. it can. In addition, since the degree of advantage (the degree of occurrence of small hits) when changing from the probabilistic state to the latent state can be varied depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide more complex gaming characteristics to the player, Can be prevented from getting bored early. In addition, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b that executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball and the second entrance 1640b that executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Is provided in the right-handed area, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and an excessively advantageous state for the player. It can suppress giving.

  Furthermore, in 3rd Embodiment, it comprises so that a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may perform lottery simultaneously (execution of a fluctuation | variation), and the lottery result of any one special symbol (for example, 2nd special symbol) Is a win (big hit or small win), and when the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the winning is determined), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is off It was configured to be forcibly stopped with symbols.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result of that win is shown. When the symbol is stopped (when the winning is determined), the measurement (count) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed. It is configured to resume measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted at the timing when the winning game based on the timing is finished (timing at which the variation of the special symbol is possible).

  As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute a lottery (execution of fluctuation) at the same time, the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can play the game. It can be made not to be dissatisfied with it.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in terms of the configuration in the game board 13 where the variable winning device 65 is left-placed from the right-handed area. And a point where the right-handed ball has moved to the lower center area where the ball can be entered, a point where a sorting unit 660 is provided in place of the second entrance 1640, and the ball to the second entrance 1640 The content of the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of the ball into the sorting unit 660 is provided instead of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts the entry. The content of the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the third embodiment. The point that the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the content of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed And the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 150, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 150, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is arranged at the position (the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right-handed region)) where the variable winning device 65 is arranged in the third embodiment. The second entry that is provided on the downstream side of the right-handed region (the lower right side of the board surface 13) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the opening 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the central area of the board (below the first entrance 64). Although details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in an upper part thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, a right first entrance 64b where a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. The second ball entrance 1640b is provided, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 via the passage port is distributed to one of these entrances. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by hitting the ball toward the sorting unit 660 by hitting right.

  Further, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f that can be changed between a permissible position that allows a ball to flow into a passage port provided in the upper part of the sorting unit 660 and a regulating position that regulates the ball is arranged. Yes. This electric accessory 660f is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the third embodiment described above for a predetermined period when the result of the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is a hit. It is controlled so as to change to the allowable position (1 second x 2 times). As a result, in the normal state, a game in which a left strike is performed in a normal state (hereinafter referred to as a left strike game), and a game in which a right strike is performed in a direction aiming at the first entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as a right strike game) The first special symbol can be changed more efficiently than aiming at the entrance 64b.

  Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 151A and 151B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is made of a member that allows the inside to be seen through, and the spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), an upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passage opening through which a sphere can enter, and transmission that can detect that the sphere has passed through the passage opening. A type of incoming ball sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage opening, a sorting member 900 is provided for distributing the sphere to the right first entrance 64b or the second entrance 1640b. A right first entrance 64b is disposed in the lower left direction of the sorting member 900 in front view, and a second entrance 1640b is disposed in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 in front view. The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed to the right first entry opening 64b and the second entry opening 1640b by the sorting member 900.

  The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the entire sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front depending on the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined in a downward direction toward the lower left (see FIG. 151 (b)), and the right first incoming ball disposed in the lower left direction in front view with respect to the sorting member 900. A sphere falls toward the mouth 64b (the sphere is guided to the right first entrance 64b).

  Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c. ing. On the other hand, the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660 is in a state in which the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surfaces constituting the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c are horizontal). In this state, the base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the back side (on the center line of the passage opening) where the magnet 900b is disposed.

  The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet is positioned at a position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is located directly above (on the center line of the space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about 1 ball). The position 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since each magnet is arrange | positioned so that it may become the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), it repels and it may stop in the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces right above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either right or left.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 900 is in a position (upward position) where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port, the distribution member 900 is repelled by the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901. The storage unit 900a and the storage unit 900c turn toward the receiving side of the ball entering the sorting unit 660 (the passing port side of the sorting unit 660). Therefore, it is possible to reliably distribute the balls that have entered the distribution unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b.

  In addition, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, so that, for example, the receiving portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the right first entrance 64b. It is possible to prevent the minute member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the sphere to the first right entrance 64b, the storage portion 900c is directed upward, and the storage portion 900c receives and receives the sphere that has entered the distribution unit 660. Since the sorting member 900 is rotated about 30 degrees clockwise by the weight of the container, the accommodating part 900c is inclined in a direction inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the sphere falls from the accommodating part 900c. Then, the ball enters the second entrance 1640b (the sphere is guided to the second entrance 1640b). As described above, since the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the sorting unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, the right first entrance The balls can be equally distributed to the 64b and the second entrance 1640b for winning. Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

  A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the sorting member 900 and the right first entrance 64b to guide the sphere contained in the housing 900a to the right first entrance 64b. Between the member 900 and the second entrance 1640b, a guide plate 900Z2 is provided for guiding the sphere accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a to the second entrance 1640b. Thereby, the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the entrances.

  Further, a restriction member (not shown) for restricting the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided on the upper end side (the distribution member 900 side) of each guide plate 900z1 and 900z2, and the distribution member 900 and the restriction plate are restricted. The rotation range is regulated by contacting the member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sorting member 900 from rotating excessively (rotating further counterclockwise than the state shown in FIG. 151 (b)) due to the weight of the sphere accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the entrances.

<Game description of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 159, the contents of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described. In 4th Embodiment, the point which changed the transition ratio to each game state (a normal state, a probability change state, a latent probability state) with respect to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, and the time reduction number given in a probability change state were changed. When the point, the time when the variation time of each special symbol in the probability variation state and the latent probability state is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at the winning symbol Suspended (temporarily stopped) the measurement of the variation time for the other special symbol variation at the displayed timing (timing of winning), and the suspended variation time after the winning game ended based on the lottery result of one special symbol This is different in that a configuration for restarting the measurement is used.

  First, with reference to FIG. 152, the flow of the game state transition in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment shifts between three gaming states (normal state, probability change state, and latent probability state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above. It is configured.

  Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above. Has been. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantially special figure 1 variation). Further, in the present embodiment, since the small win is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), the small hit game is not executed.

  Next, in the probability variation state (probability variation gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than that in the third embodiment described above, and the right region of the board surface 13 (the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). ) (Hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game is executed in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed simultaneously by flowing a ball into the sorting unit 660. Details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is used as the variation time of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the probability variation state. The short-time fluctuation (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 and the long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 are set and executed in the probability variation state according to the selected fluctuation time. The lottery (variation) ratio is set differently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times (100 times) is set smaller than the number of times (120 times) the probability variation state is set as the number of time reductions in the probability variation state. Therefore, in the probability variation state, when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent probability state (20 times). Yes. Thus, for example, even after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if it shifts to the probable change state instead of the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, it does not go through the special symbol jackpot Since it becomes possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the short time fluctuation (3 seconds) and the long time fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the special symbol during the probability variation state is special. When the number of symbol changes exceeds 100 and the game state transitions from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times), depending on the second special symbol's state of change, a small hit will occur during the latent state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the short-time state ends when the long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol starts and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state, The timing at which the next change is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 162 (a)) in the probability variation state and 5 seconds (see FIG. 162 (b)) in the latent certain state, the second special symbol is set. The first special symbol is set to be capable of changing 20 times before 180 seconds elapse until the next change is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the sorting unit 660 and alternately enters the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a difference depending on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent state (20 times).

  In the latent certain state (latent certain gaming state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the third embodiment described above, and the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The lottery (fluctuation) is configured to be executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 substantial fluctuation). Since other elements are the same as those in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the player is motivated to move to the latent state that is the most advantageous game state for the player without winning a special symbol jackpot. The effect is that it can be continuously increased. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, in the state in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating simultaneously in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, either one (the special figure 2) is hit (big hit or The flow of each special figure variation and effect display (effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the case of “small hit” will be described. FIG. 153 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation. The third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display based on the variation of the special symbol 1 (an effect display using the third symbol). In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously (lottery) like the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 can cope with the change of each special figure. There are those in which the effect display is executed. In the present embodiment, among each special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2), a fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations and a fluctuation display (secondary) corresponding to the other special figure fluctuations. Fluctuation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 80).

  The main variation and the sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure fluctuation is switched according to the gaming state. For example, the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a substantial fluctuation in the normal state becomes the main fluctuation, The variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be a sub-variation. In this way, the player can display the third symbol display by displaying, as the main variation, the special diagram variation that is substantially executed in the set gaming state among the special diagram 1 variation and the special diagram 2 variation. The game result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner while being displayed on the device 81.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example is shown in which the change display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched between the main change and the sub-variation according to the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation may be switched randomly between the main fluctuation and the sub fluctuation, or a predetermined law (for example, alternating ) May be used. Further, the player may select a configuration. Even with such a configuration, a similar problem occurs when a win is won by special figure fluctuation on the side not corresponding to the main fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 153, the description will be continued. First, the fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are started simultaneously, and special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed on third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of each special figure (after the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it has won a small hit, and the fluctuation of special figure 1 Measurement of fluctuation time for is interrupted. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted during the period in which the measurement of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is interrupted (the interruption period in FIG. 153). The one-symbol display device 37 is configured so that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. By comprising in this way, when a small hit game is performed, it can alert | report to a player that the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the same process as the variable display setting process (see Y4112 in FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is executed. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed in this manner corresponds to the predetermined period (the variation time of the special diagram variation) even if the special diagram variation is suspended (measurement of the special diagram variation time is suspended). It is configured to be executed continuously for 8 seconds. Thereby, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the interruption of the special figure fluctuation ( (Or display effect) is interrupted, and a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable can be suppressed.

  Here, when the special figure change is interrupted (measurement of the special figure change time is interrupted) as described above, the third symbol change display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the case of continuous execution, the suspended special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation is finished, and the third symbol variation display (or effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (interrupt period of special figure fluctuation) occurs at the timing when the (display) ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, the variation pattern set by the variation display setting process (see Y412 in FIG. 135) The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed until the symbol confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received after the execution of the effect display). The swing effect that slightly swings each symbol is executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (a special figure fluctuation interruption period) occurs between the timing at which the above-described special figure variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) During the error period of time, the 3rd symbol display device 81 continues the shaking effect with respect to the 3rd symbol, and the player's willingness to play is reduced by making the pachinko machine 10 think that a malfunction has occurred. There was a problem of letting it go.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the above-described problem is solved by configuring such that an additional effect can be executed using the error period described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a small hit at the timing when the normal effect for 8 seconds is finished as the special figure 1 effect display executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, a swing effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to swing the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 during the period (one second) until the small hit gaming state ends. After that, when the small hit gaming state is finished and the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation ends, and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81. ) Is terminated during the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 153), it is possible to suppress the situation in which the third symbol is continuously displayed in a swinging manner. Can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the content of the additional effect executed according to the error period is configured to be different. Thereby, a more suitable effect display can be executed for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, the type of additional effect executed based on the length of the period during which the additional effect is executed is configured to be different. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the sub-variation lottery result. Can be suppressed.

  FIG. 154 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), an additional effect is not executed. This is because if the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable on the contrary. The additional production is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), until the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (see point D to point E in FIG. 153), the effect corresponding to the main variation is shaken in a state where the effect has been completed. Stopped display.

  Next, FIG. 154 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect A is executed when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed on each symbol is changed to “?” In the state where the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed. The shaking stop is displayed. Thereby, it can suppress that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player.

  In the present embodiment, a display mode that hides only the numbers attached to each symbol is used. However, for example, a display mode that also hides characters (such as “animals”) of each symbol may be used. By doing in this way, it can suppress more that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player. Moreover, since this additional effect A is an effect which only changed the display mode (symbol display mode) of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation, even if it is executed when the remaining period is short It can be suppressed that the player feels uncomfortable.

  FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect B is executed when the remaining period is a part of the predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 154 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the player is subjected to fluctuations in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed in the small area Ds5. Thereby, even if the state in which the main fluctuation is shaken and stopped and displayed is continued, the player can easily grasp that the fluctuation is in progress.

  In the present embodiment, the additional display B is configured such that the display of the main display area Dm is the same display as in FIG. 154 (a), that is, the display is not added to the display of the main display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be performed in the same way as in FIG. 154 (b). . Thereby, it becomes possible to execute an additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 155 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect C is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect C is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in front view, and in the center of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 A game description is displayed. In this way, the player is given a sense of incongruity by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect ends. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation. Also, in the sub display area Ds, a telop for notifying the player that the change is being executed in the small area Ds5 is displayed as in FIG. 155 (a). Thereby, it can be made easy to grasp that the player is changing.

  FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period or longer (6 seconds or longer). As shown in FIG. 156, in this additional effect D, as in the additional effect C shown in FIG. 155 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In the central part of the region Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). As described above, when the period (remaining period) during which the additional effect is executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect using the remaining period.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the configuration in which the fluctuations of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are executed at the same time, one of the special figures is stopped at the symbol indicating the win. In the third embodiment described above, since the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is resumed after the winning game is finished when displayed. As described above, the game can be executed without forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

  Further, the fluctuation display (for example, main fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is set in advance even when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped. The period of time (the period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure) is continuously executed, so that the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special figure is prevented from being interrupted by the lottery result of the special figure. it can. As a result, for example, when an effect with a story is being executed as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation, a win is won by one special figure fluctuation and the game is started per win. However, it is possible to execute a production having a story corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that a game effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the fluctuation of the other special figure is completed and the other special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81. Although the corresponding variation display period will be different, it is configured to execute additional effects using the different period (remainder period), so the special figure variation for the player It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the period and the period of the variable display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

  In the fourth embodiment, the additional effect executed when the fluctuation period of the special figure and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special figure fluctuation are different from each other in the length of the different period (remainder period). Since it changes so that it may change according to it, giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player can be suppressed more.

  Specifically, when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be executed. The additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the extra period for which it is difficult to provide an additional effect with respect to a player arises, it can suppress giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player. In the fourth embodiment, as an additional effect in which only part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation has been completed is changed, among the variation displays corresponding to the special figure variation, An additional effect in which the display mode indicating the lottery result is changed is configured to be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the special figure fluctuation period ends.

  In addition, when the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is executed (the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation is completed, but the fluctuation of the special figure is not completed). During the period), since a new special figure change is not executed, the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the remainder period is a predetermined period, the display ("display during change") for notifying the player that the special figure is changing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which no new special figure variation is executed is a normal state.In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period is a predetermined period. The above-mentioned “display during change” is displayed at the same time as the additional effect executed in a certain case is started. For example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the additional effect is executed. You may comprise so that "display during a change" may be performed after progress. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, for 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-period additional effect described above is executed. Can be suppressed by the person.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when a surplus period of a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds) is set, information not related to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content) is displayed. An additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By comprising in this way, the information regarding a game can be alert | reported to a player effectively using the period when a new special figure fluctuation | variation is not started by the display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the special drawing lottery result, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the extra period. In the fourth embodiment, the information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure. However, other information may be displayed. For example, a past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, among the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation that are simultaneously executed, the special figure fluctuation that the player expects the lottery result is the main fluctuation, and the other is the sub fluctuation. Set so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed in the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily grasp the contents of the main change. Yes. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the fluctuation contents of the main fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in this 4th Embodiment, it is comprised so that the special figure (special figure used as a real change object) which a player expects in a lottery result may be switched according to a game state, but the special figure used as a real change object. Is executed as the main variation, the game content can be displayed (notified) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the flow of fluctuation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state in the fourth embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 157 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation in the first rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 2, FIG. 157 (b). These are timing charts which show a flow in case the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent state (the 121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, the advantageous state (latent state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, In the case where the setting is limited to 120 times, the number of times that the advantageous state is set when the special figure fluctuation (the special figure 1 fluctuation or the special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the probability variation number). ) Is subtracted. In this case, when the special figure change executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (fluctuation frequency “121” in FIG. 157) becomes the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 157 (b)), and the special figure 2 fluctuation. (See FIG. 157 (a)).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state, a short variation time is set as the special figure variation time in the latent state. (See FIG. 162 (b)), configured to display the game result (see FIG. 86 (b)) displayed when the latent probability state ends during the special figure change executed after the latent probability state ends. is doing. Specifically, the game time (FIG. 86 (b) is made to grasp the game time (FIG. 86 (b)) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state. This time is sufficient (12 seconds in this embodiment).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 change that is executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state is performed in the first rotation after the completion of the latent state. Whether it becomes a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation for the second rotation varies depending on the game situation in the latent state, so if the special figure fluctuation time for the first rotation after the completion of the latent state is set to 12 seconds, the latent There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game result of the state.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the completion of the latent state is set to a time sufficient for allowing the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 86 (b) (12 seconds in this embodiment). It is configured to notify the game result using the fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in any of the special figure fluctuations. The game result of the state can be notified.

  In other words, in the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation (the number of fluctuations “122”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. In the case shown in FIG. 157 (b), the special figure fluctuation at the first rotation (the number of fluctuations “121”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. .

  In the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the game result is obtained using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state until the start of the special figure 1 change which is the main change in the normal state. It is good also as a structure to alert | report.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159, the screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display A, FIG. 158 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display B, and FIG. FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display A, and FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display B.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. In the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the third embodiment described above, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partially changed. Is different.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

  The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the fourth embodiment is a first jackpot type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91) used in the third embodiment. When the value of C2 is changed, when the jackpot H is specified in place of the jackpot G that is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and when a V win is won with some jackpot types This is different from the point that the assigned short time is set to 100 instead of 120. Other than that, the third embodiment is the same as the third embodiment, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (a), when the symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, the big hit A is selected as the big hit type and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is “30 to 79”, the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type. When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 44”, the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ In the case of 45 to 49 ", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and in the case where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is" 50 to 99 ", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

  Here, the jackpot H that is a jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the fourth embodiment will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which two rounds (R) of jackpot game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the jackpot game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game). It is difficult to identify a game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent probability state, is the winning game (ie, jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability change count to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game that does not change the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (that is, a small hit game), the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be performed while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fourth embodiment, the period in which the normal table A2020f1 is referred to the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) of the third embodiment described above is set as a latent probability. After the end of the state, instead of the third rotation after the end of the latent state, after the ninth rotation after the end of the latent state, the normal table Bb2020fb2 is provided instead of the normal table B2020f2, and the probability change table 2020f3 is replaced The point that the table 2020fb3 is provided, the point that the latent probability table b2020fb4 is provided instead of the latent probability table 2020f4, and the normal table Cb2020fb5 that is referred to in the period of the third to eighth rotations after the latent probability state ends. It differs in the point provided.

  Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the fourth embodiment (game characteristics different from the third embodiment described above) will be described. As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured such that a maximum of four lotteries shown in FIG. Thus, for example, when a right-handed game is executed during the latent state and the lottery of FIG. 2 is stored in a reserved state, the stored state is stored when the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. The lottery shown in FIG. 2 is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, in order to prevent the lottery shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation pattern is set so that the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the lottery of FIG. 2 that is held and stored during the latent state is executed in the normal state. .

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, in order to suppress execution of special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time even if the lottery of special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed during the normal state, The predetermined period after the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is set so that the fluctuation time for the lottery of the special drawing 2 is shortened. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is executing an appropriate game.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, when one special figure stops at a symbol indicating a winning (big hit or small winning), until the winning game based on that hit ends (the winning game ends) However, since the special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped), the long-time fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed. If it is, even if the big win is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be in the period until the long-term fluctuation ends. There is a possibility that the game state which is not executed and which is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

  Against such a problem, a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is a subsequent period in the normal state. By configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected for (a period after the special drawing lottery is executed eight times), the above-described problem can be solved.

  Here, the normal table Bb2020fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. The normal table Bb2020fb2 is different from the normal table B2020f2 of the third embodiment described above in that the variation time defined in a part of the variation pattern is changed, and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The difference from the third embodiment will be described in detail. In the normal table Bb2020fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)”. Variable time is specified. In other words, until the special drawing lottery is executed twice after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)” regardless of the symbol type and the determination result. Time will be set.

  By configuring in this way, any one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state can be made the fluctuation of FIG. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent state is notified in correspondence with the fluctuation of FIG. 1, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably ensure the period for notifying the game result.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the normal table Bb2020fb2 that is referred to only for a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special figure change is executed twice). Although it is stipulated that the same variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the symbol type or the result of the determination, it is not necessary to set all the variation times to be the same. You may comprise so that it may set. In this case, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time of special figure 2 longer than the fluctuation time of special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 won in the jackpot is stopped and the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the effect display executed in response to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

  In the fourth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, an effect display (for example, a game in the latent state) executed in response to the change in the special figure 1 In order to execute the result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (Special Figure 1) is displayed in the period of two special figure fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. Or, by configuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 fluctuates for 12 seconds regardless of the timing at which the fluctuation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing a game result in a latent state) corresponding to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is executed. Continuously after the gaming state transitions from the latent state to the normal state When the special figure 1 fluctuates, a predetermined effect display (for example, a result display indicating a game result in the latent state) is executed in response to the first special figure 1 fluctuation, and the second special figure 1 is executed. As for the fluctuation, it is preferable to execute a normal effect display that suggests the corresponding lottery result to the player.

  Next, the normal table Cb2020fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb2020fb5. The normal table Cb2020fb5 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the completion of the latent state is selected.

  The normal table Cb2020fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is shorter than the normal table Bb2020fb2. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the determination result. By configuring in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent state is fully consumed within a predetermined period (within the special figure fluctuation of 8 rotations) after the game state has shifted to the normal state. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced due to long-term fluctuations when the game state is shifted despite the appropriate game being executed.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 will be described. The special variation pattern is selected during the period in which the special drawing lottery corresponding to the sum of (4) and the maximum reserved storage number (4) of the special drawing 2 is executed. It is only necessary to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes). For example, it corresponds to the special figure 1 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. The variation pattern is set with reference to the normal table Bb2020fb2 by configuring the shortest variation time to be four times longer than the longest variation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. Variation of Special Figure 1 By drawing) is finished, the drawing of the special symbol 2 being held memories may be executed all. By doing in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 reserved and stored in a shorter period can be digested.

  Further, a special performance period for displaying the result of the latent state after the game state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state until the lottery stored in FIG. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of FIG. 2 in which the lottery result is a big win during the latent state is stored on hold, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big win is stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Furthermore, after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is exhausted), the effect display in the normal state is executed, so that the effect display in the normal state is executed. It is preferable not to execute the lottery shown in FIG. This makes it easier for hall clerk to display a state in which the special figure 2 is variably displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, while the appropriate game is not being executed. Can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can appropriately respond to the player.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3. The probability change table b2020fb3 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the same variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the probability variation state regardless of the number of held balls and the determination result. is doing. Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a winning probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. The deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

  Also, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are set for each of the determination results. ing. Specifically, when the result of the determination in FIG. 2 is a win (big hit), the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 159” and the probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) Are associated, and the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

  When the determination result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the small hit probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, The small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is out of the range, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 159”, and the probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated. Out of the range of “160 to 198”, the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated.

  Here, the relationship between the game content in the probability variation state in the fourth embodiment and the variation time set in each of the above-described special figures (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 152, among the high probability states (120 times), a probability variation state in which time is given to the first 100 times is set. If the number of special drawing lotteries exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot, a latent state in which no time is given is set.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing the right-handed game, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter a ball (see FIG. 150). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, since the variation time is set so that both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 can be executed during the certain variation state as described above, the third described above. Unlike the embodiment, the right-handed game can be executed during the probability change state.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a right-handed game is executed during the probability change state, and a game is executed in which a ball is alternately entered into the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Since the lottery between 1 and special figure 2 is executed based on the set fluctuation time, for example, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2, so that The lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 2 can be executed more than that in FIG. 1. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of 3 minutes is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. In addition, lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 is often executed.

  In this way, by changing the rate at which special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure of special figure 2) is executed depending on the set fluctuation time, a game with tension to the player can be obtained. It becomes possible to execute. In this embodiment, the variation time of FIG. 1 is composed of one type (10 seconds) and the variation time of FIG. 2 is composed of two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous to the player. The shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (figure of special figure 2) is made shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous for the player, and is advantageous to the player. The longest fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation (figure 2) may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player. You may comprise so that several types of fluctuation | variation time may be set with respect to a figure (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2).

  Furthermore, as a variation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) on the side which is disadvantageous to the player, with a low probability (for example, only in the range of “1” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1), You may comprise so that the variation time (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the longest variation time of the special figure fluctuation | variation (variation of special figure 2) of an advantageous side may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a probability variation state in which a lot of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation time of each special figure in the probability variation state is set regardless of the number of held balls, but the variation time is configured to be different depending on the number of held balls. For example, you may make it lengthen the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 advantageous to a player, so that the number of reservation balls decreases. Thereby, in order to execute many lotteries in FIG. 2, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of held balls is always the upper limit.

  In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the special figure stored on hold is discriminated, and a notification (pre-reading) suggesting the variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the state stored on hold (Variable time notification) may be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is small (for example, when the number of held balls is 0 or 1) as a variation pattern corresponding to the value of a specific variation type counter CS1 (for example, “10 to 30”). When a long variation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected and the number of reserved balls is large (for example, when the number of retained balls is 2 or more), a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. In this configuration, the player may be informed by pre-reading change time notification that the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 of “0 to 30” is stored on hold. Thereby, the player can more actively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

  The contents described above are executed for the special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure 2 fluctuation), but the similar technical idea is disadvantageous for the player. (Variation). In addition, as the number of reserved memories to be referred to when changing the variation time according to the number of reserved memories, a value obtained by adding the numbers of reserved memories in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 may be referred to, or the fluctuation is executed. It may be possible to refer only to the number of reserved memories corresponding to the symbol type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).

  Further, in the probability variation state, the special drawing lottery number (special figure fluctuation number) is 100, which is the sum of the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. 1 and the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be varied according to the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

  Next, the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4. The latency table b2020fb4 is different from the latency table 2020f4 of the third embodiment described above in that the variation time of the special figure 1 is set shorter and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set according to the number of balls held. The difference is that the point of change is different from the point of change of the fluctuation time in FIG.

  Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a short hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. , A short-circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is defined.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the result of the determination of special figure 2 is a win (big hit), the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. Is associated with a short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second), and the number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3, and a short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with a range of “0 to 198”. . Also, when the result of the determination in FIG. 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 198”, and the small hit short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second). ), The number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is wrong is out of the range of “0 to 198” as the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of held balls, the short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

  As described above, in the latent accuracy table b2020fb4 referred to during the latent accuracy state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of variation time in FIG. 2 when the determination result is a small hit. It is possible to suppress a game (so-called “stopping”) in which a ball is launched aiming at the target.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time becomes longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). This is because the state in which the number of reserved balls is large is a state in which a large number of balls have entered the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that a ball enters each entrance. The player is paying out sufficient prize balls to the player. On the other hand, the state where the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1) is a state where there are few balls entering the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that there are enough prize balls for the player Is not paid out.

  Therefore, each of the entrances is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the variation time set is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). It is possible to make the total number of prize balls equalized by summing up the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the ball and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the small hit game. Thereby, even if adjustments that are disadvantageous to the player for the pachinko machine 10 (adjustments that make it difficult for the balls to enter each entrance), it is possible to make it easier to obtain a winning ball with a small hit. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's motivation falls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0, the same variation time is set as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3). . This is to suppress a game in which a player launches a ball at intervals and aims at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who executes a malicious game to obtain a winning ball with a small hit.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, by executing the right-handed game, the second entrance 1640b in which the drawing of the special drawing 2 advantageous to the player is executed and the right drawing in which the drawing of the special drawing 1 disadvantageous is executed. Since the balls are alternately inserted into the entrance hole 64b, it is possible to further suppress the execution of a game that intentionally aims only at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which a short variation time is set. can do.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 is configured so that two types of variation time can be set according to the number of reserved balls, but there are various types of variation times without limitation. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, different variation times may be set for each number of reserved balls, or the range of the variation type counter CS1 is divided so that different variation times are set even for the same number of reserved balls. Time may be set. Also, different variation times may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing lotteries executed after the end of the small hit game. For example, after the end of the small hit game, until the special drawing lottery is executed three times, it may be configured such that the variation time set when the small hit is won is increased. Thereby, when the lottery to win a small hit is biased, it is possible to prevent the excessive prize balls from being paid out.

  Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the small hit game ends (for example, a period until the special drawing lottery is executed three times), a short fluctuation occurs when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more). The time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to continuously execute the game. Furthermore, the variation time set in this case may be the same as the time between the rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, in the case of winning a small win continuously, the variable winning device 65 can be varied as if a big win was won, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, by configuring the frequency at which the small hit game in the latent state is executed based on the number of reserved balls in FIG. The number of prize balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) is being made uniform, but as a configuration other than that, You may comprise so that the fluctuation time of a common drawing lottery may be set based on the number of reservation memory. For example, when there is a large number of reserved memory for the general drawing lottery, it is easy for the ball to enter the sorting unit 660 (because it is easy to enter the ball at each entrance), so that the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery becomes longer. In the case where the number of reserved memories of the general drawing lottery is small, the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery may be set to be shorter than that in the case where there are many. This makes it possible to equalize the degree of entry of the balls into the sorting unit 660. As a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance) And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be made uniform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, details of the RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 2030 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the RAM 2030 in the fourth embodiment has the second special symbol execution area 2030b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p deleted from the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). In addition, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc, and a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the second entrance 1640b (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set to zero. Whenever a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of fluctuating retained balls increases, the maximum value 4 One by one is added. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030bb has one execution area and four reservation areas. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb, each counter value acquired based on a ball entering (start winning) into the second ball entrance 1640b is stored. The counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y1332 in FIG. 173), and the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (figure 173). 167) (Y232 in FIG. 167). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as when changing is executed (Y233 in FIG. 167). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON. When it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 169) is set to ON (Y2801 in FIG. 169: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 169). Although the detailed description and illustration are omitted, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is processed in the same way as the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit even when the lottery result is a big hit. Is executed and set to on.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y732 in FIG. 170), and the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (figure 170). 167) (Y232 in FIG. 167). Note that the contents referred to in this process are the same as the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. When it is determined that the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 172) is set to ON (Y2901 in FIG. 172: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 172).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), details of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fourth embodiment is a part of the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97 (a)). This is different from the changed point in that an additional effect selection table 2220ba is added.

  Here, the screen display selection 2 table 2220b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b. The screen display selection 2 table 2220b is configured to select different screen display types for the game state in the normal state and the probability change state with respect to the screen display selection table 2220b in the third embodiment described above, The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display content (screen display type) for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. Normal display is defined as In this normal display, the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state, a demonstration display A is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When the demonstration display A is determined, a demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 158 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of Special Figure 1, which is the main fluctuation, is switched to the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) regardless of whether or not the minor fluctuation is being executed. If a player enters a ball into the second entrance 1640b and starts to display a long time fluctuation, even if the player quits the game immediately, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. Furthermore, in this demonstration display A screen, since the special figure 2 is actually variably displayed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that it is a vacant stand, a small area Ds5 of the sub display area Ds is displayed as “ "You can play" is displayed. Thereby, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

  In a normal state, a demonstration display B (see FIG. 158 (b)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  Next, in the probability variation state, for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off, or a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on Each is associated with a normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed in the probability variation state is executed, so that a special figure standby flag (a special figure 1 standby flag 2230s) is applied to one of the special figures. The customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to OFF. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Thus, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special figure has stopped), and the respective determination results, In addition, by setting the screen display type based on the currently set gaming state, the symbol type (Special Figure 1, Special Figure) that the player expects the lottery result according to the gaming state as in the fourth embodiment. 2) A game in the current gaming state with respect to a pachinko machine 10 having a gaming characteristic (a gaming characteristic that changes a symbol type (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) that varies substantially depending on the gaming state). It is possible to easily notify whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type expected by the person (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2) is being executed.

  In the certain change state, a special display A (see FIG. 159 (a)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. As a result, the current gaming situation can be suggested to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  In the latent state, the display content (for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on, or the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both on ( Special display B (FIG. 159 (b)) is defined as the screen display type. The special display B is displayed in a state where the special figure 2 that is substantially changed in the latent state is not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the additional effect selection table 2220ba in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 2220ba. This additional effect selection table 2220ba has an additional effect period (when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set on and the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped ( FIG. 153) is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional effect to be executed (additional effect type), and the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time) and the acquired effect The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 2230h.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A), and the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 154 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 154 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B) and the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect type is “ “Additional effect B” is selected (see FIG. 155 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect C” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 155 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or longer (period C) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, “addition effect” “C” is selected (see FIG. 155 (b)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “addition effect D” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 156).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time), for example, the remaining effect is selected. When the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect), an additional effect (for example, additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed, When the remaining execution time is long so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity with the effect executed during the change time (when the player can sufficiently grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect) In this case, an additional effect (for example, an additional effect D) having a content different from that of the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 2230 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the RAM 2230 in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97B) in that the second special symbol reserved ball counter 2230ba and the remaining variation time information A storage area 2230bb and an additional effect information storage area 2230bc are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, and is the first special symbol described above in the third embodiment. The only difference between the symbol reserved ball count counter 2230c and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 2030ba in place of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 2030d is the same as the other elements. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb stores information on the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the currently set variation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after the change is resumed.

  This remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb shows the fluctuation pattern when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (Y4901: Yes in FIG. 178) in the temporary stop related process (see FIG. 178). The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (Y4903 in FIG. 178), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see Y4907 to Y4908 in FIG. 178). When the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 179) receives the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command (Y5001: Yes in FIG. 179) and determines that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (Y5002: No in FIG. 179) is used to determine the additional effect type (Y5003 in FIG. 179), and then the set remaining variation period information is cleared (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

  The additional effect information storage area 2230bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and an additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. This additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read when the additional effect type determined in the change restart process (see FIG. 179) is set (Y5005 and Y5006 in FIG. 179) and the display additional effect command is set. (Y5007 in FIG. 179) is cleared thereafter (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 101) in contrast to the control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment described above. (See FIG. 167), in place of the game state update process (see FIG. 105), the game state update process 2 (see FIG. 168), the start winning process (see FIG. 114) instead of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 174), The difference is that the jackpot end process 2 (FIG. 175) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122), and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the above-described third embodiment, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure), In the case where the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is also configured to be stored on hold, and when special figure 1 and special figure 2 are simultaneously changing, either one of them is selected. When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed after the winning game based on the hit of one special figure. It is greatly different in the point of construction.

  In addition, about the point which comprised the lottery of special figure 2 so that holding | maintenance storage was possible, and the control processing based on it, it is the same as the structure and control process which hold | maintain the lottery of special figure 1 described in 3rd Embodiment mentioned above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit is made (Y231). If it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is made (Y231: Yes), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y232). . In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the interruption is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the winning. In the process of Y232, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first figure corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is displayed. The process of updating the display of the symbol display device 37 (Y233), that is, executing the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special figure in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, Exit. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y231, when it is determined that the current big hit or small hit is (Y231: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is larger than 0 ( That is, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (Y234), and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is not greater than zero (0). (Y234: No) executes the same process as the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) of the third embodiment described above, and then shifts to Y238 where the variation process related to special figure 2 is performed.

  In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is larger than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (Y235) is executed. To do. This first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) executes the processing during the special symbol 1 variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram variation timer 2030s is 0) (Y236), and the variation time ends. If it is determined that the timing is reached (Y236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y236 that it is not the end time of the variation time (Y236: No), the process of Y237 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y238.

  In the process of Y238 to Y242, the same process as Y234 to Y237 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (Y238), and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer is determined. If it is determined that the value of 2030t is not greater than 0 (0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is executed, and then this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is obtained by adding a subtraction process of the reserved memory number to the above-described second special symbol variation start process 2 (see Y217 in FIG. 107). Will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y238 that the value of the special figure 2 variation timer 2030t is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executes the process during the special symbol variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240) is finished, it is next determined whether the variation time is finished (whether the special diagram variation timer 2030t is 0) (Y241), and the variation time ends. When it is determined that the timing is reached (Y241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y241, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation time (Y241: No), the process of Y242 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307) will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307). In this game state update process 2 (Y307), the value of the time counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0, compared to the game state update process (see FIG. 105) of the third embodiment described above. This is different in that a configuration for setting a status command indicating a latent state is added when there is not. In the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions (100 times) set in the probability variation state is less than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). This is because when the number of lotteries (variations) exceeds 100, the gaming state can be shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state without winning a big win.

  When the game state update process 2 (Y307) is executed, first, the same process as Y601 to Y608 of the game state update process (see FIG. 105) described above is executed. It is determined whether the value of the counter 2030g is 0 (Y631), and if it is determined that it is 0 (Y631: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y632). Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is not 0 (1 or more) (Y632: No), since the probability variation state to which the time-saving game is not given (ie, the latent probability state), the latent probability state Is set (Y633), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time counter 2030g is not 0 in the process of Y631 (Y631: No), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 in the process of Y632 (Y632: Yes). ) Skips the process of Y633 and ends this process as it is.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235). In the first special symbol variation execution process (Y235), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (big hit or small hit). is there. When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the big hit flag 2030u is set to ON in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is turned on), it is a big hit in the process of Y231. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) ends and it is determined that the big hit game (or small hit game) is not in the process of Y231, the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured so as to be the timing for resuming the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (Y2802). The stop flag 2030bc is set to OFF (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), the processes of Y2802 and Y2803 are skipped and Y2804 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 variation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 2030s is subtracted and updated (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) is a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol 1, and the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery result of special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the constitution that forcibly stops the fluctuation of special figure 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is interrupted (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) It is different in that it is provided.

  When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) is a big hit (Y731), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (Y731: No), the same processing as Y709 and Y710 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y731 that it is a big hit (Y731: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to on (Y732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is turned on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating the setting is set (Y733). And the same process as Y706 and Y708 of the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 106) of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (Y239), a process for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Y831) : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 5) within the same processing as the processing in which the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (Y237 in FIG. 170). 171 (Y239) is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239 in FIG. 171) are skipped, and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the same time (within the same process) as when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the win.

  In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y831: No), next, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba (N2) is acquired (Y832), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired second special symbol reservation ball number counter is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is larger than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set. Subtract 1 (Y834), and set the reserved ball number command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba after the subtraction. (Y835).

  The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) as in the third embodiment. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 2230. It is stored in 2230ba. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230ba in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the second special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030ba.

  When the process of Y835 is finished, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of Y836 ends, the same process as Y804 to Y807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see Y207 of FIG. 107) of the third embodiment described above is then executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is 0 (Y833: No), the second special symbol variation start of the third embodiment described above is started. The same processing as Y808 to Y810 of the processing (see Y207 in FIG. 107) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240). In the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 2 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON when the special figure 2 is fluctuating and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (big hit). When the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON, the big hit flag 2030u is set to ON in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is turned on), the process of Y231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot game is not being hit in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed. With this configuration, the state in which the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON, the jackpot game is completed, and the variation time The subtraction of the variation time of the special figure that has been suspended is the timing for resuming the subtraction.

  Returning to FIG. 172, the description will be continued. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then a special figure 2 change restart command is set (Y2902). The stop flag 2030bd is set to OFF (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2901 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), the process of Y2902, Y2903 is skipped and Y2904 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 2030t is decremented by 1 and updated (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) is a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol 2, and the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above. On the other hand, when the lottery result of special figure 2 is a big hit, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is interrupted instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation of special figure 1 is forcibly stopped (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) This is different from the point that the configuration is provided in that a process that is executed when the lottery result in FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) is a big hit (Y1331), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (Y1331: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result of Special Figure 2 is a small hit (Y1334). In the process of Y1334, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y1334: No), the same process as Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above is executed. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1334 that the game is a small hit (Y1334: Yes), then a small hit stop process is executed (Y1335). In this small hit stop process, the same processes as Y1402 to Y1406 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see Y1304 in FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above are executed. When this small hit stop process (Y1335) is completed, the same processes as Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of Y1331 that the game is a big hit (Y1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set on (Y1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set on. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (Y1333). And the same process as Y1307-1311 of the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 112) of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105). This start winning process 2 (Y105) is different from the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above in the case where a ball is won (entered) in the second entrance 1640b. It is different in point. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery of Special Figure 2 is configured to be stored on hold, so that when the ball wins (enters) the second entrance 1640b, the second special symbol reservation ball A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 2030ba is executed.

  As for the processing when a ball enters the second entrance 1640b, the ball wins (enters) the first entrance in the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above. The processing executed in this case is different only in that the processing target is changed from FIG. 1 to FIG. 2, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112) will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112). This jackpot end process 2 (Y2112) differs from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment described above only in that the value set in the hour / counter counter 2030g is changed from 120 to 100. Since these processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes the probability variation state is less than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). When the special drawing lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times, the gaming state can be shifted to the latent state.

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot type whose jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot D is won as an opportunity to shift to a gaming state (latency probability state) that is advantageous to the player (that is, after the jackpot ends If you win a jackpot with a certain probability set) and a jackpot with a jackpot type of jackpot A (that is, you win a jackpot where the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends), and the jackpot in the probability change state When a special symbol lottery is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning, a plurality (two) can be provided. Therefore, the expectation that the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the timing at which the two transition conditions described above are satisfied is varied. That is, the former transition condition described above can be satisfied after the jackpot ends, and the latter transition condition can be satisfied when a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation that a gaming state (latency probability state) advantageous to the player is set, and to prevent the player from getting bored early. .

  In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g that can be set in the jackpot end process use one type of configuration, but other configurations may be used, for example, Corresponding to the winning jackpot type, the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the hourly time counter 2030g may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the value set in the probability variation counter 2030k, that is, the number of times the special symbol high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lottery), and the value set in the time-short counter 2030g In other words, it is possible to set multiple times (special symbol lottery times) that the short-time state (high probability state of normal symbol (with electric support)) is set after the jackpot ends. Set the number of times (special symbol lottery), the number of times until transition to the latent state (special symbol lottery), and the number of times the latent state is set (special symbol lottery) be able to.

  Therefore, when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot is ended, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping how many times the special symbol lottery is executed without shifting to the jackpot without winning the jackpot. It is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation of transition to the latent state in the state where the probability change state is set.

  In addition, as described above, when the probability variation counter 2030k value and the hourly time counter 2030g value can be set in correspondence with the jackpot type, a high probability state of a special symbol is set during the probability variation state. It is preferable to provide suggestion notification means for suggesting to the player the period for which the game is performed and the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. With this configuration, by grasping the suggestion content notified by the suggestion notification means, it is possible to cause the player to predict the timing for shifting to the latent state, and to improve the transition period attitude to the latent state. be able to.

  In addition, as the suggestion content notified by the suggestion notification unit described above, a value indicating the number of lotteries of special symbols until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) may be notified, You may alert | report the variable aspect from which a display mode (for example, a color, a shape, a magnitude | size) changes according to the number of lottery drawing of a special symbol until it changes to a state (until the transition conditions are satisfied). In addition, there is provided a discriminating means for determining whether the number of special symbol lottery times (until the transition condition is satisfied) until the transition to the latent state has been reached, for example, the special symbol lottery number. May be configured so that the above-described suggestion notification is performed when it is determined that has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

  Further, in the case where the transition condition is established during the probability changing state and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, a latent time for suggesting to the player the period during which the latent probability state is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent probability state) is indicated. Probable period suggesting notification means may be provided. In addition, by using this configuration in a configuration in which a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g can be set corresponding to the jackpot type, a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is continued. The period set by the player can be predicted by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the number of special symbol lotteries until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) and the period during which the latent state is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent state) May be configured so that the player can be notified of the advantageous degree of the gaming state set after the jackpot is ended based on the determination result. By comprising in this way, in the case where a plurality of gaming states set after the end of the jackpot are provided, it is possible to easily inform the player of the degree of advantage.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 176) is different, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, a process to be executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the third embodiment is added.

  Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111). This command determination process 2 (Y4111) includes a process that is executed when a remaining variable number of times command or a remaining short number of times command is received and a temporary stop for the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. A process executed when a related command is received is added.

  When the command determination process 2 (Y4111) is executed, first, the same processes as Y4301 to Y4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Y4317 that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining short time number command has been received (Y4317: Yes), then the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is executed.

  Here, the content of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is executed, the same processes as Y4651 and Y4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and when the process of Y4652 is finished, The same processing as Y4661 and Y4662 of the remaining number update processing (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the remaining probability variation count area 2230o and the effect probability variation count area 2230p to the information corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation count command or remaining short time count command output from the main controller 110 is executed. In the fourth embodiment, the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) similar to that in the third embodiment described above may be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of Y4317, when it is determined that the remaining certain number of times command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (Y4317: No), it is next determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (Y4331). Here, as the temporary stop related commands, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set ON and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are set ON. The special figure 2 temporary stop command that is output to Fig. 1, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc that is output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are set to OFF. There is a special figure 2 change restart command that is output in the event of a failure.

  If it is determined in the process of Y4331 that a temporary stop related command has been received (Y4331: Yes), then the temporary stop related process is executed (Y4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4331 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (Y4331: No), the same process as Y4319 of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (Y4332) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (Y4332). In this temporary stop related process (Y4332), a process for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or special figure. When the two-variation restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (Y4332) is executed, it is first determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command or a special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (Y4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (Y4901). : No), the process proceeds to Y4902, and the fluctuation restart process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (Y4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (Y4903). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation period calculated in the process of Y4903 is less than 2 seconds (Y4904). A period A indicating that the period is short is set (Y4905), and the process proceeds to Y4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4904, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (Y4904: No), it is next determined whether the remaining fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds ( Y4906), if it is determined that the time is less than 15 seconds (Y4906: Yes), a period B indicating a normal remaining fluctuation period is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb (Y4907), and the process proceeds to Y4902. Transition.

  In the process of Y4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (Y4906: No), a period C indicating that the remaining fluctuation period is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb. After setting (Y4908), the process proceeds to Y4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the change restart process (Y4902) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart process (Y4902). This fluctuation resumption process (Y4902) executes a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received.

  When the fluctuation resuming process (Y4902) is executed, it is first determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation resuming command or a special figure 2 fluctuation resuming command has been received (Y5001). If it is determined that it has not been received (Y5001: No ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command or the special figure 2 change restart command has been received (Y5001), then it is determined whether or not the current variation effect is being executed (Y5002). . In the process of Y5002, the fluctuation effect executed for the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) in conjunction with the execution of the special figure fluctuation interrupts the special figure fluctuation (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended). When the special figure change is resumed after the winning game is finished, it is determined whether the state is not completed.

  In the process of Y5002, when it is determined that the changing effect is being executed (Y5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (Y5006), and the process proceeds to Y5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5002 that the variation effect is not being executed (Y5002: No), next, the remaining variation time information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb is read (Y5003). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 2220ba based on the read remaining variation time information and the effect counter 2230h (Y5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc. (Y5005).

  When the processing of Y5005 or Y5006 is completed, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read (Y5007), and a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set. (Y5008), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb and the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is cleared (Y5009), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is performed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. In the period until the resumption, the effect of swinging and displaying the 3rd symbol is executed. Although configured to execute, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, when one special figure variation (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (for example, special figure 2). In the case where the subtraction of the figure variation time is interrupted), and the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation has already been completed when the other special figure fluctuation is resumed (FIG. 153), for example, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure change is not completed at the time when the other special figure change is resumed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 180 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation. In the third symbol display device 81, an effect display based on the variation in the special figure 1 (an effect display using the third symbol) is executed. In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  The example shown in FIG. 180 shows a case where the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the variation of the special figure 1 is resumed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, the additional effect is executed before the normal effect is completed, and an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity. The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 180, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed, but the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed. It is configured. In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed as the normal effect end timing instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity, and the player's willingness to play the game Can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, a remaining period determination means for determining a fluctuation time (residual fluctuation period) after resumption, and an interruption period determination means for determining a period during which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted. Whether or not the normal effect is being executed when it is determined by the restart determining means for determining that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has been resumed and the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed by the restart determining means. An effect status determining means for determining the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means when the effect status determining means determines that the normal effect has not been executed (already finished). If it is determined that the additional effect executing means for executing the additional effect corresponding to the normal effect is being executed, the execution of the additional effect is waited until it is determined by the effect status determining means that the normal effect has ended. Additional production execution waiting And means, may the provision. By configuring in this way, the timing for executing the additional effect based on the timing at which the special figure 1 variation is resumed and the end timing of the normal effect of the special figure 1 variation (when the special figure 1 variation is resumed or the normal effect ends) Time) can be set as appropriate, and an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 so that the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration as shown in FIG. good.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 181, another example of the panel configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the fourth embodiment. In another example of the fourth embodiment, instead of the distribution unit 660, the second entrance 1640 and the second entrance for the board surface configuration (see FIG. 150) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a associated with the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center area of the game board to the lower right area, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 181, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can enter. Yes. With such a configuration, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the gaming state (probability variation state or latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed. In addition, as in the distribution unit 660 of the fourth embodiment described above, the entrance (right first entrance 64b) where the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 are executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing balls so that the balls enter alternately at the entrance (second entrance 1640b) to be entered, the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. The percentage of balls can be random. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player is different between the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG. It is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, the ratio of the balls that have flowed down (rolled) toward the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, such as nails implanted in the game board 13, for example, Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation executed during the right-handed game.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of times (100) that the short-time state is set is smaller than the number of times (120) that the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. Further, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 can be executed in the latent state, it is possible to suppress a state that is excessively advantageous to the player in the latent state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is won (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is determined), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted and the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is finished ( The measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is resumed at the timing when the variation of the special symbol becomes possible.

  Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the variable display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously executed. In this case, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, and the restarted special symbol variation is finished and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is terminated. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (a period during which the special figure changes is interrupted) occurs at the timing of the operation.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the timing when the resumed special symbol variation ends and the timing when the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. In the case where an error for a predetermined period (a special period fluctuation interruption period) occurs, an additional effect (specific effect) can be executed using the error period. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 196. The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that the contents of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state are different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the win is won in the probability (big hit or small win) The difference is that the effect display that is executed at the time of the addition is added and the other effect display is changed so as to correspond to the contents of the two points described above.

  In the third embodiment described above, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the remaining number display area D1 displays the same number of times as the number of accuracy changes (120 times) set internally. Each time the special figure variation is executed, the remaining number of probability changes set internally (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number for effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the production remaining probability variation number). In addition, in the latent state, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the big win that the real residual variation number is set again or the small hit that is not set the real residual variation number is won, When winning (big hit or small win) is won in the certain state, it is configured so that the production return to the initial value (120 times) and the production not to return can be executed. The number of times was different, and the player was expected to have a sense of expectation until the end. When the actual residual probability variation count becomes “0” in a state where the actual residual probability variation count is different from the production residual probability variation count (for example, the production residual probability variation count is “0” and the real residual probability variation count is “10”). In the case of “”), the revival effect (see FIG. 87) is executed, and the number of times corresponding to the substantial remaining probability variation number (“10 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, even if the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is “0”, the player can be expected to continue the latent state.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times less than the internally set probability variation number (120 times) when the latent accuracy state is entered (the latent accuracy state is set). (For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easy to execute an effect that adds the number of remaining effect changes. In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times each time the variation of each special figure (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), as in the third embodiment described above. For example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed, although it is configured so as to subtract the number of effects remaining variation displayed in the display area D1. However, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the production remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed less than the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing of starting the latent probability state (timing when the latent probability state is set). As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the actual remaining probability variation count as the jackpot game and the special drawing lottery result in the case of winning the jackpot where the actual remaining probability variation count is set to the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when a winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation count is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of substantial probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure big hit is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of actual variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1). The value of the number of times added to (2) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 182). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the actual remaining probability variation number becomes “0” in a state where the substantial certainty variation number and the remaining effect variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  Further, in the above-described third embodiment, in order to prevent the player from grasping that the player has won a win (big hit or small win) during the latent probability state (for example, out of the big hit games, the game The 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute the effect display indicating the winning game even if a small hitting game or a small hitting game) is executed, and at what timing in the latent state, the actual probability change count is initially set. The configuration is such that it is difficult to identify whether the jackpot set at the value (120 times) is won.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a win game (a jackpot game or a small game) that is executed when a winning game is won (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game with a small number of balls out of the jackpot game) is won. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a display based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during the winning game (see FIG. 185). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed in the latent state. Then, as will be described later in detail as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is paid out). The display mode for displaying the number of winning balls) is configured such that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. . As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, The contents of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 182, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is in the latent probability state and the remaining effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. The transition of the probability variation number will be described. FIG. 182 is a timing chart showing the flow during the latent state in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 182, when the jackpot game won for jackpot B or jackpot D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, the actual remaining probability change count is “120 times” at the end timing of the jackpot game (during ending). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and “100 times” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the effect remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 183).

  When the game in the latent state is started, the actual residual probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count are subtracted “one time” every time the special figure variation is executed. In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, since the substantial residual variation number and the production residual variation number are subtracted at the timing at which the special diagram variation is started, the first special diagram variation in the latent state is executed. In the meantime, “99 times” is displayed in the remaining number display area D <b> 1 as the number of production remaining probability changes.

  After that, special figure fluctuation (lottery) is executed, and when the small bonus is won in the 14th special figure fluctuation in the latent state (the special figure fluctuation in which “86th” is displayed as the number of remaining production chance changes), The small hit game is started while maintaining the probability variation number of “106 times”. During the small hit game, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs an additional effect A (an effect of adding (adding) the value of the remaining number of effects remaining “5 times”) as an effect display, the remaining number of times The value of the number of effects remaining variation displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from “86th” to “91st” (see FIG. 183 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the actual remaining probability changing number is not changed (not reset), when the winning game (small winning game) is executed, By executing the effect to be added (additional effect), it is possible to expect the player to have the actual remaining probability variation count reset by the current winning game.

  When the small hit game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual remaining probability variation number “105 times” and the production residual probability variation number “90”) is continuously started. Next, when the big win is won in the special figure variation where the actual remaining probability variation number is “30” (the special figure variation where the production residual probability variation number is “15”), the timing when the jackpot game is started The actual residual variation number is set to “0”. It should be noted that the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to “0”, but the content indicating “15” is continuously displayed. When shifting to the latent probability state again after the end of the jackpot game, “120 times” is reset as the substantial remaining probability change count at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during the jackpot game, an extra effect is executed as an effect display of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the small hit game. When the “time” addition (addition) effect) is executed, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from “15 times” to “35 times”.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, regardless of the type of win (big hit or small hit), it is added based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability change count and the effect remaining probability change count and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f. The number of times of addition (number of additions) displayed in the production is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current winning game is a small hit game or a big hit game based on the contents of the extra effect executed during the hit game.

  Next, when the jackpot game ends, a special figure variation (substantial residual probability variation number “119”) in the latent state is started. An extra effect D is executed during this special figure change, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed even during the special figure variation in the latent probability state. It is difficult for a person to predict the actual remaining probability variation number, and a game can be performed while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

  In addition, by making it possible to execute an extra effect even during a special figure change, the value of the residual effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure change in the latent state. Can be added (added). Therefore, since the number of times of performing the extra effect can be increased, the player feels uncomfortable even when the value of the actual residual probability change count and the effect residual probability change count deviate greatly (when the difference value is large). The value can be easily converged without giving. Furthermore, in this 5th Embodiment, it is comprised so that the addition frequency (addition frequency) displayed by an addition effect may be determined based on the difference value of the value of a substantial residual change frequency and an effect residual probability change frequency, The greater the difference between the actual residual variation number and the production residual variation number, the more the production residual variation number is added (added), so the value can be set without giving the player a sense of incongruity. It can be made easier to converge.

  Then, the extra effect D is executed, and the extra effect (addition effect B) is executed again at the next fluctuation when the value of the residual effect variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes “74 times”. The remaining probability variation number is “118” and the production residual probability variation number is “83”. After that, when the variation in which the production remaining probability variation count is “1” without winning a win is ended, the production remaining probability variation count “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final performance display, and the actual remaining probability variation count is displayed. It is continuously displayed until “0 times”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a game in a latent state without giving a sense of incongruity to the player even if the actual remaining probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count do not finally coincide.

  In the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display is used. However, as in the third embodiment described above, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is used. May be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (displayed as “35 times” in the example of FIG. 182). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual remaining probability variation number when the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “0”. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to play the latent state with confidence for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 and FIG. 184, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 regarding the case where the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is a latent state will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends (when a V is won in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state by winning V during the jackpot game) The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and “100 times” is displayed as the production remaining probability variation number (see point A in FIG. 182). Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a character “RUSH rush” for notifying that the state shifts to the latent state, and a character 811 that imitates a rabbit used for display in the latent state shifts to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit game ends.

  In the fifth embodiment, the above-described display is executed on the jackpot end screen. However, the display described above is executed when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends. You may comprise. In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the fifth embodiment, a winning change is not given after winning the jackpot game by winning V during the jackpot game. A configuration in which a probability variation state is given later may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), a display screen during a hit game (during a small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left to the right on the screen continues in the latent state even when the small hit game or the big hit game is executed, as in the special figure change. And executed. Then, when the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 183 (b)), and the value of the effect remaining variation number is added "5 times" to display "95 times" (FIG. 182). Point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number (“5 times”) added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

  In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the extra effect that is executed during the latent state is executed using a part of the effect that is always executed during the latent state (the effect of moving the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to add (add) the value (“5 times”) of the remaining performance variation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the add-on effect D (see point D in FIG. 182) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left side to the right side of the screen is executed during the special figure fluctuation. When the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“40 times” in FIG. 184 (a)), and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is added by “40 times” to display “74 times” (FIG. 182). Point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value (“40 times”) of the effect remaining change count added in the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 183 (b) and FIG. 184 (a), the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed during the winning game and during the special figure variation in the latent state. An extra effect of adding (adding) is executed. And, since the extra effect executed during the winning game and the extra effect executed during the special figure change are executed in the same effect mode, the special figure indicating whether or not the present is the winning game by the extra effect executed It is possible to suppress the player from grasping whether the change is occurring.

  Further, since the display form of the value is changed according to the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the extra effect (the display form “+5” in FIG. 183 (b) and FIG. 184 (a). ) (See “+40” display form)), it is possible to visually notify the player of the effect of the extra effect. It is also possible to execute an effect display that suggests the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect, for example, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect is stored. The display form of the “treasure box” may be changed according to the added value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184 (b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 184 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is an effect that is executed when the value of the remaining effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is “0” while the value of the actual remaining probability change number is greater than “0”. In this case, “???” is displayed as the value of the production residual variation number until the remaining substantial residual variation number is consumed. Thereby, even if the value of the substantial remaining probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number are different, the rendering in the latent state can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed as an effect suggesting that the latent state ends in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to visually suggest the possibility that the latent state ends to the player, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect for the player. Furthermore, “pinch” is displayed in the display area D4 as a character that suggests that the latent state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the display contents during the game per latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 185, when the winning game is executed in the latent state and a ball is won in the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The This winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (refer to 815c in FIG. 185) to the left side (refer to 815b in FIG. 185) to the left side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and expands. In this state, the display is stopped (see 815a in FIG. 185). In the winning display mode 815, a value (“15” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed, and the variable winning device 65 is given to the player. The player can be notified of the winning of the ball and the number of winning balls paid out by the winning.

  In addition, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in a single winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays are displayed until one winning game ends. The aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the winning display mode 815 is not executed corresponding to all the balls won in the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but instead of the winning game type (big winning game or small winning game) ) And whether or not the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed based on the winning number information during the winning game, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is displayed, the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed. It is composed. With this configuration, even when the ease of winning a ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of winning game (when the variable winning device 65 is opened for different periods) However, since the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted, the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted. It is possible to prevent a person from grasping the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit game).

  In this embodiment, the winning display mode is configured to display a value (“15” in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65. For example, a value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 may be divided into a plurality (for example, “10” and “5”) and displayed. As a result, the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed can be set in a plurality of patterns with respect to the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65. Even if the player has a variable winning device that has different numbers of prize balls to be paid out when winning a prize, the player can win the type of game by dividing the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out. It is possible to suppress grasping of (big hit game or small hit game). Moreover, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a win type (for example, per 15R) in which a large number of winnings can be expected, the win display mode 815 has the third symbol more than the win type (for example, per 7R) that results in a smaller win It may be set so that the period until it is displayed on the display device 81 becomes longer. As a result, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until it is determined can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the game ball that has won first.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment in that an additional effect table 2220ca and a winning effect table 2220cb are added. To do.

  First, with reference to FIG. 187 (a), details of the extra effect table 2220ca in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the extra effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment. This extra effect table 2220ca is a table that is referred to when determining the type of extra effect that is executed during the latent state, and obtained as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of residual effects changes. Based on the value of the effect counter 2230f, the type of additional effect is selected. This extra effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the residual effect variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent state, and a different value for each type of extra effect. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

  This additional effect table 2220ca is determined in the special figure 2 variation setting process in the latent state (see FIG. 191) when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (FIG. 191). Y5103: Yes), and when a winning ending command is received during the latent state (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the additional effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment is set so that the additional effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is different. Has been. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number is “1 to 40” and the value of the production counter 2230f is “0 to 99”, the additional production is executed. If the value of the effect counter 2230f is “100 to 179”, the additional effect A (addition count + 5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “180 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  When the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining variation number is “41 to 80” and the value of the effect counter 2230f is “0 to 49”, the additional effect is not executed, When the value of the counter 2230f is “50 to 149”, an extra effect A (addition count + 5) is set as the extra effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “150 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  Furthermore, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining variation number is “81 or more” and the value of the effect counter 2230f is “0 to 99”, an additional effect C (addition) is added. The number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “100 to 198”, an additional effect D (addition count + 40) is set as the additional effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the effect residual variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. For this reason, it is possible to execute an extra effect suitable for the display state of the number of times of effect remaining probability change in the latent state. In addition, the larger the difference between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number, the easier it is to execute the additional production, so the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number increase. When there is a divergence (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change count remains large in spite of the value of the effect remaining probability change count being “0”. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number, the larger the value added (added) in the one additional effect. Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change count remains large despite the value of the effect remaining probability change count being “0”. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187 (b), the winning effect table 2220cb will be described. FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table 2220cb. This winning effect table 2220cb is referred to when determining whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when a ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed in the latent state. In this table, the presence / absence of a winning effect is determined based on the determination result (winning type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 2230f. This winning effect is an effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 185 on the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the success / failure determination result is a jackpot A to E and a jackpot G (that is, a jackpot that can be expected to appear) and the number of winning balls is the first or second winning, the value of the effect counter 2230f is related. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 198”), the winning effect “present” is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the winning game is being executed.

  If the number of winning balls is the third, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0-4”, the winning effect “None” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “5-198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fourth, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 119”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “120 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fifth, when the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 189”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “5 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is the sixth or more, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 194”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “195 to 195”. In the case of “198”, the winning effect “Yes” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

  Next, when the determination result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 2230f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. In addition, even when the result of the determination is a small hit, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is not less than one) is the same as the big hit F described above, and the value of the effect counter 2230f is also obtained (the acquired effect counter When the value of 2230f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who has performed the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) during the latent state is determined by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. It is possible to notify. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a game has occurred in the latent state.

  Further, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

  In the present embodiment, the winning game executed during the latent game is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual remaining probability variation number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the game ends, or the value of the actual remaining probability variation number In order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the game is a small hit game that is not changed, a big hit game in which a ball is likely to win the variable winning device 65 rather than the small hit game (big hits A to E, In (G) and (G), the prize-winning effect is less likely to be executed as the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 increases. Thereby, even if many balls actually win the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls won in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of game by winning based on the number of winning effects executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent probability state (the cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each hit game executed while the latent probability state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration displayed at 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be displayed cumulatively regardless of whether or not there is a winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of times that the winning effect has been executed is displayed. You may comprise so that it may add. In this case, since the actual accumulated value and the accumulated value on the display are different from each other by the number of winning balls for which no winning effect has been executed, means for storing the difference between the accumulated values is provided. When the winning game is executed, it is preferable that the winning effect is executed without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and the provisional winning effect for converging the difference of the accumulated values may be executed. Thereby, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls can be displayed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display a winning display mode 815 that is more than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game, and therefore the third symbol display device 81 Thus, it is possible to further suppress the player from identifying the type of game by winning the number of winning effects executed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 186 (b), the contents of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (b), in the RAM 2230 in the fifth embodiment, the remaining variable number display flag 2230ca, the additional effect flag 2230cb, and the additional effect type storage area 2230cc are added to the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment. Has been added.

  The remaining probability variation number display flag 2230ca is a flag for indicating a period during which the effect remaining probability variation number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 183 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. When it is set, the number of production remaining probability changes is displayed. The remaining probability variation number display flag 2230ca determines that a winning ending command has been received in the winning related command processing (see FIG. 193) (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193), and then the current winning hit is ended. When it is determined that the game state is to be shifted to the latent state later (Y5209: Yes in FIG. 193), and when it is determined that the remaining probability variation count display flag 2230ca is not set to ON (FIG. 193). Y5210: Yes) and is set to ON (Y5213 in FIG. 193), and similarly, in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 193), when determining whether or not the current win game is a win game that can execute an extra effect (Y5210 in FIG. 193). In the state command process 3 (see FIG. 192), when a state command indicating that the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state is received (Y4531: Yes in FIG. 192), it is set to OFF (FIG. 192 Y4532).

  The extra effect flag 2230cb is a flag for indicating that the extra effect based on the special figure fluctuation is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and in the state where it is set to ON, the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 195) is executed, the extra effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737 in FIG. 196) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 195) (FIG. 195). 196, Y4813). This extra effect flag 2230cb is set to ON (Y5108 in FIG. 191) when the extra effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 191) (Y5106: Yes in FIG. 191). (2) Reference is made in the variation start process (see FIG. 196) (Y4809 in FIG. 196), and when it is determined that the switch is set to on (Y4809: Yes in FIG. 196), it is set to off (Y4810 in FIG. 196). , An extra effect is set.

  The additional effect type storage area 2230cc is an area in which the additional type selected with reference to the additional effect table 2220ca is set, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 196). Reference) is executed. In this additional effect type storage area 2230cc, the type of the additional effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 191) is set (Y5107 in FIG. 191), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 196). When it is determined that the additional effect flag 2230cb is set to ON (Y4809: Yes in FIG. 196), the additional effect based on the set type of the added effect is set (Y4812 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 188 and FIG. 189, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment is a first winning process (see FIG. 120) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment described above. Instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 188) instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 188) and the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 126) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 124). 189) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the first winning process 2 (Y2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (Y2113). This first winning process 2 (Y2113 in FIG. 188) is similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 123) in the third embodiment described above, and the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening) The processing based on the ball that won the prize 65a) is executed.

  When the first winning process 2 (Y2113) is executed, the same processes as Y2401 to Y2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 123) of the third embodiment described above are executed. When the process of Y2404 is completed, a winning command is set (Y2431), and then the same processes as Y2405 to Y2411 of the first winning process (see FIG. 123) described above are executed, and this process ends. In this first winning process 2 (Y2113), by setting a winning prize command, the ball that won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 during the big hit game. Can output information about.

  Information about the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is given to the winning prize command, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command processing described later when the winning prize command is received. (See FIG. 194) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a winning effect (see FIG. 185) during the winning game is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the second winning process 2 (Y2513) will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (Y2513). This second winning process 2 (Y2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 126) in the third embodiment described above, and the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10. A process based on the ball that won a prize is executed.

  When the second winning process (Y2513) is executed, the same process as Y2701 to Y2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 126) described above is executed. When the process of Y2704 is finished, a winning prize command is set (Y2731), and then the same process as Y2705 to Y2711 of the above-described second prize process (see FIG. 126) is executed, and this process ends. In this second winning process 2 (Y2513), by setting a win winning command, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the small hit game. Information about the sphere can be output.

  Information about the number of balls won during the small hit game is given to the winning prize command, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command, the winning prize command processing described later (see FIG. 194). ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not the winning effect during the winning game (see FIG. 185) is executed.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 196. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 190) is different in that the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112 in FIG. 195) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 135), and the other processes are the same.

  First, the command determination process 3 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Y4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main controller 110 are received, similarly to the command determination process in the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130).

  The command determination process 3 (Y4111) is performed when the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is received (Y4306: Yes in FIG. 190) in response to the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. When the variation setting process (Y4351 in FIG. 191) is executed and when the status command is received (Y4313: Yes in FIG. 190), the status command process 3 (see FIG. 192) is substituted for the status command process (see FIG. 132). (Refer to FIG. 190, Y4352 in FIG. 190), and a hit-related command when a hit-related command is received (Y4352: Yes) in FIG. The difference is that the process (see FIG. 193) is executed, and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (Y4111) is executed, first, the processes of Y4301 to Y4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of Y4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process is executed (Y4351).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351). In the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y5101) and received as in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. A process (Y5102) for extracting a variation pattern command from the command is executed, and a process (Y5103 to Y5108) for determining whether or not to perform an extra effect (see FIG. 184 (a)) is executed.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351) is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y5101), and then a fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (Y5102). Note that the processing of Y5101 described above is the same as the processing of Y4307 in the command determination processing of the third embodiment (see FIG. 130) described above, and the processing of Y5102 is the command determination processing of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130)), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the remaining probability variation number set in the residual probability variation number area 2230o (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability variation number) and the residual probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the production residual probability variation number). A comparison is made (Y5103). In the process of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, that is, the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation count (the remaining probability variation count updated in the game state update process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 105)), and that it is possible to execute the extra effect. If it is (Y5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 2230h is acquired (Y5104), and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is obtained by referring to the additional effect table 2220ca. Based on the value of the effect counter 2230h acquired in the process of Y5104, the additional effect type is selected (Y5105).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the remaining effect variation number is not smaller (same or greater) than the value of the actual remaining variation number, that is, the value of the effect remaining variation number is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that it cannot be performed (Y5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

  When the processing of Y5105 is finished, it is next determined whether or not an extra effect has been selected (Y5106). In the process of Y5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of Y5105, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is “1-40”, and is acquired. When the value of the produced effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “41 to 80”, the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h Is “0 to 49” (Y5106: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5106, when it is determined that the extra effect is selected (Y5106: Yes), the type of the selected extra effect is set in the extra effect type storage area 2230cc (Y5107), and the extra effect flag 2230cb is set. It is set to ON (Y5108), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y4306 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (Y4306), then the same as Y4309 to Y4318 in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. Execute the process. In the process of Y4317, if it is determined that the remaining variable number of times command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (Y4317: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (Y4352).

  If it is determined in the process of Y4352 that a hit-related command has not been received (Y4352: No), similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above, other commands are used. Various processes are executed (Y4319), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (Y4352: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (Y4353). This hit-related command process (Y4353) is a process executed when each hit-related command output from the main controller 110 is output. Specifically, the hit-related game (big hit game or small hit game) An opening command that is output when the game is started, a round start command that is output when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, and a winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game) are executed Winning winning commands output based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening 65a, an ending command output when an ending period is started in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and other winning commands (V winning command etc.) is output from the main controller 110 It is executed if the discriminated) and.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 193, the hit related command processing (Y4353) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command processing (Y4353).

  When the hit related command processing (Y4353) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (Y5201). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Y5201: Yes), then A display opening command is set (Y5202). On the other hand, in the process of Y5201, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (Y5201: No), it is determined whether the next round start command is received (Y5203).

  If it is determined in the process of Y5203 that a round start command has been received (Y5203), a display round command is set (Y5204), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5203 that the round start command has not been received (Y5203: No), it is then determined whether a winning command has been received (Y5205). The winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see Y2113 in FIG. 188) and the second winning process 2 (see Y2513 in FIG. 189) executed in the main controller 110, and is a big win This is a command that is output based on the ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the game or the small hit game. Note that this winning command includes information relating to the number of balls won and information that can be specified as the type of winning game being executed (a jackpot type or a jackpot type).

  Here, the winning prize command processing (Y5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning prize command processing (Y5206).

  When the winning command process (Y5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (Y5301), and then whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or not. Is discriminated (Y5302). If it is determined that there is no latent state (Y5302: No), a winning effect is selected (Y5305), and the process proceeds to Y5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y5302 that the state is a latent probability state (Y5302: Yes), when selecting a winning effect to be executed in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state. The value of the effect counter 2230h used is acquired (Y5303), and a winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h and the winning effect table 2220cb (Y5304).

  When the process of Y5304 or the process of Y5305 is finished, it is determined whether or not a winning effect is selected (Y5306). If it is determined that a winning effect is selected (Y5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A display winning effect command is set (Y5307), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5306, when it is determined that the winning effect is not selected (Y5306: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the fluctuation display setting process 2 (Y4112) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112). This variation display setting process 2 (Y4112) is a process of updating the display contents of the effect remaining probability variation count and the additional effect flag 2230cb on, with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above. And a process of executing an extra effect when it is set to. In addition, about the other same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, in the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112), the same processes as Y4701 to Y4704 in the variable display setting process (FIG. 135) of the third embodiment are executed. Based on information that has been. It is determined whether the current state is in the latent state (Y4731).

  In the process of Y4731, when it is determined that the current state is not in the latent state (Y4731: No), the process of updating the number of effects remaining probability displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state (Y4732- Y4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent probability state (Y4731: Yes), then the effect remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is subtracted by 1 (Y4732), and the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0 (Y4733). In the process of Y4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0, that is, the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 183 (a)) is “one time” or more. When the production remaining probability variation number is displayed (Y4733: Yes), a display residual variation variable command is set based on the production residual variation number value set in the production probability variation area 2230p (Y4734).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4733 that the value of the effect remaining variation number is not greater than 0 (0) (Y4733: No), then the actual variation number area 2230o is substantially set. It is determined whether or not the value of the residual variation number is greater than 0 (Y4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the production remaining probability variation count is 0, but the value of the actual remaining probability variation count is not 0 (1 or more).

  In the process of Y4735, when it is determined that the value of the substantial remaining probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (Y4735: No), the process proceeds to the Y4734 process described above, and the value of the production residual probability variation number is set. Based on this, a display residual probability variation command (that is, a command for indicating “0 times” in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (Y4734). Then, the process proceeds to Y4705.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual variation number is greater than 0 (Y4735: Yes), a display residual variation variable command indicating the production residual probability variation number “???” Y4736) and Y4705. By doing in this way, in the situation where the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0, when the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is “0”. Instead of displaying “0 times”, “???” can be displayed (see FIG. 184 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state continues even after “0 times” is displayed as the number of effects remaining variation. In addition, by setting the number of production remaining probability changes to “???”, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, thereby enhancing the production effect.

  In the process of Y4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y4701: No), it is determined that the latent state is not in the Y4731 process. In the case (Y4731: No) and when the processing of Y4734 or the processing of Y4736 is finished, the same processing as Y4705 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is then executed.

  In the process of Y4705, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y4705: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (Y4737). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737) is skipped. The process shifts to the process of Y4709, the same process as Y4709 to Y4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the number of times (120 times) less than the number of accuracy changes (120 times) set internally. For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easy to execute an effect that adds the number of remaining effect changes. In the fifth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, every time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), Although it is configured to subtract the number of effect remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1, for example, the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed. In such a case, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production residual variation. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the production remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed less than the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing of starting the latent probability state (timing when the latent probability state is set). As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the actual remaining probability variation count as the jackpot game and the special drawing lottery result in the case of winning the jackpot where the actual remaining probability variation count is set to the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when a winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation count is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of substantial probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure big hit is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of actual variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1). The value of the number of times added to (2) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 182). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the actual remaining probability variation number becomes “0” in a state where the substantial certainty variation number and the remaining effect variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  In the fifth embodiment, during a chance of winning (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game) that is executed when winning a jackpot game or a jackpot game with few balls out of the jackpot game is won. The display based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 185). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed in the latent state. Then, as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The display mode is configured such that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 197 to 217, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, when the potential is a big hit during the latent state and the latent state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is overwritten with 120), the latent state on the display is displayed. The remaining number of states is configured to continuously display the number before the big hit. Then, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state, if the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is set. It was set as the structure which performs the revival production | presentation displayed on top. In other words, the timing at which the remaining number on the display is added and displayed is limited to the timing at which the remaining number is zero.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of triggers are provided for adding the remaining number on the display. It was. More specifically, when there is a difference, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an extra effect at the start of fluctuation, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times displayed may be added. It was set as the structure which performs the superposition production which suggests that there is. In this additional effect, the number of times of additional display is varied according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. Thereby, improvement of the willingness to participate in the player's addition production is aimed at. Hereinafter, the extra effect that adds the remaining number of times on the display by the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 will be referred to as a press-up extra effect.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the remaining number on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number is not 0 (1 or more), the remaining number is not displayed (not displayed). ) The non-display mode is set. This makes it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so that a game with tension can be provided in the latent state. Further, when the non-display mode is set, when the remaining number of actual latent states (value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is a big hit of the second special symbol within a predetermined number (5 times) ( In other words, when the latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state ends, a special additional effect (special additional effect) having a different form from the normal additional effect is executed. It is said. As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  In the sixth embodiment, in addition to the extra effect, an effect is provided in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22. Specifically, a hold notice effect is provided that changes the state of the hold symbol in accordance with the operation content of the frame button 22 in the normal state or the probability change state. In this hold notice effect, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the notice effect is determined based on the player's operation on the frame button 22 (selection by the player), and based on the pre-read result for the hold ball in the range selected by the player. Thus, the notice effect using the reserved symbol is executed. Thereby, when an effect with high expectation is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, even if a low-expectation effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, if a reserved ball different from the selected range is selected, a high-expectation notice effect may have been executed. It can make a player think that it is not known. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol outside the selection range.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in that the configurations of the RAM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 197 to FIG. 202, display modes of various kinds of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 197 and FIG. 198 are diagrams showing display modes when the hold notice effect is executed in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 199 and FIG. 200 show the push-up effect in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 201 and FIG. 202 are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. .

  FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the hold notice effect in the present embodiment is started. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the hold notice effect is started, the display area Ds1a in which the characters “Decide who to feed with PUSH” are displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22. In addition, a tray Ds1b on which fewer bones than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. In the example of FIG. 197 (a), a case where there are three retaining balls and three boned meats is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a manner that reciprocates in the left-right direction.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 in accordance with the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the pressing timing. FIG. 197 (b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the mode of the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b is changed to a mode of being happy with a smile. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose modes have been changed have been the targets of the current reservation notice.

  If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time of the display area Ds1a (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the effect of eating the bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed by the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped downward). After each reserved symbol eats bone-in meat, an effect is produced in which part or all of the reserved symbol that ate bone-in meat lays eggs. FIG. 197 (c) illustrates a mode in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. The reserved symbol that lays the egg is displayed in order to suggest to the player that the reserved symbol is based on the highly anticipated reserved ball. More specifically, when the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol in the selection range includes a reserved ball that causes reach, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball has eaten the boned meat. Later, the production of eggs is performed. In addition, when the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in which the reach occurs is not included in the selection range, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. This allows the player to detect that the reach effect is generated before the first special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball is executed, so that the player can enjoy the reach effect. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the holding notice effect is configured to be more easily determined when there is a holding ball in which a reach effect occurs. Therefore, if an effect of laying eggs is not executed after an effect of eating meat with bone, a hold effect that a reach effect is generated on a reserved symbol outside the range of the reserved symbol selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 There is a high possibility that the holding symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if an effect of laying an egg with a reserved symbol within the range selected by the player is executed, a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, When the production effect is not executed, it is possible to provide a novel production in which a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  After execution of the effect that the reserved symbol lays eggs, an image that prompts repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 198 (a). With this image, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the effect is developed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can continuously press the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the hold notice effect.

  When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the specified number of consecutive hits determined at the time of production, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4 The effect that the egg moves is executed. In addition, an egg moves in order from the holding | maintenance symbol with the old order of holding | maintenance. FIG. 198 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed on the upper part of the reserved symbol Dh2 moves into the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach in the variable display based on the reserved ball. Super reach is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and is difficult to select when the lottery is missed. Therefore, the player can hit the frame button 22 more seriously. Note that it is uncertain whether or not the super reach will occur only by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. 198 (c), the egg Dh2a is cracked, and the characters "Super reach confirmed" Super-reach is confirmed when it occurs.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the holding notice effect is executed, the range of the holding symbols for generating the notice is determined by the player's selection. Thereby, depending on the content of the hold notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball within the range selected by the player, or to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball outside the player's selection range. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel pending notice effect that has never existed before.

  In the sixth embodiment, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by continuous hitting of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg symbols whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as an intelligible production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, the push-up effect produced during the latent state will be described. This press-up addition effect is an effect indicating that the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display may be added by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. This push-up addition effect is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively small (or 0) when the player operates the frame button 22 and a special mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively high It has been. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit This is an aspect that can be easily selected. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is easily selected when the difference between the remaining number on display and the actual remaining number is less than 30.

  First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200 (a). FIG. 199 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the normal push-down effect. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the push-up addition effect is started, a button D2 with the letters “push” is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and “up chance” is displayed above the button D2. "Is displayed. Further, a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display area D3 is displayed below the button D2, and a display area D4 is displayed below the display area D3 with the characters “Press the button at the right time!”. Is displayed. In the display area D3, the small areas D3b and D3f with the character “?”, The small areas D3c and D3e with the character “chance!”, And the characters “Super hot !!” are attached. A small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a that scrolls from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front in each small area. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that there is a possibility that the number of certain changes in display may increase by operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner. It should be noted that the number of times of addition increases most when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button is displayed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. It becomes the smallest when 22 is pressed.

  FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small region D3d. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d with the characters “Super hot !!” An extra number display area D5 in which the characters “+5” are displayed is displayed, and “GET” is displayed above the extra number display area D5. In addition, five times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Furthermore, the characters “GET 5 times GET !!” are displayed on the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand the remaining number of times on the display added in the current press-on effect. Note that the correspondence between the timing at which the scroll bar D3a is pressed and the remaining number of times to be added is defined in the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 200A shows the display contents when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f to which the character “?” With a low expectation is added. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), the button D2 is split into two, and the letters “sorry ...” are displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters “addition failure ...” are displayed in the display area D4. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Accordingly, when the next press-on effect is executed, it is possible to make the user think that the frame button 22 is pressed at a better timing, and the player's willingness to participate in the press-up effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200 (b), a special mode push-up effect will be described. When the special mode push-up effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen in the main display area Dm, and “super-chance opportunity” is displayed above the button D2. "Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal mode has started.

  In addition, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. Is displayed on the display area D4, and the text “Determine the number of times to add by yourself!” Is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player recognize that the timing at which he / she operated the frame button 22 affects the number of times of addition (that is, not a so-called race). Therefore, since the player can more positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, the non-display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display becomes 0, and it is unclear when the latent state ends, and the player It is a production to give a sense of tension.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground as in the third embodiment. Set to In the present embodiment, the characters “End ...?” Are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the latent state ends.

  When the actual number of remaining latent states is not 0, the process shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), an effect in which a rock 813 approaches from behind a character 811 that imitates a rabbit is executed, and “Pinch! A display area in which a plurality of characters “!” Are displayed appears. Further, in place of the remaining number of times of the latent state, a character “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the latent state has not yet ended, but it is not known when it will end. Therefore, from the anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near, it is possible to face the game with a sense of tension.

  FIG. 202 (a) is a diagram showing the display content when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 and the latent state ends in the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when the latent state ends when the non-display mode is set (when the value of the probability variation counter 2030k becomes 0), the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813. Is called. In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters “END !!” are displayed. With these displays, the player can clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch exit appearance) when the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of latent statuses is a big hit in a state of 5 or less. . If the second special symbol is a big hit just before the end of the latent state, it is advantageous for the player because basically the latent state is set 120 times after the big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), an effect is performed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. Further, the characters “Pinch escape!” Are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to “remaining 100 times”. Since this pinch-out appearance is only performed when a big hit is reached at the end of the latent state (within 5 remaining latent states), the player who confirmed this out of pinch state It is a big hit just before the state ends, and it can be recognized that a latent state has been newly added. Therefore, the player can be pleased with the big win at a good timing, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. First, FIG. 203 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), in the ROM 2220 in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment, an additional effect selection table 2220da, a pressing period table 2220db, and a hold notice determination table 2220dc. And are provided.

  The extra effect selection table 2220da is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the press-up extra effect in the latent state, and the mode of the press-up extra effect to be executed (either the normal mode or the special mode). is there. Details of the extra effect selection table 2220da will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. FIG.

  FIG. 204 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the extra effect selection table 2220da. As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the extra effect selection table 2220da has a special symbol lottery result, and the player's participation in the push-up extra effect is normal (games with extra effect within the past five times). The participation degree normal table 2220da1 referred to when the player is operating the frame button 22 and the lottery result of the special symbol are small hits, and the participation degree for the player's push-up effect is low (past 5) The table 2220da2 for lower participation level that is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the extra effect over the number of times) and the table 2220da3 for big hit that is referred to when the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery And are provided.

  First, details of the participation degree normal table 2220da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 204 (b). FIG. 204 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the participation degree normal table 2220da1. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the participation degree normal table 2220da1 shows the value of the effect counter 2230h for each difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. The range and the type (aspect) of the push-on addition effect are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with “no additional effect” in the range of “0 to 95”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “96 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100). Is not executed. In addition, a press-down effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). It should be noted that the special mode is not selected when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 5 to 29 times. This is to prevent the extra display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “91 to 97”, “normal mode” is defined in association with it, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “98, 99”, “special mode” is It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a normal mode push-up effect is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and a special mode press-up effect is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

  In this way, if the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is large (if it is 30 or more), the occurrence probability of the push-up addition effect is increased, so that the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

  Next, the details of the low participation degree table 2220da2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this low participation degree table 2220da2. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with “no extra effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “91 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation in the player's push-up effect is low, the frequency of the press-up effect is increased (4% → 9%). Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 80”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, “normal mode” is defined in association with the range where the value of the production counter 2230h is “81 to 94”, and “special mode” is included within the range where the value of the production counter 2230h is “95 to 99”. It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is used and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100). Is not executed. Further, the press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the press-up effect in the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). In other words, even when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 or more, the frequency of the push-up effect is increased (9% → 19%). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, the jackpot table 2220da3 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot table 2220da3 is a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is made during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with the range of “0 to 99”. In other words, the push-down effect in the normal mode is always executed.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “normal mode” with respect to the range of “0 to 49”. "Is defined in association with each other, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is" 50 to 99 "," special mode "is defined in association with it. That is, a press-up effect in the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. In this way, in the latent state, when the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number becomes a big win when the difference is 5 or more, the push-up effect is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect that a big hit will be expected when a press-on effect is generated. In particular, in the special effect, the selection rate is significantly increased as compared to the participation degree normal table 2220da1 and the low participation degree table 2220da2. Therefore, when a special push-down effect is generated, it can be expected that the jackpot is stronger and stronger. Therefore, the game can be performed while paying attention to the mode of the push-up addition effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the difference between the remaining number of times displayed and the actual number of remaining times is 5 or more and the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, a push-up effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the ratio of setting up the press-up effect is lowered and the press-up effect is set at a rate of 80%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily generate a difference between the remaining number of times displayed and the actual remaining number of times, so that it is possible to more effectively execute the push-up effect.

  Returning to FIG. 203, the description will be continued. The pressing period table 2220db is a data table that defines the number of times of additional display according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the press-up effect. Details of the pressing period table 2220db will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 (c) and 206. FIG.

  First, FIG. 205 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 2220db. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), the pressing period table 2220db refers to the normal table 2220db1 that is referred to when the normal-type press-up effect is set, and the special-mode press-up effect is set. The special table 2220db2 is included. When execution of the push-up effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined push-up effect is read and stored in a press period storage area 2230da of the RAM 2230 described later. When pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-up effect, the table stored in the press-period storage area 2230da is referred to determine the number of times of addition.

  First, the details of the normal table 2220db1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 2220db1. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the normal table 2220db1 defines the number of times (addition value) to be added to the remaining number display area D1 in association with the elapsed time from the start of the press-on addition effect. ing. Note that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing-down period timer 2230db of the RAM 2230.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), “0” is associated with an extra value in the range of elapsed time from 0 to 699 milliseconds. During this period (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the push-up effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b with the character “?”. It becomes an aspect. Further, “3” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds. Note that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the push-up addition effect) is such that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c with the characters “chance!” It becomes the mode to do. In addition, “5” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds. Note that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the push-up addition effect) is the small area D3d with the scroll bar D3a marked with the characters “Super hot !!”. It becomes a mode to move on.

  Similarly, in the range where the elapsed time is 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e), “2” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. In the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f, “0” is associated with the added value.

  As described above, the normal table 2220db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the added value according to the effect mode (change in the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the press-down effect in the normal mode. Thereby, the number of times corresponding to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) when the player presses the frame button 22 can be added and displayed.

  Next, the details of the special table 2220db2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special table 2220db2.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), “5” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time of 0 to 799 milliseconds (a period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3b), and the elapsed time is 800. The range of ˜999 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with “10” as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a is in the small area D3d). “20” is associated with the added value, and “10” is added as the added value in the range where the elapsed time is 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). In the range where the elapsed time is 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), the added value is “5”. In the range where the elapsed time is 2000 to 2049 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g), “30” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range 2050 to 2500 milliseconds In the (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h), “5” is associated with the additional value.

  With this special table 2220db2, the number of times the scroll bar D3a is displayed in the small area where the frame bar 22 is pressed can be accurately displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Returning to FIG. 203 (a), the description will be continued. The hold notice determination table 2220dc is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the hold notice effect is executed. As described above, the hold notice effect may be executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the probable change state, and the lottery result with high expectation in the held balls. This is an effect that is executed to suggest that there exists. Details of the hold notice determination table 2220dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the contents of the hold notice determination table 2220dc. As shown in FIG. 207, the hold notice determination table 2220 dc has a reach presence table that is referred to when there is a hold ball in which a reach effect is generated in the hold ball, and a reach effect is generated in the hold ball. And a non-reach time table that is referred to when there is no reserved ball to be played. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 2230h for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined for each number of held balls.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 in the table with reach. That is, when the number of held balls is 2 or less, the holding notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is associated with “0-9”, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is “0 to 15” is associated. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to execute the reserved notice effect. Therefore, since it is possible to positively fire the player in an attempt to store more reserved balls, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 207, even in the no reach time table, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0-2. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is three, “0” is associated as the value of the tooth and effect counter 2230h, and when the number of reserved balls is four, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is “0, 1”. "Is associated. In other words, the table for when there is no reach has fewer random numbers (counter values) for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined than the table for when there is a reach. Therefore, if there is a holding ball where the reach effect is performed in the holding ball, the holding notice effect is more easily executed, so that the player develops a reach effect at the stage when the holding notice effect is started. It can be expected strongly.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment in that a pressing period storage area 2230da, a pressing period timer 2230db, and a continuous hit counter 2230dc are added.

  The pressing period storage area 2230da is a storage area for storing a pressing period corresponding to the determined type of the pressing up effect when execution of the pressing up effect is determined. That is, when the start of the push-up addition effect is determined, the table (the normal table 2220db1 or the special table 2220db2) read from the press period table 2220db is stored (see Y4392 in FIG. 213). When the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-on effect, the additional value is determined based on a table stored in the press-period storage area 2230da and a timer value of a press-down period timer 2230db described later. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is updated.

  The pressing period timer 2230db is a timer that measures an elapsed time since the start of the pressing effect. On the basis of the timer value of the pressing period timer 2230db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da, an additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

  When an effect that prompts repeated hits of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 198 (a)) occurs in the repeated hitting counter effect 2230dc, a predetermined upper limit value is set for each effect, and the player during the effect is displayed. Is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see Y5703 in FIG. 210). When the value of this repeated hit counter 2230dc becomes 0 during the execution of the effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit, the effect is developed to the next stage (the egg symbol moves into the house Ds1c).

  The pressed flag 2230dd is a flag indicating whether or not an operation (pressed) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the press-up effect of 1. If the pressed flag 2230dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the press-up effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected. It means not detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the press-on effect, the pressed flag 2230dd is referred to, and the pressing period stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da only when the state is OFF. Is added to the remaining number display area D1 and displayed (see Y5605 in FIG. 209). In other words, even if the player performs the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 a plurality of times in one adding effect, only the adding to the first operation (pressing) is executed. In addition, when the push-up addition effect is completed with the pressed flag 2230dd being off, 1 is added to the value of a participation degree counter 2230df described later. That is, the participation counter 2230df counts the number of times that the player has not participated in the push-up addition effect (presses the frame button 22). In the present embodiment, the frequency of execution of the push-up addition effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df.

  The pending advance notice flag 2230de is a flag indicating whether or not the pending advance notice effect (see FIGS. 197 and 198) is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. This pending notice flag 2230de is set to ON when execution of the hold notice effect is determined (see Y5808 in FIG. 214), and is set to OFF at the end of the hold notice effect (see Y5835 in FIG. 217). While the on-holding advance notice flag 2230de is on, the execution of a new on-hold notice effect is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the hold notice is executed repeatedly and confuses the player.

  The participation degree counter 2230df is a counter indicating the degree of participation of the player with respect to the push-up addition effect. This participation degree counter 2230 df is incremented by 1 when the press-up addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22 (see Y 5509 in FIG. 208). When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see Y5609 in FIG. 209). In other words, the value of the participation degree counter 2230df counts the number of consecutive times that the player has not pressed the frame button 22 (not participated) in the push-up addition effect. In the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the press-on effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df is greater than 5 (if the player has not participated in the press-up addition effect for six or more consecutive times), the determination ratio of the press-up addition effect is increased. As a result, an opportunity to prompt the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 can be increased, and the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect can be improved.

  The non-display setting flag 2230dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 201B) is set as the display mode in the latent state. If this non-display setting flag 2230dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see Y5896 in FIG. 216), and when an extra effect (press-up extra effect, special extra effect) is set (in FIG. 213). Y4395, see Y5860 in FIG. 215), when the latent state is finished during the non-display mode (see Y5858 in FIG. 215), it is set to off.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 217. First, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Y4107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 128) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Y4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 208) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. (Y5501: Yes), and then, it is determined whether or not a press-on effect is being executed (Y5502).

  In the process of Y5502, if it is determined that the press-up extra effect is being executed (Y5502: Yes), the extra value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the press-up extra effect is added to the remaining number display area D1. Is added during execution (Y5503), and the process ends. The details of the process of pressing the extra effect (Y5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5502 that the press-on effect is not being executed (Y5502: No), it is then determined whether the hold notice effect is being executed (Y5504). In the process of Y5504, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is being performed (Y5504: Yes), the hold notice press process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect is executed ( Y5505), this processing is terminated. The details of the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, in the process of Y5504, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not being executed (Y5504: No), the process corresponding to the other pressing timing is executed (Y5506), and this process ends. The other pressing timing is, for example, timing when the back image can be changed. In the sixth embodiment, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back surface type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the variable stop state. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that a game will become monotonous.

  If it is determined in the process of Y5501 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (Y5501: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the press-up effect (Y5507). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the extra effect (Y5507: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508). If it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5508: No), the player has not performed the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the press-up ride effect, and the press-up ride effect has ended (the player has This means that the user has not participated in the current press-on effect), and updates the value by adding 1 to the value of the participation degree counter 2230df (Y5509), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y5507 that it is not the end timing of the press-up addition effect (Y5507: No), or in the process of Y5508, it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508: Yes), Y5509 This process is terminated without executing the process.

  By executing the processes of Y5507 to Y5509, it is possible to accumulate the degree of participation with respect to the player's push-up addition effect over a plurality of addition effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the push-up effect according to the participation degree of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the details of the process for pressing the extra effect (Y5503) will be described. This extra display pressing process (Y5503) is a process for displaying an additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 on the remaining number display area D1, as described above.

  When the push-in process during extra effect (Y5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5601). Since the added value has already been displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the press-up added effect, it is not necessary to execute a new added value, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5601 that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5601: Yes), then the pressed period set in the pressed period storage area is read (Y5602), and the read pressed In the period, an additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 2230db is read (Y5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read added value is 0 (Y5604). If it is not 0 (Y5604: No), an effect is displayed in which the read added value is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (Y5605).

  After the process of Y5605, the added value read in the process of Y5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p and updated (Y5606), and the process proceeds to Y5608. On the other hand, in the process of Y5604, when it is determined that the read additional value is 0 (Y5604: Yes), an additional failure effect (see FIG. 200A) for notifying that the addition has failed is set (Y5607). ), The process proceeds to Y5608.

  In the process of Y5608 executed after the process of Y5606 or Y5607 is completed, the pressed flag 2230dd is set to ON (Y5608), and the value of the participation counter 2230df is reset to 0 (Y5609). Exit. By executing the push-down process during the extra effect (see FIG. 209), when the push-up extra effect occurs, the extra value corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Can be added to the number of times displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the details of the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described. This hold-down notice pressing process (Y5505) is a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold-notice effect as described above. In the pressing process during the holding notice (Y5505), first, it is determined whether it is a pressing period (see FIG. 197 (a)) in the holding notice effect (Y5701). It is determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (see FIG. 198 (a)) (Y5702).

  In the process of Y5702, if it is determined that it is not the continuous hit period (Y5702: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5702 that the continuous hit period is in progress (Y5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hit counter 2230dc is updated by subtracting 1 (Y5703), and the updated counter value is 0? Is determined (Y5704). If it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (Y5704: Yes), the development effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) in which the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c is set (Y5705). The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5704, when it is determined that the value of the updated repeated hit counter 2230dc is 1 or more (Y5704: No), the process of Y5705 is skipped, and this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of Y5701 that the present is the pressing period (Y5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is designated in the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed immediately below). The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes winning information that causes reach production (Y5707). The reach production refers to any one of the following: normal reach, miss super reach A and B, hit normal reach, and hit super reach A to C.

  In the process of Y5707, when it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the designated range (Y5707: Yes), then, for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that causes the reach The effect that the egg symbol is displayed (the reserved symbol lays the egg) is set (Y5708). Then, a continuous hitting period for executing a continuous hitting effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be hit consecutively is set (Y5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous hitting counter 2230dc is set (Y5710), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of Y5707, when it is determined that the winning information for generating the reach effect is not included in the designated range (Y5707: No), the pending advance notice flag 2230de is set to indicate the end of the hold advance notice effect. It is set to off (Y5711), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the hold notice pressing process (see FIG. 210), when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the hold notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, if there is no advance notice (display of egg symbol) for the reserved symbols in the selected range, there is a reserved symbol with high expectation among the reserved symbols outside the player's selected range. It can be expected. Therefore, even when the holding notice effect does not occur, it is possible to provide a novel effect that can be expected to win a big hit on the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the command determination process 4 executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y4311, Y4313 to Y4315, and Y4319 are respectively command determination processes in the third embodiment (see FIG. 130). ) Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y43111 to Y4315, and Y4319 are executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received in the process of Y4306 (Y4303: Yes), the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is started. Is executed (Y4361), and the present process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (Y4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning command is received in the process of Y4311 (Y4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command. Then, a hold notice setting process for determining whether or not to hold a hold notice is executed (Y4362), and this process ends. Details of the hold advance notice setting process (Y4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the process of Y4315, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (Y4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number command has been received (Y4363). ), If the remaining variation count command has been received (Y4363), the remaining variation count command processing for executing the processing according to the number of times notified by the remaining variation count command is executed (Y4364). finish. Details of this remaining probability variation command processing (Y4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, in the process of Y4363, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (Y4363: No), then whether or not at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received. Is determined (Y4364), and if at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (Y4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command Is executed (Y4364), and the process is terminated. Details of the confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (Y4361) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4. When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y4371), and then notified by the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern is extracted (Y4372).

  When the process of Y4372 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability state (Y4373), and if it is a latent probability state (Y4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not a push-on effect is set. Is executed (Y4374), and the process proceeds to Y4376. On the other hand, in the process of Y4373, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (Y4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the process of Y4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. The process proceeds to Y4376. In the process of Y4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern is set (Y4376), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213, details of the extra effect setting process (Y4374) will be described. This push-on extra effect setting process (Y4374) is a process for determining execution of the press-up extra effect in the latent state as described above.

  When the superimposing effect setting process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a lottery stop type (Y4381). Is determined (Y4381: No), the next time when the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern command is received is during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)), and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less. Is determined (Y4382). In the process of Y4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the remaining number of probability changes is 6 or more (Y4382: No), the process proceeds to Y4391.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4382, if it is determined that the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less (Y4382: Yes), then the current second special symbol lottery is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether the lottery result is a stop type of G (Y4383), and when it is determined that none of the big hits E to G (Y4383: No), the process proceeds to Y4391. On the other hand, in the process of Y4383, when it is determined that any of the big hits E to G (Y4383: Yes), it is a big hit from the extra effect selection table 2220da as a table for discriminating the setting of the push-up extra effect. The table 2220da3 is read (Y4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of latent probabilities given after the jackpot, and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation area 2230p is calculated (Y4385), and the process proceeds to Y4391.

  If it is determined in the process of Y4381 that the current stop type is a small hit (Y4381: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the participation counter 2230df is greater than 5 (Y4386). If the value of the participation degree counter 2230df is larger than 5 (Y4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 2220da as a table for determining the setting of the push-up addition effect (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of latent states on display stored in the production probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed as Y4391. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation level counter 2230df is less than 5 (Y4386: No), the low participation level table 2220da2 is read from the additional effect selection table 2220da (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of latent states on display stored in the production probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed as Y4391. Migrate to

  In the process of Y4391 that is executed after any of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 ends, the difference calculated in the process of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 and the process of any of Y4384, Y4387, and Y4388 Based on the read table, the mode of the push-up extra effect (any of the no extra effect, the normal mode, and the special mode) is specified (Y4391), and the process proceeds to Y4392.

  In the process of Y4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the push-up addition effect is determined (Y4392). The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 2220db (see FIGS. 206A and 206B) and set in the pressing period storage area 2230da (Y4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when an operation (pressing) of the player with respect to the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing and adding effect determined to be executed this time, and is added corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing. The value is displayed over the remaining number display area D1. This allows the player to actively operate (press) the frame button 22 in the hope that the remaining number of latent states on the display will be added. Can improve willingness to participate. After the process of Y4393, the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF (Y4394), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y4392 that the execution of the push-up addition effect has not been determined (Y4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. (Y4395), this process is terminated. By executing this extra effect setting process, it is possible to select the appropriate extra press effect in accordance with the player's participation situation with respect to the past extra effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent state, the push-up effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit E to G. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, it may be configured to be able to set a press-on effect. Thereby, the freedom degree of production can be raised.

  Next, the details of the hold notice setting process (Y4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the hold notice setting process (Y4362) is a process for performing execution notice of the hold notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When the hold notice setting process (Y4362) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the gaming state is a latent state (Y5801). Each process of Y5802 to Y5809 for setting the notice effect is skipped, and this process is finished as it is. The reason why the hold notice effect is not executed in the latent state is that the main fluctuation in the latent state is a change display of two special symbols that cannot be stored on hold. For this reason, in the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is almost zero, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution determination itself of the hold notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5801 that the current gaming state is not the latent probability state (the normal state or the probability variation state) (Y5801: No), then whether the pending advance notice flag 2230de is on (Y5802), and when it is determined that the pending notice flag 2230de is ON (the pending notice effect is already being executed) (Y5802). : Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5802 that the pending notice flag 2230de is off (Y5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5803), It is determined whether or not the read winning information includes winning information corresponding to a variation pattern in which a reach effect occurs (Y5804).

  In the process of Y5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is included (Y5804: Yes), as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect, for when there is a reach The table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220dc (see FIG. 207) to determine whether the hold notice is executed, and the process proceeds to Y5807. On the other hand, in the process of Y5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (Y5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect. The time table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220dc, the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process proceeds to Y5807.

  In the process of Y5807 executed after the process of Y5805 or Y5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold notice effect is determined in the process of Y5805 or Y5806 (Y5807), and it is determined that the execution of the hold notice effect is determined. If it is (Y5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 2230de is set to ON (Y5808). Next, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 197 (a)) is set (Y5809), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the hold notice setting process, the hold notice effect can be set at an appropriate ratio according to the number of balls to be held and the contents of each ball to be held.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, details of the remaining variable number of times command process (Y4364) will be described. This remaining probability variation command process (Y4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the remaining probability variation command, as described above. When the remaining probability variation number command processing (Y4364) is started, first, the remaining variation number notified by the remaining variation number command is stored in the remaining variation number area 2230o (Y5851), and then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a state (Y5852).

  In the process of Y5852, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (Y5852: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5852 that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 2230dg is on (whether or not the non-display mode is set) (Y5853) and if the non-display setting flag 2230dg is OFF (Y5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (Y5861). ), This process is terminated. Details of the non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5853, when it is determined that the non-display setting flag 2230dg is on (Y5854), the non-display mode (see FIG. 201B) is set. In the process, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation number stored in the remaining variation region 2230o is 5 or less (Y5854). In the process of Y5854, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 6 or more (Y5854: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (Y5854: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is any one of jackpots E to G (Y5855). If it is determined that it is not any of G (Y5855: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining variation number is 0 (whether or not the number of times stored in the remaining variation region 2230o is 0). It is determined (Y5856).

  In the process of Y5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is not 0 (Y5856: No), this process is terminated as it is to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of Y5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 0 (Y5856: Yes), it means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the non-display mode end effect (See FIG. 202A) is set, the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF (Y5858), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5855, if it is determined that the current lottery result is one of the big hits E to G (Y5855: Yes), since the latent state of 120 times is set after the big hit, Then, execution of a special extra effect (see FIG. 202 (b)) is set (Y5859), overwriting 100 times in the effect probability variation area 2230p, and the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF ( Y5860), the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the non-display mode is set, the second actual number of remaining latent states (the value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is within a predetermined number (5 times). When the special symbol is a big hit (ie, when the remaining number of latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state is finished), a special additional in a mode different from the normal push-up effect. It is set as the structure which performs production (special addition production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  Next, the details of the non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described with reference to FIG. This non-display setting process (Y5861) is a process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode, as described above. As shown in FIG. 216, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is 0 (Y5891) and is 1 or more. If it is determined (Y5891: No), 1 is subtracted from the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y5892), and the remaining number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value in the effect probability variation number area 2230p after the subtraction. The displayed number of times is updated (Y5893), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5891, when it is determined that the remaining number stored in the effect variation number area 2230p is zero (Y5891: Yes), the actual remaining number stored in the remaining certain variation number area 2230o is It is determined whether or not it is zero (Y5894). If the actual remaining number is not zero (Y58994: No), a non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set (Y5895) and non-display is performed. The setting flag 2230dg is set to ON (Y5896), and this process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the remaining latent state game.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5894, when it is determined that the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o is 0 (Y5894: Yes), the display is performed at the end timing of the latent state. Since it means that the remaining number of times is updated to 0, a normal end effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) is set (Y5897), and this process ends.

  Thus, in the non-display setting process in the sixth embodiment, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times of display becomes zero. As a result, it is possible to form a state where it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, the game can be performed with a sense of tension while the non-display mode is set.

  Next, details of the confirmation command process (Y4366) will be described with reference to FIG. This confirmation command process (Y4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol as described above. When the confirmation command process (see FIG. 217) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is the special figure 1 confirmation command (Y5831). (Y5831: Yes), the fixed display of the first special symbol is set (Y5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 2230de is on (Y5833). If it is determined that the pending notice flag 2230de is on (Y5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the present fixed display is set. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (Y5834). In the process of Y5834, if it is determined that the hold notice effect has ended (Y5834: Yes), the hold notice flag 2230de is set to OFF (Y5835), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y5833 that the pending notice flag 2230de is off (Y5833: No), or in the process of Y5834, it is determined that the hold notice effect is continuing (Y5834: No). ), And this process is terminated. In the process of Y5831, if it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (Y5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (Y5836), and this process is terminated. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to execute the hold notice effect as an interest effect in the normal state or the probable change state. In this hold notice effect, a hold symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by an operation on the player's frame button 22.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a holding notice effect indicating an expected degree of change display held. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable display is started It was possible to raise the player's expectation.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that when a holding notice effect is generated, it is difficult for a player to have a sense of expectation with respect to a holding symbol that is not subject to the holding notice. This is because it is normal to set a hold notice effect for a hold symbol corresponding to a hold ball with high expectation in the hold.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be designated. Moreover, it is comprised so that the direction in which the reservation ball | bowl with the high expectation degree which becomes a big hit is included performs the holding | maintenance notice effect becomes high. Thereby, when the holding notice effect is not set for the reserved symbols in the designated range or when the holding notice effect having a low expectation is executed, the reserved symbols outside the range designated by the player are handled. It is possible to have a big win for the holding ball. Therefore, when a high-priority hold notice effect occurs in the selected range, the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice has occurred is expected to have a big hit, and no hold notice is generated. When a hold notice with a low expectation occurs, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a sense of expectation can be given to a hold ball outside the selection range.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as a kind of push-up effect executed in the latent state, the remaining latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 is displayed. There is an effect that adds the number of times.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having an operation means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player and capable of executing an operation effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. is there. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect for informing the result of the predetermined winning lottery. Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, there is provided a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display. Then, when a press-up addition effect is executed, a configuration in which a different additional value is added and displayed in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 within a range in which the remaining number on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number. It is said. Thereby, since the remaining number of times of addition on the display is varied depending on the operation timing of the player, the player can be more actively added and participate in the production (the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing). . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, in the latent state, the number of remaining latent states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is not displayed. When the second special symbol is a big hit within the predetermined number of times (5 times) (the latent state is newly set 120 times), it is possible to execute a special extra effect that is different from the normal extra effect. It is composed.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines set an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state over a predetermined number of lotteries based on a predetermined trigger such as a win. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it shifts to the advantageous state, by executing the production of the aspect in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue, the expectation that the advantageous state will continue for a long time, There is something that aims to improve interest.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is unclear at which stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state has been reset when the advantageous state is reset (overwritten) when it becomes a predetermined trigger such as a hit in the advantageous state. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, a special extra effect that is executed only when the remaining number of latent probabilities is 5 or less is a big hit, so that the player who has confirmed the special extra effect On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent state has been added just before the end of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player who has recognized that he has won the jackpot in a timely manner. In addition, since the remaining number of times of the latent state at the time of the big hit becomes clear, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special addition effect is executed only in a state where the non-display mode is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1, if the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (the value stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o) is within five times, a special case different from normal It is good also as a structure which performs an addition production | presentation. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, there may be a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. That is, even if the remaining number of times on display is within five times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the actual number of remaining times is within five times. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times on the display is 5 or less and the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). In other words, it is unclear whether the actual remaining number of times has been sufficiently left, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, it is possible to execute the special extra effect regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set. When winning a jackpot, the player can be surely recognized to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a special addition effect according to whether the non-display aspect is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be executed in which the sprinting character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By executing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to execute a more natural flow effect in each display mode. Moreover, the production mode can be diversified.

  In the sixth embodiment, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by the effect of prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect, but is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg symbols whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as an intelligible production.

  In the sixth embodiment, when a hold notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the hold symbol for automatically making a hold notice is determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect itself may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the hold notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). In other words, if the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the hold notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the hold ball with low expectation may not be enjoyed. Therefore, the player can select not only the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect but also whether or not to perform the reserved notice effect itself. It can make you feel. Therefore, it can respond widely to the needs of each player.

  In the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested depending on whether or not the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether or not the egg is cracked. It is not something that can be done. As long as the reserved symbols can be changed to different modes according to the expected degree of the corresponding reserved ball, for example, the color of the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player may be changed according to the expected level. Good. More specifically, for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a holding symbol for performing the holding notice effect, the holding symbol in the selection range is changed to white. And it is good also as a structure in which the color of each holding | maintenance symbol changes, when a player hits the frame button 22 repeatedly. In this case, it may be determined in advance at the start of the hold notice or when the player selects the hold symbol, how far the color changes according to the number of consecutive hits for each hold symbol. Specifically, for example, when a holding symbol corresponding to a holding ball having a variation pattern of short deviation, normal deviation, and hit super reach A is selected, the holding symbol corresponding to the short deviation is changed from white to another color. Set so that it does not change, and the hold symbol corresponding to the detachment normal reach is set to change up to yellow (changes in order of white → blue → yellow) according to the number of consecutive hits, and the hold corresponding to the hit super reach A The symbol may be set to change up to a rainbow color according to the number of repeated strikes (change in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color). With this configuration, it is possible to look forward to what color each reserved symbol will change, and allow the player to actively make repeated hits. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<First Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 218 to 223, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the same variation time (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Was configured. Thereby, it was set as the structure which aims at the efficiency improvement of the game in a latent state.

  On the other hand, in this 1st modification, it is set as the structure which changes the variation time of a 2nd special symbol according to the remaining frequency | count of a latent state. In the first half of the latent state, a relatively short variation time is easily set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is easily set. As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the interval between the small hits and the big hits is shortened, and it becomes possible to increase the winning ball in a relatively short time, while in the second half of the latent state, the small hits or the big hits. The increase of the prize ball can be made relatively gradual. Therefore, it is possible to add a wave to how to increase the number of prize balls, so that it is possible to add a sharpness to the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  The first modification of the third embodiment differs in configuration from the third embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 2020 and RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of First Modification of Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220, the electrical configuration of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218 (a), a variation pattern scenario table 2020ea is added to the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example compared to the configuration of the ROM 2020 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 89). Is different. In the present modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partly changed.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 218 (b). FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification is replaced with the latent probability table 2020f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) in the third embodiment. A latency (first half) table 2020f4a and a latency (second half) table 2020f4b are provided.

  The latent (first half) table 2020f4a is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern in the first half of the latent state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lotteries are executed). The second half table 2020f4b is a table that is referred to in the second half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lotteries are executed). Details of this latent (second half) table 2020f4b will be described with reference to FIG. The specified contents of the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a are the same as the latent probability table 2020f4 (see FIG. 94B) in the third embodiment, and are 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 219 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latency (second half) table 2020f4b. Among these, the contents of the rules for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a (and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. . For the lottery of the second special symbol, a variation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is selected. In case of small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the whole range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and it is out of the lottery of the second special symbol Is selected and the short-circuit fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  In this way, when the latency (second half) table 2020f4b is referred to, the variation time becomes longer (0.5 seconds → 2 seconds) than when the latency (first half) table 2020f4a is referenced. By doing so, in the second half of the latent state (51 to 120 times), the interval for small hit or big hit can be lengthened. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the number of possessed balls is likely to increase, and in the second half, the increase in the number of retained balls becomes moderate, so that the way of increasing the possessed balls can be waved, and the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea will be described with reference to FIG. 219 (b). The variation pattern scenario table 2020ea is a table in which a special symbol lottery number after the end of the jackpot is associated with a table for selecting a variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is not dependent on the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the jackpot in which the normal state is set ends. The normal table A2020f1 is associated as the selection table. For this reason, when the normal state is set after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is always determined by referring to the normal table A2020f1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the probability variation table for the range of 1 to 120 lottery times for the special symbol after the jackpot ends. 2020f3 is defined in association with each other, and for the special symbol lottery number 121 or later, the normal table A2020f1 is defined in association with it. Therefore, the probability variation table 2020f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table when the number of special symbol lottery times is 120 times or less, and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to after 121 times. The

  Further, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the latent probability (first half) for the range of 1 to 50 lotteries after the big hit is over. The table 2020f4a is defined in association with the special symbol lottery number 51-120, and the latent (second half) table 2020f4b is defined in association with the range 121,122. The table B2020f2 is defined in association with each other, and the normal table A2020f1 is defined in association with 123 and thereafter.

  Thereby, in the first half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (first half) table 2020f4a in which a short variation time can be easily determined. it can. Therefore, the rate of increase of the winning ball can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (second half) table 2020f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long variation time. Therefore, in the latter half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be made moderate, so that the degree of increase of the prize ball can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, since the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the normal table B2020f2 in the special symbol lottery twice after the completion of the latent state, the result of the latent state is obtained as in the third embodiment. Sufficient production time for performing the display can be ensured. Furthermore, when the number of lotteries for special symbols exceeds 123, the normal table A2020f1 is referred to.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030. As shown in FIG. 220, the RAM 2030 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 2030ea and a lottery counter 2030eb added to the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). Is different.

  The scenario storage area 2030ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea. In the scenario storage area 2030ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is stored at the end of the jackpot (see Y2351 in FIG. 223). At the start of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ea.

  The lottery counter 2030eb is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 2030ea, the variation pattern selection table is selected by determining the number of lotteries for the special symbol based on the value of the lottery counter 2030eb.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. First, referring to FIG. 221, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 10) executed in the first modification instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment. 221) will be described.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 221) in the first modified example, each of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 includes a first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 in (see FIG. 104) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 221) in the present modification, when the processing of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery counter 2030eb is then retrieved from the scenario storage area 2030ea. Is read (Y551), and the process proceeds to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505. Although not shown in the figure, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read, the same processing as Y551 is executed to determine the table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed in the first modified example instead of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modification of the third embodiment, each of the processes Y601 to Y608 is Y601 to the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment. The same processing as each processing of Y608 is executed.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modified example, after the process of Y608, it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the lottery number counter 2030eb (Y651), and this process ends. In the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 222), by updating the value of the lottery counter 2030eb every time, the value of the lottery counter 2030eb can always match the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the big win. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, a jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223) executed in the first modified example instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223), the same processes as the processes of Y2301 to Y2308 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment are executed in the processes of Y2301 to Y2308, respectively. .

  Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 223) in the first modified example, when the process of Y2308 is completed, the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of Y2302 to Y2306 is then changed to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020ea. Are set in the scenario storage area 2030ea (Y2351). Next, the value of the lottery counter 2030eb is reset to 0 (Y2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the third embodiment, the first half of the latent state (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 1 to 50) or the second half (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 51 to 120). The variation pattern selection table that is referred to select the variation pattern is switched depending on whether the variation pattern is selected. In addition, a variation pattern having a longer variation time is more easily selected in the latter half of the latent state than in the first half of the latent state. Thereby, the interval which becomes a small hit or a big hit differs in the first half and the latter half of the latent state, and the possibility that the first half becomes a small hit or a big win at a shorter interval can be increased. That is, in the first half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be increased, and in the second half, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be made relatively moderate. Therefore, since the rate of increase of the prize ball can be varied, waves can be added to the way of increasing the prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the rate of increase of the winning ball is faster in the first half of the latent state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to win a big hit in the first half of the latent probability state (before entering the second half) and to make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent probability state again. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the first modification, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the second half of the latent state, the second special symbol is set. Although the variation time of 2 seconds is always set when the lottery is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a variation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in a trial in a latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine whether it is the first half or the second half of the latent state from the variation time, so that even when a variation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played in anticipation of the first half. be able to. Note that the above-described <second modification of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98), the third symbol display is performed based on the fluctuation status (setting status of each standby flag) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81 is set, and in the normal state, the change state of the second special symbol which is a sub-change (the setting state of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set. Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s indicating that the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is the main fluctuation is stopped, The main variation was displayed reliably.

  Here, in the third embodiment described above, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state, that is, in the state where left-handed is executed. Met. This is because the second entrance 1640 where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right-handed region.

  As described above, when the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while stopped, the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When doing so, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order by looking at the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation is not started.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t indicating that a predetermined period has elapsed after the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a sub fluctuation, is stopped during the normal state is set to ON. In this case, the sub-variation demo display (special figure 2 demo display) is executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous variation is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol on the secondary variation side (second special symbol) continues to be displayed while being stopped. Can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the game.

  The second modification of the third embodiment differs from the third embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the third embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating an example of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed in the small region Dm1 in the normal state (or the probability variation state).

  As shown in FIG. 224, in the normal state (or probability variation state), the first special symbol is changing, and the second special symbol is not changing for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 80) indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, “during game” indicating that the first special symbol is changing as a sub-variation demo display. Is displayed. In this way, by executing a display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the sub-variation demonstration display, the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed). Even if a ball is entered in the first entrance 64, the symbol that does not change (the second special symbol) is continuously displayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) can be set based on the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s). As shown in 224, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (when the special fig. 1 standby flag 2230s is set to OFF), the fact that the first special symbol which is the main fluctuation is fluctuating is indicated. Since the contents are displayed, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand display mode for the player.

<Electric Configuration in Second Modification of Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 225, an electrical configuration in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 225 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 225, the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification example has a gaming state that is a normal state or a probability change state compared to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment. The screen display type defined in accordance with the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on is different. Yes. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the third embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the game state is the normal state or the probability change state, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on. As a display type, “Special Figure 2 Demo Display” is defined correspondingly. This “special figure 2 demonstration display” is a screen display type in which “playing” display (see FIG. 224) is executed using the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the second special symbol demonstration display area. .

  As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of two types of special symbols is performed simultaneously, one of the two types of special symbols (advantageous to the player). The special symbol) is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player for the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81. A region where sub-variation variation display is executed (sub-variation display region) when a configuration is used in which variation display is performed as sub-variation using (a region smaller than the display region where main variation variation display is performed). Since it is possible to execute a demo display corresponding to the sub-variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the symbol indicating the sub-variation lottery result is stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more). Give It is possible to suppress the door. In addition, the player can be watched on the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

  Furthermore, the sub-variation (second special symbol) is displayed by setting the contents of the demonstration display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol). It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (sub-variation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is executed in the sub-variation area, the display relating to the main change can be executed using all (almost) all of the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand presentation is provided to the player. be able to.

  In addition, in this 2nd modification, it replaces with the stop symbol which shows the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol which is a subvariation, but it is the structure which performs the demonstration display for 2nd special symbols, However, Other structures may be used. For example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and the second special symbol demo display may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variable display region. A configuration in which the demonstration display for the second special symbol is executed in an area different from the above may be used.

  In the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (sub-variation demonstration display) in the normal state or the probability variation state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub-variation has been described. However, for example, a similar configuration may be used even in a latent state where the second special symbol is a main variation and the first special symbol is a sub-variation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variable display area of the first special symbol and setting the small area Dm1 as the subvariable display area regardless of the gaming state, Display data and display control can be shared, and the processing load of display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 242, a first modification of the above-described sixth embodiment will be described. In the above-described sixth embodiment, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a special symbol variation effect is provided as a configuration in which the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed. In addition, the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set when the push-on effect is executed together with the remaining number of times displayed on the display screen and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more). In the case where the non-display mode is set, the configuration has a special addition effect that is executed when the remaining number of actual latent states is a big hit within a predetermined number (5 times), An effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display at various timings during the latent state is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a technique that makes a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to make it difficult for the player to know how long the specific gaming state will continue. In such a gaming machine, an effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display is executed and the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is converged, so that the specific gaming state can be given to the player without a sense of incongruity. It is configured to play.

  In this case, as an effect of adding the remaining number of times on display, as described in the above-described sixth embodiment, an additional effect (push-on effect) executed based on the variation of the special symbol, and the remaining number of times on the display Is considered to be an extra effect (special extra effect) that is executed based on the fact that is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various addition effects in this way, it becomes possible to make the remaining number of times that a specific gaming state (latent probability state) is executed more difficult, and a state in which a tension is given to the player. The game can be continued to be continued, and a sense of security can be imparted when a large number of times are added due to the extra effect.

  However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is different depending on the player, and by performing various patterns of additional effects, the player There was a possibility that the motivation of the would decrease. Specifically, for a player who prefers an effect of continuing the state where the actual remaining number of times is not known until the remaining number of times on the display is reduced, and adding the actual remaining number of times when the remaining number of times on the display is reduced On the other hand, if an extra presentation is performed before the remaining number on the display is reduced, the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is reduced by the number of times added by the extra presentation. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of addition in the effect of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a possibility that the motivation for the player's effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, as an additional effect executed during the latent state, an effect mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for each variable additional effect, and the remaining number of times on the display are a predetermined number or less. Since the player can select an effect mode (post-notification mode) in which an extra effect is executed when the player has become, an additional effect mode desired by the player can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the situation where the motivation with respect to a player's performance falls can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming machine that can select the effect mode of the extra effect as described above, for example, the first effect mode that can execute the extra effect is set every time the change of the special symbol is executed, and the remaining on the display When the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number on the display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations) in the state where the number of times is displayed as three times, the additional effect is displayed. There is a problem that the execution timing is missed and the effect of the production is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, during the jackpot game in which 120 times are actually set as the remaining number of times, it is possible to select the effect mode of the extra effect, and the remaining number of times displayed on the display is a predetermined number of times as the effect mode. Based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the extra effect is executed when it becomes (for example, 5 rotations), the remaining number on the display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect.

  Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the extra effect, the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode can be executed regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

  The first modification of the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 2220 and RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. In the first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach lose), some symbols are vertically A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 226 and 227). Furthermore, when the big hit G is won in the latent state, a plurality of presentation modes in which different bonus presentation modes are executed during the big hit game are selectable (see FIGS. 228 and 229).

  First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the horizontal direction is stopped and temporarily stopped in the scroll change effect, and FIG. FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first reach mode is displayed in a suggestion mode that suggests that a part of the symbols moves in the vertical direction after detachment stop (temporary stop), FIG. 227 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which a reach (second reach mode) in which a symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed, and FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the second reach mode is hit and stopped at the symbol. . Note that the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbols move in the horizontal direction is the same as that of the above-described sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be controllable by dividing it into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2. During the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is performed collectively, thereby varying the entire display region of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and the special symbol variation display different from normal (the symbol variation display in the vertical direction) is performed, the regions subject to the symbol variation in the vertical direction (the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2) ) To update only the display data. As a result, an appropriate symbol display effect can be executed simply by updating the display data of the region suitable for the symbol variation display, so that the processing load of the control relating to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

  In FIG. 226 (a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode). As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is win, The symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed in a manner that is shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of symbols in which symbols indicating the same number are displayed in a linear manner).

  After that, among the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a “lion”, the symbol row L2 is a sub symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a “snake”), A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting manner indicating an action suggesting a change in the vertical direction (downward), and a vertical (downward) symbol row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, a left symbol is displayed by displaying a sub symbol above the symbol row L1 displayed in the left display region Dz1 and displaying a sub symbol below the symbol row L3 displayed in the left display region Dz1. A vertical symbol sequence (from the top, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “lion”, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “snake”, a symbol symbol displayed in the order of a sub symbol) is displayed in the area Dz1. (See FIG. 226 (b)).

  Thereby, it can be suggested that the symbols displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuate in the vertical direction, and an effect that makes the player have a sense of expectation can be executed. Further, in the first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display change of the display mode of each symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 and the new display in the left display area Dz1). This is a configuration that suggests that a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction will be executed in the future simply by executing a process of adding a simple symbol and additionally displaying a vertical symbol row). The processing load of control related to the symbol variation process can be reduced.

  A configuration that suggests that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 (temporary stop display) without using the configuration of the first modification. May be used. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the suggestion effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  When the second reach mode (reach in which the symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction) is executed, the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward) as shown in FIG. 227 (a). As a second reach mode, a main symbol (a main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot. A special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the single direction symbol sequence (L1 to L3) Even complicated symbol variation display can be easily executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), it becomes possible to set a plurality of stop positions at which a specific main symbol (the main symbol with the number “1” attached) indicates a big hit, thereby increasing the expectation of the big hit. Production can be performed.

  Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, the main symbol (simulating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to any of the effective lines V5 and V6 is displayed. Main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a line (see FIG. 227 (b)). Thereafter, the jackpot game is executed.

  In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state where the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)) to the state where the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped). Although the example in which the display data of the other area is not changed has been shown, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub-symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the right display region Dz2 is not updated, and otherwise The display data (for example, “reach” displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be updated. Thus, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 226 (a) is executed, the display of “reach” is changed to the display of “multi-reach” indicating that the expectation of jackpot is higher than the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, a display area showing the current symbol variation status (region where “reach” is displayed in FIG. 226 (a)) is provided in the left display region Dz1, and the contents displayed according to the symbol variation status are appropriately changed. You may comprise. As a result, the second reach mode is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (left display area Dz1) in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol fluctuation state Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing, and it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation of jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, the contents of the extra mode selection effect for selecting the extra effect executed during the latent state in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This extra mode selection effect converges the difference between the actual remaining number in the latent state (the value of the remaining probability variation number area 2230o) and the remaining number on the display (the value stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p). Therefore, it is an effect for selecting an effect mode (addition mode) of an extra effect that adds (adds) the remaining number of times on the display, and whether or not the extra effect is executed every time the change of the special symbol is started The player can select an arbitrary production mode (an additional chance mode) and a production mode (an announcement mode) in which an additional production is executed when the remaining number of times displayed on the display reaches a predetermined number. This is an effect capable of selecting the “add-on mode”.

  Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to select an effect mode in which an extra effect suitable for his / her preference is executed, and an unintended extra effect is executed and motivation can be prevented from being reduced. .

  First, with reference to FIG. 228 (a), the display content of the addition mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of the addition mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), in the first modification, the bonus mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

  When the extra mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times (effect remaining probability variation number) on the display when winning the big hit G is continued in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. Thereby, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the big hit game. The main control device 110 clears the value of the probability variation counter 2030k when the jackpot game is executed (set to 0). However, the remaining number on the display in the effect probability variation number area 2230p of the sound lamp control device 113 is clear. By storing (setting) the production remaining probability variation number, the remaining number on the display can be continuously displayed even during the big hit game.

  In the center area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a with characters “push” prompting to operate (press) the frame button 22 is displayed, and “addition chance mode” is displayed on both sides of the button D6a. The first selected display D6b described and the second selected display D6c described as "post notification mode" are displayed, and the first selected position for selecting the first selected display D6b, and the second selected A selection display D6d that moves at a predetermined interval from the second selection position for selecting the display D6c is displayed. In the display area D4, a display for explaining the contents of the addition mode selection effect is displayed as a telop, and in FIG. 228 (a), a description “Select a favorite mode with a button” is displayed. In addition, on the left side of the sub display area Ds, the additional effect mode (addition mode) selected in the state where the jackpot is won is displayed, and it is easy to determine which additional effect mode the player has selected. We are trying to grasp it.

  During this extra mode selection effect, the extra mode specified by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the desired extra mode is designated by the selection display D6d is set.

  Then, in FIG. 228 (a), when the extra chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), “RUSH continuation” is notified to notify that the latent state continues. And a character 811 in a display mode congratulating that the latent state continues. Further, in this case, since the extra presentation mode is not changed in the extra mode selection production (because it is “an extra chance mode” at the time of winning the big win → the “addition chance mode” after the extra mode selection production), the remaining number display area D1 Will display the same “3 remaining times” as when winning the jackpot. As a result, the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (remaining number of times displayed) as the situation when the jackpot is won (remaining number of times displayed). A game can be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), the addition mode selected in the addition mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. Thereby, by looking at the display content of the sub display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the extra mode at the time of jackpot and the extra mode after the extra mode selection effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 228 (a), when the post notification mode (second selection display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. 229, “+97” is added so that the remaining number display area D1 indicates 100 times. Display is executed. In addition, the same contents as those described in FIG. 228 (b) are displayed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same location and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, when the extra mode at the time of winning the big hit is different from the extra mode selected in the extra mode selection effect, the extra mode that is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to be 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the production without any sense of incongruity, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in the state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates “three times”, and the extra mode selection effect during the jackpot game is performed. When the extra mode is changed from the extra chance mode to the post notification mode at, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as “3 times”, the extra effect is executed in the post notification mode. (The number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) may be lost, and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the additional effect is executed in the post notification mode. An opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) can be ensured.

  In the first modification, since it is determined whether or not a latent state is given after the big hit game is finished in the seventh round in the big hit game (the ball passes V in the seventh round). Since the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77) is passed), the above-described additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the eighth round in the jackpot game. Has been. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the extra mode in a state where the actual remaining number of times has been reset to 120 times, the ball does not pass through the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the big hit If the latent state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electric Configuration in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 230 and FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A2020ff1 provided in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230, the second normal table A2020ff1 is partly changed from the normal variation table 2020f1 (see FIG. 93) used in the sixth embodiment described above. Is different. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the variation pattern changed from the normal table A2020f1 among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A2020ff1 will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) is executed as a special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big win, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “101 to 150”, and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with “151 Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “˜198”.

  Further, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “71 to 150” and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is Correspondingly, an out-of-range “171 to 198” and super-reach C (30 seconds) are associated. In addition, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “131 to 170” and corresponds to the normal reach B (20 seconds). The super reach C (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”.

  When the hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves vertically in the suggestion effect period (second reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 227 (a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit (see FIG. 227 (b)).

  When the hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves in the horizontal direction after the suggestion effect period (third reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit.

  When detachment normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is out (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Then, after the suggestion effect that suggests the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that it is out.

  When the deviation super-reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves in the horizontal direction after the suggestion effect period (third reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination indicating the detachment.

  As described above, in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as the scroll change effect, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestive effect (the first 20 seconds out of the variation time of 30 seconds) 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the suggestion effect is finished, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment as it is, and the variation time of 20 seconds is deviated (developed normal reach B). 10 seconds) can be combined with fluctuations to be executed (hit super reach E, missed super reach C), and it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player have expectations for winning at various timings during the fluctuation of the symbols.

  Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted. In addition, in the first modified example, since the degree of expectation varies depending on the direction in which the third symbol is restarted, the game is performed while expecting which direction the third symbol will restart. be able to. During execution of the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates whether or not the third symbol restarts, or suggests the direction in which the third symbol restarts. Since the effect (suggested effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggested effect, and whether or not the 3rd symbol is restarted or the direction in which the 3rd symbol is restarted The game can be performed while predicting.

  In addition, in FIG. 226 (b), although the suggestion effect which the display form of the 3rd symbol changes to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) which suggests a moving direction (downward direction) is performed, other suggestions are performed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the 3rd symbol restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display mode of the 3rd symbol is displayed in the left side (traveling direction) (second movement). Direction suggestion display mode), a suggestion effect in which the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a display format suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, or displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Using other display forms, there is a suggestive effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol.

  Furthermore, it may be configured not to suggest the restart direction of the third symbol, but to simply execute an suggestive effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, first, the suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) that suggests that the third symbol is restarted is executed, and then the suggestion that suggests the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is good to comprise so that production (restart direction suggestion production) may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation in a stepwise manner, and the player can continue to watch the effect.

  Moreover, in this 1st modification, when the 3rd symbol restarts, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation to the vertical direction (downward direction) or the fluctuation | variation to a horizontal direction (left direction) may be performed, The direction in which the three symbols are restarted may be provided in other ways, for example, a fluctuation pattern that restarts in the upward direction in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction may be provided. In this case, the variation expectation of the 3rd pattern restarting in the vertical direction (upward and downward) is set to be different, and as a suggestion effect, it is suggested that the 3rd symbol restarts in the vertical direction. Providing a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts upward, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts downward, The hit expectation can be notified step by step.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the ROM 2220 in the first modified example is provided with an addition mode selection table 2220fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment.

  This extra mode selection table 2220fa stores the contents of each extra effect executed in the extra mode (addition chance mode, post-notification mode) that can be selected by the player during the latent state. An effect corresponding to the addition mode effect selected in the process is read and executed.

  FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, a pressed a flag 2230fa, a pressed b flag 2230fb, a scroll change flag 2230fc, a mode change flag 2230fd, a mode addition flag 2230fd, and an addition mode setting area 2230fe are added to the sixth embodiment described above. is doing.

  The pressed-a flag 2230fa indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during reach (pressed period during reach) in a period during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This flag is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. This pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to ON (see Y8002 in FIG. 233) when the reach pressing process (see Y5332 in FIG. 233) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed. Reference is made in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8201 in FIG. 235), and then it is set to off (Y8204 in FIG. 235).

  The pressed b flag 2230fb indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during the jackpot game (a jackpot middle pressing period) in a period during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This is a flag for indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated, and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot pressing period. This pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON when the big hit middle pressing process (see Y5334 in FIG. 234) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed (see Y8102 in FIG. 234). Reference is made in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8207 in FIG. 235), and then it is set to off (Y8212 in FIG. 235).

  The scroll change flag 2230fc is a flag that is set to ON when a condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) in which the direction of change of the third symbol changes midway. This scroll change flag 2230fc is displayed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period (suggested effect period) of the changing pattern (winning super reach D) that can switch the changing direction of the third symbol in the middle. On the other hand, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is established in the scroll change effect, and is turned on (see Y8005 in FIG. 233). Then, it is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8202 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined to be on (see Y8202: Yes in FIG. 235), it is set to off (see Y8203 in FIG. 235). ). In the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 according to the setting state of the scroll change flag 2230fc. is doing.

  The mode change flag 2230fd is a flag indicating that the currently set addition mode has been changed in the addition mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect. Is set to This mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8105 in FIG. 234) and pressed when it is determined that the mode has been changed in the jackpot mid-press processing (see Y5534 in FIG. 234). Referenced in the end-time process (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8208 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined to be turned on (Y8208: Yes in FIG. 235), it is set to off (Y8209 in FIG. 235). ). In the process at the end of pressing (Y5537 in FIG. 235), the value of the effect probability change count area 2230p is varied according to the setting state of the mode change flag 2230fd, and the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON. If there is, 100 is set as the value of the effect probability variation area 2230p (Y8210 in FIG. 235). Thus, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set to 100, that is, displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state where the remaining number of times on display (the number of remaining effect changes) is set to 100, and it is possible to suitably provide the additional effect executed in the added mode after the change. it can.

  The addition mode setting area 2230fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the currently set addition mode and the previously set addition mode, and is selected in the end-of-press processing (Y5537 processing in FIG. 235). The extra mode is set (Y8211 in FIG. 235). In this addition mode setting area 2230fe, information indicating that the addition chance effect mode is set in the initial setting (Y4001 in FIG. 127) of the startup process (see FIG. 127) executed when the power is turned on is set. In the state where the player has not selected the addition mode, the addition chance mode in the latent state is configured to be executed. Information set (stored) in this additional mode setting area 2230fe (currently set additional mode) is referred to in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see Y4361 in FIG. 236) (see Y4391 in FIG. 236). In addition, the remaining number command process 6 (see Y4364 in FIG. 237) is referred to (see Y5871 in FIG. 237), and an additional effect corresponding to the currently set additional mode is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 237. First, with reference to FIG. 232, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Y4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In the case (Y5501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the reach is being pressed (Y5531).

  If it is determined in the process of Y5531 that the pressing period during reach is in progress (Y5531: Yes), the pressing process during reach for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol during the reach is executed ( Y5532), this process ends. Details of the reach-in-pressing process (Y5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5531 that the reach is not being pressed (Y5531: No), it is then determined whether the is a jackpot press period (Y5533). In the processing of Y5533, when it is determined that the big hit pressing period is in progress (Y5533: Yes), the big hit middle pressing processing for selecting one additional mode from a plurality of additional modes with different types of additional effects to be executed is performed. This is executed (Y5534), and this process is terminated. Details of the big hit mid-pressing process (Y5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Y5533, if it is determined that it is not the big hit middle pressing period (Y5533: No), other processes corresponding to the pressing timing are executed (Y5535), and this process is terminated. The other pressing timing is an extra effect executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Y4107 in FIG. 208) of the sixth embodiment described above in addition to the process of Y5507 of the sixth embodiment described above. The middle pressing process (Y5503 in FIG. 208) and the pending notice pressing process (Y5505 in FIG. 208) are executed.

  In the process of Y5501, when the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected (Y5501: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (Y5536), and is determined to be the end timing of the pressing period. If it has been performed (Y5536: Yes), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is executed (Y5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5501 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is skipped and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the contents of the reach-in-press process (Y5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reach pressing process (Y5532). This reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a condition for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol is established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 335) is executed.

  When the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8001: No). Then, the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8002), and then a display reach pressing command is set (Y8003). By setting this display reach pressing command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the reach pressing period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. This pressed display mode is displayed continuously during the reach pressing period (suggesting effect period), and although not shown, it is determined whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

  When the process of Y8003 is completed, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is a hit super reach D (see FIG. 230) (that is, a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (Y8004). . In the process of Y8004, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the hit super reach D (Y8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to ON (Y8005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the hit super reach D (Y8004: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON in the process of Y8001 (Y8001: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the reach pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and the present process is terminated. Note that the first modification of the sixth embodiment is configured such that the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the reach pressing period. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, a pressing process during reach (Y5532) is executed, or whenever the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is It may be configured such that the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the winning is achieved. By comprising in this way, the content of the effect performed can be made complicated and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the contents of the jackpot mid-pressing process (Y5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot mid-press processing (Y5534). This big hit mid-pressing process (Y5534) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the big hit mid-pressing period (addition mode selection effect period). Specifically, the process for setting the addition mode in the latent state executed after the jackpot is completed based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the addition mode selection effect (see FIG. 228). Executed.

  When the big hit middle pressing process (Y5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8101: No) Then, the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8102), and then the display jackpot middle pressing command is set (Y8103). By setting the display jackpot mid-press command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot mid-press period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. Although the pressed display mode is not shown, it is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. 228 (a) is pressed, and the selection display D6d is stopped and displayed at the position where the added mode selected is specified. The selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side is displayed in a manner indicating that it has been selected.

  When the processing of Y8103 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the addition mode has been changed (Y8104). Here, the extra mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the extra mode setting area 2230fe, and compared with the extra mode selected in the current extra mode selection effect, the extra mode can be changed. Is determined. In the process of Y8104, when it is determined that the addition mode has been changed (Y8104: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition mode has not been changed (Y8104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of Y8101 that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the jackpot pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and the present process is terminated. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the big hit middle press process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the big hit middle press period, and the extra mode is determined. However, for example, it is also possible to configure so that the extra mode can be set again within the jackpot mid-press period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the content of the pressing end process (Y5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end-of-press processing (Y5537). This process at the end of pressing (Y5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (the pressing period during reach, the pressing process during jackpot) ends. Based on the status of the flag set to, processing for setting the content of the effect executed after the end of the pressing period is executed.

  When the pressing end process (Y5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8201). If it is determined that the pressed-a flag 2230fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during reach. Since this is not the case, the process (Y8202 to Y8205) based on the frame button operation within the reach-pressed period is skipped and the process proceeds to Y8207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8201 that the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set on (Y8201: Yes), it is then determined whether the scroll change flag 2230fc is set on (Y8202). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Y8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to OFF (Y8203), a display scroll change command is set (Y8204), and the process proceeds to Y8206.

  If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the scroll change flag 2230fc is not set to ON (set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (Y8205), and the process proceeds to Y8206. In the process of Y8206, the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to OFF (Y8206).

  When the processing of Y8206 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207). Here, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 2230fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the jackpot pressing period. Since this is not the case, the processing based on the frame button operation (Y8208 to Y8212) within the jackpot mid-pressing period is skipped, and this processing ends. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the jackpot pressing period (during the addition mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability change count area 2230p and the setting content of the addition mode setting area 2230fe are not changed. The latent state after the end of the big hit game is executed in a state in which the state at the time of the big win (the remaining number displayed in the extra mode and the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, when the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the addition mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the addition mode in the latent state, the addition mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y8207 that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8208). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Y8208: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to OFF (Y8209), the value of the effect probability change count area is set to 100 (Y8210), and the selected addition mode Is set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe (Y8211). Then, the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8208 that the mode change flag 2230fd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8208: No), the processes of Y8209 and Y8210 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y8211. Transition. As described above, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability change frequency area 2230p is set to 100, so that the added addition mode is changed in the latent state executed after the end of the big hit game. The used extra effect can be suitably executed. In addition, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see Y8208), the process of setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y8210) is skipped, so that the latent If the player intentionally selects the same extra mode as the currently set extra mode during the extra mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the extra mode in the state, the extra mode and the remaining It is possible to suppress the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area D1 from being changed.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is an extra effect based on the currently set addition mode type with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed, first, the same processes as the Y4371 to Y4373 and Y4375 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above are executed. In the process of Y4373, if it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y4373: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391). In the process of Y4391, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  In the process of Y4391, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391: Yes), Y4374 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above. , Y4376, the same processing is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (the post notification mode) (Y4391: No), the process of Y4374 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed (when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In the case of, an extra effect setting process is executed, and an extra mode that can be expected to be added to each variable extra effect can be provided.If the currently set extra mode is a post notification mode, the extra effect setting process is not executed. By making the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number on the display not converge, the number of times to be added displayed at the time of subsequent notification (addition effect executed when the remaining number on the display becomes a predetermined number) Can be bigger. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the details of the remaining variable number of times command processing 6 (Y4364) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining variable number of times command process 6 (Y4364). This remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is related to the additional effect based on the currently set additional mode type with respect to the remaining variation number command processing of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 215). The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is executed, first, the same processing as Y5851 and Y5852 of the remaining certain variation command processing (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is executed. If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post notification mode (Y5871). In the process of Y5871, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  In the process of Y5871, when it is determined that the post-notification mode is set (Y5871: Yes), the same process as Y5853 to Y5861 of the remaining variable number of times command process (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is performed. Execute this to finish this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5871 that the post-notification mode is not set (addition chance mode is set) (Y5871: No), the process of Y5853 to Y5861 is skipped and the process is terminated. .

  With this configuration, when the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In this case, an extra effect setting process is executed, and an extra mode that can be expected for each extra variable effect can be provided.If the currently set extra mode is a post-notification mode, the extra effect setting process is not executed. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of times of additional displayed on the notice is increased (addition effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number). can do. Therefore, the production effect of the production desired by the player can be enhanced.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first modification example of the sixth embodiment will be described. This modification is different from the above-described sixth embodiment in that a command related to pressing is added in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 238), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in the present modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process 6, the processes of Y6401 to Y6417 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 139) in the third embodiment described above.

  If it is determined in the process of Y6416 that an error command has not been received (Y6416: No), it is then determined whether or not a display related command has been received (Y6431).

  In the process of Y6431, when it is determined that the display pressing related command has been received (Y6431: Yes), the pressing related command process is executed (Y6432), and the process returns to Y6401. Details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y6431 that a press-related command has not been received (Y6431: No), then other command processes are executed as in the third embodiment (Y6418). Return to processing.

  Next, details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. The press-related command process (Y6432) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) a press-related effect.

  In the press-related command process (Y6432), first, it is determined whether or not a press command during display reach has been received (Y8301). If it is determined in the process of Y8301 that the display reach-in-press command has been received (Y8301: Yes), the reach-in-press command process is executed (Y8302), and the process proceeds to Y8303.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 240, details of the reach-down press command process (Y8302) will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart illustrating the command processing for pressing during reach. This reach-in-press command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reach-in-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reach press command process, first, a reach press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display reach press command is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8402).

  Then, based on the reach pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y8401, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8405), the reach command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y8301 that a display reach-in-press command has not been received (Y8301: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll change command has been received (Y8303).

  In the process of Y8303, when it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received (Y8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (Y8304), and the process proceeds to Y8305.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 241, details of the scroll change command process (Y8304) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll change command process, first, based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the relevant / invalid information, a vertical scroll symbol array is set and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8501). Next, a vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display contents of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8502). ). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8503).

  Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8507). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8508), the scroll change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Y8303 that the display scroll change command has not been received (Y8303: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll non-change command has been received (Y8305).

  If it is determined in the process of Y8305 that the display scroll non-change command has been received (Y8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (Y8306), and the process proceeds to Y8307.

  Here, the details of the scroll non-change command processing (Y8306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 (a) is a flowchart showing the scroll non-change command process. This scroll non-change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-pressing start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll non-change command process, first, a scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (Y8601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8602).

  Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8605), the scroll non-change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y8305 that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (Y8305: No), it is then determined whether a display jackpot middle press command has been received (Y8307).

  In the process of Y8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has been received (Y8307: Yes), the jackpot mid-press command process is executed (Y8308), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 242 (b), the details of the jackpot middle press command processing (Y8308) will be described. FIG. 242 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. This jackpot mid-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot mid-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot mid-press command processing, first, a jackpot mid-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display jackpot mid-press command is determined, and the determined jackpot mid-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (Y8701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8702).

  Then, based on the big hit middle press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8705), the jackpot mid-press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8307, if it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has not been received (Y8307: No), this process ends.

<Another Example of First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, another example of the first modified example of the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 246. In this example, the special reach effect (FIG. 82, FIG. 82) performed in the 3rd embodiment mentioned above to the scroll change effect (refer FIG. 226, FIG. 227) performed in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment mentioned above. (See FIG. 83). The combined reach effect can be executed. Thereby, a complicated reach production can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  This example is different from the above-described embodiments in that the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partly changed and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed. This is different in that the part processing is changed. About another structure, it is the same as each structure and various control processes which are used for each embodiment mentioned above. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 used for this another example is demonstrated. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), this example is different from the above-described embodiments in that a symbol row L4 that is scrolled and displayed in a horizontal direction is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1, and left and right. And the symbol row L8 that is scrolled and displayed is added below the symbol row L3.

  Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm in which the symbols are variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled in the left-right direction and variably displayed (5 columns). , And L8), the number of symbol columns that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three columns), and the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is switched vertically. Of the five symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) that are variably displayed by scrolling left and right, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

  Then, fluctuation control of five (5 columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) is performed on the variation region Dz3 which is a region wider than the display region in which the main display region Dm can be displayed, The display control is executed for the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dmm is changed, the symbol sequence after the change can be displayed only by executing the display control based on the contents of the variation control executed in advance. Thus, it is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol sequence without delay for the player.

  In addition, this example is different in that the symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is set. The symbol sequence corresponding to the second reach mode is set so that the second reach mode is executed.

  Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) when the first symbol is off by one extra frame, and the first reach mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol (stop symbol) displayed after stopping one frame (temporary stop) is not displayed. A second reach mode in which the display is changed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is executed. In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame outage stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed It becomes possible to pattern the symbol arrangement.

  And in this example, the symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of a 1st reach mode is previously memorize | stored as symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to a 2nd reach mode with respect to each of symbol arrangement | sequence L5-L7. Thus, the second reach mode can be executed in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. As a result, when the second reach mode is executed using a part of the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode, an effect can be executed without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (b) to FIG. 244 (b), the contents of the combined reach effect in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the left and right symbols are changed in the combined reach effect, and FIG. 244 (a) shows the main display area Dm in the combined reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the state by which the area | region displayed on was changed, and FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the state in which the symbol fluctuation | variation to an up-down direction is performed among composite reach effects. is there. In this combined reach effect, a symbol variation in the left-right direction (normal symbol variation) using the symbol rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 243 (b)), and then the display region is displayed in the main display region Dm. Reach effect (first reach mode) is changed for 10 seconds (see Fig. 244 (a)), and the symbol change direction (scroll direction) is changed from left to right to up and down. The changed reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 244 (b)).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating that the symbol sequence L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm is out. )Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation control of the symbol strings (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm (the fluctuation data is updated in accordance with the progress of the fluctuation time (elapsed time)) is being executed. That is, when the combined reach effect is executed, first, the execution of the variation control is started for all the symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to the symbol variation in the left-right direction. For the symbol sequence (L1 to L3) displayed in the region Dm, the fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed, and for the symbol sequence (L4, L8) set outside the main display region Dm. , Fluctuation control for 20 seconds (period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 244 (a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, the symbol sequence displayed in the main display region Dm is changed by executing the fluctuation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect even for the symbol sequence that is not displayed in the main display region Dm. When displaying a symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it is possible to display without delay.

  In the example shown in FIG. 243 (b), the third symbol with the numeral 1 (the third symbol with the character imitating "Elephant") is located at the center position of the symbol row L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary stop display is temporarily performed in the stopped (temporary stop) disengagement display mode (first temporary stop mode). When the out-of-range variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the out-of-range display mode shown in FIG. 243 (b), and the symbol variation ends.

  And the suggestion effect which suggests that the symbol sequence displayed on the main display area Dm is changed in a state where the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode (for example, FIG. 82 (b)). The display form of the character attached to the 3rd symbol as shown in FIG. 3 is changed, and the display suggesting that the display region is changed and the display suggesting that the display region is changed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are displayed. The effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 244 (a)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area). The symbol row L3 displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 243 (b) is moved out of the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop mode, which is a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating detachment, a third symbol (the third symbol with a character imitating "Elephant") with the numeral 1 is a symbol string. It is displayed in the reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right side position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol sequence) displayed by the main display area Dm, the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that is once considered to be off from the player is hit. Since it can be changed to the reach display mode (first reach mode) that can be expected, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit even after the third symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped and displayed. Motivation for the player's game can be maintained.

  In this example, the third symbol (the third symbols displayed in FIG. 243 (b)) in the first temporary stop mode is reached by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. Since the display (first reach mode) is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a possible combination, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward, but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that allows the reach effect (first reach mode) to be executed by moving it downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. Processing is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upper or lower), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. Can be increased.

  That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is used in order to execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same 3rd symbol in a row of symbols displayed on the upper side and the center, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower) When the configuration is used, it is the same as either the symbol row displayed on the upper side and center of the main display region Dm before movement or the symbol row displayed on the lower side and center of the main display region Dm before movement. By displaying the third symbols in a row, it is possible to execute reach effects (first reach mode) in the display area after movement, so that the third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. The number of combinations can be increased, and the player can Whether develop into first leech aspect, i.e., there is an effect that it is possible to prevent easily predict the symbol variation effect to be executed next, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 244 (a), the third symbol (the third symbol (the elephant with the numeral 1) attached to the right side of the symbol row L4 is the target of the reach effect. Is displayed (stopped temporarily), that is, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm. The right position of the column (symbol column L2) and the same third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in FIG. 244 (b)) in the middle symbol column (symbol column L1) display a stop (temporary stop) ( When stopped (temporary stop) is displayed in the second temporary stop display mode), as shown in FIG. 244 (b), the symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed at the left position of the symbol row L1, L2, L4. The column L5 is displayed in a vertically varying manner.

  As a result, the same reach effect is executed as in the second reach mode (see FIG. 227 (a)) described in the first modification of the sixth embodiment described above. The contents of the second reach mode are described above. Since it is the same as the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area was changed so that the arrangement was displayed, the first reach mode was made executable, and the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop mode, and then the direction of symbol variation was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments in that the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. The other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (a). FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 2340a2. As shown in FIG. 245 (a), in the character storage area 2340a2, a command for designating the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp controller 113). ) For storing the symbol array used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the display region storage area 2340a2a in which the display region corresponding to) and the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stored. An array storage area 2340a2b and other storage areas 2340a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

  Here, the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a. In this display area storage area 2340a2a, as display area types, the display arrays 1 to 3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display arrays L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command for specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113).

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation on all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received variation pattern command for display. . In the drawing process (see FIG. 149), a drawing list is created for the symbol sequence corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. is doing. Thereby, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol string to be displayed. In this case, when a flag (storage area) is provided for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 2340a2a, and the determination is executed with reference to the flag. Good.

  Next, the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol array storage area 2340a2b. In this symbol array storage area 2340a2b, a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when normal variation is executed and a symbol array for vertical scroll used when the second reach mode is executed are stored. Has been. The symbol array for vertical scroll includes a symbol array (for vertical scroll 1) corresponding to the symbol row L5 (see FIG. 243 (a)) and a symbol array corresponding to the symbol row L6 (see FIG. 243 (a)). When the vertical scroll 2) and the symbol array (vertical scroll 3) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 243 (a)) are stored, and the second reach mode is executed for each of them. The symbol arrangement corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored.

  Specifically, as the symbol arrangement for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), the third symbol with the numeral 1 is displayed in the reach out display mode (temporary stop) when the second reach mode is executed. If the symbol is set (see FIG. 226), the “symbol 1” to the third symbol to which the numeral 9 is added when the second reach mode is executed is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-reach display mode. Nine types up to “symbol array 9” are set. In this example, the display mode of the third symbol (first temporary stop mode) displayed when the second reach mode is executed (temporary stop) is set to be a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of symbol arrangement types for vertical scrolling stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b can be reduced.

  Similarly to the symbol arrangements 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), the vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and the vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7), respectively. Nine types of symbol arrays are set. In the case where the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical scroll display), 2 as the first temporary stop mode. This is a case in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating a disengagement in a state where the third symbol of the type is in a reach state (so-called double reach state).

  In this way, the second reach mode is delayed by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (the reach mode executed after changing the variation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol). Can run without. In addition, by determining in advance the combinations of the third symbols displayed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop), the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second reach mode can be reduced. .

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Another Example of First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, a pointer update process 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This pointer update process 2 is different from the pointer update process (Y7205 in FIG. 146) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (Y7205). When pointer update processing 2 (Y7205) is executed, first, the same processing as Y7401 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and then it is determined whether it is the timing when the display area is changed. (Y7431). If it is determined in the process of Y7431 that the display area is to be changed (Y7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 2340a2a (Y7432). The determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (Y7433). Then, the flow shifts to Y7402.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y7431, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the display area is changed, the processes of Y7432 and Y7433 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y7402. In Y7402 to Y7406, the same processing as Y7402 to Y7406 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol array is displayed. The display area is changed so that is displayed, the first reach mode is made executable, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol variation is changed. The two-reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player. In addition, in this example, two types of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are set as the changing direction of the symbol row, but the symbol row may be changed in other directions.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, since the symbol string data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol string data used when executing the second reach mode are stored differently, the symbol string data is set for each symbol string. Various effects can be executed by combining the data. In addition, the first combination so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol sequence used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the effect mode is switched from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

  In addition, in the state in which the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode May be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second reach mode is executed are provided separately, and the display of the second reach mode is played in a state where the first reach mode is being executed. It is possible to control the player so that the player cannot visually recognize it, and at the timing when the second reach mode is executed, the display control of each layer is switched so that the player can view the second reach mode.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) are executed simultaneously is used. The technology described in each of the above-described embodiments may be applied, with the symbol display device 81 configured to display the variation between the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the normal symbol simultaneously. In this case, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, the benefit that is executed when the winning is the same as the privilege that is executed when the special symbol is winning can be more effective. it can.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. In the seventh embodiment, since the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the above-described fourth embodiment is used, each element of the game board 13 has the same reference numerals as in the above-described fourth embodiment. And detailed description thereof is omitted. In the fourth embodiment described above, as a condition for shifting to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot B, D (see FIG. 152)) is won (first transition condition) ) And a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)), and after the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 100) without winning the jackpot. (Second transition condition) are provided so that there are a plurality of opportunities for transition to a gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player. In addition, the above-described plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (timing for winning the jackpot and setting the gaming state, and timing when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the gaming state is set). The player can continue to have a sense of expectation for shifting to the latent state.

  However, in the above-described fourth embodiment, even if either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to the same latent state, so that it can be executed during the latent state. There was a problem that it was not possible to make a difference between advantages and disadvantages other than the number of special symbols drawn.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the variation in special symbols between the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied and the latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied. As a gaming state (latent probability state) that is configured to have different patterns (variation times) and is advantageous to the player, a first latent state (latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and The second latent state (latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied) that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state can be set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  First, with reference to FIG. 247, the flow of gaming state transition in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 247, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment shifts between three gaming states (normal state, probability change state, and latent probability state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured.

  In the seventh embodiment, compared to the above-described fourth embodiment, when the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different (first difference) and when the jackpot D is won and the state shifts to a latent state ( When the first transition condition is satisfied), when the special symbol lottery count exceeds the specified number of times (100 times) in the probability variation state (when the second transition condition is satisfied), Since the different latent state is set in (2nd difference), the flow of the game state transition is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The detailed description of the first difference will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 (a). However, in the seventh embodiment, the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player after the big hit, as compared to the fourth embodiment. Is set so that the rate at which the normal state is set and the rate at which the probability change state is set again after the big hit in the probability change state is set high, and the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the big hit, is set. Is set to be low.

  A detailed description of the second difference described above will be described later with reference to FIGS. 249 (b) and 250. In the seventh embodiment, a latent state (when the second transition condition is satisfied) ( As the first latent state), a latent state (second latent state) set when the first transition condition is satisfied is provided, and the variation pattern (variation time) set in each latent state is different. Thus, the second latent state is configured to win more small hits during the latent state than the first latent state.

  Further, in the second latent state, the variation time of the variation pattern that is set when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is set in the first latent state. By configuring so as to be longer than the variation time of the variation pattern, it is configured to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the big hit C is won during the second latent state.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, as an opportunity to shift to the latent state that is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, there is an opportunity to shift without winning a special symbol jackpot, There is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be continuously increased. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is made different according to the trigger to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has shifted to the latent state. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a bonus, the game will be won in the normal state. In this case, a right-handed notification for indicating to the player that the small hit game is being executed (running) is executed, and a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game has elapsed. May be configured not to notify abnormality even when a right-handed game in a normal state is detected. Specifically, a gaming state discriminating unit that discriminates the currently set gaming state, a lottery result discriminating unit that discriminates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and a predetermined condition (right-handed during the normal state) When a game is detected), an abnormality notification means for notifying the abnormality is provided, the game state determination means determines that the normal state (the game state in which a left-handed game is performed) is set, and the lottery result determination means If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, even if a right-handed game is detected in the normal state, the abnormality notification means does not perform abnormality notification, and the special symbol lottery result is small. There is provided a measuring means for measuring a period during which the identification information (the first symbol) indicating that it is a win is changing or a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game, and the measuring means provides a predetermined period Total It may be configured not to perform the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means while you are. As a result, during a game state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed, a right-handed game performed by winning a small-hit game that allows a right-handed game to be performed for a short period of time before the small-hit game is started. Even if the game is performed after the small hit game is finished, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, as a right-handed notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state, And a second right-handed notification mode that is set based on the first right-handed notification mode, which is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Good. Thereby, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and a game easy to understand for the player can be performed.

  In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized to the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is good to set it as the display mode which added the display mode. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the emphasis state in a some alerting | reporting aspect. Note that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state. In addition, a notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player may be used, and besides the display mode, a light emission mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the audio output device 226 may be used. You may use the synthetic | combination alerting | reporting aspect which combined them.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 248 to FIG. 251, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), in the ROM 2020 of the seventh embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the fluctuation pattern The difference is that a part of the contents of the selection table 2020f is changed and a variation pattern scenario table 2020h is added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 249 (a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

  The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the seventh embodiment is the first in which each jackpot type is defined relative to the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 160 (a)) used in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value of the hit type counter C2 is changed, and the content of giving the number of time reductions in the jackpot B, which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 1, is changed. Other than that, the fourth embodiment is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, the big hit A is selected as the big hit type, and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is “30 to 69”, the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 89”, the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type. When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  Further, the seventh embodiment is configured such that the condition for assigning the number of times when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type is the same as that when the jackpot A is selected. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, the jackpot type that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the latent state that is most advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends is set to the jackpot D (selection ratio 10 %), And the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that in the fourth embodiment described above. By comprising in this way, it can suppress giving a privilege (prize ball) to a player excessively by the 2nd latent state which is most advantageous to a player.

  When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 44”, the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ In the case of 45 to 49 ", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and in the case where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is" 50 to 99 ", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

  Here, the jackpot H that is a jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the seventh embodiment will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which two rounds (R) of jackpot game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the jackpot game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game). It is difficult to identify a game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent probability state, is the winning game (ie, jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability change count to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game that does not change the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (that is, a small hit game), the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be performed while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the number of time reductions set when transitioning to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times), When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpot X, Y, Z are provided as jackpot types, and different times (for example, 1, 20, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the latent state when transitioning to the probability change state, so the player continues to have a sense of expectation to transition to the latent state. Can be held.

  Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot game content (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot is the same, and a jackpot type with a different number of times is provided to shift to a more latent state. The timing can be difficult for the player to understand. On the other hand, during the probability changing state, a remaining number suggesting notification for informing the player of the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent probability state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the player shifts to the latent state, so that the expectation to the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified by numerical values may be used, or a series of stories is continuously displayed. A period suggestion mode that suggests a period until the story shifts to the latent state using the period until the story is completed may be used.

  In addition, during the game, a mini game (for example, a game whose result is changed by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed, or the remaining number suggestion is performed. You may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting may be varied. Further, if the remaining number suggestion notification is not performed, for example, when the jackpot is won during the probability changing state, the remaining number of times until the latent state is shifted may be notified.

  Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (lottery) executed at the end of the probability variation state or the special symbol variation (lottery) performed at the beginning of the latent probability state may be varied. good. In this case, as a display mode to be varied, a display mode used for suggesting the degree of expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (b). FIG. 248 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the latent pattern is replaced with the latent pattern table 2020fb4 with respect to the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 160 (b)) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a table Ca2020fc2 and a latent probability table Cb2020fc3 are provided.

  Here, each variation pattern table provided in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, and FIG. 250 (b) schematically shows the contents specified in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3. It is the schematic diagram shown in.

  The latent probability table Ca2020fc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to during the period when the first latent state is set. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the symbol type, the determination result, and the hold Corresponding to the number of spheres, a variation pattern that is a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) to 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds) is defined. The contents defined in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 are the same as the contents defined in the latent probability table b2020fb4 of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 162 (b)), and detailed description thereof. Is omitted.

  The latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to during the period in which the second latent state is set. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the symbol type, the determination result, and the hold Corresponding to the number of spheres, a variation pattern that is a variation time of 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) to 7 seconds (7000 milliseconds) is defined. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the determination result is a hit 1 (a jackpot type is a jackpot C), a hit variation (variation time 7 seconds) is defined. In the case where the success / failure determination result is 2 (the jackpot type is jackpot A, B, D), a hit short fluctuation (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined, and the success / failure determination result of FIG. In the case of a deviation, a deviation short fluctuation (fluctuation time: 7 seconds) is specified.

  In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the determination result is a hit (big hit) and the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the hit is regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated, and when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, a hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 0.7 second) is defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Yes. In addition, when the determination result is a small hit and the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the hit short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of held balls In the case of 2 and 3, the hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 0.7 seconds) is defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, when the result of the determination is wrong, the short circuit fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated regardless of the number of reserved balls and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the seventh embodiment (game characteristics different from the above-described fourth embodiment) will be described. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the first latent state and the second latent state that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state can be set as the latent state. . Specifically, as described above, the variation time of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 defined in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is shorter than the latent probability table Ca2020fc2.

  With this configuration, the number of lottery times of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 that executes a lottery advantageous to the player over the special figure 1) that can win a small hit in the second latent state is determined. Since it can be increased from the state, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 referred to during the second latent state, if the big hit C, which is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), is won, A variation pattern (win variation) having a variation time of 7 seconds is selected. This 7-second variation time is longer than the variation time (0.7 seconds to 1 second) defined in each variation pattern set based on the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Diagram 2). When winning the jackpot C in the lottery of one special symbol (Special Figure 1), Special Figure 2 can be changed a plurality of times during the change of Special Figure 1.

  In the seventh embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, the lottery of FIG. 2 in the latent state is 1/80 is a big hit (see FIG. 90 (a)), and 221/480 is a small hit ( 90 (b)), it is set to win a big hit or a small win every time the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed 2-3 times. Further, in the seventh embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment described above, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, one of them changes depending on the stop symbol of big hit or small hit. When stopped, the other variation display is configured to be stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol regardless of the remaining variation time or lottery result. Further, when the big win is won in the lottery of FIG. 2 during the latent state, the latent state is set again after the big win as in the third embodiment described above (FIG. 160). (See (a)).

  According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, for example, the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit type is a big hit) Even if C) is won, before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, in the case where the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to an unfavorable state based on the big win of the special symbol. A gaming state advantageous to the player can be achieved.

  In addition, when the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special winning that is won by the jackpot that is disadvantaged to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is the jackpot C) A right-handed game against the player because there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being drawn continuously multiple times in a state where the symbol is fluctuating. Can be actively promoted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is prefetched, and it is determined that there is winning information winning the jackpot C in the prefetching result, the game is informed. You may comprise so that a person may be notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the player needs to continuously execute the right-handed game.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. A reserved ball of one special symbol and a second special symbol can be acquired. Therefore, the situation where the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed after the end of the small hit can be suppressed.

  The variation pattern scenario table 2020h is a data table that is referred to when setting a variation pattern, and a plurality of variation pattern scenarios (scenario 1 to scenario 3) are defined in association with the gaming state set after the jackpot. Yes. The fluctuation pattern scenario defines a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in association with the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations), and is set when actually selecting a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern scenario is selected using a variation pattern table corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (number of variations).

  By providing the variation pattern scenario in this way, it is possible to grasp in advance the period for continuously referring to one variation pattern table and the timing for switching the variation pattern table to be referenced. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM of the main controller 110, the set fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga, and the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is used. However, for example, the same configuration as the variation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation pattern scenario setting information (scenario command) is mainly used. It is configured to transmit from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and it is possible to grasp the period for continuously referring to one fluctuation pattern table on the sound lamp control device 113 side and the timing for switching the reference fluctuation pattern table. Configure to Good.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp a variation pattern (variation time) that can be executed in the future. For example, a variation pattern during execution of an effect (for example, a continuous effect) executed across multiple variations. It is possible to suppress a problem that the scenario is switched and a difference is produced between the effect mode of continuous production and the actually set variation pattern (variation time). In this case, specifically, the remaining period (the special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations)) of the period (for example, the probability variation state period) in which the same variation pattern scenario is continuously referred to is a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol lottery). What is necessary is just to comprise so that the continuous production performed over 3 times or more of special symbol fluctuation | variations may not be newly set, when it is discriminate | determined that (the number of fluctuations) is the remaining 3 times.

  Further, it may be configured such that the currently set variation pattern and the next set variation pattern are discriminated and a continuous effect corresponding to the discrimination result can be executed. Specifically, it changes with reference to the currently set fluctuation pattern table (for example, a fluctuation pattern table that selects a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined if the special symbol lottery result is out of place). The remaining number of times to select a pattern is 2, and then a variation pattern table to be set next (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is always selected if the special symbol lottery result is out of place) When a special symbol lottery result is a win, a variation pattern is selected with reference to a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds is defined is selected). Based on the determination result and the setting information of the variation pattern scenario, it is possible to set a continuous effect for 9 seconds.

  Next, the variation pattern scenario table 2020h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 2020h. In the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern table that is actually referred to from the plurality of variation pattern tables included in the variation pattern selection table 2020f is defined by the scenario depending on the gaming state and the number of lotteries (variation number) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. ing.

  Specifically, in the variation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 1) that is set when the gaming state becomes a probabilistic state after the jackpot, the number of lotteries (variations) of special symbols after the jackpot ends is “1 to 100”. ”Period, that is, the period in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the probability variation table 2020fb3 is defined, and the period“ 101 to 120 ”, that is, the period in which the latent probability state is set as the gaming state is The latent table Ca2020fc2 is defined, the period “121 to 122” is defined as the normal table Bb2020fb2, the period “123 to 128” is defined as the normal table Cb2020fb5, and the period “129 to” The normal table A2020f1 is defined. Of the variation pattern tables defined here, the contents of the probability variation table 2020fb3, the normal table Bb2020fb2, the normal table Cb2020fb5, and the normal table A2020f1 are the same as those in the third embodiment described above. Detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 250 (a), the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 that is set when the gaming state shifts to the latent probability state when the scenario 1 is set as the variation pattern scenario. Among the plurality of variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the certain state, the variation pattern table is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when scenario 1 is set, the first latent state is set as the latent state.

  Next, in the variation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 2) that is set when the gaming state becomes a latent state after the jackpot, the number of lotteries (variations) of special symbols after the jackpot ends is “1 to 120”. In other words, the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is defined in the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, and the normal table Bb2020fb2 is defined in the period “121 to 122” and “123 to 128”. The regular table Cb2020fb5 is defined for the period, and the regular table A2020f1 is defined for the period "129-".

  As described above with reference to FIG. 250 (b), the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 set when the gaming state shifts to the latent state with the scenario 2 set as the variation pattern scenario is as follows. Among the plurality of variation pattern tables that can be referred to, the variation pattern table is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when scenario 2 is set, the second latent state is set as the latent state.

  As described above, even when the same gaming state (latency probability state) is set, the variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set after the big hit. By making a difference depending on the gaming state, that is, depending on the transition trigger until the transition to the latent state, the advantageous gaming state (second latent state) is disadvantageous to the same gaming state (latent state). Gaming state (first latent state) can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in the same gaming state, in order to vary the degree of advantage based on the transition trigger until the transition to the gaming state, a configuration that varies the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is used. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the probability of special symbol lottery can be varied based on the timing of transition of the gaming state, or the lottery result of the special symbol can be changed to a specific lottery result In a bonus game that is executed when a lottery result that can be awarded (for example, a small win or a big win)), a closing period or opening of a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which a ball can be won during the bonus game. It may be configured to vary the period, or to provide a plurality of winning devices capable of winning a ball during the bonus game, and to change the winning devices to be released during the bonus game.

  In the fluctuation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 3) that is set when the gaming state becomes the normal state after the jackpot, the period when the number of lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is “1” is normal Table A2020f1 is defined.

  Next, details of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 251, the RAM 2030 of the seventh embodiment is different in that a scenario storage area 2030ga is added to the RAM 2030 of the third embodiment described above, and the other elements are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The scenario storage area 2030ga is an area for temporarily storing the variation pattern scenario selected using the variation pattern scenario table 2020h. In the scenario storage area 2030ga, the variation pattern scenario selected in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 255) is stored (Y2353 in FIG. 255), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252), or the first 2 In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIGS. 253 and 254), the stored variation pattern scenario is read (Y551 in FIG. 252, Y1151 in FIG. 253, Y1251 and Y1253 in FIG. 254), and the read variation pattern scenario is Based on this, a variation pattern table is selected (Y552 in FIG. 252; Y1152 in FIG. 253; Y1252 and Y1254 in FIG. 254).

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is cleared when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Further, when the RAM erase switch is operated to initialize (reset) the contents of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110, the initial setting of RAM (Y1912 in FIG. 118) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118). ), Scenario 3 is set as the scenario type.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is a special first symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252), the second control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253), the special symbol 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 254), and the jackpot end process (see FIG. 255) are partially changed, and the others are the same. The process is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern scenario. And it is comprised so that a different variation pattern scenario may be selected according to the game state set after the end of jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to set different variation pattern scenarios in the state where the latent state is set. Specifically, when winning the jackpot, where the latent state is set after the jackpot ends, and when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuating) The number of times) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the game state shifts to the latent state, so that different variation pattern scenarios are selected, and the variation referred to during the latent state Different pattern tables can be used.

  Since the variation times defined in the variation pattern tables (latency probability table Ca2020fc2, latent probability table Cb2020fc3) referenced during the latent probability state are configured to be different, It is possible to vary the execution condition of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol for performing the lottery that is advantageous to the player during the state. Further, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3, the variation time defined in the variation pattern selected when winning the big hit (big hit C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other big wins among the special symbol big wins. Since it is longer than the other variation patterns, other games can be executed a plurality of times before the game based on the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player is executed.

  First, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is executed, the processes of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are respectively the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are executed. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y503 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y551), and the variation that has been read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y552), and the process proceeds to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) is executed, the processes of Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105 to Y1109 are respectively the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105 to Y1109 are executed. In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y1104 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1151), and the variation that has been read out is read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1152), and the process proceeds to Y1105. A variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1105 using the variation pattern selection table read out here.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107 in FIG. 253) executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253) in the seventh embodiment. is there. When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process is executed, each of the processes Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209 is a special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process in the third embodiment (see FIG. 111). The same processes as those of Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209 are executed. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y1203 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1251), and the variation that has been read out is read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1252), and the process proceeds to Y1205. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1205.

  In the process of Y1201, when it is determined that the special drawing 2 lottery result is not a small hit (Y1201: No), the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1253) and read. A variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario and the gaming state is selected (Y1254), and the process proceeds to Y1208. A variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1208 using the variation pattern selection table read out here.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is read out and read out. A variation pattern table is selected based on the variation pattern scenario and the current game state (or the number of special symbol lotteries (variation count)), and the variation pattern is selected with reference to the selected variation pattern table. ing.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end process in the seventh embodiment is different from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment described above in that the jackpot type for setting the value in the hour / counter counter 2030g is different, and the fluctuation pattern scenario. The point of difference is that a process for selecting is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the jackpot end process (Y2112) is executed, first, the processes of Y2301 to Y2304 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and when it is determined that the process is not in the latent state in the process of Y2304 (Y2304: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the current jackpot is jackpot D (Y2350). If it is determined that the jackpot is not D (Y2350: No), the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is set to 100 (Y2351), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2350, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot D (Y2350: Yes), the process of Y2351 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2307. Then, the processes of Y2307 to Y2308 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and thereafter, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state specified by the process of Y2301 is selected from the variation pattern scenario table 2020h (Y2352), and the selection is made. The changed variation scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y2353), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this seventh embodiment, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot D (see FIG. 247)) is won as a condition for shifting to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. (First transition condition) and a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)), and after winning the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries is determined a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot (for example, 100 times) (when the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds the specified number (100 times) in the probability variation state) (second transition condition), and the gaming state (latent) that is most advantageous to the player It has been configured so that there are multiple triggers to shift to a certain state. In addition, the above-described plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (timing for winning the jackpot and setting the gaming state and timing when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the gaming state is set). The player can continue to have a sense of expectation for shifting to the latent state, and further, the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second transition A different variation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the latent state set when the condition is satisfied, and the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set to the first latent state. A certain probability state (latent probability state that is set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and a second latent probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent certain state (when the first transition condition is satisfied). Set the latent state to be set) It is possible.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since there is an opportunity to move to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning a special symbol jackpot, the player's willingness to play is continuously increased. There is an effect that can be. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is made different according to the trigger to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has shifted to the latent state. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a bonus, the game will be won in the normal state. In this case, a right-handed notification for indicating to the player that the small hit game is being executed (running) is executed, and a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game has elapsed. May be configured not to notify abnormality even when a right-handed game in a normal state is detected.

  In addition, as a right-handed notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state, And a second right-handed notification mode that is set based on the first right-handed notification mode, which is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Good. Thereby, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and a game easy to understand for the player can be performed.

  In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized to the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is good to set it as the display mode which added the display mode. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the emphasis state in a some alerting | reporting aspect. Note that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state. In addition, a notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player may be used, and besides the display mode, a light emission mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the audio output device 226 may be used. You may use the synthetic | combination alerting | reporting aspect which combined them.

  Further, the seventh embodiment is configured such that the condition for assigning the number of times when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type is the same as that when the jackpot A is selected. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, the jackpot type that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the latent state that is most advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends is set to the jackpot D (selection ratio 10 %), And the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that in the fourth embodiment described above. By comprising in this way, it can suppress giving a privilege (prize ball) to a player excessively by the 2nd latent state which is most advantageous to a player.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the number of time reductions set when shifting to the probability variation state (high accuracy / short time presence state) is 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times), the probability variation state When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the game state, the gaming state is changed from the probability changing state to the latent state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpot X, Y, Z are provided as jackpot types, and different times (for example, 1, 20, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the latent state when transitioning to the probability change state, so the player continues to have a sense of expectation to transition to the latent state. Can be held.

  Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot game content (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot is the same, and a jackpot type with a different number of times is provided to shift to a more latent state. The timing can be difficult for the player to understand. On the other hand, during the probability changing state, a remaining number suggesting notification for informing the player of the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent probability state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the player shifts to the latent state, so that the expectation to the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified by numerical values may be used, or a series of stories is continuously displayed. A period suggestion mode that suggests a period until the story shifts to the latent state using the period until the story is completed may be used.

  In addition, during the game, a mini game (for example, a game whose result is changed by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed, or the remaining number suggestion is performed. You may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting may be varied. Further, if the remaining number suggestion notification is not performed, for example, when the jackpot is won during the probability changing state, the remaining number of times until the latent state is shifted may be notified.

  Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (lottery) executed at the end of the probability variation state or the special symbol variation (lottery) performed at the beginning of the latent probability state may be varied. good. In this case, as a display mode to be varied, a display mode used for suggesting the degree of expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

  According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, for example, the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit type is a big hit) Even if C) is won, before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, in the case where the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to an unfavorable state based on the big win of the special symbol. A gaming state advantageous to the player can be achieved.

  In addition, when the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special winning that is won by the jackpot that is disadvantaged to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is the jackpot C) A right-handed game against the player because there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being drawn continuously multiple times in a state where the symbol is fluctuating. Can be actively promoted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is prefetched, and it is determined that there is winning information winning the jackpot C in the prefetching result, the game is informed. You may comprise so that a person may be notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the player needs to continuously execute the right-handed game.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. A reserved ball of one special symbol and a second special symbol can be acquired. Therefore, the situation where the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed after the end of the small hit can be suppressed.

  In the seventh embodiment, both the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 (see FIG. 250 (a)) and the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) correspond to one special symbol determination result. Although the configuration in which the variation pattern is defined is used, a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times may be defined in accordance with the range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 for the special symbol determination result. By configuring in this way, in addition to the special symbol determination result, the variation pattern (variation time) set according to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 can be varied. In this case, specifically, in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, if the symbol type is Special Fig. 1 and the result of the determination is wrong, that is, the special symbol that is disadvantageous for the player who does not perform the small lottery lottery. As a variation pattern to be selected when the judgment result is out of place, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (a variation pattern with a variation time shorter than other variation patterns) and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds (others) (Variation pattern having a variation time longer than that of the variation pattern) is preferably selected. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in changes in special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player.

  In the seventh embodiment, the balls are alternately distributed to the entrance for triggering the lottery for the first special symbol and the entrance for triggering the lottery for the second special symbol. The distribution unit 660 is provided, and the winning information can be reserved only for the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, in order to continuously execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is also executed. However, by playing the right-handed game, the entrance that triggers the lottery for the first special symbol and the entrance that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol respectively. Any configuration capable of entering a ball is acceptable. Moreover, you may provide the structure which can hold | maintain prize information also with respect to a 2nd special symbol like 4th Embodiment mentioned above.

  In the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a variation time of 0.5 seconds at the shortest. However, the ball enters the second entry port regulated by the distribution unit 660 described above. It may be configured to set a variation time longer than the ball interval (0.7 seconds). Thereby, it can suppress that the situation where the variable display of a 2nd special symbol is interrupted with respect to the player who continues the right-handed game is generated.

  In the third embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, by configuring so that the small hit game is frequently generated during the latent state, the latent state is made a game state advantageous to the player. May be used to configure a gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, when a lottery result of a normal symbol wins, a ball entrance (second ball entrance) associated with the electric accessory 640a that is opened is operated. 640) is set, and the variation time of the special symbol in the latent state is set to be longer than when other game states are set, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released during one special symbol variation is set. You may comprise so that a privilege may be provided to a player by making it increase.

  In addition, when the winning device 65 is closed during the small win game when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, ending period, etc.) during the latent state, it is more than when winning in the other game state. You may set short.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, the second latent state set when winning the jackpot (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends is special without winning the jackpot during the probability changing state. Although it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first latent state set when the symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), it is advantageous in a gaming state advantageous to the player. The game state may be subdivided so as to have different degrees. For example, the second latent state set when the big hit (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the big hit ends is won. Rather than winning the jackpot in the probability variation state, the first latent state set when the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times) is configured to be more advantageous to the player. Also There.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, as a condition for setting the first latent state, the case where the lottery of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times (100 times) without winning a jackpot during the probability changing state is shown. Other than that, for example, in response to a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the probability variation state is set, a normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) to a normal symbol low probability state (without electric support) A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for shifting to (state) may be provided, and the first latent state may be set when the transition lottery means is won.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which a period during which a latent state can be set (120 times at the maximum) is set in advance. For example, a high probability state of a special symbol is set. Corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in the state of being, a falling lottery means for executing a falling lottery for shifting (falling) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is provided, and the falling lottery means It may be configured to continue a period during which the latent state can be set until winning. By comprising in this way, it can make it difficult for a player to grasp | ascertain the period when the gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to a player continues, and it can suppress getting tired of a game early. .

  In addition, during the period in which the gaming state (second latency state) that is advantageous to the player in the latent probability state is set, the lottery number of special symbols is a predetermined number of times without winning the above-mentioned falling lottery (for example, It may be configured to be set when exceeding 150 times. As a result, by continuing the state where the falling lottery is not won, it is possible to receive a lot of lotteries in the high probability state of the special symbol, and to the gaming state (second latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player. The transition expectation can be increased, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability of winning a small bonus in the special symbol lottery is always a constant probability regardless of the gaming state. However, the probability of winning a small bonus depending on the gaming state may be varied.

  In the third embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be drawn (changed) in parallel, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the second special symbol is used. In order to make it difficult for a special symbol to be drawn (varied), the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As the variation time of the 2 special symbols, the variation time that can be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol only when the jackpot is won or a variation time shorter than that can be selected. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol that has started to fluctuate in the normal state and has started to fluctuate has a jackpot after a long time (for example, after 10 minutes) (third) It can be prevented from stopping at the symbol) and starting a big hit game.

  In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, and a small hit is won and a small hit game is started after a long change, at the timing when the small hit game is started It is determined whether or not a game is being performed (determining whether or not a demo is waiting), and if it is determined that a game is not being performed (waiting for a demo) It may be configured to display different waiting small hit display modes. By configuring in this way, even if the small hit game is started in a state where the player stops the game during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol and the game is not played (demo display state), it is different from the normal game. Since the waiting small hit display mode is displayed, a sense of discomfort can be suppressed.

  In addition, as the waiting small hit display mode, a display mode that does not emphasize that the small hit game is being performed is preferable to the display mode displayed during the normal small hit game. On the other hand, it is difficult to notice that a small hit game is being performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a game only during the small hit game to play a game.

  Each configuration used in the third to seventh embodiments described above (contents of various tables, each element of the control flow of the main controller 110, each element of the control flow of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114) Each element of the control flow may be combined as appropriate. For example, an area for storing the reserved ball of the second special symbol may be provided for the configuration used in the third embodiment (see the fourth embodiment). ) When one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a jackpot, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (until the jackpot ends) and temporarily stopped after the jackpot ends You may use the structure (refer 4th Embodiment) which restarts the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, in the configuration (simultaneous variation configuration) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol described in the third to seventh embodiments described above can be drawn (varied) in parallel, one of the special symbols When it is determined that the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, jackpot) (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) executed during the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102)) In the case where it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (see Y405 in FIG. 103)), a limit determination means for executing a limit determination so that the jackpot is not won when the other special symbol starts to change. It may be provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the winning result is discarded even though the winner is won, so it is possible to pre-read that the lottery result of the special symbol is a winner and It is possible to suppress inconveniences in the case of performing a suggestive effect that suggests that the player has won the jackpot (before the change of special symbols to be started).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the period during which the normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) is set is a predetermined period (for example, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added). The number of times is set as a predetermined number of times (a period until the number of times reaches 100)), but other configurations may be used. For example, a normal symbol high probability state (electric support state) The period until the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times (first period), or the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number (30 times). You may comprise so that it may be set until it reaches | attains any period of the period (2nd period) until it arrives. With this configuration, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, how should the game be performed in order to quickly shift to the gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game that aims to enter the first entrance 64, which is a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, or a game that aims to enter the second entrance 640, which is a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. Since the player can play the game while predicting which one should be performed), there is an effect that the player can actively participate in the game.

  Further, in this case, as in each of the embodiments described above, in the probability variation state, the entrance (for example, the second entrance 640) that makes it easy for the ball to enter, and the ball even when the game state changes When the game state changes as a condition for ending a high probability state (with electric support) of a normal symbol, provided with a entrance (for example, the first entrance 64) where the ease of entering the ball is not variable Even so, the number of lotteries (variation count) for a special symbol (first special symbol) with the entrance that does not change the ease of entering the ball as a lottery opportunity has reached a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). It is preferable to provide an end condition that satisfies the condition when it is determined that the condition has been satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state, in order to quickly shift to the latent probability state, a game aiming at the entrance where the ball is difficult to enter (first game) is performed, or in the probability variation state A game (second game) aiming at the entrance that makes it easy to enter the ball is performed, and the player selects whether to play the game advantageously in the probability variation state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the case of using the configuration as described above, when the probability variation state is set, the condition for shifting to the latent state in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) It is preferable to provide end condition display means for displaying the end condition of the (state) and progress status display means for displaying how much the current game situation is progressing with respect to the end condition displayed by the end condition display means. . By comprising in this way, the standard at the time of a player selecting the game content performed in a probability change state can be provided.

  The end condition displayed by the above-described end condition display means and the progress status displayed by the progress status display means may be in a display form indicating a specific value (variation of each special symbol (number of lotteries)) or end. A suggestion that suggests conditions and progress may be used. In addition, the end condition displayed by the end condition display means based on the player's operation contents for the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player during the probability change state, the special symbols, and the lottery contents of the normal symbols. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the progress status displayed by the progress status display means to a display mode that is easy for the player to grasp.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the probability variation state, based on the number of lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol (electric support state) When configured so that the end condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that there is no significant difference between the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol in the probability variation state. Good. Thereby, since it becomes possible to change each special symbol corresponding to the game (1st game, 2nd game) which the player selected, it can be said that it can suppress giving a player dissatisfaction. effective.

  In addition to the example described above, elements other than the number of fluctuations may be set as the end condition of the high probability state (electric support state) of the normal symbol, for example, The end condition may be that the number of operations of the V winning device 650 that operates when the small hit game is executed has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, only some of the above-described many termination conditions may be used, or each may be combined as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-described example, a falling lottery means for executing a falling lottery for shifting (falling) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is provided as an end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol. It is preferable to provide a configuration so that the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol is satisfied when the falling lottery means is won. As a result, the period in which a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is started and the period in which the gaming state is ended can be varied in accordance with the game contents, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. Can do. Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the end condition of the normal symbol high probability state (electric support state) is different according to the winning jackpot type. Thereby, the period during which the latent state can be set can be set more complicatedly, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 when the latent probability state is set. However, other configurations may be used, for example, when the latent state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set. The display mode of the effect to be displayed may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state is set regardless of the state in which the probability change state is set, and it is possible to increase the game motivation. When such a configuration is used, the variation pattern may be set so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is appropriately executed even in the probability variation state. For example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is small. In the case of hitting or losing, it is preferable that a variation period slightly longer than the variation pattern set during the latent state or an equivalent variation period is set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set gaming state based on the variation time of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the configuration in which the display mode of the effect executed when the latent state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the above-described normal symbol high probability state ( It is even better to combine with a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions for ending the power support state are provided. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing of the transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state by using a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions for ending the high probability state (electric support state) of normal symbols are provided, and In the state where the state is set, the display mode of the effect executed when the latent state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that whether the game in the state of probability change is being executed or the latent state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the game is being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the first modified example of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 218), the period in which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set is referred to as the first advantageous period. As a configuration that can be set to a second advantageous period that is more advantageous than the first advantageous period, a variation pattern table that is different in the first half and the second half of the latent state is referred to. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the latter half of the latent state is advantageous to the player. You may comprise so that it may become an advantageous period (2nd advantageous period). Moreover, you may use the structure which switches the fluctuation pattern table referred so that a 1st advantageous period and a 2nd advantageous period may switch alternately.

  In addition, by using the board configuration of the gaming board 13 of the fourth embodiment described above as the configuration of the first modification of the third embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery is performed by performing a right-handed game during the latent state. An allocation unit 660 capable of alternately entering balls at the entrance (first entrance 64) serving as an opportunity and the entrance (second entrance 640) serving as a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol It is preferable that the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period are switched periodically (for example, once every lottery (variation) of special symbols).

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the latent state is set, the advantageous state of the latent state can be varied greatly depending on which entrance the first entrance is to enter. And more complex games can be executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery (variation) executed once after the latent state is set is the first advantageous period and the second is the first advantageous period. It is preferable to provide a variation scenario (second variation scenario) to be executed and to vary the variation scenario to be executed based on the winning jackpot type. Thereby, it can suppress that the distribution aspect of the distribution unit 660 is adjusted beforehand so that a latent state may become more advantageous.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be varied according to game state even if the same hit type)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, bonus game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player based on a result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and execution of the bonus game As a type of privilege game executed by the means, a type determining unit that determines a type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types, and a game entry unit capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine And a first variable means that can be changed between an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. 1 variable means, the first variable means after the bonus game is started with respect to the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern based on the fact that the determination means has obtained the specific determination result. Variable to the open position A first variable control means that changes at least one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that differs in at least a period until it is played, and a game ball that has entered the entry means has an inside of the entry means. And a second variable means that can be changed to a first position at which it is possible to enter the specific area provided at the first position, and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. 2 The variable means is changed to a specific area during execution of the special game and the second variable control means for changing the predetermined variable pattern in accordance with a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the result of the specific determination by the determining means. A gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state after executing the privilege game to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when a gaming ball enters, and a gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained; In the type determining means Determining means for determining one variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on the type of the privilege game determined by the first variable pattern, A game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position can enter the specific area, and the second variable pattern is the first variable variable. A gaming machine A1 in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the means is changed to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a short time state that makes it easier to win a start than usual as a bonus. With this conventional gaming machine, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, whether or not the short-time state is given, and the short-term period when the short-time state is given, etc. There are those that diversify the state of the game to improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if diversity is provided in a short period of time, the winning lottery probability is fixed according to the type of winning, so that the player's interest is sufficiently improved It was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the entrance means and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. Is variable. The first variable pattern and the period from when the privilege game is started with respect to the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position based on the specific determination result by the determination means. The first variable means is varied by the variable control means in any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least different second variable patterns. A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and entering the specific area is more difficult than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means has a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the specific determination result by the determination means. Variable. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is executed is set to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. One variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns is determined based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means. Determined by. The first variable pattern is configured such that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the 1 variable means is changed to the open position is configured to be more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern.

  Thereby, the ratio at which the first variable pattern that is easy to enter the specific area is set based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means is variable. Therefore, the ratio at which the advantageous gaming state is set can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second in which the first variable pattern is less likely to be determined than the first advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine A2 including at least an advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a first advantageous gaming state that is first than the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous game state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when a game ball enters the specific area, the game is performed in anticipation that the first advantageous game state is determined. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous gaming state is such that the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the privilege game type determined by the type determining means. When the first advantageous gaming state is reached, the advantageous gaming state is easily set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a greater satisfaction when entering the first advantageous gaming state.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming state setting means indicates the gaming state after the bonus game is executed if the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the bonus game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantaged game state that is more disadvantageous than the state, and the game state setting means plays a game to the specific area during execution of the privilege game based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the disadvantageous game state. A gaming machine A4, wherein, when a ball enters, a ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is higher than a ratio of setting the second advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball does not enter a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is executed is set to a disadvantaged game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. Is done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in a disadvantageous game state, the ratio at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is The second advantageous gaming state is configured to be higher than the set ratio.

  Thereby, when a privilege game is executed in a disadvantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the player's game in a disadvantageous gaming state.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming state setting means is executing the privilege game based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is high.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the bonus game is being executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When the game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state by the game state setting means is high, so that once the first advantageous game state is entered, a plurality of privilege games Thus, the first advantageous game state is easily set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game has been completed continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of expectation for the first advantageous gaming state can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming state setting means, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the first advantageous game when the specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied. A gaming machine A6 characterized by setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state when a specific condition different from the end of the bonus game is satisfied Since the first advantageous gaming state is set by the setting means, in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the ball enters the ball, the ball discriminating unit that performs discrimination by the discriminating unit, the first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering discriminator, and the first variable A third variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and a variable form of the third variable means, a first variable form that is easily variable to the first variable position, and Control means that can be controlled at least in the second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than in the first variable mode, wherein the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A7 is controlled in a second variable mode, and the second advantageous gaming state is such that the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode by the control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the third variable means is varied between a first variable position where a game ball can enter the ball discrimination means and a second variable position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first variable position. . The variable mode of the third variable means is at least controlled by the control means in a first variable mode that can be easily changed to the first variable position and a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable mode. The In the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable manner, and in the second advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable manner.

  Thereby, in the second advantageous gaming state, which is less advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state, the determination by the determining means is easily performed, so that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous gaming state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latency by missing support)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, bonus game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and execution of the bonus game As the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the means is finished, the first gaming state in which the probability that the specific discrimination result is set by the discrimination means is set to the first probability, and is higher than the first probability A gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a second gaming state set to the second probability and a third gaming state advantageous to the second gaming state and set to the second probability, and A gaming state in which, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state can be changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state without triggering the end of the privilege gaming state. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a further means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is increased as a bonus after winning. Furthermore, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of lotteries in the probability variation state, and if it does not hit before reaching the predetermined upper limit number of lotteries, In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is one that shifts to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. When winning in this special state, the game value given to the player is greater than winning in the probable state, so even if the probable state ends before winning, the player's motivation for the game is motivated It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the winning lottery probability is a normal probability in a special state set after the probability variation state is over, so that it may be missed over a relatively large number of lottery times. Increases nature. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit based on the determination result obtained by the determination unit. As a gaming state after the award game executed by the award game execution means, the probability that a specific discrimination result is set by the discrimination means is a first gaming state set to the first probability, and is higher than the first probability. The second gaming state set to the second probability and the third gaming state advantageous to the second gaming state and set to the second probability can be set at least by the gaming state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means without triggering the end of the privilege gaming state.

  Thereby, even if it does not become a privilege game, since it can change from a 2nd game state to a 3rd game state by a game state change means, the interest with respect to the player's game in a 2nd game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  When the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended by the gaming status setting means in the gaming machine B1, the second gaming game is performed over at least a predetermined number of the bonus games including the bonus game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a gaming state in which a probability is set is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the termination of the bonus game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the bonus game is included. Since the continuous state in which the game state in which the second probability is set over the privilege game is easily set is set by the continuous state setting means, the game can be performed in the hope that the continuous state is set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming state setting means ends the bonus game when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the bonus game being executed in the third gaming state. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that a ratio of setting the gaming state after being played to the first gaming state is high.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the bonus game being executed in the third gaming state, Since the proportion of the first gaming state set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the completion is configured to be high, in the second gaming state, the gaming state changing means before the bonus game is executed It is possible to provide a novel gaming property that expects the third gaming state to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming state setting means is configured to select either the second gaming state or the third gaming state when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that can be set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed, the gaming state setting means causes the second gaming state and the third Since one of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the bonus game is ended. Therefore, since the gaming state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that the player can be pleased by entering the third gaming state.

  A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discrimination means is executed when a game ball enters in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter the ball entry means compared to one position, and a variable means for changing the second means from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a variable control means for varying the position to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second gaming state is more easily changed to the second position by the variable control means than in the third gaming state. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is varied between the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. . Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period. The second gaming state is more easily changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state.

  Thereby, since the determination by the determining means can be easily performed in the second gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second gaming state.

  Counting means for counting the number of consecutive detachment determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the second gaming state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5 The gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state on the basis that the number of consecutive times of the outage determination result counted by the counting means has reached a specific number. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the setting of the second gaming state, the counting means counts the number of consecutive detachment determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing unit based on the fact that the consecutive number of outlier determination results counted by the counting unit has reached a specific number.

  Thus, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the determination result of detachment will continue rather than to be a specific determination result, so that a novel gaming machine is provided. There is an effect that can be.

  As one of the bonus games executed by the bonus game executing means in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a type determining means for determining one bonus game type from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are entered. A ball entrance means capable of entering a ball, an open position where a game ball can enter the entrance means, and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. 1 The variable position and the first variable position at which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the first variable position. The first variable means and the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area, and the specific determination result by the determination means, Variable control for changing the second variable means with a predetermined variable pattern And the predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, and a game ball that has entered the entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position enters the specific area. A determining means capable of determining at least a first variable pattern that is possible and a second variable pattern that is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern; When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the bonus game is ended is set to either the second game state or the third game state. The determining means determines one variable pattern based on the gaming state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B7, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is varied between an open position where a game ball can enter the entrance means and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. A game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and a first variable position that can enter the specific area as compared to the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the variable control means based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position; The second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern can be determined at least by the determining means. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. . One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  This makes it easy to set a variable pattern that is easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means. Therefore, the ratio at which the second probability is set after the end of the bonus game can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are different in at least a period from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted according to the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means. It is only necessary to define variable control, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Direction that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path The first entrance means that can be placed in one path and can enter a game ball and the second entrance means and the first entrance means that can be placed in the second path and can enter a game ball, or (2) A privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a determination result obtained by the determination by the determination device and a determination result based on the game ball entering the ball entry device. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route, triggered by the end of the special game executed by the game execution unit and the special game execution unit, the determination by the determination unit is easily performed. The first gaming state and before the first route A gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that facilitates the determination by the determining means when a game ball is launched on the second route, and the gaming state thereof It is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means and the condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball fired by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine C1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates determination by the determining means as a path for launching a game ball.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a short time state in which at least a part of the winning is likely to cause a start winning. In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of start winning holes on the game board, and it becomes easier to win game balls to some of the starting winning holes due to a short time state. In this gaming machine, depending on whether or not it is in a short time state, it is configured to execute an effect (suggested effect) that suggests which start prize opening should be aimed at, thereby providing an easier-to-understand game (For example, JP-A-2006-230825).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the shift to the short-time state is made after hitting, the suggestion effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation whether or not the short-time state has been reached is maintained only until the end of the jackpot. There was a problem that it was not possible.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on the player's operation, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the above is provided. The first path is provided with first entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second path is provided with second entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. In response to the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the first gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched to the first path rather than the second path; One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from at least a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched on the second route than the route. It is determined by the condition determining means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball fired by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the effect execution means executes a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates determination by the determination means as a path for launching a game ball.

  As a result, even if the gaming state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the expectation that the more advantageous gaming state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is an effect that can be done.

  A variable that can be varied between a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the game machine C1 than the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, wherein the second gaming state is more specific than the first gaming state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the condition is easily established.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second gaming state is configured such that the specific condition is more easily established than in the first gaming state.

  Thus, in the second gaming state, the launching means can be operated so as to cause the game ball to enter the second entrance while the variable means is being changed to the first position. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  The game machine C2 includes a passage means through which a game ball can pass and a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is established when the game state set by the game state setting means and the game ball fired by the launching means passes the passage means a specific number of times. A gaming machine C3, which is established when the game is completed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing unit. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. A predetermined condition is established when a game ball fired by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means passes through the passage means a specific number of times.

  Thereby, in order to establish a predetermined condition, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball aiming at the passing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, as the passing means, at least a first passing means disposed on the first route and a second passing means disposed on the second route are provided. Game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means disposed on the first route and a second passing means disposed on the second route are provided as passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect the predetermined condition to be satisfied by firing the game ball on the favorite path of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is fired by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The game machine C5 is established when the played game ball first passes through the first passage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball fired by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, a game ball can be fired to the 1st path | route in anticipation that the 1st path | route which is easy to be discriminate | determined by a discrimination means in the advantageous 1st game state is suggested by a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In at least one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the variable means is changed to the first position is determined by the launch means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that it has a longer duration than it takes for a game ball launched into the path to reach the second entry means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the variable means is changed to the first position is When the set gaming state is the second gaming state because it is configured to be longer than the period required for the gaming ball launched by the launching means to the second path to reach the second entering means In addition, even if the predetermined condition is established based on passing the passing means and the second route is suggested by the specific effect, the second entering means is changed before the variable means is changed to the first position. A game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity of discrimination by the discrimination means can be utilized to the maximum in the second gaming state.

  The gaming machine C2 is provided with a predetermined pitching means provided on the first path and different from the first pitching means, and the predetermined condition is determined by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine C7, which is established when the launched game ball first enters the predetermined entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined entrance means different from the first entrance means is provided in the first path. A predetermined condition is established when a game ball fired by the launching means first enters the predetermined throwing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, since a ball can be launched aiming at a predetermined entry means so as to establish a predetermined condition, there is an effect that a player's willingness to participate in a game can be improved.

  A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path The first entrance means that can be placed in one path and can enter a game ball and the second entrance means and the first entrance means that can be placed in the second path and can enter a game ball, or (2) A privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a determination result obtained by the determination by the determination device and a determination result based on the game ball entering the ball entry device. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route, triggered by the end of the special game executed by the game execution unit and the special game execution unit, the determination by the determination unit is easily performed. The first gaming state and before the first route A gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that facilitates the determination by the determining means when a game ball is launched on the second route, and the gaming state thereof Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed as a path for launching a game ball based on a time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time since the setting of one gaming state by the setting means and a specific elapsed time by the time measuring means. A game machine C8, comprising: an effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that is likely to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on a player's operation, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass and the first route are A different second path is provided. The first path is provided with first entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second path is provided with second entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. In response to the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the first gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched to the first path rather than the second path; One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from at least a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched on the second route than the route. The elapsed time since one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is timed by the timing means, and based on the fact that the specific elapsed time has been reached by the timing means, the discrimination means as the path for launching the game ball A specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that facilitates determination is executed by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, even if the gaming state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation that the more advantageous gaming state is set is maintained at least until the specific elapsed time is reached. There is an effect that can be.

  As one of the bonus games executed by the bonus game executing means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a type determining means for determining one bonus game type from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are entered. It is possible to change between an open position where a game ball can enter the variable entrance means capable of entering a ball, and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. First variable means and a first variable position at which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and the first variable position. Based on the result of the specific determination by the second variable means that can be changed to the second variable position that makes it difficult to enter the specific area compared to the position and the determination means, the first determination The variable means and the second variable means are in a predetermined variable pattern. As the variable control means to be changed and the predetermined variable pattern variable by the variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position is the specified A determination means capable of determining at least a first variable pattern that allows entry into a region and a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern; When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the status setting means sets the gaming status after the bonus game is ended as either the first gaming status or the second gaming status. And when the game ball does not enter the specific area, the third game state is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. Result And playing state time point, based on the type of the benefits game determined by the type determination means, the gaming machine is characterized in that for determining the first variable pattern C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one privilege game type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is varied between an open position where game balls can enter the variable entry means and a closed position where entry into the entry means is more difficult than the open position. A game ball that has entered the variable entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable entry means, and can enter the specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the variable control means based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position; The determining unit determines at least a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is ended is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the bonus game, the gaming state after the bonus game is ended is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state by the gaming state setting means. A gaming state is set. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  This makes it easy to set a variable pattern that is easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means. Therefore, the ratio at which the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set after the bonus game is ended can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9, the determination means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, the first variable is determined by the determining means when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, rather than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is configured to be easily determined, it can be expected that the first route is suggested by the specific effect so that the determination is easily performed in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least different periods from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine C11 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the bonus game is started. Therefore, the variable pattern can be predicted according to the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, since the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the control of the second variable means is one way. It is only necessary to define variable control, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (Non-V time reduction given during probability change and pullback time reduction)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means, and establishment of the specific condition Based on the above, a gaming state setting capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is easier to execute than the first gaming state Means for entering a game ball in the gaming machine, an open position at which the game ball can enter the entrance means, and an entrance to the entrance means from the open position. A first variable means capable of changing to a closed position where the ball is difficult and the first variable means are variable in a predetermined variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Variable control means and front A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and an entrance to the specific area is greater than the first position. The second variable control means that can be changed to a difficult second position and the second variable means are variable in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. A first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and the specific area more than the first variable pattern as a variable pattern that is variable by the second variable control means and the first variable control means A determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the game, and when a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game The specific area And a privilege granting unit that grants a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when the player did not enter the game, and the gaming state setting unit is not granted the specific privilege by the privilege granting unit. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the second gaming state can be set when the game is played.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside the entrance hole provided on the board surface, and when a ball enters the specific area, There are some cases where the proportion of specific benefits that are advantageous to the person is high. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game is provided in which the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the entrance with a specific area inside, so once the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made, the privilege game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. This makes it very advantageous for the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if it falls into the lottery whether or not to give a specific privilege in the advantageous gaming state, it will fall to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state, so when the leakage to the lottery However, there is a problem that the player's motivation for the game is greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is arranged between an open position where the game ball can enter the entrance means and an open position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. Is varied, and the first variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the first variable control means based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and entering the specific area is more difficult than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is variable in a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the determination result by the determination means. Is done. As a variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and a second that makes it difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from a plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of a special game, a specific special advantage that is advantageous to the player is given by the bonus granting means at a higher rate than when a specific ball does not enter the specific area. . The configuration is such that the second game state can be set by the game state setting means when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege grant means.

  Thereby, when a specific privilege is not granted, a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. Therefore, when a specific privilege is not granted, the player's motivation for the game is impaired. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the first gaming state, The gaming machine D2, wherein the second gaming state is set when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game state is set by the game state setting unit when a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting unit in the bonus game executed in the first gaming state. On the other hand, the second game state is set by the game state setting means when a special privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  As a result, in the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the second gaming state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game in the second gaming state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result is set to the first probability, and the gaming state setting means It is possible to set a third gaming state in which the resulting probability is set to a second probability that is higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means sends the third gaming state to the gaming state setting means as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3 that is configured to set a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability that a specific determination result is set between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set as the first probability. The third gaming state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. The privilege granting means is configured to cause the game state setting means to set the third gaming state as a specific privilege.

  Thereby, when a specific privilege is given, it becomes easy to obtain a specific determination result, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for a specific privilege can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the second game is played by the gaming state setting means when the special benefit is not given by the bonus granting means in the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. Since the state is set, it is possible to suppress the setting from the third gaming state to the disadvantageous first gaming state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the player's game.

  A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on a game ball entering in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, Based on the third variable means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and that the game ball has passed through the passing means. Based on the predetermined determination means for executing the predetermined determination and the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means, the third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position. A gaming machine D5 comprising a third variable control means, wherein the second gaming state has a higher probability of being the predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the third variable means is varied between a first variable position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second variable position where entry is more difficult than the first variable position. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, the predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means, and based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means, the third variable means performs the 23rd variable control. The second variable position is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position by the means. The second gaming state is configured with a higher probability of being a predetermined discrimination result than the first gaming state.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, it becomes easy to execute a predetermined determination, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed more efficiently by the player.

<Characteristic E group> (100% probability change in advantageous state)
The entry means capable of entering a game ball, the discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means result in a specific discrimination result. On the basis of the variable entry means in a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player and a variable entry means capable of entering a game ball during execution of the benefit game. There is a specific entry area in which a game ball placed inside the variable entry means can be entered and a game ball has not entered the specific entry area during execution of the one special game. A first gaming state is set, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set when a gaming ball enters the specific pitching area during execution of the one privilege game. A game state setting means to play and a game for the specific entry area in the one special game An entrance rate setting means capable of setting at least a first entrance rate and a second entrance rate having a higher entrance rate than the first entrance rate as an entrance rate of the ball, the entrance rate The rate setting means has a higher rate of setting the second entry rate when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state than when the bonus game is executed in the first gaming state. A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when winning by a lottery executed based on starting entry, a specific winning opening that is set in an open state in which the ball can enter is provided and specified Some bonuses are granted when a ball enters the winning entrance. Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a specific entry area to which a probability variation state is given when a ball enters the inside of the specific winning opening. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area varies depending on the type of winning (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the ease of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, so when the hit type is known, it shifts to a probability fluctuation state. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability variation state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state advantageous to the player, the ratio of setting the second entry rate becomes high, so the second gaming state continues. While playing, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously expect the game ball to enter the specific entrance area.

  In the gaming machine E1, as the entrance means, at least a first entrance means and a second entrance means different from the first entrance means are provided, and the entrance rate setting means is the second entrance means. When the specific determination result is based on a ball entering the ball means, and when the specific determination result is based on a ball entering the first ball means in the second gaming state The first entry rate is set when the ratio for setting the second entry rate is high and the specific determination result is obtained based on the entry to the first entry means in the first gaming state. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the percentage to be played is high.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the entry means, the ratio of setting the second entry rate is high. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed without worrying about the ball entry means into which the game ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position where the game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and a second variable position where the game ball is difficult to enter compared to the first variable position. A first variable control means for changing the first variable means and the first variable means in accordance with a predetermined first variable pattern during execution of the bonus game, and upstream of the specific entry area, A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means easily enters the specific entry area, and a game ball enters the specific entry area as compared to the first variable state. Second variable control for changing the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable state that is difficult to change and the second variable means according to a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. Means and the execution of the bonus game are started. As a period until the control by the variable control means is started, a period in which the first variable means that is varied according to the first variable pattern is the first variable position, and the first variable that is varied according to the second variable pattern. The first variable period in which the second variable means is less likely to overlap with the first variable state, the period in which the first variable means is in the first variable position, and the second variable means. And a period setting means capable of setting a second period in which the period during which the first variable state is likely to overlap is set by the period setting means as the first entrance rate by the period setting means. The gaming machine E3 is controlled so that the first period is set, and the second period is set by the period setting means as the second entrance rate.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the entry is made by changing only the period from the start of the bonus game until the control by the first variable control means is started. Since the rate can be varied, there is no need to set a complicated variable pattern, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Demonstration control with AT type and special figure 1 in standby)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first acquisition means When the first information is not acquired, the first time measuring means for starting the first time measurement and the execution of the second effect are finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means. In addition, on the basis of the second time measuring means for starting the second time measurement and the fact that the first time measurement has become the first set value, the execution of the first notification mode is started, and the second time measurement is the second set value. Based on the fact, the notification execution means for starting the execution of the second notification mode, the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the continuation Setting means capable of switching and setting the second period to be Gaming machine F1, characterized in that those having.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Such a gaming machine is configured such that the variation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is different and a long variation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the variation period of one of the symbols. There is something.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if it is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the display of both symbols is finished, the player immediately after the long-term change period is executed. When the game ends, there is a problem that the operation of the game is lowered because the next player is in a state in which it is difficult for the next player to play the game (even the screen). The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. In this case, when the first timing is started by the first timing means, the execution of the second effect is finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timing is started by the second timing means. Is done. The notification execution means starts execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first timekeeping has reached the first set value, and based on the fact that the second timekeeping has become the second set value, Execution of the aspect is started. In addition, the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied is set by switching the first period to be ended and the second period to be continued by the setting means.

  Thereby, even if it is in the state where the 2nd production is performed, it becomes possible to continue the 1st information mode which shows that the 1st production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine and can suppress a decrease in the operation of the game. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed by the setting means, it is possible to switch between the first period for ending the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed and the second period to be continued. An appropriate effect according to the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  The configuration of the gaming machine F1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured such that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously, and the second effect is not substantially executed according to the gaming state, It may be used for a gaming machine having a period during which the performance is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued and the second effect is substantially executed. When the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated.

  The gaming machine F1 includes a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and the second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to set the first period or the second period according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means sets the second period. When the gaming state is set, the gaming machine F3 sets the first period.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and sets the first period when the second gaming state is set.

  Thereby, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the gaming state in which the first determination is easily performed, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in the gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed, the second When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the notification executing means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second notification mode that is being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. An effect according to the execution state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the first effect even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. In other words, even when the first effect is being executed by the notification executing means, the second notification mode is executed while preventing the first effect from being hindered.

  Thereby, it can suppress and notify that the 2nd effect is not performed while the 1st effect is performed, inhibiting the 1st effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game whose game situation is easy to understand.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are capable of executing the first effect and the second effect at the same time. A gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are configured to be able to execute the first effect and the second effect at the same time. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the situation of the first effect and the second effect executed simultaneously.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification execution means is capable of simultaneously executing the first notification mode and the second notification mode, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation of the production and the second production.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution unit notifies predetermined information other than information indicating a result of the second effect as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F8 that executes a predetermined notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect is being executed, a predetermined notification mode for notifying predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is executed by the notification execution means as the second notification mode.

  Thereby, when the 1st production is performed, it can control that information which shows the result of the 2nd production performed previously is reported. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect and the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means indicates that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F9 that executes a medium notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are produced. That is, in the case where the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means executes the first effect executing notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player easily understand the effect being executed, and the game situation can be provided in an easily understandable manner.

  Furthermore, according to the case where the configuration of the gaming machine F6 is used, information on the first effect that is actually executed out of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed simultaneously is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, the game situation can be provided to the player more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, a first display area that displays either the first notification mode or the second notification mode that is executed by the notification execution unit, and a second display that displays the other Display means having at least an area, display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, and the display control means includes the setting means When the first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by controlling the display content of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the following effects are produced. That is, the display unit has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution unit is displayed, and a second display region in which the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

  Thereby, the alerting | reporting aspect displayed on a 1st display area can be changed according to a game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player.

<Characteristic G group> (Demo control when the game state is changed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first effect and the second An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the performance is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, the second determination from the first determination. When the determination is easy to be executed and the advantageous state is finished, the variable control means for making the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period. And setting means for setting the second setting when the second setting is not executed for a predetermined second period, and the first setting when the advantageous state is set. Is set based on Display setting means for setting the first display setting in the display means, and setting the second display setting in the display means based on the setting of the second setting when the advantageous state is set; The display setting means sets a specific display setting that is different from the second display setting when the advantageous state ends when the second display setting is performed. A gaming machine G1 characterized by that.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the game state shifts in a state where a specific screen (demo screen) indicating that the variation display of one of the symbols has been completed is displayed, There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.

  For example, in a predetermined gaming state, when the display area for a symbol that is likely to be variably displayed is set larger than the display area for a symbol that is difficult to be variably displayed, the content displayed is increased by the transition of the gaming state. There was a problem that it would be different and provide a player with an incomprehensible game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first The first effect based on the result of the 1 determination is executed in the first effect period by the first effect executing means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second information is acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information, The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect executing means in the second effect period. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In such a case, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, when the advantageous setting is set by the display setting means, the first setting is set on the display means based on the setting of the first setting, and the second setting when the advantageous condition is set. Based on the setting, the second display setting is set in the display means. In addition, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, the specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means, so the second display setting is made. Even in the state, the player can easily know that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first display setting is set such that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is set so that the predetermined second display mode is the A gaming machine G2 which is displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first display setting is set, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display unit, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display unit. The

  Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain easily the execution condition of the 1st determination by a 1st determination means, and the 2nd determination by a 2nd determination means. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the second presentation is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second presentation setting is maintained in a state where the second display setting is maintained. A gaming machine G3, wherein the effect mode is displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

  Thereby, when a 2nd effect is performed in the period when the 2nd display setting is performed, a 2nd effect can be performed, without giving discomfort to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, for example, the configuration of the gaming machine G3 may be provided in a gaming machine in which the second presentation period in which the second presentation is executed is set short. In this case, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is executed, the second effect in which the short second effect period is set can be executed in an easily understandable manner by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second display setting is executed to display a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set on the display means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, by setting the second display setting, a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display unit.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display the information regarding a gaming state to a player using the period when the 2nd production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the advantageous state is set, a determination unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination A gaming machine G5, characterized by having a regulation means for regulating the setting of the second display setting when it is determined that the specific condition is established by the means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the advantageous state is set, the determination means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when the specific condition is determined to be determined, the restricting means This restricts the setting of the second display setting.

  Thereby, since the second display setting is not set, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the second determination is executed, a second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and 1 other than the advantageous state When the normal gaming state is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set higher. A gaming machine G6, characterized in that it has a probability varying means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second determination is performed, the second effect period determining unit determines the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods. Then, when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability varying means, it is longer than the case where the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means. The probability that a period is selected is set high.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute more second determinations than when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game aiming at an advantageous state in which many second determinations are executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

<Characteristic H group> (Securing of result production in AT type)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition The second determination means for executing the second determination, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination. When a specific first effect based on being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the user. In the gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player until the first presentation and the second presentation are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of gaming states, and the game When the advantageous game state is set by the state setting means, the second effect period setting means that makes it easy to set the second effect period short, and when the advantageous game state ends, the first effect and the The first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as the first effect period until the number of times the second effect is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Game machine H1.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine has an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the advantageous state continues for a period of time. Some game results are displayed on the display screen, such as the number of wins generated and the number of winning balls acquired (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). In such a gaming machine, a game result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, so depending on the game situation whether the symbol that is executed first after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol May be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as a variable period in which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may not be displayed depending on the first variable after the advantageous state ends. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time and the player's motivation is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the game is executed from the plurality of gaming states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means and the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second effect period setting means sets the second effect period short. When the advantageous gaming state is finished, a specific first effect period is a first effect period until the number of times the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the decision means That.

  This makes it possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the contents of the effect executed when the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player's motivation is reduced due to the fact that the contents of the performance cannot be grasped.

  In addition, it is good to perform the production | presentation (for example, the number of jackpots performed during the advantageous game state, and the total number of prize balls) which shows the game result in an advantageous game state as an effect performed when the advantageous game state is complete | finished. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result in the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state.

  Further, like the gaming machine H1, the first effect executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous by setting the first effect period to be executed after the advantageous game state is ended as the specific first effect period. It can be executed after the gaming state is over. Thereby, for example, since it is not necessary to set the first effect period to be executed at the end (end stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, the advantageous game state can be smoothly executed by the player. effective.

  In the gaming machine H1, the predetermined number of times is two or more, the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the predetermined number of times is set to two times or more, so even if the first presentation and the second presentation are executed simultaneously, the first presentation is performed. It can be executed using a specific first effect period, and can cause the player to grasp the contents of the effect that is executed when the advantageous gaming state is ended, and the player's There is an effect that a situation in which motivation is reduced can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. A gaming machine H3 characterized by a high percentage of playing.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to set a period longer than the other first effect period only in the specific first effect period set for the predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is ended, the first effect is By setting the first effect period to be executed as a whole longer, there is an effect that the progress of the game is delayed and the player's motivation can be prevented from being lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result are set to be the same. When the second determination means does not determine the specific second determination result in the second determination, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result has a predetermined probability. The bonus game executing means executes a special bonus game to which a bonus below the bonus game is granted when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. And when the 2nd production based on the special 2nd judgment result is performed, the special privilege game in which the privilege below privilege game is given by the privilege game execution means is performed.

  Thereby, the 2nd determination in which a 2nd effect is performed can be advantageous to a player rather than the 1st determination in which a 1st effect is performed. Therefore, the advantageous game state in which the second effect period during which the second effect is executed is easily set to be short can be surely made advantageous to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

  In addition, according to the gaming machine H4, by executing the special privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is configured. However, it is only necessary that the gaming state in which the second performance period is set to be short is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the second determination unit is based on the determination result of the first determination unit. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability, and the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination unit is the second determination unit. You may comprise so that it may become a privilege game with a lower value than the special privilege game (2nd special privilege game) performed based on a determination result.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the advantageous game state is set, the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous game state ends, the second A gaming machine H5, comprising variable control means for varying the state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the determination.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, there are a state where the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination when the advantageous gaming state is set, and a state where the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination when the advantageous gaming state ends. Variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, the second determination can be easily performed by comparing the advantageous gaming state with a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous game state can be changed to a game state more advantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to aim for the advantageous game state can be enhanced.

  Note that, as the variable control means of the gaming machine H4, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production period between the first production period and the second production period is variable, or a structure in which the ease of establishment of the second acquisition condition is varied. Can be considered.

  In the gaming machine H5, the variable control means is configured to variably set a selection ratio so as to vary the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Game machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are produced. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so that the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period is variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Characteristics J group> (At AT type, even if a small hit is made on the one hand, the other fluctuation effect is continued, and a variable effect that matches the bottom of the book after the small hit is executed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. A first effect period determining means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determining means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. Second production period deciding factor determined from multiple production periods And a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when an effect is executed, the bonus game is executed when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the bonus game Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the canceling means for canceling and the temporary stopping means, the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means continues to execute the first effect or the second effect. Means and the first When there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period even when the second effect or the second effect ends, there is provided a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the remaining period A gaming machine J1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. Based on this, there is a second design in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period, and each design can be changed simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the symbol has been won, the variation period of the other symbol that is being displayed is changed. In some cases, the measurement is interrupted, and when the hit game ends, the measurement of the suspended variable period is resumed.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the variable display based on the symbol for which the measurement of the variable period is interrupted during the variable display is stopped based on the measurement of the variable period being interrupted, the player expects. However, there was a problem that the change display that was being watched was suddenly stopped, and this became a cause of impairing the fun of the game. Even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the variable display is continuously displayed, there is an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period). ) Occurs, an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity is executed, and this causes a problem of detracting from the fun of the game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the result of the first determination Based on this, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means and the first effect period determined by the first effect period determination means from the plurality of effect periods. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is released by the release means based on the end of the bonus game. Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the continuation means causes the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means to execute the first effect or the second effect, and the first effect or the second effect. Even when is finished, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specified effect is executed by the specified effect executing means in the remaining period.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the time of the 1st effect period of the 1st effect currently performed by the temporary stop means or the 2nd effect period of the 2nd effect is temporarily stopped, the 1st effect or the 2nd Production can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the effects that the player was watching while expecting, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period by the specific effect executing means. Even if an error occurs between the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing when the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first effect is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the first effect. 2. A gaming machine J2 that is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of second effect periods determined by the effect period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first effect is set in advance in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is a plurality of second effects determined by the second effect period determining means. It is preset in the production period corresponding to the production period.

  Thus, an effect period in which the first effect is executed and an effect period in which the second effect is executed are determined in advance, and the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period. It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing at which the process ends. Therefore, since the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop by the temporary stop unit, the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first effect and the second effect are a result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses. A game machine J3 characterized in that a definite effect mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a definite effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or second effect period elapses is set.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the temporary stop of time measurement by a temporary stop means is not performed, the result of 1st determination or 2nd determination can be shown by performing a 1st effect or a 2nd effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine J3, the specific effect is constituted by at least a part of the determined effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the confirmed effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is finished. However, there is an effect that the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the privilege game execution means is executed based on the fact that the first determination means has determined a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result. A special second effect that is executed when a special first effect is executed or when the second determination means determines that the second result is different from the specific second determination result. A gaming machine J5, which, when executed, executes a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first determination means executes a special first effect that is executed based on the fact that the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result, or is specified by the second determination means. When a special second effect that is executed based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the second determination result is executed, the bonus game executing means makes the player more than the bonus game. An advantageous special game is executed.

  As a result, the player can execute the game while expecting both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the specific effect execution means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that the special performance is executed at least in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the bonus game is being executed by the specific effect executing means, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed at least in the remaining period.

  As a result, when the first effect or the second effect ends, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed when a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when an error occurs to the extent that the specific effect alone is insufficient.

  In addition, as a special effect used for the gaming machine J6, an effect different from the specific effect using a period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. In the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period, the first effect or the second effect ends. To the end of the bonus game, and a specific effect may be executed during the period from the end of the bonus game until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration has an effect that the capacity of effect data can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, a remaining time for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A gaming machine J7, comprising: a period determining unit; and a specific effect mode determining unit that determines an effect mode of the specific effect based on a result of determination by the remaining period determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the following effects are produced. That is, the remaining period length from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period is determined by the remaining period determination means, and is specified based on the determination result. The effect mode of the effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means.

  Thereby, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player and enhance the effect.

  Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining effect is so short that the player has difficulty grasping the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including a mode for notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. Thus, for a player who cannot grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect is obtained. Thus, by notifying that the effect mode of the first effect or the second effect is extended, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the first effect or the second effect does not end due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. There is an effect that can be.

  Further, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully understand the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect It is good to set it as the production aspect which can display information other than (information which shows the determination result of a determination means). Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  In the gaming machine J7, when the remaining effect determining unit determines that the remaining period is less than a predetermined period, the benefit effect determining unit determines at least one of the determined effect modes as the specified effect effect mode. A gaming machine J8 that determines a specific performance mode configured by sections.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode configured by at least a part of the confirmed effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect is the benefit effect mode determining means. Determined by.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine J7 or J8, when the remaining period determining unit determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining unit determines the first effect or A gaming machine J9 that determines a specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J7 or J8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode includes information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege effect mode determining means.

  Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

<Feature K group> (ST number display control)
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times when the predetermined condition is satisfied; a number update means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; The remaining number determining means for determining the remaining number of times of the specific number, the number notifying means for notifying the number of times less than the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining means, and the number of times notified by the number notifying means being increased. A gaming machine K1 comprising privilege notification execution means capable of executing privilege notification based on a predetermined rule and rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that displays the number of remaining times on a display screen (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, so that when the remaining number of times that the advantageous state is set is reduced, the player's motivation decreases. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine K1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of games in which the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of specific times is determined by the remaining number determining unit, and the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining unit is notified by the number notifying unit. The privilege notification for increasing the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

  This makes it possible to notify the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed. Therefore, even if the notified number of times decreases, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific game is continuously executed, and the player's motivation is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  Furthermore, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is determined to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can execute the game while having a moderate sense of security.

  Moreover, since the rule by which privilege alert | report is performed can be switched, it becomes possible to increase the frequency | count notified by the frequency notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  The gaming machine K1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit based on an operation on the operation unit that can be operated by the player.

  Therefore, the player can switch the predetermined rule according to his / her preference, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the lottery result. It is configured to be switchable between a first rule and a second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the fact that the number of times notified by the number notification means has become a predetermined number or less. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, each time the number of games is updated by the rule switching means, a determination is made as to whether or not the privilege notification is executed, and the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result, and the number notification means. Based on the fact that the number of times of notification is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, it is configured to be switchable to the second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification.

  Thereby, since privilege alert | report can be performed with the rule from which a taste differs, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means and the remaining number is not less than a predetermined number. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit by the privilege notification execution unit, the bonus notification is executed if the remaining number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

  Thereby, privilege alert | report can be performed in the timing at which a predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In the gaming machine K4, the privilege notification execution means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times within the range of the remaining number of times is increased among a preset upper limit number of times. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the privilege notification indicating that the possible number of times within the range of the remaining number of times within a preset upper limit number is increased is executed by the privilege notification execution means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic L group> (Decision is determined at the time of winning the Attacker)
A privilege game that executes a privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games based on a determination device that executes determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a determination result by the determination device is a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed by the execution means and the bonus game execution means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. Variable entry means that is variable until it is determined, condition determination means that determines whether the execution condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the variable entry means, and determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the condition determination means An effect executing means capable of executing an effect in the case of being performed, and a ratio variable means for variably setting a ratio at which the execution condition is established based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means; Have Gaming machine L1, which is a shall.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. As described above, in a gaming machine, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning opening is opened, and a game ball is notified to the specific winning opening (for example, JP-A-2014-138735). . In addition, a plurality of winning games having different opening patterns of the specific winning opening are set, and depending on the executed winning game, the number of game balls that can be won at the specific winning opening is different. On the other hand, by making it difficult to understand which winning game is being executed, there are those that improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to predict the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, the player can easily grasp that a game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening, it is only necessary to grasp the content of the notification executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening. There was a problem that the player could easily grasp the type of game.

  Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the gaming state after the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game that is executed, it is difficult to understand the type of winning game that is executed. However, when such a gaming machine is used, if a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, while expecting a gaming state to shift to after the winning game ends There is a problem in that the player cannot play a winning game and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine L1, determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and one of the different award games is selected based on the determination result being a specific determination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state by the variable pitching means. Variable until The execution of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the game ball having entered the variable entry means, and when the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Is done. Then, based on the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

  Thereby, based on the kind of privilege game, the ratio by which an effect is performed based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  The gaming machine L1 has payout means for paying a player a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine L2 that is set based on the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as prize balls, and the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means An effect is set based on the number.

  As a result, the effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can easily grasp that the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is not aware that a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed, and to execute an effect that is easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the bonus game executing means includes a first bonus game in which a game ball can easily enter the variable pitching means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. 2 bonus games can be executed at least, and when the first privilege game is executed, the rate variable means sets the rate lower than when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the first privilege game in which the game ball can easily enter the entrance means by the privilege game execution means, and the second privilege game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privilege game. And / or is executed. Then, when the first privilege game is executed by the rate variable means, the rate at which the execution condition is established is set lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, when the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game in which the ease of the entrance to a ball entry means differs are performed, it is possible to approximate the number of times of the performance performed by the performance execution means. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine L2 is used, regardless of the type of the privilege game execution means, the game execution ball that has first entered the ball entry means is always (with high probability) by the effect execution means. It is advisable to produce the performance. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and to provide an effect in which the player cannot easily grasp the type of the privilege game being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the effect is to display a display form on the display means as at least one of the effect forms.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, since the display mode is displayed on the display unit as at least one of the production modes, the player can change the content displayed on the display unit. Based on this, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first bonus game is set such that the period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second bonus game. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the following effects are produced. That is, by the first privilege game, a period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L5, the first privilege game is set such that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set larger than that in the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the first privilege game can be changed to the second state is set to be larger than that in the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  The second rate variable means according to any one of claims L1 to L6, wherein the second rate variable means is configured to variably set the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means. A gaming machine L7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, the second ratio variable means variably sets the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the ratio at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the production more complicatedly.

  In the gaming machine L7, the privilege game execution means includes a first privilege game in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance means, and a second privilege game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privilege game. And the second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be established as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. L8.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7, the following effects are produced. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means and the second privilege game in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. Is executed. The second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases.

  Thereby, it is possible to approximate the number of effects executed by the effect executing means when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the effect execution means pays out the divided display mode indicating the number of the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect divided into a plurality of the payout means. A gaming machine L9, which is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the following effects are produced. In other words, the division display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as an effect by the effect execution means is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display a some division | segmentation display aspect by one production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Moreover, even if it is a game machine which has a privilege game from which the number of prize balls differs, there exists an effect that the same effect can be show | played by performing an effect using a division | segmentation display mode.

<Feature M group> (The number of times of addition can be changed by PUSH production)
Among privilege information determining means for determining benefit information advantageous to a player, storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means, and at least the privilege information stored in the storage means A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to a player corresponding to a part, and when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, the privilege corresponds to privilege information stored in the storage unit Benefit information update means for updating to benefit information reduced from the benefits, display means for displaying identification information based on less benefit information than the benefit information stored in the storage means, and display on the display means When the privilege information stored in the storage means is determined to be the upper limit, the determination means for determining the upper limit, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated The setting means for changing and setting the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing, the variable setting means for changing the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition, and the operation means are operated. Based on that, the privilege information set by the setting means is acquired, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated and updated to the corresponding identification information. A gaming machine M1 characterized by comprising: means.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and can execute an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. (For example, JP 2006-263523 A). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect for informing the result of the predetermined winning lottery. Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine M1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determination means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determination unit is stored in the storage unit, and a privilege advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored privilege information is provided by the privilege grant unit. When a privilege is granted by the privilege grant means, the privilege information update means updates the privilege information to privilege information reduced from the benefits corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on less privilege information than privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information displayed on the display means is determined by the determining means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the operation means is operated by the player, privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied based on the specific condition by the variable setting means. The privilege information set by the setting device is acquired based on the operation of the operation device, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display device is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display update device. .

  Thereby, it becomes possible to update privilege information based on the operation means being operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, a privilege for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a determination result that is determined based on the determination condition and a determination result by the determination device being a specific determination result. A game execution means, and the privilege grant means, a high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as the specific determination result by the determination means a predetermined number of times, until the determination by the determination means is executed. Each time the determination is executed, the gaming machine M2 is continuously set as the privilege.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result is executed by the privilege game execution means. Each time the determination is performed until the determination is performed by the privilege granting unit a predetermined number of times, the determination is made as a privilege. It is set continuously.

  As a result, the high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is continuously set until the determination is executed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so the high probability state is set. That the player can easily grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine M2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times to confirm and notify that the high probability state is continued, the gaming machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the number of times of confirmation and notification that the high probability state is continued is indicated by the identification information.

  Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the frequency | count that it is decided that a high probability state is continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the suggestion display control means for displaying the suggestion display mode indicating the timing of operating the operation means on the display means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means A suggestion display mode determining unit that determines the timing based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestion display mode that suggests the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control unit is determined based on the timing of privilege information set in the setting unit by the suggestion display mode determination unit.

  Thereby, since privilege information is provided by operating an operation means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on a display means, there exists an effect that an effect which is easy to understand for a player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M4, the suggestion display mode includes a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be determined by the variable display mode. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that is displayed at least.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode capable of discriminating the privilege information set in the setting means is displayed by the variable display mode.

  Thereby, since the privilege information provided by the display content displayed as a variable display mode can be discriminated, it is possible to aim the timing at which the player operates the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature N group> (Suppress the occurrence frequency of small hits)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fact that the discriminating condition is satisfied; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A determination condition storage unit capable of storing a plurality of determination conditions; and a suppression unit that suppresses a frequency at which the determination is performed by the determination unit; and the suppression unit stores the determination condition in the determination condition storage unit The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of the determined determination conditions is less than the predetermined number.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls at the start winning opening, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. There is a thing which reports the result of. Some of these gaming machines are configured so as to be able to hold a lottery that is executed based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening a plurality of times (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). .

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when the number of game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening is high, the number of game balls to be paid out is larger than that when the game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening are less frequent. The lottery will be paid out and many lotteries will be executed, and the benefits received by the player will vary greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game ball at the starting prize opening. There was a problem that the operation of a less frequently used gaming machine would decrease. In addition, in order for the player to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game ball at the start winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and to provide a fair gaming machine to the player who executes the game. There was a problem that I could not. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the player is given by the privilege grant means based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. A privilege is given to. A plurality of determination conditions are established by the determination condition storage means. The frequency at which discrimination is performed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppression means makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which discrimination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage unit is greater than or equal to the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine N1, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, and the suppression means has a longer dynamic display than the dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine N2 that suppresses the frequency at which the determination is performed by setting a period.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting unit, the frequency of determination by the suppression unit is suppressed.

  Accordingly, since the frequency of determination is suppressed by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency of determination can be surely suppressed, which is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the gaming machine can be increased.

  In the gaming machine N2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the second determination condition is easily established when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. .

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. And a 2nd discrimination | determination condition becomes easy to be satisfied when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the privilege which makes a 2nd discrimination | determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine N2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second A second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means, whereby the discrimination condition is easily established. Machine N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit, the determination condition is easily established.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd privilege which makes a determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the suppression means makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the determination is executed when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the frequency at which the determination is performed is easily suppressed by the suppression unit.

  Thereby, when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means, it becomes possible to suppress the frequency which discrimination | determination is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where many privileges are granted in a short period of time.

  In any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5, the suppression unit has a first number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number in which the number of the determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage unit is less than the predetermined number. 2. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that, in the case of a predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is performed is easily suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N2 to N4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is executed by the suppression means is reduced. It becomes easy to be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the determination is executed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number, and is the second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. The frequency at which discrimination is performed can be suppressed when a game is intentionally continued in a state where the number of discriminating conditions stored is small, and the player who executes the game can be suppressed. There is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Characteristic O group> (Varies the range of the hold notice)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, and stored in the information storage means Based on the information, a determination means for executing determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means, based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior determination means capable of executing prior determination before the determination condition is satisfied, and the information An identification symbol display control means for displaying on the display means an identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information whose number is stored in the storage means, and the information before being determined by the determination means Of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of prior discrimination by the prior discrimination means, and the variable that is varied by the variable means. A game machine O1 having a determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and the holding symbols corresponding to the number of the holding memories are displayed, and the displayed holding symbols are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect that can be notified in advance of information related to the lottery that is used (for example, JP 2009-297071 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable display is started It was possible to raise the player's expectation.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the hold symbols that are not subject to the hold notice, which reduces the game motivation. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine O1, information is acquired by the information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage unit. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the determination means executes the determination when the determination condition is satisfied and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior discrimination is executed by the prior discrimination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Identification symbols corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each piece of information are displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. With respect to the information before being determined by the determination means, the identification symbol is varied by the variable means based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols that are variable by the variable means is determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols varied by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it can suppress that a variable means is performed with respect to all the identification symbols displayed on a display means, it can suppress that a player's game motivation falls.

  In the gaming machine O1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, the variable unit is configured to transmit the information corresponding to the identification symbol. The game machine O2 is characterized in that it changes to a mode in which information based on the result of the prior discrimination is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means until a condition for determining the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, information based on the result of prior determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol Is displayed.

  This makes it possible for the player to watch the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine O1 or O2 has specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol for a specific period by using the identification symbol variable by the variable means. A gaming machine O3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are produced. That is, using the identification symbol varied by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed on the display means for a specific period by the specific display control means.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect form using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, when the identification means is changed by the operating means that can be operated by the player and the variable means, the specific effect is set based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine O4 characterized by having a specific performance execution means.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the specific effect is set by the specific effect executing means based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production | presentation aspect can be performed during a specific period using the identification symbol varied by the variable means.

  In the gaming machine O4, when it is determined that the specific determination result is determined by the prior determination means, the number of the identification symbols that are varied by the variable means more than when it is determined that it is other than the specific determination result A game machine O5 having variable number setting means for setting a large number.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the number of identification symbols that can be varied by the variable means is set more by the variable number setting means when it is determined that the specific determination result is other than the specific determination result by the prior determination means. The

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the frequency in which an identification symbol is displayed according to a game state can be changed, and it can raise production effects.

<Characteristic P group> (specific effect is executed when the remaining number of STs is less than a predetermined value and a big hit is made)
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the above, and a specification that is more likely to be established as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means Based on the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied and the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming state changing means for changing to a gaming state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect that suggests the ease of establishment of the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The comparison means comparing the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the actual easiness of establishment of the specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result In this case, the gaming machine P1 includes a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that does not notify the player of the number of times played (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional game machine, the number of times that the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, so that if the player wins during the execution of the specific game, the remaining number of the specific game cannot be grasped. There was a problem that the player could not be fully satisfied with the results. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is a bonus game. It is executed by execution means. A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. One game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the specific condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing unit based on the determination that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining unit. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is established is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. If the comparison means compares the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the easiness of establishment of the actual specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, the predetermined condition The specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of.

  As a result, when the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect is easily established and the actual condition is easily established, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, there is an effect that the player can grasp the current state of the second gaming state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, by configuring so that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the privilege game is executed. It becomes like this. Therefore, there is an effect that satisfaction can be given to the player when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state.

  In the gaming machine P1, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the gaming machine P1 has a specific condition setting unit that sets a predetermined number of execution times by the determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied A gaming machine P2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the specific condition setting unit sets a predetermined number of executions by the determination unit that will satisfy the specific condition.

  Thereby, since the specific condition can be set based on the number of executions of the determination means, the number of times that the second gaming state is set can be preset. Therefore, the game can be performed while making the player aware of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, the actual specific effect is easily established based on the establishment of the effect condition. A gaming machine P3 characterized by having variable effect means for changing to a suggestion effect close to.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, based on the establishment of the effect condition, the suggestion effect being executed by the variable effect means is close to the ease with which the actual specific effect is established. It is variable for production.

  Thereby, the number of times indicating that the second gaming state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine P3, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the remaining number of determinations by the determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect unit indicates the suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining determination number. A gaming machine P4, which is variable.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of remaining determinations is suggested by the determination means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestion effect, and is changed to the suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations by the variable effect means.

  As a result, the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations can be suggested, so that the player can have a sense of tension.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, the game machine has means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Characteristic gaming machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

  Thereby, an effect different from the specific effect is executed, so that the player can grasp that the second privilege game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Q group> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol sequence)
Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information sequences composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, with the display means, A game comprising privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the display execution means. In the machine, when a predetermined condition is established, the stop display is performed based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence. The identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of identification information displayed is stopped and displayed, and the new identification information string display means by the identification information string display means. When the combination of the identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information that is stopped and the new identification information string is stopped and displayed based on the display of the column, A gaming machine Q1 having execution means for executing the bonus game by the bonus game executing means.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are cases in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed, and when each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, JP, 10-265, A). In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of being in a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a problem that lost interest. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the dynamic display execution means is executed by the display means. Based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the dynamic display execution means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the combination of identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed identification A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the fact that a new identification information sequence is displayed by the identification information sequence display means, a combination of identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information sequence Is stopped and displayed, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means by the executing means.

  As a result, a new identification information sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been stopped once is stopped and displayed, so that the player has an unexpected effect. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means is configured to dynamically display a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information strings by the dynamic display execution means. Is a game machine Q2 that is dynamically displayed in different directions.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification symbol sequence combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information sequences is dynamically changed in a direction different from the direction dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. Is displayed.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display direction of a symbol sequence can be changed in a different direction, an unexpected effect can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification symbol sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display unit in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has changed, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string Non-display setting for setting at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means to be hidden when the new identification information string is displayed by the display means A gaming machine Q4 having means.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays a new identification information string. In such a case, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to non-display by the non-display setting unit.

  As a result, it is possible to dynamically display a new identification information sequence without changing the area for displaying the identification information sequence. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q4, display data for displaying the new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and the identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means The display data to be displayed is set at the same opportunity, and is determined to determine display data to be displayed among the set display data as an area to be set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine Q5 having means.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q4, the following effects are produced. That is, display data for displaying a new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and display data for displaying an identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, Of the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined by the determining means as the area set at the same opportunity and set as the display area of the display means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

<Characteristic R group> (Advantageous degree of advantage can be changed by transition opportunity)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, benefit game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discrimination result, and the discriminating means When the determination result is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result, a small privilege game execution unit that executes a small privilege game different from the privilege game, and the privilege game execution unit executes the small privilege game First gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the small privilege game is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the award game is ended; When the first game state is set by the first game state setting means and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to the first game state without triggering the end of the privilege game state. A second gaming state setting means that can be set to be changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state, and when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, a first advantageous state is set, A gaming machine R1 comprising: advantageous state setting means for setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is increased as a bonus after winning. Furthermore, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of lotteries in the probability variation state, and if it does not hit before reaching the predetermined upper limit number of lotteries, In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is one that shifts to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. When winning in this special state, the game value given to the player is greater than winning in the probable state, so even if the probable state ends before winning, the player's motivation for the game is motivated It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the winning lottery probability is a normal probability in a special state set after the probability variation state is over, so that it may be missed over a relatively large number of lottery times. Increases nature. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, the second gaming state can be set by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means, and the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. Different advantageous states are set depending on the case and the case where the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, even if it does not become a privilege game, since it can shift to the 2nd gaming state, and since the advantageous condition in the 2nd gaming state can be changed further by the transition opportunity to the 2nd gaming state, There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the two-game state.

  In the gaming machine R1, dynamic display executing means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means dynamically after a predetermined period of time, and stopping the display, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods, and the advantageous state setting means includes the dynamic state setting means. The first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the display period group storage means, and a second dynamic different from the first dynamic display period group The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using a display period group is set.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination results of the discrimination means are stored in the dynamic display period group storage means. Then, the dynamic display period is set by the advantageous state setting means using different dynamic display period groups in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

  Thereby, different dynamic display periods can be set in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and as a result, the interval at which the small privilege game is executed can be adjusted. Can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that in the first dynamic display period group, a longer dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period group is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first dynamic display period group is configured to easily set a dynamic display period longer than the second dynamic display period group. Thereby, the 2nd advantageous state using a 2nd dynamic display period group can make it easy to shorten the space | interval by which a small privilege game is performed rather than the 1st advantageous state using a 1st dynamic display period group. , It can be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the gaming machine R2 or R3 includes a first entrance means that allows a game ball to enter, and a second entrance means that is different from the first entrance means, and the discrimination means includes the first entrance means. The first discrimination is executed based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the second discrimination is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The display executing means includes a first dynamic display for indicating first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination, and a second dynamic display for indicating second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination. The small privilege game executing means is configured to execute the small privilege game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. Characteristic gaming machine R4.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the second determination are simultaneously displayed. When the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result, the small privilege game is executed by the small privilege game executing means.

  Thus, by making the dynamic display period of the first dynamic display different from the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display, there is a difference between the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the number of executions of the second determination that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine R4, the second advantageous state is a dynamic display shorter than the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine R5 characterized in that a period is set.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result is shorter in the state where the second advantageous state is set than in the state where the first advantageous state is set The display period is set. Therefore, the second advantageous state can be changed to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second advantageous state is the first gaming state. As the first dynamic display for indicating that the determination result is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended among the specific determination results. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that a dynamic display period longer than that in the first advantageous state is set.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R4 or R5, the following items are played. That is, in the second advantageous state, when the determination result of the first determination means is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set among the specific determination results, the first dynamic display is more dynamic than the first advantageous state. The display period is set longer. Therefore, in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the third gaming state can be made difficult to be set according to the determination result of the first determination, compared to the case where the first advantageous state is set. The state can be played for a longer time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed simultaneously, the second dynamic display ends first, and the specific determination result When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the gaming machine R7 includes an ending unit for forcibly ending the execution of the first dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the case where the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed simultaneously, when the operation 2 dynamic display for indicating a specific determination result is finished and the second identification information is displayed, The first dynamic display being executed is forcibly terminated by the termination means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the special game and play the game.

  In the gaming machine R7, when the end means forcibly ends the execution of the first dynamic display, the identification information variable for displaying first identification information indicating a determination result different from the determination result of the first determination A gaming machine R8 characterized by comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the execution of the first dynamic display is forcibly ended by the ending means, the first identification information indicating the determination result different from the determination result of the first determination is displayed by the identification information variable means. It is possible to notify the player that the 1 dynamic display has been forcibly terminated without any sense of incongruity, and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine R8, the identification information variable means displays identification information for indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display. Characteristic gaming machine R9.

  According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R8, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information variable means displays identification information for indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In any one of the gaming machines R7 to R9, the second advantageous state is the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the specific determination result. A gaming machine R10 characterized in that a shorter dynamic display period is set.

  According to the gaming machine R10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R7 to R9, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period in the second advantageous state is shorter than that in the first advantageous state. Therefore, the second advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (Multiple advantages are set for small hit RUSH)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. A gaming state setting capable of setting a privilege gaming execution means, at least a first gaming state, and a second gaming state in which the small gaming is easier to execute than the first gaming state. When the second gaming state is set, at least one of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state is set. A gaming machine S1 comprising a possible advantageous state setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, when the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed, the advantageous state of the second gaming state is set. The advantageous state setting means sets either the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state.

  Therefore, the advantageous state during the second gaming state can be varied, and when the second gaming state is set, the game can be performed while expecting which advantageous state is set. There is an effect that the interest of the can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, an effect period setting in which a first effect period that is an effect period of the first effect and a second effect period that is an effect period of the second effect that are executed by the effect executing means can be set. And the production period setting means is configured to easily set a production period shorter than the first production period as the second production period during the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the period during which the second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed can be made shorter than the period during which the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed, The second determination can be easily performed. Thereby, since the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination is easily executed, there is an effect that the second game state can be changed to a game state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the bonus game is completed by the bonus game executing means. A game state setting means and a second game state setting means for setting the second game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the first game state is set. A gaming machine S3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set by the first gaming state setting means when the bonus game is ended, and the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means. In the state, it is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  Therefore, since the second gaming state advantageous to the player can be set at various timings, there is an effect that the player can be expected to continuously shift to the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine S3, the advantageous state setting means sets the second advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. S4.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second game state is set by the first game state setting means, the second advantageous state is set.

  Therefore, since the second gaming state of the second advantageous state is set after the bonus game is completed, it is possible to continuously provide a game advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines S2 to S4, there is provided an effect period group storage means for storing a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as the effect period set by the effect period setting means. The advantageous state setting means includes the first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first effect period group stored in the effect period group storage means, the first effect period group, The game machine S5 is characterized by setting the second advantageous state in which the production period is set using different second production period groups.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S2 to S4, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as effect periods are stored in the effect period group storage means, and different effect period groups are used in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state by the advantageous state setting means. The production period is set.

  Thereby, it is possible to set different performance periods in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and thus it is possible to adjust the interval at which the small privilege game is executed, and to vary the player's degree of advantage. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between advantages and disadvantages during the small hit RUSH period)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. Game state setting capable of setting a privilege game executing means, at least a first game state, and a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state. A second gaming state period in which the second gaming state is set can be varied between a first advantageous period and a second advantageous period that is more advantageous than the first advantageous period. A gaming machine T1 comprising a settable advantageous period setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the advantageous degree during the period in which the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is variable by the advantageous period setting means. Is done.

  Therefore, the advantageous state during the second gaming state period can be varied, and the game can be performed with the expectation that a more advantageous advantageous state will be set after the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T1, an effect period setting in which a first effect period that is an effect period of the first effect and a second effect period that is an effect period of the second effect that are executed by the effect executing means can be set. And the production period setting means easily sets a production period shorter than the first production period as the second production period during the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed during the second effect period in which the second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the second determination easier to execute than the first determination. Thereby, since the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination is easily executed, there is an effect that the second game state can be changed to a game state advantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine T2 includes a production period group storage unit that stores a plurality of production period groups having a plurality of production periods that can be set as the production period set by the production period setting unit, and the production period A gaming machine T3 comprising order defining means for defining an order of referring to the plurality of effect period groups stored in the group storage means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are produced. That is, the production period group referred to by the order defining means is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine T3, the order defining means defines an order in which at least the first effect period group in which the first effect period can be set and the second effect period group in which the second effect period can be set. A gaming machine T4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the order in which the first effect period and the second effect period are set is defined by the order defining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous state of the second gaming state can be properly managed.

<Feature U group> (The period in which the small hit RUSH is executed is indefinite)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. Game state setting capable of setting a privilege game executing means, at least a first game state, and a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state. And a transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, wherein the gaming state setting means includes the transition condition determination A gaming machine T1 that sets the second gaming state when the means determines that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied by the transition condition determination means in a state where the first gaming state is set. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Therefore, since the gaming state can be changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for setting the second gaming state. This has the effect of improving the fun of the game.

  The gaming machine T1 includes a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as the predetermined transition condition. Machine T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the transition condition setting means sets the first transition condition and the second transition condition as the predetermined transition conditions. Therefore, since the second gaming state is set when any one of the plurality of transition conditions is satisfied, the player is continuously expected to have the second gaming state set. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine T2 has an end condition setting means for setting an end condition for the first gaming state, and the end condition set by the end condition setting means is used as the first transition condition. A gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, the first transition condition is satisfied when the end condition of the first gaming state is satisfied, so that the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed smoothly, There is an effect that an uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine T3, when the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit is executed, an end determination unit determines whether to end the first gaming state. The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the termination condition setting means sets the termination condition to determine that the first gaming state is terminated by the termination determination means.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit is executed, it is determined by the end determination unit whether the first gaming state is to be ended. Then, the end condition setting means determines that the end determination means determines to end the first gaming state as the end condition.

  Thereby, since it is determined based on the determination result of the end determination means whether or not the first gaming state is ended, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the second gaming state is set, There is an effect that it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation for setting the second game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the second transition condition set by the transition condition setting means is the number of executions in which the first determination is executed in a state where the first gaming state is set, When the total number of times obtained by adding the number of executions for which the second determination is executed reaches a predetermined number, or one of the number of executions for which the first determination is executed and the number of executions for which the second determination is executed The gaming machine T5, which is established when the number of executions reaches a specific number less than the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the following effects are produced. In other words, since there are a plurality of established conditions based on the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination, it is possible for the player to select a game for establishing the second transition condition. , There is an effect that can be actively participate in the game.

  Each gaming machine is a slot machine, which is a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S217 Part of determining means S218 Bonus game executing means S305 Part of determining means S1211 Game state setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening becomes a specific lottery result. is there. This ensures that, had tried to interest improvement on the game of Yu technique's.

JP 2003-320110 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there may not be able to sufficiently improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the position, a variable control means that changes the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a game ball that enters the entrance means and viable discriminating means discriminating on the basis that the spheres, and benefits game execution means for executing a particular advantageous benefits the player to the player based on the judgment result becomes specific discrimination result of the discriminating means, wherein A first gaming state in which a determination result of the determination means is the first determination result, a second gaming state in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set; Set to the second probability and more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state 3 includes a game state, and including at least configurable gaming state setting means 1 of the game state among a plurality of game states, and the gaming state setting means, the benefits that are executed by the award game execution means As a gaming state after the game is over, a first setting capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state and the third gaming state, and the second A second setting capable of setting the third gaming state based on a transition condition that can be established without executing the privilege game in a state in which the gaming state is set ; The variable control means is configured to be able to control the variable means so that a game ball can easily enter the ball entry means in the second game state than in the third game state. And the gaming machine When the third gaming state is set based on the first setting executed by the gaming state setting means, and when the third gaming state is set based on the second setting executed by the gaming state setting means There in a case where it is set, Ru can der varying the advantageous degree of the player in the third game state.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. Is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a variable means that can be varied to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, a variable control means for changing the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern, and Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and determination result of the determination means Is set to the first probability, the second gaming state is set to a second probability higher than the first probability, and the second probability is set to the first probability. And a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. And a game state setting means capable of setting one of the game state among a plurality of game states including even without, the gaming state setting means, after the award game has ended, which is executed by the award game execution means As the gaming state, a first setting capable of setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state and the third gaming state, and the second gaming state are set. A second setting capable of setting the third gaming state based on the fact that a transition condition that can be established without being executed in the state where the bonus game is executed is executable, and the variable control means The variable means is configured to be controllable so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means in the second game state than in the third game state. The machine has the above game state setting. When the third gaming state is set based on the first setting executed by the means, and when the third gaming state is set based on the second setting executed by the gaming state setting means and, the Ru can der varying the advantageous degree of the player in the third game state.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of the flow-path solenoid in 1 big hit, and the operation | movement of an opening-and-closing plate. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment and the jackpot determination value in a special symbol, (b) is 1st in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, (c) schematically shows the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change). It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening selection table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the avoidance period in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting effect in 2nd Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting | reporting effect in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the latency return effect in 2nd Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-short type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the first ball entering process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) And (b) is an enlarged view of the LXXVII part in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the time-measurement change of the time-measurement change of a flow-path solenoid, and the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method from one gaming state to another gaming state about three types of gaming states set to the pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are fluctuating in the variable display effect, and (b) is a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in case the reach production which suggests to a player that there is high possibility that it will be produced. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the state from which the result of the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol was removed in a normal state or a probability variation state, (b) showed an example of a customer waiting demonstration screen. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation demonstration screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the symbol fluctuation | variation in a latent state, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case within 30 seconds after a fluctuation | variation display is complete | finished, c) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the case of 30 seconds after the end of the variable display. (A) is the figure which showed this latent state completion screen, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the result screen displayed after a latent state is complete | finished. It is the figure which showed an example of the resurrection effect which is a kind of the effect performed during a latent state. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normality typically, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for latent probability typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the usual figure fluctuation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the screen display selection table typically. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the standby command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is an additional effect C as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen in the case of performing. It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect D is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the demonstration display B screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. ) Is a diagram showing an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the special display A screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the special display B screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and jackpot type in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal use in 4th Embodiment (for less than 2 times after the end of latent probability), (b) is the table for normal use in 4th Embodiment ( It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content for 3-8 times after the end of a latent probability. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency in 4th Embodiment. It is. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in another example of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the fourth embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, (b) is during a winning game in the latent state (during a small hit game) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen of (). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content displayed when the superposition production D (refer the point D of FIG. 182) was performed during the special figure fluctuation | variation of a latent state, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the final production in a latent state. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning effect in a latent state. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition production | presentation table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning presentation table in 5th Embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning prize command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 5th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pending | holding notice effect is performed. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pressing-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display mode when a push-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the non-display aspect in a latent state. (A) is the figure which showed the display content when the remaining frequency of an actual latent state becomes 0 in a non-display mode, and (b) is a non-display mode. It is the figure which showed the display mode (pinch departure appearance appearance) when it is set and the number of remaining times of a latent state becomes a big hit in the state within 5 times. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the addition production | presentation selection table in 6th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the participation degree normal table in 6th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for low participation degree in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the table for jackpots in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down period table in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal use in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for special use in 6th Embodiment. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the reservation notice determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process during the superimposing effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process during the hold notice performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the additional effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the residual change frequency command processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the non-display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the fluctuation pattern selection in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent (second half) in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection 3 table in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd normal table (for after 3 times after the end of a latent state) in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press process in reach performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit mid press process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the completion | finish of a press performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the residual change frequency command processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press command process in reach performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the scroll change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the scroll non-change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot mid press command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control device in the example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character storage area in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is the character storage area in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the storage area for symbol arrangement | sequences in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main controller in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 7th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 7th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent probability referred in the period in which the 1st latent probability state in 7th Embodiment is set, (b) is 7th. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent probability referred during the period in which the 2nd latent probability state in the embodiment is set. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112 a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special symbol jackpot types, “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the two types of “bonus A, B” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed in the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of jackpots C and D are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed by a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the lottery executed when the ball has entered the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery executed when the player enters the ball is referred to as the second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is changed. Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are four types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are reached, a special gaming state with 8 rounds (8 round jackpot) is entered. On the other hand, when “Big jackpot C” and “Big jackpot D”, both are in a special gaming state (15 round jackpot) with 15 rounds. Further, after each jackpot is over, as a value added after the jackpot, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the jackpot. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes a probability change switch 65e3 described later), the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) after the jackpot ends. When a special symbol high probability state is given, the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol hit probability increase state after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation ends 50 times. . On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased is the change of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Continue until 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high-probability state) means a gaming state in which a normal symbol hit probability is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at the time of one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol is in a “high probability state of special symbol” until the variation of the special symbol ends 50 times after the jackpot ends. The probability change period of the special symbol is not limited to 50 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, if a big hit is made and the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the state shifts from the “normal state of the normal symbol” to the “short state of the normal symbol”. In this case, the set “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation display is completed 100 times. If the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the 100 special symbol lottery after the special symbol jackpot, the game returns to the “normal state of normal symbols”.

  If a new jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased by 50 or 100 special times after the end of the new jackpot. This is continued until the symbol display is finished.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery that is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbols corresponding to the jackpots A to D) (1st design) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A second entrance 640 into which a sphere can enter is disposed on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, You can enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is basically necessary to flow down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed).

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed in the upper right of the second entrance 640 in front view, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65. The game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 flow down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of the big hit. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, in the 1st round of jackpot, the period when a ball | bowl can enter into the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), and a ball | bowl are a special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is made different depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type.

  More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the door 65f1 in the first round of jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after starting the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. Thereby, the period in which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, it is possible to play a game with a big hit paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2, so that the game with a big hit becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first entrance 631 side. It is comprised so that. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while keeping the right hit state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and the game method to the left strike immediately after the big hit game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Yes. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the switching member 65 h is in the range of 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after the jackpot start and in the range of 3.5 to 5.5 seconds. Actuates, and the flow path leading to the probability change switch 65e3 is allowed to pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 for one ball prize). Award balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of jackpot is variable depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state and the period during which the special discharge channel 65e2 can flow down is varied. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the time change of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the opening A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the big hit. That is, before the big hit starts, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This OFF state continues for 0.5 seconds after the jackpot starts (becomes the opening period). And when 0.5 second passes from the start of jackpot, a flow path solenoid will be set to an ON state only for 0.2 second. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

  When the 0.2 second ON period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again. This period of off state continues until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the setting of the off state). When the period for turning off is elapsed, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state again for 2 seconds (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass), and thereafter, the flow state solenoid 65k is kept off until the big hit ends. Be drunk.

  Also, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when opening A is set, when a big hit is started, one round of big hit is started after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, the open / close plate 65f1 is set in an open state until 10 seconds have passed in the special winning opening 65a or one second has elapsed since the start of one round. Is done. Since it is difficult to enter 10 balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, the open / close plate 65f1 is basically opened for 1 second in the first round of the big hit. When one round is completed, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and an interval period is set. Thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of jackpots, the open / close plate 65f1 is set in an open state until ten balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a or until 30 seconds have passed since the round started.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when opening A is set, the start timing of one round of jackpot coincides with the start time of the ON period of 0.2 seconds for the flow path solenoid 65k. However, since a time lag occurs until the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is reached in 0.2 seconds when the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state. It is difficult to advance the gas to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the sphere cannot reach the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that after the jackpot, a low probability state of a special symbol is basically set. Even when opening A is started, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a simultaneously with the start of one round and the ball has flowed down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h Thus, the sphere can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 before the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the player will shift to the probability change state of the special symbol.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when opening B is set, when the big hit starts, after a 3.5 second opening period, one round of big hit is started and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. The This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated in the same manner as the jackpot in which the opening A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of jackpot coincides with the start time of the ON period of 2 seconds for the flow path solenoid 65k. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Therefore, if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot. It is possible to shift to a certain change state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and the ease of shifting to the probability change state varies depending on the set opening type. Note that the opening type is selected based on the jackpot type or the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, opening A is set when jackpot B or jackpot D is set in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol), and jackpot A or jackpot C is set. In such a case, the opening B is set. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, while when the big hit A or the big hit C becomes, it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the jackpot type, it becomes easier or more difficult to shift to a special symbol probability changing state, so that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the game is shifted to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the big win, so that the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 12A). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number falls outside the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12A). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first per random number table for the high probability ( FIG. 12 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “10/400”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery is a big win and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. Become. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit C”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot D”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined based on the special symbol type and the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 13A, the variation pattern table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a release (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) is set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Further, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are within the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 149”, and various types of outreach are within the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table matches, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12C, when the normal symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value that hits the normal symbol, and the hit is “0”. This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is “0”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). And the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only once for "0.2 seconds x 1" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “O” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is released “one second × three times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only “three times per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 32), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data described above, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table 202e is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, only “0” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 jackpot determination values “1 to 10” in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol are defined. Judgment value is defined. A special symbol when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A). Is determined to be a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This jackpot A is a jackpot of 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the opening B is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round).

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” is a big hit with 8 rounds, like the “big hit A”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this “big hit B”, if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), an opening A is set (that is, the ball turns the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning time is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, when the big hit B is in the normal state, it is difficult to shift to the probable change state after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the case where the big hit A is in the normal state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), for the second special symbol, the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit C”. ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the opening B is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected in the case of winning the first special symbol lottery, and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, jackpot C is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, “big hit D” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”. This “big hit D” is a big hit with 15 rounds, as in “big hit C”. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big hit D” is set to opening A if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) (that is, the ball turns the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning time is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). If the “big hit D” is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large as in the case of the “big hit C” and the ball can easily pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. It is advantageous for the person. On the other hand, when winning in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that in the normal state, it is disadvantageous to the player as compared to “big hit A” and “big hit C”.

  Note that the opening A is set when “big hit D” in the normal state is an irregular game in which the ball is launched (right-handed) aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state. This is to suppress the method. If it is configured so that the opening B is set even in the normal state when the “special bonus D” is obtained in the second special symbol lottery (that is, if the big special is drawn in the second special symbol lottery, If it is configured so that it can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 regardless of the state), the big hit B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to shift to the probability change state is set). There may be a player who thinks that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set in the case of a big win than the lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the big special symbol wins in the normal state, the lottery is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the same manner as in the case of the above, the opening A is set at a rate of 50%, which is difficult to shift to the probability change state. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the irregular gaming method that attempts to improve the entry rate in the probability variation state by executing the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

  In this embodiment, the opening B is set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. However, the opening A is also set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. You may comprise. Thereby, even in a normal state, it is possible to further increase the deterrence against an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed strike is always made in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 12C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “0” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Note that details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot when the jackpot is won. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, an opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, as an opening type determined when the jackpot A, the normal state (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, and The opening B is defined in association with the normal symbol time-short state) and the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation state and normal symbol time-short state). That is, when the jackpot is A, the opening B that is easy to shift from the opening selection table to the probability change state is read and set regardless of the game state at the time of winning, which is advantageous to the player.

  As the opening type determined when the big hit B is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, and the opening B is associated with the short-time state and the probability variation state in association with each other. Therefore, opening B is set to facilitate the transition to the probability variation state when the jackpot B is reached in the short-time state or the probability variation state. However, if the jackpot B is reached in the normal state, the transition to the probability variation state is performed. An opening A that is difficult to perform is set. Therefore, a big hit B in the normal state is disadvantageous for the player.

  As the opening type determined when the jackpot C is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state in the same manner as the jackpot A. Also, as the type of opening determined when the jackpot D is reached, as with the jackpot B, the opening A for the normal state and the opening B for the short-time state and the probability variation state are defined in association with each other. Has been.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is used to switch the opening type based on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is reached. More specifically, opening A is set when jackpot B or jackpot D is set in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of ordinary symbol), and jackpot A or jackpot C is set. In such a case, the opening B is set. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, while when the big hit A or the big hit C becomes, it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the jackpot type, it becomes easier or more difficult to shift to a special symbol probability changing state, so that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the game is shifted to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the big win, so that the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203o, a probability variation valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving / medium counter 203r, a big hit flag 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding). 4th area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 25, FIG. 27). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 29). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, as described above, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Thus, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and that the normal symbol is in the short time state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 50 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the value is subtracted by one (see S220 in FIG. 25). The probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

  The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  In addition, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 28). Specifically, in the normal symbol variation process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r are referred to. If any counter value is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability is used. If the normal symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the table 202c and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second per random number table 202c for low probability. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (see S514 and S519 in FIG. 28).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1311 in FIG. 36). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S1303 in FIG. 36). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present embodiment, when 0.5 second has elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.2 seconds, and when 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). The operation counter 203k is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, and is set to 2 seconds when 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203n described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a time required for the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when one preset round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203n has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1407 in FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, after the first round of jackpot with the opening A set, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the passage solenoid 65k is kept on for 2 seconds. Injustice that causes the sphere to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 can be suppressed.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the channel solenoid 65k is ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. After that, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, or from the lower side of the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a line or the like and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1411 in FIG. 37).

  The short / medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the short time state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is not set after the big hit game, the state shifts to the time reduction state where the number of time reductions is 100 times.

  The jackpot flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203s is a jackpot due to the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the jackpot flag 203s is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 25).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability change state flag 223e, a short-time state flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, The power-off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Yes. Each area stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and holds the variable effect held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b as a special symbol type. It is designed to manage every time.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol reservation ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The probability change state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is a probability change state of a special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing state based on the probability changing state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, changing the back surface type or the like) according to the determined gaming state is performed.

  The short time state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a short time state of a normal symbol. At this time, the short state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state based on the short-time state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, change of the rear face type or the like) is performed according to the determined gaming state.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when various effects (back surface type or the like) are selected. The effect counter 223g is formed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in a range of “0 to 199”, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which an effect mode to be determined is defined for each value of the effect counter 223g. By using the effect counter 223g, various effects can be selected and executed at random.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. is doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to output data after designating an address in reading the data of the first page. There is.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 18B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 18C. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  In addition, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 19B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 20 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back face. First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the back image on the back E is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E shows the third image in a state in which the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a rear image shown in FIG. 20C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually turns white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20A is restored, and the back images of FIGS. 20A to 20C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20A, and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 20A and 20B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIGS. 20A to 20B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 20A to 20B) is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage change is determined by lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are used for normal use while the images in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, but for the resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is determined in advance for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type that is information for specifying the back image type is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time after the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change starts until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 is displayed in the third symbol. It is possible to specify the third symbol to be easily displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to each of the three symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is imposed on the startup and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable presentation images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the pachinko machine 10 can be created is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on user operations, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 55) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Once selected, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 45 (b)). ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 23, a back image used for an image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol display display). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 45 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 in FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 50 (a)). ) (See S3002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S2705 in FIG. 47A, S2705 in FIG. 48A, and S2805 in FIG. 48B). , See S2905 of FIG. With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2505 in FIG. 47A, S2705 in FIG. 48A, S2805 in FIG. 48B, FIG. 49 S2905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the first symbol display is performed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S203). . Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (of the first special symbol reserved ball number) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S206).

  In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S207), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S212 or S209, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the special symbol jackpot start is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S218, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and an opening command is set. (S1003). As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the process of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is 1 or more (S221). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process ends. Although not shown in the figure, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the process of S220 becomes 0, or when the value of the hour / middle counter 203r subtracted by the process of S222 becomes 0, Then, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed is set.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and includes the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S302). In the processing of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol has a low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A). As described above, ten random numbers “1 to 10” are set as the jackpots for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number for which these hits. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 12A) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value “0” stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the jackpot type is. . As described above, if the first special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (8 rounds big hit) If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big win, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the big win C (15 round big hit), If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (Variation time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first and second entrances 64 and 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or the ball has won the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It stores in the first area among the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), ends this process, and returns to the timer interrupt process. . In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display or the second entrance port performed in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the short time state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-short state, and the value of either counter is determined. If also 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during a special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is opened. This is because it is possible to suppress, as much as possible, the ball that is going to win the second specific winning slot 650 a to enter the second winning slot 640.

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 12C).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, and the low Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “1-239”, it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 12C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S514). If the normal symbol is in a short time state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S515). ). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S519), and the normal symbol is in the short-time state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the short-time and middle counter 203r is 1). (S519: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short-time state (that is, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the short-time medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is off and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display being executed. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

  After the process of S814 is completed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S810 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 27) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the ball has won the specified number. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on. If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is finished, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83 is performed (S907). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S520 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 28) or the processing of S521, the second symbol display device 83 is set. The variable display is started at. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” are alternately turned on as the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 30 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S901. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: Yes), the opening category corresponding to the current jackpot type and the current gaming state is selected from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14). Determine (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when opening A is set as the opening type, it is difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, and thus it is difficult to set the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the ball easily flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the probability variation state is easily set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1007). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1007: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1008: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1008, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached when a special gaming state (all rounds of jackpots) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), an ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1010 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is performed. Execute (S1014). Details of the winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1014), an abnormal process is performed to determine whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been discharged normally (S1015). finish. Details of this abnormality process (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1012 that it is the jackpot end timing (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1013). Exit. The details of the jackpot end process (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1009). This jackpot operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening according to the number of rounds (first large opening 65a, second large opening 650a). ) And the operation of the sorting rotator 661.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1102), and this process is terminated. To do. By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), it is possible to accurately set an opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1013). This jackpot end process (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end as described above.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1013), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 50. By doing so, the probability variation state of 50 times is set after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is ended from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / countercounting counter 203r updated in the process of S1202 or S1203. Setting is performed (S1204). Next, the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1205), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control in accordance with winning in the specific winning port (large opening) 65a.

  In this winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If the round is not valid in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the present is the round effective period (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203j and updated (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S1305), and if the round time has passed. (S1305: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. If it is determined in the process of S1304 that the value of the winning counter is 9 or less (S1304), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308). If the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), 1 is calculated from the value of the operation counter 203k. After subtraction (S1309), the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1308 that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1308: No), it is then determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 2 seconds) (S1318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to S1310, where the probability variation switch 65e3 is monitored and the probability variation setting flag 203h is updated. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of ball detachment. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being imparted by passing the ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to OFF (S1319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310). If the sphere has not passed the probability change switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and S1313 processing is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability change valid flag 203o is set to on (S1315), The process ends.

  Next, the abnormality process (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this abnormality process (S1015). This abnormal process (S1015) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether it has been performed.

  In the abnormal process (S1015), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1401). If it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the sphere has not passed the sphere outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the discharge number (the sum of the value of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203q) It is determined whether or not (value) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality that the sphere is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 54e3 during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the processing of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1411), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 37), the balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65, or the like. It is possible to detect and report the occurrence of a malfunction that occurs at an early stage.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S1616 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 39). ) Is determined during execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), it executes the power-off process in S1616. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1616, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1616, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the processing of S1505, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 in the processing of S1505 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 is performed in the state where the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is a case in which the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1616 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  After the processing of S1510, the probability variation state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are updated according to the notification contents of the state command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (S1511). . Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped since the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the process of S1508 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1509 is that if the process from S1504 to S1508 is reached via the process in S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, and thereby the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later are set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1605, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process proceeds to S1611. In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1613 that the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power supply interruption flag 223y and the power supply interruption processing flag are set to ON (S1615). The disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination processing (S1611) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). If it is determined in the process of S1701 that a variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1704 that a stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the first special symbol lottery) or the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). Also, in the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1708 ends, this process ends.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Thus, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e can be matched. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Even if the value deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected or the special symbol is drawn, and the first special symbol holding ball counter of the main controller 110 is corrected. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When the processing of S1708 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1707 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability change status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability variation state is notified based on the information corresponding to the gaming state (whether or not the probability variation state) is included in the state command, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the time reduction state is notified. If the normal state is notified, the probability changing state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are set to off. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1709 that a status command has not been received (S1709: No), then whether or not a jackpot related command (either an opening command, a round number command, or an ending command) has been received. Is determined (S1711). If it is determined that the jackpot related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot related command is determined, the jackpot related process for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1711 that a jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). If an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 ends, the main jackpot related processing (see FIG. 41) ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that an opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1803). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S1803: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1805, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the round number command has not been received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1806). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1807), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1806 that an ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this process ends. By executing the jackpot related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1612). This variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In this process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 in the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In step S1908, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the stop of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a low read speed especially when random access is performed, so the MPU 231 may directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 54A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 should display one frame to be displayed next. The content of the image is specified specifically. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 23, the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, back-and-forth losing reach, and back-and-forth losing) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2505), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the process of S2501. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the set variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, S2502 The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the above process, and the necessary sprite image data in the set fluctuation display data table is Character ROM 23 in advance From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display stop type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47B, details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front and rear outreach, reach other than front and rear outreach, complete out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The stop type table is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the display If there is a command opening command (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If there is a round number command for use (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48B, details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2413), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is determined. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits constituting the back image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3002). ), This rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the back face after the change is determined from each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is back B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2304), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3002 From this, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is performed to determine whether or not to change the rear surface type when the variable display is executed. Since the fluctuation display is set to a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, 2 is displayed in the command buffer area. The above rear image change command should not be stored, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. . In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2418), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2402 to S2418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. This is processing corresponding to each command by extracting only the type command. Processing that executes the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 47B), and discards other commands without executing processing corresponding to the commands. I do.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3202), S3203 to S3204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In the task processing (S2304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  In the process of S3205, a pointer update process is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3206 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S3209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the confirmed display data table is not displayed yet, and the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3210), and then the Null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the changing effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S3215 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on in the processing of S3209 (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demo is displayed as display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S3217), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  If the demonstration display flag 233y is on in the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the presentation time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 18B and 18C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S3602). In the process of S3602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3602 that the transfer process has not ended (S3602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, if the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the processing in S3705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the processing proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the rear image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the leading address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state. ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

  In the process of S3709, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S3709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  When the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the on state is a bit corresponding to the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the normal video RAM 236 is used. There is no image data to be transferred. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the bit in the on state is a bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “on”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3713 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed previously, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the front side from the sprite that should be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if the value is "0" and setting it to "0" if it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and it is easy to shift to a probability change state according to the set opening type (one big hit) Are different from each other). More specifically, an opening A in which the probability variation state is difficult to be imparted (the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is low), and a probability variation state is more easily imparted than the opening A (entrance into the special discharge flow path 65e2). The opening B having a high sphere ratio is configured to be settable. The opening type is selected based on the jackpot type or the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is reached. More specifically, the opening A is set when the jackpot B or jackpot D is reached in the normal state, and the opening B is set when the jackpot A or jackpot C is reached. Yes. That is, when the big hit B or the big hit D in the normal state, the rate of entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the big hit becomes low (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), while the big hit A or the big hit In C, the ball entering rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is increased during the big hit (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that a big hit A or a big hit C with a high entrance rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 will be obtained.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability variation state or time-short state), the opening B is configured for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit is made in a state other than the normal state, the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to cause a game to be played in each gaming state in anticipation of a big win before the probability variation state or the short-time state ends. Accordingly, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension that it is necessary to win a jackpot in a limited number of special symbol lottery times (the number of times of probability change or the number of time reductions). In addition, as expected, when the big win is made within the limited number of lotteries, the opening B is surely set, so there is a sense of security that the transition to the probable change state is almost confirmed when the big win is reached. You can hold them.

  Here, as a method of varying the rush rate of the special symbol into the probability variation state between the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is determined according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. Different ways can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the jackpot opening period to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easy to perform and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. When the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the normal state wins a big win, the jackpot type in which an opening / closing pattern that does not easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected is selected. In the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed, a method of not selecting a big hit type for which an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state other than the normal state (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), for example, by the player mistaking the ball launch direction. In addition, when a big hit is made, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  In addition, a method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the gaming state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered, but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern are not in a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules are not met. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the opening period is selected in accordance with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot makes it possible to win a jackpot in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time reduction state). In this case, it is always easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state in the first round of the big hit, and the ball is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the road 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be arbitrarily determined. As a method of changing the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 using the opening A and B in rounds other than the first round, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round up to the round where the entrance is possible It is sufficient to keep the opening time of. That is, as in the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition for each round is defined as “until 2 seconds from the start of the round as a specified time, or until 10 balls have entered the specified number”. Just keep it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) where it is practically difficult to enter a specified number (10) of balls, each round is surely continued until the specified time elapses. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be defined in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine in a later round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, the player can have a longer sense of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probable change state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state, but the opening A is also set when the “big hit C” is obtained in the normal state. May be. Thereby, even in a normal state, it is possible to further increase the deterrence against an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed strike is always made in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening A that starts the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible to pass the sphere with respect to the probability change switch 65e3, and the period in which the sphere can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3. However, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the first round period may have an opening type that overlaps a part of the two seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state.

  In the present embodiment, two types of entrances, that is, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided. However, the entrance may be the first entrance 64 alone. That is, only the lottery of the first special symbol may be executed. Even with this configuration, since the opening B is set for both jackpots A and B in the probability variation state, it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance ball in the first round of the jackpot winning in the probability variation state. it can. By comprising in this way, since the 2nd entrance 640 can be deleted, a number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the opening type according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio that a high probability state of a special symbol is given for each gaming state (special for jackpot The entrance rate into the discharge flow path 65e2 is varied. More specifically, in the normal state, the probability variation state is given at 50% both when the first special symbol lottery is won and when the second special symbol lottery is won ( The opening B at which the entrance rate to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is increased is determined at a rate of 50%), and in a state other than the normal state, even if a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, Even in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation state is given 100% (the opening B that increases the entrance rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined 100%). As a result, even if the player accidentally enters the ball into the first entrance 64 in a state other than the normal state, and the player wins a big hit, the ratio of the probability variation state is given. It could be kept the same as the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the determined opening type, the type of the short-time state is also different. Yes. If the ball is passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 with the winning jackpot won in the normal state, a high probability state of a special symbol is given to the next jackpot in addition to the jackpot (that is, the jackpot is relatively It achieves a novel gameplay that lasts 3 times in a short time.

  More specifically, the game is configured to go back and forth between four game states (normal state, short time state, latent state, and probability variation state) with a big hit or the like as a trigger. Among these, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) and the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) are Since the high probability state is set, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again in a short interval, which is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) and short-time state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), the jackpot probability is low. So it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Of the two advantageous game states (latent probability state and probability variation state), the latent probability state is more advantageous for the player. That is, although details will be described later, when a big hit is made in the latent probability state, after the big hit, the latent state is basically set again or the probability change state is set. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. In addition, the rate at which the latent state is set again (latent state is looped) is higher than the rate at which the state changes to the probability changing state. On the other hand, when a big hit is made in the probability variation state, there is a case in which the state shifts to the short time state in addition to the latent probability state and the probability variation state. In addition, the rate of transition to the shorter time state is higher than in the other two gaming states. Therefore, the game state that is set after the big hit in the latent state is basically advantageous to the player, but if the big hit is in the probabilistic state, a time-short state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The ratio is high. Therefore, the latent state becomes a more advantageous state. Thus, in this 2nd Embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides the multiple (2 types) game state from which an advantageous degree differs, and diversifies a state transition and aims at the interest improvement of a player.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that, with respect to the game board 13, the special symbol lottery result is a part of the miss (small hit). A small-award winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter in the event that the ball has entered, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the main control The part process performed by MPU201 of the apparatus 110 is the point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, a small winning prize device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the first entrance 64 in front view. In a substantially central portion of the small hitting prize winning device 650, a horizontally long rectangular hitting prize winning port 650a through which a ball can enter the inside of the small hitting prize winning device 650 is provided. When the ball enters the small hitting prize winning device 650, ten prize balls are paid out. Also, the small winning prize winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the special symbol lottery result is “small hit” which is one mode of losing. This small hit is selected when the game is out of play in the latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol) provided as one of the gaming states in the second embodiment. It becomes easy to be done. In addition, since the small hit is an aspect of losing, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

  Although details will be described later, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, opening B is always set regardless of the jackpot type (probability switch 65e3 is easily connected to a sphere. This is the most advantageous state. However, since the normal symbol is in a low probability state, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the latent state, it is necessary to play a game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to make the first special symbol lottery. That is, it is necessary to play a game by the same game method as the normal state which is the most disadvantageous for the player. Under this circumstance, if the same control as the normal state is made until the big hit, the ball will be reduced until the big hit even though it has shifted to an advantageous latent state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, it is easy to make a small hit. That is, since the small hitting winning opening 650a is easily opened, it becomes easy for a ball that has left-handed and has not entered the first winning opening 64 to enter the small winning winning opening 650a. Therefore, the game in the latent state can be executed without reducing the possessed ball by the prize ball given by the entry. Note that the small winning prize winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been entered) every time a special symbol is drawn.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a firing direction notification effect will be described as an example of a display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. This firing direction notification effect is an effect for notifying the direction in which the player should launch a ball.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entrance to be aimed to make a special symbol lottery) differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state set to the low probability state of the normal symbol and the latent state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is lower than that in the short-time state, and the release period in the case of hitting is shortened, The fluctuation time of normal symbols becomes longer. Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is almost impossible to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. For this reason, in the normal state or the latent state, it is better to make a left-hand strike to enter the ball into the first entry slot 64 and execute the first special symbol lottery than to make a right-hand strike. It is advantageous for the player (the game can be played efficiently by reducing the consumption of balls).

  On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the release period in the case of being hit becomes longer, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, the player can draw the second special symbol without reducing the number of possessed balls by playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Can be executed. Therefore, in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the right strike than to the left strike.

  In the second embodiment, the launch direction of the ball, which is advantageous for the player, can be notified by the launch direction notification effect. By executing this firing direction notification effect, the player can easily understand the firing direction for efficiently playing the game, and can notify the player of the current gaming state. . That is, when the left strike is suggested, the gaming state is a normal state or a latent probability state, and when the right strike is suggested, the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current gaming state according to whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot and the content of the firing direction notification effect. In this embodiment, the firing direction notification effect is not immediately executed after the end of the jackpot, but until a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) execution of the firing direction notification effect. By configuring in this way, the player cannot specify the current gaming state at least until the specific condition is satisfied, so the expectation that an advantageous state is set is continuously maintained. You can hold them.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol display during the period from the end of the jackpot until the start of the firing direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no balls are in the left and right through gates 67). It is the figure which showed an example (avoidance effect) of the display mode displayed on the apparatus. This avoidance effect and the above-described launch direction notification effect are basically executed after the jackpot ends when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a display mode in a period (avoidance period) from when the jackpot is started until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. A balloon 714 is displayed on the right side. This balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the text “Aim at the through gate !!” is displayed inside. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball aiming at one of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13. The condition that “the ball passes through the through gate 67 for the first time” is set to the normal symbol, and until the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the right handing in the high probability state (short-time state) of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the left-handed in the electric symbol associated with the second entrance 640 by winning the normal symbol lottery. This is because 640a is opened and it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides, the normal symbols can be randomly drawn regardless of whether they are right-handed or left-handed. Until the ball hits the normal symbol, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. Therefore, in a period in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further improved by avoiding (delaying) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. Can last long.

  Next, with reference to FIG.58 (b), the display aspect of the launch direction alerting | reporting effect performed when a latent state is provided after a big hit is demonstrated. As described above, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the big hit, it is first detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the latent state, after the big hit, when the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, it is displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character “Lastly entered! Further, the display mode is set as if the pupil of the boy character 710 is burning. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state. Further, if the game can be performed efficiently by executing the left strike, the player can be easily recognized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), the display aspect of the firing direction alerting effect executed when the probability variation state is given after the jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the probability variation state, after a big hit, when a sphere first passes through the left or right through gate 67, it is displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character “Take right”. Further, the shape of the balloon 714 is a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. Thereby, it can be made a player recognize that it shifted to the probability change state which is disadvantageous rather than a latent probability state. Further, if the game can be performed efficiently by performing the right strike, the player can easily recognize it.

  As described above, in the normal symbol high probability state (time-short state), the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. For this reason, even if the launch direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed by passing through the through gate 67 by left-handed, and the normal symbol is hit, the variation of the normal symbol for 3 seconds By making a right strike, the ball can reach the second entrance 640 in accordance with the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released. Therefore, the expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time without damaging the player.

  In the second embodiment, the variation of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot continues to be executed after the jackpot ends, or the normal symbol held during the jackpot is suspended. In order to prevent (suppress) the reserved ball from being digested after the jackpot, the normal symbol variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is composed. With such a configuration, even if the through gate 67 passes through the jackpot, the fluctuation is immediately finished, so that it is difficult to store the normal design of the reserved ball. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the number of normal balls of reserved balls is zero, and the possibility of a variable stop state can be increased.

  If the normal symbol variation at the end of the jackpot is being executed or held, the player loses if the avoidance period is set even though the second entrance 640 is opened. End up. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that the holding ball of the normal symbol is present at the end of the jackpot is reduced. Thereby, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the launch direction notification effect is not executed until the first entry to the through gate 67 is detected after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, the firing direction notification effect can be executed more effectively.

  In addition to shortening the fluctuation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it may be configured to execute an ending effect in a mode that suggests to the player to stop the launch of the ball during the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation where the variation of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot is being executed or the variation of the normal symbol is being held, so the firing direction notification effect is executed more effectively can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the latent return effect that is one aspect of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This latent probability return effect is an effect that is executed when a transition is made from the probability changing state to the latent state without going through the jackpot. Here, the case of shifting from the probability variation state to the latent probability state without passing through the jackpot is a case where the number of time reductions set in the probability variation state is completed. Specifically, when a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Thus, the high probability state of the normal symbol is completed after 50 times. For this reason, after the probability variation state is set, if the big win is not reached until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability of the normal symbol) Probability state). The latent return operation is an effect that is executed at the time of transition from the probability changing state to the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latency return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed over the small areas Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to “latency probability”. The character changes to "Return! Left-handed !!" Further, the display mode is set as if the pupil of the boy character 710 is burning. This display mode allows the player to easily understand that the player has returned to the most advantageous latent state.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect based on having passed through the first through the through gate 67 provided in the left side of the game board 13 after jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect suggested to aim at the left through gate 67 during the avoidance period. With this configuration, when the game state after the big hit is a latent state, it is possible to cause the player to make a left strike that makes it easy to enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be performed efficiently. Even if the game state after the jackpot is in a probable state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left through gate 67 is a win, Even if a hit is made, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently until the electric accessory 640a is released is set, which causes a loss to the player. You can play without playing. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the ending effect of the aspect which suggests returning to the left-handed in the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being launched into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can make it more difficult to lose.

  Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only by passing the ball to the left through gate 67, not only the special winning opening 65a but the small winning winning opening 650a is opened in the final round of the big win. Good. By configuring in this manner, in the final round of jackpot, the player must make a left strike to enter the ball (winning) into the small winning prize opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 Can do. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the player more difficult to lose. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides not the through gate 67 but the exclusive entrance (the entrance for production) used as the trigger of execution of a launch direction alerting | reporting effect in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. FIG. Even when configured in this manner, the same effect as that of executing the firing notification effect with the passage to the left through gate 67 as an opportunity can be achieved.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hit random number table 202f and a time-shortening type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. It has been. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as in the first embodiment, a determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in this embodiment, eight types of jackpot types, "big hit E" to "big hit L", are provided. Among these, “big hit E to H” is a big hit type that can be determined by the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a big hit with eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types is configured such that the combination of the gaming state, the determined opening type, and the time-short state type set after the jackpot is different. The “big hits I to L” are jackpot types that can be determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types is also configured with different combinations of gaming state, opening type to be determined, and time-short state type set after the jackpot. This diversifies the pattern of game state traffic.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 24” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit E”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, “big hit E” The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the gaming state and the number of time savings given will be described later.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit F” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit F”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit F”. The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 89”, “big hit G” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit G”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit G” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Furthermore, “big hit H” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit H”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit H” The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot I is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 24”. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hit I", so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "big hit I" The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit J” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit J”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit J” The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 89”, “big hit K” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit K”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit K” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit L” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit L”, so when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes “big hit L” The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like. In this embodiment, the combination of the opening type determined using these eight types of jackpot types and the type of the short-time state set after the jackpot Are configured differently. This diversifies the pattern of game state traffic.

  Next, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot when the jackpot is won. .

  As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the short time state, and the opening B is set for the latent state and the probability variation state. It is defined in association. Therefore, if the big hit E is made in the normal state or the short time state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is in the latent state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, and the opening B is defined in association with the probability change state. Has been. Therefore, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot F is in the probable state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit G is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, and the opening A is associated with the probability change state. Has been. Therefore, if the jackpot G in the probability variation state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit G is in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, it is easy for a player to be given a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit H, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the short time state, and the opening B is defined in association with the latent state and the probability variation state. ing. Therefore, if a big hit H is obtained in a normal state or a short time state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot H is in the latent state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 61, the “corresponding jackpots I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol respectively define the same correspondence relationship as “big jackpots E to H”. Here, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, by changing the type of opening set according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio that the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is changed to the gaming state It can be varied accordingly.

  Next, the details of the small hit random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not a small hit is made when the special symbol is lost by lottery. A counter value (random number) that is a small hit for each gaming state. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, “0, 11 to 399” is associated as a counter value (random value) that is a small hit in the latent state. Of the 400 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, there are 390 counter values that are small hits, so if a special symbol lottery is executed in a latent state, the probability of being a small hit is 39 / 40 (390/400). For this reason, in the latent state, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the ball can easily enter the small winning prize opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state where it is necessary to make a left-handed game, a game can be performed without reducing the number of possessed balls by a winning ball that is given by entering the small winning winning opening 650a. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, it is possible to entertain the game without worrying about the holding ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the player's latent state. On the other hand, in the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, there is no counter value (random number value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a special symbol lottery is performed, there is no small hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the time-saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. The short time type selection table 202g is a diagram showing the specified contents of the short time type selection table 202g at this time. The short time type selection table 202g is used for selecting the jackpot type and the number of short times according to the gaming state at the time of the big win.

  As shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are defined in association with the time reduction state, the latent accuracy state, and the probability variation state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot E is reached. As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the short time state, the opening A is set so that it is difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol. It becomes. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time-short state, the time-short state is looped. In addition, when the jackpot E is in the latent state and the probability variation state, an opening B that is likely to be given a special symbol high probability state is set, so the state after the big jackpot is a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol High probability state. That is, when the big hit E is obtained in the latent state, the state shifts to a probability change state that is less advantageous than the latent state. On the other hand, if the jackpot E is reached in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped. Further, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state (that is, 0 time reductions are set). As described above, when the big hit E is in the normal state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the big hit is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, when the big hit E is in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are defined in association with the probability variation state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot F is reached. As described above, when the jackpot F is in the probable state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, when the big hit F is in the probability variation state, the advantageous probability variation state shifts to an unfavorable time-short state. Therefore, if the jackpot F is in the probability variation state, it is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state, the time reduction state, and the latent state. As described above, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short-time state, and the latent state, the opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol, And it becomes a low probability state of a normal symbol. That is, when the big hit F is obtained in the normal state, the short time state, and the latent state, the state shifts to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot G is reached, 100 times are specified in association with the time reduction state and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot G is in the short-time state and the probability variation state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol High probability state. That is, when the big hit G is achieved in the short-time state, the short-time state is looped, and when the big hit G is obtained in an advantageous probability change state, the state shifts to an unfavorable time-short state. In addition, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot is G in the normal state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, the normal state is looped. On the other hand, when the big hit G is in the latent state, the opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol and a low probability state of the normal symbol. Become. That is, when the big hit G is in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63, the number of time reductions given when the jackpot H is reached is defined in association with 20 times for the time reduction state. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the short time state, the opening A is set so that the special symbol high probability state is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol high probability state. It becomes. Therefore, when the big hit H in the time-short state, the time-short state is looped. On the other hand, the number of time reductions is not defined for the normal state, the latent state, and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot is H in the normal state, the opening A is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is not easily given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol It becomes. That is, the normal state is looped. In addition, when the jackpot H is in the latent state and the probability variation state, an opening B that is likely to be given a high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol Low probability state. In other words, the most advantageous latent state is set when the big hit H is obtained in the latent state and the probability variation state.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 63, regarding “big hits I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as “big hits E to H” is defined respectively. Here, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings given after the jackpot is configured to differ according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Thereby, the advantageous jackpot type is varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, since the player can expect different jackpot types depending on the game state, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment of the subject has a winning state storage area 203t and an initial entry flag 203s in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. In addition, a probability variation flag 203u is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment.

  The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u indicating whether or not the probability variation state is in effect at the start of the jackpot, and the time-shortage counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time reductions are reset. For this reason, the state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (when newly setting the number of time reductions) cannot be specified from the respective values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / mid-time counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is won, the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / counter counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t and then reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). . At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of times saved is selected from the time-saving type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With this configuration, it is possible to accurately set the number of time reductions from the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a special symbol has a high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit after the big hit ends. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the number of times of probability change is limited to 50 times. However, in the second embodiment, the number of times of probability change is indefinite. Therefore, instead of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, the probability variation counter 203u is provided, and when the probability variation flag 203u is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and when it is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. It was. The probability variation flag 203u is set to ON if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the big hit (see S1211 in FIG. 69). It is also set off at the beginning of the jackpot.

  The initial entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not it is an avoidance period (a state where the first entry to the through gate 67 is not completed) set after the end of the jackpot. When the entrance to the through gate 67 is detected in a state where the initial entrance flag 203s is on, an initial entrance command is set from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 (FIG. 68). (See S612). The voice lamp control device 113 executes the launch suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) when this first ball entry command is received and the special symbol has a high probability state. . The initial entry flag 203s is set to ON at the end of the big hit (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF after setting the initial entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, any one of the normal state, the short time state, the latent state, and the probability change state is set when the jackpot is ended or when the number of time reductions is ended. The The normal state and the short-time state are disadvantageous for the player because the probability of a big hit is low. Among these, in the short-time state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and a right-handed game can be played efficiently, so the short-time state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are advantageous to the player because there is a high probability of being a big hit, and there is a high possibility that a big hit will be made continuously in a short period of time. Among these, in the latent state, the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, which is more advantageous to the player than the probability changing state in which the opening A is set in a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state becomes the most advantageous gaming state.

  First, the transition method of the game state in the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state that is set when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and is basically a gaming state that stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, there is a possibility that another gaming state is set with a jackpot as an opportunity. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and no short time period is given (see FIG. 63), the latent state is set after the big hit by passing the probability changing switch 65e3 during the big hit. On the other hand, when the other jackpot type (big hit E to H) that can be determined by lottery of special symbols is reached, the opening A that makes it difficult to flow the ball down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined (FIG. 61). (Refer to FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the jackpot. Even when the big hit F is obtained, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 because the ball is not launched in the first round or the like. On the other hand, even when the big hit E to H is reached, if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent state after the big hit.

  Next, a game state transition method in the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, there is a possibility that another gaming state may be set in response to the jackpot as in the normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and 50 short time periods are given. Therefore (see FIG. 63), the probability variation state is set after the jackpot by passing the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, it falls (rank down) to a state where the degree of advantage is small. On the other hand, when another jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H) is entered, opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but a short time period is not given (see FIG. 63). By passing through 65e3, the latent state is set again after the big hit. That is, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is looped. As described above, the latent state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit is made and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to, for example, not hitting the ball in the first round of the jackpot E, the time shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot. Similarly, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of jackpot F, G, H, it falls to the normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, a game state transition method in the probability variation state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probable change state, not only the game state is shifted to another gaming state as a trigger, but also the game state is shifted to another gaming state at a trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of times is reduced). . Specifically, in the case of a big hit J, K determined at a rate of 65% when a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, it is difficult to make the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and 50 or 100 time-saving periods are given according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 63), so the system basically shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when a big hit L is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but a short time period is not given (see FIG. 63), by passing the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the latent state is set after the big hit. That is, it is possible to return to the most advantageous latent state from the probability variation state with a low degree of advantage. In addition, in the probability variation state, if the set 50 short time periods can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is lost 50 times in succession), the latent probability state is the same as in the case of the big hit L. Can be restored. If it is possible to return to the latent state, the opening B is always set at the next jackpot, which means that the jackpot number is substantially increased by at least one. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, even if a fall from the latent probability state to the probability variation state is expected, the game is expected to return to the latent probability state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable state of the player.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and 50 short time periods are given. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is basically looped.

  Thus, in the probability variation state, it is advantageous in that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the short-time state, but when the jackpot hits, it shifts to the short-time state with a high probability (65%) and a low jackpot probability. End up. For this reason, in the probability variation state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the short-term period will end and return to the latent probability state rather than a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will be continuously lost in a lottery of special symbols. Also, when the jackpot J, K in the probability variation state, it is possible to shift to the short time state instead of transitioning to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that after the loop of the latent probability state and the probability variation state ends However, it can be made to think that the game will continue at least until the short time period ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the game state transition method in the short time state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the upper right part of FIG. 65, in the short-time state, in the same way as the probability change state, not only does it shift to another gaming state as a trigger, but also a trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of short-terms ends), etc. Transition to the gaming state.

  Specifically, when the jackpot determined in the second special symbol lottery becomes a jackpot J determined at a rate of 50%, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61). Not given (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is achieved in the short-time state, the state is basically shifted to the most advantageous latent state. In the time reduction state, when the time reduction period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is I, K, or L by lottery of the second special symbol during the short time state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61) and 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times depending on the jackpot type The short time period is set (see FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L won in the time reduction state, the time reduction state basically loops.

  In this way, when a big hit is made in the short-time state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the short-time state is looped, the short-time period set as the short-time state ends. Until then, at least the player can be reminded to continue the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Moreover, when it shifts to a latent state after a big hit, the player can have a great satisfaction.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, by changing the rate at which opening B is set according to the gaming state, the rate at which the high probability state of the special symbol is given according to the gaming state is changed. Yes. As a result, it is possible to provide a latent state where a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the jackpot ends. As a result, when the big hit F in the normal state shifts to the latent state, the big hit F, the big hit E in the latent state that shifts after the big hit F, and the probability change that moves after the big hit E A total of three jackpots with jackpot J or K in the state is guaranteed. Therefore, once in the latent state, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction due to the fact that at least three jackpot prize balls are guaranteed.

  In the latent state, the same state is looped with a high probability (75%) in the case of a big hit, so if the transition from the normal state to the latent state can be made, the big hit and the high probability of big hit It becomes easy to repeat the state. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a larger amount of prize balls to be obtained, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, even if the player has fallen into the probability variation state due to the big hit E in the latent probability state, if the disconnection can be continued 50 times in the certain probability variation state, the latent probability state can be restored. Therefore, since it can be expected that the discontinuity continues in the probability variation state, novel playability can be provided.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are the same. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern and the like.

  Of the variation start process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, in each process of S201 to S218 and S221 to S223, S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S221 to S223 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the process of S216 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. A small hit determination process for starting a win is executed (S231), and the process proceeds to S217. Details of the small hit determination process (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S217, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S217: Yes), the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the hour / short counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process proceeds to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and set an appropriate short time period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the small hit determination process (S231) described above will be described. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current special symbol is a small hit (S241). In the process of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small winning prize winning opening 650a, the small hitting prize winning device 650 is set so that the ball can enter. After the process of S242, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small winning winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent state. Accordingly, since the ball holding can be improved in the most advantageous latent state, the player's motivation for the game in the latent state can be improved.

  Next, the through gate passage process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. This through-gate passing process 2 (S112) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29). 67 is a process for detecting the passage of a sphere to 67 and executing the corresponding control.

  Of the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, the processes of S601 to S605 are the same as the processes of S601 to S605 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the initial entrance flag 203v is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S611). That is, it is determined whether the avoidance period is set after the end of the jackpot, and if the initial entry flag 203v is on (if it is an avoidance period), an initial entry command is set (S612), and the initial entry The flag 203v is set to OFF (S613), and the process proceeds to S602. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the initial ball entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S602.

  The first entry command set by the processing of S612 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first entry command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the execution of the firing direction notification effect on the condition that the special symbol is in a short time state. After the jackpot is over, the game state set after the jackpot is a latent state or a probability change state by avoiding the execution of the firing direction notification effect until the ball passes through the through gate 67 for the first time. This can make it difficult for players to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that an advantageous latent state is set longer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) will be described. This jackpot end process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting the game state after the big hit according to the situation.

  Of the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, the processes in S1201 and S1205 are the same as the processes in S1201 and S1205 in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S1212 (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is OFF (S1201: No), the process of S1211 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1212.

  In the processing of S1212, the number of time reductions corresponding to the gaming state specified by the data stored in the winning time state storage area 203t is read from the time reduction type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time reduction medium counter 203r. (S1212). Next, a state command is set based on the probability change flag 203u updated in each process of S1211, and S1212, and each value of the hour / minute counter 203r.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the probability change state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1205 ends, the first ball entry flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and this process ends. Thereby, an avoidance period can be set after the end of jackpot.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 (S1621) executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination process 2 (S1621) is a process for determining a command received from the main controller 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the command determination processing 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in steps S1701 to S1709 and S1711 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1713 is executed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1709 that a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709: Yes), the contents of the status command are changed. A status command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process ends. Details of the status command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Furthermore, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1711 that a jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), the first incoming command is then issued. It is discriminated whether or not it has been received (S1722), and if the first pitching command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first pitching process for setting the effect according to the current gaming state is executed (S1723), This process ends. Details of the first ball entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the state command process (S1721) described above will be described with reference to FIG. When this state command process is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902). If it is determined in the process of S3902 that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), it is then determined whether the time reduction state flag 223f is on (S3903). If it is determined that the short time state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state notified by the current state command is a latent state (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the notified gaming state is the latent probability state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probability change state has returned to the latent probability state, so the latent probability return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (see (b)), the player is informed that the player has returned to the latent state (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the player has shifted from an advantageous probability change state to a more advantageous latent probability state, which can please the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is off in the process of S3902 (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223f is off in the process of S3903 (S3903: No), If it is determined in the process of S3904 that a gaming state other than the latent state has been notified (S3904: No), it is not a case of returning from the probability change state to the latent state, so the process of S3905 is skipped and the process is performed. The process shifts to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the short time state flag 223f are updated in accordance with the state command notified from the main controller 110, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-described initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described. When the first ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time-short state flag 223f are read (S4001). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), this timing is terminated because it is not the timing for executing the firing direction notification effect. To return to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), it is then determined whether the short time state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the short time state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the current gaming state is a probable change state and the avoidance period has ended. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right strike (see FIG. 59 (a)), a display right strike effect command is set (S4004), and this process ends. The display right-handed effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts a firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 59A) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the right-handed effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223f is OFF (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is the latent state and the avoidance period has ended, so the firing direction Among the notification effects, in order to execute the effect of notifying the left strike (see FIG. 58B), a display left-handed effect command is set (S4005), and this process is terminated. The left-handed display command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display left-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 58B) in a mode in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the left-handed effect.

  As described above, by executing the first ball entry process (S1723), it is possible to notify an appropriate launch direction in which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of game states including two types of game states (probability change state and latent probability state) that are advantageous to the player. In the most advantageous latent state, it is configured to be able to shift to another gaming state only with a jackpot, and the transition destination is basically in a probable state. With this configuration, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, a high probability state of a special symbol will be set after a big hit at least twice consecutively, including the latent state, so a short period of time With multiple hits, you can make multiple hits. Therefore, since a large amount of prize balls can be acquired in a short period of time, the player's interest in games can be improved. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probability variation state is set again when the latent probability state is set again when the latent probability state is a big hit, or when the probability variation state is a big hit. It is set as the structure which provides. In other words, the number of consecutive jackpots in the latent state is varied depending on the player's luck. By configuring in this way, it is difficult to predict how many times the high probability state and jackpot of the special symbol will be repeated, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, even when the state shifts from the latent state to the low-advantage state, the latent portion is lost when a part of the big hit (big hit I) and a short time period have elapsed. It is configured to be able to return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it becomes an advantageous state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set again after a big hit at least twice in succession, so that the player can be pleased. Furthermore, in this second embodiment, in order to make it difficult to know which gaming state has been entered when the game is shifted to the latent probability state or the probability variation state after the big hit, the gaming state (ball launch direction) is changed. It is set as the structure which delays execution of the effect to alert | report (fire direction alerting effect) rather than the time of the end of jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is over, until the first pass through the through gate 67, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided, and when it is first detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, It is set as the structure which performs the launch direction alerting | reporting effect of the aspect according to a state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more unclear whether it is in the latent state or in the probable state. Can be performed.

  Further, when the opening A is set (that is, disadvantageous) in the probability variation state (ie, the jackpot J, K), a short time period is given after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state (latent probability state, probability variation state) of the special symbol is completed, it is configured not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the game is continued at least until the short time period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the short time state, it is basically configured not to fall to the normal state. That is, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the time-short state is basically looped or shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the short-time state is looped, it is possible to make the player think that the game is continued at least until the short-time period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the state shifts to the latent state, the player can have a great satisfaction.

  In the second embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by a special symbol lottery in the latent state is increased, and the hit often occurs. Thereby, the ball holding in the latent state is improved and the player's motivation in the latent state is suppressed from being reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, a jackpot type with a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, if the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the latent state is a big win, the second special symbol that is likely to be executed in the probable state while the 15th round is likely to be determined. In the lottery, it is possible to make it easy to determine the 8-round jackpot. With this configuration, in the latent state, it is easy to decrease the number of balls held by left-handed hitting, but the probability of a big hit is high, and if a big hit is achieved, more prize balls can be acquired. It can be advantageous for the player even if the badness is taken into account. Furthermore, by configuring the 15th round to be easily selected in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to allow the player to select a gaming method for making a left strike in the probability variation state. In other words, in a probabilistic state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long, a right-handed hit makes it possible to aim for a big hit of 8 rounds without reducing the holding ball. By left-handed, the ball holding will be worse, but it will be easy to get 15 rounds if hit (high profit if hit with a small number of lotteries, but may lose if continued to lose) ) The game can be selected by the player. Thereby, the game according to each player's taste can be provided.

  In the second embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot continues until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which restricts the frequency | count of probability change to 100 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension even in an advantageous latent state or probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. In the second embodiment, the normal symbol time-shortening period is set to 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where a time-short period continues until it becomes the next jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol may continue together until the next jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the first control command is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the first input to the through gate 67 is detected. . The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the first entry command is configured to execute the firing direction notification effect according to the gaming state when the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state. I can't. For example, when the main control device 110 discriminates to the gaming state and executes the firing direction notification effect (after passing the big hit, the passage of the through gate 67 is detected first, and the gaming state is a latent state or a probability change) The first entry command may be output only in the case of a state). Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Moreover, the output frequency of the first entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a ball passes through the through gate 67, and whether or not the sound lamp control device 113 is the first pass. The current gaming state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the firing direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not it is the first time on the main control device 110 side, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first entry flag 203v and the processing of the main control device 110 is performed. The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent state or the probability variation state is set after the big hit, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67. The execution condition is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect when it hits a normal symbol, and a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | presentation effect when a ball | bowl passes the through gate 67 predetermined times (for example, 3 times). It is good. Also, by combining these, a firing direction notification effect is executed when either a normal symbol is hit or a ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It is good also as a structure. In addition, for example, after a big hit, a firing direction notification effect corresponding to the gaming state may be executed after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Further, for example, instead of providing an avoidance period, as a mode of launch direction notification effect, after a big hit, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the direction to fire. Also good. Here, the aspect in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, for example, is an aspect in which characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed as fine characters, and the characters are enlarged over time. Even in the case of these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the state is a latent state or a probability change state, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's sense of expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time. .

  In the second embodiment, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided (delayed) as an effect during the avoidance period. The production mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, notification may be given so that the left gate is aimed at the through gate 67 regardless of the gaming state. By configuring in this way, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is prevented (suppressed) that the first special symbol lottery is not easily executed by making a right-hand hit during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, even if left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol is hit. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left strike during the avoidance period, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently regardless of whether the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state.

  In the second embodiment, a latent state and a probability change state are provided as advantageous gaming states, and the latent state is set to the most advantageous state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, the time variation period is provided at a rate of 75% (that is, the probability variation state easily loops). To be configured). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot is J, K, L (allocation 75%) in the probability variation state, an opening B is set and a short time period is given, resulting in a jackpot I (allocation 25%) In this case, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given (shift to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent state, the opening A may be set with a majority of jackpot types (for example, at a rate of 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpot F, G (allocation 65%), an opening A is set and a short time period is given (that is, it falls to the short time state), and the jackpot E (allocation 25) %) Is configured such that opening B is set and a short time period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped), and in big hit H (sort 10%), opening B is set and a short time period is set. You may comprise so that it may be provided (that is, it returns to a probability change state). With this configuration, the probability variation state can be set to the most advantageous gaming state, contrary to the second embodiment. Moreover, in this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect which alert | reports left-handed in the avoidance period after transfering to a latent probability state or a probability change state. By configuring in this way, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is prevented (suppressed) that the first special symbol lottery is not easily executed by making a right-hand hit during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, even if left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol is hit. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left strike during the avoidance period, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently regardless of whether the gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state. Furthermore, when a right-handed strike is notified when a ball enters the through gate 67, it means that the state has shifted to the most favorable probability change state (or looped). Then, by making it think that it has shifted to the latent state (or looped), it is possible to amplify the joy of the player shifting to the state of probability change (or looping).

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 for the first time, it is determined which game state of the latent probability state or the probability variation state has been shifted by the firing direction notification effect. Although it is set as the structure which alert | reports with respect to a player, the alerting | reporting timing of a gaming state is not restricted to this. For example, when passing through the probability change switch 65e3, a gaming state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted and notified from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t. Thereby, a game state can be notified to a player at an early stage. Further, for example, a configuration in which a gaming state after a big hit is notified during execution of a predetermined big hit (for example, the eighth round) or a big hit ending effect may be adopted.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the firing direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a firing direction alerting | reporting effect based on having passed through the first through the through gate 67 provided in the left side of the game board 13 after jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of the aspect suggested to aim at the left through gate 67 during the avoidance period. With this configuration, when the game state after the big hit is a latent state, it is possible to cause the player to make a left strike that makes it easy to enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be performed efficiently. Even if the game state after the jackpot is in a probable state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left through gate 67 is a win, Even if a hit is made, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently until the electric accessory 640a is released is set, which causes a loss to the player. You can play without playing. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the ending effect of the aspect which suggests returning to the left-handed in the jackpot ending period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being launched into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can make it more difficult to lose. Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only by passing the ball to the left through gate 67, not only the special winning opening 65a but the small winning winning opening 650a is opened in the final round of the big win. Good. By configuring in this manner, in the final round of jackpot, the player must make a left strike to enter the ball (winning) into the small winning prize opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 Can do. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the player more difficult to lose. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides not the through gate 67 but the exclusive entrance (the entrance for production) used as the trigger of execution of a launch direction alerting | reporting effect in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. FIG. Even when configured in this manner, the same effect as that of executing the firing notification effect with the passage to the left through gate 67 as an opportunity can be achieved.

  In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but is not limited to this. For example, the short time state may be more advantageous than the latent state. More specifically, for example, it is configured such that the difference between the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is reduced (for example, 1/50 at the low probability, high probability) Time is 1/49). If the first special symbol is a lottery, the percentage of winning jackpot types with a small number of winning balls can be increased (for example, the number of rounds is “big hit α”, “big hit” β ”can be determined), and in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery, so that the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that can win a large number of winning balls is increased (for example, the number of rounds is 15 rounds of “big hit γ” and “big hit δ” can be determined). Then, in the normal state in which a left-handed game is played and “big hit α” is reached, opening A is set, and 100 short time periods are set. That is, it is configured so that it is easy to shift to a time-saving state in which a jackpot type that can acquire a lot of prize balls is easily determined (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed). On the other hand, when “big hit β” is obtained in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so that it is easy to shift to a latent state where a big hit type with few award balls is easily determined (the first special symbol lottery is easily executed). Further, in the short-time state in which a game is played by right-handed, an opening A is set when “big hit γ” is reached, and a short-time period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time-short state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time reduction state becomes “big hit δ”, the opening B is set, and 100 time reduction periods are given. That is, it is configured such that a relatively advantageous probability change state in which a game is played with a right hand is easily set. As a result, when a big hit is made in the short-time state, the short-time state or the probability variation state in which a right-handed game is basically performed is set, which is most advantageous for the player. Further, when “big hit δ” is obtained in the probability variation state, an opening B is set, and 100 short time periods are given. That is, a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played with a right hand is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when “big hit δ” is obtained in the probability variation state, the opening B is set, but the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so that an unfavorable latent state in which a left-handed game is played is easily set. As a result, the probability variation state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, but since it may shift to an unfavorable latent state after the big hit, it is less advantageous than the short-time state. Can do. Further, when the game is left-handed and the game is “big hit α” in the latent state, the opening A is set and 100 short time periods are given. That is, it is configured to be able to shift to the most advantageous time-short state. On the other hand, when “big hit β” is obtained in the latent state, the opening A is set, and the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured such that an unfavorable normal state in which a left-handed game is played is easily set. As described above, the short-time state can be most advantageous by changing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the combination of the game state, the opening type, and the correspondence between time and short-term. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a player can be pleased by shifting to a time-short state rather than shifting to a probability change state or a latent probability state that is generally advantageous. . In addition, in the normal state or the latent state unfavorable to the player, when the opening B is set to the big hit, it is configured not to be given a short time period. An anomalous gaming method that aims to shift to a short-time state without intentionally launching a ball with the eyes can be fundamentally disabled. More specifically, assuming that the opening B is set to be a jackpot and a short time period is given, only a short time period is set after the jackpot by deliberately not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. The most advantageous time reduction state is set. In other words, if an irregular gaming method is performed when a big hit is made in an unfavorable state, there is a problem that the time-saving state is surely set. On the other hand, when opening B is set, it is configured not to give a short time period, so that even if an irregular gaming method is performed in the first round, only the normal state is set, The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method.

  Further, in the case where the short time state is the most advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state may not be provided. In other words, the game state transition method in the normal state or the latent state may be left as it is, and when the big hit is made in the short time state, the time state may basically be looped or may be shifted to the latent state. More specifically, the opening A is set when the “big hit γ” is obtained in the time-saving state, and 100 time-saving periods are set. That is, the most advantageous time-short state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when “short hit δ” is reached in the short time state, the opening B is set, and the short time period is not given. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to an unfavorable latent state. With this configuration, even if the player does not deliberately launch a ball in the first round when the player hits a “big hit δ” in the short-time state, the player does not shift to an advantageous state (the short-time period Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method that does not intentionally launch a ball in the first round. In other words, irregular gaming methods can be suppressed in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent state, and the short time state. Also, since the short-time state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the short-time state rather than shifting to the latent state that is generally advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel gameability that can be done.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent probability state or the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, it is good also as a structure which provides the case where a firing direction alerting effect is performed immediately after the end of jackpot, and the case where a firing direction alerting effect is performed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set may be higher when the latent state is set than when the probability variation state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for a more advantageous latent state when the avoidance period is set.

<Variation of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it was set as the structure which goes back and forth in four game states, a normal state, a time-short state, a latent probability state, and a probability change state.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, three game states of the normal state, the short time state, and the probability change state are used. In the probability variation state, a loop is performed when a big hit is made, or an advantageous time-short state is set compared to the normal state. In addition, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the time-short state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is looped, or the most advantageous change state is restored in this modification. By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state and the short time state, even if a big hit is made, there is basically no transition to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the game can be performed with peace of mind.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a game state transition method in a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, when the jackpot F is won in the first special symbol lottery (and the jackpot J is won in the second special symbol lottery), the probability change state is substituted for the latent state. Except for the transition to, the gaming state transition method is the same as in the second embodiment. In other words, when the jackpot F in the normal state (and the jackpot J), the time-shortening type selection table 202g basically gives a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the opening B is set even though the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set, the time-saving type selection table so that 100 time-saving periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  Even in the short-time state, if the jackpot J is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (and if the jackpot F is lottery in the lottery of the first special symbol), it shifts to the probability changing state instead of the latent probability state. The game state transition method is the same as that of the second embodiment. That is, when the jackpot J (and the jackpot F becomes a big hit F) in the short-time state, the short-time type selection table 202g basically gives a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. Note that if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 even though the opening B is set even though the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set, the time-saving type selection table so that 100 time-saving periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  In the probability variation state, the most advantageous probability variation state is obtained when the jackpot J, K, L is obtained in the second special symbol lottery (and the jackpot F, G, H is achieved in the first special symbol lottery). It has been changed to loop. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set in any case when the jackpot J, K, L is reached in the probability variation state (and the jackpot F, G, H is reached). . Further, if the jackpot is J, K, or L (and jackpot F, G, or H) and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set. , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H), and if the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, the time-shortening type selection table 202g is changed so that 100 time-shortening periods are set. Has been.

  In addition, in the probability variation state, when the jackpot I is won in the second special symbol lottery (and when the jackpot E is lottery in the first special symbol lottery), the state shifts to the short-time state. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set when the jackpot I is reached (and the jackpot E is reached) in the probability variation state. When the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is passed and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is set, and the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. When the sphere does not pass, the time reduction type selection table 202g is changed so that 50 time reduction periods are set.

  In this way, the game state transition method shown in FIG. 73 can be used, and the probability variation state can be set to the most advantageous state among the three states of the normal state, the time reduction state, and the probability variation state. And when it is a big hit in the probability variation state, it can be configured to basically loop the probability variation state or shift to the time reduction state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most adverse normal state when an unfavorable jackpot (big hit I) is obtained in the probability variation state, so that the player's motivation for the game is reduced when the probability variation state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately (so-called instant mess). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit is made in the time-short state, the state is returned to the probability variation state or the time-short state loops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress falling to the most disadvantageous normal state when an unfavorable jackpot (bonus I, K, L) is achieved in a short time state, so when the probability variation state ends Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced and that the player immediately quits the game (so-called instant mess). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As described above, the modification of the second embodiment is configured to shift to the time-saving state when the jackpot type is disadvantageous in the probability variation state or the time-saving state. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the entrance opening provided on the board surface, and when a ball enters the specific area, Some of them are given a privilege game that is advantageous to the user. As for the award game, only the award game is given (the added value after the award game is not given), and the added value after the award game is advantageous to the player in the gaming state over the normal gaming state. There is a game provided with a second privilege game set in such an advantageous game state. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the entrance with a specific area inside, so once the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made, the privilege game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. This makes it very advantageous for the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous gaming state, the player falls down to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. Therefore, when the normal gaming state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when an advantageous probability change state ends, the fall to the most disadvantageous normal state is prevented, and a time reduction state that is relatively advantageous over the normal state is set. Since it becomes the structure which becomes easy, even if an advantageous probability change state is complete | finished, it can be made to think that a game will be continued until a time-short state is complete | finished. Therefore, since it can prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation with respect to a game falls, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment and the modification of the second embodiment, the advantageous jackpot type is changed according to the gaming state. However, the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type may be fixed. . More specifically, for example, jackpot F and jackpot J may be advantageous jackpot types, and other jackpot types may be disadvantageous jackpot types. In the normal state or in the short time state, it becomes a configuration that shifts to a latent probability state (probability variation state in the modified example) by becoming a jackpot F, J, and a configuration that loops the same state by becoming another jackpot type Also good. Further, in the latent state, a configuration in which the latent state is looped by hitting the jackpot F, J may be configured, and a configuration in which the state is shifted to the probability changing state by being in another jackpot type may be employed. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be configured to loop by hitting the jackpots F and J, and may be configured to shift to the short time state by becoming another jackpot type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an advantageous jackpot type and an unfavorable jackpot type are easily understood.

  In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the game state (latent probability state or probability variation state) that is advantageous in the case of a big hit in the short time state, or the short time state is looped However, the gaming state that is set in the case of a big win in the short time state is not limited to this. For example, an opening B may be set whenever a big hit is made in a short time state. In other words, it may be configured to be able to always return to an advantageous gaming state by winning a jackpot before the short-term period elapses. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more strongly expect a big hit before the time-short period elapses, so that the interest of the player in the time-short state can be further improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the variable prize winning device 65 is provided with the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, and passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the big hit. In this case, a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol is given, but this is not a limitation. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not a special symbol high probability state is given after the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, instead of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set by referring to this data table when the jackpot ends. It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, the same effects as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the same operation is set for the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type or gaming state. However, the opening period can be varied according to the jackpot type or gaming state. Instead of or in addition, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be varied according to the jackpot type or gaming state. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the above embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of design freedom can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the high probability state of the special symbol continues without limitation as long as it continues to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. However, a limit may be provided for the number of consecutive times. Specifically, for example, the number of times that the high probability state of a special symbol is set continuously is counted, and when the number of consecutive times reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times), the probability is changed with the next jackpot. The passage of the switch 65e3 is invalid (203h is not turned on even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, or the probability variation counter 203g or the probability variation flag 203u is not updated even if the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on). . In addition, a special gaming state is provided in which the flow path solenoid 65k does not change even when the jackpot is reached (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is not opened during the jackpot), and the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol is a specific number of times. When it becomes (for example, 5 times), it is good also as a structure which transfers to the game state which the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate | move. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the high probability state of the special symbol from being excessively continued, thereby preventing (suppressing) giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game state (normal state, short-time state, latent state, probability variation state) is configured to go back and forth with a jackpot or the like. Among the four game states, the latent state is In order to be most advantageous to the player, when winning a jackpot in the latent state, the gaming state set after the jackpot is over, compared to winning the jackpot when other gaming states are set As described above, a game state advantageous to the player is easily set.

  In order to realize the technical idea that the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the configuration described in each of the above-described embodiments, that is, the transition rate of the gaming state set after the big hit is different. For example, the player may be configured such that a privilege (for example, a prize ball or the like) given to the player in the game when the latent state is set is maximized.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 149, as a third embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called) Furthermore, in order to make the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is more effective than the first special symbol lottery. The lottery is easier to win a small hit. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the latent state is set as the gaming state is configured to be shorter than when the other gaming state is set. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, among a plurality of gaming states (normal state, latent state, probability variation state) that can be transferred with a jackpot or the like as a trigger, the latent state may be most advantageous for the player. it can.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 74, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, general prize The mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 670, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is formed. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by the router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 75) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 74) to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 74) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 74). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the third embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a winning is made in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the third embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the big hit probability is a normal state, and the big hit probability remains as it is, and only the second symbol hit probability is increased, and the second entrance. 1640 means a game state in which a ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 1640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 1640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the time of probability change and time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 1640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 1640a is released at the time and once the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is released. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the time of probability change or during a short period of time, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 or the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is released per time is not shown. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, The third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) for displaying the variation of the third symbol, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 projects into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 75). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 75) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so as to alternately turn on and off for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the third embodiment, the symbol “◯”). Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 1640a of the second entrance 1640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 1640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 1640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 1640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 670 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the third embodiment, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and You may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 1640 is disposed to the right of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 1640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made on the device 110 (see FIG. 75), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance where three balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball wins (enters), and the second entrance 1640 receives a winning (entry) ball. Then, one ball is one of the winning holes to be paid out as a prize ball. In the third embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 is different from the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 1640. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 1640 (for example, both 5 You may comprise.

  Further, the second entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a. The electric combination 1640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes to the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state) and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during normal change and during the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is shorter than that during normal variation. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. In addition, during the time when the probability is changing or the time is short, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where a ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball is won at the second entrance 1640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is greater when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 than when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 1640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 1640, and is in the state where a ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 1640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the left 64 (so-called “left-handed”), and a large winning lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is easily opened, and the second entrance 1640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 1640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”) and passes through the second through gate 67. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 1640a and aim to win the 15R probability variation by winning the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment allows the player to play the ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being prone to change, being short in time, or in the normal state). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper side of the second entrance 1640, and on the right side thereof, an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the variable winning device 65 when it is closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or five balls are won).

  The opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side with the opening / closing plate 65f1 preventing the entrance to the entrance portion (specific winning port 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). Normally, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the position above the second entrance 1640, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Out board 66 is provided in game board 13. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  In the present embodiment, the game board 13 has only one out port (out port 66). However, a plurality of out ports may be provided. For example, the right side area of the game board 13 ( For example, the second out port 66a may be provided on the right side of the second entrance 1640). With this configuration, it is necessary to provide a configuration (flow path) for causing the ball that has flowed down the game board 13 to flow toward one place (out port 66) in order to guide the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown). Therefore, the game area of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 2020 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 2020 is executed. A certain RAM 2030 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 2030 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 2030 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 2030 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off (including the time of power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the values of the registers are stored in the RAM 2030. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 2030. Writing to the RAM 2030 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 2030 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing rightward as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 2220 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 2230 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, a motor, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 149. In the third embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol), and a latent state ( Three game states are provided: a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the variation time of the variation display executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is made shorter than other game states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds). The normal symbol normal state (low probability state) and the normal symbol short-time state (high probability state) are configured so that the normal symbol hit probability is approximately equivalent (231/240 → 232/240). The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of winning the normal symbol is common (1 second × 2 times). Thereby, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second entrance 1640 rather than hitting the ball toward the first entrance 64 (so-called left-handed). (So-called “right-handed”) makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball will enter the second entrance 1640. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  In the third embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the special winning opening 65a is a predetermined period (1.648 seconds × 1 time, 0.06 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times) in a part of the losing. ) Opened. For this reason, even if it is not a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous over the lottery of the first special symbol because it gives a lot of opportunities to win the prize ball by entering the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the off-lottery result in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as “small hit”.

  In addition to the big win in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65a is opened even when a small win is achieved, thereby increasing the number of prize balls in a latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short Can continue to. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of a latent state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and the probability variation state, since the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, the frequency at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened due to a big hit or a small hit is a latent probability state. Compared to the drastically reduced. Therefore, in the normal state or the probability variation state, even if a right hand is made, more balls are used for the game than the prize balls. Therefore, it is more advantageous to perform left handing in the normal state or the probability variation state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state. However, in this embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  In the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the other variation display from being confirmed and displayed with the hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit starting in duplicate.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, the details of the variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76, the second through gate 67 is disposed on the right side of the center frame 86, and the variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. A ball may reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player makes a right strike. In FIG. 76, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided in front of the variable winning device 65 in front of the front view is deleted and illustrated. (CLXXIX part in FIG. 76).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b). 77 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detecting opening 65a1 configured with a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing plate 65f1 and in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). And variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening / closing plate 65f1, and a sphere can flow down the right side of the opening / closing plate 65f1. In the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to open toward the right of the front view by opening the opening of the specific winning opening 65a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 as viewed from the front, toward the second winning port 1640 side. It is configured to be induced. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, a game ball is entered into the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is possible to achieve the winning ball by making the ball enter the ball simply by making a right-hand hit. Accordingly, the player can play the game more easily in the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later. The structure to be described will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 77 (a), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 77 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left in the front view (the flow path side where the sphere flows down). It is a figure which shows the state which has block | closed the opening surface.

  When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the sorting channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and the switching member 65h prevents the special discharging channel 65e2 from flowing down. It is guided to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out spheres discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as out spheres from the normal discharge flow path 65e1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 77 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by operating the flow path solenoid 65k and immersing the switching member 65h rightward in front view. .

  As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the V pass switch 65e3 which is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is used as an out ball. It is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the sum of the out balls detected by the V passing switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit is a probable change state of the special symbol (the game state after the big hit is passed through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit game ( Probability change state or latent probability state). In other words, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a special symbol certain variation state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability state or the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. In this embodiment, the switching member 65h is operated for 4 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow that continues to the V-pass switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

  In this way, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the specific winning port 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection port 65a1, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball winning). 15 prize balls can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball detected by the detection port 65a1, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the V passing switch 65e3, so that whether or not to give a special symbol probability changing state. A lottery can also be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a special symbol probability changing state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one big hit and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot is made variable according to the jackpot type, thereby making it easy to flow the sphere down the special discharge flow path 65e2. In the third embodiment, two types of patterns are provided as the opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing plate 65f1 (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern that makes it easy to enter).

  FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the OFF state before one round of jackpot is started. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 77 (a)). This off state continues until one round starts. When the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 77 (a)). When the four-second on-state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again (the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1). To be kept.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the big hit C is reached, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. This open state continues only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until the elapsed time from the start of one round reaches 2.9 seconds. The opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again when 2.9 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round. This open state continues only for 0.1 seconds, and thereafter, the first round ends, and the open / close plate 65f1 is kept closed until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. In addition, one round in this embodiment is complete | finished when three balls pass after ten balls enter into the specific winning opening 65a or one round is started. Since it is very difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, when the jackpot C is reached, basically The big hit is completed without allowing the sphere to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state is not given after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3. Can be shifted to a special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot is over. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the probability variation state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the jackpot is A, B, or D to G, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started. In other words, an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round is set. Therefore, the V passing switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 3 seconds longer than the jackpot C. Accordingly, when the jackpot is A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  The ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k is longer than the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 by 1 second because the ball reaches the special winning flow path 65e2 after entering the specific winning opening 65a. This is because it takes 1 second at maximum. In other words, even if a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of jackpot flows in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to give a probability change state of a special symbol after the jackpot regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of shifting to the probable change state varies depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that an opening / closing pattern that is easy to shift to a probability change state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, a game state transition method in the case of staying in a normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game because the special symbol lottery frequency is likely to increase. This is because it becomes easier to enter the first entrance 64 when left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the small hits are not lottery. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to another gaming state only when a big hit is made. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 79, when the big hit A is determined at a rate of 32% in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the big hit is over, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) shown in the center of. In addition, in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), when the jackpot is determined in the ratio of 58% in the case of winning the lottery in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, Transition to the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). To do).

  As described above, in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the gaming efficiency is increased when the player makes a right strike, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so that the gaming efficiency when making a right strike is extremely reduced, and the gaming state becomes disadvantageous compared to the latent state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be performed in the expectation that the big hits B and D will be the opportunity to shift to an advantageous latent state.

  In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed, but the player intentionally hits the right and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. In addition, as a result of a part of the left-handed ball entering the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, it is common to all jackpot types (jackpots E to G), and after the jackpot is over, it shifts to the probability change gaming state ST2 (probability change state). When a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hit B, D), while the second in the normal state When the special symbol is won by lottery, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the disadvantage in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the normal state can be increased, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Further, as described above, even when the jackpot is A, B, D to G, when the ball cannot be passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot. The gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (loops the normal state). On the other hand, even when the most unfavorable jackpot C is reached, if the ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the probability variation state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game. It becomes. In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, which is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state), if it becomes a big hit, or if it falls out continuously over the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) after becoming the probability variation state, it will enter another gaming state Transition.

  Specifically, as shown in the center part of FIG. 79, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of the first special symbol lottery, the left side of FIG. Transition to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the jackpot B or D is determined in a ratio of 58% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability changing game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. Transition to (latent state). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the probability variation state is set again after the jackpot is ended (the probability variation state is looped). . In addition, when the number of special symbols lottery continues for a specified number of times (120 times) in the probability changing state, the game moves to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times have passed.

  In the probability variation state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery of symbols. In this case, the jackpot game state ST2 (probability change state) is looped after the jackpot is completed in common for all jackpot types (jackpots E to G). In the case of a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state at a rate of 58% (bonus B, D) as in the normal state, When a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the probability variation state, the irregular game can be suppressed.

  Next, a game state transition method in the case where the user stays in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be efficiently drawn by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike. In the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state), when the player is continuously out of the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times (120 times) after entering the latent probability state, a transition is made to another gaming state. To do.

  Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 79, when the latent state is set and the number of special symbols has been drawn continuously for a specified number of times (120 times), it will be normal after the specified number of times have passed. Transition to the gaming state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when a game is played with a right-hand hit (the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed) and the second special symbol lottery is executed and the big hit is made, the jackpot is basically (specified during the big hit) If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the big hit. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before it is disengaged 120 times in succession, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. The gaming state is extremely advantageous for the player. Although details will be described later, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. Since the probability of losing continuously 120 times in the 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), the ratio of winning a jackpot within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Accordingly, once the latent state is reached, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%.

  In the latent state, it is normal to play a right-handed game, so basically, a ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is not executed. When the player makes a mistake in the launch direction, or when the player moves to the latent state with the first special symbol holding ball remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed even in the latent state. A lottery may be performed. In this case, if it is a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, in the latent state, when the big win C (allocation 10%) is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is entered after the big win. On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit A, B, D, the latent state is set again after the big hit.

  Unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the latent state is set even after the jackpot A is over, because the first special symbol holding ball accumulated before the transition to the latent state is performed. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to an unfavorable probability change state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and the jackpot is made. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, the first special symbol that was put on hold will be a big win, and if it shifts to the probable state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without receiving the benefits of the latent state. Since it falls, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous latent state, the ratio of looping the latent state after the big win is higher than the normal state or the probability variation state. It is set as follows. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is immediately won after the shift to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation to a game falls.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 80 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is attached to the rear symbol imitating an elephant, and a numeral “2” is assigned to the rear symbol imitating the lion.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the symbol columns L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed on the left, middle, and right three rows for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 84). ). It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player can clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In the third embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols in a simple form composed of only numbers “1” to “9” are displayed. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers. Note that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the special symbol variation display that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is referred to as the main variation). A variation display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular gaming method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed by a special action of the reserved symbol or the appearance of another character.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 can be suspended. Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81 (a), (b), the 3rd symbol fluctuation display effect (fluctuation pattern effect) in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are changing in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is changing, each symbol row is scroll-displayed (variable display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol lottery has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be performed in anticipation of becoming a jackpot stop symbol after the end of the variable display effect (a main symbol having the same number is aligned with any of the effective lines V1 to V5).

  FIG. 81 (b) shows an example of the display contents when a reach effect is generated that suggests to the player that the jackpot stop symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed in the variation display effect of the third symbol. FIG.

  Here, the reach is a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variably displayed, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. Is a state in which the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed, and it is suggested that the main symbols with the same numbers are chances to be aligned on the effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (b), two main symbols with the number “1” attached on the effective line V4 are stopped and displayed, and the number “2” is attached on the effective line V5. This shows a state in which two main symbols that are displayed are stopped. In this case, since the main symbol having the number “1” or “2” attached to the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is stopped. Can be expected to be.

  When the upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and reach is generated, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the characters “reach!” Are displayed above the changing middle symbol row L2. . By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player more reliably recognize the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation production in which the reach has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the special reach effect which is a kind of reach effect performed with the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. This special reach effect is executed once the effect (temporary stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol sequences L1 to L3 were stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment. Reach of a special mode in which a different symbol sequence is newly displayed and reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol sequence and a part (two) of the symbol sequences L1 to L3 that are stopped and displayed. Production. This special reach production is selected as part of the reach production, and is set to have a higher expectation level than the normal reach production (it will be difficult to select if the special symbol lottery result is out). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with a stop symbol out of reach without being reached. In this case, a stop symbol of a combination that reaches the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped when another symbol row exists further above the upper symbol row L1. The In the example of FIG. 82 (a), the main symbol with the number “1” is displayed on the middle stage of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. In other words, if a symbol row exists further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol “1” attached to the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number “1” is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are aligned on a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in the special reach production, there are a plurality of modes other than the mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers attached to the right are arranged on the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle stage of the middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, a mode in which main symbols having the same numbers on the left side, the middle row, and the right side are arranged in the vertical direction, the middle row of the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol, A mode is also provided in which the main symbols having the same numbers attached to the right side of the row L2 are arranged in an upward direction.

  In the special reach production, after the third symbols of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, the third symbols displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 82 (b). Of the symbols, the main symbol changes to look up. By changing the aspect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the current variation display effect has not ended.

  After each main symbol has been changed to look up, the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted in the direction of looking up each main symbol (upward) as shown in FIG. 83 (a). Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 that is changing is displayed at the end of the shift (a new symbol row L4 is framed in). Accordingly, the lower symbol row L4 is out of frame from the screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and “1” displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. The reach state is configured by the main symbol to which numbers are attached and the main symbol to which the number “1” is displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol to which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the numeral “1”) is changed to a mode in which the aura is put together, and the character “Leach!” Is displayed above the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number “1” on the right side is stopped and displayed when the variation of the new symbol row L4 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number on the new effective line V6 is displayed. Since all three are (it will be a jackpot stop symbol), it can be clearly suggested to the player that it is a chance to win a jackpot.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach occurs after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment. ing. As a result, even when the stop display is made in a combination of detachment, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed in anticipation of developing into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols that can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviation, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the new symbol row | line | column L4 is displayed between each symbol row | line | column. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4 form a reach. Also good. Further, in the third embodiment, when a new symbol row L4 is displayed, the lower symbol row L3 is deleted, without changing the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Since it is configured to change the type of symbol row to be displayed, the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach production and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach production can be unified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not in the normal state or the probability variation state. When there is no hold of the first special symbol (when the number of held balls is 0), the combination of the third symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop is 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first entrance 64. Continue to appear across. Then, when 30 seconds elapse, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 84 (b), a movie with the sun setting against a mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demonstration screen. In this movie, the display content changes with time, and for example, according to the elapsed time, the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain as shown in FIG. 84 (c). By switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not it is an empty board. In addition, when switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified manner (only with numerals) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display (sub variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the state where the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration screen is also displayed when the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and 30 seconds elapses when only the secondary variation is executed. It is configured to be. As described above, in the normal state and the probability variation state, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds), the game efficiency is improved when the left strike is made rather than the right strike. . For this reason, when the player accidentally hits the right in the normal state or the probable change state, and the player quits the game immediately after the change display (secondary change) of the second special symbol is started. Will continue to perform sub-variations for approximately 600 seconds. Under this situation, if the specification is made so that the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed during the execution of the sub-variation, the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the third symbol display device 81 is in spite of the fact that no one is playing for about 600 seconds at the maximum. There is a risk that the displayed content may be as if the game is being played. Therefore, there is a case where another player hesitates to start a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation is finished, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the main change, the display is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen regardless of whether the sub change is being executed. The customer-waiting demonstration screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main change is started) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Yes. By configuring in this way, even if the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and starts to display the fluctuation for 600 seconds, the player immediately quits the game for about 30 seconds. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and Although the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed with substantially the same size, for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub variation You may make it display. Further, in the display screen shown in FIG. 84 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the center. May be configured such that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side that is sub-variable is stopped and displayed on the center of the display screen. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation only by confirming a specific part of the display screen.

  Next, a display mode in the latent state will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the third embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is performed in a manner different from normal fluctuation display.

  As shown in FIG. 85A, in the latent state, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol (sub variation in the latent state) is displayed at the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. As described above, in the latent state, since it is a regular gaming method to aim at the second entrance 1640 by right-handed, the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (main variation) Is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (sub variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the transition from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the sub-variation is the second special symbol. Even if the symbol is changed from the symbol to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at least a part of the data for executing the display (variation display or demonstration display) regarding the sub-variation can be shared and used.

  In addition, the characters “right strike” are displayed below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. By displaying this character, the player can easily recognize that the right-handed game is a regular game method.

  Further, the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm displays a guideline for the remaining number of latent states (a guideline for the number of lotteries until the normal state is entered). In the example of FIG. 85 (a), it is displayed that “remaining 40 times” is displayed, and if the special symbol lottery is lost 40 times in a row, the player may move to the normal state. To suggest. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of times the latent state is continued when the game state (normal state or probability change state) first shifts to the latent state. The value is subtracted and displayed one by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this embodiment, even if a special symbol lottery is won, the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before the big hit is displayed even after the end of the jackpot ( In other words, when the jackpot is reached, the number of times displayed is shifted from the actual remaining number). If the player continues to make a right stroke according to the displayed instruction (the character “right stroke”), the ball can be passed to the V passage switch 65e3 when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. Since it is possible, after the end of the jackpot, 120 new latent states are set. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the latent state, the number of times the latent state is actually continued is larger than the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although details will be described later, the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is the remaining number of times on the display when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero. Is added (added) (see FIG. 87). Thereby, even if the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, a game can be played in anticipation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on display becomes zero.

  As mentioned above, the second special symbol lottery makes it easy to win a small hit, so even if the open / close plate 65f1 is movable (variable) to the open state, whether it was moved by winning the big win or not It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, the present embodiment is configured such that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if it is a big hit or a big hit, by leaving the display mode in which the character 811 sprints during the big hit or the small hit, it became a big hit from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or not. Therefore, in the latent state, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number, so the remaining number on the display is zero. In this case, it can be difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be displayed. Accordingly, when the remaining number of times displayed is 0, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the remaining number will be added and displayed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

  Note that, as described above, the variable winning device 65 and the second entrance 1640 are both placed at positions where the ball can easily enter by making a right-hand hit, so that the big hit and the small hit are displayed. Even if the mode is changed to a display mode similar to that during the change of the 3rd symbol or the stop display of the 3rd symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from winning and missing the winning ball of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero without causing any loss to the player, it can be more strongly expected that the number of times will be added and displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds from the end of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this case, the same display mode (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is displayed, except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the third embodiment, there is no function to hold the display of the variation of the second special symbol, and in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds). Therefore, the frequency of the variable stop state becomes extremely high. Under such circumstances, if the display mode is changed (switched) depending on whether the symbol is changing or the change is stopped, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. Moreover, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 may increase.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment, the display mode of the main display area Dm is shared between the symbol variation display and the stop display. Thereby, since it can suppress that a display mode switches frequently, it can prevent (suppress) that a player will be confused. Moreover, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the latent state in the variation stop state, the display mode (latent probability demonstration display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stops is switched. By switching the display mode, it can be easily recognized that the fluctuation stop state continues for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stop state in the latent state, by displaying a screen (latency demonstration display) different from the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 84 (b)), It can be easily recognized that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in the latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, the trouble that other players start playing with the pachinko machine 10 is prevented (suppressed). can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and it is difficult to think that the game will quit during the latent state, so the player who was playing the game is only temporarily away from the seat. This is because it can be recognized by other players.

  Furthermore, in the latent state in the third embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, if the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) is displayed, then the second input If a ball enters the ball opening 1640 and the screen switching process takes a long time, the variation time may end before displaying the effect associated with the ball. Therefore, even though the ball has entered the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the player may have distrust with respect to the fact that the performance is not executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) in the latent state, a latent demonstration demo display (FIG. 85 (c)) where the same character 811 as that during the change is continuously displayed. Therefore, when the entrance to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), a latent state completion screen displayed when the latent state is completed will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state completion screen is displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state is zero.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is switched to a state where the character 811 falls down on the ground. A display area 812 in which characters “!” Are displayed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. In addition, on the right side of the character 811, a character “return to left-handed” is displayed. By this display, the player can be surely returned to the left hand. This latent probability state end screen detects the entrance to the first entrance slot 64 and the variation display is started, or the first special symbol is in the variation stop state after the latent probability state ends. The display continues until 30 seconds elapse. When either of these two conditions is satisfied, a prize ball acquired during the latent state and a result screen indicating the total number of times the latent state has continued are displayed. Details of the result screen will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), after the latent state is completed, when the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected and the first special symbol variation display is started, the variation is detected. A result screen showing the result of the latent state using time is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the characters “456GAME” are displayed as the number of times that the latent state has been continued (the number of lotteries for special symbols executed during the latent state). Below the characters indicating “”, characters “10030 points acquired!” Indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, the player can play the game in the normal state without questioning the completed latent state. Further, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, it is possible for the player to play a game aiming at a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the result of the latent state (result) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed first after the completion of the latent state, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, a special symbol is drawn twice after the latent state is completed. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the latent state is finished, no entry into the first entrance 64 is detected (if the first special symbol variation display has not started). Instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen, a result display is performed. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the first special symbol variation display executed after the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. As a result, the player who has left the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like immediately after the completion of the latent state can be surely confirmed the result of the latent state.

  In the third embodiment, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Further, in the case where the result of the latent state is displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, a measurement unit that measures a period after the completion of the latent state is provided, and the measurement unit provides a predetermined period (for example, 12 The result may be displayed until the second) elapses. In this case, when the variation of the first special symbol is started before the predetermined period elapses, the result is continuously displayed until the variation ends, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the elapse of the predetermined period. In such a case, the normal display that is not the result display may be executed in the change.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol which displays the result of a latent state is winning, it is good to change the display mode of a result. For example, “10030 points or more acquired!” May be displayed as a suggestion display that suggests that the player has won the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. In this way, by displaying the result determination result of the special symbol using the result content of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the determination of the special symbol without a sense of incongruity. . In addition, if you win the jackpot during the period when the result display of the latent status is executed, and you move to the latent status again, it is configured to be updated by taking over the result contents in the previous latent status Good. This makes it possible for the player to play the game eagerly during the period in which the result display in the latent state is executed.

  In addition, the display similar to the display screen of the result of the latent state displayed after the completion of the latent state, using the period of one special symbol variation or a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect during the latent state. An effect (pseudo end effect) in which the screen is displayed may be used. As a result, an unexpected performance can be provided to the player, and the latent state continues to the player even when the latent state is actually ended and the result display of the latent state is executed. You will be able to expect that.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a revival effect that is a type of effect executed during the latent state will be described. This revival effect is an effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes zero. More specifically, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining lottery number on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number is added to the remaining number on the display. It is an effect to be displayed.

  When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 86 (a)) is displayed. The effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 87, the character 811 that has fallen to the ground once stands up, and the characters “Resurrection” are displayed around the character 811. By executing the effect of this aspect, it is possible to recognize that the latent state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, as the character 811 rises, the actual remaining number of latent states is displayed on the remaining number display area D1. FIG. 87 illustrates the case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to the content “remaining 10 times” because the actual number of remaining latent states has remained 10 times.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery during the latent state, the remaining number (actual remaining number) of the latent state is updated to 120. It is configured to take over the display content of the big hit without resetting the remaining number of times (remaining number of times on display) displayed in the number display area D1. Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number and the remaining number on the display, and the remaining number on the display becomes 0, the difference is added to the actual remaining number to notify the resurrection. It is set as the structure which performs production. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that a rebirth effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the latent state.

  In the present embodiment, the difference between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number of times displayed on the display is added and displayed in the revival effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The revival effect that is executed first may be configured to display a value that is slightly smaller than the difference, and when the revival effect is executed once, the revival effect may be executed multiple times. As a result, when the revival effect is first executed in one latent state, it is determined that the revival effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times added in the revival effect is completed. The game can be played with peace of mind until the performance is performed. In addition, it is possible to make the game look forward to how many times the revival performance is performed. Moreover, when this revival effect is performed, it is good to comprise so that the result display displayed when a latent state is complete | finished is performed, and a revival effect is performed after that. As a result, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 75) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 2030 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 88) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) are selected. The first per-type counter C2 used for the change, the change-type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 2030. Although details will be described later, the RAM 2030 has counter values for winning for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a and the second winning slot 1640 for storing the respective counter values for winning for the first winning slot 64. A second special symbol execution area 2030b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. For this reason, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, When a special ball is stored in one special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a and a game ball wins the second ball entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, the ball wins the first entrance slot 64 during the period when the first special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, If the number of reserved balls in the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. Is done. Further, when the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and five prize balls (in this example) ) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player. In addition, when a ball wins the second entrance 1640 during a period when the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the variation display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Each of the counter values and the like is not acquired, and only the winning balls (in this embodiment, five winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three), It may be more than four (for example, eight). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the entrance to the second entrance 1640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not put on hold. It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b of the RAM 2030. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 2020a (see FIG. 90 (a)) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit specified in the first random number table 2020a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the random number value that is the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 2020b (see FIG. 90B) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 2020a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 2020a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90A, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is obtained. Is determined to be one of “7, 8”, and if it is “7, 8”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the range of “0 to 5”. If it is in the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Next, the small hit random number table 2020b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 2020b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits are set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, a random number value that is a small hit is not defined. In other words, the first special symbol lottery does not win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the gaming state, and the range of “212 to 432” is determined. If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7, 8” is the first per-number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 2020a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0-5” is the first per-random number table as described above. 2020a. Thus, since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6 while the total number of random number values is 480, the probability that the special symbol jackpot will be “1/80”.

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values for the first per-random number counter C1 that will be a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, and the random values “212 to 432” are stored in the small-lot random number table 2020b. ing. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 among the total number of random numbers being 480, the probability of hitting special symbols is “2211/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). It becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIGS. 92 to 94) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  The variation pattern selection table 2020f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 92 to 94). In this variation pattern selection table 2020f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 2030.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 2020c (see FIG. 90C) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is the same as the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 2020c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 2020c will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (c).

  FIG. 90C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 2020c. In the second random number table 2020c, there are 231 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is “0 to 230”. . Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “231/240”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “232/240”. As described above, in this embodiment, since the random number value that is a normal symbol is different only in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal. Yes. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 when the normal symbol is hit are the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second entrance 1640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state becomes extremely long (600 seconds) relative to the variation time in the latent probability state. This makes it difficult for the second special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state or the probability change state than in the latent state, so that in the normal state or the probability change state, the player aims at the first entrance 64 and plays the game. Can be performed.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 230” in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that it is a hit and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. After that, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 1640 is opened for “one second × twice”. On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 1640 is opened “for one second × twice”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the normal pattern variation pattern table 2020g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the general symbol variation type counter CS2 (See FIG. 95) is defined in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal variation pattern table 2020g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  As described above, the RAM 2030 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 displays the jackpot lottery and display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 2020 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 2020 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 2020, in addition to the first hit random number table 2020a, the small hit random number table 2020b, and the second hit random number table 2020c, the big hit type selection table 2020d, the small hit type selection table 2020e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 2020f and an ordinary map variation pattern table 2020g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 2020d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 2020d, the first hit The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), for the first special symbol, a range of “0 to 31” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 32 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 32% (32/100).

  In addition, when it becomes “big hit A”, whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is given, whether the game state at the time of winning “big hit A” and whether or not it passed V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the jackpot is “big hit A” in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, A short time of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V pass switch e3 is not passed during the big hit, or when the big hit is made in the latent state and the V pass switch 65e3 is passed during the big hit), the number of time reductions is not set. (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when “big hit A” is obtained in the normal state or the probable change state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times and the time reduction number of 120 times are set. The gaming state after the big hit becomes a promiscuous state. On the other hand, when the game is in the state of “big hit A” in the latent probability state, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change count of 120 times (and the number of time reductions of 0) is set, and the gaming state after the big hit Becomes a latent state. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, the normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. The

  “Big Bonus A” is one of the types of jackpots with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be earned. Is set (the advantageous latent state is not given), which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, since the latent probability state is basically looped even after the big hit is completed when the big probability is “big hit A”, the latent probability state is a kind of jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “32 to 80”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the “big hit B” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of “big hit B”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 48 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 48% (48/100).

  “Big Bonus B” is one of the types of jackpots with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained, but if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot (right strike) If the game state is performed), the game state is advantageous in terms of the game state because the player shifts to the latent state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “81 to 90”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” has seven rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 78B) that is difficult to pass through the V pass switch 65e3 is set in the first big hit. The In addition, after the “big hit C” is over, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the “big hit C” is finished, basically the normal state (both as the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions is 0) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot C” has the least number of rounds, and basically the most unfavorable normal state is set after the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so it is the most unfavorable jackpot type for the player. is there. Although the possibility is low, the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3 if the ball can be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a within a short period of time when the specific prize opening 65a is opened. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This “big hit D” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78C) Is set. In addition, after the “big hit D” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of the “big hit D”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot D” has the most rounds and the most advantageous latent state is basically set after the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type by lottery of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 79” is defined in association with “jackpot E”. This “big hit E” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”. In other words, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 in the normal state or the probability changing state, 120 times are set and the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability changing state. . Also, if the player wins the “big hit E” in the latent state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so the gaming state after the big hit is the latent state. (Loops the latent state) Further, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the gaming state after the big hit becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

  This “big hit E” is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the smallest among the six types of big hit types. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if the “big hit E” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as a gaming state after the big hit Is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the ball is passed through the V passing switch 65e3 in the normal state or the probability variation state and the ball passes through the V variation switch 65e3, the configuration is changed to the probability variation state. This is to suppress a serious game method. That is, even if the “big hit E” is set in the normal state or the probability change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the expected state is expected to shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular gaming method that causes the second special symbol lottery to be executed (right-handed) even in the probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal state or the probable change state, the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to G), and when the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probable change state as the gaming state after the big hit Is configured to be set. As a result, the merit of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the probability variation state can be eliminated, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 95”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. This “big hit F” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78C) Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A” and “big hit E”. That is, if the “big hit F” is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Although this “big hit F” has a large number of rounds, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other big hit types. More specifically, in 2 to 15 rounds of “big hit F”, an open / close pattern (special open / close pattern) in which the open / close plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds is set. Since it is difficult to win a ball into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball in the 2-15 rounds of “Big Win F”. As described above, when the “big hit F” is reached, the special opening / closing pattern is set when the open / close plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state, or is a small hit or “big hit F”. This is to make it ambiguous. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the small hits are a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) for the opening and closing plate 65f1 and a short hit A that is opened only once, and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C that repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, by setting a special opening / closing pattern when the “big hit F” is reached, the operation of the open / close plate 65f1 can be made similar to the case of the small hit B or the small hit C after the small hit A. it can. As a result, it becomes difficult to identify whether the latent state has been reset 120 times or the small number of consecutive winnings has been won and the number of times has been subtracted. Can be. Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual remaining number (whether or not the latent state ends when the remaining number on the display reaches zero). Since it can be difficult to discriminate from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0 times, the revival effect (see FIG. 87) is performed and the game is played with the expectation that the remaining number of times on the display will be added and displayed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the player's latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit G” is associated and defined. This “big hit G” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”, “big hit E”, and “big hit F”. That is, if the “big hit G” is won in the normal state or the probable change state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit G”, so “big hit G” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  This “big hit G” is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the largest among the six types of big hit types. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if it becomes “big hit G” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as a gaming state after the big hit Will also be advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when left-handing is performed in the normal state or the probability variation state, and a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the latent state is advantageous at a ratio of 58% (big hit B, D). Is configured to migrate to. Then, when the player makes a right-hand hit in the latent state and wins a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hit E to G). Therefore, once the latent probability state (special symbol probable change state and normal symbol normal state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 1640 by right-handed. It is easy to be executed, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. For this reason, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), details of the small hit type selection table 2020e will be described. This small hitting type selection table 2020e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the small hitting type when the first special symbol lottery is won. In the small hit type selection table 2020e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 93”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are “small hitting A”. Is determined to be 94% (94/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “94 to 98”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. The “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the open / close plate 65f1 is set to be opened for 0.06 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are five random number values that are “small hit B”. Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

  Further, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. The “small hit C” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there is one random number value that becomes “small hitting C”. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Thus, in this embodiment, the small hit game in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs the opening / closing operation one or more times is executed in response to the special symbol lottery. As a result, when the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation in the latent state, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is a win-winning or a small-winning win. Can do. Therefore, even when the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state has never been a big hit, the rebirth effect is performed when the remaining number of latent states on the display approaches zero. Can be expected. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the ratio of winning a small hit is about 46%. For this reason, in the special symbol lottery of 120 times set as the latent state, winning is made around 55 times per hit. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 2020f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 2020f defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the variation pattern selection table 2020f includes a normal table A2020f1 and a normal table B2020f2 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and a variation pattern for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state. A probability variation table 2020f3 and a latent probability table 2020f4 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included at least. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. In each table shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table A2020f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and a special symbol lottery other than twice is executed immediately after the end of the latent probability changing state. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table A2020f1. As shown in FIG. 93, the normal table A2020f1 includes a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. Value).

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range “51 to 100”, Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range “101 to 150”, and Super reach A is associated with the range “151 to 198”. C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not selected and the normal table A2020f1 is referenced, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. To do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, when the number of reserved balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 70” (10 seconds). Fluctuation patterns are associated with each other, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “151 to 170”, and the outage super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) in the range of “0 to 70” as the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”, and the deviation of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “171 to 185”, and the out of the range of “185 to 198” is associated with the outlier super reach B (30 seconds). It has been. The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A2020f1 (see Y307 of Y210) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see Y303 of FIG. 102). It is executed later. Therefore, the normal table A2020f is not referred to when the number of the holding balls is four.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make it difficult for the change display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is large, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to store the balls on hold. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to, the variation time is set to 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hand is made in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much worse than when the left hand is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, the details of the normal table B2020f2 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table B2020f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of lottery times for the special symbol is within two after the latent state is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 94A, when the normal table B2020f2 is referred to, the same variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation after counter ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the out-of-ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. For this reason, when the first or second special symbol lottery after the completion of the latent state is the first special symbol lottery, a 12-second variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. In addition, it is set as the structure which performs the result display (refer FIG.86 (b)) of the latent state mentioned above during these 12 seconds. By adopting a configuration in which a fixed variation time is selected, a sufficient time for performing the result display can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), for the second special symbol lottery, similarly to the normal table A2020f1, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. Since the contents are the same as those in the normal table A2020f1 described above with reference to FIG. 93, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, not only the first special symbol lottery but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery after the end of the latent, the 12-second variation time is set. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second entrance 1640 between the end of the latent state and the return to the left strike, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed first. . As in this embodiment, even if the second special symbol lottery is set for the second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent confirmation, the variation display of the second special symbol is started first. Since the first special symbol lottery is executed thereafter, a 12-second variation time can be set, so that each time regardless of whether the first special symbol lottery is executed first or not. The result display can be performed for the same time after the end of the latent state. Further, in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed twice in succession without the lottery of the first special symbol being executed. However, as described above, the result display is performed when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the completion of the latent state (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds). It is configured. Therefore, also in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the result of the latent state (result) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed first after the completion of the latent state, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, a special symbol is drawn twice after the latent state is completed. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display contents of the result display to be executed are the first It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display that suggests a win may be executed in addition to the display content of the result display. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in which the variation is executed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol in which the result display is executed based on the variation of the first special symbol is also win, In addition to the display contents of the result display executed based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, a display suggesting a hit may be executed. With this configuration, the game result in the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the first special symbol is executed twice continuously after the latent state is finished, the result display is executed only for the first variation, In the second variation, variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game result in the latent state is excessively displayed and the variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

  In addition, the probability variation table 2020f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A2020f1 and will be described briefly. However, if the first special symbol is a lottery, it is the same as the normal table A2020f1. Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected at the selection ratio. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not selected by lottery, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as compared with the normal state. This is because the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the probability variation state, and if a variation pattern with a long variation time occurs frequently despite the deviation, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the third embodiment is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected when the first special symbol lottery is lost during the probability variation state. When selected, the player is more strongly expected to win a big hit.

  Next, details of the latent probability table 2020f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). This latent probability table 2020f4 is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the middle variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the full range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take for the first special symbol jackpot. Has been. Further, the outlier of the first special symbol is defined in association with the outlier super short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the second special symbol jackpot has a very short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Are defined in association with each other, and the small hits of the second special symbol are associated with the small hits super short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The deviation from the second special symbol is defined in such a way that the extra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the full range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. . That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

  In the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed, so the variation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, it is possible to play a game efficiently (rapidly) by making a right turn. In addition, even when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the latent state, the variation time is selected to be 0.5 seconds. When entering the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the latent state, and to play the game.

  In addition, when a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set when the big bonus of the first special symbol is set in the latent state. This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when the big hit C is in the latent state, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 78 (b)) in which a ball is difficult to pass through the V pass switch 65e3 is set with respect to the open / close plate 65f1. The game state after the end becomes the normal state. When such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting a relatively long variation time when the first special symbol wins a lottery, the second special is performed by making a right-hand hit during the big special variation of the first special symbol. It is configured so that symbol lottery can be executed multiple times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since it wins a small hit about once every 2 times (about 46%), before the end of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation of the with high probability. As described above, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous variation method is employed in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. In addition, if the change display of one special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a big win or small stop symbol during simultaneous change, the change display of the other special symbol will be drawn by the remaining change time and lottery at the start of the change. Regardless of the result, it is forcibly stopped with an outlier stop symbol. Therefore, even if the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress, the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded by confirming and displaying the small bonus stop symbol by the small bonus variation of the second special symbol first. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot of the first special symbol that may end the latent state with high probability, so that the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. I can do it.

  In the present embodiment, 0.5 second is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but a small probability (for example, “1/199”). ) May be configured such that a long variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is selected. Further, when the long variation time is selected, a result display indicating the above-described game result in the latent state (actually, the game result in the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear that the latent state has ended during the latent state, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player, and the effect can be enhanced. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the common map variation pattern table 2020g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 2020g is a table that is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 95, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g includes a range of values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 and a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each gaming state when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the common diagram variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern is associated. Similarly, when the gaming state is a probable variation state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the value of the variation variation counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 190”. A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with a range of CS2 values of “191 to 198”. When the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the time from when the normal symbol lottery is executed to when the electric accessory 1640a is released is predicted by varying the variation time of the normal symbol. Can be difficult. Therefore, when one ball is launched to the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67 and the ball passes through any of the through gates, the electric accessory 1640a is used when the normal symbol is hit. It is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of launching a ball by predicting the release timing, and to make a right strike continuously during the latent state.

  In the third embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may be varied.

  In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, one of two types of 1 second or 3 seconds is set as the variable time, but there are two types of variable time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and more variable time may be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the less likely it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to more reliably and continuously make a right strike in the latent state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to this, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of times of drawing a special symbol, or a configuration in which the variation time of the normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and thereafter (51 Times to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, while the lottery of the even number of special symbols has been executed after the game state has shifted to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (odd number of times) You may comprise so that 3 second may be set as a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. It is possible to make a right turn continuously. In this case, the special symbol lottery time is set to be longer in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed (in comparison with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed) It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of lotteries stored on hold is smaller.

  In addition, when the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it may be configured such that a longer variation time becomes easier to select as the number of retained balls of the normal symbol increases. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols is difficult to store and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily store the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols are per unit time. The number of normal symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 2030 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 2030 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, a second special symbol execution area 2030b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 2030e, V winning flag 2030f, hourly counter 2030g, winning counter 2030h, special figure 1 standby flag 2030i, special figure 2 standby flag 2030j, probability variation counter 2030k, big hit flag 2030m, winning state storage area 2030n, small hit Flag 2030o, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p, prefetch hold storage area 2030r, special figure 1 fluctuation timer 2030s, special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t, big hit medium flag 2030u, small hit medium flag 2030v, and other memory area 2030z It has even without.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, the small hits-type counter C5, and the variation-type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, the second special symbol execution area 2030b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a lottery of special symbols. In the second special symbol execution area 2030b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c includes one execution area (ordinary symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes either the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is four Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. A shift process is performed in which winning data is packed into a reserved area having a smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reservation ball number counter 2030d is a special symbol variable display (first symbol display device 37, which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see Y1504 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see Y303 in FIG. 102).

  The value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (Y304 in FIG. 102, FIG. 114). Y1505). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is changed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 2030d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol held ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 2030e is a normal ball (second symbol) variable display holding ball that is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times (number of waiting times). The value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. Each time the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see Y1704 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see Y1605 in FIG. 115).

  When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c (see Y1705 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c. Not stored (see Y1703: No in FIG. 116).

  The V winning flag 2030f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probability changing state. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the V passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77 (b)) during the big hit game. Here, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON (see Y2410 in FIG. 123). On the other hand, the V winning flag 2030f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122). The V winning flag 2030f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off at the time of return (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the V passing switch 65e3 has passed, It may be configured that the flag 2030f is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, for example, a determination is made as to whether or not the V-pass switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off by providing a pass counter that measures the number of balls that have passed the V-pass switch 65e3. It can be determined by whether there is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such that only the V winning flag 2030f is turned on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is cut off, thereby reducing the damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The time reduction counter 2030g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time reduction state. At this time, the short counter 2030g is set to 120 when either of the big hits A and E to G is won in the normal state or the probability change state and the V winning flag 2030f is on at the end of the big win game. Also, the hour / hour counter 2030g is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see Y607 in FIG. 105). When a normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the time-short counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability. (See Y1610 in FIG. 115). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate is determined with reference to the table for the low probability (see Y1611 in FIG. 115).

  The winning counter 2030h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening 65a in each jackpot round. When the value of the winning counter 2030h becomes the upper limit value 5, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied and the round is ended (see Y2406 in FIG. 123). Even if the value of the winning counter 2030h is less than 5 in each jackpot round, the round ends when the round period set for each round is reached. The winning counter 2030h is incremented by 1 every time a winning ball is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is fluctuating or the first special symbol is suspended. It means that it is in the state immediately before starting the variable display based on the sphere. The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see Y311 in FIG. 102). On the other hand, when the change start of the first special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see Y309 in FIG. 102).

  The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 2030j is on, it indicates that the second special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is being changed. The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not changing and no start winning is detected for the second entrance 1640 (see Y809 in FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the change start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see Y807 in FIG. 107).

  The probability variation counter 2030k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special It indicates that the symbol is in a low probability state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set to 0. When the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 is set at the end of the jackpot (see Y2304 in FIG. 122). In addition, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is set (see FIG. 105), the value is subtracted by 1 (FIG. 105). Y602). Further, the probability variation counter 2030k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see Y708 in FIG. 106 and Y1309 in FIG. 112). This probability variation counter 2030k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108). (See Y402 in FIG. 103 and Y902 in FIG. 108).

  The jackpot flag 2030m is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the flag is set to ON (see Y406 in FIG. 103 and Y906 in FIG. 108). The jackpot flag 2030m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y708 in FIG. 106, Y1309 in FIG. 112). The jackpot flag 2030m is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “10B”, it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been won and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “01B”, it indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol has been won, and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is “00B”, it indicates that the jackpot variation has not been executed.

  When the jackpot flag 2030m is on and the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on is finished, the other special symbol is removed and the process of forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (Y705 in FIG. 106, FIG. 112). Y1306). Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that one of the big hits is executed while the other is a big hit or a small hit.

  The winning state storage area 2030n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if both the time counter 2030g and the probability variation counter 2030k are 0), the winning state storage area 2030n indicates the normal state. “00H” is stored as information. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the values of the hourly counter 2030g and the probability change counter 2030k are both 1 or more), the winning state storage area 2030n contains information indicating the probability change state. “01H” is stored. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 2030n has a latent state. “02H” is stored as information indicating the certain state.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 2030n is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a short-time game after the jackpot ends (see Y2301 in FIG. 122). As described above, if the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is different depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or not. It is In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is stored in this winning state storage area 2030n, and is referred to at the end of the jackpot so that it corresponds to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. An appropriate gaming state can be set.

  The small hit flag 2030o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see Y1002 in FIG. 109). The small hit flag 2030o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see Y1405 in FIG. 113). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is finished in a state where the small hit flag 2030o is on, a process of detaching the other special symbol and forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see Y1403 in FIG. 113). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol and a big win is started during the small win while the small special hit of the second special symbol is being executed. it can.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag that indicates a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol to when the jackpot is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON, even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 1640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (Refer to Y801: Yes in FIG. 107). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped (see Y703 in FIG. 106), and the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (Y811 in FIG. 107).

  The prefetch hold storage area 2030r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing when the original special symbol lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, immediately after the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols separately from the lottery. Various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the counter value. The prediction of various types of information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as “prefetching”. In the prefetch hold storage area 2030r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning with respect to the first entrance 64, a prefetch result based on the counter value (special symbol lottery determination result, jackpot) Jackpot type and variation pattern) are stored. The prefetch hold storage area 2030r can store the same number of prefetch results as the number of balls held (that is, a maximum of four).

  Special figure 1 variation timer (Special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s and Special figure 2 fluctuation timer (Special figure 2 fluctuation time timer) 2030t measure the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special figure 1 variation timer (Special Figure 1 variation time timer) 2030s and the special figure 2 variation timer (Special Figure 2 variation time timer) 2030t. (See Y701 in FIG. 106 and Y1301 in FIG. 112).

  The big hit flag 2030u is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If the jackpot flag 2030u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. The jackpot flag 2030u is set to ON when the jackpot start is set (see Y709 in FIG. 106 and Y1310 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, it is set off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122).

  The small hitting flag 2030v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 2030v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. This small hitting medium flag 2030v is set to ON when the small hitting start is set (see Y1406 in FIG. 113). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see Y2512 in FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 2030z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 2020 and the flags and counters provided in the RAM 2030, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the innovative state transition shown in FIG. 79 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 97A, the ROM 2220 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 2220a and a screen display selection table 2220b.

  The variation pattern selection table 2220a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery. Note that the above-described special reach production mode (see FIGS. 82 and 83) is also defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 2220a. Selected in some cases.

  The screen display selection table 2220b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even when one special symbol is in a variable stop state, a situation in which the other special symbol is changing frequently occurs. Further, depending on the gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol to be noticed by the player is switched. This screen display selection table 2220b is referred to in order to set a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state in a state where the main variation is stopped while appropriately displaying the variation display of the main symbol in each gaming state. Details of the screen display selection table 2220b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 2220b. As shown in FIG. 98, this screen display selection table 2220b corresponds to the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed in 81 is defined. The special figure 1 standby flag 2230 s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230 t indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. It is a flag to show. Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed when the flag is on. If the flag is off, the flag is being displayed based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or a predetermined time ( 30 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 98, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probability change state, the display content (screen display type) is displayed for the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s being off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t being on. ) Is specified as a normal display. In this normal display, the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, a demonstration display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When this demonstration display is determined, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 84B and 84C) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is switched to the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Thus, even if the player puts the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the display of fluctuation for 600 seconds is started, and then quits the game immediately, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed. Can display a demo screen waiting for customers. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, the demonstration display is also associated with the combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. Therefore, also in this case, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 84B and 84C) is set. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a latent state, a special display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. This special display means the above-described latent demonstration display (see FIG. 85 (c)), and a special mode demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as that during the change is continuously displayed. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, a display mode (effect mode) can be changed smoothly. Note that the special display is also set for the combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are turned on. In other words, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main variation has entered the fluctuation stop state, the special display Is set.

  In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special symbol entered the variation stop state, the variation display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

  Next, the RAM 2230 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 includes a command storage area 2230a, a winning information storage area 2230b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 2230f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g, effect counter 2230h, state setting area 2230i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, special figure 1 standby counter 2230k, and sub special figure 2 Stand-by flag 2230m, special figure 2 stand-by counter 2230n, remaining probability variation count area 2230o, production probability variation count area 2230p, short remaining time count area 2230q, special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, and special figure 2 standby flag 2230t And at least a memory area 2230z.

  The command storage area 2230a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 2230a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 2230b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected in the main controller 110, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, which are acquired according to the start winning, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 (whether it is a big hit, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a fluctuation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 2230b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is a variation effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol being performed up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d stored in the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is displayed as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c. Each type of management is managed.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c (see Y4310 in FIG. 130). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball counter 2230c to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see Y4304 and Y4307 in FIG. 130) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4702 and Y4706 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e are turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230, and in the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g are received when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 are received. (See Y4401 in FIG. 131) and off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4710 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The effect counter 2230h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 2230h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 128) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Is done.

  The state setting area 2230i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main controller 110 is received, the status setting area 2230i is updated to information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (Y4011, FIG. 127). 132, Y4506). More specifically, in the state setting area 2230i, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and in order from the upper bit, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a probable variation state or not, and whether the normal symbol is in a short-time state. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 2230i is “11B”, it means that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and that the normal symbol is in the short time state (that is, the probability change state). This means that the symbol is in the state of probability change and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent state). On the other hand, “00H” means the normal state.

  By updating the state setting area 2230i according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is changing. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i and the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j of the main controller 110.

  Special figure 1 stand-by counter 2230k and special figure 2 stand-by counter 2230n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. Among the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and special figure 2 standby counter 2230n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol that is the main variation in the current gaming state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, A demonstration effect corresponding to the state is set (see Y4211 in FIG. 129).

  The remaining probability variation count area 2230o and the remaining short-time count area 2230q are storage areas for storing the probability variation state of the special symbol and the remaining number of times of the normal symbol time-short state, respectively. The remaining variable number of times area 2230o and the remaining short number of times area 2230q are notified by the remaining variable number of times command and the remaining short number of times command that are output each time the value of the probability variable counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g are updated in the main controller 110, respectively. (See Y4652 and Y4662 in FIG. 134). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining shorter number of times area 2230q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g of the main control device 110. The remaining number of times of probability change and the number of times reduced by 113 can be made to coincide with the actual number of times of change of accuracy and the number of times shortened which are updated by main controller 110.

  The effect probability variation number area 2230p is a storage area for storing a guideline of the remaining number of times of the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent probability state. In this effect probability change count area 2230p, 120 is set when a transition is made from another gaming state to a latent probability state (see Y4505 in FIG. 132). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (see Y4657 in FIG. 134).

  The special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively. It shows that the fluctuation stop state of the corresponding special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is fluctuating or within 3 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. These special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are turned on when the count values of special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and special figure 2 standby counter 2230n respectively become values corresponding to 30 seconds. It is set (see Y4204 and Y4208 in FIG. 129).

  The standby set flag 2230u is a demonstration effect with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been suspended. This is a flag indicating whether or not screen display such as (see FIGS. 84B, 84C, and 85C) is set. This standby setting completed flag 2230u is set to ON when the screen display is newly set with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b in the customer waiting effect processing (see FIG. 129) (see Y4212 in FIG. 129). ). Further, when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is newly set to ON (see Y4204, Y4208 in FIG. 129), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. Is newly set to OFF, the standby setting completed flag 2230u is set to OFF.

  The power-off flag 2230y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 2230y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see Y4115 in FIG. 128). Thereafter, since the RAM 2230 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 2230 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 127), when the power-off flag 2230y is on (see Y4008: Yes in FIG. 127), it is constant after the power-off flag 2230y is set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 2230 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 2230. In some cases, information on the work area in the RAM 2230 is cleared (see Y4009 in FIG. 127). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 2230z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 2340a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 2340a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 2340a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 2340a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified in reading the data of the first page. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed after the end of the boot process (see Y6001 in FIG. 136) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the transfer of image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see Y6003 and Y6004 in FIG. 136).

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area in which the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. In other words, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, but for the resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is determined in advance for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see Y6005 in FIG. 136). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see Y7605 in FIG. 147 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Y6301 in FIG. 138 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 138) so that an image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 138 (b) Y6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Y7501 in FIG. 147 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 147 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Once selected, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 138 (b) ) (See Y6303)), pointer update processing (see Y7205 in FIG. 144) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 138 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Y7207 in FIG. 144). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see Y7713 in FIG. 148). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “off” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see Y7714 in FIG. 148). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Y7802 in FIG. 149).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see Y6306 in FIG. 138 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see Y7001 in FIG. 143 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see Y7709 in FIG. 148), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see Y7710 in FIG. 148). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 143 (a ) Y7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (see Y7221 in FIG. 144). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b). , See Y6905 of FIG. 142). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is turned on when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (Y7214 in FIG. 144). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b), FIG. 142, Y6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (Y101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (Y103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and those counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 479, 99, 232, 99) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 2030.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (Y104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (Y105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol variation process for executing a process associated with the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( Y106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (Y106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (Y108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (Y109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special symbol variation process (Y104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (Y104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the respective counter values acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640, and a predetermined Control for enabling the variable display to be simultaneously performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in the variation display mode determined by the control of the control, or to stop display in the display mode indicating the determination result Is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being played (whether or not the jackpot flag 2030u is on) (Y201), and the jackpot is being hit (the jackpot flag) If it is determined that 2030u is on) (Y201: Yes), it is not necessary to set a special symbol lottery, stop of variable display, or the like. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (the jackpot flag 2030u is off) (Y201: No), whether or not the jackpot game is being played (whether or not the jackpot flag 2030v is on). Is determined (Y202). In the process of Y202, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (the small hit medium flag 2030v is on) (Y202: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that no small hit is being made (the small hit / medium flag 2030v is OFF) (Y202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being changed (Y203). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation display is in progress (Y203: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205) is performed when the variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed. Then, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (Y205), and the process proceeds to Y206. In the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is also compulsorily used with the stop symbol corresponding to the outage. Processing to stop display is executed. Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (Y205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y203 that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. On the condition that it is, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed (Y204), and the process proceeds to Y206. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of Y206 that is executed after the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) or the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display. (Y206) If the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (Y206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (Y208), and this process is terminated. This second special symbol variation stop process (Y208) is similar to the first special symbol variation suspension process (Y205) when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol which shows the lottery result. Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process (Y208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y206: No), the second special symbol is detected on the condition that a new start winning is detected at the second entrance 1640. A second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery is executed (Y207), and this processing is terminated. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (Y207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (Y204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (Y204).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (FIG. 102, Y204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is acquired (Y301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether (N1) is a value greater than 0 (Y302). In the process of Y302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is greater than 0 (Y302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is set. 1 is subtracted (Y303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d after the subtraction is set (Y304). .

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 2230. 2230c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  When the process of Y304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is then shifted to the previous data (Y305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of Y305 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (Y306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306) will be described in detail later. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 104, Y307). As will be described in detail later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is performed by determining whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is completed, a gaming state update process is then executed (Y308). This game state update process (FIG. 105, Y308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability change counter 2030k, hourly counter 2030g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, This is a process for updating the state. When the process of Y308 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF and a special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y309), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is 0 (Y302: No), whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on. If it is determined (Y310) and it is determined to be on (Y310: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y310, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y311), and a special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After setting (Y312), this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 102, Y204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a is acquired (Y401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (Y402). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (special symbol probability variation state). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (Y402: Yes), the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 2020a for high probability And the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer is determined to match, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (Y403). On the other hand, in the process of Y402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y402: No), the first per-random number table 2020a for the low probability is stored in It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that is a big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (Y404).

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in Y403 or Y404 is a big hit (Y405). If the lottery result is a big hit (Y405: Yes), the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (Y406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (Y407). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y408), and the value according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area Store in 2030n (Y409), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y405, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (Y405: No), the out symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y410), and thereafter This process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 102, Y204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the process of Y406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above.

  In the process of Y501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (Y501: Yes), it is acquired in the process of Y401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined from the big hit type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91A) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 2030m for the first special symbol is OFF) (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is performed. Skip to Y503 processing.

  In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 92 to 94) corresponding to the gaming state is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The gaming state is determined on the basis of the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the time reduction counter 2030g. In the process of Y505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( Y506).

  When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y508), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the gaming state update process (Y308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this game state update processing (Y308).

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 105) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is greater than 0 (Y601). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y601: No), the processing of Y602 to Y605 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Y606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (Y602), and the remaining probability variation command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set ( Y603).

  The remaining probability variation command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice is changed. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining probability variation command, it extracts the value of the probability variation counter 2030k from the remaining probability variation command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining variation count area 2230o of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation number area 2230o in accordance with the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 and execute a corresponding effect.

  When the process of Y603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k after subtraction is 0 (Y604). When the value after subtraction is not 0 (Y604: No), The process is skipped and the process proceeds to Y606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (Y605), and the process proceeds to Y606.

  In the process of Y606, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606). If the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 0 (Y606: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y606 that the hour / hour counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is decremented by one (Y607), and a remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour / hour counter is set. After (Y608), this process is terminated.

  The short remaining time command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining short number of times command, it extracts the value of the time short counter 2030g from the remaining short number of times command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining short number of times area 2230q of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining short time number area 2230q in accordance with the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y205), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (Y205).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 106, Y205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the first special symbol variation display (Y701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( Y701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (Y702). When it is determined that the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 2030p is turned on is set (Y704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (Y705).

  When the processing of Y705 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (Y706), and the jackpot flag 2030m, the probability variation counter 2030k, and the hour / short counter 2030g are reset (Y707). Next, the jackpot flag 2030u is set to ON (Y708), and the process proceeds to Y709.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the big hit flag 2030m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (Y702: No), the process of Y703 to Y708 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y709.

  In the process of Y709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (Y709). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently variably displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (Y710), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( Y711), this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (Y205), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. Processing (Y703 to Y710) for stopping the variable display is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (Y702: Yes), processing (Y703, Y704) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

  In the third embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is configured to be forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of Y706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103). For example, based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of Y706 You may make it do.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (Y207), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (Y207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 107, Y207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the outage when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is finished. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is on, it means that a big hit will be started, and therefore the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, in the process of Y801, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is on, this process is terminated as it is without executing the processes of Y802 to Y810 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y801, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y801: No), the second entrance 1640 is It is determined whether or not a winning is detected (Y802). If a winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected (Y802: Yes), then, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 Are acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is executed. (Y804). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of Y804 ends, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of Y803. Execute (Y805). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of Y805 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) is executed (Y806), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to OFF, and a special figure 2 standby command indicating OFF is issued. After setting (Y807), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y801 that no winning for the second entrance 1640 has been detected (Y801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is on (Y808). ), If it is on (Y808: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y808, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to on (Y809), and the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. A special figure 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of this fact is set (Y810), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second special symbol big hit determination process (Y804) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 107, Y207) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103). The difference from the reference will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is acquired (Y901). And the process of Y902-Y904 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is performed. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b. Control is executed.

  When the process of Y903 or Y904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big win (Y905). If it is determined that the lottery is a big hit (Y905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processing from Y906 to Y909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes of Y906 to Y909, the same processes as the processes of Y406 to Y409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y905, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win (Y905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit of the second special symbol or a loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation variation processing is executed (Y910), and this processing is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (Y909).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (Y909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of Y903 or Y904 in FIG. 108 is a small hit of the second special symbol (Y1001), and the lottery result is a small hit. If so (Y1001: Yes), the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to small hit (Y1003). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (Y1004), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y1001 that the lottery result is out (Y1001: No), the outlier of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y1005), and then This process ends.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 107, Y805), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (Y1102). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the process of Y906 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108) described above.

  In the process of Y1102, when it is determined that the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (Y1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the Y901 process in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108) described above, the big hit from the big hit type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). The type is determined (Y1105).

  When the processing of Y1105 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y1105), and then a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (Y1106). Then, the process proceeds to Y1108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1102 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (Y1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y1108. Transition.

  In the process of Y1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (Y1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y1109), and then ends this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 111, Y1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (Y1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is ON (Y1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (Y1202). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 2020e (see FIG. 90B), the small hit type is selected (Y1203).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (Y1204), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (Y1205). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (Y1206), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1201 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (ie, it is out of place) (Y1201: No), a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 93 and FIG. 94) is read (Y1207), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (Y1208). After that, based on the selected deviation variation pattern, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y1209), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 101, Y104) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (Y208).

  In the second special symbol variation stop process (Y208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301). In the process of Y1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: Yes), the big hit flag 2030m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). Is determined (Y1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON for the second special symbol (Y1303: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1305), The process proceeds to Y1306.

  Next, the processing after Y1306 is different from the processing after Y705 of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (FIG. 106, Y205) described above in the following points. A special figure 1 confirmation command is a special figure in the process of Y1306 and Y1312 corresponding to the process of Y705 and Y711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and the process of Y1311 corresponding to the process of Y710. 2 is different in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y1301, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( Y1302), the present process is terminated. In the process of Y1303, if the big hit flag 2030m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (Y1303: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (Y1304), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the special figure 2 outage stop process (Y1304), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112, Y208), will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off stop processing (Y1304).

  In the special figure 2 off stop processing (FIG. 113, Y1304), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (Y1403).

  When the processing of Y1403 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (Y1404). Thereafter, the small hit flag 2030o is set to OFF (Y1405), and the small hit medium flag 2030v is set to ON (Y1406).

  When the processing of Y1406 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (Y1407). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (Y1408), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1401 that the small hit flag 2030o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (Y1401: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (Y1409). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (Y1410), and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (Y105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (Y105). In the starting winning process (FIG. 114, Y105), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port (first entering port) 64. This is a process of storing the acquired counter values up to a maximum of four) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. In addition, a process for predicting the determination result or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 114, Y105) will be described.

  In the starting winning process (FIG. 114, Y105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) in the first starting port 64 which is the first starting port (Y1101). Here, a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 64 (start winning has been received) (Y1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is acquired (Y1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first start port 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d (Y1504). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (Y1505). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a of the RAM 2030 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls (Y1506).

  Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (Y1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (Y1508), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the determination result is based on the information stored and stored. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the normal symbol variation process (Y106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (Y106). The normal symbol variation process (Y106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 115, Y106), first, it is determined whether the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (Y1601). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays a hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 1640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (Y1601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Y1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol changing time being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (Y1618). ). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of Y1617 described later before the variation display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of Y1011 (Y1618: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1618 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (Y1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (Y1619). In the process of Y1619, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of Y1613, the symbol “○” is stopped on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of Y1615, the symbol “x” is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol, It is set to stop display (lighted display). When the stop display is set by the process of Y1619, the variable display in the second symbol display device is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second display in the display mode set by the processes of Y1613 and Y1615. The symbol display device is stopped (lighted).

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (Y1620). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (Y1620: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 1640a is set (Y1621). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current regular symbol lottery result is out of place (Y1620: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1602 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Y1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is greater than 0 (Y1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is 0. (Y1604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is not 0 (Y1604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (Y1605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c is shifted (Y1606). In the process of Y1606, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2030c is acquired (Y1607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in a short time state (Y1608). More specifically, when the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the hour / hour state is in effect. In the process of Y1608, if it is determined that the time-short state is not being reached (Y1608: No), the success / failure determination is made based on the hit determination value of the random symbol table for normal symbols for low probability (see FIG. 90C). A result is acquired (Y1611). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1608 that the game is a short-time game (Y1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (Y1609). In the process of Y1609, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (Y1609: Yes), the process of Y1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (Y1609: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 90C) Based on the above, the determination result is obtained (Y1610).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (Y1612), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (ie, it is out of place) (Y1612: No), the display mode of “x” which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (Y1615), and the process proceeds to Y1616. On the other hand, in the process of Y1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (Y1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of win is “◯” Is set (Y1613).

  Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (Y1614). Then, in the process of Y1616 executed after the process of Y1614 or Y1615 is executed, the common figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g (see FIG. 95) is read (Y1616), and the common figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is read from the read common figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g. The variation time corresponding to this value is set (Y1617), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (Y107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (Y107). This through gate passing process (Y107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passing of the game ball is determined. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 116, Y107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 2030e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Y1702). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 2030e is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Y1703).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 2030e is not less than 4 (Y1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 2030e is less than 4 (Y1703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 2030e is incremented by 1 (Y1704).

  When the processing of Y1704 is finished, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in Y103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) is used as the empty reserved area (holding first 1) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c of the RAM 2030. The area is stored in the first area (Y1705), and the process is terminated. In the process of Y1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the second entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state.

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal map, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal map but also the electric accessory 1640a when the normal map is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second entrance 1640 (entrance associated with the electric accessory 1640 a) is on the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aimed at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball enters the second entrance 1640.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 2030 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Y1801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 118), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Y1901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (Y1902). Then, access to the RAM 2030 is permitted (Y1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Y1904). If it is turned on (Y1904: Yes), the process proceeds to Y1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information about occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905). (Y1905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to Y1910.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Y1906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Y1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to Y1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 2030. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 2030 is correctly stored.

  In the process of Y1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Y1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (Y1911, Y1912) of RAM 2030.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 2030 initialization process (Y1911, Y1912) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (Y1911, Y1912) of the RAM 2030 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (Y1911, Y1912), the used area of the RAM 2030 is cleared to 0 (Y1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 2030 is set (Y1912). After the initialization processing of the RAM 2030, the process proceeds to Y1913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (Y1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (Y1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 2030 is held (Y1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (Y1909), and the process proceeds to Y1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (Y1913). Thereafter, each value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g is read (Y1914), and a status command is set based on the read counter value (Y1915). When the process of Y1915 ends, an interrupt is permitted (Y1916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process (Y2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process (Y2000). In this main process (Y2000), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 119, Y2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (Y2001).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Y2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Y2003) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (Y2004). The jackpot control process (Y2004) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 120, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (Y2004) is executed, the small hit control process (Y2005) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (Y2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (Y2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. Then, the display control process of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (Y2007).

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Y2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 receives the value. The second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is reached, the electric accessory 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (Y2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (Y2010: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2001, and the processes after Y2001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (Y2010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Y2011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y2011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of Y2002 (Y2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of Y2001 to Y2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of Y2009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 117 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after Y2013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Y2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (Y2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (Y2015), access to the RAM 2030 is prohibited (Y2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area to be backed up in the RAM 2030.

  The process of Y2009 is the timing at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at Y2001 to Y2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of Y2011 and Y2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It is possible to start from the processing of Y2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Y2001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (FIG. 118, Y1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of Y2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (Y2004). This jackpot control process (Y2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (Y2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (Y2101: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y2101 that the jackpot scenario is set (Y2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (Y2102), and it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening of the jackpot scenario (Y2103). ). More specifically, in the process of Y2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of Y2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of Y2103, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (Y2103: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (Y2104), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is not reached (Y2103: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105).

  In the process of Y2105, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (Y2106), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2105 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied ( Y2107). Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (Y2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of Y2108 (the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a) The solenoid is turned off so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from Y2105 to Y2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2107, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (Y2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (Y2109: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (Y2110), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y2109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Y2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of Y2111, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (Y2111: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (Y2112), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process (Y2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (Y21111: No), the first winning process is executed (Y2113), and this process ends. Details of the first winning process (Y2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 121, Y2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of starting jackpot rounds is set is read (Y2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 77) is set based on the data read in Y2201 (Y2202), and then the specific winning opening 65a (the open / close plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached thereto) is set. The release operation is set by the data read in the process of Y2201 (Y2203), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the jackpot end process (Y2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (Y2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112).

  In the jackpot end process (FIG. 122, Y2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 2030n (Y2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2302). If it is determined in the process of Y2302 that the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2302: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V passing switch 65e3 during the current big hit, and therefore the value of the probability variation counter 2030k. Is set to 120 (Y2303).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the game state at the time of winning is not a latent state (Y2304). In the process of Y2304, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (Y2304: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpots B to D (Y2305). If the jackpot is not B to D (Y2305: No), 120 is set to the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g (Y2306), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y2302 that the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) (Y2303: No), or in the process of Y2304, the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state. If it is determined (Y2304: Yes), or in the process of Y2305, if it is a big hit BD (Y2305: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2307. Thereby, when the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state and when the game ball does not pass the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot B to D, the probability variation state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot A, 120 chance variation states and 100 time-short states are set after the jackpot.

  In the process of Y2307, the big hit medium flag 2030u and the V winning flag 2030f are both set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 2030n is cleared (Y2307). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (Y2308), and this process ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on, and if it is on, the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state is set to the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set. A corresponding value (120) is set. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the V-pass switch 65e3 and to set a high-probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3). Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game In addition, it is possible to play a game with interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the value is changed to the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly counter 2030g. Is not set, that is, the normal gaming state ST1 is set after the jackpot game, but not limited thereto, for example, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (FIG. 122, Y2303: No), a predetermined value (for example, 50) may be set in the hour / hour counter 2030g. Thus, even when the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a predetermined privilege (less than when the game ball passes through the V pass switch 65e3) is given to the player. It becomes possible.

  Further, when it is determined in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the type of the jackpot won this time is determined, and the jackpot won this time Only when it is determined that the type is a jackpot type (see FIG. 91 (a)) in which the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set so that a game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3, a predetermined value is set in the hour / hour counter 2030g. (For example, 50) may be set. By configuring in this way, a plurality of different benefits (games set after the end of the jackpot) corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game contents during the jackpot game (whether or not the game ball passes to the V pass switch 65e3) (The degree of advantage of the state) can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the first winning process (Y2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (Y2113). This first winning process (Y2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) and, as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port (large opening) 65a. is there.

  In the first winning process (FIG. 123, Y2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (Y2401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. It is. In the process of Y2401, if it is not the round effective period (Y2401: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2402), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2401 that the current period is the round effective period (Y2401: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403), If no winning at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2403, if a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (Y2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h and updated (Y2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (Y2405), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( Y2405: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set. (Y2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408). If the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) (Y2408: No), it is determined whether the V pass switch 65e3 is on (Y2409). In the process of Y2409, when the V-pass switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (Y2409: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of Y2409, when the V pass switch 65e3 is on (Y2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on. Then, a V winning command is set and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the small hit control process (Y2005) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 119) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (Y2005).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 124, Y2005), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (Y2501). Specifically, the process of Y1404 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 113) is executed to determine whether or not the small hit scenario is set. In the process of Y2501, if the small hit scenario is not set (Y2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of Y2501 (Y2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (Y2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503). More specifically, in the process of Y2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of Y2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the process of Y2503, if it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503: Yes), a small hit opening command is set (Y2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (Y2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505).

  In the process of Y2505, when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (Y2506), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting action setting process (Y2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507). Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of Y2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of Y2508 (first The solenoid is set to OFF so that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (Y2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509).

  In the process of Y2509, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (Y2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (Y2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  In the process of Y2511, when it is determined that it is the small hitting end timing (Y2511: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 2030v is set to OFF (Y2512), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (Y2511: No), the second winning process is executed (Y2513), and this process is terminated. Details of the second winning process (Y2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the small hitting operation setting process (Y2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 124, Y2005) is demonstrated. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting action setting process (Y2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 125, Y2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small rounds to be started is set is read (Y2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached thereto) is set by the data read in the process of Y2601 (Y2602), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, the details of the second winning process (Y2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (Y2513). This second winning process (Y2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 124), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (FIG. 126, Y2513), first, it is determined whether the current round period is valid (Y2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of Y2701, if it is not the round valid period (Y2701: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2702), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2701 that the current period is the round effective period (Y2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Y2703), and then the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (Y2703: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Y2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h and updated (Y2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (Y2705), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( Y2705: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (Y2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Y4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of Y4116 (see FIG. 128) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (Y4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 128, Y4113), it executes the power-off processing of Y4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of Y4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (Y4002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 2230 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 2230 by the process of Y4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 2230. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 2230 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 2230 is confirmed (Y4003: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2004, and initialization of the RAM 2230 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 2230 is not confirmed (Y4003: No), the process proceeds to Y4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230 (the memory of the RAM 2230 is lost due to power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Y4004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the execution of the power-off process of Y4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230, the data in the RAM 2230 is determined to be normal (Y4003: No), and the process proceeds to Y4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (Y4002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Y4116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 2230 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to Y4004 and initialization of the RAM 2230 is started.

  In the process of Y4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 2230 is checked (Y4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 2230 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 2230 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 2230 and the RAM destruction check data is set (Y4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 2230. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 2230 is notified (Y4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 2230 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 2230, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of Y4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Y4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Y4116 is executed (see Y4115 in FIG. 128). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Y4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process of Y4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Y4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared (Y4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 2230 is set (Y4010). The state setting area is updated based on the command (Y4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (Y4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 2230 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of Y4008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the process of Y4004 to Y4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: No), Y4009 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 2230 is skipped, the process proceeds to Y4010, and the initial value of the RAM 2230 is set (Y4010).

  Note that the Y4009 clear process is skipped because when the process from Y4004 to the process of Y4006 is reached via the process of Y4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 have already been cleared by the process of Y4004. When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 2230 is stored without being cleared, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous Y4101 process was executed (Y4101). If the time has not elapsed (Y4101: No), the process proceeds to Y4111 without performing Y4102 to Y4110. In the process of Y4101, it is Y4102 to Y4110 that is related to display (production) that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Y4111 and the fluctuation display setting process of Y4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Y4101 (Y4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Y4103 to Y4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( Y4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Y4108 described later are set (Y4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Y4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to the process of Y4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of Y4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (Y4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Y4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (Y4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (Y4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of Y4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Y4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to Y4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of Y4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of Y4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (Y4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to a process of Y4112. Details of this command determination processing (Y4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Y4112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of Y4112 ends, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (Y4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Y4113 (Y4113: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off processing flag are turned on (Y4115), and the power off processing is executed (Y4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (Y4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of Y4113 (Y4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 2230 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 2230 (Y4114), and the RAM 2230 is destroyed. If not (Y4114: No), the process returns to Y4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 2230 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the customer waiting effect process (Y4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process (Y4105). This customer waiting effect processing (Y4105) includes a sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j which is set to ON when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main controller 110 is received. FIG. 2 The processing for setting the standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 2230m. Details of the customer waiting effect process (Y4105) will be described below.

  In the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 129, Y4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201). When it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201: Yes), the value of the special special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is updated (Y4202). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value of the special figure 1 stand-by counter 2230k is an upper limit (Y4203). Here, in this embodiment, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k. That is, the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k reaches the upper limit). Has been.

  When the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is less than the upper limit value (Y4203: No), the process proceeds to Y4205.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is the upper limit value (Y4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF (Y4204), and the process proceeds to Y4205. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to OFF in the process of Y4204, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that a later-described special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON, When the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  In the process of Y4201, if it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4201: No), the process of Y4202 to Y4204 is performed. Skip to Y4205.

  In the process of Y4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4205: Yes), the value of the special special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is updated (Y4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (30000) (Y4207). When the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is less than the upper limit value (Y4207: No), the process proceeds to Y4209.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4207, when the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (Y4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON, the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF (Y4208), and the process proceeds to Y4209. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to OFF in the process of Y4208, for example, when the display standby display command is set based on the setting of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, the special figure 2 When the standby flag 2230t is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  Also, in the process of Y4205, if it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4205: No), Y4206 and Y4207 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4209.

  In the process of Y4209, it is determined whether or not the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209). If it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209: Yes), the process of Y4211 to Y4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped, and this process ends. That is, the state in which the standby setting flag 2230u is set to ON is a state in which the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of each special figure has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, the processing load for setting the standby display type can be reduced by configuring so as not to execute the process for setting the standby display type when it is determined that the state is such a state.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 133, in the present embodiment, a new special figure fluctuation occurs when the standby flag (the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to ON. Even when a command indicating that it has been started (a special chart standby command indicating OFF) is received, processing for setting the standby setting flag 2230u to OFF is executed. Therefore, since the standby display type can always be reset every time the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changed, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) can be executed more appropriately.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (Y4210).

  In the process of Y4210, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4210: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 2230i is read (Y4211). . The standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) based on the read gaming state and the setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t (Y4212).

  Next, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set based on the determined standby display type (Y4213). Thereafter, the standby setting flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4214), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a command determination process (Y4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (Y4111). This command determination processing (Y4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (Y4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (Y4111), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 2230a provided in the RAM 2230, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (Y4302), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4301 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received. It is determined (Y4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of Y4303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (Y4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4304) and received. The fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (Y4305), and this process is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (Y4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4306). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4307), and the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (Y4308), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Y4306: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4309). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (Y4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved symbols of the special symbol variation display) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c provided in the RAM 2230 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value ( Y4310), the process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) reserved ball counter 2230c is set in the process of Y4310. Only the updating process is executed.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). Therefore, every time there is a starting win, the processing of Y4310 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 2030d.

  In the process of Y4309, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (Y4309: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4311). If it is determined in the process of Y4311 that a prize information command has been received (Y4311: Yes), the information on the received prize information command (whether special symbol lottery wins, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponding prize information The storage area 2230b is set (Y4312), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4311 that no winning information command has been received (Y4311: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Y4313). If it is determined that a status command is received (Y4313: Yes), status command processing (Y4314) is executed. Details of this state command process (Y4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 132, but based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of pachinko machine 10 is described. A process of setting (status) in the status setting area 2230i is executed.

  In the process of Y4313, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (Y4313: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command has been received from the main control device 110 (Y4315). . In the process of Y4315, if it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received (Y4315: Yes), the customer standby command process (Y4316) is executed. The details of the customer waiting command process (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. Based on the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main controller 110, the special figure 1 is shown in FIG. Processing for setting the standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is executed.

  In the process of Y4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (Y4315: No), the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining short time number command is received from the main controller 110. It is discriminated whether or not (Y4317). In the process of Y4315, when it is determined that either the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining short time number command has been received (Y4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (Y4318) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 134, but based on the remaining probability variable number command or remaining short time number command output from the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 A process for setting the contents of the effect display for display on the screen is executed.

  In the process of Y4317, when it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number command nor the remaining short time number command is received (Y4317: No), the process according to the other command is executed (Y4319), and this process is terminated. To do. In the process of Y4319, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 2230, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (Y4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (Y4302). This stop type command reception process (Y4302) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (Y4302) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 131, Y4302), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is set to ON, When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to ON. (Y4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (Y4402). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in Y4402 is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the state command process (Y4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (Y4314). This state command process (Y4314) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (Y4314) will be described below.

  In the state command processing (FIG. 132, Y4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 2230i provided in the RAM 2230 (Y4501). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command is received. Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (Y4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (Y4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a shift to the latent state (Y4503). In the process of Y4503, if the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (Y4503: Yes), a latent state notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (Y4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y4505), and the process proceeds to Y4506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 4502 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (Y4502: Yes), or the received command causes the transition to the latent state in the process of Y4503. If the status command is not shown (Y4503: No), the process proceeds to Y4506.

  In the process of Y4506, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4506), and this process ends.

  As described above, the state command process (Y4314) in the present embodiment is based on the gaming state set in the state setting area 2230i and the gaming state indicated by the state command output from the main controller 110. The remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state, and the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state. A process of controlling “120” as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 85A). On the other hand, when the big win is won during the latent state and the latent state is set again after the big hit game is finished, it is determined in the process of Y4502 that the latent state is set in the state setting area 2230i (Y4502). : Yes), in order to skip the processes of Y4504 and Y4505, the number of effect probabilities displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). There is nothing. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state, and the actual number of times of accuracy change is reset (set to 120 times), the display of the number of stage changes will be the same as the value displayed before winning the jackpot. Will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability changes (remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number of effect probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 85 (a)) (actual residual probability variation number). It is possible to make the player difficult to understand the timing when the latent state ends.

  In the state command processing (Y4314 in FIG. 132) described above, the number of times (120 times) that is the same as the actual number of times of change (120 times) of the third symbol display device 81 is increased when entering the latent state. Although it is configured so as to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual number of probability changes may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Next, the standby command process (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this standby command process (Y4316). This status command process (Y4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110. Based on (the special figure 1 standby command and the special figure 2 standby command), a process for setting the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t to ON or OFF is executed. The setting states of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are referred to in the above-described customer standby effect processing (see Y4105 in FIG. 129).

  When the standby command process (Y4316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 standby command has been received (Y4601). If it is determined in the process of Y4601 that the special figure 1 standby command has been received (Y4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4602), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (Y4601: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is turned off has been received. (Y4603). In the process of Y4603, when it is determined that a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is turned off has been received (Y4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (Y4604). ), The special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is reset (Y4605). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON (Y4606).

  In the process of Y4606, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON (Y4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to OFF. (Y4607), this process is terminated.

  That is, in the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on (the state where the special figure 1 has not changed and 30 seconds have passed), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to off. When a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 1 has been executed is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set off and the standby set flag 2230u is set off. In the customer standby effect process (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is off has not been received (Y4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (Y4608). In the process of Y4608, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is received (Y4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4609), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4608 that the special figure 2 standby command has not been received (Y4608: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has been received. (Y4610). In the process of Y4610, when it is determined that a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is turned off has been received (Y4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (Y4611). ), The special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is reset (Y4612). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4613).

  In the process of Y4613, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (Y4613: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to OFF. (Y4614), this process is terminated.

  That is, in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (a state where 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 changing), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to OFF. When a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 has been executed is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to OFF and the standby set flag 2230u is set to OFF. In the customer standby effect process (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4610, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has not been received (Y4610: No), this process ends.

  Next, the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (Y4318). This remaining number update process (Y4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and the remaining probability variable number command is sent from the main controller 110. Or based on receiving a short time remaining command. Processing for updating the contents set in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o, the effect probability variation number area 2230p, and the remaining short number of times area 2230q is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (Y4318), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4651). If it is determined in the process of Y4651 that the remaining probability variation command has been received (Y4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation area 2230o (Y4652). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653).

  That is, in the process of Y4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent probability state or the probability variation state, and if it is determined that it is the latent probability state, an effect display dedicated to the latent state will be described later. The process for executing is executed. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is determined to be in the probability variation state, the same effect display is executed in the probability variation state and the normal state, and thus this process is terminated without executing the dedicated effect display. To do.

  In the processing of Y4653, when it is determined that data indicating the latent state is stored (set) in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653: Yes), the remaining probability variation number notified (received) from the main control device 110 Is zero times (Y4654). In the process of Y4654, when it is determined that the remaining probability change number notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 0 (Y4654: Yes), an end effect of the latent state to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (Y4657). Then, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 2230i, and the processing proceeds to Y4661.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4654, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (Y4654: No), the effect probability variation count area The display count stored in 2230p is decremented by 1 (Y4657). And it is discriminate | determined whether the production | generation probability change frequency after subtraction is 0 times (Y4658). In the process of Y4658, when it is determined that the number of effect probability changes after subtraction is zero (Y4658: Yes), the number of remaining probability change frequency areas 2230o is set in the effect probability change frequency area 2230p (Y4659). Thereafter, a restoration effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set (Y4660), and the process proceeds to Y4661.

  That is, when the actual probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) stored (set) in the residual probability variation count area is 1 or more and the production probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) becomes zero. In order to notify the player that the latent state continues, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect displayed on D1 (revival effect) is executed.

  By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the timing at which the latent state ends, and to increase the remaining number of remaining effects after making the player think that the latent state has ended. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which this revival effect is executed is assumed to be when the effect probability change count (effect residual change count) is 0, but other configurations may be used. On the condition that (the number of remaining production changes) is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 5), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the revival effect, and the revival effect is executed based on the lottery result. May be. Thereby, the game can be performed while predicting at which timing (special figure fluctuation) the revival effect will occur with respect to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the revival effect may not be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, but may be executed, for example, using the ending period of the small hit game. In this case, on the condition that the production probability variation number (production residual variation number) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent state is not confirmed is displayed), It is desirable to perform a revival effect. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the restoration effect can be executed as the special figure variation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Further, it may be configured such that the long variation time during which the revival effect can be executed is set as the special figure variation time only in the final stage (for example, the actual remaining probability variation number is 10 or less) in the latent state. As a result, a display state in which the revival effect can be executed (a state in which a display state indicating that the probability probability variation number (the effect residual variation number) is 0 (or that the latent probability state has not been determined) is displayed is displayed. )) Is less likely to be executed, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the rebirth effect can be executed in the early stage of the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the variable display setting process (Y4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Y4112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is off (Y4701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to Y4705. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is on (Y4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is set to off (Y4702).

  Next, in the process of Y4703, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command in the process of Y4303 in the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 2230. Obtained from 2230z, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is generated (Y4703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of Y4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 and displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, so that the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. The display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 2230b is shifted (Y4704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not on (that is, off) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, process Y4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is on (Y4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to off (Y4706). In the process of Y4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230, and the second (2) A special pattern display variation pattern command is set (Y4707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of Y4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230 and displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It transmits to the control apparatus 114. The display control device 114 receives the second special symbol display variation pattern command to receive the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 2230b is shifted (Y4708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to ON (Y4709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (Y4709: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on (Y2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g to off (Y4710).

  In the process of Y4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (Y4711), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 149. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (Y6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (Y6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Y6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Y6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Y6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Y6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Y6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Y6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see Y6001 in FIG. 136). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) (Y6105), the boot program execution is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (Y6001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 137, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Y6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Y6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of Y6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Also, the boot program transferred by the processing of Y6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Y6101. And Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the process of Y6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 without performing the processes of Y6101 and Y6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Y6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Y6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of Y6003, then the power-on variation image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b when the power is turned on in the resident video RAM 235 (Y6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of Y6004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (Y6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 147 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see Y7502 in FIG. 147 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of Y6005, interrupt permission is set (Y6006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Y6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (a). FIG. 138 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Y6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (b). FIG. 138 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (Y6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (Y6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Y6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (Y6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143.

  In the display setting process (Y6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Y6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (Y6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Y6303) or the simple display setting process (Y6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Y6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (Y6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Y6305) are used. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (Y6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Y6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of Y6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Y6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Y6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (Y6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 139, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Y6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (Y6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Y6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Y6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Y6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Y6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (Y6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (Y6405), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (Y6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (Y6405). This variation pattern command processing (Y6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (Y6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of Y6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Y6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (Y6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Y6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of Y6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Y6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. If it is determined in the process of Y6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (Y6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Y6406). If there is a display stop type command (Y6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Y6407), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (Y6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (Y6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (Y6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed in 81 is finally set (Y6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Y6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. Set to ON (Y6603) and return to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Y6602 is described. In the task processing (Y6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Y6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Y6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of Y6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of Y6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y6406 that there is no display stop type command (Y6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (Y6408). If there is an opening command for use (Y6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (Y6409), and the process returns to the process of Y6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (Y6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a). FIG. 141A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (Y6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display opening command in the process of Y6408 (Y6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (Y6410). If there is a round number command for use (Y6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (Y6411), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the round number command process (Y6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (Y6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of Y6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (Y6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (Y6412). If there is an ending command for use (Y6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (Y6413), and the processing returns to Y6401.

  Details of the ending command process (Y6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (Y6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( Y6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of Y6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (Y6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (Y6414). If there is a change command (Y6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (Y6415), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (Y6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (Y7503) of the change of the back image due to reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (Y7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (Y7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of Y7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of Y7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by Y7002, The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the back image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of Y7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. In the process of Y6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (Y6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (Y6416), and there is an error command. If (Y6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (Y6417), and the process returns to Y6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 143 (b), details of the error command processing (Y6417) will be described. FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and other error determination flags are set to OFF (Y7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Y7101 process, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the Y7102 process is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in Y7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Y6416 (Y6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (Y6418), and the process returns to Y6401.

  In the process of Y6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes). ), The processing of Y6402 to Y6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of Y6401 to Y6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of Y6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the simple command determination process (Y6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 140 (b)), and for other commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in Y6501 processing. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Y6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the contents are cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (Y6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 144, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Y7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of Y7202 to Y7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to Y7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (Y7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (Y7202), and then Y7203 to Y7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of Y7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Y7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (Y7301).

  In the task processing (Y6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of Y7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Y7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (Y7204) or in the process of Y7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7203: No), the process proceeds to Y7205.

  In Y7205, pointer update processing is executed (Y7205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Y7401). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Y7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (Y7402). As a result, if it is End information (Y7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Y7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (Y7403: Yes), display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Y7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Y7405), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (Y7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( Y7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Y7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Y7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7206). In the task process (Y6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of Y7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (Y7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Y7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Y7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Y7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag is on. (Y7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (Y7209: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Y7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Y7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Y7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the changing effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (Y6304), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by Y7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (Y7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Y7216). If the demo display flag is off (Y7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7217), and the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Y7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of Y7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (Y7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new variation pattern command for display is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (Y6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147 and FIG. 148, details of the transfer setting process (Y6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 147 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (Y7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of Y7501, that is, if it is off (Y7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Y7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Y7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (b). FIG. 147 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (Y7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (Y7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (Y7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (Y7602). In the process of Y7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Y7602 (Y7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Y7602: Yes), the process proceeds to Y7603. Also, as a result of the process of Y7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Y7601: No), the process proceeds to Y7603.

  In the process of Y7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Y7603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Y7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information related to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of Y7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (Y7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Y7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) (see Y7501: No in FIG. 147 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (Y7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Y7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Y7205) of the display setting process (Y6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (Y7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Y7702). If it is transfer data information (Y7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. First address (storage source start address) and last address (storage source last address) and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (Y7703), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7704), and the process proceeds to Y7705.

  In the process of Y7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Y7702: No), the processes of Y7703 and Y7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y7705. In the process of Y7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (Y7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If yes (Y7705: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (Y7706).

  In the process of Y7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of Y7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Y7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Y7706: Yes), the process proceeds to Y7707. Also, as a result of the process of Y7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Y7705: No), the process proceeds to Y7707.

  In the process of Y7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Y7707). If the transfer start flag is on (Y7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Y7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Y7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to the process of Y7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Y7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (Y7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (Y7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (Y7709: Yes), this means that the back image has been changed. Among the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (Y7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (Y7712), and the process proceeds to Y7713.

  In the process of Y7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Y7713). The determination in the process of Y7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “on”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Y7713 (Y7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Y7713 (Y7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (Y7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of Y7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Y7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed previously, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above drawing process (Y6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set in the transfer setting process (Y6305), a drawing list (FIG. 23) is generated (Y7801). That is, in the process of Y7801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Y6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the front side from the sprite that should be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Y6305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Y7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of Y7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (Y7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if the value is "0" and setting it to "0" if it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the three gaming states of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state are configured to come and go with a jackpot or the like as a trigger. Then, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games The lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, it will be a small win with a high probability, and the probability of a big win will also be increased, so that the ball is awarded to the specific winning opening 65a and the winning ball It is possible to increase the number of opportunities for acquiring the game game compared to other game states. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of shifting to the latent state.

  Moreover, in this 3rd Embodiment, it is set as the structure which switches the classification of the special symbol in which a lottery is easy to be performed according to a game state (it switches a main variation and a sub variation). Specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation in the latent certain state. In each gaming state, if the elapsed time after the main variation has stopped is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), even if the secondary variation is being executed, a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state is displayed. (Customer waiting demonstration screen, latent demonstration display) is displayed. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a certain time has elapsed since entering a variable stop state, it is determined that the player is not playing a game and a demonstration display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being performed based on the presence or absence of a demonstration display. The game can be started on the machine. Thereby, the operating rate improvement of a gaming machine can be aimed at.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine having specifications in which a plurality of symbols fluctuate simultaneously, even if some symbols are in a variable stop state, as long as other symbols fluctuate. , Could not run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player searching for a vacant stand to determine whether or not it is a vacant stand from the display content.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the normal state or the probability variation state, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demonstration screen according to only the main variation state (regardless of the sub variation state). . As a result, even if the player puts the ball into the second entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after starting the display of fluctuation for 600 seconds, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a demo display (special display) of a special mode in which the same character 811 is continuously displayed when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation is stopped in the latent state. The configuration is set. That is, the display contents of the same system are used during normal display and during demonstration display. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, since the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

  Further, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment. . Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, a special reach effect is developed in which a new symbol string enters the frame and develops into a reach effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols that can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviation, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, it is configured so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 1640 in the probability variation state, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 rather than the second entrance 1640 in the normal state or the latent state. May be configured to facilitate the entry of the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state or the latent probability state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. Alternatively, a variation pattern in which the variation time is extremely short (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 2020f3 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment may be interchanged. Also, if the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to F) in the probability variation state, if the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, set the number of time reductions 120 times, in the normal state and the latent state, It is good also as a structure which sets the number of time reductions 0 times. As a result, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation state, the gaming state after the big hit is easily set to the probability variation state again (it becomes easy to loop the probability variation state), so that the superiority of the probability variation state is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state instead of the latent state or the probability variation state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A2020f1 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment are exchanged, and the normal state is likely to be looped in the big hit in the normal state (the V pass switch 65e3 is It is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type (which is difficult to pass), and in the latent state or probability change state, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the opening / closing pattern through which the ball easily passes. Also good.

  In the third embodiment, among the opening / closing patterns set for the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball passing through the V-pass switch 65e3 is regarded as a pattern that is difficult to pass, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round. The open / close pattern to be set is provided, but the open period may be shortened to reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. Although it is configured to face the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only a main symbol that is reached when a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in) (in the example of FIG. 83 (a), the main symbol with the number “1”) is the new symbol row L4. You may comprise so that it may look up at. Further, for example, the main symbol other than the main symbol to which the reach is applied may be configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the number of main symbols in a form in which a new symbol row L4 is looked up. That is, the higher the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach production. In this case, when all the main symbols look up to the new symbol row L4, the jackpot may be determined (for example, selected only in the case of a win super reach). By configuring in this way, when a symbol that has been changed is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment, attention can be paid to the aspect of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in games can be improved. .

  In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are directed to the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach effect may be made based on the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4. In other words, the higher the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which suggests the expectation degree by which the reservation ball | bowl corresponding to a reservation symbol becomes a big hit instead of suggesting the big hit expectation degree in a special reach production with the number of reservation symbols. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 2230b, the change pattern of each reserved ball is prefetched, and the change pattern (outgoing super reach or winning super reach) held in the reserved ball is developed. If it is determined that a sphere is included, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that develops into the super reach effect performs an effect of directing in the direction of the new symbol row L4 when temporarily stopped in the special reach effect. It is good also as a structure. Thereby, at the time of a temporary stop in special super reach production, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the reserved symbols, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the third embodiment, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is configured to scroll in parallel with the symbol rows L1 to L3. However, the new symbol row L4 is However, it is not always necessary to scroll and display the symbol rows L1 to L3. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right or left side of each symbol row L1 to L3, and scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each symbol row L1 to L3). Thereby, the freedom degree of the effect when the special reach effect is selected can be further increased. Further, the number of new symbol sequences is not limited to one, and when a special reach effect is executed, a plurality of symbol sequences may be newly displayed. By adopting a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, it is possible to increase combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can be developed into special reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that may develop into a special reach when stopping at a stop symbol corresponding to a departure, so that the player can further develop into a special reach effect. Can be expected with high frequency. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, a result display (see FIG. 86 (b)) showing the result of the latent state is basically performed from the end of the latent state until the first special symbol fluctuation display is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result display of the latent state may be performed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the third embodiment, after the latent state is completed, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over the two special symbol lotteries, but this is not limited to 12 seconds. The display may be arbitrarily set (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) as long as the display can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

  In the third embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In addition, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won for the big hit or the small hit, the other special symbol is the big hit or the small hit until the stoppage of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. For example, it may be configured such that a forced lottery that is not won is executed and the lottery result is surely missed. Thereby, the situation where both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol win a big hit or a small win can be suppressed. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining short time number are not subtracted based on the number of times that the forced lottery is executed. Thereby, a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 181. In the third embodiment described above, the first entrance 64 where the ball is easy to enter by left-handed and the second entrance 1640 where the ball is easy to enter by right-handed are provided. In the normal state and the probability change state to be executed, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 is mainly executed (special figure 1). In the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the entrance of the ball into the second entrance 1640 is mainly performed. The game to be executed (see Fig. 2 substantially variable game) is configured to be executed. Then, in the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is used for a predetermined period (for example, the lottery in FIG. 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640, for example, , About 1.65 seconds) The small hit that is in an open state is set (the lottery probability is about ½), and it is configured to be able to expect a lottery with a small hit.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that both the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG. By setting the time to be shorter than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1, the lottery of FIG. 2 is more easily executed than that of FIG. 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and short time state of normal symbol) is shorter than the number of times the high probability state of special symbol is set (for example, 120 times). (For example, 100 times), and when the number of special drawing lotteries (number of times of fluctuation of the special figure) exceeds 100 in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is changed to the latent state. .

  In addition, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the variation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the latent certain state. The degree of occurrence of the small hit in the latent state is varied depending on the situation. Specifically, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state immediately after starting the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the fluctuation due to the first special symbol will continue until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next time. Is executed, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the latent state is reduced, and as a result, the occurrence degree of the small hit can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is in the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or if it shifts to the latent state near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol is immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the change of the symbol is started, the occurrence degree of the small hit can be increased as a result. In addition, as will be described in detail later, in a region where the ball is launched by right-handed (right-handed region), a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b Is provided so that the ball cannot enter only one entrance (for example, the second entrance 1640b) (so as to be difficult).

  By configuring in this way, as in the above-described third embodiment, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is the most advantageous game state for the player and improve the player's motivation for the game. it can. In addition, since the degree of advantage (the degree of occurrence of small hits) when changing from the probabilistic state to the latent state can be varied depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide more complex gaming characteristics to the player, Can be prevented from getting bored early. In addition, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b that executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball and the second entrance 1640b that executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Is provided in the right-handed area, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and an excessively advantageous state for the player. It can suppress giving.

  Furthermore, in 3rd Embodiment, it comprises so that a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may perform lottery simultaneously (execution of a fluctuation | variation), and the lottery result of any one special symbol (for example, 2nd special symbol) Is a win (big hit or small win), and when the symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the winning is determined), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is off It was configured to be forcibly stopped with symbols.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result of that win is shown. When the symbol is stopped (when the winning is determined), the measurement (count) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed. It is configured to resume measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted at the timing when the winning game based on the timing is finished (timing at which the variation of the special symbol is possible).

  As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute a lottery (execution of fluctuation) at the same time, the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can play the game. It can be made not to be dissatisfied with it.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in terms of the configuration in the game board 13 where the variable winning device 65 is left-placed from the right-handed area. And a point where the right-handed ball has moved to the lower center area where the ball can be entered, a point where a sorting unit 660 is provided in place of the second entrance 1640, and the ball to the second entrance 1640 The content of the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of the ball into the sorting unit 660 is provided instead of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts the entry. The content of the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the third embodiment. The point that the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the content of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed And the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 150, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 150, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is arranged at the position (the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right-handed region)) where the variable winning device 65 is arranged in the third embodiment. The second entry that is provided on the downstream side of the right-handed region (the lower right side of the board surface 13) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the opening 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the central area of the board (below the first entrance 64). Although details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in an upper part thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, a right first entrance 64b where a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. The second ball entrance 1640b is provided, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 via the passage port is distributed to one of these entrances. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by hitting the ball toward the sorting unit 660 by hitting right.

  Further, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f that can be changed between a permissible position that allows a ball to flow into a passage port provided in the upper part of the sorting unit 660 and a regulating position that regulates the ball is arranged. Yes. This electric accessory 660f is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the third embodiment described above for a predetermined period when the result of the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is a hit. It is controlled so as to change to the allowable position (1 second x 2 times). As a result, in the normal state, a game in which a left strike is performed in a normal state (hereinafter referred to as a left strike game), and a game in which a right strike is performed in a direction aiming at the first entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as a right strike game) The first special symbol can be changed more efficiently than aiming at the entrance 64b.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 151A and 151B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is made of a member that can see through the inside, and a spiral pattern is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), an upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passage opening through which a sphere can enter, and transmission that can detect that the sphere has passed through the passage opening. A type of incoming ball sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage opening, a sorting member 900 is provided for distributing the sphere to the right first entrance 64b or the second entrance 1640b. A right first entrance 64b is disposed in the lower left direction of the sorting member 900 in front view, and a second entrance 1640b is disposed in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 in front view. The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed to the right first entry opening 64b and the second entry opening 1640b by the sorting member 900.

  The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the entire sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front depending on the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined in a downward direction toward the lower left (see FIG. 151 (b)), and the right first incoming ball disposed in the lower left direction in front view with respect to the sorting member 900. A sphere falls toward the mouth 64b (the sphere is guided to the right first entrance 64b).

  Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c. ing. On the other hand, the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660 is in a state in which the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surfaces constituting the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c are horizontal). In this state, the base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the back side (on the center line of the passage opening) where the magnet 900b is disposed.

  The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet is positioned at a position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is located directly above (on the center line of the space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about 1 ball). The position 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since each magnet is arrange | positioned so that it may become the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), it repels and it may stop in the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces right above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either right or left.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 900 is in a position (upward position) where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port, the distribution member 900 is repelled by the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901. The storage unit 900a and the storage unit 900c turn toward the receiving side of the ball entering the sorting unit 660 (the passing port side of the sorting unit 660). Therefore, it is possible to reliably distribute the balls that have entered the distribution unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b.

  In addition, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, so that, for example, the receiving portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the right first entrance 64b. It is possible to prevent the minute member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the sphere to the first right entrance 64b, the storage portion 900c is directed upward, and the storage portion 900c receives and receives the sphere that has entered the distribution unit 660. Since the sorting member 900 is rotated about 30 degrees clockwise by the weight of the container, the accommodating part 900c is inclined in a direction inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the ball falls from the accommodating part 900c Then, the ball enters the second entrance 1640b (the sphere is guided to the second entrance 1640b). As described above, since the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the sorting unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, the right first entrance The balls can be equally distributed to the 64b and the second entrance 1640b for winning. Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

  A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the sorting member 900 and the right first entrance 64b to guide the sphere contained in the housing 900a to the right first entrance 64b. A guide plate 900Z2 is provided between the member 900 and the second entrance 1640b to guide the sphere contained in the accommodation portion 900a to the second entrance 1640b. Thereby, the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the respective entrances.

  Further, a restriction member (not shown) for restricting the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided on the upper end side (the distribution member 900 side) of each guide plate 900z1 and 900z2, and the distribution member 900 and the restriction plate are restricted. The rotation range is regulated by contacting the member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sorting member 900 from rotating excessively (rotating further counterclockwise than the state shown in FIG. 151 (b)) due to the weight of the sphere accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the entrances.

<Game description of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 159, the contents of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described. In 4th Embodiment, the point which changed the transition ratio to each game state (a normal state, a probability change state, a latent probability state) with respect to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, and the time reduction number given in a probability change state were changed. When the point, the time when the variation time of each special symbol in the probability variation state and the latent probability state is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at the winning symbol Suspended (temporarily stopped) the measurement of the variation time for the other special symbol variation at the displayed timing (timing of winning), and the suspended variation time after the winning game ended based on the lottery result of one special symbol This is different in that a configuration for restarting the measurement is used.

  First, with reference to FIG. 152, the flow of the game state transition in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment shifts between three gaming states (normal state, probability change state, and latent probability state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above. It is configured.

  Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above. Has been. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantially special figure 1 variation). Further, in the present embodiment, since the small win is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), the small hit game is not executed.

  Next, in the probability variation state (probability variation gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than that in the third embodiment described above, and the right region of the board surface 13 (the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). ) (Hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game is executed in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed simultaneously by flowing a ball into the sorting unit 660. Details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is used as the variation time of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the probability variation state. The short-time fluctuation (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 and the long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 are set and executed in the probability variation state according to the selected fluctuation time. The lottery (variation) ratio is set differently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times (100 times) is set smaller than the number of times (120 times) the probability variation state is set as the number of time reductions in the probability variation state. Therefore, in the probability variation state, when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent probability state (20 times). Yes. Thus, for example, even after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if it shifts to the probable change state instead of the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, it does not go through the special symbol jackpot Since it becomes possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the short time fluctuation (3 seconds) and the long time fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the special symbol during the probability variation state is special. When the number of symbol changes exceeds 100 and the game state transitions from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times), depending on the second special symbol's state of change, a small hit will occur during the latent state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the short-time state ends when the long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol starts and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state, The timing at which the next change is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 162 (a)) in the probability variation state and 5 seconds (see FIG. 162 (b)) in the latent certain state, the second special symbol is set. The first special symbol is set to be capable of changing 20 times before 180 seconds elapse until the next change is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the sorting unit 660 and alternately enters the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a difference depending on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent state (20 times).

  In the latent certain state (latent certain gaming state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the third embodiment described above, and the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The lottery (fluctuation) is configured to be executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 substantial fluctuation). Since other elements are the same as those in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the player is motivated to move to the latent state that is the most advantageous game state for the player without winning a special symbol jackpot. The effect is that it can be continuously increased. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, in the state in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating simultaneously in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, either one (the special figure 2) is hit (big hit or The flow of each special figure variation and effect display (effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the case of “small hit” will be described. FIG. 153 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation. The third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display based on the variation of the special symbol 1 (an effect display using the third symbol). In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously (lottery) like the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 can cope with the change of each special figure. There are those in which the effect display is executed. In the present embodiment, among each special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2), a fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations and a fluctuation display (secondary) corresponding to the other special figure fluctuations. Fluctuation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 80).

  The main variation and the sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure fluctuation is switched according to the gaming state. For example, the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a substantial fluctuation in the normal state becomes the main fluctuation, The variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be a sub-variation. In this way, the player can display the third symbol display by displaying, as the main variation, the special diagram variation that is substantially executed in the set gaming state among the special diagram 1 variation and the special diagram 2 variation. The game result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner while being displayed on the device 81.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example is shown in which the change display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched between the main change and the sub-variation according to the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation may be switched randomly between the main fluctuation and the sub fluctuation, or a predetermined law (for example, alternating ) May be used. Further, the player may select a configuration. Even with such a configuration, a similar problem occurs when a win is won by special figure fluctuation on the side not corresponding to the main fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 153, the description will be continued. First, the fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are started simultaneously, and special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed on third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of each special figure (after the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it has won a small hit, and the fluctuation of special figure 1 Measurement of fluctuation time for is interrupted. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted during the period in which the measurement of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is interrupted (the interruption period in FIG. 153). The one-symbol display device 37 is configured so that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. By comprising in this way, when a small hit game is performed, it can alert | report to a player that the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the same process as the variable display setting process (see Y4112 in FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is executed. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed in this manner corresponds to the predetermined period (the variation time of the special diagram variation) even if the special diagram variation is suspended (measurement of the special diagram variation time is suspended). It is configured to be executed continuously for 8 seconds. Thereby, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the interruption of the special figure fluctuation ( (Or display effect) is interrupted, and a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable can be suppressed.

  Here, when the special figure change is interrupted (measurement of the special figure change time is interrupted) as described above, the third symbol change display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the case of continuous execution, the suspended special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation is finished, and the third symbol variation display (or effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (interrupt period of special figure fluctuation) occurs at the timing when the (display) ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, the variation pattern set by the variation display setting process (see Y412 in FIG. 135) The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed until the symbol confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received after the execution of the effect display). The swing effect that slightly swings each symbol is executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (a special figure fluctuation interruption period) occurs between the timing at which the above-described special figure variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) During the error period of time, the 3rd symbol display device 81 continues the shaking effect with respect to the 3rd symbol, and the player's willingness to play is reduced by making the pachinko machine 10 think that a malfunction has occurred. There was a problem of letting it go.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the above-described problem is solved by configuring such that an additional effect can be executed using the error period described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a small hit at the timing when the normal effect for 8 seconds is finished as the special figure 1 effect display executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, a swing effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to swing the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 during the period (one second) until the small hit gaming state ends. After that, when the small hit gaming state is finished and the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation ends, and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81. ) Is terminated during the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 153), it is possible to suppress the situation in which the third symbol is continuously displayed in a swinging manner. Can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the content of the additional effect executed according to the error period is configured to be different. Thereby, a more suitable effect display can be executed for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, the type of additional effect executed based on the length of the period during which the additional effect is executed is configured to be different. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the sub-variation lottery result. Can be suppressed.

  FIG. 154 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), an additional effect is not executed. This is because if the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable on the contrary. The additional production is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), until the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (see point D to point E in FIG. 153), the effect corresponding to the main variation is shaken in a state where the effect has been completed. Stopped display.

  Next, FIG. 154 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect A is executed when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed on each symbol is changed to “?” In the state where the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed. The shaking stop is displayed. Thereby, it can suppress that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player.

  In the present embodiment, a display mode that hides only the numbers attached to each symbol is used. However, for example, a display mode that also hides characters (such as “animals”) of each symbol may be used. By doing in this way, it can suppress more that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player. Moreover, since this additional effect A is an effect which only changed the display mode (symbol display mode) of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation, even if it is executed when the remaining period is short It can be suppressed that the player feels uncomfortable.

  FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect B is executed when the remaining period is a part of the predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 154 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the player is subjected to fluctuations in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed in the small area Ds5. Thereby, even if the state in which the main fluctuation is shaken and stopped and displayed is continued, the player can easily grasp that the fluctuation is in progress.

  In the present embodiment, the additional display B is configured such that the display of the main display area Dm is the same display as in FIG. 154 (a), that is, the display is not added to the display of the main display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be performed in the same way as in FIG. 154 (b). . Thereby, it becomes possible to execute an additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 155 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect C is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect C is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in front view, and in the center of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 A game description is displayed. In this way, the player is given a sense of incongruity by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect ends. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation. Also, in the sub display area Ds, a telop for notifying the player that the change is being executed in the small area Ds5 is displayed as in FIG. 155 (a). Thereby, it can be made easy to grasp that the player is changing.

  FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, the present embodiment is configured such that the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period or longer (6 seconds or longer). As shown in FIG. 156, in this additional effect D, as in the additional effect C shown in FIG. 155 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In the central part of the region Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). As described above, when the period (remaining period) during which the additional effect is executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect using the remaining period.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the configuration in which the fluctuations of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are executed at the same time, one of the special figures is stopped at the symbol indicating the win. In the third embodiment described above, since the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is resumed after the winning game is finished when displayed. As described above, the game can be executed without forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

  Further, the fluctuation display (for example, main fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is set in advance even when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped. The period of time (the period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure) is continuously executed, so that the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special figure is prevented from being interrupted by the lottery result of the special figure. it can. As a result, for example, when an effect with a story is being executed as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation, a win is won by one special figure fluctuation and the game is started per win. However, it is possible to execute a production having a story corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that a game effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the fluctuation of the other special figure is completed and the other special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81. Although the corresponding variation display period will be different, it is configured to execute additional effects using the different period (remainder period), so the special figure variation for the player It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the period and the period of the variable display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

  In the fourth embodiment, the additional effect executed when the fluctuation period of the special figure and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special figure fluctuation are different from each other in the length of the different period (remainder period). Since it changes so that it may change according to it, giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player can be suppressed more.

  Specifically, when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be executed. The additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the extra period for which it is difficult to provide an additional effect with respect to a player arises, it can suppress giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player. In the fourth embodiment, as an additional effect in which only part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation has been completed is changed, among the variation displays corresponding to the special figure variation, An additional effect in which the display mode indicating the lottery result is changed is configured to be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the special figure fluctuation period ends.

  In addition, when the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is executed (the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation is completed, but the fluctuation of the special figure is not completed). During the period), since a new special figure change is not executed, the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the remainder period is a predetermined period, the display ("display during change") for notifying the player that the special figure is changing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which no new special figure variation is executed is a normal state.In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period is a predetermined period. The above-mentioned “display during change” is displayed at the same time as the additional effect executed in a certain case is started. For example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the additional effect is executed. You may comprise so that "display during a change" may be performed after progress. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, for 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-period additional effect described above is executed. Can be suppressed by the person.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when a surplus period of a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds) is set, information not related to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content) is displayed. An additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By comprising in this way, the information regarding a game can be alert | reported to a player effectively using the period when a new special figure fluctuation | variation is not started by the display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the special drawing lottery result, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the extra period. In the fourth embodiment, the information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure. However, other information may be displayed. For example, a past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, among the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation that are simultaneously executed, the special figure fluctuation that the player expects the lottery result is the main fluctuation, and the other is the sub fluctuation. Set so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed in the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily grasp the contents of the main change. Yes. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the fluctuation contents of the main fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in this 4th Embodiment, it is comprised so that the special figure (special figure used as a real change object) which a player expects in a lottery result may be switched according to a game state, but the special figure used as a real change object. Is executed as the main variation, the game content can be displayed (notified) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the flow of fluctuation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state in the fourth embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 157 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation in the first rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 2, FIG. 157 (b). These are timing charts which show a flow in case the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent state (the 121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, the advantageous state (latent state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, In the case where the setting is limited to 120 times, the number of times that the advantageous state is set when the special figure fluctuation (the special figure 1 fluctuation or the special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the probability variation number). ) Is subtracted. In this case, when the special figure change executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (fluctuation frequency “121” in FIG. 157) becomes the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 157 (b)), and the special figure 2 fluctuation. (See FIG. 157 (a)).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state, a short variation time is set as the special figure variation time in the latent state. (See FIG. 162 (b)), configured to display the game result (see FIG. 86 (b)) displayed when the latent probability state ends during the special figure change executed after the latent probability state ends. is doing. Specifically, the game time (FIG. 86 (b) is made to grasp the game time (FIG. 86 (b)) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state. This time is sufficient (12 seconds in this embodiment).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 change that is executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state is performed in the first rotation after the completion of the latent state. Whether it becomes a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation for the second rotation varies depending on the game situation in the latent state, so if the special figure fluctuation time for the first rotation after the completion of the latent state is set to 12 seconds, the latent There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game result of the state.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the completion of the latent state is set to a time sufficient for allowing the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 86 (b) (12 seconds in this embodiment). It is configured to notify the game result using the fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in any of the special figure fluctuations. The game result of the state can be notified.

  In other words, in the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation (the number of fluctuations “122”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. In the case shown in FIG. 157 (b), the special figure fluctuation at the first rotation (the number of fluctuations “121”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. .

  In the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the game result is obtained using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state until the start of the special figure 1 change which is the main change in the normal state. It is good also as a structure to alert | report.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159, the screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display A, FIG. 158 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display B, and FIG. FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display A, and FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display B.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. In the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the third embodiment described above, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partially changed. Is different.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

  The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the fourth embodiment is a first jackpot type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91) used in the third embodiment. When the value of C2 is changed, when the jackpot H is specified in place of the jackpot G that is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and when a V win is won with some jackpot types This is different from the point that the assigned short time is set to 100 instead of 120. Other than that, the third embodiment is the same as the third embodiment, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (a), when the symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, the big hit A is selected as the big hit type and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is “30 to 79”, the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type. When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 44”, the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ In the case of 45 to 49 ", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and in the case where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is" 50 to 99 ", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

  Here, the jackpot H that is a jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the fourth embodiment will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which two rounds (R) of jackpot game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the jackpot game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game). It is difficult to identify a game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent probability state, is the winning game (ie, jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability change count to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game that does not change the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (that is, a small hit game), the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be performed while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fourth embodiment, the period in which the normal table A2020f1 is referred to the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) of the third embodiment described above is set as a latent probability. After the end of the state, instead of the third rotation after the end of the latent state, after the ninth rotation after the end of the latent state, the normal table Bb2020fb2 is provided instead of the normal table B2020f2, and the probability change table 2020f3 is replaced The point that the table 2020fb3 is provided, the point that the latent probability table b2020fb4 is provided instead of the latent probability table 2020f4, and the normal table Cb2020fb5 that is referred to in the period of the third to eighth rotations after the latent probability state ends. It differs in the point provided.

  Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the fourth embodiment (game characteristics different from the third embodiment described above) will be described. As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured such that a maximum of four lotteries shown in FIG. Thus, for example, when a right-handed game is executed during the latent state and the lottery of FIG. 2 is stored in a reserved state, the stored state is stored when the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. The lottery shown in FIG. 2 is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, in order to prevent the lottery shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation pattern is set so that the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the lottery of FIG. 2 that is held and stored during the latent state is executed in the normal state. .

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, in order to suppress execution of special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time even if the lottery of special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed during the normal state, The predetermined period after the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is set so that the fluctuation time for the lottery of the special drawing 2 is shortened. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is executing an appropriate game.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, when one special figure stops at a symbol indicating a winning (big hit or small winning), until the winning game based on that hit ends (the winning game ends) However, since the special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped), the long-time fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed. If it is, even if the big win is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be in the period until the long-term fluctuation ends. There is a possibility that the game state which is not executed and which is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

  Against such a problem, a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is a subsequent period in the normal state. By configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected for (a period after the special drawing lottery is executed eight times), the above-described problem can be solved.

  Here, the normal table Bb2020fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. The normal table Bb2020fb2 is different from the normal table B2020f2 of the third embodiment described above in that the variation time defined in a part of the variation pattern is changed, and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The difference from the third embodiment will be described in detail. In the normal table Bb2020fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)”. Variable time is specified. In other words, until the special drawing lottery is executed twice after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)” regardless of the symbol type and the determination result. Time will be set.

  By configuring in this way, any one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state can be made the fluctuation of FIG. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent state is notified in correspondence with the fluctuation of FIG. 1, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably ensure the period for notifying the game result.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the normal table Bb2020fb2 that is referred to only for a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special figure change is executed twice). Although it is stipulated that the same variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the symbol type or the result of the determination, it is not necessary to set all the variation times to be the same. You may comprise so that it may set. In this case, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time of special figure 2 longer than the fluctuation time of special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 won in the jackpot is stopped and the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the effect display executed in response to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

  In the fourth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, an effect display (for example, a game in the latent state) executed in response to the change in the special figure 1 In order to execute the result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (Special Figure 1) is displayed in the period of two special figure fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. Or, by configuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 fluctuates for 12 seconds regardless of the timing at which the fluctuation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing a game result in a latent state) corresponding to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is executed. Continuously after the gaming state transitions from the latent state to the normal state When the special figure 1 fluctuates, a predetermined effect display (for example, a result display indicating a game result in the latent state) is executed in response to the first special figure 1 fluctuation, and the second special figure 1 is executed. As for the fluctuation, it is preferable to execute a normal effect display that suggests the corresponding lottery result to the player.

  Next, the normal table Cb2020fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb2020fb5. The normal table Cb2020fb5 is a table that is referred to when a variation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the completion of the latent state is selected.

  The normal table Cb2020fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is shorter than the normal table Bb2020fb2. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the determination result. By configuring in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent state is fully consumed within a predetermined period (within the special figure fluctuation of 8 rotations) after the game state has shifted to the normal state. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced due to long-term fluctuations when the game state is shifted despite the appropriate game being executed.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 will be described. The special variation pattern is selected during the period in which the special drawing lottery corresponding to the sum of (4) and the maximum reserved storage number (4) of the special drawing 2 is executed. It is only necessary to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes). For example, it corresponds to the special figure 1 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. The variation pattern is set with reference to the normal table Bb2020fb2 by configuring the shortest variation time to be four times longer than the longest variation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. Variation of Special Figure 1 By drawing) is finished, the drawing of the special symbol 2 being held memories may be executed all. By doing in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 reserved and stored in a shorter period can be digested.

  Further, a special performance period for displaying the result of the latent state after the game state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state until the lottery stored in FIG. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of FIG. 2 in which the lottery result is a big win during the latent state is stored on hold, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big win is stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Furthermore, after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is exhausted), the effect display in the normal state is executed, so that the effect display in the normal state is executed. It is preferable not to execute the lottery shown in FIG. This makes it easier for hall clerk to display a state in which the special figure 2 is variably displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, while the appropriate game is not being executed. Can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can appropriately respond to the player.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3. The probability change table b2020fb3 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the same variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the probability variation state regardless of the number of held balls and the determination result. is doing. Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a winning probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. The deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

  Also, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are set for each of the determination results. ing. Specifically, when the result of the determination in FIG. 2 is a win (big hit), the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 159” and the probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) Are associated, and the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

  When the determination result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the small hit probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, The small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is out of the range, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 159”, and the probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated. Out of the range of “160 to 198”, the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated.

  Here, the relationship between the game content in the probability variation state in the fourth embodiment and the variation time set in each of the above-described special figures (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 152, among the high probability states (120 times), a probability variation state in which time is given to the first 100 times is set. If the number of special drawing lotteries exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot, a latent state in which no time is given is set.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing the right-handed game, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter a ball (see FIG. 150). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, since the variation time is set so that both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 can be executed during the certain variation state as described above, the third described above. Unlike the embodiment, the right-handed game can be executed during the probability change state.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a right-handed game is executed during the probability change state, and a game is executed in which a ball is alternately entered into the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Since the lottery between 1 and special figure 2 is executed based on the set fluctuation time, for example, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2, so that The lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 2 can be executed more than that in FIG. 1. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of 3 minutes is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. In addition, lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 is often executed.

  In this way, by changing the rate at which special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure of special figure 2) is executed depending on the set fluctuation time, a game with tension to the player can be obtained. It becomes possible to execute. In this embodiment, the variation time of FIG. 1 is composed of one type (10 seconds) and the variation time of FIG. 2 is composed of two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous to the player. The shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (figure of special figure 2) is made shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous for the player, and is advantageous to the player. The longest fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation (figure 2) may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player. You may comprise so that several types of fluctuation | variation time may be set with respect to a figure (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2).

  Furthermore, as a variation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) on the side which is disadvantageous to the player, with a low probability (for example, only in the range of “1” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1), You may comprise so that the variation time (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the longest variation time of the special figure fluctuation | variation (variation of special figure 2) of an advantageous side may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a probability variation state in which a lot of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation time of each special figure in the probability variation state is set regardless of the number of held balls, but the variation time is configured to be different depending on the number of held balls. For example, you may make it lengthen the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 advantageous to a player, so that the number of reservation balls decreases. Thereby, in order to execute many lotteries in FIG. 2, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of held balls is always the upper limit.

  In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the special figure stored on hold is discriminated, and a notification (pre-reading) suggesting the variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the state stored on hold (Variable time notification) may be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is small (for example, when the number of held balls is 0 or 1) as a variation pattern corresponding to the value of a specific variation type counter CS1 (for example, “10 to 30”). When a long variation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected and the number of reserved balls is large (for example, when the number of retained balls is 2 or more), a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. In this configuration, the player may be informed by pre-reading change time notification that the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 of “0 to 30” is stored on hold. Thereby, the player can more actively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

  The contents described above are executed for the special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure 2 fluctuation), but the similar technical idea is disadvantageous for the player. (Variation). In addition, as the number of reserved memories to be referred to when changing the variation time according to the number of reserved memories, a value obtained by adding the numbers of reserved memories in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 may be referred to, or the fluctuation is executed. It may be possible to refer only to the number of reserved memories corresponding to the symbol type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).

  Further, in the probability variation state, the special drawing lottery number (special figure fluctuation number) is 100, which is the sum of the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. 1 and the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be varied according to the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

  Next, the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4. The latency table b2020fb4 is different from the latency table 2020f4 of the third embodiment described above in that the variation time of the special figure 1 is set shorter and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set according to the number of balls held. The difference is that the point of change is different from the point of change of the fluctuation time in FIG.

  Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a short hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. , A short-circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is defined.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the result of the determination of special figure 2 is a win (big hit), the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. Is associated with a short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second), and the number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3, and a short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with a range of “0 to 198”. . Also, when the result of the determination in FIG. 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 198”, and the small hit short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second). ), The number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is wrong is out of the range of “0 to 198” as the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of held balls, the short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

  As described above, in the latent accuracy table b2020fb4 referred to during the latent accuracy state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of variation time in FIG. 2 when the determination result is a small hit. It is possible to suppress a game (so-called “stopping”) in which a ball is launched aiming at the target.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time becomes longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). This is because the state in which the number of reserved balls is large is a state in which a large number of balls have entered the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that a ball enters each entrance. The player is paying out sufficient prize balls to the player. On the other hand, the state where the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1) is a state where there are few balls entering the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that there are enough prize balls for the player Is not paid out.

  Therefore, each of the entrances is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the variation time set is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). It is possible to make the total number of prize balls equalized by summing up the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the ball and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the small hit game. Thereby, even if adjustments that are disadvantageous to the player for the pachinko machine 10 (adjustments that make it difficult for the balls to enter each entrance), it is possible to make it easier to obtain a winning ball with a small hit. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's motivation falls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0, the same variation time is set as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3). . This is to suppress a game in which a player launches a ball at intervals and aims at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who executes a malicious game to obtain a winning ball with a small hit.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, by executing the right-handed game, the second entrance 1640b in which the drawing of the special drawing 2 advantageous to the player is executed and the right drawing in which the drawing of the special drawing 1 disadvantageous is executed. Since the balls are alternately inserted into the entrance hole 64b, it is possible to further suppress the execution of a game that intentionally aims only at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which a short variation time is set. can do.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 is configured so that two types of variation time can be set according to the number of reserved balls, but there are various types of variation times without limitation. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, different variation times may be set for each number of reserved balls, or the range of the variation type counter CS1 is divided so that different variation times are set even for the same number of reserved balls. Time may be set. Also, different variation times may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing lotteries executed after the end of the small hit game. For example, after the end of the small hit game, until the special drawing lottery is executed three times, it may be configured such that the variation time set when the small hit is won is increased. Thereby, when the lottery to win a small hit is biased, it is possible to prevent the excessive prize balls from being paid out.

  Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the small hit game ends (for example, a period until the special drawing lottery is executed three times), a short fluctuation occurs when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more). The time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to continuously execute the game. Furthermore, the variation time set in this case may be the same as the time between the rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, in the case of winning a small win continuously, the variable winning device 65 can be varied as if a big win was won, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, by configuring the frequency at which the small hit game in the latent state is executed based on the number of reserved balls in FIG. The number of prize balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) is being made uniform, but as a configuration other than that, You may comprise so that the fluctuation time of a common drawing lottery may be set based on the number of reservation memory. For example, when there is a large number of reserved memory for the general drawing lottery, it is easy for the ball to enter the sorting unit 660 (because it is easy to enter the ball at each entrance), so that the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery becomes longer. In the case where the number of reserved memories of the general drawing lottery is small, the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery may be set to be shorter than that in the case where there are many. This makes it possible to equalize the degree of entry of the balls into the sorting unit 660. As a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance) And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be made uniform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, details of the RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 2030 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the RAM 2030 in the fourth embodiment has the second special symbol execution area 2030b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p deleted from the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). In addition, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc, and a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the second entrance 1640b (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set to zero. Whenever a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of fluctuating retained balls increases, the maximum value 4 One by one is added. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030bb has one execution area and four reservation areas. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb, each counter value acquired based on a ball entering (start winning) into the second ball entrance 1640b is stored. The counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y1332 in FIG. 173), and the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (figure 173). 167) (Y232 in FIG. 167). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as when changing is executed (Y233 in FIG. 167). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON. When it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 169) is set to ON (Y2801 in FIG. 169: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 169). Although the detailed description and illustration are omitted, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is processed in the same way as the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit even when the lottery result is a big hit. Is executed and set to on.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y732 in FIG. 170), and the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (figure 170). 167) (Y232 in FIG. 167). Note that the contents referred to in this process are the same as the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. When it is determined that the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 172) is set to ON (Y2901 in FIG. 172: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 172).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), details of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fourth embodiment is a part of the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97 (a)). This is different from the changed point in that an additional effect selection table 2220ba is added.

  Here, the screen display selection 2 table 2220b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b. The screen display selection 2 table 2220b is configured to select different screen display types for the game state in the normal state and the probability change state with respect to the screen display selection table 2220b in the third embodiment described above, The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display content (screen display type) for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. Normal display is defined as In this normal display, the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the 3rd symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state, a demonstration display A is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When the demonstration display A is determined, a demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 158 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of Special Figure 1, which is the main fluctuation, is switched to the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) regardless of whether or not the minor fluctuation is being executed. If a player enters a ball into the second entrance 1640b and starts to display a long time fluctuation, even if the player quits the game immediately, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. Furthermore, in this demonstration display A screen, since the special figure 2 is actually variably displayed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that it is a vacant stand, a small area Ds5 of the sub display area Ds is displayed as “ "You can play" is displayed. Thereby, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

  In a normal state, a demonstration display B (see FIG. 158 (b)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  Next, in the probability variation state, for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off, or a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on Each is associated with a normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed in the probability variation state is executed, so that a special figure standby flag (a special figure 1 standby flag 2230s) is applied to one of the special figures. The customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to OFF. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Thus, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special figure has stopped), and the respective determination results, In addition, by setting the screen display type based on the currently set gaming state, the symbol type (Special Figure 1, Special Figure) that the player expects the lottery result according to the gaming state as in the fourth embodiment. 2) A game in the current gaming state with respect to a pachinko machine 10 having a gaming characteristic (a gaming characteristic that changes a symbol type (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) that varies substantially depending on the gaming state). It is possible to easily notify whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type expected by the person (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2) is being executed.

  In the certain change state, a special display A (see FIG. 159 (a)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off. As a result, the current gaming situation can be suggested to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  In the latent state, the display content (for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on, or the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both on ( Special display B (FIG. 159 (b)) is defined as the screen display type. The special display B is displayed in a state where the special figure 2 that is substantially changed in the latent state is not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the additional effect selection table 2220ba in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 2220ba. This additional effect selection table 2220ba has an additional effect period (when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set on and the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped ( FIG. 153) is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional effect to be executed (additional effect type), and the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time) and the acquired effect The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 2230h.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 154 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 154 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B) and the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect type is “ “Additional effect B” is selected (see FIG. 155 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect C” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 155 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or longer (period C) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, “addition effect” “C” is selected (see FIG. 155 (b)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “addition effect D” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 156).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time), for example, the remaining effect is selected. When the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect), an additional effect (for example, additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed, When the remaining execution time is long so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity with the effect executed during the change time (when the player can sufficiently grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect) In this case, an additional effect (for example, an additional effect D) having a content different from that of the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 2230 in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the RAM 2230 in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97B) in that the second special symbol reserved ball counter 2230ba and the remaining variation time information A storage area 2230bb and an additional effect information storage area 2230bc are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, and is the first special symbol described above in the third embodiment. The only difference between the symbol reserved ball count counter 2230c and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 2030ba in place of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 2030d is the same as the other elements. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb stores information on the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the currently set variation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after the change is resumed.

  This remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb shows the fluctuation pattern when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (Y4901: Yes in FIG. 178) in the temporary stop related process (see FIG. 178). The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (Y4903 in FIG. 178), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see Y4907 to Y4908 in FIG. 178). When the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 179) receives the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command (Y5001: Yes in FIG. 179) and determines that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (Y5002: No in FIG. 179) is used to determine the additional effect type (Y5003 in FIG. 179), and then the set remaining variation period information is cleared (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

  The additional effect information storage area 2230bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and an additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. This additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read when the additional effect type determined in the change restart process (see FIG. 179) is set (Y5005 and Y5006 in FIG. 179) and the display additional effect command is set. (Y5007 in FIG. 179) is cleared thereafter (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 101) in contrast to the control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment described above. (See FIG. 167), in place of the game state update process (see FIG. 105), the game state update process 2 (see FIG. 168), the start winning process (see FIG. 114) instead of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 174), The difference is that the jackpot end process 2 (FIG. 175) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122), and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the above-described third embodiment, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure), In the case where the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is also configured to be stored on hold, and when special figure 1 and special figure 2 are simultaneously changing, either one of them is selected. When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed after the winning game based on the hit of one special figure. It is greatly different in the point of construction.

  In addition, about the point which comprised the lottery of special figure 2 so that holding | maintenance storage was possible, and the control processing based on it, it is the same as the structure and control process which hold | maintain the lottery of special figure 1 described in 3rd Embodiment mentioned above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit is made (Y231). If it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is made (Y231: Yes), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y232). . In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the interruption is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the winning. In the process of Y232, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first figure corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is displayed. The process of updating the display of the symbol display device 37 (Y233), that is, executing the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special figure in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, Exit. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y231, when it is determined that the current big hit or small hit is (Y231: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is larger than 0 ( That is, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (Y234), and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is not greater than zero (0). (Y234: No) executes the same process as the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) of the third embodiment described above, and then shifts to Y238 where the variation process related to special figure 2 is performed.

  In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is larger than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (Y235) is executed. To do. This first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) executes the processing during the special symbol 1 variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram variation timer 2030s is 0) (Y236), and the variation time ends. If it is determined that the timing is reached (Y236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y236 that it is not the end time of the variation time (Y236: No), the process of Y237 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y238.

  In the process of Y238 to Y242, the same process as Y234 to Y237 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (Y238), and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer is determined. If it is determined that the value of 2030t is not greater than 0 (0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is executed, and then this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is obtained by adding a subtraction process of the reserved memory number to the above-described second special symbol variation start process 2 (see Y217 in FIG. 107). Will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y238 that the value of the special figure 2 variation timer 2030t is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executes the process during the special symbol variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240) is completed, it is then determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram variation timer 2030t is 0) (Y241), and the variation time ends. When it is determined that the timing is reached (Y241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y241, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation time (Y241: No), the process of Y242 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307) will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307). In this game state update process 2 (Y307), the value of the time counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0, compared to the game state update process (see FIG. 105) of the third embodiment described above. This is different in that a configuration for setting a status command indicating a latent state is added when there is no latent state. In the fourth embodiment, this is configured such that the number of time reductions (100 times) set in the probability variation state is less than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). This is because when the number of lotteries (variations) exceeds 100, the gaming state can be shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state without winning a big win.

  When the game state update process 2 (Y307) is executed, first, the same process as Y601 to Y608 of the game state update process (see FIG. 105) described above is executed. It is determined whether the value of the counter 2030g is 0 (Y631). If it is determined that it is 0 (Y631: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is not 0 (1 or more) (Y632: No), since the probability variation state to which the time-saving game is not given (that is, the latent probability state), the latent probability state Is set (Y633), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y631 that the value of the time reduction counter 2030g is not 0 (Y631: No), or in the process of Y632, it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y632: Yes). ) Skips the process of Y633 and ends this process as it is.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235). In the first special symbol variation execution process (Y235), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON when the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (big hit or small hit). is there. When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the big hit flag 2030u is set to ON in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is turned on), the process of Y231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) ends and it is determined that the big hit game (or small hit game) is not in the process of Y231, the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON is the big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to be the timing at which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been resumed.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then a special figure 1 change restart command is set (Y2802). The stop flag 2030bc is set to OFF (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), the processes of Y2802 and Y2803 are skipped and Y2804 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 variation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 2030s is subtracted and updated (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y237) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and is the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery result of special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the constitution that forcibly stops the fluctuation of special figure 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is interrupted (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) It is different in that it is provided.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) is a big win (Y731), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (Y731: No), the same processing as Y709 and Y710 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y731 that it is a big hit (Y731: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to on (Y732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is turned on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating the setting is set (Y733). And the same process as Y706 and Y708 of the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 106) of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (Y239), a process for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Y831) : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 5) within the same processing as the processing in which the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (Y237 in FIG. 170). 171 (Y239) is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239 in FIG. 171) are skipped, and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the same time (within the same process) as when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the win.

  In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y831: No), next, the second special symbol reserved ball counter 2030ba (N2) is acquired (Y832), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is larger than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set. Subtract 1 (Y834), and set the reserved ball number command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba after the subtraction. (Y835).

  The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) as in the third embodiment described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 2230. It is stored in 2230ba. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230ba in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the second special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030ba.

  When the process of Y835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030bb is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of Y836 ends, the same process as Y804 to Y807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see Y207 of FIG. 107) of the third embodiment described above is then executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is 0 (Y833: No), the second special symbol variation start of the third embodiment described above is started. The same processing as Y808 to Y810 of the processing (see Y207 in FIG. 107) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240). In the second special symbol variation execution process (Y240), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 2 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON when the special figure 2 is fluctuating and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (big hit). When the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON, the big hit flag 2030u is set to ON in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is turned on), the process of Y231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot game is not being hit in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed. With this configuration, the state in which the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON, the jackpot game is completed, and the variation time The subtraction of the special figure fluctuation, which has been suspended, is configured to resume the subtraction.

  Returning to FIG. 172, the description will be continued. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then a special figure 2 change restart command is set (Y2902). The stop flag 2030bd is set to OFF (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2901 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), the process of Y2902, Y2903 is skipped and Y2904 is skipped. Move on to processing.

  In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 2030t is decremented and updated by 1 (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y242) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above. On the other hand, when the lottery result of special figure 2 is a big hit, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is interrupted instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation of special figure 1 is forcibly stopped (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) The point of difference is that a configuration is provided, and a process that is executed when the lottery result in FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is a big hit (Y1331), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (Y1331: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result of Special Figure 2 is a small hit (Y1334). In the process of Y1334, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y1334: No), the same process as Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above is executed. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1334 that the game is a small hit (Y1334: Yes), then a small hit stop process is executed (Y1335). In this small hit stop process, the same processes as Y1402 to Y1406 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see Y1304 in FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above are executed. When this small hit stop process (Y1335) is completed, the same processes as Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

  In the process of Y1331, when it is determined that the game is a big hit (Y1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (Y1333). And the same process as Y1307-1311 of the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 112) of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105). This start winning process 2 (Y105) is different from the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above in the case where a ball is won (entered) in the second entrance 1640b. It is different in point. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery of Special Figure 2 is configured to be stored on hold, so that when the ball wins (enters) the second entrance 1640b, the second special symbol reservation ball A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 2030ba is executed.

  As for the processing when a ball enters the second entrance 1640b, the ball enters the first entrance (entry) in the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above. The processing executed in this case is different only in that the processing target is changed from FIG. 1 to FIG. 2, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112) will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112). This jackpot end process 2 (Y2112) differs from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment described above only in that the value set in the hour / counter counter 2030g is changed from 120 to 100. Since these processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes the probability variation state is less than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). When the special drawing lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times, the gaming state can be shifted to the latent state.

  With this configuration, when the jackpot type whose jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot D is won as an opportunity to shift to a gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player (that is, after the jackpot ends If you win a jackpot with a certain probability set) and a jackpot with a jackpot type of jackpot A (that is, win a jackpot for which a certain change state is set after the jackpot ends), and a jackpot in the probability change state When a special symbol lottery is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning, a plurality (two) can be provided. Therefore, the expectation that the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the timing at which the two transition conditions described above are satisfied is varied. That is, the former transition condition described above can be satisfied after the jackpot ends, and the latter transition condition can be satisfied when a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation that a gaming state (latency probability state) advantageous to the player is set, and to prevent the player from getting bored early. .

  In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g that can be set in the jackpot end process use one type of configuration, but other configurations may be used, for example, Corresponding to the winning jackpot type, the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the hourly time counter 2030g may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the value set in the probability variation counter 2030k, that is, the number of times the special symbol high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lottery), and the value set in the time-short counter 2030g In other words, it is possible to set multiple times (special symbol lottery times) that the short-time state (high probability state of normal symbol (with electric support)) is set after the jackpot ends. Set the number of times (special symbol lottery), the number of times until transition to the latent state (special symbol lottery), and the number of times the latent state is set (special symbol lottery) be able to.

  Therefore, when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot is ended, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping how many times the special symbol lottery is executed without shifting to the jackpot without winning the jackpot. It is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation of transition to the latent state in the state where the probability change state is set.

  In addition, as described above, when the probability variation counter 2030k value and the hourly time counter 2030g value can be set in correspondence with the jackpot type, a high probability state of a special symbol is set during the probability variation state. It is preferable to provide suggestion notification means for suggesting to the player the period for which the game is performed and the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. With this configuration, by grasping the suggestion content notified by the suggestion notification means, it is possible to cause the player to predict the timing for shifting to the latent state, and to improve the transition period attitude to the latent state. be able to.

  In addition, as the suggestion content notified by the suggestion notification unit described above, a value indicating the number of lotteries of special symbols until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) may be notified, You may alert | report the variable aspect from which a display mode (for example, a color, a shape, a magnitude | size) changes according to the number of lottery drawing of a special symbol until it changes to a state (until the transition conditions are satisfied). In addition, there is provided a discriminating means for determining whether the number of special symbol lottery times (until the transition condition is satisfied) until the transition to the latent state has been reached, for example, the special symbol lottery number. May be configured so that the above-described suggestion notification is performed when it is determined that has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

  Further, in the case where the transition condition is established during the probability changing state and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, a latent time for suggesting to the player the period during which the latent probability state is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent probability state) is indicated. Probable period suggesting notification means may be provided. In addition, by using this configuration in a configuration in which a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the hourly time counter 2030g can be set corresponding to the jackpot type, a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is continued. The period set by the player can be predicted by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the number of special symbol lotteries until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) and the period during which the latent state is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent state) May be configured so that the player can be notified of the advantageous degree of the gaming state set after the jackpot is ended based on the determination result. By comprising in this way, in the case where a plurality of gaming states set after the end of the jackpot are provided, it is possible to easily inform the player of the degree of advantage.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 176) is different, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, a process to be executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the third embodiment is added.

  Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111). This command determination process 2 (Y4111) includes a process that is executed when a remaining variable number of times command or a remaining short number of times command is received and a temporary stop for the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. A process executed when a related command is received is added.

  When the command determination process 2 (Y4111) is executed, first, the same processes as Y4301 to Y4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Y4317 that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining short time number command has been received (Y4317: Yes), then the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is executed.

  Here, the content of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is executed, the same processes as Y4651 and Y4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and when the process of Y4652 is finished, The same processing as Y4661 and Y4662 of the remaining number update processing (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the remaining probability variation count area 2230o and the effect probability variation count area 2230p to the information corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation count command or remaining short time count command output from the main controller 110 is executed. In the fourth embodiment, the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) similar to that in the third embodiment described above may be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of Y4317, when it is determined that the remaining certain number of times command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (Y4317: No), it is next determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (Y4331). Here, as the temporary stop related commands, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set ON and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are set ON. The special figure 2 temporary stop command that is output to Fig. 1, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc that is output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bd are set to OFF. There is a special figure 2 change restart command that is output in the event of a failure.

  If it is determined in the process of Y4331 that a temporary stop related command has been received (Y4331: Yes), then the temporary stop related process is executed (Y4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4331 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (Y4331: No), the same process as Y4319 of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (Y4332) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (Y4332). In this temporary stop related process (Y4332), a process for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or special figure. When the two-variation restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (Y4332) is executed, it is first determined whether a special figure 1 temporary stop command or a special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (Y4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (Y4901). : No), the process proceeds to Y4902, and the fluctuation restart process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (Y4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (Y4903). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation period calculated in the process of Y4903 is less than 2 seconds (Y4904). A period A indicating that the period is short is set (Y4905), and the process proceeds to Y4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4904, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (Y4904: No), it is next determined whether the remaining fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds ( Y4906), if it is determined that the time is less than 15 seconds (Y4906: Yes), a period B indicating a normal remaining fluctuation period is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb (Y4907), and the process proceeds to Y4902. Transition.

  In the process of Y4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (Y4906: No), a period C indicating that the remaining fluctuation period is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb. After setting (Y4908), the process proceeds to Y4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the change restart process (Y4902) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart process (Y4902). This fluctuation resumption process (Y4902) executes a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received.

  When the fluctuation resuming process (Y4902) is executed, it is first determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation resuming command or a special figure 2 fluctuation resuming command has been received (Y5001). If it is determined that it has not been received (Y5001: No ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command or the special figure 2 change restart command has been received (Y5001), then it is determined whether or not the current variation effect is being executed (Y5002). . In the process of Y5002, the fluctuation effect executed for the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) in conjunction with the execution of the special figure fluctuation interrupts the special figure fluctuation (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended). When the special figure change is resumed after the winning game is finished, it is determined whether the state is not completed.

  In the process of Y5002, when it is determined that the changing effect is being executed (Y5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (Y5006), and the process proceeds to Y5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5002 that the variation effect is not being executed (Y5002: No), next, the remaining variation time information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb is read (Y5003). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 2220ba based on the read remaining variation time information and the effect counter 2230h (Y5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc. (Y5005).

  When the processing of Y5005 or Y5006 is completed, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read (Y5007), and a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set. (Y5008), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 2230bb and the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is cleared (Y5009), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is performed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. In the period until the resumption, the effect of swinging and displaying the 3rd symbol is executed. Although configured to execute, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, when one special figure variation (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (for example, special figure 2). In the case where the subtraction of the figure variation time is interrupted), and the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation has already been completed when the other special figure fluctuation is resumed (FIG. 153), for example, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure change is not completed at the time when the other special figure change is resumed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 180 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation. In the third symbol display device 81, an effect display based on the variation in the special figure 1 (an effect display using the third symbol) is executed. In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  The example shown in FIG. 180 shows a case where the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the variation of the special figure 1 is resumed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, the additional effect is executed before the normal effect is completed, and an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity. The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 180, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed, but the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed. It is configured. In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed as the normal effect end timing instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity, and the player's willingness to play the game Can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, a remaining period determination means for determining a fluctuation time (residual fluctuation period) after resumption, and an interruption period determination means for determining a period during which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted. Whether or not the normal effect is being executed when it is determined by the restart determining means for determining that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has been resumed and the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed by the restart determining means. An effect status determining means for determining the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means when the effect status determining means determines that the normal effect has not been executed (already finished). If it is determined that the additional effect executing means for executing the additional effect corresponding to the normal effect is being executed, the execution of the additional effect is waited until it is determined by the effect status determining means that the normal effect has ended. Additional production execution waiting And means, may the provision. By configuring in this way, the timing for executing the additional effect based on the timing at which the special figure 1 variation is resumed and the end timing of the normal effect of the special figure 1 variation (when the special figure 1 variation is resumed or the normal effect ends) Time) can be set as appropriate, and an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 so that the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration as shown in FIG. good.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 181, another example of the panel configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the fourth embodiment. In another example of the fourth embodiment, instead of the distribution unit 660, the second entrance 1640 and the second entrance for the board surface configuration (see FIG. 150) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a associated with the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center area of the game board to the lower right area, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 181, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can enter. Yes. With such a configuration, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the gaming state (probability variation state or latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed. In addition, as in the distribution unit 660 of the fourth embodiment described above, the entrance (right first entrance 64b) where the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 are executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing balls so that the balls enter alternately at the entrance (second entrance 1640b) to be entered, the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. The percentage of balls can be random. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player is different between the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG. It is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, the ratio of the balls that have flowed down (rolled) toward the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, such as nails implanted in the game board 13, for example, Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation executed during the right-handed game.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of times (100) that the short-time state is set is smaller than the number of times (120) that the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. Further, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 can be executed in the latent state, it is possible to suppress a state that is excessively advantageous to the player in the latent state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is won (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is determined), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted and the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is finished ( The measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is resumed at the timing when the variation of the special symbol becomes possible.

  Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the variable display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously executed. In this case, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, and the restarted special symbol variation is finished and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is terminated. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (a period during which the special figure changes is interrupted) occurs at the timing of the operation.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the timing when the resumed special symbol variation ends and the timing when the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. In the case where an error for a predetermined period (a special period fluctuation interruption period) occurs, an additional effect (specific effect) can be executed using the error period. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 196. The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that the contents of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state are different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the win is won in the probability (big hit or small win) The difference is that the effect display that is executed at the time of the addition is added and the other effect display is changed so as to correspond to the contents of the two points described above.

  In the third embodiment described above, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the remaining number display area D1 displays the same number of times as the number of accuracy changes (120 times) set internally. Each time the special figure variation is executed, the remaining number of probability changes set internally (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number for effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the production remaining probability variation number). In addition, in the latent state, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the big win that the real residual variation number is set again or the small hit that is not set the real residual variation number is won, When winning (big hit or small win) is won in the certain state, it is configured so that the production return to the initial value (120 times) and the production not to return can be executed. The number of times was different, and the player was expected to have a sense of expectation until the end. When the actual residual probability variation count becomes “0” in a state where the actual residual probability variation count is different from the production residual probability variation count (for example, the production residual probability variation count is “0” and the real residual probability variation count is “10”). In the case of “”), the revival effect (see FIG. 87) is executed, and the number of times corresponding to the substantial remaining probability variation number (“10 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, even if the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is “0”, the player can be expected to continue the latent state.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times less than the internally set probability variation number (120 times) when the latent accuracy state is entered (the latent accuracy state is set). (For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easy to execute an effect that adds the number of remaining effect changes. In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times each time the variation of each special figure (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), as in the third embodiment described above. For example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed, although it is configured so as to subtract the number of effects remaining variation displayed in the display area D1. However, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the production remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed less than the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing of starting the latent probability state (timing when the latent probability state is set). As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the actual remaining probability variation count as the jackpot game and the special drawing lottery result in the case of winning the jackpot where the actual remaining probability variation count is set to the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when a winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation count is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of substantial probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure big hit is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of actual variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1). The value of the number of times added to (2) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 182). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the actual remaining probability variation number becomes “0” in a state where the substantial certainty variation number and the remaining effect variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  Further, in the above-described third embodiment, in order to prevent the player from grasping that the player has won a win (big hit or small win) during the latent probability state (for example, out of the big hit games, the game The 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute the effect display indicating the winning game even if a small hitting game or a small hitting game) is executed, and at what timing in the latent state, the actual probability change count is initially set. The configuration is such that it is difficult to identify whether the jackpot set at the value (120 times) is won.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a win game (a jackpot game or a small game) that is executed when a winning game is won (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game with a small number of balls out of the jackpot game) is won. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a display based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during the winning game (see FIG. 185). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed in the latent state. Then, as will be described later in detail as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is paid out). The display mode for displaying the number of winning balls) is configured such that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. . As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, The contents of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 182, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is in the latent probability state and the remaining effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. The transition of the probability variation number will be described. FIG. 182 is a timing chart showing the flow during the latent state in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 182, when the jackpot game won for jackpot B or jackpot D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, the actual remaining probability change count is “120 times” at the end timing of the jackpot game (during ending). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and “100 times” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the effect remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 183).

  When the game in the latent state is started, the actual residual probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count are subtracted “one time” every time the special figure variation is executed. In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, since the substantial residual variation number and the production residual variation number are subtracted at the timing at which the special diagram variation is started, the first special diagram variation in the latent state is executed. In the meantime, “99 times” is displayed in the remaining number display area D <b> 1 as the number of production remaining probability changes.

  After that, special figure fluctuation (lottery) is executed, and when the small bonus is won in the 14th special figure fluctuation in the latent state (the special figure fluctuation in which “86th” is displayed as the number of remaining production chance changes), The small hit game is started while maintaining the probability variation number of “106 times”. During the small hit game, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs an additional effect A (an effect of adding (adding) the value of the remaining number of effects remaining “5 times”) as an effect display, the remaining number of times The value of the number of effects remaining variation displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from “86th” to “91st” (see FIG. 183 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the actual remaining probability changing number is not changed (not reset), when the winning game (small winning game) is executed, By executing the effect to be added (additional effect), it is possible to expect the player to have the actual remaining probability variation count reset by the current winning game.

  When the small hit game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual remaining probability variation number “105 times” and the production residual probability variation number “90”) is continuously started. Next, when the big win is won in the special figure variation where the actual remaining probability variation number is “30” (the special figure variation where the production residual probability variation number is “15”), the timing when the jackpot game is started The actual residual variation number is set to “0”. It should be noted that the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to “0”, but the content indicating “15” is continuously displayed. When shifting to the latent probability state again after the end of the jackpot game, “120 times” is reset as the substantial remaining probability change count at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during the jackpot game, an extra effect is executed as an effect display of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the small hit game. When the “time” addition (addition) effect) is executed, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from “15 times” to “35 times”.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, regardless of the type of win (big hit or small hit), it is added based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability change count and the effect remaining probability change count and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f. The number of times of addition (number of additions) displayed in the production is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current winning game is a small hit game or a big hit game based on the contents of the extra effect executed during the hit game.

  Next, when the jackpot game ends, a special figure variation (substantial residual probability variation number “119”) in the latent state is started. An extra effect D is executed during this special figure change, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed even during the special figure variation in the latent probability state. It is difficult for a person to predict the actual remaining probability variation number, and a game can be performed while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

  In addition, by making it possible to execute an extra effect even during a special figure change, the value of the residual effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure change in the latent state. Can be added (added). Therefore, since the number of times of performing the extra effect can be increased, the player feels uncomfortable even when the value of the actual residual probability change count and the effect residual probability change count deviate greatly (when the difference value is large). The value can be easily converged without giving. Furthermore, in this 5th Embodiment, it is comprised so that the addition frequency (addition frequency) displayed by an addition effect may be determined based on the difference value of the value of a substantial residual change frequency and an effect residual probability change frequency, The greater the difference between the actual residual variation number and the production residual variation number, the more the production residual variation number is added (added), so the value can be set without giving the player a sense of incongruity. It can be made easier to converge.

  Then, the extra effect D is executed, and the extra effect (addition effect B) is executed again at the next fluctuation when the value of the residual effect variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes “74 times”. The remaining probability variation number is “118” and the production residual probability variation number is “83”. After that, when the variation in which the production remaining probability variation count is “1” without winning a win is ended, the production remaining probability variation count “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final performance display, and the actual remaining probability variation count is displayed. It is continuously displayed until “0 times”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a game in a latent state without giving a sense of incongruity to the player even if the actual remaining probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count do not finally coincide.

  In the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display is used. However, as in the third embodiment described above, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is used. May be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (displayed as “35 times” in the example of FIG. 182). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual remaining probability variation number when the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “0”. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to play the latent state with confidence for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 and FIG. 184, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 regarding the case where the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is a latent state will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends (when a V is won in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state by winning V during the jackpot game) The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and “100 times” is displayed as the production remaining probability variation number (see point A in FIG. 182). Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a character “RUSH rush” for notifying that the state shifts to the latent state, and a character 811 that imitates a rabbit used for display in the latent state shifts to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit game ends.

  In the fifth embodiment, the above-described display is executed on the jackpot end screen. However, the display described above is executed when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends. You may comprise. In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the fifth embodiment, a winning change is not given after winning the jackpot game by winning V during the jackpot game. A configuration in which a probability variation state is given later may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), a display screen during a hit game (during a small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left to the right on the screen continues in the latent state even when the small hit game or the big hit game is executed, as in the special figure change. And executed. Then, when the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 183 (b)), and the value of the effect remaining variation number is added "5 times" to display "95 times" (FIG. 182). Point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number (“5 times”) added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

  In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the extra effect that is executed during the latent state is executed using a part of the effect that is always executed during the latent state (the effect of moving the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to add (add) the value (“5 times”) of the remaining performance variation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the add-on effect D (see point D in FIG. 182) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left side to the right side of the screen is executed during the special figure fluctuation. When the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“40 times” in FIG. 184 (a)), and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is added by “40 times” to display “74 times” (FIG. 182). Point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value (“40 times”) of the effect remaining change count added in the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 183 (b) and FIG. 184 (a), the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed during the winning game and during the special figure variation in the latent state. An extra effect of adding (adding) is executed. And, since the extra effect executed during the winning game and the extra effect executed during the special figure change are executed in the same effect mode, the special figure indicating whether or not the present is the winning game by the extra effect executed It is possible to suppress the player from grasping whether the change is occurring.

  Further, since the display form of the value is changed according to the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the extra effect (the display form “+5” in FIG. 183 (b) and FIG. 184 (a). ) (See “+40” display form)), it is possible to visually notify the player of the effect of the extra effect. It is also possible to execute an effect display that suggests the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect, for example, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect is stored. The display form of the “treasure box” may be changed according to the added value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184 (b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 184 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is an effect that is executed when the value of the remaining effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is “0” while the value of the actual remaining probability change number is greater than “0”. In this case, “???” is displayed as the value of the production residual variation number until the remaining substantial residual variation number is consumed. Thereby, even if the value of the substantial remaining probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number are different, the rendering in the latent state can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed as an effect suggesting that the latent state ends in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to visually suggest the possibility that the latent state ends to the player, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect for the player. Furthermore, “pinch” is displayed in the display area D4 as a character that suggests that the latent state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the display contents during the game per latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 185, when the winning game is executed in the latent state and a ball is won in the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The This winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (refer to 815c in FIG. 185) to the left side (refer to 815b in FIG. 185) to the left side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and expands. In this state, the display is stopped (see 815a in FIG. 185). In the winning display mode 815, a value (“15” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed, and the variable winning device 65 is given to the player. The player can be notified of the winning of the ball and the number of winning balls paid out by the winning.

  In addition, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in a single winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays are displayed until one winning game ends. The aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the winning display mode 815 is not executed corresponding to all the balls won in the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but instead of the winning game type (big winning game or small winning game) ) And whether or not the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed based on the winning number information during the winning game, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is displayed, the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed. It is composed. With this configuration, even when the ease of winning a ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of winning game (when the variable winning device 65 is opened for different periods) However, since the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted, the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted. It is possible to prevent a person from grasping the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit game).

  In this embodiment, the winning display mode is configured to display a value (“15” in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65. For example, a value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 may be divided into a plurality (for example, “10” and “5”) and displayed. As a result, the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed can be set in a plurality of patterns with respect to the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65. Even if the player has a variable winning device that has different numbers of prize balls to be paid out when winning a prize, the player can win the type of game by dividing the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out. It is possible to suppress grasping of (big hit game or small hit game). Moreover, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a win type (for example, per 15R) in which a large number of winnings can be expected, the win display mode 815 has the third symbol more than the win type (for example, per 7R) that results in a smaller win It may be set so that the period until it is displayed on the display device 81 becomes longer. As a result, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until it is determined can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the game ball that has won first.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment in that an additional effect table 2220ca and a winning effect table 2220cb are added. To do.

  First, with reference to FIG. 187 (a), details of the extra effect table 2220ca in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the extra effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment. This extra effect table 2220ca is a table that is referred to when determining the type of extra effect that is executed during the latent state, and obtained as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of residual effects changes. Based on the value of the effect counter 2230f, the type of additional effect is selected. This extra effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the residual effect variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent state, and a different value for each type of extra effect. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

  This additional effect table 2220ca is determined in the special figure 2 variation setting process in the latent state (see FIG. 191) when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (FIG. 191). Y5103: Yes), and when a winning ending command is received during the latent state (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the additional effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment is set so that the additional effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is different. Has been. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number is “1 to 40” and the value of the production counter 2230f is “0 to 99”, the additional production is executed. If the value of the effect counter 2230f is “100 to 179”, the additional effect A (addition count + 5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “180 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  When the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining variation number is “41 to 80” and the value of the effect counter 2230f is “0 to 49”, the additional effect is not executed, When the value of the counter 2230f is “50 to 149”, an extra effect A (addition count + 5) is set as the extra effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “150 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  Furthermore, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining variation number is “81 or more” and the value of the effect counter 2230f is “0 to 99”, an additional effect C (addition) is added. The number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is “100 to 198”, an additional effect D (addition count + 40) is set as the additional effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the effect residual variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. For this reason, it is possible to execute an extra effect suitable for the display state of the number of times of effect remaining probability change in the latent state. In addition, the larger the difference between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number, the easier it is to execute the additional production, so the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number increase. When there is a divergence (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change count remains large in spite of the value of the effect remaining probability change count being “0”. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number, the larger the value added (added) in the one additional effect. Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change count remains large despite the value of the effect remaining probability change count being “0”. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187 (b), the winning effect table 2220cb will be described. FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table 2220cb. This winning effect table 2220cb is referred to when determining whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when a ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed in the latent state. In this table, the presence / absence of a winning effect is determined based on the determination result (winning type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 2230f. This winning effect is an effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 185 on the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the success / failure determination result is a jackpot A to E and a jackpot G (that is, a jackpot that can be expected to appear) and the number of winning balls is the first or second winning, the value of the effect counter 2230f is related. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 198”), the winning effect “present” is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the winning game is being executed.

  If the number of winning balls is the third, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0-4”, the winning effect “None” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “5-198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fourth, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 119”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “120 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fifth, when the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 189”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “5 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is the sixth or more, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 194”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “195 to 195”. In the case of “198”, the winning effect “Yes” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

  Next, when the determination result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 2230f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. In addition, even when the result of the determination is a small hit, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is not less than one) is the same as the big hit F described above, and the value of the effect counter 2230f is also obtained (the acquired effect counter When the value of 2230f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who has performed the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) during the latent state is determined by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. It is possible to notify. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a game has occurred in the latent state.

  Further, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

  In the present embodiment, the winning game executed during the latent game is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual remaining probability variation number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the game ends, or the value of the actual remaining probability variation number In order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the game is a small hit game that is not changed, a big hit game in which a ball is likely to win the variable winning device 65 rather than the small hit game (big hits A to E, In (G) and (G), the prize-winning effect is less likely to be executed as the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 increases. Thereby, even if many balls actually win the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls won in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of game by winning based on the number of winning effects executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent probability state (the cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each hit game executed while the latent probability state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration displayed at 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be displayed cumulatively regardless of whether or not there is a winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of times that the winning effect has been executed is displayed. You may comprise so that it may add. In this case, since the actual accumulated value and the accumulated value on the display are different from each other by the number of winning balls for which no winning effect has been executed, means for storing the difference between the accumulated values is provided. When the winning game is executed, it is preferable that the winning effect is executed without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and the provisional winning effect for converging the difference of the accumulated values may be executed. Thereby, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls can be displayed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display a winning display mode 815 that is more than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game, and therefore the third symbol display device 81 Thus, it is possible to further suppress the player from identifying the type of game by winning the number of winning effects executed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 186 (b), the contents of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (b), in the RAM 2230 in the fifth embodiment, the remaining variable number display flag 2230ca, the additional effect flag 2230cb, and the additional effect type storage area 2230cc are added to the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment. Has been added.

  The remaining probability variation number display flag 2230ca is a flag for indicating a period during which the effect remaining probability variation number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 183 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. When it is set, the number of production remaining probability changes is displayed. The remaining probability variation number display flag 2230ca determines that a winning ending command has been received in the winning related command processing (see FIG. 193) (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193), and then the current winning hit is ended. When it is determined that the game state is to be shifted to the latent state later (Y5209: Yes in FIG. 193), and when it is determined that the remaining probability variation count display flag 2230ca is not set to ON (FIG. 193). Y5210: Yes) and is set to ON (Y5213 in FIG. 193), and similarly, in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 193), when determining whether or not the current win game is a win game that can execute an extra effect (Y5210 in FIG. 193). In the state command process 3 (see FIG. 192), when a state command indicating that the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state is received (Y4531: Yes in FIG. 192), it is set to OFF (FIG. 192 Y4532).

  The extra effect flag 2230cb is a flag for indicating that the extra effect based on the special figure fluctuation is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and in the state where it is set to ON, the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 195) is executed, the extra effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737 in FIG. 196) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 195) (FIG. 195). 196, Y4813). This extra effect flag 2230cb is set to ON (Y5108 in FIG. 191) when the extra effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 191) (Y5106: Yes in FIG. 191). (2) Reference is made in the variation start process (see FIG. 196) (Y4809 in FIG. 196), and when it is determined that the switch is set to on (Y4809: Yes in FIG. 196), it is set to off (Y4810 in FIG. 196). , An extra effect is set.

  The additional effect type storage area 2230cc is an area in which the additional type selected with reference to the additional effect table 2220ca is set, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 196). Reference) is executed. In this additional effect type storage area 2230cc, the type of the additional effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 191) is set (Y5107 in FIG. 191), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 196). When it is determined that the additional effect flag 2230cb is set to ON (Y4809: Yes in FIG. 196), the additional effect based on the set type of the added effect is set (Y4812 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 188 and FIG. 189, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment is a first winning process (see FIG. 120) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment described above. Instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 188) instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 188) and the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 126) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 124). 189) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the first winning process 2 (Y2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (Y2113). This first winning process 2 (Y2113 in FIG. 188) is similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 123) in the third embodiment described above, and the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening) The processing based on the ball that won the prize 65a) is executed.

  When the first winning process 2 (Y2113) is executed, the same processes as Y2401 to Y2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 123) of the third embodiment described above are executed. When the process of Y2404 is completed, a winning command is set (Y2431), and then the same processes as Y2405 to Y2411 of the first winning process (see FIG. 123) described above are executed, and this process ends. In this first winning process 2 (Y2113), by setting a winning prize command, the ball that won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 during the big hit game. Can output information about.

  Information about the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is given to the winning prize command, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command processing described later when the winning prize command is received. (See FIG. 194) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a winning effect (see FIG. 185) during the winning game is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the second winning process 2 (Y2513) will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (Y2513). This second winning process 2 (Y2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 126) in the third embodiment described above, and the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10. A process based on the ball that won a prize is executed.

  When the second winning process (Y2513) is executed, the same process as Y2701 to Y2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 126) described above is executed. When the process of Y2704 is finished, a winning prize command is set (Y2731), and then the same process as Y2705 to Y2711 of the above-described second prize process (see FIG. 126) is executed, and this process ends. In this second winning process 2 (Y2513), by setting a win winning command, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the small hit game. Information about the sphere can be output.

  Information about the number of balls won during the small hit game is given to the winning prize command, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command, the winning prize command processing described later (see FIG. 194). ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not the winning effect during the winning game (see FIG. 185) is executed.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 196. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 190) is different in that the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112 in FIG. 195) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 135), and the other processes are the same.

  First, the command determination process 3 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Y4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main controller 110 are received, similarly to the command determination process in the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130).

  The command determination process 3 (Y4111) is performed when the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is received (Y4306: Yes in FIG. 190) in response to the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. When the variation setting process (Y4351 in FIG. 191) is executed and when the status command is received (Y4313: Yes in FIG. 190), the status command process 3 (see FIG. 192) is substituted for the status command process (see FIG. 132). (Refer to FIG. 190, Y4352 in FIG. 190), and a hit-related command when a hit-related command is received (Y4352: Yes) in FIG. The difference is that the process (see FIG. 193) is executed, and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (Y4111) is executed, first, the processes of Y4301 to Y4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of Y4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process is executed (Y4351).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351). In the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y5101) and received as in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. A process (Y5102) for extracting a variation pattern command from the command is executed, and a process (Y5103 to Y5108) for determining whether or not to perform an extra effect (see FIG. 184 (a)) is executed.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (Y4351) is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y5101), and then a fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (Y5102). Note that the processing of Y5101 described above is the same as the processing of Y4307 in the command determination processing of the third embodiment (see FIG. 130) described above, and the processing of Y5102 is the command determination processing of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130)), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the remaining probability variation number set in the residual probability variation number area 2230o (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability variation number) and the residual probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the production residual probability variation number). A comparison is made (Y5103). In the process of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, that is, the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation count (the remaining probability variation count updated in the game state update process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 105)), and that it is possible to execute the extra effect. If it is (Y5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 2230h is acquired (Y5104), and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is obtained by referring to the additional effect table 2220ca. Based on the value of the effect counter 2230h acquired in the process of Y5104, the additional effect type is selected (Y5105).

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the remaining effect variation number is not smaller (same or greater) than the value of the actual remaining variation number, that is, the value of the effect remaining variation number is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that it cannot be performed (Y5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

  When the processing of Y5105 is finished, it is next determined whether or not an extra effect has been selected (Y5106). In the process of Y5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of Y5105, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is “1-40”, and is acquired. When the value of the produced effect counter 2230h is “0 to 99”, and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “41 to 80”, the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h Is “0 to 49” (Y5106: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5106, when it is determined that the extra effect is selected (Y5106: Yes), the type of the selected extra effect is set in the extra effect type storage area 2230cc (Y5107), and the extra effect flag 2230cb is set. It is set to ON (Y5108), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y4306 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (Y4306), then the same as Y4309 to Y4318 in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. Execute the process. In the process of Y4317, if it is determined that the remaining variable number of times command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (Y4317: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (Y4352).

  If it is determined in the process of Y4352 that a hit-related command has not been received (Y4352: No), similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above, other commands are used. Various processes are executed (Y4319), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (Y4352: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (Y4353). This hit-related command process (Y4353) is a process executed when each hit-related command output from the main controller 110 is output. Specifically, the hit-related game (big hit game or small hit game) An opening command that is output when the game is started, a round start command that is output when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, and a winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game) are executed Winning winning commands output based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening 65a, an ending command output when an ending period is started in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and other winning commands (V winning command etc.) is output from the main controller 110 It is executed if the discriminated) and.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 193, the hit related command processing (Y4353) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command processing (Y4353).

  When the hit related command processing (Y4353) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (Y5201). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Y5201: Yes), then A display opening command is set (Y5202). On the other hand, in the process of Y5201, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (Y5201: No), it is determined whether the next round start command is received (Y5203).

  If it is determined in the process of Y5203 that a round start command has been received (Y5203), a display round command is set (Y5204), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5203 that the round start command has not been received (Y5203: No), it is then determined whether a winning command has been received (Y5205). The winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see Y2113 in FIG. 188) and the second winning process 2 (see Y2513 in FIG. 189) executed in the main controller 110, and is a big win This is a command that is output based on the ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the game or the small hit game. Note that this winning command includes information relating to the number of balls won and information that can be specified as the type of winning game being executed (a jackpot type or a jackpot type).

  Here, the winning prize command processing (Y5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning prize command processing (Y5206).

  When the winning command process (Y5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (Y5301), and then whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or not. Is discriminated (Y5302). If it is determined that there is no latent state (Y5302: No), a winning effect is selected (Y5305), and the process proceeds to Y5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y5302 that the state is a latent probability state (Y5302: Yes), when selecting a winning effect to be executed in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state. The value of the effect counter 2230h used is acquired (Y5303), and a winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h and the winning effect table 2220cb (Y5304).

  When the process of Y5304 or the process of Y5305 is finished, it is determined whether or not a winning effect is selected (Y5306). If it is determined that a winning effect is selected (Y5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A display winning effect command is set (Y5307), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5306, when it is determined that the winning effect is not selected (Y5306: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the fluctuation display setting process 2 (Y4112) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112). This variation display setting process 2 (Y4112) is a process of updating the display contents of the effect remaining probability variation count and the additional effect flag 2230cb on, with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above. And a process of executing an extra effect when it is set to. In addition, about the other same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, in the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112), the same processes as Y4701 to Y4704 in the variable display setting process (FIG. 135) of the third embodiment are executed. Based on information that has been. It is determined whether the current state is in the latent state (Y4731).

  In the process of Y4731, when it is determined that the current state is not in the latent state (Y4731: No), the process of updating the number of effects remaining probability displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state (Y4732- Y4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a latent probability state (Y4731: Yes), then the effect remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is subtracted by 1 (Y4732), and the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0 (Y4733). In the process of Y4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0, that is, the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 183 (a)) is “one time” or more. When the production remaining probability variation number is displayed (Y4733: Yes), a display residual variation variable command is set based on the production residual variation number value set in the production probability variation area 2230p (Y4734).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y4733 that the value of the effect remaining variation number is not greater than 0 (0) (Y4733: No), then the actual variation number area 2230o is substantially set. It is determined whether or not the value of the residual variation number is greater than 0 (Y4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the production remaining probability variation count is 0, but the value of the actual remaining probability variation count is not 0 (1 or more).

  In the process of Y4735, when it is determined that the value of the substantial remaining probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (Y4735: No), the process proceeds to the Y4734 process described above, and the value of the production residual probability variation number is set. Based on this, a display residual probability variation command (that is, a command for indicating “0 times” in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (Y4734). Then, the process proceeds to Y4705.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual variation number is greater than 0 (Y4735: Yes), a display residual variation variable command indicating the production residual probability variation number “???” Y4736) and Y4705. By doing in this way, in the situation where the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0, when the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is “0”. Instead of displaying “0 times”, “???” can be displayed (see FIG. 184 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state continues even after “0 times” is displayed as the number of effects remaining variation. In addition, by setting the number of production remaining probability changes to “???”, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, thereby enhancing the production effect.

  In the process of Y4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y4701: No), it is determined that the latent state is not in the Y4731 process. In the case (Y4731: No) and when the processing of Y4734 or the processing of Y4736 is finished, the same processing as Y4705 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is then executed.

  In the process of Y4705, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y4705: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (Y4737). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737) is skipped. The process shifts to the process of Y4709, the same process as Y4709 to Y4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the number of times (120 times) less than the number of accuracy changes (120 times) set internally. For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easy to execute an effect that adds the number of remaining effect changes. In the fifth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, every time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), Although it is configured to subtract the number of effect remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1, for example, the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed. In such a case, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production residual variation. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the production remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed less than the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing of starting the latent probability state (timing when the latent probability state is set). As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the actual remaining probability variation count as the jackpot game and the special drawing lottery result in the case of winning the jackpot where the actual remaining probability variation count is set to the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when a winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation count is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of substantial probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure big hit is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of actual variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1). The value of the number of times added to (2) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 182). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the actual remaining probability variation number becomes “0” in a state where the substantial certainty variation number and the remaining effect variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  In the fifth embodiment, during a chance of winning (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game) that is executed when winning a jackpot game or a jackpot game with few balls out of the jackpot game is won. The display based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 185). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed in the latent state. Then, as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The display mode is configured such that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 197 to 217, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, when the potential is a big hit during the latent state and the latent state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is overwritten with 120), the latent state on the display is displayed. The remaining number of states is configured to continuously display the number before the big hit. Then, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state, if the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is set. It was set as the structure which performs the revival production | presentation displayed on top. In other words, the timing at which the remaining number on the display is added and displayed is limited to the timing at which the remaining number is zero.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of triggers are provided for adding the remaining number on the display. It was. More specifically, when there is a difference, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an extra effect at the start of fluctuation, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times displayed may be added. It was set as the structure which performs the superposition production which suggests that there is. In this additional effect, the number of times of additional display is varied according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. Thereby, improvement of the willingness to participate in the player's addition production is aimed at. Hereinafter, the extra effect that adds the remaining number of times on the display by the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 will be referred to as a press-up extra effect.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the remaining number on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number is not 0 (1 or more), the remaining number is not displayed (not displayed). ) The non-display mode is set. This makes it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so that a game with tension can be provided in the latent state. Further, when the non-display mode is set, when the remaining number of actual latent states (value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is a big hit of the second special symbol within a predetermined number (5 times) ( In other words, when the latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state ends, a special additional effect (special additional effect) having a different form from the normal additional effect is executed. It is said. As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  In the sixth embodiment, in addition to the extra effect, an effect is provided in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22. Specifically, a hold notice effect is provided that changes the state of the hold symbol in accordance with the operation content of the frame button 22 in the normal state or the probability change state. In this hold notice effect, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the notice effect is determined based on the player's operation on the frame button 22 (selection by the player), and based on the pre-read result for the hold ball in the range selected by the player. Thus, the notice effect using the reserved symbol is executed. Thereby, when an effect with high expectation is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, even if a low-expectation effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, if a reserved ball different from the selected range is selected, a high-expectation notice effect may have been executed. It can make a player think that it is not known. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol outside the selection range.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in that the configurations of the RAM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 197 to FIG. 202, display modes of various kinds of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 197 and FIG. 198 are diagrams showing display modes when the hold notice effect is executed in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 199 and FIG. 200 show the push-up effect in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 201 and FIG. 202 are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. .

  FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the hold notice effect in the present embodiment is started. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the hold notice effect is started, the display area Ds1a in which the characters “Decide who to feed with PUSH” are displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22. In addition, a tray Ds1b on which fewer bones than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. In the example of FIG. 197 (a), a case where there are three retaining balls and three boned meats is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a manner that reciprocates in the left-right direction.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 in accordance with the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the pressing timing. FIG. 197 (b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the mode of the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b is changed to a mode of being happy with a smile. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose modes have been changed have been the targets of the current reservation notice.

  If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time of the display area Ds1a (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the effect of eating the bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed by the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped downward). After each reserved symbol eats bone-in meat, an effect is produced in which part or all of the reserved symbol that ate bone-in meat lays eggs. FIG. 197 (c) illustrates a mode in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. The reserved symbol that lays the egg is displayed in order to suggest to the player that the reserved symbol is based on the highly anticipated reserved ball. More specifically, when the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol in the selection range includes a reserved ball that causes reach, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball has eaten the boned meat. Later, the production of eggs is performed. In addition, when the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in which the reach occurs is not included in the selection range, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. This allows the player to detect that the reach effect is generated before the first special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball is executed, so that the player can enjoy the reach effect. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the holding notice effect is configured to be more easily determined when there is a holding ball in which a reach effect occurs. Therefore, if an effect of laying eggs is not executed after an effect of eating meat with bone, a hold effect that a reach effect is generated on a reserved symbol outside the range of the reserved symbol selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 There is a high possibility that the holding symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if an effect of laying an egg with a reserved symbol within the range selected by the player is executed, a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, When the production effect is not executed, it is possible to provide a novel production in which a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  After execution of the effect that the reserved symbol lays eggs, an image that prompts repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 198 (a). With this image, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the effect is developed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can continuously press the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the hold notice effect.

  When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the specified number of consecutive hits determined at the time of production, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4 The effect that the egg moves is executed. In addition, an egg moves in order from the holding | maintenance symbol with the old order of holding | maintenance. FIG. 198 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed on the upper part of the reserved symbol Dh2 moves into the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach in the variable display based on the reserved ball. Super reach is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and is difficult to select when the lottery is missed. Therefore, the player can hit the frame button 22 more seriously. Note that it is uncertain whether or not the super reach will occur only by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. 198 (c), the egg Dh2a is cracked, and the characters "Super reach confirmed" Super-reach is confirmed when it occurs.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the holding notice effect is executed, the range of the holding symbols for generating the notice is determined by the player's selection. Thereby, depending on the content of the hold notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball within the range selected by the player, or to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball outside the player's selection range. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel pending notice effect that has never existed before.

  In the sixth embodiment, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by continuous hitting of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg symbols whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as an intelligible production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, the push-up effect produced during the latent state will be described. This press-up addition effect is an effect indicating that the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display may be added by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. This push-up addition effect is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively small (or 0) when the player operates the frame button 22 and a special mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively high It has been. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit This is an aspect that can be easily selected. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is easily selected when the difference between the remaining number on display and the actual remaining number is less than 30.

  First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200 (a). FIG. 199 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the normal push-down effect. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the push-up addition effect is started, a button D2 with the letters “push” is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and “up chance” is displayed above the button D2. "Is displayed. Further, a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display area D3 is displayed below the button D2, and a display area D4 is displayed below the display area D3 with the characters “Press the button at the right time!”. Is displayed. In the display area D3, the small areas D3b and D3f with the character “?”, The small areas D3c and D3e with the character “chance!”, And the characters “Super hot !!” are attached. A small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a that scrolls from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front in each small area. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that there is a possibility that the number of certain changes in display may increase by operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner. It should be noted that the number of times of addition increases most when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button is displayed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. It becomes the smallest when 22 is pressed.

  FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small region D3d. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d with the characters “Super hot !!” An extra number display area D5 in which the characters “+5” are displayed is displayed, and “GET” is displayed above the extra number display area D5. In addition, five times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Furthermore, the characters “GET 5 times GET !!” are displayed on the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand the remaining number of times on the display added in the current press-on effect. Note that the correspondence between the timing at which the scroll bar D3a is pressed and the remaining number of times to be added is defined in the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 200A shows the display contents when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f to which the character “?” With a low expectation is added. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), the button D2 is split into two, and the letters “sorry ...” are displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters “addition failure ...” are displayed in the display area D4. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Accordingly, when the next press-on effect is executed, it is possible to make the user think that the frame button 22 is pressed at a better timing, and the player's willingness to participate in the press-up effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200 (b), a special mode push-up effect will be described. When the special mode push-up effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen in the main display area Dm, and “super-chance opportunity” is displayed above the button D2. "Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal mode has started.

  In addition, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. Is displayed on the display area D4, and the text “Determine the number of times to add by yourself!” Is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player recognize that the timing at which he / she operated the frame button 22 affects the number of times of addition (that is, not a so-called race). Therefore, since the player can more positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, the non-display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display becomes 0, and it is unclear when the latent state ends, and the player It is a production to give a sense of tension.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground as in the third embodiment. Set to In the present embodiment, the characters “End ...?” Are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the latent state ends.

  When the actual number of remaining latent states is not 0, the process shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), an effect in which a rock 813 approaches from behind a character 811 that imitates a rabbit is executed, and “Pinch! A display area in which a plurality of characters “!” Are displayed appears. Further, in place of the remaining number of times of the latent state, a character “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the latent state has not yet ended, but it is not known when it will end. Therefore, from the anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near, it is possible to face the game with a sense of tension.

  FIG. 202 (a) is a diagram showing the display content when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 and the latent state ends in the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when the latent state ends when the non-display mode is set (when the value of the probability variation counter 2030k becomes 0), the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813. Is called. In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters “END !!” are displayed. With these displays, the player can clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch exit appearance) when the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of latent statuses is a big hit in a state of 5 or less. . If the second special symbol is a big hit just before the end of the latent state, it is advantageous for the player because basically the latent state is set 120 times after the big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), an effect is performed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. Further, the characters “Pinch escape!” Are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to “remaining 100 times”. Since this pinch-out appearance is only performed when a big hit is reached at the end of the latent state (within 5 remaining latent states), the player who confirmed this out of pinch state It is a big hit just before the state ends, and it can be recognized that a latent state has been newly added. Therefore, the player can be pleased with the big win at a good timing, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. First, FIG. 203 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), in the ROM 2220 in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment, an additional effect selection table 2220da, a pressing period table 2220db, and a hold notice determination table 2220dc. And are provided.

  The extra effect selection table 2220da is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the press-up extra effect in the latent state, and the mode of the press-up extra effect to be executed (either the normal mode or the special mode). is there. Details of the extra effect selection table 2220da will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. FIG.

  FIG. 204 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the extra effect selection table 2220da. As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the extra effect selection table 2220da has a special symbol lottery result, and the player's participation in the push-up extra effect is normal (games with extra effect within the past five times). The participation degree normal table 2220da1 referred to when the player is operating the frame button 22 and the lottery result of the special symbol are small hits, and the participation degree for the player's push-up effect is low (past 5) The table 2220da2 for lower participation level that is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the extra effect over the number of times) and the table 2220da3 for big hit that is referred to when the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery And are provided.

  First, details of the participation degree normal table 2220da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 204 (b). FIG. 204 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the participation degree normal table 2220da1. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the participation degree normal table 2220da1 shows the value of the effect counter 2230h for each difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. The range and the type (aspect) of the push-on addition effect are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with “no additional effect” in the range of “0 to 95”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “96 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100). Is not executed. In addition, a press-down effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). It should be noted that the special mode is not selected when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 5 to 29 times. This is to prevent the extra display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “91 to 97”, “normal mode” is defined in association with it, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “98, 99”, “special mode” is It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a normal mode push-up effect is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and a special mode press-up effect is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

  In this way, if the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is large (if it is 30 or more), the occurrence probability of the push-up addition effect is increased, so that the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

  Next, the details of the low participation degree table 2220da2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this low participation degree table 2220da2. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with “no extra effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is “91 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation in the player's push-up effect is low, the frequency of the press-up effect is increased (4% → 9%). Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 80”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, “normal mode” is defined in association with the range where the value of the production counter 2230h is “81 to 94”, and “special mode” is included within the range where the value of the production counter 2230h is “95 to 99”. It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is used and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100). Is not executed. Further, the press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the press-up effect in the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). In other words, even when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 or more, the frequency of the push-up effect is increased (9% → 19%). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, the jackpot table 2220da3 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot table 2220da3 is a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is made during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h Is defined in association with the range of “0 to 99”. In other words, the push-down effect in the normal mode is always executed.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is “normal mode” with respect to the range of “0 to 49”. "Is defined in association with each other, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is" 50 to 99 "," special mode "is defined in association with it. That is, a press-up effect in the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. In this way, in the latent state, when the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number becomes a big win when the difference is 5 or more, the push-up effect is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect that a big hit will be expected when a press-on effect is generated. In particular, in the special effect, the selection rate is significantly increased as compared to the participation degree normal table 2220da1 and the low participation degree table 2220da2. Therefore, when a special push-down effect is generated, it can be expected that the jackpot is stronger and stronger. Therefore, the game can be performed while paying attention to the mode of the push-up addition effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the difference between the remaining number of times displayed and the actual number of remaining times is 5 or more and the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, a push-up effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the ratio of setting up the press-up effect is lowered and the press-up effect is set at a rate of 80%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily generate a difference between the remaining number of times displayed and the actual remaining number of times, so that it is possible to more effectively execute the push-up effect.

  Returning to FIG. 203, the description will be continued. The pressing period table 2220db is a data table that defines the number of times of additional display according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the press-up effect. Details of the pressing period table 2220db will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 (c) and 206. FIG.

  First, FIG. 205 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 2220db. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), the pressing period table 2220db refers to the normal table 2220db1 that is referred to when the normal-type press-up effect is set, and the special-mode press-up effect is set. The special table 2220db2 is included. When execution of the push-up effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined push-up effect is read and stored in a press period storage area 2230da of the RAM 2230 described later. When pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-up effect, the table stored in the press-period storage area 2230da is referred to determine the number of times of addition.

  First, the details of the normal table 2220db1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 2220db1. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the normal table 2220db1 defines the number of times (addition value) to be added to the remaining number display area D1 in association with the elapsed time from the start of the press-on addition effect. ing. Note that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing-down period timer 2230db of the RAM 2230.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), “0” is associated with an extra value in the range of elapsed time from 0 to 699 milliseconds. During this period (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the push-up effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b with the character “?”. It becomes an aspect. Further, “3” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds. Note that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the push-up addition effect) is such that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c with the characters “chance!” It becomes the mode to do. In addition, “5” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds. Note that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the push-up addition effect) is the small area D3d with the scroll bar D3a marked with the characters “Super hot !!”. It becomes a mode to move on.

  Similarly, in the range where the elapsed time is 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e), “2” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. In the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f, “0” is associated with the added value.

  As described above, the normal table 2220db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the added value according to the effect mode (change in the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the press-down effect in the normal mode. Thereby, the number of times corresponding to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) when the player presses the frame button 22 can be added and displayed.

  Next, the details of the special table 2220db2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special table 2220db2.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), “5” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time of 0 to 799 milliseconds (a period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3b), and the elapsed time is 800. The range of ˜999 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with “10” as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a is in the small area D3d). “20” is associated with the added value, and “10” is added as the added value in the range where the elapsed time is 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). In the range where the elapsed time is 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), the added value is “5”. In the range where the elapsed time is 2000 to 2049 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g), “30” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range 2050 to 2500 milliseconds In the (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h), “5” is associated with the additional value.

  With this special table 2220db2, the number of times the scroll bar D3a is displayed in the small area where the frame bar 22 is pressed can be accurately displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Returning to FIG. 203 (a), the description will be continued. The hold notice determination table 2220dc is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the hold notice effect is executed. As described above, the hold notice effect may be executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the probable change state, and the lottery result with high expectation in the held balls. This is an effect that is executed to suggest that there exists. Details of the hold notice determination table 2220dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the contents of the hold notice determination table 2220dc. As shown in FIG. 207, the hold notice determination table 2220 dc has a reach presence table that is referred to when there is a hold ball in which a reach effect is generated in the hold ball, and a reach effect is generated in the hold ball. And a non-reach time table that is referred to when there is no reserved ball to be played. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 2230h for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined for each number of held balls.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 in the table with reach. That is, when the number of held balls is 2 or less, the holding notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is associated with “0-9”, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is “0 to 15” is associated. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to execute the reserved notice effect. Therefore, since it is possible to positively fire the player in an attempt to store more reserved balls, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 207, even in the no reach time table, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0-2. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is three, “0” is associated as the value of the tooth and effect counter 2230h, and when the number of reserved balls is four, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is “0, 1”. "Is associated. In other words, the table for when there is no reach has fewer random numbers (counter values) for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined than the table for when there is a reach. Therefore, if there is a holding ball where the reach effect is performed in the holding ball, the holding notice effect is more easily executed, so that the player develops a reach effect at the stage when the holding notice effect is started. It can be expected strongly.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment in that a pressing period storage area 2230da, a pressing period timer 2230db, and a continuous hit counter 2230dc are added.

  The pressing period storage area 2230da is a storage area for storing a pressing period corresponding to the determined type of the pressing up effect when execution of the pressing up effect is determined. That is, when the start of the push-up addition effect is determined, the table (the normal table 2220db1 or the special table 2220db2) read from the press period table 2220db is stored (see Y4392 in FIG. 213). When the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-on effect, the additional value is determined based on a table stored in the press-period storage area 2230da and a timer value of a press-down period timer 2230db described later. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is updated.

  The pressing period timer 2230db is a timer that measures an elapsed time since the start of the pressing effect. On the basis of the timer value of the pressing period timer 2230db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da, an additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

  When an effect that prompts repeated hits of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 198 (a)) occurs in the repeated hitting counter effect 2230dc, a predetermined upper limit value is set for each effect, and the player during the effect is displayed. Is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see Y5703 in FIG. 210). When the value of this repeated hit counter 2230dc becomes 0 during the execution of the effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit, the effect is developed to the next stage (the egg symbol moves into the house Ds1c).

  The pressed flag 2230dd is a flag indicating whether or not an operation (pressed) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the press-up effect of 1. If the pressed flag 2230dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the press-up effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected. It means not detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the press-on effect, the pressed flag 2230dd is referred to, and the pressing period stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da only when the state is OFF. Is added to the remaining number display area D1 and displayed (see Y5605 in FIG. 209). In other words, even if the player performs the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 a plurality of times in one adding effect, only the adding to the first operation (pressing) is executed. In addition, when the push-up addition effect is completed with the pressed flag 2230dd being off, 1 is added to the value of a participation degree counter 2230df described later. That is, the participation counter 2230df counts the number of times that the player has not participated in the push-up addition effect (presses the frame button 22). In the present embodiment, the frequency of execution of the push-up addition effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df.

  The pending advance notice flag 2230de is a flag indicating whether or not the pending advance notice effect (see FIGS. 197 and 198) is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. This pending notice flag 2230de is set to ON when execution of the hold notice effect is determined (see Y5808 in FIG. 214), and is set to OFF at the end of the hold notice effect (see Y5835 in FIG. 217). While the on-holding advance notice flag 2230de is on, the execution of a new on-hold notice effect is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the hold notice is executed repeatedly and confuses the player.

  The participation degree counter 2230df is a counter indicating the degree of participation of the player with respect to the push-up addition effect. This participation degree counter 2230 df is incremented by 1 when the press-up addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22 (see Y 5509 in FIG. 208). When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see Y5609 in FIG. 209). In other words, the value of the participation degree counter 2230df counts the number of consecutive times that the player has not pressed the frame button 22 (not participated) in the push-up addition effect. In the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the press-on effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df is greater than 5 (if the player has not participated in the press-up addition effect for six or more consecutive times), the determination ratio of the press-up addition effect is increased. As a result, an opportunity to prompt the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 can be increased, and the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect can be improved.

  The non-display setting flag 2230dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 201B) is set as the display mode in the latent state. If this non-display setting flag 2230dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see Y5896 in FIG. 216), and when an extra effect (press-up extra effect, special extra effect) is set (in FIG. 213). Y4395, see Y5860 in FIG. 215), when the latent state is finished during the non-display mode (see Y5858 in FIG. 215), it is set to off.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 217. First, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Y4107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 128) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Y4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 208) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. (Y5501: Yes), and then, it is determined whether or not a press-on effect is being executed (Y5502).

  In the process of Y5502, if it is determined that the press-up extra effect is being executed (Y5502: Yes), the extra value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the press-up extra effect is added to the remaining number display area D1. Is added during execution (Y5503), and the process ends. The details of the process of pressing the extra effect (Y5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5502 that the press-on effect is not being executed (Y5502: No), it is then determined whether the hold notice effect is being executed (Y5504). In the process of Y5504, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is being performed (Y5504: Yes), the hold notice press process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect is executed ( Y5505), this processing is terminated. The details of the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, in the process of Y5504, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not being executed (Y5504: No), the process corresponding to the other pressing timing is executed (Y5506), and this process ends. The other pressing timing is, for example, timing when the back image can be changed. In the sixth embodiment, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back surface type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the variable stop state. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that a game will become monotonous.

  If it is determined in the process of Y5501 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (Y5501: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the press-up effect (Y5507). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the extra effect (Y5507: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508). If it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5508: No), the player has not performed the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the press-up ride effect, and the press-up ride effect has ended (the player has This means that the user has not participated in the current press-on effect), and updates the value by adding 1 to the value of the participation degree counter 2230df (Y5509), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y5507 that it is not the end timing of the press-up addition effect (Y5507: No), or in the process of Y5508, it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508: Yes), Y5509 This process is terminated without executing the process.

  By executing the processes of Y5507 to Y5509, it is possible to accumulate the degree of participation with respect to the player's push-up addition effect over a plurality of addition effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the push-up effect according to the participation degree of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the details of the process for pressing the extra effect (Y5503) will be described. This extra display pressing process (Y5503) is a process for displaying an additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 on the remaining number display area D1, as described above.

  When the push-in process during extra effect (Y5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5601). Since the added value has already been displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the press-up added effect, it is not necessary to execute a new added value, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5601 that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5601: Yes), then the pressed period set in the pressed period storage area is read (Y5602), and the read pressed In the period, an additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 2230db is read (Y5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read added value is 0 (Y5604). If it is not 0 (Y5604: No), an effect is displayed in which the read added value is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (Y5605).

  After the process of Y5605, the added value read in the process of Y5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p and updated (Y5606), and the process proceeds to Y5608. On the other hand, in the process of Y5604, when it is determined that the read additional value is 0 (Y5604: Yes), an additional failure effect (see FIG. 200A) for notifying that the addition has failed is set (Y5607). ), The process proceeds to Y5608.

  In the process of Y5608 executed after the process of Y5606 or Y5607 is completed, the pressed flag 2230dd is set to ON (Y5608), and the value of the participation counter 2230df is reset to 0 (Y5609). Exit. By executing the push-down process during the extra effect (see FIG. 209), when the push-up extra effect occurs, the extra value corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Can be added to the number of times displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the details of the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described. This hold-down notice pressing process (Y5505) is a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold-notice effect as described above. In the pressing process during the holding notice (Y5505), first, it is determined whether it is a pressing period (see FIG. 197 (a)) in the holding notice effect (Y5701). It is determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (see FIG. 198 (a)) (Y5702).

  In the process of Y5702, if it is determined that it is not the continuous hit period (Y5702: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5702 that the continuous hit period is in progress (Y5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hit counter 2230dc is updated by subtracting 1 (Y5703), and the updated counter value is 0? Is determined (Y5704). If it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (Y5704: Yes), the development effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) in which the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c is set (Y5705). The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5704, when it is determined that the value of the updated repeated hit counter 2230dc is 1 or more (Y5704: No), the process of Y5705 is skipped, and this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of Y5701 that the present is the pressing period (Y5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is designated in the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed immediately below). The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes winning information that causes reach production (Y5707). The reach production refers to any one of the following: normal reach, miss super reach A and B, hit normal reach, and hit super reach A to C.

  In the process of Y5707, when it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the designated range (Y5707: Yes), then, for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that causes the reach The effect that the egg symbol is displayed (the reserved symbol lays the egg) is set (Y5708). Then, a continuous hitting period for executing a continuous hitting effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be hit consecutively is set (Y5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous hitting counter 2230dc is set (Y5710), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of Y5707, when it is determined that the winning information for generating the reach effect is not included in the designated range (Y5707: No), the pending advance notice flag 2230de is set to indicate the end of the hold advance notice effect. It is set to off (Y5711), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the hold notice pressing process (see FIG. 210), when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the hold notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, if there is no advance notice (display of egg symbol) for the reserved symbols in the selected range, there is a reserved symbol with high expectation among the reserved symbols outside the player's selected range. It can be expected. Therefore, even when the holding notice effect does not occur, it is possible to provide a novel effect that can be expected to win a big hit on the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the command determination process 4 executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y4311, Y4313 to Y4315, and Y4319 are respectively command determination processes in the third embodiment (see FIG. 130). ) Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y43111 to Y4315, and Y4319 are executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received in the process of Y4306 (Y4303: Yes), the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is started. Is executed (Y4361), and the present process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (Y4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning command is received in the process of Y4311 (Y4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command. Then, a hold notice setting process for determining whether or not to hold a hold notice is executed (Y4362), and this process ends. Details of the hold advance notice setting process (Y4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the process of Y4315, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (Y4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number command has been received (Y4363). ), If the remaining variation count command has been received (Y4363), the remaining variation count command processing for executing the processing according to the number of times notified by the remaining variation count command is executed (Y4364). finish. Details of this remaining probability variation command processing (Y4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, in the process of Y4363, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (Y4363: No), then whether or not at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received. Is determined (Y4364), and if at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (Y4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command Is executed (Y4364), and the process is terminated. Details of the confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (Y4361) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4. When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y4371), and then notified by the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern is extracted (Y4372).

  When the process of Y4372 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability state (Y4373), and if it is a latent probability state (Y4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not a push-on effect is set. Is executed (Y4374), and the process proceeds to Y4376. On the other hand, in the process of Y4373, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (Y4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the process of Y4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. The process proceeds to Y4376. In the process of Y4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern is set (Y4376), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213, details of the extra effect setting process (Y4374) will be described. This push-on extra effect setting process (Y4374) is a process for determining execution of the press-up extra effect in the latent state as described above.

  When the superimposing effect setting process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a lottery stop type (Y4381). Is determined (Y4381: No), the next time when the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern command is received is during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)), and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less. Is determined (Y4382). In the process of Y4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the remaining number of probability changes is 6 or more (Y4382: No), the process proceeds to Y4391.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4382, if it is determined that the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less (Y4382: Yes), then the current second special symbol lottery is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether the lottery result is a stop type of G (Y4383), and when it is determined that none of the big hits E to G (Y4383: No), the process proceeds to Y4391. On the other hand, in the process of Y4383, when it is determined that any of the big hits E to G (Y4383: Yes), it is a big hit from the extra effect selection table 2220da as a table for discriminating the setting of the push-up extra effect. The table 2220da3 is read (Y4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of latent probabilities given after the jackpot, and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation area 2230p is calculated (Y4385), and the process proceeds to Y4391.

  If it is determined in the process of Y4381 that the current stop type is a small hit (Y4381: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the participation counter 2230df is greater than 5 (Y4386). If the value of the participation degree counter 2230df is larger than 5 (Y4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 2220da as a table for determining the setting of the push-up addition effect (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of latent states on display stored in the production probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed as Y4391. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the process of Y4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation level counter 2230df is less than 5 (Y4386: No), the low participation level table 2220da2 is read from the additional effect selection table 2220da (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of latent states on display stored in the production probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed as Y4391. Migrate to

  In the process of Y4391 that is executed after any of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 ends, the difference calculated in the process of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 and the process of any of Y4384, Y4387, and Y4388 Based on the read table, the mode of the push-up extra effect (any of the no extra effect, the normal mode, and the special mode) is specified (Y4391), and the process proceeds to Y4392.

  In the process of Y4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the push-up addition effect is determined (Y4392). The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 2220db (see FIGS. 206A and 206B) and set in the pressing period storage area 2230da (Y4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when an operation (pressing) of the player with respect to the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing and adding effect determined to be executed this time, and is added corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing. The value is displayed over the remaining number display area D1. This allows the player to actively operate (press) the frame button 22 in the hope that the remaining number of latent states on the display will be added. Can improve willingness to participate. After the process of Y4393, the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF (Y4394), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y4392 that the execution of the push-up addition effect has not been determined (Y4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. (Y4395), this process is terminated. By executing this extra effect setting process, it is possible to select the appropriate extra press effect in accordance with the player's participation situation with respect to the past extra effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent state, the push-up effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit E to G. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, it may be configured to be able to set a press-on effect. Thereby, the freedom degree of production can be raised.

  Next, the details of the hold notice setting process (Y4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the hold notice setting process (Y4362) is a process for performing execution notice of the hold notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When the hold notice setting process (Y4362) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the gaming state is a latent state (Y5801). Each process of Y5802 to Y5809 for setting the notice effect is skipped, and this process is finished as it is. The reason why the hold notice effect is not executed in the latent state is that the main fluctuation in the latent state is a change display of two special symbols that cannot be stored on hold. For this reason, in the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is almost zero, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution determination itself of the hold notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5801 that the current gaming state is not the latent probability state (the normal state or the probability variation state) (Y5801: No), then whether the pending advance notice flag 2230de is on (Y5802), and when it is determined that the pending notice flag 2230de is ON (the pending notice effect is already being executed) (Y5802). : Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5802 that the pending notice flag 2230de is off (Y5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5803), It is determined whether or not the read winning information includes winning information corresponding to a variation pattern in which a reach effect occurs (Y5804).

  In the process of Y5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is included (Y5804: Yes), as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect, for when there is a reach The table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220dc (see FIG. 207) to determine whether the hold notice is executed, and the process proceeds to Y5807. On the other hand, in the process of Y5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (Y5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect. The time table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220dc, the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process proceeds to Y5807.

  In the process of Y5807 executed after the process of Y5805 or Y5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold notice effect is determined in the process of Y5805 or Y5806 (Y5807), and it is determined that the execution of the hold notice effect is determined. If it is (Y5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 2230de is set to ON (Y5808). Next, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 197 (a)) is set (Y5809), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the hold notice setting process, the hold notice effect can be set at an appropriate ratio according to the number of balls to be held and the contents of each ball to be held.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, details of the remaining variable number of times command process (Y4364) will be described. This remaining probability variation command process (Y4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the remaining probability variation command, as described above. When the remaining probability variation number command processing (Y4364) is started, first, the remaining variation number notified by the remaining variation number command is stored in the remaining variation number area 2230o (Y5851), and then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a state (Y5852).

  In the process of Y5852, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (Y5852: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5852 that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 2230dg is on (whether or not the non-display mode is set) (Y5853) and if the non-display setting flag 2230dg is OFF (Y5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (Y5861). ), This process is terminated. Details of the non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5853, when it is determined that the non-display setting flag 2230dg is on (Y5854), the non-display mode (see FIG. 201B) is set. In the process, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation number stored in the remaining variation region 2230o is 5 or less (Y5854). In the process of Y5854, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 6 or more (Y5854: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (Y5854: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is any one of jackpots E to G (Y5855). If it is determined that it is not any of G (Y5855: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining variation number is 0 (whether or not the number of times stored in the remaining variation region 2230o is 0). It is determined (Y5856).

  In the process of Y5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is not 0 (Y5856: No), this process is terminated as it is to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of Y5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 0 (Y5856: Yes), it means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the non-display mode end effect (See FIG. 202A) is set, the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF (Y5858), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5855, if it is determined that the current lottery result is one of the big hits E to G (Y5855: Yes), since the latent state of 120 times is set after the big hit, Then, execution of a special extra effect (see FIG. 202 (b)) is set (Y5859), overwriting 100 times in the effect probability variation area 2230p, and the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to OFF ( Y5860), the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the non-display mode is set, the second actual number of remaining latent states (the value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is within a predetermined number (5 times). When the special symbol is a big hit (ie, when the remaining number of latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state is finished), a special additional in a mode different from the normal push-up effect. It is set as the structure which performs production (special addition production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  Next, the details of the non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described with reference to FIG. This non-display setting process (Y5861) is a process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode, as described above. As shown in FIG. 216, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is 0 (Y5891) and is 1 or more. If it is determined (Y5891: No), 1 is subtracted from the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y5892), and the remaining number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value in the effect probability variation number area 2230p after the subtraction. The displayed number of times is updated (Y5893), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5891, when it is determined that the remaining number stored in the effect variation number area 2230p is zero (Y5891: Yes), the actual remaining number stored in the remaining certain variation number area 2230o is It is determined whether or not it is zero (Y5894). If the actual remaining number is not zero (Y58994: No), a non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set (Y5895) and non-display is performed. The setting flag 2230dg is set to ON (Y5896), and this process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the remaining latent state game.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y5894, when it is determined that the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o is 0 (Y5894: Yes), the display is performed at the end timing of the latent state. Since it means that the remaining number of times is updated to 0, a normal end effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) is set (Y5897), and this process ends.

  Thus, in the non-display setting process in the sixth embodiment, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times of display becomes zero. As a result, it is possible to form a state where it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, the game can be performed with a sense of tension while the non-display mode is set.

  Next, details of the confirmation command process (Y4366) will be described with reference to FIG. This confirmation command process (Y4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol as described above. When the confirmation command process (see FIG. 217) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is the special figure 1 confirmation command (Y5831). (Y5831: Yes), the fixed display of the first special symbol is set (Y5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 2230de is on (Y5833). If it is determined that the pending notice flag 2230de is on (Y5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the present fixed display is set. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (Y5834). In the process of Y5834, if it is determined that the hold notice effect has ended (Y5834: Yes), the hold notice flag 2230de is set to OFF (Y5835), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y5833 that the pending notice flag 2230de is off (Y5833: No), or in the process of Y5834, it is determined that the hold notice effect is continuing (Y5834: No). ), And this process is terminated. In the process of Y5831, if it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (Y5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (Y5836), and this process is terminated. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to execute the hold notice effect as an interest effect in the normal state or the probable change state. In this hold notice effect, a hold symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by an operation on the player's frame button 22.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a holding notice effect indicating an expected degree of change display held. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable display is started It was possible to raise the player's expectation.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that when a holding notice effect is generated, it is difficult for a player to have a sense of expectation with respect to a holding symbol that is not subject to the holding notice. This is because it is normal to set a hold notice effect for a hold symbol corresponding to a hold ball with high expectation in the hold.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be designated. Moreover, it is comprised so that the direction in which the reservation ball | bowl with the high expectation degree which becomes a big hit is included performs the holding | maintenance notice effect becomes high. Thereby, when the holding notice effect is not set for the reserved symbols in the designated range or when the holding notice effect having a low expectation is executed, the reserved symbols outside the range designated by the player are handled. It is possible to have a big win for the holding ball. Therefore, when a high-priority hold notice effect occurs in the selected range, the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice has occurred is expected to have a big hit, and no hold notice is generated. When a hold notice with a low expectation occurs, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a sense of expectation can be given to a hold ball outside the selection range.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as a kind of push-up effect executed in the latent state, the remaining latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 is displayed. There is an effect that adds the number of times.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having an operation means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player and capable of executing an operation effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. is there. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect for informing the result of the predetermined winning lottery. Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, there is provided a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display. Then, when a press-up addition effect is executed, a configuration in which a different additional value is added and displayed in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 within a range in which the remaining number on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number. It is said. Thereby, since the remaining number of times of addition on the display is varied depending on the operation timing of the player, the player can be more actively added and participate in the production (the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing). . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, in the latent state, the number of remaining latent states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is not displayed. When the second special symbol is a big hit within the predetermined number of times (5 times) (the latent state is newly set 120 times), it is possible to execute a special extra effect that is different from the normal extra effect. It is composed.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines set an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state over a predetermined number of lotteries based on a predetermined trigger such as a win. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it shifts to the advantageous state, by executing the production of the aspect in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue, the expectation that the advantageous state will continue for a long time, There is something that aims to improve interest.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is unclear at which stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state has been reset when the advantageous state is reset (overwritten) when it becomes a predetermined trigger such as a hit in the advantageous state. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, a special extra effect that is executed only when the remaining number of latent probabilities is 5 or less is a big hit, so that the player who has confirmed the special extra effect On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent state has been added just before the end of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player who has recognized that he has won the jackpot in a timely manner. In addition, since the remaining number of times of the latent state at the time of the big hit becomes clear, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special addition effect is executed only in a state where the non-display mode is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1, if the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (the value stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o) is within five times, a special case different from normal It is good also as a structure which performs an addition production | presentation. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, there may be a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. That is, even if the remaining number of times on display is within five times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the actual number of remaining times is within five times. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times on the display is 5 or less and the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). In other words, it is unclear whether the actual remaining number of times has been sufficiently left, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, it is possible to execute the special extra effect regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set. When winning a jackpot, the player can be surely recognized to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a special addition effect according to whether the non-display aspect is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be executed in which the sprinting character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By executing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to execute a more natural flow effect in each display mode. Moreover, the production mode can be diversified.

  In the sixth embodiment, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by the effect of prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect, but is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg symbols whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as an intelligible production.

  In the sixth embodiment, when a hold notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the hold symbol for automatically making a hold notice is determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect itself may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the hold notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). In other words, if the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the hold notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the hold ball with low expectation may not be enjoyed. Therefore, the player can select not only the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect but also whether or not to perform the reserved notice effect itself. It can make you feel. Therefore, it can respond widely to the needs of each player.

  In the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested depending on whether or not the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether or not the egg is cracked. It is not something that can be done. As long as the reserved symbols can be changed to different modes according to the expected degree of the corresponding reserved ball, for example, the color of the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player may be changed according to the expected level. Good. More specifically, for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a holding symbol for performing the holding notice effect, the holding symbol in the selection range is changed to white. And it is good also as a structure in which the color of each holding | maintenance symbol changes, when a player hits the frame button 22 repeatedly. In this case, it may be determined in advance at the start of the hold notice or when the player selects the hold symbol, how far the color changes according to the number of consecutive hits for each hold symbol. Specifically, for example, when a holding symbol corresponding to a holding ball having a variation pattern of short deviation, normal deviation, and hit super reach A is selected, the holding symbol corresponding to the short deviation is changed from white to another color. Set so that it does not change, and the hold symbol corresponding to the detachment normal reach is set to change up to yellow (changes in order of white → blue → yellow) according to the number of consecutive hits, and the hold corresponding to the hit super reach A The symbol may be set to change up to a rainbow color according to the number of repeated strikes (change in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color). With this configuration, it is possible to look forward to what color each reserved symbol will change, and allow the player to actively make repeated hits. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<First Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 218 to 223, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the same variation time (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Was configured. Thereby, it was set as the structure which aims at the efficiency improvement of the game in a latent state.

  On the other hand, in this 1st modification, it is set as the structure which changes the variation time of a 2nd special symbol according to the remaining frequency | count of a latent state. In the first half of the latent state, a relatively short variation time is easily set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is easily set. As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the interval between the small hits and the big hits is shortened, and it becomes possible to increase the winning ball in a relatively short time, while in the second half of the latent state, the small hits or the big hits. The increase of the prize ball can be made relatively gradual. Therefore, it is possible to add a wave to how to increase the number of prize balls, so that it is possible to add a sharpness to the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  The first modification of the third embodiment differs in configuration from the third embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 2020 and RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of First Modification of Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220, the electrical configuration of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218 (a), a variation pattern scenario table 2020ea is added to the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example compared to the configuration of the ROM 2020 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 89). Is different. In the present modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partly changed.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 218 (b). FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification is replaced with the latent probability table 2020f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) in the third embodiment. A latency (first half) table 2020f4a and a latency (second half) table 2020f4b are provided.

  The latent (first half) table 2020f4a is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern in the first half of the latent state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lotteries are executed). The second half table 2020f4b is a table that is referred to in the second half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lotteries are executed). Details of this latent (second half) table 2020f4b will be described with reference to FIG. The specified contents of the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a are the same as the latent probability table 2020f4 (see FIG. 94B) in the third embodiment, and are 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 219 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latency (second half) table 2020f4b. Among these, the contents of the rules for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a (and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. . For the lottery of the second special symbol, a variation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is selected. In case of small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the whole range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and it is out of the lottery of the second special symbol Is selected and the short-circuit fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  In this way, when the latency (second half) table 2020f4b is referred to, the variation time becomes longer (0.5 seconds → 2 seconds) than when the latency (first half) table 2020f4a is referenced. By doing so, in the second half of the latent state (51 to 120 times), the interval for small hit or big hit can be lengthened. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the number of possessed balls is likely to increase, and in the second half, the increase in the number of retained balls becomes moderate, so that the way of increasing the possessed balls can be waved, and the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea will be described with reference to FIG. 219 (b). The variation pattern scenario table 2020ea is a table in which a special symbol lottery number after the end of the jackpot is associated with a table for selecting a variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is not dependent on the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the jackpot in which the normal state is set ends. The normal table A2020f1 is associated as the selection table. For this reason, when the normal state is set after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is always determined by referring to the normal table A2020f1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the probability variation table for the range of 1 to 120 lottery times for the special symbol after the jackpot ends. 2020f3 is defined in association with each other, and for the special symbol lottery number 121 or later, the normal table A2020f1 is defined in association with it. Therefore, the probability variation table 2020f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table when the number of special symbol lottery times is 120 times or less, and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to after 121 times. The

  Further, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the latent probability (first half) for the range of 1 to 50 lotteries after the big hit is over. The table 2020f4a is defined in association with the special symbol lottery number 51-120, and the latent (second half) table 2020f4b is defined in association with the range 121,122. The table B2020f2 is defined in association with each other, and the normal table A2020f1 is defined in association with 123 and thereafter.

  Thereby, in the first half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (first half) table 2020f4a in which a short variation time can be easily determined. it can. Therefore, the rate of increase of the winning ball can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (second half) table 2020f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long variation time. Therefore, in the latter half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be made moderate, so that the degree of increase of the prize ball can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, since the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the normal table B2020f2 in the special symbol lottery twice after the completion of the latent state, the result of the latent state is obtained as in the third embodiment. Sufficient production time for performing the display can be ensured. Furthermore, when the number of lotteries for special symbols exceeds 123, the normal table A2020f1 is referred to.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030. As shown in FIG. 220, the RAM 2030 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 2030ea and a lottery counter 2030eb added to the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). Is different.

  The scenario storage area 2030ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea. In the scenario storage area 2030ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is stored at the end of the jackpot (see Y2351 in FIG. 223). At the start of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ea.

  The lottery counter 2030eb is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 2030ea, the variation pattern selection table is selected by determining the number of lotteries for the special symbol based on the value of the lottery counter 2030eb.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. First, referring to FIG. 221, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 10) executed in the first modification instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment. 221) will be described.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 221) in the first modified example, each of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 includes a first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 in (see FIG. 104) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 221) in the present modification, when the processing of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery counter 2030eb is then retrieved from the scenario storage area 2030ea. Is read (Y551), and the process proceeds to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505. Although not shown in the figure, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read, the same processing as Y551 is executed to determine the table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed in the first modified example instead of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modification of the third embodiment, each of the processes Y601 to Y608 is Y601 to the gaming state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment. The same processing as each processing of Y608 is executed.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modified example, after the process of Y608, it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the lottery number counter 2030eb (Y651), and this process ends. In the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 222), by updating the value of the lottery counter 2030eb every time, the value of the lottery counter 2030eb can always match the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the big win. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, a jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223) executed in the first modified example instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223), the same processes as the processes of Y2301 to Y2308 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment are executed in the processes of Y2301 to Y2308, respectively. .

  Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 223) in the first modified example, when the process of Y2308 is completed, the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of Y2302 to Y2306 is then changed to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020ea. Are set in the scenario storage area 2030ea (Y2351). Next, the value of the lottery counter 2030eb is reset to 0 (Y2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the third embodiment, the first half of the latent state (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 1 to 50) or the second half (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 51 to 120). The variation pattern selection table that is referred to select the variation pattern is switched depending on whether the variation pattern is selected. In addition, a variation pattern having a longer variation time is more easily selected in the latter half of the latent state than in the first half of the latent state. Thereby, the interval which becomes a small hit or a big hit differs in the first half and the latter half of the latent state, and the possibility that the first half becomes a small hit or a big win at a shorter interval can be increased. That is, in the first half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be increased, and in the second half, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be made relatively moderate. Therefore, since the rate of increase of the prize ball can be varied, waves can be added to the way of increasing the prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the rate of increase of the winning ball is faster in the first half of the latent state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to win a big hit in the first half of the latent probability state (before entering the second half) and to make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent probability state again. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the first modification, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the second half of the latent state, the second special symbol is set. Although the variation time of 2 seconds is always set when the lottery is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a variation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in a trial in a latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine whether it is the first half or the second half of the latent state from the variation time, so that even when a variation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played in anticipation of the first half. be able to. Note that the above-described <second modification of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment described above, with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98), the third symbol display is performed based on the fluctuation status (setting status of each standby flag) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81 is set, and in the normal state, the change state of the second special symbol which is a sub-change (the setting state of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set. Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s indicating that the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is the main fluctuation is stopped, The main variation was displayed reliably.

  Here, in the third embodiment described above, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state, that is, in the state where left-handed is executed. Met. This is because the second entrance 1640 where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right-handed region.

  As described above, when the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while stopped, the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When doing so, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order by looking at the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation is not started.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t indicating that a predetermined period has elapsed after the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a sub fluctuation, is stopped during the normal state is set to ON. In this case, the sub-variation demo display (special figure 2 demo display) is executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous variation is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol on the secondary variation side (second special symbol) continues to be displayed while being stopped. Can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the game.

  The second modification of the third embodiment differs from the third embodiment in configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 2220 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the third embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating an example of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed in the small region Dm1 in the normal state (or the probability variation state).

  As shown in FIG. 224, in the normal state (or probability variation state), the first special symbol is changing, and the second special symbol is not changing for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 80) indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, “during game” indicating that the first special symbol is changing as a sub-variation demo display. Is displayed. In this way, by executing a display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the sub-variation demonstration display, the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed). Even if a ball is entered in the first entrance 64, the symbol that does not change (the second special symbol) is continuously displayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) can be set based on the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s). As shown in 224, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (when the special fig. 1 standby flag 2230s is set to OFF), the fact that the first special symbol which is the main fluctuation is fluctuating is indicated. Since the contents are displayed, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand display mode for the player.

<Electric Configuration in Second Modification of Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 225, an electrical configuration in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 225 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 225, the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification example has a gaming state that is a normal state or a probability change state compared to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment. The screen display type defined in accordance with the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on is different. Yes. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the third embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the game state is the normal state or the probability change state, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on. As a display type, “Special Figure 2 Demo Display” is defined correspondingly. This “special figure 2 demonstration display” is a screen display type in which “playing” display (see FIG. 224) is executed using the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the second special symbol demonstration display area. .

  As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of two types of special symbols is performed simultaneously, one of the two types of special symbols (advantageous to the player). The special symbol) is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player for the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81. A region where sub-variation variation display is executed (sub-variation display region) when a configuration is used in which variation display is performed as sub-variation using (a region smaller than the display region where main variation variation display is performed). Since it is possible to execute a demo display corresponding to the sub-variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the symbol indicating the sub-variation lottery result is stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more). Give It is possible to suppress the door. In addition, the player can be watched on the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

  Furthermore, the sub-variation (second special symbol) is displayed by setting the contents of the demonstration display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol). It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (sub-variation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is executed in the sub-variation area, the display relating to the main change can be executed using all (almost) all of the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand presentation is provided to the player. be able to.

  In addition, in this 2nd modification, it replaces with the stop symbol which shows the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol which is a subvariation, but it is the structure which performs the demonstration display for 2nd special symbols, However, Other structures may be used. For example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and the second special symbol demo display may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variable display region. A configuration in which the demonstration display for the second special symbol is executed in an area different from the above may be used.

  In the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (sub-variation demonstration display) in the normal state or the probability variation state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub-variation has been described. However, for example, a similar configuration may be used even in a latent state where the second special symbol is a main variation and the first special symbol is a sub-variation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variable display area of the first special symbol and setting the small area Dm1 as the subvariable display area regardless of the gaming state, Display data and display control can be shared, and the processing load of display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 242, a first modification of the above-described sixth embodiment will be described. In the above-described sixth embodiment, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a special symbol variation effect is provided as a configuration in which the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed. In addition, the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set when the push-on effect is executed together with the remaining number of times displayed on the display screen and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more). In the case where the non-display mode is set, the configuration has a special addition effect that is executed when the remaining number of actual latent states is a big hit within a predetermined number (5 times), An effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display at various timings during the latent state is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a technique that makes a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to make it difficult for the player to know how long the specific gaming state will continue. In such a gaming machine, an effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display is executed and the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is converged, so that the specific gaming state can be given to the player without a sense of incongruity. It is configured to play.

  In this case, as an effect of adding the remaining number of times on display, as described in the above-described sixth embodiment, an additional effect (push-on effect) executed based on the variation of the special symbol, and the remaining number of times on the display Is considered to be an extra effect (special extra effect) that is executed based on the fact that is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various addition effects in this way, it becomes possible to make the remaining number of times that a specific gaming state (latent probability state) is executed more difficult, and a state in which a tension is given to the player. The game can be continued to be continued, and a sense of security can be imparted when a large number of times are added due to the extra effect.

  However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is different depending on the player, and by performing various patterns of additional effects, the player There was a possibility that the motivation of the would decrease. Specifically, for a player who prefers an effect of continuing the state where the actual remaining number of times is not known until the remaining number of times on the display is reduced, and adding the actual remaining number of times when the remaining number of times on the display is reduced On the other hand, if an extra presentation is performed before the remaining number on the display is reduced, the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is reduced by the number of times added by the extra presentation. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of addition in the effect of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a possibility that the motivation for the player's effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, as an additional effect executed during the latent state, an effect mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for each variable additional effect, and the remaining number of times on the display are a predetermined number or less. Since the player can select an effect mode (post-notification mode) in which an extra effect is executed when the player has become, an additional effect mode desired by the player can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the situation where the motivation with respect to a player's performance falls can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming machine that can select the effect mode of the extra effect as described above, for example, the first effect mode that can execute the extra effect is set every time the change of the special symbol is executed, and the remaining on the display When the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number on the display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations) in the state where the number of times is displayed as three times, the additional effect is displayed. There is a problem that the execution timing is missed and the effect of the production is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, during the jackpot game in which 120 times are actually set as the remaining number of times, it is possible to select the effect mode of the extra effect, and the remaining number of times displayed on the display is a predetermined number of times as the effect mode. Based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the extra effect is executed when it becomes (for example, 5 rotations), the remaining number on the display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect.

  Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the extra effect, the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode can be executed regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

  The first modification of the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 2220 and RAM 2230 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. In the first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach lose), some symbols are vertically A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 226 and 227). Furthermore, when the big hit G is won in the latent state, a plurality of presentation modes in which different bonus presentation modes are executed during the big hit game are selectable (see FIGS. 228 and 229).

  First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the horizontal direction is stopped and temporarily stopped in the scroll change effect, and FIG. FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first reach mode is displayed in a suggestion mode that suggests that a part of the symbols moves in the vertical direction after detachment stop (temporary stop), FIG. 227 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which a reach (second reach mode) in which a symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed, and FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the second reach mode is hit and stopped at the symbol. . Note that the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbols move in the horizontal direction is the same as that of the above-described sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be controllable by dividing it into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2. During the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is performed collectively, thereby varying the entire display region of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and the special symbol variation display different from normal (the symbol variation display in the vertical direction) is performed, the regions subject to the symbol variation in the vertical direction (the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2) ) To update only the display data. As a result, an appropriate symbol display effect can be executed simply by updating the display data of the region suitable for the symbol variation display, so that the processing load of the control relating to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

  In FIG. 226 (a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode). As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is win, The symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed in a manner that is shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of symbols in which symbols indicating the same number are displayed in a linear manner).

  After that, among the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a “lion”, the symbol row L2 is a sub symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a “snake”), A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting manner indicating an action suggesting a change in the vertical direction (downward), and a vertical (downward) symbol row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, a left symbol is displayed by displaying a sub symbol above the symbol row L1 displayed in the left display region Dz1 and displaying a sub symbol below the symbol row L3 displayed in the left display region Dz1. A vertical symbol sequence (from the top, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “lion”, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “snake”, a symbol symbol displayed in the order of a sub symbol) is displayed in the area Dz1. (See FIG. 226 (b)).

  Thereby, it can be suggested that the symbols displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuate in the vertical direction, and an effect that makes the player have a sense of expectation can be executed. Further, in the first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display change of the display mode of each symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 and the new display in the left display area Dz1). This is a configuration that suggests that a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction will be executed in the future simply by executing a process of adding a simple symbol and additionally displaying a vertical symbol row). The processing load of control related to the symbol variation process can be reduced.

  A configuration that suggests that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 (temporary stop display) without using the configuration of the first modification. May be used. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the suggestion effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  When the second reach mode (reach in which the symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction) is executed, the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward) as shown in FIG. 227 (a). As a second reach mode, a main symbol (a main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot. A special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the single direction symbol sequence (L1 to L3) Even complicated symbol variation display can be easily executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), it becomes possible to set a plurality of stop positions at which a specific main symbol (the main symbol with the number “1” attached) indicates a big hit, thereby increasing the expectation of the big hit. Production can be performed.

  Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, the main symbol (simulating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to any of the effective lines V5 and V6 is displayed. Main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a line (see FIG. 227 (b)). Thereafter, the jackpot game is executed.

  In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state where the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)) to the state where the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped). Although the example in which the display data of the other area is not changed has been shown, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub-symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the right display region Dz2 is not updated, and otherwise The display data (for example, “reach” displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be updated. Thus, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 226 (a) is executed, the display of “reach” is changed to the display of “multi-reach” indicating that the expectation of jackpot is higher than the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, a display area showing the current symbol variation status (region where “reach” is displayed in FIG. 226 (a)) is provided in the left display region Dz1, and the contents displayed according to the symbol variation status are appropriately changed. You may comprise. As a result, the second reach mode is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (left display area Dz1) in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol fluctuation state Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing, and it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation of jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, the contents of the extra mode selection effect for selecting the extra effect executed during the latent state in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This extra mode selection effect converges the difference between the actual remaining number in the latent state (the value of the remaining probability variation number area 2230o) and the remaining number on the display (the value stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p). Therefore, it is an effect for selecting an effect mode (addition mode) of an extra effect that adds (adds) the remaining number of times on the display, and whether or not the extra effect is executed every time the change of the special symbol is started The player can select an arbitrary production mode (an additional chance mode) and a production mode (an announcement mode) in which an additional production is executed when the remaining number of times displayed on the display reaches a predetermined number. This is an effect capable of selecting the “add-on mode”.

  Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to select an effect mode in which an extra effect suitable for his / her preference is executed, and an unintended extra effect is executed and motivation can be prevented from being reduced. .

  First, with reference to FIG. 228 (a), the display content of the addition mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of the addition mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), in the first modification, the bonus mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

  When the extra mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times (effect remaining probability variation number) on the display when winning the big hit G is continued in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. Thereby, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the big hit game. The main control device 110 clears the value of the probability variation counter 2030k when the jackpot game is executed (set to 0). However, the remaining number on the display in the effect probability variation number area 2230p of the sound lamp control device 113 is clear. By storing (setting) the production remaining probability variation number, the remaining number on the display can be continuously displayed even during the big hit game.

  In the center area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a with characters “push” prompting to operate (press) the frame button 22 is displayed, and “addition chance mode” is displayed on both sides of the button D6a. The first selected display D6b described and the second selected display D6c described as "post notification mode" are displayed, and the first selected position for selecting the first selected display D6b, and the second selected A selection display D6d that moves at a predetermined interval from the second selection position for selecting the display D6c is displayed. In the display area D4, a display for explaining the contents of the addition mode selection effect is displayed as a telop, and in FIG. 228 (a), a description “Select a favorite mode with a button” is displayed. In addition, on the left side of the sub display area Ds, the additional effect mode (addition mode) selected in the state where the jackpot is won is displayed, and it is easy to determine which additional effect mode the player has selected. We are trying to grasp it.

  During this extra mode selection effect, the extra mode specified by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the desired extra mode is designated by the selection display D6d is set.

  Then, in FIG. 228 (a), when the extra chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), “RUSH continuation” is notified to notify that the latent state continues. And a character 811 in a display mode congratulating that the latent state continues. Further, in this case, since the extra presentation mode is not changed in the extra mode selection production (because it is “an extra chance mode” at the time of winning the big win → the “addition chance mode” after the extra mode selection production), the remaining number display area D1 Will display the same “3 remaining times” as when winning the jackpot. As a result, the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (remaining number of times displayed) as the situation when the jackpot is won (remaining number of times displayed). A game can be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), the addition mode selected in the addition mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. Thereby, by looking at the display content of the sub display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the extra mode at the time of jackpot and the extra mode after the extra mode selection effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 228 (a), when the post notification mode (second selection display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. 229, “+97” is added so that the remaining number display area D1 indicates 100 times. Display is executed. In addition, the same contents as those described in FIG. 228 (b) are displayed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same location and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, when the extra mode at the time of winning the big hit is different from the extra mode selected in the extra mode selection effect, the extra mode that is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to be 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the production without any sense of incongruity, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in the state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates “three times”, and the extra mode selection effect during the jackpot game is performed. When the extra mode is changed from the extra chance mode to the post notification mode at, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as “3 times”, the extra effect is executed in the post notification mode. (The number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) may be lost, and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the additional effect is executed in the post notification mode. An opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) can be ensured.

  In the first modification, since it is determined whether or not a latent state is given after the big hit game is finished in the seventh round in the big hit game (the ball passes V in the seventh round). Since the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77) is passed), the above-described additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the eighth round in the jackpot game. Has been. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the extra mode in a state where the actual remaining number of times has been reset to 120 times, the ball does not pass through the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the big hit If the latent state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electric Configuration in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 230 and FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A2020ff1 provided in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230, the second normal table A2020ff1 is partly changed from the normal variation table 2020f1 (see FIG. 93) used in the sixth embodiment described above. Is different. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the variation pattern changed from the normal table A2020f1 among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A2020ff1 will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) is executed as a special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big win, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “101 to 150”, and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with “151 Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “˜198”.

  Further, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “71 to 150” and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is Correspondingly, an out-of-range “171 to 198” and super-reach C (30 seconds) are associated. In addition, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “131 to 170” and corresponds to the normal reach B (20 seconds). The super reach C (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”.

  When the hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves vertically in the suggestion effect period (second reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 227 (a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit (see FIG. 227 (b)).

  When the hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves in the horizontal direction after the suggestion effect period (third reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit.

  When detachment normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is out (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Then, after the suggestion effect that suggests the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that it is out.

  When the deviation super-reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 81 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. The mode in which the first reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)). Thereafter, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and the third effect moves in the horizontal direction after the suggestion effect period (third reach mode) ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination indicating the detachment.

  As described above, in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as the scroll change effect, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestive effect (the first 20 seconds out of the variation time of 30 seconds) 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the suggestion effect is finished, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment as it is, and the variation time of 20 seconds is deviated (developed normal reach B). 10 seconds) can be combined with fluctuations to be executed (hit super reach E, missed super reach C), and it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player have expectations for winning at various timings during the fluctuation of the symbols.

  Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted. In addition, in the first modified example, since the degree of expectation varies depending on the direction in which the third symbol is restarted, the game is performed while expecting which direction the third symbol will restart. be able to. During execution of the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates whether or not the third symbol restarts, or suggests the direction in which the third symbol restarts. Since the effect (suggested effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggested effect, and whether or not the 3rd symbol is restarted or the direction in which the 3rd symbol is restarted The game can be performed while predicting.

  In addition, in FIG. 226 (b), although the suggestion effect which the display form of the 3rd symbol changes to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) which suggests a moving direction (downward direction) is performed, other suggestions are performed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the 3rd symbol restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display mode of the 3rd symbol is displayed in the left side (traveling direction) (second movement). Direction suggestion display mode), a suggestion effect in which the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a display format suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, or displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Using other display forms, there is a suggestive effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol.

  Furthermore, it may be configured not to suggest the restart direction of the third symbol, but to simply execute an suggestive effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, first, the suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) that suggests that the third symbol is restarted is executed, and then the suggestion that suggests the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is good to comprise so that production (restart direction suggestion production) may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation in a stepwise manner, and the player can continue to watch the effect.

  Moreover, in this 1st modification, when the 3rd symbol restarts, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation to the vertical direction (downward direction) or the fluctuation | variation to a horizontal direction (left direction) may be performed, The direction in which the three symbols are restarted may be provided in other ways, for example, a fluctuation pattern that restarts in the upward direction in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction may be provided. In this case, the variation expectation of the 3rd pattern restarting in the vertical direction (upward and downward) is set to be different, and as a suggestion effect, it is suggested that the 3rd symbol restarts in the vertical direction. Providing a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts upward, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts downward, The hit expectation can be notified step by step.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 2220 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the ROM 2220 in the first modified example is provided with an addition mode selection table 2220fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment.

  This extra mode selection table 2220fa stores the contents of each extra effect executed in the extra mode (addition chance mode, post-notification mode) that can be selected by the player during the latent state. An effect corresponding to the addition mode effect selected in the process is read and executed.

  FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, a pressed a flag 2230fa, a pressed b flag 2230fb, a scroll change flag 2230fc, a mode change flag 2230fd, a mode addition flag 2230fd, and an addition mode setting area 2230fe are added to the sixth embodiment described above. is doing.

  The pressed-a flag 2230fa indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during reach (pressed period during reach) in a period during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This flag is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. This pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to ON (see Y8002 in FIG. 233) when the reach pressing process (see Y5332 in FIG. 233) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed. Reference is made in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8201 in FIG. 235), and then it is set to off (Y8204 in FIG. 235).

  The pressed b flag 2230fb indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during the jackpot game (a jackpot middle pressing period) in a period during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This is a flag for indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated, and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot pressing period. This pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON when the big hit middle pressing process (see Y5334 in FIG. 234) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed (see Y8102 in FIG. 234). Reference is made in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8207 in FIG. 235), and then it is set to off (Y8212 in FIG. 235).

  The scroll change flag 2230fc is a flag that is set to ON when a condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) in which the direction of change of the third symbol changes midway. This scroll change flag 2230fc is displayed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period (suggested effect period) of the changing pattern (winning super reach D) that can switch the changing direction of the third symbol in the middle. On the other hand, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is established in the scroll change effect, and is turned on (see Y8005 in FIG. 233). Then, it is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8202 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined to be on (see Y8202: Yes in FIG. 235), it is set to off (see Y8203 in FIG. 235). ). In the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 according to the setting state of the scroll change flag 2230fc. is doing.

  The mode change flag 2230fd is a flag indicating that the currently set addition mode has been changed in the addition mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect. Is set to This mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8105 in FIG. 234) and pressed when it is determined that the mode has been changed in the jackpot mid-press processing (see Y5534 in FIG. 234). Referenced in the end-time process (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8208 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined to be turned on (Y8208: Yes in FIG. 235), it is set to off (Y8209 in FIG. 235). ). In the process at the end of pressing (Y5537 in FIG. 235), the value of the effect probability change count area 2230p is varied according to the setting state of the mode change flag 2230fd, and the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON. If there is, 100 is set as the value of the effect probability variation area 2230p (Y8210 in FIG. 235). Thus, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set to 100, that is, displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state where the remaining number of times on display (the number of remaining effect changes) is set to 100, and it is possible to suitably provide the additional effect executed in the added mode after the change. it can.

  The addition mode setting area 2230fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the currently set addition mode and the previously set addition mode, and is selected in the end-of-press processing (Y5537 processing in FIG. 235). The extra mode is set (Y8211 in FIG. 235). In this addition mode setting area 2230fe, information indicating that the addition chance effect mode is set in the initial setting (Y4001 in FIG. 127) of the startup process (see FIG. 127) executed when the power is turned on is set. In the state where the player has not selected the addition mode, the addition chance mode in the latent state is configured to be executed. Information set (stored) in this additional mode setting area 2230fe (currently set additional mode) is referred to in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see Y4361 in FIG. 236) (see Y4391 in FIG. 236). In addition, the remaining number command process 6 (see Y4364 in FIG. 237) is referred to (see Y5871 in FIG. 237), and an additional effect corresponding to the currently set additional mode is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 237. First, with reference to FIG. 232, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Y4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In the case (Y5501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the reach is being pressed (Y5531).

  If it is determined in the process of Y5531 that the pressing period during reach is in progress (Y5531: Yes), the pressing process during reach for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol during the reach is executed ( Y5532), this process ends. Details of the reach-in-pressing process (Y5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5531 that the reach is not being pressed (Y5531: No), it is then determined whether the is a jackpot press period (Y5533). In the processing of Y5533, when it is determined that the big hit pressing period is in progress (Y5533: Yes), the big hit middle pressing processing for selecting one additional mode from a plurality of additional modes with different types of additional effects to be executed is performed. This is executed (Y5534), and this process is terminated. Details of the big hit mid-pressing process (Y5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Y5533, if it is determined that it is not the big hit middle pressing period (Y5533: No), other processes corresponding to the pressing timing are executed (Y5535), and this process is terminated. The other pressing timing is an extra effect executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Y4107 in FIG. 208) of the sixth embodiment described above in addition to the process of Y5507 of the sixth embodiment described above. The middle pressing process (Y5503 in FIG. 208) and the pending notice pressing process (Y5505 in FIG. 208) are executed.

  In the process of Y5501, when the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected (Y5501: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (Y5536), and is determined to be the end timing of the pressing period. If it has been performed (Y5536: Yes), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is executed (Y5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5501 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is skipped and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the contents of the reach-in-press process (Y5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reach pressing process (Y5532). This reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a condition for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol is established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 335) is executed.

  When the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8001: No). Then, the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8002), and then a display reach pressing command is set (Y8003). By setting this display reach pressing command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the reach pressing period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. This pressed display mode is displayed continuously during the reach pressing period (suggesting effect period), and although not shown, it is determined whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

  When the process of Y8003 is completed, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is a hit super reach D (see FIG. 230) (that is, a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (Y8004). . In the process of Y8004, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the hit super reach D (Y8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to ON (Y8005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the hit super reach D (Y8004: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON in the process of Y8001 (Y8001: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the reach pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and the present process is terminated. Note that the first modification of the sixth embodiment is configured such that the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the reach pressing period. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, a pressing process during reach (Y5532) is executed, or whenever the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is It may be configured such that the reach pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the winning is achieved. By comprising in this way, the content of the effect performed can be made complicated and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the contents of the jackpot mid-pressing process (Y5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot mid-press processing (Y5534). This big hit mid-pressing process (Y5534) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the big hit mid-pressing period (addition mode selection effect period). Specifically, the process for setting the addition mode in the latent state executed after the jackpot is completed based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the addition mode selection effect (see FIG. 228). Executed.

  When the big hit middle pressing process (Y5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8101: No) Then, the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8102), and then the display jackpot middle pressing command is set (Y8103). By setting the display jackpot mid-press command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot mid-press period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. Although the pressed display mode is not shown, it is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. 228 (a) is pressed, and the selection display D6d is stopped and displayed at the position where the added mode selected is specified. The selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side is displayed in a manner indicating that it has been selected.

  When the processing of Y8103 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the addition mode has been changed (Y8104). Here, the extra mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the extra mode setting area 2230fe, and compared with the extra mode selected in the current extra mode selection effect, the extra mode can be changed. Is determined. In the process of Y8104, when it is determined that the addition mode has been changed (Y8104: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition mode has not been changed (Y8104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of Y8101 that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the jackpot pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and the present process is terminated. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the big hit middle press process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the big hit middle press period, and the extra mode is determined. However, for example, it is also possible to configure so that the extra mode can be set again within the jackpot mid-press period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the content of the pressing end process (Y5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end-of-press processing (Y5537). This process at the end of pressing (Y5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (the pressing period during reach, the pressing process during jackpot) ends. Based on the status of the flag set to, processing for setting the content of the effect executed after the end of the pressing period is executed.

  When the pressing end process (Y5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8201). If it is determined that the pressed-a flag 2230fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during reach. Since this is not the case, the process (Y8202 to Y8205) based on the frame button operation within the reach-pressed period is skipped and the process proceeds to Y8207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8201 that the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set on (Y8201: Yes), it is then determined whether the scroll change flag 2230fc is set on (Y8202). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Y8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to OFF (Y8203), a display scroll change command is set (Y8204), and the process proceeds to Y8206.

  If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the scroll change flag 2230fc is not set to ON (set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (Y8205), and the process proceeds to Y8206. In the process of Y8206, the pressed-a flag 2230fa is set to OFF (Y8206).

  When the processing of Y8206 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207). Here, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 2230fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the jackpot pressing period. Since this is not the case, the processing based on the frame button operation (Y8208 to Y8212) within the jackpot mid-pressing period is skipped, and this processing ends. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the jackpot pressing period (during the addition mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability change count area 2230p and the setting content of the addition mode setting area 2230fe are not changed. The latent state after the end of the big hit game is executed in a state in which the state at the time of the big win (the remaining number displayed in the extra mode and the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, when the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the addition mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the addition mode in the latent state, the addition mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y8207 that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8208). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Y8208: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to OFF (Y8209), the value of the effect probability change count area is set to 100 (Y8210), and the selected addition mode Is set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe (Y8211). Then, the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8208 that the mode change flag 2230fd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y8208: No), the processes of Y8209 and Y8210 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y8211. Transition. As described above, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability change frequency area 2230p is set to 100, so that the added addition mode is changed in the latent state executed after the end of the big hit game. The used extra effect can be suitably executed. In addition, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see Y8208), the process of setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y8210) is skipped, so that the latent If the player intentionally selects the same extra mode as the currently set extra mode during the extra mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the extra mode in the state, the extra mode and the remaining It is possible to suppress the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area D1 from being changed.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is an extra effect based on the currently set addition mode type with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed, first, the same processes as the Y4371 to Y4373 and Y4375 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above are executed. In the process of Y4373, if it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y4373: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391). In the process of Y4391, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  In the process of Y4391, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391: Yes), Y4374 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above. , Y4376, the same processing is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (the post notification mode) (Y4391: No), the process of Y4374 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed (when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In the case of, an extra effect setting process is executed, and an extra mode that can be expected to be added to each variable extra effect can be provided.If the currently set extra mode is a post notification mode, the extra effect setting process is not executed. By making the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number on the display not converge, the number of times to be added displayed at the time of subsequent notification (addition effect executed when the remaining number on the display becomes a predetermined number) Can be bigger. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the details of the remaining variable number of times command processing 6 (Y4364) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining variable number of times command process 6 (Y4364). This remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is related to the additional effect based on the currently set additional mode type with respect to the remaining variation number command processing of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 215). The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is executed, first, the same processing as Y5851 and Y5852 of the remaining certain variation command processing (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is executed. If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post notification mode (Y5871). In the process of Y5871, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  In the process of Y5871, when it is determined that the post-notification mode is set (Y5871: Yes), the same process as Y5853 to Y5861 of the remaining variable number of times command process (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is performed. Execute this to finish this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y5871 that the post-notification mode is not set (addition chance mode is set) (Y5871: No), the process of Y5853 to Y5861 is skipped and the process is terminated. .

  With this configuration, when the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (Y4364) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In this case, an extra effect setting process is executed, and an extra mode that can be expected for each extra variable effect can be provided.If the currently set extra mode is a post-notification mode, the extra effect setting process is not executed. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of times of additional displayed on the notice is increased (addition effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number). can do. Therefore, the production effect of the production desired by the player can be enhanced.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first modification example of the sixth embodiment will be described. This modification is different from the above-described sixth embodiment in that a command related to pressing is added in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 238), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in the present modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process 6, the processes of Y6401 to Y6417 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 139) in the third embodiment described above.

  If it is determined in the process of Y6416 that an error command has not been received (Y6416: No), it is then determined whether or not a display related command has been received (Y6431).

  In the process of Y6431, when it is determined that the display pressing related command has been received (Y6431: Yes), the pressing related command process is executed (Y6432), and the process returns to Y6401. Details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y6431 that a press-related command has not been received (Y6431: No), then other command processes are executed as in the third embodiment (Y6418). Return to processing.

  Next, details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. The press-related command process (Y6432) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) a press-related effect.

  In the press-related command process (Y6432), first, it is determined whether or not a press command during display reach has been received (Y8301). If it is determined in the process of Y8301 that the display reach-in-press command has been received (Y8301: Yes), the reach-in-press command process is executed (Y8302), and the process proceeds to Y8303.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 240, details of the reach-down press command process (Y8302) will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart illustrating the command processing for pressing during reach. This reach-in-press command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reach-in-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reach press command process, first, a reach press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display reach press command is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8402).

  Then, based on the reach pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y8401, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8405), the reach command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y8301 that a display reach-in-press command has not been received (Y8301: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll change command has been received (Y8303).

  In the process of Y8303, when it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received (Y8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (Y8304), and the process proceeds to Y8305.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 241, details of the scroll change command process (Y8304) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll change command process, first, based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the relevant / invalid information, a vertical scroll symbol array is set and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8501). Next, a vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display contents of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8502). ). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8503).

  Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Y8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8507). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8508), the scroll change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Y8303 that the display scroll change command has not been received (Y8303: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll non-change command has been received (Y8305).

  If it is determined in the process of Y8305 that the display scroll non-change command has been received (Y8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (Y8306), and the process proceeds to Y8307.

  Here, the details of the scroll non-change command processing (Y8306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 (a) is a flowchart showing the scroll non-change command process. This scroll non-change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-pressing start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll non-change command process, first, a scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (Y8601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8602).

  Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8605), the scroll non-change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Y8305 that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (Y8305: No), it is then determined whether a display jackpot middle press command has been received (Y8307).

  In the process of Y8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has been received (Y8307: Yes), the jackpot mid-press command process is executed (Y8308), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 242 (b), the details of the jackpot middle press command processing (Y8308) will be described. FIG. 242 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. This jackpot mid-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot mid-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot mid-press command processing, first, a jackpot mid-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display jackpot mid-press command is determined, and the determined jackpot mid-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (Y8701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (Y8702).

  Then, based on the big hit middle press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (Y8705), the jackpot mid-press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8307, if it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has not been received (Y8307: No), this process ends.

<Another Example of First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, another example of the first modified example of the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 246. In this example, the special reach effect (FIG. 82, FIG. 82) performed in the 3rd embodiment mentioned above to the scroll change effect (refer FIG. 226, FIG. 227) performed in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment mentioned above. (See FIG. 83). The combined reach effect can be executed. Thereby, a complicated reach production can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  This example is different from the above-described embodiments in that the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partly changed and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed. This is different in that the part processing is changed. About another structure, it is the same as each structure and various control processes which are used for each embodiment mentioned above. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 used for this another example is demonstrated. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), this example is different from the above-described embodiments in that a symbol row L4 that is scrolled and displayed in a horizontal direction is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1, and left and right. And the symbol row L8 that is scrolled and displayed is added below the symbol row L3.

  Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm in which the symbols are variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled in the left-right direction and variably displayed (5 columns). , And L8), the number of symbol columns that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three columns), and the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is switched vertically. Of the five symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) that are variably displayed by scrolling left and right, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

  Then, fluctuation control of five (5 columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) is performed on the variation region Dz3 which is a region wider than the display region in which the main display region Dm can be displayed, The display control is executed for the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dmm is changed, the symbol sequence after the change can be displayed only by executing the display control based on the contents of the variation control executed in advance. Thus, it is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol sequence without delay for the player.

  In addition, this example is different in that the symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is set. The symbol sequence corresponding to the second reach mode is set so that the second reach mode is executed.

  Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) when the first symbol is off by one extra frame, and the first reach mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol (stop symbol) displayed after stopping one frame (temporary stop) is not displayed. A second reach mode in which the display is changed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is executed. In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame outage stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed It becomes possible to pattern the symbol arrangement.

  And in this example, the symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of a 1st reach mode is previously memorize | stored as symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to a 2nd reach mode with respect to each of symbol arrangement | sequence L5-L7. Thus, the second reach mode can be executed in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. As a result, when the second reach mode is executed using a part of the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode, an effect can be executed without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (b) to FIG. 244 (b), the contents of the combined reach effect in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the left and right symbols are changed in the combined reach effect, and FIG. 244 (a) shows the main display area Dm in the combined reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the state by which the area | region displayed on was changed, and FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the state in which the symbol fluctuation | variation to an up-down direction is performed among composite reach effects. is there. In this combined reach effect, a symbol variation in the left-right direction (normal symbol variation) using the symbol rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 243 (b)), and then the display region is displayed in the main display region Dm. Reach effect (first reach mode) is changed for 10 seconds (see Fig. 244 (a)), and the symbol change direction (scroll direction) is changed from left to right to up and down. The changed reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 244 (b)).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating that the symbol sequence L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm is out. )Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation control of the symbol strings (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm (the fluctuation data is updated in accordance with the progress of the fluctuation time (elapsed time)) is being executed. That is, when the combined reach effect is executed, first, the execution of the variation control is started for all the symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to the symbol variation in the left-right direction. For the symbol sequence (L1 to L3) displayed in the region Dm, the fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed, and for the symbol sequence (L4, L8) set outside the main display region Dm. , Fluctuation control for 20 seconds (period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 244 (a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, the symbol sequence displayed in the main display region Dm is changed by executing the fluctuation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect even for the symbol sequence that is not displayed in the main display region Dm. When displaying a symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it is possible to display without delay.

  In the example shown in FIG. 243 (b), the third symbol with the numeral 1 (the third symbol with the character imitating "Elephant") is located at the center position of the symbol row L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary stop display is temporarily performed in the stopped (temporary stop) disengagement display mode (first temporary stop mode). When the out-of-range variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the out-of-range display mode shown in FIG. 243 (b), and the symbol variation ends.

  And the suggestion effect which suggests that the symbol sequence displayed on the main display area Dm is changed in a state where the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode (for example, FIG. 82 (b)). The display form of the character attached to the 3rd symbol as shown in FIG. 3 is changed, and the display suggesting that the display region is changed and the display suggesting that the display region is changed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are displayed. The effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 244 (a)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area). The symbol row L3 displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 243 (b) is moved out of the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop mode, which is a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating detachment, a third symbol (the third symbol with a character imitating "Elephant") with the numeral 1 is a symbol string. It is displayed in the reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right side position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol sequence) displayed by the main display area Dm, the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that is once considered to be off from the player is hit. Since it can be changed to the reach display mode (first reach mode) that can be expected, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit even after the third symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped and displayed. Motivation for the player's game can be maintained.

  In this example, the third symbol (the third symbols displayed in FIG. 243 (b)) in the first temporary stop mode is reached by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. Since the display (first reach mode) is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a possible combination, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward, but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that allows the reach effect (first reach mode) to be executed by moving it downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. Processing is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upper or lower), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. Can be increased.

  That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is used in order to execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same 3rd symbol in a row of symbols displayed on the upper side and the center, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower) When the configuration is used, it is the same as either the symbol row displayed on the upper side and center of the main display region Dm before movement or the symbol row displayed on the lower side and center of the main display region Dm before movement. By displaying the third symbols in a row, it is possible to execute reach effects (first reach mode) in the display area after movement, so that the third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. The number of combinations can be increased, and the player can Whether develop into first leech aspect, i.e., there is an effect that it is possible to prevent easily predict the symbol variation effect to be executed next, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 244 (a), the third symbol (the third symbol (the elephant with the numeral 1) attached to the right side of the symbol row L4 is the target of the reach effect. Is displayed (stopped temporarily), that is, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm. The right position of the column (symbol column L2) and the same third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in FIG. 244 (b)) in the middle symbol column (symbol column L1) display a stop (temporary stop) ( When stopped (temporary stop) is displayed in the second temporary stop display mode), as shown in FIG. 244 (b), the symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed at the left position of the symbol row L1, L2, L4. The column L5 is displayed in a vertically varying manner.

  As a result, the same reach effect is executed as in the second reach mode (see FIG. 227 (a)) described in the first modification of the sixth embodiment described above. The contents of the second reach mode are described above. Since it is the same as the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area was changed so that the arrangement was displayed, the first reach mode was made executable, and the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop mode, and then the direction of symbol variation was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments in that the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. The other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (a). FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 2340a2. As shown in FIG. 245 (a), in the character storage area 2340a2, a command for designating the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp controller 113). ) For storing the symbol array used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the display region storage area 2340a2a in which the display region corresponding to) and the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stored. An array storage area 2340a2b and other storage areas 2340a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

  Here, the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a. In this display area storage area 2340a2a, as display area types, the display arrays 1 to 3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display arrays L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command for specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113).

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation on all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received variation pattern command for display. . In the drawing process (see FIG. 149), a drawing list is created for the symbol sequence corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. is doing. Thereby, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol string to be displayed. In this case, when a flag (storage area) is provided for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 2340a2a, and the determination is executed with reference to the flag. Good.

  Next, the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol array storage area 2340a2b. In this symbol array storage area 2340a2b, a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when normal variation is executed and a symbol array for vertical scroll used when the second reach mode is executed are stored. Has been. The symbol array for vertical scroll includes a symbol array (for vertical scroll 1) corresponding to the symbol row L5 (see FIG. 243 (a)) and a symbol array corresponding to the symbol row L6 (see FIG. 243 (a)). When the vertical scroll 2) and the symbol array (vertical scroll 3) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 243 (a)) are stored, and the second reach mode is executed for each of them. The symbol arrangement corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored.

  Specifically, as the symbol arrangement for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), the third symbol with the numeral 1 is displayed in the reach out display mode (temporary stop) when the second reach mode is executed. If the symbol is set (see FIG. 226), the “symbol 1” to the third symbol to which the numeral 9 is added when the second reach mode is executed is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-reach display mode. Nine types up to “symbol array 9” are set. In this example, the display mode of the third symbol (first temporary stop mode) displayed when the second reach mode is executed (temporary stop) is set to be a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of symbol arrangement types for vertical scrolling stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b can be reduced.

  Similarly to the symbol arrangements 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), the vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and the vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7), respectively. Nine types of symbol arrays are set. In the case where the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical scroll display), 2 as the first temporary stop mode. This is a case in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating a disengagement in a state where the third symbol of the type is in a reach state (so-called double reach state).

  In this way, the second reach mode is delayed by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (the reach mode executed after changing the variation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol). Can run without. In addition, by determining in advance the combinations of the third symbols displayed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop), the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second reach mode can be reduced. .

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Another Example of First Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, a pointer update process 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This pointer update process 2 is different from the pointer update process (Y7205 in FIG. 146) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (Y7205). When pointer update processing 2 (Y7205) is executed, first, the same processing as Y7401 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and then it is determined whether it is the timing when the display area is changed. (Y7431). If it is determined in the process of Y7431 that the display area is to be changed (Y7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 2340a2a (Y7432). The determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (Y7433). Then, the flow shifts to Y7402.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y7431, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the display area is changed, the processes of Y7432 and Y7433 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y7402. In Y7402 to Y7406, the same processing as Y7402 to Y7406 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol array is displayed. The display area is changed so that is displayed, the first reach mode is made executable, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol variation is changed. The two-reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player. In addition, in this example, two types of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are set as the changing direction of the symbol row, but the symbol row may be changed in other directions.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, since the symbol string data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol string data used when executing the second reach mode are stored differently, the symbol string data is set for each symbol string. Various effects can be executed by combining the data. In addition, the first combination so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol sequence used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the effect mode is switched from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

  In addition, in the state in which the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode May be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second reach mode is executed are provided separately, and the display of the second reach mode is played in a state where the first reach mode is being executed. It is possible to control the player so that the player cannot visually recognize it, and at the timing when the second reach mode is executed, the display control of each layer is switched so that the player can view the second reach mode.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) are executed simultaneously is used. The technology described in each of the above-described embodiments may be applied, with the symbol display device 81 configured to display the variation between the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the normal symbol simultaneously. In this case, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, the benefit that is executed when the winning is the same as the privilege that is executed when the special symbol is winning can be more effective. it can.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. In the seventh embodiment, since the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the above-described fourth embodiment is used, each element of the game board 13 has the same reference numerals as in the above-described fourth embodiment. And detailed description thereof is omitted. In the fourth embodiment described above, as a condition for shifting to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot B, D (see FIG. 152)) is won (first transition condition) ) And a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)), and after the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 100) without winning the jackpot. (Second transition condition) are provided so that there are a plurality of opportunities for transition to a gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player. In addition, the above-described plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (timing for winning the jackpot and setting the gaming state, and timing when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the gaming state is set). The player can continue to have a sense of expectation for shifting to the latent state.

  However, in the above-described fourth embodiment, even if either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to the same latent state, so that it can be executed during the latent state. There was a problem that it was not possible to make a difference between advantages and disadvantages other than the number of special symbols drawn.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the variation in special symbols between the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied and the latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied. As a gaming state (latent probability state) that is configured to have different patterns (variation times) and is advantageous to the player, a first latent state (latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and The second latent state (latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied) that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state can be set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  First, with reference to FIG. 247, the flow of gaming state transition in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 247, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment shifts between three gaming states (normal state, probability change state, and latent probability state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured.

  In the seventh embodiment, compared to the above-described fourth embodiment, when the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different (first difference) and when the jackpot D is won and the state shifts to a latent state ( When the first transition condition is satisfied), when the special symbol lottery count exceeds the specified number of times (100 times) in the probability variation state (when the second transition condition is satisfied), Since the different latent state is set in (2nd difference), the flow of the game state transition is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The detailed description of the first difference will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 (a). However, in the seventh embodiment, the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player after the big hit, as compared to the fourth embodiment. Is set so that the rate at which the normal state is set and the rate at which the probability change state is set again after the big hit in the probability change state is set high, and the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the big hit, is set. Is set to be low.

  A detailed description of the second difference described above will be described later with reference to FIGS. 249 (b) and 250. In the seventh embodiment, a latent state (when the second transition condition is satisfied) ( As the first latent state), a latent state (second latent state) set when the first transition condition is satisfied is provided, and the variation pattern (variation time) set in each latent state is different. Thus, the second latent state is configured to win more small hits during the latent state than the first latent state.

  Further, in the second latent state, the variation time of the variation pattern that is set when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is set in the first latent state. By configuring so as to be longer than the variation time of the variation pattern, it is configured to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the big hit C is won during the second latent state.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, as an opportunity to shift to the latent state that is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, there is an opportunity to shift without winning a special symbol jackpot, There is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be continuously increased. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is made different according to the trigger to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has shifted to the latent state. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a bonus, the game will be won in the normal state. In this case, a right-handed notification for indicating to the player that the small hit game is being executed (running) is executed, and a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game has elapsed. May be configured not to notify abnormality even when a right-handed game in a normal state is detected. Specifically, a gaming state discriminating unit that discriminates the currently set gaming state, a lottery result discriminating unit that discriminates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and a predetermined condition (right-handed during the normal state) When a game is detected), an abnormality notification means for notifying the abnormality is provided, the game state determination means determines that the normal state (the game state in which a left-handed game is performed) is set, and the lottery result determination means If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, even if a right-handed game is detected in the normal state, the abnormality notification means does not perform abnormality notification, and the special symbol lottery result is small. There is provided a measuring means for measuring a period during which the identification information (the first symbol) indicating that it is a win is changing or a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game, and the measuring means provides a predetermined period Total It may be configured not to perform the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means while you are. As a result, during a game state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed, a right-handed game performed by winning a small-hit game that allows a right-handed game to be performed for a short period of time before the small-hit game is started. Even if the game is performed after the small hit game is finished, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, as a right-handed notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state, And a second right-handed notification mode that is set based on the first right-handed notification mode, which is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Good. Thereby, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and a game easy to understand for the player can be performed.

  In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized to the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is good to set it as the display mode which added the display mode. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the emphasis state in a some alerting | reporting aspect. Note that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state. In addition, a notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player may be used, and besides the display mode, a light emission mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the audio output device 226 may be used. You may use the synthetic | combination alerting | reporting aspect which combined them.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 248 to FIG. 251, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 2020 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), in the ROM 2020 of the seventh embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the fluctuation pattern The difference is that a part of the contents of the selection table 2020f is changed and a variation pattern scenario table 2020h is added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 249 (a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

  The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the seventh embodiment is the first in which each jackpot type is defined relative to the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 160 (a)) used in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value of the hit type counter C2 is changed, and the content of giving the number of time reductions in the jackpot B, which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 1, is changed. Other than that, the fourth embodiment is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, the big hit A is selected as the big hit type, and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is “30 to 69”, the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 89”, the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type. When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  Further, the seventh embodiment is configured such that the condition for assigning the number of times when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type is the same as that when the jackpot A is selected. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, the jackpot type that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the latent state that is most advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends is set to the jackpot D (selection ratio 10 %), And the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that in the fourth embodiment described above. By comprising in this way, it can suppress giving a privilege (prize ball) to a player excessively by the 2nd latent state which is most advantageous to a player.

  When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 44”, the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ In the case of 45 to 49 ", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and in the case where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is" 50 to 99 ", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

  Here, the jackpot H that is a jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the seventh embodiment will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which two rounds (R) of jackpot game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the jackpot game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game). It is difficult to identify a game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent probability state, is the winning game (ie, jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability change count to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game that does not change the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (that is, a small hit game), the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be performed while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the number of time reductions set when transitioning to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times), When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpot X, Y, Z are provided as jackpot types, and different times (for example, 1, 20, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the latent state when transitioning to the probability change state, so the player continues to have a sense of expectation to transition to the latent state. Can be held.

  Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot game content (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot is the same, and a jackpot type with a different number of times is provided to shift to a more latent state. The timing can be difficult for the player to understand. On the other hand, during the probability changing state, a remaining number suggesting notification for informing the player of the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent probability state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the player shifts to the latent state, so that the expectation to the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified by numerical values may be used, or a series of stories is continuously displayed. A period suggestion mode that suggests a period until the story shifts to the latent state using the period until the story is completed may be used.

  In addition, during the game, a mini game (for example, a game whose result is changed by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed, or the remaining number suggestion is performed. You may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting may be varied. Further, if the remaining number suggestion notification is not performed, for example, when the jackpot is won during the probability changing state, the remaining number of times until the latent state is shifted may be notified.

  Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (lottery) executed at the end of the probability variation state or the special symbol variation (lottery) performed at the beginning of the latent probability state may be varied. good. In this case, as a display mode to be varied, a display mode used for suggesting the degree of expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (b). FIG. 248 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the latent pattern is replaced with the latent pattern table 2020fb4 with respect to the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 160 (b)) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a table Ca2020fc2 and a latent probability table Cb2020fc3 are provided.

  Here, each variation pattern table provided in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, and FIG. 250 (b) schematically shows the contents specified in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3. It is the schematic diagram shown in.

  The latent probability table Ca2020fc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to during the period when the first latent state is set. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the symbol type, the determination result, and the hold Corresponding to the number of spheres, a variation pattern that is a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) to 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds) is defined. The contents defined in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 are the same as the contents defined in the latent probability table b2020fb4 of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 162 (b)), and detailed description thereof. Is omitted.

  The latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to during the period in which the second latent state is set. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the symbol type, the determination result, and the hold Corresponding to the number of spheres, a variation pattern that is a variation time of 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) to 7 seconds (7000 milliseconds) is defined. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the determination result is a hit 1 (a jackpot type is a jackpot C), a hit variation (variation time 7 seconds) is defined. In the case where the success / failure determination result is 2 (the jackpot type is jackpot A, B, D), a hit short fluctuation (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined, and the success / failure determination result of FIG. In the case of a deviation, a deviation short fluctuation (fluctuation time: 7 seconds) is specified.

  In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the determination result is a hit (big hit) and the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the hit is regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated, and when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, a hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 0.7 second) is defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Yes. In addition, when the determination result is a small hit and the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the hit short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of held balls In the case of 2 and 3, the hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 0.7 seconds) is defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, when the result of the determination is wrong, the short circuit fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) is associated regardless of the number of reserved balls and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the seventh embodiment (game characteristics different from the above-described fourth embodiment) will be described. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the first latent state and the second latent state that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state can be set as the latent state. . Specifically, as described above, the variation time of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 defined in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is shorter than the latent probability table Ca2020fc2.

  With this configuration, the number of lottery times of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 that executes a lottery advantageous to the player over the special figure 1) that can win a small hit in the second latent state is determined. Since it can be increased from the state, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 referred to during the second latent state, if the big hit C, which is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), is won, A variation pattern (win variation) having a variation time of 7 seconds is selected. This 7-second variation time is longer than the variation time (0.7 seconds to 1 second) defined in each variation pattern set based on the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Diagram 2). When winning the jackpot C in the lottery of one special symbol (Special Figure 1), Special Figure 2 can be changed a plurality of times during the change of Special Figure 1.

  In the seventh embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, the lottery of FIG. 2 in the latent state is 1/80 is a big hit (see FIG. 90 (a)), and 221/480 is a small hit ( 90 (b)), it is set to win a big hit or a small win every time the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed 2-3 times. Further, in the seventh embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment described above, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, one of them changes depending on the stop symbol of big hit or small hit. When stopped, the other variation display is configured to be stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol regardless of the remaining variation time or lottery result. Further, when the big win is won in the lottery of FIG. 2 during the latent state, the latent state is set again after the big win as in the third embodiment described above (FIG. 160). (See (a)).

  According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, for example, the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit type is a big hit) Even if C) is won, before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, in the case where the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to an unfavorable state based on the big win of the special symbol. A gaming state advantageous to the player can be achieved.

  In addition, when the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special winning that is won by the jackpot that is disadvantaged to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is the jackpot C) A right-handed game against the player because there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being drawn continuously multiple times in a state where the symbol is fluctuating. Can be actively promoted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is prefetched, and it is determined that there is winning information winning the jackpot C in the prefetching result, the game is informed. You may comprise so that a person may be notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the player needs to continuously execute the right-handed game.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. A reserved ball of one special symbol and a second special symbol can be acquired. Therefore, the situation where the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed after the end of the small hit can be suppressed.

  The variation pattern scenario table 2020h is a data table that is referred to when setting a variation pattern, and a plurality of variation pattern scenarios (scenario 1 to scenario 3) are defined in association with the gaming state set after the jackpot. Yes. The fluctuation pattern scenario defines a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in association with the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations), and is set when actually selecting a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern scenario is selected using a variation pattern table corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (number of variations).

  By providing the variation pattern scenario in this way, it is possible to grasp in advance the period for continuously referring to one variation pattern table and the timing for switching the variation pattern table to be referenced. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM of the main controller 110, the set fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga, and the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is used. However, for example, the same configuration as the variation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation pattern scenario setting information (scenario command) is mainly used. It is configured to transmit from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and it is possible to grasp the period for continuously referring to one fluctuation pattern table on the sound lamp control device 113 side and the timing for switching the reference fluctuation pattern table. Configure to Good.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp a variation pattern (variation time) that can be executed in the future. For example, a variation pattern during execution of an effect (for example, a continuous effect) executed across multiple variations. It is possible to suppress a problem that the scenario is switched and a difference is produced between the effect mode of continuous production and the actually set variation pattern (variation time). In this case, specifically, the remaining period (the special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations)) of the period (for example, the probability variation state period) in which the same variation pattern scenario is continuously referred to is a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol lottery). What is necessary is just to comprise so that the continuous production performed over 3 times or more of special symbol fluctuation | variations may not be newly set, when it is discriminate | determined that (the number of fluctuations) is the remaining 3 times.

  Further, it may be configured such that the currently set variation pattern and the next set variation pattern are discriminated and a continuous effect corresponding to the discrimination result can be executed. Specifically, it changes with reference to the currently set fluctuation pattern table (for example, a fluctuation pattern table that selects a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined if the special symbol lottery result is out of place). The remaining number of times to select a pattern is 2, and then a variation pattern table to be set next (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is always selected if the special symbol lottery result is out of place) When a special symbol lottery result is a win, a variation pattern is selected with reference to a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds is defined is selected). Based on the determination result and the setting information of the variation pattern scenario, it is possible to set a continuous effect for 9 seconds.

  Next, the variation pattern scenario table 2020h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 2020h. In the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern table that is actually referred to from the plurality of variation pattern tables included in the variation pattern selection table 2020f is defined by the scenario depending on the gaming state and the number of lotteries (variation number) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. ing.

  Specifically, in the variation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 1) that is set when the gaming state becomes a probabilistic state after the jackpot, the number of lotteries (variations) of special symbols after the jackpot ends is “1 to 100”. ”Period, that is, the period in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the probability variation table 2020fb3 is defined, and the period“ 101 to 120 ”, that is, the period in which the latent probability state is set as the gaming state is The latent table Ca2020fc2 is defined, the period “121 to 122” is defined as the normal table Bb2020fb2, the period “123 to 128” is defined as the normal table Cb2020fb5, and the period “129 to” The normal table A2020f1 is defined. Of the variation pattern tables defined here, the contents of the probability variation table 2020fb3, the normal table Bb2020fb2, the normal table Cb2020fb5, and the normal table A2020f1 are the same as those in the third embodiment described above. Detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 250 (a), the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 that is set when the gaming state shifts to the latent probability state when the scenario 1 is set as the variation pattern scenario. Among the plurality of variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the certain state, the variation pattern table is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when scenario 1 is set, the first latent state is set as the latent state.

  Next, in the variation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 2) that is set when the gaming state becomes a latent state after the jackpot, the number of lotteries (variations) of special symbols after the jackpot ends is “1 to 120”. In other words, the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is defined in the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, and the normal table Bb2020fb2 is defined in the period “121 to 122” and “123 to 128”. The regular table Cb2020fb5 is defined for the period, and the regular table A2020f1 is defined for the period "129-".

  As described above with reference to FIG. 250 (b), the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 set when the gaming state shifts to the latent state with the scenario 2 set as the variation pattern scenario is as follows. Among the plurality of variation pattern tables that can be referred to, the variation pattern table is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when scenario 2 is set, the second latent state is set as the latent state.

  As described above, even when the same gaming state (latency probability state) is set, the variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set after the big hit. By making a difference depending on the gaming state, that is, depending on the transition trigger until the transition to the latent state, the advantageous gaming state (second latent state) is disadvantageous to the same gaming state (latent state). Gaming state (first latent state) can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in the same gaming state, in order to vary the degree of advantage based on the transition trigger until the transition to the gaming state, a configuration that varies the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is used. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the probability of special symbol lottery can be varied based on the timing of transition of the gaming state, or the lottery result of the special symbol can be changed to a specific lottery result In a bonus game that is executed when a lottery result that can be awarded (for example, a small win or a big win)), a closing period or opening of a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which a ball can be won during the bonus game. It may be configured to vary the period, or to provide a plurality of winning devices capable of winning a ball during the bonus game, and to change the winning devices to be released during the bonus game.

  In the fluctuation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 3) that is set when the gaming state becomes the normal state after the jackpot, the period when the number of lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is “1” is normal Table A2020f1 is defined.

  Next, details of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 251, the RAM 2030 of the seventh embodiment is different in that a scenario storage area 2030ga is added to the RAM 2030 of the third embodiment described above, and the other elements are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The scenario storage area 2030ga is an area for temporarily storing the variation pattern scenario selected using the variation pattern scenario table 2020h. In the scenario storage area 2030ga, the variation pattern scenario selected in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 255) is stored (Y2353 in FIG. 255), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252), or the first 2 In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIGS. 253 and 254), the stored variation pattern scenario is read (Y551 in FIG. 252, Y1151 in FIG. 253, Y1251 and Y1253 in FIG. 254), and the read variation pattern scenario is Based on this, a variation pattern table is selected (Y552 in FIG. 252; Y1152 in FIG. 253; Y1252 and Y1254 in FIG. 254).

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is cleared when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Further, when the RAM erase switch is operated to initialize (reset) the contents of the RAM 2030 of the main controller 110, the initial setting of RAM (Y1912 in FIG. 118) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118). ), Scenario 3 is set as the scenario type.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The control process of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is a special first symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252), the second control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253), the special symbol 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 254), and the jackpot end process (see FIG. 255) are partially changed, and the others are the same. The process is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern scenario. And it is comprised so that a different variation pattern scenario may be selected according to the game state set after the end of jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to set different variation pattern scenarios in the state where the latent state is set. Specifically, when winning the jackpot, where the latent state is set after the jackpot ends, and when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuating) The number of times) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the game state shifts to the latent state, so that different variation pattern scenarios are selected, and the variation referred to during the latent state Different pattern tables can be used.

  Since the variation times defined in the variation pattern tables (latency probability table Ca2020fc2, latent probability table Cb2020fc3) referenced during the latent probability state are configured to be different, It is possible to vary the execution condition of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol for performing the lottery that is advantageous to the player during the state. Further, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3, the variation time defined in the variation pattern selected when winning the big hit (big hit C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other big wins among the special symbol big wins. Since it is longer than the other variation patterns, other games can be executed a plurality of times before the game based on the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player is executed.

  First, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is executed, the processes of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are respectively the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are executed. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y503 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y551), and the variation that has been read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y552), and the process proceeds to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) is executed, the processes of Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105 to Y1109 are respectively the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105 to Y1109 are executed. In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y1104 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1151), and the variation that has been read out is read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1152), and the process proceeds to Y1105. A variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1105 using the variation pattern selection table read out here.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (Y1107 in FIG. 253) executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253) in the seventh embodiment. is there. When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process is executed, each of the processes Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209 is a special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process in the third embodiment (see FIG. 111). The same processes as those of Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209 are executed. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of Y1203 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read out from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1251), and the variation that has been read out is read out. A variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1252), and the process proceeds to Y1205. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, a variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1205.

  In the process of Y1201, when it is determined that the special drawing 2 lottery result is not a small hit (Y1201: No), the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1253) and read. A variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario and the gaming state is selected (Y1254), and the process proceeds to Y1208. A variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1208 using the variation pattern selection table read out here.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is read out and read out. A variation pattern table is selected based on the variation pattern scenario and the current game state (or the number of special symbol lotteries (variation count)), and the variation pattern is selected with reference to the selected variation pattern table. ing.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end process in the seventh embodiment is different from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment described above in that the jackpot type for setting the value in the hour / counter counter 2030g is different, and the fluctuation pattern scenario. The point of difference is that a process for selecting is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the jackpot end process (Y2112) is executed, first, the processes of Y2301 to Y2304 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and when it is determined that the process is not in the latent state in the process of Y2304 (Y2304: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the current jackpot is jackpot D (Y2350). If it is determined that the jackpot is not D (Y2350: No), the value of the hour / hour counter 2030g is set to 100 (Y2351), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

  On the other hand, in the process of Y2350, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot D (Y2350: Yes), the process of Y2351 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2307. Then, the processes of Y2307 to Y2308 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and thereafter, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state specified by the process of Y2301 is selected from the variation pattern scenario table 2020h (Y2352), and the selection is made. The changed variation scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y2353), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this seventh embodiment, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot D (see FIG. 247)) is won as a condition for shifting to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. (First transition condition) and a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)), and after winning the jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries is determined a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot (for example, 100 times) (when the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds the specified number (100 times) in the probability variation state) (second transition condition), and the gaming state (latent) that is most advantageous to the player It has been configured so that there are multiple triggers to shift to a certain state. In addition, the above-described plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (timing for winning the jackpot and setting the gaming state and timing when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the gaming state is set). The player can continue to have a sense of expectation for shifting to the latent state, and further, the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second transition A different variation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the latent state set when the condition is satisfied, and the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set to the first latent state. A certain probability state (latent probability state that is set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and a second latent probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the first latent certain state (when the first transition condition is satisfied). Set the latent state to be set) It is possible.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since there is an opportunity to move to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning a special symbol jackpot, the player's willingness to play is continuously increased. There is an effect that can be. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is made different according to the trigger to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has shifted to the latent state. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol In this case, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 may be lengthened, or an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter may be selected.

  As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a bonus, the game will be won in the normal state. In this case, a right-handed notification for indicating to the player that the small hit game is being executed (running) is executed, and a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game has elapsed. May be configured not to notify abnormality even when a right-handed game in a normal state is detected.

  In addition, as a right-handed notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state, And a second right-handed notification mode that is set based on the first right-handed notification mode, which is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Good. Thereby, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and a game easy to understand for the player can be performed.

  In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized to the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is good to set it as the display mode which added the display mode. Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the emphasis state in a some alerting | reporting aspect. Note that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the big hit, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state. In addition, a notification mode for guiding a right-handed game to the player may be used, and besides the display mode, a light emission mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the audio output device 226 may be used. You may use the synthetic | combination alerting | reporting aspect which combined them.

  Further, the seventh embodiment is configured such that the condition for assigning the number of times when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type is the same as that when the jackpot A is selected. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, the jackpot type that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the latent state that is most advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends is set to the jackpot D (selection ratio 10 %), And the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that in the fourth embodiment described above. By comprising in this way, it can suppress giving a privilege (prize ball) to a player excessively by the 2nd latent state which is most advantageous to a player.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the number of time reductions set when shifting to the probability variation state (high accuracy / short time presence state) is 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times), the probability variation state When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the game state, the gaming state is changed from the probability changing state to the latent state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / time shortage state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpot X, Y, Z are provided as jackpot types, and different times (for example, 1, 20, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the latent state when transitioning to the probability change state, so the player continues to have a sense of expectation to transition to the latent state. Can be held.

  Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot game content (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot is the same, and a jackpot type with a different number of times is provided to shift to a more latent state. The timing can be difficult for the player to understand. On the other hand, during the probability changing state, a remaining number suggesting notification for informing the player of the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent probability state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the player shifts to the latent state, so that the expectation to the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol changes (number of lotteries) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified by numerical values may be used, or a series of stories is continuously displayed. A period suggestion mode that suggests a period until the story shifts to the latent state using the period until the story is completed may be used.

  In addition, during the game, a mini game (for example, a game whose result is changed by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed, or the remaining number suggestion is performed. You may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting may be varied. Further, if the remaining number suggestion notification is not performed, for example, when the jackpot is won during the probability changing state, the remaining number of times until the latent state is shifted may be notified.

  Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (lottery) executed at the end of the probability variation state or the special symbol variation (lottery) performed at the beginning of the latent probability state may be varied. good. In this case, as a display mode to be varied, a display mode used for suggesting the degree of expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

  According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, for example, the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit type is a big hit) Even if C) is won, before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, in the case where the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to an unfavorable state based on the big win of the special symbol. A gaming state advantageous to the player can be achieved.

  In addition, when the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special winning that is won by the jackpot that is disadvantaged to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is the jackpot C) A right-handed game against the player because there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being drawn continuously multiple times in a state where the symbol is fluctuating. Can be actively promoted, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is prefetched, and it is determined that there is winning information winning the jackpot C in the prefetching result, the game is informed. You may comprise so that a person may be notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the player needs to continuously execute the right-handed game.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as that in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. A reserved ball of one special symbol and a second special symbol can be acquired. Therefore, the situation where the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed after the end of the small hit can be suppressed.

  In the seventh embodiment, both the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 (see FIG. 250 (a)) and the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) correspond to one special symbol determination result. Although the configuration in which the variation pattern is defined is used, a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times may be defined in accordance with the range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 for the special symbol determination result. By configuring in this way, in addition to the special symbol determination result, the variation pattern (variation time) set according to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 can be varied. In this case, specifically, in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, if the symbol type is Special Fig. 1 and the result of the determination is wrong, that is, the special symbol that is disadvantageous for the player who does not perform the small lottery lottery. As a variation pattern to be selected when the judgment result is out of place, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (a variation pattern with a variation time shorter than other variation patterns) and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds (others) (Variation pattern having a variation time longer than that of the variation pattern) is preferably selected. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in changes in special symbols that are disadvantageous to the player.

  In the seventh embodiment, the balls are alternately distributed to the entrance for triggering the lottery for the first special symbol and the entrance for triggering the lottery for the second special symbol. The distribution unit 660 is provided, and the winning information can be reserved only for the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, in order to continuously execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is also executed. However, by playing the right-handed game, the entrance that triggers the lottery for the first special symbol and the entrance that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol respectively. Any configuration capable of entering a ball is acceptable. Moreover, you may provide the structure which can hold | maintain prize information also with respect to a 2nd special symbol like 4th Embodiment mentioned above.

  In the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a variation time of 0.5 seconds at the shortest. However, the ball enters the second entry port regulated by the distribution unit 660 described above. It may be configured to set a variation time longer than the ball interval (0.7 seconds). Thereby, it can suppress that the situation where the variable display of a 2nd special symbol is interrupted with respect to the player who continues the right-handed game is generated.

  In the third embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, by configuring so that the small hit game is frequently generated during the latent state, the latent state is made a game state advantageous to the player. May be used to configure a gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, when a lottery result of a normal symbol wins, a ball entrance (second ball entrance) associated with the electric accessory 640a that is opened is operated. 640) is set, and the variation time of the special symbol in the latent state is set to be longer than when other game states are set, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released during one special symbol variation is set. You may comprise so that a privilege may be provided to a player by making it increase.

  In addition, when the winning device 65 is closed during the small win game when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, ending period, etc.) during the latent state, it is more than when winning in the other game state. You may set short.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, the second latent state set when winning the jackpot (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends is special without winning the jackpot during the probability changing state. Although it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first latent state set when the symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), it is advantageous in a gaming state advantageous to the player. The game state may be subdivided so as to have different degrees. For example, the second latent state set when the big hit (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the big hit ends is won. Rather than winning the jackpot in the probability variation state, the first latent state set when the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times) is configured to be more advantageous to the player. Also There.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, as a condition for setting the first latent state, the case where the lottery of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times (100 times) without winning a jackpot during the probability changing state is shown. Other than that, for example, in response to a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the probability variation state is set, a normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) to a normal symbol low probability state (without electric support) A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for shifting to (state) may be provided, and the first latent state may be set when the transition lottery means is won.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which a period during which a latent state can be set (120 times at the maximum) is set in advance. For example, a high probability state of a special symbol is set. Corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in the state of being, a falling lottery means for executing a falling lottery for shifting (falling) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is provided, and the falling lottery means It may be configured to continue a period during which the latent state can be set until winning. By comprising in this way, it can make it difficult for a player to grasp | ascertain the period when the gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to a player continues, and it can suppress getting tired of a game early. .

  In addition, during the period in which the gaming state (second latency state) that is advantageous to the player in the latent probability state is set, the lottery number of special symbols is a predetermined number of times without winning the above-mentioned falling lottery (for example, It may be configured to be set when exceeding 150 times. As a result, by continuing the state where the falling lottery is not won, it is possible to receive a lot of lotteries in the high probability state of the special symbol, and to the gaming state (second latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player. The transition expectation can be increased, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability of winning a small bonus in the special symbol lottery is always a constant probability regardless of the gaming state. However, the probability of winning a small bonus depending on the gaming state may be varied.

  In the third embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be drawn (changed) in parallel, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the second special symbol is used. In order to make it difficult for a special symbol to be drawn (varied), the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As the variation time of the 2 special symbols, the variation time that can be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol only when the jackpot is won or a variation time shorter than that can be selected. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol that has started to fluctuate in the normal state and has started to fluctuate has a jackpot after a long time (for example, after 10 minutes) (third) It can be prevented from stopping at the symbol) and starting a big hit game.

  In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, and a small hit is won and a small hit game is started after a long change, at the timing when the small hit game is started It is determined whether or not a game is being performed (determining whether or not a demo is waiting), and if it is determined that a game is not being performed (waiting for a demo) It may be configured to display different waiting small hit display modes. By configuring in this way, even if the small hit game is started in a state where the player stops the game during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol and the game is not played (demo display state), it is different from the normal game. Since the waiting small hit display mode is displayed, a sense of discomfort can be suppressed.

  In addition, as the waiting small hit display mode, a display mode that does not emphasize that the small hit game is being performed is preferable to the display mode displayed during the normal small hit game. On the other hand, it is difficult to notice that a small hit game is being performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a game only during the small hit game to play a game.

  Each configuration used in the third to seventh embodiments described above (contents of various tables, each element of the control flow of the main controller 110, each element of the control flow of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114) Each element of the control flow may be combined as appropriate. For example, an area for storing the reserved ball of the second special symbol may be provided for the configuration used in the third embodiment (see the fourth embodiment). ) When one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a jackpot, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (until the jackpot ends) and temporarily stopped after the jackpot ends You may use the structure (refer 4th Embodiment) which restarts the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, in the configuration (simultaneous variation configuration) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol described in the third to seventh embodiments described above can be drawn (varied) in parallel, one of the special symbols When it is determined that the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, jackpot) (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) executed during the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102)) In the case where it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (see Y405 in FIG. 103)), a limit determination means for executing a limit determination so that the jackpot is not won when the other special symbol starts to change. It may be provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the winning result is discarded even though the winner is won, so it is possible to pre-read that the lottery result of the special symbol is a winner and It is possible to suppress inconveniences in the case of performing a suggestive effect that suggests that the player has won the jackpot (before the change of special symbols to be started).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the period during which the normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) is set is a predetermined period (for example, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added). The number of times is set as a predetermined number of times (a period until the number of times reaches 100)), but other configurations may be used. For example, a normal symbol high probability state (electric support state) The period until the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times (first period), or the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number (30 times). You may comprise so that it may be set until it reaches | attains any period of the period (2nd period) until it arrives. With this configuration, when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, how should the game be performed in order to quickly shift to the gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game that aims to enter the first entrance 64, which is a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, or a game that aims to enter the second entrance 640, which is a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. Since the player can play the game while predicting which one should be performed), there is an effect that the player can actively participate in the game.

  Further, in this case, as in each of the embodiments described above, in the probability variation state, the entrance (for example, the second entrance 640) that makes it easy for the ball to enter, and the ball even when the game state changes When the game state changes as a condition for ending a high probability state (with electric support) of a normal symbol, provided with a entrance (for example, the first entrance 64) where the ease of entering the ball is not variable Even so, the number of lotteries (variation count) for a special symbol (first special symbol) with the entrance that does not change the ease of entering the ball as a lottery opportunity has reached a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). It is preferable to provide an end condition that satisfies the condition when it is determined that the condition has been satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state, in order to quickly shift to the latent probability state, a game aiming at the entrance where the ball is difficult to enter (first game) is performed, or in the probability variation state A game (second game) aiming at the entrance that makes it easy to enter the ball is performed, and the player selects whether to play the game advantageously in the probability variation state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the case of using the configuration as described above, when the probability variation state is set, the condition for shifting to the latent state in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the normal symbol high probability state (with electric support) It is preferable to provide end condition display means for displaying the end condition of the (state) and progress status display means for displaying how much the current game situation is progressing with respect to the end condition displayed by the end condition display means. . By comprising in this way, the standard at the time of a player selecting the game content performed in a probability change state can be provided.

  The end condition displayed by the above-described end condition display means and the progress status displayed by the progress status display means may be in a display form indicating a specific value (variation of each special symbol (number of lotteries)) or end. A suggestion that suggests conditions and progress may be used. In addition, the end condition displayed by the end condition display means based on the player's operation contents for the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player during the probability change state, the special symbols, and the lottery contents of the normal symbols. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the progress status displayed by the progress status display means to a display mode that is easy for the player to grasp.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the probability variation state, based on the number of lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol (electric support state) When configured so that the end condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that there is no significant difference between the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol in the probability variation state. Good. Thereby, since it becomes possible to change each special symbol corresponding to the game (1st game, 2nd game) which the player selected, it can be said that it can suppress giving a player dissatisfaction. effective.

  In addition to the example described above, elements other than the number of fluctuations may be set as the end condition of the high probability state (electric support state) of the normal symbol, for example, The end condition may be that the number of operations of the V winning device 650 that operates when the small hit game is executed has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, only some of the above-described many termination conditions may be used, or each may be combined as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-described example, a falling lottery means for executing a falling lottery for shifting (falling) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is provided as an end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol. It is preferable to provide a configuration so that the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol is satisfied when the falling lottery means is won. As a result, the period in which a gaming state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is started and the period in which the gaming state is ended can be varied in accordance with the game contents, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. Can do. Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the end condition of the normal symbol high probability state (electric support state) is different according to the winning jackpot type. Thereby, the period during which the latent state can be set can be set more complicatedly, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 when the latent probability state is set. However, other configurations may be used, for example, when the latent state is set in the state where the probability variation state is set. The display mode of the effect to be displayed may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state is set regardless of the state in which the probability change state is set, and it is possible to increase the game motivation. When such a configuration is used, the variation pattern may be set so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is appropriately executed even in the probability variation state. For example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is small. In the case of hitting or losing, it is preferable that a variation period slightly longer than the variation pattern set during the latent state or an equivalent variation period is set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set gaming state based on the variation time of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the configuration in which the display mode of the effect executed when the latent state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the above-described normal symbol high probability state ( It is even better to combine with a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions for ending the power support state are provided. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing of the transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state by using a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions for ending the high probability state (electric support state) of normal symbols are provided, and In the state where the state is set, the display mode of the effect executed when the latent state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that whether the game in the state of probability change is being executed or the latent state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the game is being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the first modified example of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 218), the period in which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set is referred to as the first advantageous period. As a configuration that can be set to a second advantageous period that is more advantageous than the first advantageous period, a variation pattern table that is different in the first half and the second half of the latent state is referred to. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the latter half of the latent state is advantageous to the player. You may comprise so that it may become an advantageous period (2nd advantageous period). Moreover, you may use the structure which switches the fluctuation pattern table referred so that a 1st advantageous period and a 2nd advantageous period may switch alternately.

  In addition, by using the board configuration of the gaming board 13 of the fourth embodiment described above as the configuration of the first modification of the third embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery is performed by performing a right-handed game during the latent state. An allocation unit 660 capable of alternately entering balls at the entrance (first entrance 64) serving as an opportunity and the entrance (second entrance 640) serving as a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol It is preferable that the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period are switched periodically (for example, once every lottery (variation) of special symbols).

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the latent state is set, the advantageous state of the latent state can be varied greatly depending on which entrance the first entrance is to enter. And more complex games can be executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery (variation) executed once after the latent state is set is the first advantageous period and the second is the first advantageous period. It is preferable to provide a variation scenario (second variation scenario) to be executed and to vary the variation scenario to be executed based on the winning jackpot type. Thereby, it can suppress that the distribution aspect of the distribution unit 660 is adjusted beforehand so that a latent state may become more advantageous.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be varied according to game state even if the same hit type)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, bonus game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player based on a result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and execution of the bonus game As a type of privilege game executed by the means, a type determining unit that determines a type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types, and a game entry unit capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine And a first variable means that can be changed between an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. 1 variable means, the first variable means after the bonus game is started with respect to the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern based on the fact that the determination means has obtained the specific determination result. Variable to the open position A first variable control means that changes at least one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that differs in at least a period until it is played, and a game ball that has entered the entry means has an inside of the entry means. And a second variable means that can be changed to a first position at which it is possible to enter the specific area provided at the first position, and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. 2 The variable means is changed to a specific area during execution of the special game and the second variable control means for changing the predetermined variable pattern in accordance with a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the result of the specific determination by the determining means. A gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state after executing the privilege game to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when a gaming ball enters, and a gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained; In the type determining means Determining means for determining one variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on the type of the privilege game determined by the first variable pattern, A game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position can enter the specific area, and the second variable pattern is the first variable variable. A gaming machine A1 in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the means is changed to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a short time state that makes it easier to win a start than usual as a bonus. With this conventional gaming machine, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, whether or not the short-time state is given, and the short-term period when the short-time state is given, etc. There are those that diversify the state of the game to improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if diversity is provided in a short period of time, the winning lottery probability is fixed according to the type of winning, so that the player's interest is sufficiently improved It was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the entrance means and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. Is variable. The first variable pattern and the period from when the privilege game is started with respect to the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position based on the specific determination result by the determination means. The first variable means is varied by the variable control means in any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least different second variable patterns. A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and entering the specific area is more difficult than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means has a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the specific determination result by the determination means. Variable. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is executed is set to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. One variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns is determined based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means. Determined by. The first variable pattern is configured such that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the 1 variable means is changed to the open position is configured to be more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern.

  Thereby, the ratio at which the first variable pattern that is easy to enter the specific area is set based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means is variable. Therefore, the ratio at which the advantageous gaming state is set can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second in which the first variable pattern is less likely to be determined than the first advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine A2 including at least an advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a first advantageous gaming state that is first than the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous game state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when a game ball enters the specific area, the game is performed in anticipation that the first advantageous game state is determined. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous gaming state is such that the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the privilege game type determined by the type determining means. When the first advantageous gaming state is reached, the advantageous gaming state is easily set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a greater satisfaction when entering the first advantageous gaming state.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming state setting means indicates the gaming state after the bonus game is executed if the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the bonus game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantaged game state that is more disadvantageous than the state, and the game state setting means plays a game to the specific area during execution of the privilege game based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the disadvantageous game state. A gaming machine A4, wherein, when a ball enters, a ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is higher than a ratio of setting the second advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball does not enter a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is executed is set to a disadvantaged game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. Is done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in a disadvantageous game state, the ratio at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is The second advantageous gaming state is configured to be higher than the set ratio.

  Thereby, when a privilege game is executed in a disadvantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the player's game in a disadvantageous gaming state.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming state setting means is executing the privilege game based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is high.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the bonus game is being executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When the game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state by the game state setting means is high, so that once the first advantageous game state is entered, a plurality of privilege games Thus, the first advantageous game state is easily set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game has been completed continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of expectation for the first advantageous gaming state can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming state setting means, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the first advantageous game when the specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied. A gaming machine A6 characterized by setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state when a specific condition different from the end of the bonus game is satisfied Since the first advantageous gaming state is set by the setting means, in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the ball enters the ball, the ball discriminating unit that performs discrimination by the discriminating unit, the first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering discriminator, and the first variable A third variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and a variable form of the third variable means, a first variable form that is easily variable to the first variable position, and Control means that can be controlled at least in the second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than in the first variable mode, wherein the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A7 is controlled in a second variable mode, and the second advantageous gaming state is such that the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode by the control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the third variable means is varied between a first variable position where a game ball can enter the ball discrimination means and a second variable position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first variable position. . The variable mode of the third variable means is at least controlled by the control means in a first variable mode that can be easily changed to the first variable position and a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable mode. The In the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable manner, and in the second advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable manner.

  Thereby, in the second advantageous gaming state, which is less advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state, the determination by the determining means is easily performed, so that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous gaming state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latency by missing support)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, bonus game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and execution of the bonus game As the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the means is finished, the first gaming state in which the probability that the specific discrimination result is set by the discrimination means is set to the first probability, and is higher than the first probability A gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a second gaming state set to the second probability and a third gaming state advantageous to the second gaming state and set to the second probability, and A gaming state in which, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state can be changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state without triggering the end of the privilege gaming state. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a further means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is increased as a bonus after winning. Furthermore, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of lotteries in the probability variation state, and if it does not hit before reaching the predetermined upper limit number of lotteries, In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is one that shifts to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. When winning in this special state, the game value given to the player is greater than winning in the probable state, so even if the probable state ends before winning, the player's motivation for the game is motivated It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the winning lottery probability is a normal probability in a special state set after the probability variation state is over, so that it may be missed over a relatively large number of lottery times. Increases nature. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit based on the determination result obtained by the determination unit. As a gaming state after the award game executed by the award game execution means, the probability that a specific discrimination result is set by the discrimination means is a first gaming state set to the first probability, and is higher than the first probability. The second gaming state set to the second probability and the third gaming state advantageous to the second gaming state and set to the second probability can be set at least by the gaming state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means without triggering the end of the privilege gaming state.

  Thereby, even if it does not become a privilege game, since it can change from a 2nd game state to a 3rd game state by a game state change means, the interest with respect to the player's game in a 2nd game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  When the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended by the gaming status setting means in the gaming machine B1, the second gaming game is performed over at least a predetermined number of the bonus games including the bonus game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a gaming state in which a probability is set is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the termination of the bonus game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the bonus game is included. Since the continuous state in which the game state in which the second probability is set over the privilege game is easily set is set by the continuous state setting means, the game can be performed in the hope that the continuous state is set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming state setting means ends the bonus game when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the bonus game being executed in the third gaming state. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that a ratio of setting the gaming state after being played to the first gaming state is high.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the bonus game being executed in the third gaming state, Since the proportion of the first gaming state set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the completion is configured to be high, in the second gaming state, the gaming state changing means before the bonus game is executed It is possible to provide a novel gaming property that expects the third gaming state to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming state setting means is configured to select either the second gaming state or the third gaming state when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that can be set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed, the gaming state setting means causes the second gaming state and the third Since one of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the bonus game is ended. Therefore, since the gaming state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that the player can be pleased by entering the third gaming state.

  A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discrimination means is executed when a game ball enters in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position at which a game ball can easily enter the ball entry means compared to one position, and a variable means for changing the second means from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a variable control means for varying the position to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second gaming state is more easily changed to the second position by the variable control means than in the third gaming state. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is varied between the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is easy to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. . Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period. The second gaming state is more easily changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state.

  Thereby, since the determination by the determining means can be easily performed in the second gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second gaming state.

  Counting means for counting the number of consecutive detachment determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the second gaming state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5 The gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state on the basis that the number of consecutive times of the outage determination result counted by the counting means has reached a specific number. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the setting of the second gaming state, the counting means counts the number of consecutive detachment determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing unit based on the fact that the consecutive number of outlier determination results counted by the counting unit has reached a specific number.

  Thus, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the determination result of detachment will continue rather than to be a specific determination result, so that a novel gaming machine is provided. There is an effect that can be.

  As one of the bonus games executed by the bonus game executing means in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a type determining means for determining one bonus game type from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are entered. A ball entrance means capable of entering a ball, an open position where a game ball can enter the entrance means, and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. 1 The variable position and the first variable position at which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the first variable position. The first variable means and the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area, and the specific determination result by the determination means, Variable control for changing the second variable means with a predetermined variable pattern And the predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, and a game ball that has entered the entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position enters the specific area. A determining means capable of determining at least a first variable pattern that is possible and a second variable pattern that is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern; When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the bonus game is ended is set to either the second game state or the third game state. The determining means determines one variable pattern based on the gaming state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B7, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is varied between an open position where a game ball can enter the entrance means and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. A game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and a first variable position that can enter the specific area as compared to the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the variable control means based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position; The second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern can be determined at least by the determining means. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. . One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  This makes it easy to set a variable pattern that is easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means. Therefore, the ratio at which the second probability is set after the end of the bonus game can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are different in at least a period from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted according to the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means. It is only necessary to define variable control, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Direction that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path The first entrance means that can be placed in one path and can enter a game ball and the second entrance means and the first entrance means that can be placed in the second path and can enter a game ball, or (2) A privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a determination result obtained by the determination by the determination device and a determination result based on the game ball entering the ball entry device. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route, triggered by the end of the special game executed by the game execution unit and the special game execution unit, the determination by the determination unit is easily performed. The first gaming state and before the first route A gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that facilitates the determination by the determining means when a game ball is launched on the second route, and the gaming state thereof It is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means and the condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball fired by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine C1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates determination by the determining means as a path for launching a game ball.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a short time state in which at least a part of the winning is likely to cause a start winning. In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of start winning holes on the game board, and it becomes easier to win game balls to some of the starting winning holes due to a short time state. In this gaming machine, depending on whether or not it is in a short time state, it is configured to execute an effect (suggested effect) that suggests which start prize opening should be aimed at, thereby providing an easier-to-understand game (For example, JP-A-2006-230825).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the shift to the short-time state is made after hitting, the suggestion effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation whether or not the short-time state has been reached is maintained only until the end of the jackpot. There was a problem that it was not possible.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on the player's operation, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the above is provided. The first path is provided with first entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second path is provided with second entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. In response to the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the first gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched to the first path rather than the second path; One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from at least a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched on the second route than the route. It is determined by the condition determining means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball fired by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the effect execution means executes a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates determination by the determination means as a path for launching a game ball.

  As a result, even if the gaming state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the expectation that the more advantageous gaming state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is an effect that can be done.

  A variable that can be varied between a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the game machine C1 than the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, wherein the second gaming state is more specific than the first gaming state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the condition is easily established.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second gaming state is configured such that the specific condition is more easily established than in the first gaming state.

  Thus, in the second gaming state, the launching means can be operated so as to cause the game ball to enter the second entrance while the variable means is being changed to the first position. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  The game machine C2 includes a passage means through which a game ball can pass and a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is established when the game state set by the game state setting means and the game ball fired by the launching means passes the passage means a specific number of times. A gaming machine C3, which is established when the game is completed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing unit. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. A predetermined condition is established when a game ball fired by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means passes through the passage means a specific number of times.

  Thereby, in order to establish a predetermined condition, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball aiming at the passing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, as the passing means, at least a first passing means disposed on the first route and a second passing means disposed on the second route are provided. Game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means disposed on the first route and a second passing means disposed on the second route are provided as passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect the predetermined condition to be satisfied by firing the game ball on the favorite path of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is fired by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The game machine C5 is established when the played game ball first passes through the first passage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball fired by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, a game ball can be fired to the 1st path | route in anticipation that the 1st path | route which is easy to be discriminate | determined by a discrimination means in the advantageous 1st game state is suggested by a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In at least one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, a period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the variable means is changed to the first position is determined by the launch means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that it has a longer duration than it takes for a game ball launched into the path to reach the second entry means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from when the specific condition is satisfied to when the variable means is changed to the first position is When the set gaming state is the second gaming state because it is configured to be longer than the period required for the gaming ball launched by the launching means to the second path to reach the second entering means In addition, even if the predetermined condition is established based on passing the passing means and the second route is suggested by the specific effect, the second entering means is changed before the variable means is changed to the first position. A game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity of discrimination by the discrimination means can be utilized to the maximum in the second gaming state.

  The gaming machine C2 is provided with a predetermined pitching means provided on the first path and different from the first pitching means, and the predetermined condition is determined by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine C7, which is established when the launched game ball first enters the predetermined entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined entrance means different from the first entrance means is provided in the first path. A predetermined condition is established when a game ball fired by the launching means first enters the predetermined throwing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, since a ball can be launched aiming at a predetermined entry means so as to establish a predetermined condition, there is an effect that a player's willingness to participate in a game can be improved.

  A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path The first entrance means that can be placed in one path and can enter a game ball and the second entrance means and the first entrance means that can be placed in the second path and can enter a game ball, or (2) A privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a determination result obtained by the determination by the determination device and a determination result based on the game ball entering the ball entry device. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route, triggered by the end of the special game executed by the game execution unit and the special game execution unit, the determination by the determination unit is easily performed. The first gaming state and before the first route A gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that facilitates the determination by the determining means when a game ball is launched on the second route, and the gaming state thereof Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed as a path for launching a game ball based on a time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time since the setting of one gaming state by the setting means and a specific elapsed time by the time measuring means. A game machine C8, comprising: an effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that is likely to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on a player's operation, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass and the first route are A different second path is provided. The first path is provided with first entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second path is provided with second entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. In response to the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the first gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched to the first path rather than the second path; One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from at least a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to be executed when a game ball is launched on the second route than the route. The elapsed time since one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is timed by the timing means, and based on the fact that the specific elapsed time has been reached by the timing means, the discrimination means as the path for launching the game ball A specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that facilitates determination is executed by the effect execution means.

  Thereby, even if the gaming state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation that the more advantageous gaming state is set is maintained at least until the specific elapsed time is reached. There is an effect that can be.

  As one of the bonus games executed by the bonus game executing means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a type determining means for determining one bonus game type from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are entered. It is possible to change between an open position where a game ball can enter the variable entrance means capable of entering a ball, and a closed position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. First variable means and a first variable position at which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and the first variable position. Based on the result of the specific determination by the second variable means that can be changed to the second variable position that makes it difficult to enter the specific area compared to the position and the determination means, the first determination The variable means and the second variable means are in a predetermined variable pattern. As the variable control means to be changed and the predetermined variable pattern variable by the variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position is the specified A determination means capable of determining at least a first variable pattern that allows entry into a region and a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern; When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the status setting means sets the gaming status after the bonus game is ended as either the first gaming status or the second gaming status. And when the game ball does not enter the specific area, the third game state is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. Result And playing state time point, based on the type of the benefits game determined by the type determination means, the gaming machine is characterized in that for determining the first variable pattern C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one privilege game type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is varied between an open position where game balls can enter the variable entry means and a closed position where entry into the entry means is more difficult than the open position. A game ball that has entered the variable entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable entry means, and can enter the specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the variable control means based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter the specific area during a period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position; The determining unit determines at least a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game, the game state after the special game is ended is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the bonus game, the gaming state after the bonus game is ended is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state by the gaming state setting means. A gaming state is set. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

  This makes it easy to set a variable pattern that is easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means. Therefore, the ratio at which the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set after the bonus game is ended can be varied according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9, the determination means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, the first variable is determined by the determining means when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, rather than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is configured to be easily determined, it can be expected that the first route is suggested by the specific effect so that the determination is easily performed in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least different periods from when the privilege game is started until the first variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine C11 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the bonus game is started. Therefore, the variable pattern can be predicted according to the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, since the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, the control of the second variable means is one way. It is only necessary to define variable control, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (Non-V time reduction given during probability change and pullback time reduction)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the result of determination by the determination means, and establishment of the specific condition Based on the above, a gaming state setting capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is easier to execute than the first gaming state Means for entering a game ball in the gaming machine, an open position at which the game ball can enter the entrance means, and an entrance to the entrance means from the open position. A first variable means capable of changing to a closed position where the ball is difficult and the first variable means are variable in a predetermined variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Variable control means and front A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and an entrance to the specific area is greater than the first position. The second variable control means that can be changed to a difficult second position and the second variable means are variable in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. A first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and the specific area more than the first variable pattern as a variable pattern that is variable by the second variable control means and the first variable control means A determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the game, and when a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game The specific area And a privilege granting unit that grants a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when the player did not enter the game, and the gaming state setting unit is not granted the specific privilege by the privilege granting unit. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the second gaming state can be set when the game is played.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside the entrance hole provided on the board surface, and when a ball enters the specific area, There are some cases where the proportion of specific benefits that are advantageous to the person is high. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game is provided in which the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the entrance with a specific area inside, so once the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made, the privilege game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. This makes it very advantageous for the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if it falls into the lottery whether or not to give a specific privilege in the advantageous gaming state, it will fall to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state, so when the leakage to the lottery However, there is a problem that the player's motivation for the game is greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is arranged between an open position where the game ball can enter the entrance means and an open position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the open position. Is varied, and the first variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the first variable control means based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A first position at which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter a specific area provided inside the entrance means, and entering the specific area is more difficult than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is variable in a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the determination result by the determination means. Is done. As a variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and a second that makes it difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from a plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of a special game, a specific special advantage that is advantageous to the player is given by the bonus granting means at a higher rate than when a specific ball does not enter the specific area. . The configuration is such that the second game state can be set by the game state setting means when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege grant means.

  Thereby, when a specific privilege is not granted, a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. Therefore, when a specific privilege is not granted, the player's motivation for the game is impaired. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the first gaming state, The gaming machine D2, wherein the second gaming state is set when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game state is set by the game state setting unit when a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting unit in the bonus game executed in the first gaming state. On the other hand, the second game state is set by the game state setting means when a special privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  As a result, in the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the second gaming state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game in the second gaming state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result is set to the first probability, and the gaming state setting means It is possible to set a third gaming state in which the resulting probability is set to a second probability that is higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means sends the third gaming state to the gaming state setting means as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3 that is configured to set a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability that a specific determination result is set between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set as the first probability. The third gaming state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. The privilege granting means is configured to cause the game state setting means to set the third gaming state as a specific privilege.

  Thereby, when a specific privilege is given, it becomes easy to obtain a specific determination result, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for a specific privilege can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the second game is played by the gaming state setting means when the special benefit is not given by the bonus granting means in the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. Since the state is set, it is possible to suppress the setting from the third gaming state to the disadvantageous first gaming state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the player's game.

  A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on a game ball entering in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, Based on the third variable means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and that the game ball has passed through the passing means. Based on the predetermined determination means for executing the predetermined determination and the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means, the third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position. A gaming machine D5 comprising a third variable control means, wherein the second gaming state has a higher probability of being the predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the third variable means is varied between a first variable position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second variable position where entry is more difficult than the first variable position. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, the predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means, and based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means, the third variable means performs the 23rd variable control. The second variable position is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position by the means. The second gaming state is configured with a higher probability of being a predetermined discrimination result than the first gaming state.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, it becomes easy to execute a predetermined determination, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed more efficiently by the player.

<Characteristic E group> (100% probability change in advantageous state)
The entry means capable of entering a game ball, the discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means result in a specific discrimination result. On the basis of the variable entry means in a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player and a variable entry means capable of entering a game ball during execution of the benefit game. There is a specific entry area in which a game ball placed inside the variable entry means can be entered and a game ball has not entered the specific entry area during execution of the one special game. A first gaming state is set, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set when a gaming ball enters the specific pitching area during execution of the one privilege game. A game state setting means to play and a game for the specific entry area in the one special game An entrance rate setting means capable of setting at least a first entrance rate and a second entrance rate having a higher entrance rate than the first entrance rate as an entrance rate of the ball, the entrance rate The rate setting means has a higher rate of setting the second entry rate when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state than when the bonus game is executed in the first gaming state. A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when winning by a lottery executed based on starting entry, a specific winning opening that is set in an open state in which the ball can enter is provided and specified Some bonuses are granted when a ball enters the winning entrance. Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a specific entry area to which a probability variation state is given when a ball enters the inside of the specific winning opening. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area varies depending on the type of winning (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the ease of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, so when the hit type is known, it shifts to a probability fluctuation state. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability variation state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state advantageous to the player, the ratio of setting the second entry rate becomes high, so the second gaming state continues. While playing, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously expect the game ball to enter the specific entrance area.

  In the gaming machine E1, as the entrance means, at least a first entrance means and a second entrance means different from the first entrance means are provided, and the entrance rate setting means is the second entrance means. When the specific determination result is based on a ball entering the ball means, and when the specific determination result is based on a ball entering the first ball means in the second gaming state The first entry rate is set when the ratio for setting the second entry rate is high and the specific determination result is obtained based on the entry to the first entry means in the first gaming state. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the percentage to be played is high.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the entry means, the ratio of setting the second entry rate is high. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed without worrying about the ball entry means into which the game ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position where the game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and a second variable position where the game ball is difficult to enter compared to the first variable position. A first variable control means for changing the first variable means and the first variable means in accordance with a predetermined first variable pattern during execution of the bonus game, and upstream of the specific entry area, A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means easily enters the specific entry area, and a game ball enters the specific entry area as compared to the first variable state. Second variable control for changing the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable state that is difficult to change and the second variable means according to a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. Means and the execution of the bonus game are started. As a period until the control by the variable control means is started, a period in which the first variable means that is varied according to the first variable pattern is the first variable position, and the first variable that is varied according to the second variable pattern. The first variable period in which the second variable means is less likely to overlap with the first variable state, the period in which the first variable means is in the first variable position, and the second variable means. And a period setting means capable of setting a second period in which the period during which the first variable state is likely to overlap is set by the period setting means as the first entrance rate by the period setting means. The gaming machine E3 is controlled so that the first period is set, and the second period is set by the period setting means as the second entrance rate.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the entry is made by changing only the period from the start of the bonus game until the control by the first variable control means is started. Since the rate can be varied, there is no need to set a complicated variable pattern, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Demonstration control with AT type and special figure 1 in standby)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first acquisition means When the first information is not acquired, the first time measuring means for starting the first time measurement and the execution of the second effect are finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means. In addition, on the basis of the second time measuring means for starting the second time measurement and the fact that the first time measurement has become the first set value, the execution of the first notification mode is started, and the second time measurement is the second set value. Based on the fact, the notification execution means for starting the execution of the second notification mode, the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the continuation Setting means capable of switching and setting the second period to be Gaming machine F1, characterized in that those having.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Such a gaming machine is configured such that the variation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is different and a long variation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the variation period of one of the symbols. There is something.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if it is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the display of both symbols is finished, the player immediately after the long-term change period is executed. When the game ends, there is a problem that the operation of the game is lowered because the next player is in a state in which it is difficult for the next player to play the game (even the screen). The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. In this case, when the first timing is started by the first timing means, the execution of the second effect is finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timing is started by the second timing means. Is done. The notification execution means starts execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first timekeeping has reached the first set value, and based on the fact that the second timekeeping has become the second set value, Execution of the aspect is started. In addition, the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied is set by switching the first period to be ended and the second period to be continued by the setting means.

  Thereby, even if it is in the state where the 2nd production is performed, it becomes possible to continue the 1st information mode which shows that the 1st production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine and can suppress a decrease in the operation of the game. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed by the setting means, it is possible to switch between the first period for ending the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed and the second period to be continued. An appropriate effect according to the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  The configuration of the gaming machine F1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured such that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously, and the second effect is not substantially executed according to the gaming state, It may be used for a gaming machine having a period during which the performance is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued and the second effect is substantially executed. When the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated.

  The gaming machine F1 includes a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and the second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to set the first period or the second period according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means sets the second period. When the gaming state is set, the gaming machine F3 sets the first period.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and sets the first period when the second gaming state is set.

  Thereby, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the gaming state in which the first determination is easily performed, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in the gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed, the second When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the notification executing means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second notification mode that is being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. An effect according to the execution state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the first effect even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. In other words, even when the first effect is being executed by the notification executing means, the second notification mode is executed while preventing the first effect from being hindered.

  Thereby, it can suppress and notify that the 2nd effect is not performed while the 1st effect is performed, inhibiting the 1st effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game whose game situation is easy to understand.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are capable of executing the first effect and the second effect at the same time. A gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are configured to be able to execute the first effect and the second effect at the same time. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the situation of the first effect and the second effect executed simultaneously.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification execution means is capable of simultaneously executing the first notification mode and the second notification mode, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation of the production and the second production.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution unit notifies predetermined information other than information indicating a result of the second effect as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F8 that executes a predetermined notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect is being executed, a predetermined notification mode for notifying predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is executed by the notification execution means as the second notification mode.

  Thereby, when the 1st production is performed, it can control that information which shows the result of the 2nd production performed previously is reported. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect and the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means indicates that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F9 that executes a medium notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are produced. That is, in the case where the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means executes the first effect executing notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player easily understand the effect being executed, and the game situation can be provided in an easily understandable manner.

  Furthermore, according to the case where the configuration of the gaming machine F6 is used, information on the first effect that is actually executed out of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed simultaneously is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, the game situation can be provided to the player more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, a first display area that displays either the first notification mode or the second notification mode that is executed by the notification execution unit, and a second display that displays the other Display means having at least an area, display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, and the display control means includes the setting means When the first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by controlling the display content of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the following effects are produced. That is, the display unit has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution unit is displayed, and a second display region in which the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

  Thereby, the alerting | reporting aspect displayed on a 1st display area can be changed according to a game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player.

<Characteristic G group> (Demo control when the game state is changed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first effect and the second An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the performance is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, the second determination from the first determination. When the determination is easy to be executed and the advantageous state is finished, the variable control means for making the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period. And setting means for setting the second setting when the second setting is not executed for a predetermined second period, and the first setting when the advantageous state is set. Is set based on Display setting means for setting the first display setting in the display means, and setting the second display setting in the display means based on the setting of the second setting when the advantageous state is set; The display setting means sets a specific display setting that is different from the second display setting when the advantageous state ends when the second display setting is performed. A gaming machine G1 characterized by that.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the game state shifts in a state where a specific screen (demo screen) indicating that the variation display of one of the symbols has been completed is displayed, There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.

  For example, in a predetermined gaming state, when the display area for a symbol that is likely to be variably displayed is set larger than the display area for a symbol that is difficult to be variably displayed, the content displayed is increased by the transition of the gaming state. There was a problem that it would be different and provide a player with an incomprehensible game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first The first effect based on the result of the 1 determination is executed in the first effect period by the first effect executing means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second information is acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information, The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect executing means in the second effect period. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In such a case, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, when the advantageous setting is set by the display setting means, the first setting is set on the display means based on the setting of the first setting, and the second setting when the advantageous condition is set. Based on the setting, the second display setting is set in the display means. In addition, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, the specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means, so the second display setting is made. Even in the state, the player can easily know that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first display setting is set such that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is set so that the predetermined second display mode is the A gaming machine G2 which is displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first display setting is set, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display unit, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display unit. The

  Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain easily the execution condition of the 1st determination by a 1st determination means, and the 2nd determination by a 2nd determination means. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the second presentation is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second presentation setting is maintained in a state where the second display setting is maintained. A gaming machine G3, wherein the effect mode is displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

  Thereby, when a 2nd effect is performed in the period when the 2nd display setting is performed, a 2nd effect can be performed, without giving discomfort to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, for example, the configuration of the gaming machine G3 may be provided in a gaming machine in which the second presentation period in which the second presentation is executed is set short. In this case, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is executed, the second effect in which the short second effect period is set can be executed in an easily understandable manner by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second display setting is executed to display a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set on the display means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, by setting the second display setting, a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display unit.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display the information regarding a gaming state to a player using the period when the 2nd production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the advantageous state is set, a determination unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination A gaming machine G5, characterized by having a regulation means for regulating the setting of the second display setting when it is determined that the specific condition is established by the means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the advantageous state is set, the determination means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when the specific condition is determined to be determined, the restricting means This restricts the setting of the second display setting.

  Thereby, since the second display setting is not set, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the second determination is executed, a second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and 1 other than the advantageous state When the normal gaming state is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set higher. A gaming machine G6, characterized in that it has a probability varying means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second determination is performed, the second effect period determining unit determines the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods. Then, when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability varying means, it is longer than the case where the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means. The probability that a period is selected is set high.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute more second determinations than when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game aiming at an advantageous state in which many second determinations are executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

<Characteristic H group> (Securing of result production in AT type)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition The second determination means for executing the second determination, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination. When a specific first effect based on being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the user. In the gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player until the first presentation and the second presentation are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of gaming states, and the game When the advantageous game state is set by the state setting means, the second effect period setting means that makes it easy to set the second effect period short, and when the advantageous game state ends, the first effect and the The first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as the first effect period until the number of times the second effect is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Game machine H1.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine has an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the advantageous state continues for a period of time. Some game results are displayed on the display screen, such as the number of wins generated and the number of winning balls acquired (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). In such a gaming machine, a game result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, so depending on the game situation whether the symbol that is executed first after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol May be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as a variable period in which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may not be displayed depending on the first variable after the advantageous state ends. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time and the player's motivation is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the game is executed from the plurality of gaming states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means and the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second effect period setting means sets the second effect period short. When the advantageous gaming state is finished, a specific first effect period is a first effect period until the number of times the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the decision means That.

  This makes it possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the contents of the effect executed when the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player's motivation is reduced due to the fact that the contents of the performance cannot be grasped.

  In addition, it is good to perform the production | presentation (for example, the number of jackpots performed during the advantageous game state, and the total number of prize balls) which shows the game result in an advantageous game state as an effect performed when the advantageous game state is complete | finished. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result in the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state.

  Further, like the gaming machine H1, the first effect executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous by setting the first effect period to be executed after the advantageous game state is ended as the specific first effect period. It can be executed after the gaming state is over. Thereby, for example, since it is not necessary to set the first effect period to be executed at the end (end stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, the advantageous game state can be smoothly executed by the player. effective.

  In the gaming machine H1, the predetermined number of times is two or more, the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the predetermined number of times is set to two times or more, so even if the first presentation and the second presentation are executed simultaneously, the first presentation is performed. It can be executed using a specific first effect period, and can cause the player to grasp the contents of the effect that is executed when the advantageous gaming state is ended, and the player's There is an effect that a situation in which motivation is reduced can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. A gaming machine H3 characterized by a high percentage of playing.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to set a period longer than the other first effect period only in the specific first effect period set for the predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is ended, the first effect is By setting the first effect period to be executed as a whole longer, there is an effect that the progress of the game is delayed and the player's motivation can be prevented from being lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result are set to be the same. When the second determination means does not determine the specific second determination result in the second determination, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result has a predetermined probability. The bonus game executing means executes a special bonus game to which a bonus below the bonus game is granted when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. And when the 2nd production based on the special 2nd judgment result is performed, the special privilege game in which the privilege below privilege game is given by the privilege game execution means is performed.

  Thereby, the 2nd determination in which a 2nd effect is performed can be advantageous to a player rather than the 1st determination in which a 1st effect is performed. Therefore, the advantageous game state in which the second effect period during which the second effect is executed is easily set to be short can be surely made advantageous to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

  In addition, according to the gaming machine H4, by executing the special privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is configured. However, it is only necessary that the gaming state in which the second performance period is set to be short is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the second determination unit is based on the determination result of the first determination unit. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability, and the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination unit is the second determination unit. You may comprise so that it may become a privilege game with a lower value than the special privilege game (2nd special privilege game) performed based on a determination result.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the advantageous game state is set, the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous game state ends, the second A gaming machine H5, comprising variable control means for varying the state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the determination.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, there are a state where the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination when the advantageous gaming state is set, and a state where the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination when the advantageous gaming state ends. Variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, the second determination can be easily performed by comparing the advantageous gaming state with a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous game state can be changed to a game state more advantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to aim for the advantageous game state can be enhanced.

  Note that, as the variable control means of the gaming machine H4, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production period between the first production period and the second production period is variable, or a structure in which the ease of establishment of the second acquisition condition is varied. Can be considered.

  In the gaming machine H5, the variable control means is configured to variably set a selection ratio so as to vary the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Game machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are produced. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so that the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period is variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Characteristics J group> (At AT type, even if a small hit is made on the one hand, the other fluctuation effect is continued, and a variable effect that matches the bottom of the book after the small hit is executed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. A first effect period determining means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determining means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. Second production period deciding factor determined from multiple production periods And a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when an effect is executed, the bonus game is executed when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the bonus game Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the canceling means for canceling and the temporary stopping means, the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means continues to execute the first effect or the second effect. Means and the first When there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period even when the second effect or the second effect ends, there is provided a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the remaining period A gaming machine J1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. Based on this, there is a second design in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period, and each design can be changed simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the symbol has been won, the variation period of the other symbol that is being displayed is changed. In some cases, the measurement is interrupted, and when the hit game ends, the measurement of the suspended variable period is resumed.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the variable display based on the symbol for which the measurement of the variable period is interrupted during the variable display is stopped based on the measurement of the variable period being interrupted, the player expects. However, there was a problem that the change display that was being watched was suddenly stopped, and this became a cause of impairing the fun of the game. Even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the variable display is continuously displayed, there is an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period). ) Occurs, an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity is executed, and this causes a problem of detracting from the fun of the game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the result of the first determination Based on this, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means and the first effect period determined by the first effect period determination means from the plurality of effect periods. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is released by the release means based on the end of the bonus game. Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the continuation means causes the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means to execute the first effect or the second effect, and the first effect or the second effect. Even when is finished, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specified effect is executed by the specified effect executing means in the remaining period.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the time of the 1st effect period of the 1st effect currently performed by the temporary stop means or the 2nd effect period of the 2nd effect is temporarily stopped, the 1st effect or the 2nd Production can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the effects that the player was watching while expecting, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period by the specific effect executing means. Even if an error occurs between the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing when the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first effect is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the first effect. 2. A gaming machine J2 that is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of second effect periods determined by the effect period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first effect is set in advance in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is a plurality of second effects determined by the second effect period determining means. It is preset in the production period corresponding to the production period.

  Thus, an effect period in which the first effect is executed and an effect period in which the second effect is executed are determined in advance, and the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period. It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing at which the process ends. Therefore, since the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop by the temporary stop unit, the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first effect and the second effect are a result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses. A game machine J3 characterized in that a definite effect mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a definite effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or second effect period elapses is set.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the temporary stop of time measurement by a temporary stop means is not performed, the result of 1st determination or 2nd determination can be shown by performing a 1st effect or a 2nd effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine J3, the specific effect is constituted by at least a part of the determined effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the confirmed effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is finished. However, there is an effect that the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the privilege game execution means is executed based on the fact that the first determination means has determined a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result. A special second effect that is executed when a special first effect is executed or when the second determination means determines that the second result is different from the specific second determination result. A gaming machine J5, which, when executed, executes a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first determination means executes a special first effect that is executed based on the fact that the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result, or is specified by the second determination means. When a special second effect that is executed based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the second determination result is executed, the bonus game executing means makes the player more than the bonus game. An advantageous special game is executed.

  As a result, the player can execute the game while expecting both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the specific effect execution means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that the special performance is executed at least in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the bonus game is being executed by the specific effect executing means, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed at least in the remaining period.

  As a result, when the first effect or the second effect ends, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed when a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when an error occurs to the extent that the specific effect alone is insufficient.

  In addition, as a special effect used for the gaming machine J6, an effect different from the specific effect using a period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. In the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period, the first effect or the second effect ends. To the end of the bonus game, and a specific effect may be executed during the period from the end of the bonus game until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration has an effect that the capacity of effect data can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, a remaining time for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A gaming machine J7, comprising: a period determining unit; and a specific effect mode determining unit that determines an effect mode of the specific effect based on a result of determination by the remaining period determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the following effects are produced. That is, the remaining period length from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period is determined by the remaining period determination means, and is specified based on the determination result. The effect mode of the effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means.

  Thereby, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player and enhance the effect.

  Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining effect is so short that the player has difficulty grasping the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including a mode for notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. Thus, for a player who cannot grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect is obtained. Thus, by notifying that the effect mode of the first effect or the second effect is extended, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the first effect or the second effect does not end due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. There is an effect that can be.

  Further, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully understand the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect It is good to set it as the production aspect which can display information other than (information which shows the determination result of a determination means). Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  In the gaming machine J7, when the remaining effect determining unit determines that the remaining period is less than a predetermined period, the benefit effect determining unit determines at least one of the determined effect modes as the specified effect effect mode. A gaming machine J8 that determines a specific performance mode configured by sections.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode configured by at least a part of the confirmed effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect is the benefit effect mode determining means. Determined by.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine J7 or J8, when the remaining period determining unit determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining unit determines the first effect or A gaming machine J9 that determines a specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J7 or J8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode includes information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege effect mode determining means.

  Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

<Feature K group> (ST number display control)
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times when the predetermined condition is satisfied; a number update means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; The remaining number determining means for determining the remaining number of times of the specific number, the number notifying means for notifying the number of times less than the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining means, and the number of times notified by the number notifying means being increased. A gaming machine K1 comprising privilege notification execution means capable of executing privilege notification based on a predetermined rule and rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that displays the number of remaining times on a display screen (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, so that when the remaining number of times that the advantageous state is set is reduced, the player's motivation decreases. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine K1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of games in which the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of specific times is determined by the remaining number determining unit, and the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining unit is notified by the number notifying unit. The privilege notification for increasing the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

  This makes it possible to notify the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed. Therefore, even if the notified number of times decreases, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific game is continuously executed, and the player's motivation is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  Furthermore, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is determined to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can execute the game while having a moderate sense of security.

  Moreover, since the rule by which privilege alert | report is performed can be switched, it becomes possible to increase the frequency | count notified by the frequency notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  The gaming machine K1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit based on an operation on the operation unit that can be operated by the player.

  Therefore, the player can switch the predetermined rule according to his / her preference, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the lottery result. It is configured to be switchable between a first rule and a second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the fact that the number of times notified by the number notification means has become a predetermined number or less. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, each time the number of games is updated by the rule switching means, a determination is made as to whether or not the privilege notification is executed, and the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result, and the number notification means. Based on the fact that the number of times of notification is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, it is configured to be switchable to the second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification.

  Thereby, since privilege alert | report can be performed with the rule from which a taste differs, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means and the remaining number is not less than a predetermined number. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit by the privilege notification execution unit, the bonus notification is executed if the remaining number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

  Thereby, privilege alert | report can be performed in the timing at which a predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In the gaming machine K4, the privilege notification execution means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times within the range of the remaining number of times is increased among a preset upper limit number of times. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the privilege notification indicating that the possible number of times within the range of the remaining number of times within a preset upper limit number is increased is executed by the privilege notification execution means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic L group> (Decision is determined at the time of winning the Attacker)
A privilege game that executes a privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games based on a determination device that executes determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a determination result by the determination device is a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed by the execution means and the bonus game execution means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. Variable entry means that is variable until it is determined, condition determination means that determines whether the execution condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the variable entry means, and determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the condition determination means An effect executing means capable of executing an effect in the case of being performed, and a ratio variable means for variably setting a ratio at which the execution condition is established based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means; Have Gaming machine L1, which is a shall.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. As described above, in a gaming machine, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning opening is opened, and a game ball is notified to the specific winning opening (for example, JP-A-2014-138735). . In addition, a plurality of winning games having different opening patterns of the specific winning opening are set, and depending on the executed winning game, the number of game balls that can be won at the specific winning opening is different. On the other hand, by making it difficult to understand which winning game is being executed, there are those that improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to predict the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, the player can easily grasp that a game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening, it is only necessary to grasp the content of the notification executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening. There was a problem that the player could easily grasp the type of game.

  Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the gaming state after the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game that is executed, it is difficult to understand the type of winning game that is executed. However, when such a gaming machine is used, if a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, while expecting a gaming state to shift to after the winning game ends There is a problem in that the player cannot play a winning game and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine L1, determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and one of the different award games is selected based on the determination result being a specific determination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state by the variable pitching means. Variable until The execution of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the game ball having entered the variable entry means, and when the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Is done. Then, based on the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

  Thereby, based on the kind of privilege game, the ratio by which an effect is performed based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  The gaming machine L1 has payout means for paying a player a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine L2 that is set based on the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as prize balls, and the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means An effect is set based on the number.

  As a result, the effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can easily grasp that the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is not aware that a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed, and to execute an effect that is easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the bonus game executing means includes a first bonus game in which a game ball can easily enter the variable pitching means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. 2 bonus games can be executed at least, and when the first privilege game is executed, the rate variable means sets the rate lower than when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the first privilege game in which the game ball can easily enter the entrance means by the privilege game execution means, and the second privilege game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privilege game. And / or is executed. Then, when the first privilege game is executed by the rate variable means, the rate at which the execution condition is established is set lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, when the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game in which the ease of the entrance to a ball entry means differs are performed, it is possible to approximate the number of times of the performance performed by the performance execution means. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine L2 is used, regardless of the type of the privilege game execution means, the game execution ball that has first entered the ball entry means is always (with high probability) by the effect execution means. It is advisable to produce the performance. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and to provide an effect in which the player cannot easily grasp the type of the privilege game being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the effect is to display a display form on the display means as at least one of the effect forms.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, since the display mode is displayed on the display unit as at least one of the production modes, the player can change the content displayed on the display unit. Based on this, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first bonus game is set such that the period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second bonus game. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the following effects are produced. That is, by the first privilege game, a period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L5, the first privilege game is set such that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set larger than that in the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the first privilege game can be changed to the second state is set to be larger than that in the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  The second rate variable means according to any one of claims L1 to L6, wherein the second rate variable means is configured to variably set the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means. A gaming machine L7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, the second ratio variable means variably sets the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the ratio at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the production more complicatedly.

  In the gaming machine L7, the privilege game execution means includes a first privilege game in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance means, and a second privilege game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privilege game. And the second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be established as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. L8.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7, the following effects are produced. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means and the second privilege game in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. Is executed. The second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases.

  Thereby, it is possible to approximate the number of effects executed by the effect executing means when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the effect execution means pays out the divided display mode indicating the number of the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect divided into a plurality of the payout means. A gaming machine L9, which is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the following effects are produced. In other words, the division display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as an effect by the effect execution means is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display a some division | segmentation display aspect by one production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Moreover, even if it is a game machine which has a privilege game from which the number of prize balls differs, there exists an effect that the same effect can be show | played by performing an effect using a division | segmentation display mode.

<Feature M group> (The number of times of addition can be changed by PUSH production)
Among privilege information determining means for determining benefit information advantageous to a player, storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means, and at least the privilege information stored in the storage means A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to a player corresponding to a part, and when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, the privilege corresponds to privilege information stored in the storage unit Benefit information update means for updating to benefit information reduced from the benefits, display means for displaying identification information based on less benefit information than the benefit information stored in the storage means, and display on the display means When the privilege information stored in the storage means is determined to be the upper limit, the determination means for determining the upper limit, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated The setting means for changing and setting the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing, the variable setting means for changing the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition, and the operation means are operated. Based on that, the privilege information set by the setting means is acquired, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated and updated to the corresponding identification information. A gaming machine M1 characterized by comprising: means.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and can execute an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. (For example, JP 2006-263523 A). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect for informing the result of the predetermined winning lottery. Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine M1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determination means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determination unit is stored in the storage unit, and a privilege advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored privilege information is provided by the privilege grant unit. When a privilege is granted by the privilege grant means, the privilege information update means updates the privilege information to privilege information reduced from the benefits corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on less privilege information than privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information displayed on the display means is determined by the determining means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the operation means is operated by the player, privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied based on the specific condition by the variable setting means. The privilege information set by the setting device is acquired based on the operation of the operation device, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display device is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display update device. .

  Thereby, it becomes possible to update privilege information based on the operation means being operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, a privilege for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a determination result that is determined based on the determination condition and a determination result by the determination device being a specific determination result. A game execution means, and the privilege grant means, a high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as the specific determination result by the determination means a predetermined number of times, until the determination by the determination means is executed. Each time the determination is executed, the gaming machine M2 is continuously set as the privilege.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result is executed by the privilege game execution means. Each time the determination is performed until the determination is performed by the privilege granting unit a predetermined number of times, the determination is made as a privilege. It is set continuously.

  As a result, the high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is continuously set until the determination is executed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so the high probability state is set. That the player can easily grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine M2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times to confirm and notify that the high probability state is continued, the gaming machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the number of times of confirmation and notification that the high probability state is continued is indicated by the identification information.

  Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the frequency | count that it is decided that a high probability state is continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the suggestion display control means for displaying the suggestion display mode indicating the timing of operating the operation means on the display means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means A suggestion display mode determining unit that determines the timing based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestion display mode that suggests the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control unit is determined based on the timing of privilege information set in the setting unit by the suggestion display mode determination unit.

  Thereby, since privilege information is provided by operating an operation means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on a display means, there exists an effect that an effect which is easy to understand for a player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine M4, the suggestion display mode includes a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be determined by the variable display mode. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that is displayed at least.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode capable of discriminating the privilege information set in the setting means is displayed by the variable display mode.

  Thereby, since the privilege information provided by the display content displayed as a variable display mode can be discriminated, it is possible to aim the timing at which the player operates the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature N group> (Suppress the occurrence frequency of small hits)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fact that the discriminating condition is satisfied; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A determination condition storage unit capable of storing a plurality of determination conditions; and a suppression unit that suppresses a frequency at which the determination is performed by the determination unit; and the suppression unit stores the determination condition in the determination condition storage unit The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of the determined determination conditions is less than the predetermined number.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls at the start winning opening, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. There is a thing which reports the result of. Some of these gaming machines are configured so as to be able to hold a lottery that is executed based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening a plurality of times (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). .

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when the number of game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening is high, the number of game balls to be paid out is larger than that when the game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening are less frequent. The lottery will be paid out and many lotteries will be executed, and the benefits received by the player will vary greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game ball at the starting prize opening. There was a problem that the operation of a less frequently used gaming machine would decrease. In addition, in order for the player to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game ball at the start winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and to provide a fair gaming machine to the player who executes the game. There was a problem that I could not. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the player is given by the privilege grant means based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. A privilege is given to. A plurality of determination conditions are established by the determination condition storage means. The frequency at which discrimination is performed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppression means makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which discrimination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage unit is greater than or equal to the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine N1, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, and the suppression means has a longer dynamic display than the dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine N2 that suppresses the frequency at which the determination is performed by setting a period.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting unit, the frequency of determination by the suppression unit is suppressed.

  Accordingly, since the frequency of determination is suppressed by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency of determination can be surely suppressed, which is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the gaming machine can be increased.

  In the gaming machine N2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the second determination condition is easily established when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. .

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. And a 2nd discrimination | determination condition becomes easy to be satisfied when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the privilege which makes a 2nd discrimination | determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine N2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second A second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means, whereby the discrimination condition is easily established. Machine N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit, the determination condition is easily established.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd privilege which makes a determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the suppression means makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the determination is executed when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the frequency at which the determination is performed is easily suppressed by the suppression unit.

  Thereby, when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means, it becomes possible to suppress the frequency which discrimination | determination is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where many privileges are granted in a short period of time.

  In any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5, the suppression unit has a first number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number in which the number of the determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage unit is less than the predetermined number. 2. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that, in the case of a predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is performed is easily suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N2 to N4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is executed by the suppression means is reduced. It becomes easy to be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the determination is executed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number, and is the second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. The frequency at which discrimination is performed can be suppressed when a game is intentionally continued in a state where the number of discriminating conditions stored is small, and the player who executes the game can be suppressed. There is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Characteristic O group> (Varies the range of the hold notice)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, and stored in the information storage means Based on the information, a determination means for executing determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means, based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior determination means capable of executing prior determination before the determination condition is satisfied, and the information An identification symbol display control means for displaying on the display means an identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information whose number is stored in the storage means, and the information before being determined by the determination means Of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of prior discrimination by the prior discrimination means, and the variable that is varied by the variable means. A game machine O1 having a determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and the holding symbols corresponding to the number of the holding memories are displayed, and the displayed holding symbols are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect that can be notified in advance of information related to the lottery that is used (for example, JP 2009-297071 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable display is started It was possible to raise the player's expectation.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the hold symbols that are not subject to the hold notice, which reduces the game motivation. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine O1, information is acquired by the information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage unit. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the determination means executes the determination when the determination condition is satisfied and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior discrimination is executed by the prior discrimination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Identification symbols corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each piece of information are displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. With respect to the information before being determined by the determination means, the identification symbol is varied by the variable means based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols that are variable by the variable means is determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols varied by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it can suppress that a variable means is performed with respect to all the identification symbols displayed on a display means, it can suppress that a player's game motivation falls.

  In the gaming machine O1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, the variable unit is configured to transmit the information corresponding to the identification symbol. The game machine O2 is characterized in that it changes to a mode in which information based on the result of the prior discrimination is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means until a condition for determining the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, information based on the result of prior determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol Is displayed.

  This makes it possible for the player to watch the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine O1 or O2 has specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol for a specific period by using the identification symbol variable by the variable means. A gaming machine O3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are produced. That is, using the identification symbol varied by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed on the display means for a specific period by the specific display control means.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect form using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, when the identification means is changed by the operating means that can be operated by the player and the variable means, the specific effect is set based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine O4 characterized by having a specific performance execution means.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the specific effect is set by the specific effect executing means based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production | presentation aspect can be performed during a specific period using the identification symbol varied by the variable means.

  In the gaming machine O4, when it is determined that the specific determination result is determined by the prior determination means, the number of the identification symbols that are varied by the variable means more than when it is determined that it is other than the specific determination result A game machine O5 having variable number setting means for setting a large number.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the number of identification symbols that can be varied by the variable means is set more by the variable number setting means when it is determined that the specific determination result is other than the specific determination result by the prior determination means. The

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the frequency in which an identification symbol is displayed according to a game state can be changed, and it can raise production effects.

<Characteristic P group> (specific effect is executed when the remaining number of STs is less than a predetermined value and a big hit is made)
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the above, and a specification that is more likely to be established as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means Based on the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied and the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming state changing means for changing to a gaming state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect that suggests the ease of establishment of the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The comparison means comparing the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the actual easiness of establishment of the specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result In this case, the gaming machine P1 includes a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that does not notify the player of the number of times played (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional game machine, the number of times that the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, so that if the player wins during the execution of the specific game, the remaining number of the specific game cannot be grasped. There was a problem that the player could not be fully satisfied with the results. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is a bonus game. It is executed by execution means. A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. One game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the specific condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing unit based on the determination that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining unit. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is established is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. If the comparison means compares the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the easiness of establishment of the actual specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, the predetermined condition The specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of.

  As a result, when the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect is easily established and the actual condition is easily established, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, there is an effect that the player can grasp the current state of the second gaming state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, by configuring so that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the privilege game is executed. It becomes like this. Therefore, there is an effect that satisfaction can be given to the player when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state.

  In the gaming machine P1, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the gaming machine P1 has a specific condition setting unit that sets a predetermined number of execution times by the determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied A gaming machine P2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the specific condition setting unit sets a predetermined number of executions by the determination unit that will satisfy the specific condition.

  Thereby, since the specific condition can be set based on the number of executions of the determination means, the number of times that the second gaming state is set can be preset. Therefore, the game can be performed while making the player aware of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, the actual specific effect is easily established based on the establishment of the effect condition. A gaming machine P3 characterized by having variable effect means for changing to a suggestion effect close to.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, based on the establishment of the effect condition, the suggestion effect being executed by the variable effect means is close to the ease with which the actual specific effect is established. It is variable for production.

  Thereby, the number of times indicating that the second gaming state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine P3, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the remaining number of determinations by the determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect unit indicates the suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining determination number. A gaming machine P4, which is variable.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of remaining determinations is suggested by the determination means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestion effect, and is changed to the suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations by the variable effect means.

  As a result, the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations can be suggested, so that the player can have a sense of tension.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, the game machine has means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Characteristic gaming machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

  Thereby, an effect different from the specific effect is executed, so that the player can grasp that the second privilege game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Q group> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol sequence)
Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information sequences composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, with the display means, A game comprising privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the display execution means. In the machine, when a predetermined condition is established, the stop display is performed based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence. The identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of identification information displayed is stopped and displayed, and the new identification information string display means by the identification information string display means. When the combination of the identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information that is stopped and the new identification information string is stopped and displayed based on the display of the column, A gaming machine Q1 having execution means for executing the bonus game by the bonus game executing means.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are cases in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed, and when each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, JP, 10-265, A). In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of being in a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a problem that lost interest. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the dynamic display execution means is executed by the display means. Based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the dynamic display execution means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the combination of identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed identification A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the fact that a new identification information sequence is displayed by the identification information sequence display means, a combination of identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information sequence Is stopped and displayed, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means by the executing means.

  As a result, a new identification information sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been stopped once is stopped and displayed, so that the player has an unexpected effect. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means is configured to dynamically display a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information strings by the dynamic display execution means. Is a game machine Q2 that is dynamically displayed in different directions.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification symbol sequence combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information sequences is dynamically changed in a direction different from the direction dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. Is displayed.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display direction of a symbol sequence can be changed in a different direction, an unexpected effect can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification symbol sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display unit in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has changed, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string Non-display setting for setting at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means to be hidden when the new identification information string is displayed by the display means A gaming machine Q4 having means.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays a new identification information string. In such a case, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to non-display by the non-display setting unit.

  As a result, it is possible to dynamically display a new identification information sequence without changing the area for displaying the identification information sequence. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q4, display data for displaying the new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and the identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means The display data to be displayed is set at the same opportunity, and is determined to determine display data to be displayed among the set display data as an area to be set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine Q5 having means.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q4, the following effects are produced. That is, display data for displaying a new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and display data for displaying an identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, Of the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined by the determining means as the area set at the same opportunity and set as the display area of the display means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

<Characteristic R group> (Advantageous degree of advantage can be changed by transition opportunity)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, benefit game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discrimination result, and the discriminating means When the determination result is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result, a small privilege game execution unit that executes a small privilege game different from the privilege game, and the privilege game execution unit executes the small privilege game First gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the small privilege game is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the award game is ended; When the first game state is set by the first game state setting means and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to the first game state without triggering the end of the privilege game state. A second gaming state setting means that can be set to be changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state, and when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, a first advantageous state is set, A gaming machine R1 comprising: advantageous state setting means for setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning prize is a winning, a winning state advantageous to a player is given. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is increased as a bonus after winning. Furthermore, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of lotteries in the probability variation state, and if it does not hit before reaching the predetermined upper limit number of lotteries, In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is one that shifts to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. When winning in this special state, the game value given to the player is greater than winning in the probable state, so even if the probable state ends before winning, the player's motivation for the game is motivated It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the winning lottery probability is a normal probability in a special state set after the probability variation state is over, so that it may be missed over a relatively large number of lottery times. Increases nature. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, the second gaming state can be set by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means, and the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. Different advantageous states are set depending on the case and the case where the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

  Thereby, even if it does not become a privilege game, since it can shift to the 2nd gaming state, and since the advantageous condition in the 2nd gaming state can be changed further by the transition opportunity to the 2nd gaming state, There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the two-game state.

  In the gaming machine R1, dynamic display executing means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means dynamically after a predetermined period of time, and stopping the display, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods, and the advantageous state setting means includes the dynamic state setting means. The first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the display period group storage means, and a second dynamic different from the first dynamic display period group The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using a display period group is set.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination results of the discrimination means are stored in the dynamic display period group storage means. Then, the dynamic display period is set by the advantageous state setting means using different dynamic display period groups in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

  Thereby, different dynamic display periods can be set in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and as a result, the interval at which the small privilege game is executed can be adjusted. Can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that in the first dynamic display period group, a longer dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period group is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first dynamic display period group is configured to easily set a dynamic display period longer than the second dynamic display period group. Thereby, the 2nd advantageous state using a 2nd dynamic display period group can make it easy to shorten the space | interval by which a small privilege game is performed rather than the 1st advantageous state using a 1st dynamic display period group. , It can be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the gaming machine R2 or R3 includes a first entrance means that allows a game ball to enter, and a second entrance means that is different from the first entrance means, and the discrimination means includes the first entrance means. The first discrimination is executed based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the second discrimination is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The display executing means includes a first dynamic display for indicating first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination, and a second dynamic display for indicating second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination. The small privilege game executing means is configured to execute the small privilege game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. Characteristic gaming machine R4.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the second determination are simultaneously displayed. When the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result, the small privilege game is executed by the small privilege game executing means.

  Thus, by making the dynamic display period of the first dynamic display different from the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display, there is a difference between the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the number of executions of the second determination that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine R4, the second advantageous state is a dynamic display shorter than the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine R5 characterized in that a period is set.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result is shorter in the state where the second advantageous state is set than in the state where the first advantageous state is set The display period is set. Therefore, the second advantageous state can be changed to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second advantageous state is the first gaming state. As the first dynamic display for indicating that the determination result is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended among the specific determination results. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that a dynamic display period longer than that in the first advantageous state is set.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R4 or R5, the following items are played. That is, in the second advantageous state, when the determination result of the first determination means is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set among the specific determination results, the first dynamic display is more dynamic than the first advantageous state. The display period is set longer. Therefore, in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the third gaming state can be made difficult to be set according to the determination result of the first determination, compared to the case where the first advantageous state is set. The state can be played for a longer time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed simultaneously, the second dynamic display ends first, and the specific determination result When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the gaming machine R7 includes an ending unit for forcibly ending the execution of the first dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the case where the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed simultaneously, when the operation 2 dynamic display for indicating a specific determination result is finished and the second identification information is displayed, The first dynamic display being executed is forcibly terminated by the termination means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the special game and play the game.

  In the gaming machine R7, when the end means forcibly ends the execution of the first dynamic display, the identification information variable for displaying first identification information indicating a determination result different from the determination result of the first determination A gaming machine R8 characterized by comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the execution of the first dynamic display is forcibly ended by the ending means, the first identification information indicating the determination result different from the determination result of the first determination is displayed by the identification information variable means. It is possible to notify the player that the 1 dynamic display has been forcibly terminated without any sense of incongruity, and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine R8, the identification information variable means displays identification information for indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display. Characteristic gaming machine R9.

  According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R8, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information variable means displays identification information for indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In any one of the gaming machines R7 to R9, the second advantageous state is the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the specific determination result. A gaming machine R10 characterized in that a shorter dynamic display period is set.

  According to the gaming machine R10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R7 to R9, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period in the second advantageous state is shorter than that in the first advantageous state. Therefore, the second advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (Multiple advantages are set for small hit RUSH)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. A gaming state setting capable of setting a privilege gaming execution means, at least a first gaming state, and a second gaming state in which the small gaming is easier to execute than the first gaming state. When the second gaming state is set, at least one of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state is set. A gaming machine S1 comprising a possible advantageous state setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, when the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed, the advantageous state of the second gaming state is set. The advantageous state setting means sets either the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state.

  Therefore, the advantageous state during the second gaming state can be varied, and when the second gaming state is set, the game can be performed while expecting which advantageous state is set. There is an effect that the interest of the can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, an effect period setting in which a first effect period that is an effect period of the first effect and a second effect period that is an effect period of the second effect that are executed by the effect executing means can be set. And the production period setting means is configured to easily set a production period shorter than the first production period as the second production period during the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the period during which the second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed can be made shorter than the period during which the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed, The second determination can be easily performed. Thereby, since the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination is easily executed, there is an effect that the second game state can be changed to a game state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the bonus game is completed by the bonus game executing means. A game state setting means and a second game state setting means for setting the second game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the first game state is set. A gaming machine S3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set by the first gaming state setting means when the bonus game is ended, and the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means. In the state, it is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  Therefore, since the second gaming state advantageous to the player can be set at various timings, there is an effect that the player can be expected to continuously shift to the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine S3, the advantageous state setting means sets the second advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. S4.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second game state is set by the first game state setting means, the second advantageous state is set.

  Therefore, since the second gaming state of the second advantageous state is set after the bonus game is completed, it is possible to continuously provide a game advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines S2 to S4, there is provided an effect period group storage means for storing a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as the effect period set by the effect period setting means. The advantageous state setting means includes the first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first effect period group stored in the effect period group storage means, the first effect period group, The game machine S5 is characterized by setting the second advantageous state in which the production period is set using different second production period groups.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S2 to S4, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as effect periods are stored in the effect period group storage means, and different effect period groups are used in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state by the advantageous state setting means. The production period is set.

  Thereby, it is possible to set different performance periods in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and thus it is possible to adjust the interval at which the small privilege game is executed, and to vary the player's degree of advantage. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between advantages and disadvantages during the small hit RUSH period)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. Game state setting capable of setting a privilege game executing means, at least a first game state, and a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state. A second gaming state period in which the second gaming state is set can be varied between a first advantageous period and a second advantageous period that is more advantageous than the first advantageous period. A gaming machine T1 comprising a settable advantageous period setting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the advantageous degree during the period in which the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is variable by the advantageous period setting means. Is done.

  Therefore, the advantageous state during the second gaming state period can be varied, and the game can be performed with the expectation that a more advantageous advantageous state will be set after the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T1, an effect period setting in which a first effect period that is an effect period of the first effect and a second effect period that is an effect period of the second effect that are executed by the effect executing means can be set. And the production period setting means easily sets a production period shorter than the first production period as the second production period during the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed during the second effect period in which the second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the second determination easier to execute than the first determination. Thereby, since the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination is easily executed, there is an effect that the second game state can be changed to a game state advantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine T2 includes a production period group storage unit that stores a plurality of production period groups having a plurality of production periods that can be set as the production period set by the production period setting unit, and the production period A gaming machine T3 comprising order defining means for defining an order of referring to the plurality of effect period groups stored in the group storage means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are produced. That is, the production period group referred to by the order defining means is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine T3, the order defining means defines an order in which at least the first effect period group in which the first effect period can be set and the second effect period group in which the second effect period can be set. A gaming machine T4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the order in which the first effect period and the second effect period are set is defined by the order defining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous state of the second gaming state can be properly managed.

<Feature U group> (The period in which the small hit RUSH is executed is indefinite)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means; The second execution based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means can be performed simultaneously with each of the execution execution means, and a specific second for indicating that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a specific second effect is executed to indicate that one effect or the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result; , At least the result of the second determination is that the specific A small bonus game that is advantageous to a player who is different from the bonus game when a predetermined second effect for indicating a predetermined second judgment result different from the two judgment results is executed. Game state setting capable of setting a privilege game executing means, at least a first game state, and a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state. And a transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, wherein the gaming state setting means includes the transition condition determination A gaming machine T1 that sets the second gaming state when the means determines that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol on which a variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is apt to be displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be changed, and can provide various games to the player. However, since the degree of advantage for the player in one game state, for example, a game state in which the second pattern is likely to be changed, cannot be changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied by the transition condition determination means in a state where the first gaming state is set. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  Therefore, since the gaming state can be changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for setting the second gaming state. This has the effect of improving the fun of the game.

  The gaming machine T1 includes a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as the predetermined transition condition. Machine T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the transition condition setting means sets the first transition condition and the second transition condition as the predetermined transition conditions. Therefore, since the second gaming state is set when any one of the plurality of transition conditions is satisfied, the player is continuously expected to have the second gaming state set. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine T2 has an end condition setting means for setting an end condition for the first gaming state, and the end condition set by the end condition setting means is used as the first transition condition. A gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, the first transition condition is satisfied when the end condition of the first gaming state is satisfied, so that the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed smoothly, There is an effect that an uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine T3, when the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit is executed, an end determination unit determines whether to end the first gaming state. The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the termination condition setting means sets the termination condition to determine that the first gaming state is terminated by the termination determination means.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit is executed, it is determined by the end determination unit whether the first gaming state is to be ended. Then, the end condition setting means determines that the end determination means determines to end the first gaming state as the end condition.

  Thereby, since it is determined based on the determination result of the end determination means whether or not the first gaming state is ended, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the second gaming state is set, There is an effect that it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation for setting the second game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the second transition condition set by the transition condition setting means is the number of executions in which the first determination is executed in a state where the first gaming state is set, When the total number of times obtained by adding the number of executions for which the second determination is executed reaches a predetermined number, or one of the number of executions for which the first determination is executed and the number of executions for which the second determination is executed The gaming machine T5, which is established when the number of executions reaches a specific number less than the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the following effects are produced. In other words, since there are a plurality of established conditions based on the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination, it is possible for the player to select a game for establishing the second transition condition. , There is an effect that can be actively participate in the game.

  Each gaming machine is a slot machine, which is a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening becomes a specific lottery result. is there. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of bonuses given to players as winning states. Thereby, when it was in a hit state, the interest of the player was improved by expecting a type to which more benefits are given (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-320110 A).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a privilege to be given according to the type of winning is determined, there is a case where the player's motivation may be reduced when the winning type has few benefits. there were. That is, there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. Special game execution means for executing an advantageous special game, and a specific game for executing a specific game different from the special game when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means and the first gaming state setting means, the end of the bonus game is terminated. The second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means that can be set by changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without using the machine, and the first gaming state setting means. An advantageous state setting means for setting a first advantageous state when the second advantageous state is set, and setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means; , Are provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination unit is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed. Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; And the advantageous state setting means sets the dynamic display period using the first dynamic display period group stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, and The second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set by using a second dynamic display period group different from the first dynamic display period group.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, comprising a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a second entry means different from the first entry means. The determining means executes a first determination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and performs a first determination based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. The dynamic display executing means corresponds to the first dynamic display for indicating the first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination and the result of the second determination. The second dynamic display for indicating the second identification information can be displayed simultaneously, and the specific game executing means is configured to display the second determination information when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. A specific game is executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the second advantageous state is the second action for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. A dynamic display period shorter than the first advantageous state is set as the target display.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 or 4, wherein the first gaming state setting means has a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The second advantageous state is set such that the third gaming state is set as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended, among the judgment results of the first discrimination being the specific discrimination result. A dynamic display period longer than that of the first advantageous state is set as the first dynamic display for indicating the determination result.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. Bonus game execution means for executing the game, and specific game execution means for executing a specific game different from the bonus game when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result; At least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state are set as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means and the first gaming state setting means, the end of the bonus game is not triggered. A second gaming state setting means that can be set by changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state; and when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, Advantageous state setting means for setting one advantageous state and setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means. It is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display executing means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means after the dynamic display for a predetermined period of time, and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as periods, and the advantageous state setting means includes the dynamic display period group The first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the storage means, and a second dynamic display period group different from the first dynamic display period group And setting the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the discrimination means has a game ball in the first ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, and the second determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. A first dynamic display for indicating the first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination and a second dynamic display for indicating the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination are simultaneously performed. The specific game executing means executes the specific game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect can be obtained. That is, in the second advantageous state, a dynamic display period shorter than the first advantageous state is set as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. It is what is done.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 or 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second advantageous state is determined by the determination of the first determination. The first advantageous display as the first dynamic display for indicating that the result is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended among the specific determination results. A dynamic display period longer than the state is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S217 Part of determining means S218 Bonus game executing means S305 Part of determining means S1211 Game state setting means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result;
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game different from the privilege game when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result;
At least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state are set as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. Possible first gaming state setting means;
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the first gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state without triggering the end of the privilege game. Second game state setting means that can be set to be changed to the second game state;
The first advantageous state is set when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, and the first advantageous state is set when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means. A gaming machine comprising: advantageous state setting means for setting a second advantageous state different from the state. Dynamic display executing means for stopping display after dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means for a predetermined period;
Dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; Have
The advantageous state setting means includes the first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, and the first dynamic state 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set is set using a second dynamic display period group different from the display period group. A first entry means capable of entering a game ball;
Second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means,
The discrimination means performs a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and performs a second discrimination based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Is to execute,
The dynamic display executing means includes a first dynamic display for indicating first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination and a second identification information for indicating second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination. 2 dynamic displays can be displayed simultaneously,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the specific game executing means executes the specific game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result.   In the second advantageous state, a dynamic display period shorter than the first advantageous state is set as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is a thing. The first gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The second advantageous state indicates that the determination result of the first determination is a determination result in which the third gaming state is set as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended among the specific determination results. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein a dynamic display period longer than the first advantageous state is set as the first dynamic display for the purpose.

Images